manualshive.com logo in svg

Keysight E6640A, Measurement Applications User & Programmer Reference

Share
Download
Keysight E6640A Measurement Applications User & Programmer Reference Download Page 1973

12  Code Domain Measurement

View/Display

I/Q Symbol Polar Vector window

Marker Operation

No

Corresponding Trace

IQ Corrected Measured Trace (n=8) Note 1

Note 1:

When I/Q Branch is either I(-BPSK) or Q(-BPSK):

Symbol Vector is independent between I and Q each other.

When I/Q Branch is IQC(-Combined)

Symbol vector is combined between I and Q.

Metrics window

Name

Corresponding Results

Explanation

Code Number

NA

CX(Y) N ksps

X: OVSF level (2 … 9) 2: 960ksps … 9:7.5ksps

Y: OVSF code number (0 … 2x–1)

N: 7.5, 15, 30 …, 960 ksps

RMS EVM

n=1 1st

RMS symbol EVM

nn.nn % rms

Pk EVM

n=1 2nd

Peak symbol EVM

nn.nn % pk

Magnitude Error

n=1 3rd

Symbol magnitude error

nn.nn % rms

Phase Error

n=1 4th

Symbol phase error

nn.nn °rms

Total Power

n=1 5th

Total power

-nn.nn dBm

Channel Power

n=1 6th

Channel Power

-nn.nn dBc

tHS-DPCCH

n=1 7th

tHS-DPCCH

nnn

Composite Symbol Boundary

Turns the composite code channel display function on or off.

The Composite Symbol Boundary for Power Bar Graph and CDE Graph functions are coupled to each other.

W-CDMA & HSPA Measurement Applications Reference

1973

Summary of Contents for E6640A

Page 1: ... provides documentation for the following products E6640A EXM Wireless Test Set V9073B W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications User s Programmer s Reference Option 1FP W CDMA Option 2 FP HSPA Keysight Wireless Test Set ...

Page 2: ...er a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license Restricted Rights Legend If software is for use in the performance of a U S Government prime contract or subcontract Software is delivered and licensed as Commercial computer software as defined in DFAR 252 227 7014 June 1995 or as a commercial item as defined in FAR 2 101 a or as Restricted computer software ...

Page 3: ...k 91 PC Keyboard 93 Instrument Security Memory Volatility 96 2 About the W CDMA Measurement Application 97 What Does the W CDMA Application Do 98 3 Programming the Test Set 99 What Programming Information is Available 100 List of SCPI Commands 101 STATus Subsystem 139 Detailed Description 139 What Are Status Registers 139 What Are Status Register SCPI Commands 140 How to Use the Status Registers 1...

Page 4: ...ery 158 Questionable Calibration Skipped Negative Transition 159 Questionable Calibration Skipped Positive Transition 159 Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Register 159 Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Condition 160 Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Enable 160 Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Event Query 160 Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Negative Trans...

Page 5: ...d Event Query 172 Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Negative Transition 172 Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Positive Transition 173 Questionable Power Register 173 Questionable Power Condition 173 Questionable Power Enable 174 Questionable Power Event Query 174 Questionable Power Negative Transition 175 Questionable Power Positive Transition 175 Questionable Temperature Register 175 Question...

Page 6: ...store Input Output Defaults 199 Data Source 199 Inputs 200 Capture Buffer 200 Current Meas Capture Buffer 200 Corrections 201 Select Correction 202 Correction On Off 202 Properties 203 Select Correction 203 Antenna Unit 203 Frequency Interpolation 206 Description 208 Comment 208 RF Port 208 Edit 211 Navigate 212 Frequency 213 Amplitude 213 Insert Point Below 213 Delete Point 213 Delete Correction ...

Page 7: ...arity 223 Off 223 Sweeping HSWP 224 Measuring 224 Main Trigger 224 Gate Trigger 224 Gate 225 Odd Even Trace Point 225 Trig Out 225 Off 226 Source Marker 1 226 Source Marker 2 226 Source Marker 3 226 Source Marker 4 227 Analog Out 227 More Information 227 Auto 228 Off 228 LISN Control 228 V network Remote Command Only 228 Phase Remote Command Only 229 150 kHz Highpass Remote Command Only 229 Protec...

Page 8: ...nt Application Revision 240 Current Application Options 241 Application Identification Catalog Remote Commands Only 241 Application Catalog Number of Entries 241 Application Catalog Model Numbers 242 Application Catalog Revision 242 Application Catalog Options 242 Detailed List of Modes 243 1xEV DO 243 802 16 OFDMA WiMAX WiBro 243 89601 VSA 243 Analog Demod 244 Bluetooth 245 cdma2000 245 GSM EDGE ...

Page 9: ...9 Page Setup 259 Print 260 Restore Down 261 Minimize 261 Exit 262 Print 263 System 264 Show 264 Errors 264 Previous Page 265 Next Page 266 History 266 Verbose SCPI On Off 266 Refresh 267 Clear Error Queue 267 Status 267 Input Overload Enable Remote Command Only 267 Power Up Remote Command Only 268 System 268 Show System contents Remote Command Only 269 Computer System description Remote Command On...

Page 10: ... Preset 278 Last State 278 Power On Application 279 Configure Applications 280 Preloading Applications 280 Access to Configure Applications utility 281 Virtual memory usage 281 Select All 281 Deselect All 282 Move Up 282 Move Down 282 Select Deselect 282 Save Changes and Exit 282 Exit Without Saving 283 Restore Power On Defaults 283 Configure Applications Instrument boot up 284 Configure Applicati...

Page 11: ...store Align Defaults 305 Restore Misc Defaults 305 Restore Mode Defaults All Modes 307 All 307 Control Panel 308 Licensing 309 Security 311 USB 311 Read Write 312 Read only 312 Diagnostics 312 Show Hardware Statistics 312 SCPI for Show Hardware Statistics Remote Commands Only 313 Self test 314 All Self Test 314 FEC Self Test 314 Show Result 314 Internet Explorer 316 System Remote Commands Remote C...

Page 12: ...ource 331 More Information 332 Free Run 333 Video IF Envelope 334 Trigger Level 334 Trig Slope 335 Trig Delay 336 External 1 337 Trigger Level 338 Trig Slope 338 Trig Delay 339 Zero Span Delay Comp On Off 340 External 2 340 Trigger Level 341 Trig Slope 341 Trig Delay 342 Zero Span Delay Comp On Off 342 RF Burst 343 Absolute Trigger Level 344 Relative Trigger Level 345 Trigger Slope 346 Trig Delay ...

Page 13: ...Man Active Function keys 368 Auto Man 1 of N keys 368 BW 370 Res BW 370 Video BW 371 Filter Type 373 Cont Continuous Measurement Sweep 374 File 376 FREQ Channel 377 Center Freq 377 Center Frequency Presets 378 RF Center Freq 380 Ext Mix Center Freq 381 I Q Center Freq 382 CF Step 382 Input Output 384 Marker 385 Select Marker 385 Marker Type 385 Properties 386 Select Marker 386 Relative To 386 All ...

Page 14: ...Measurement Query Remote Command Only 412 Configure Fast Power Measurement Remote Command Only 413 Initiate Fast Power Measurement Remote Command Only 414 Fetch Fast Power Measurement Remote Command Only 414 Execute Fast Power Measurement Remote Command Only 414 Binary Read Fast Power Measurement Remote Command Only 415 Diagnostic Binary Read Fast Power Measurement Remote Command Only 415 Format D...

Page 15: ...1 thru Register 16 453 Mass Storage Catalog Remote Command Only 454 Mass Storage Change Directory Remote Command Only 455 Mass Storage Copy Remote Command Only 455 Mass Storage Device Copy Remote Command Only 455 Mass Storage Delete Remote Command Only 456 Mass Storage Data Remote Command Only 456 Mass Storage Make Directory Remote Command Only 456 Mass Storage Move Remote Command Only 456 Mass St...

Page 16: ...473 W CDMA Channel Number Ranges 474 CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Channel Number Ranges 475 LTE FDD Channel Number Ranges 477 LTE TDD Channel Number Ranges 479 TDSCDMA Channel Number Ranges 479 Radio Setup 480 Radio Standard 481 Radio Band Link 499 Set Reference Frequency 499 Freq Reference 500 Freq Offset 501 Modulation Setup 502 ARB 502 ARB 502 Select Waveform 503 ARB Setup 508 Trigger Type 510 Trigger Sour...

Page 17: ...p 549 Clear List 549 Step Trigger 549 Transition Time 551 Radio Setup 552 Channel 569 Frequency 570 Power 570 Waveform 571 Step Duration 578 Output Trigger 580 Step Configuration Remote Command Only 580 Clear List Remote Command Only 588 Trigger Type 589 BeginningOfStep 589 DataMarker 589 Manual Trigger Now 590 Remote Software Trigger Remote command Only 591 Query List Sequence Initiation Armed St...

Page 18: ...ternal 2 608 RF Burst 610 Periodic Timer Frame Trigger 613 Auto Holdoff 624 Gate Preset Remote Command Only 626 Gate Level Remote Command Only 626 Gate Polarity Remote Command Only 626 Points 627 System 629 Trace Detector 630 Trace Type 630 Detector 630 Auto 631 Detector Selection 631 Trigger 633 Free Run 633 Video 633 Trigger Level 633 Trig Slope 633 Trig Delay 633 External 1 633 Trigger Level 63...

Page 19: ...ave User Preset 638 View Display 639 View selection by name MSR and LTE Advanced FDD TDD only 641 Selects the results view The following SCPI command allows you to select the desired measurement view by enumeration 641 Selects the results view The following SCPI command allows you to select the desired measurement view by enumeration 642 View selection by name DTMB CTTB DVB T H only 642 View selec...

Page 20: ... Couple 663 More Information 663 Auto Man Active Function keys 663 Auto Man 1 of N keys 663 BW 665 Res BW 665 Video BW 666 RBW Control 667 Filter Type 667 Filter BW 668 Cont Continuous Measurement Sweep 670 File 672 FREQ Channel 673 Center Freq 673 Center Frequency Presets 674 RF Center Freq 676 Ext Mix Center Freq 677 I Q Center Freq 678 CF Step 678 Input Output 680 Marker 681 Select Marker 681 M...

Page 21: ...ote Command Only 699 Define Fast Power Measurement Remote Command Only 700 Define Fast Power Measurement Query Remote Command Only 709 Configure Fast Power Measurement Remote Command Only 710 Initiate Fast Power Measurement Remote Command Only 711 Fetch Fast Power Measurement Remote Command Only 711 Execute Fast Power Measurement Remote Command Only 711 Binary Read Fast Power Measurement Remote Co...

Page 22: ...ffset Frequency Define 746 Carrier Result 747 Meas Method 747 Meas Type 749 PSD Ref 749 Limit Test 750 Meas Preset 751 Offset RRC Weighting Backward Compatibility SCPI 751 Offset Filter Alpha Backward Compatibility SCPI 752 Method for Carrier Backward Compatibility SCPI 753 Mode 754 Mode Preset 755 How To Preset 756 Mode Setup 758 Peak Search 759 Next Peak 759 Next Pk Right 759 Next Pk Left 760 Ma...

Page 23: ...nly 781 Mass Storage Change Directory Remote Command Only 782 Mass Storage Copy Remote Command Only 782 Mass Storage Device Copy Remote Command Only 782 Mass Storage Delete Remote Command Only 783 Mass Storage Data Remote Command Only 783 Mass Storage Make Directory Remote Command Only 783 Mass Storage Move Remote Command Only 783 Mass Storage Remove Directory Remote Command Only 784 Sequences 784...

Page 24: ...Ranges 808 LTE FDD Channel Number Ranges 810 LTE TDD Channel Number Ranges 812 TDSCDMA Channel Number Ranges 812 Radio Setup 813 Radio Standard 814 Radio Band Link 832 Set Reference Frequency 832 Freq Reference 833 Freq Offset 834 Modulation Setup 835 ARB 835 ARB 835 Select Waveform 836 ARB Setup 841 Trigger Type 843 Trigger Source 847 Trigger Initiate 848 Waveform Sequences 848 Waveform Utilities...

Page 25: ...etup 885 Channel 902 Frequency 903 Power 903 Waveform 904 Step Duration 911 Output Trigger 913 Step Configuration Remote Command Only 913 Clear List Remote Command Only 921 Trigger Type 922 BeginningOfStep 922 DataMarker 922 Manual Trigger Now 923 Remote Software Trigger Remote command Only 924 Query List Sequence Initiation Armed Status Remote Command Only 924 Source Preset 924 SPAN X Scale 925 S...

Page 26: ... 956 Gate Preset Remote Command Only 958 Gate Level Remote Command Only 958 Gate Polarity Remote Command Only 958 Points 959 System 960 Trace Detector 961 Select Trace Front panel Only 961 Trace Type 961 View Blank 962 Detector 963 Auto 964 Detector Selection 964 Trigger 966 Free Run 966 Video 966 Trigger Level 966 Trig Slope 966 Trig Delay 966 External 1 966 Trigger Level 966 Trig Slope 966 Trig ...

Page 27: ...g 968 Trig Holdoff 968 User Preset 969 User Preset 969 User Preset All Modes 970 Save User Preset 971 View Display 972 Spectrum Window 974 Results Window 974 Display 976 Annotation 976 Meas Bar On Off 977 Screen 978 Active Function Values On Off 978 Title 979 Change Title 979 Clear Title 980 Graticule 981 System Display Settings 981 Annotation Local Settings 981 Themes 982 Bar Graph 983 10 Spectru...

Page 28: ... Freq 1019 CF Step 1019 Input Output 1021 Marker 1022 Select Marker 1022 Marker Type 1022 Couple Markers 1023 All Markers Off 1023 Marker X Axis Value Remote Command Only 1023 Marker X Axis Position Remote Command Only 1024 Marker Y Axis Value Remote Command Only 1025 Marker Function 1026 Marker To 1027 Meas 1028 Remote Measurement Functions 1028 Measurement Group of Commands 1029 Current Measurem...

Page 29: ...y 1051 Diagnostic Binary Read Fast Power Measurement Remote Command Only 1051 Format Data Numeric Data Remote Command Only 1052 Format Data Byte Order Remote Command Only 1053 Meas Setup 1054 Avg Hold Num 1054 Meas Type 1054 Ref Channel 1055 Integ BW 1055 Span 1056 Acq Time 1058 Res BW 1058 Video BW 1060 VBW RBW 1061 Power Ref for the modes except MSR and LTE Advanced FDD TDD 1062 Total Power 1062...

Page 30: ...formation 1108 Save 1110 State 1110 To File 1111 Edit Register Names 1113 More Information 1113 Register 1 thru Register 16 1114 Register 1 thru Register 16 1114 Mass Storage Catalog Remote Command Only 1115 Mass Storage Change Directory Remote Command Only 1116 Mass Storage Copy Remote Command Only 1116 Mass Storage Device Copy Remote Command Only 1116 Mass Storage Delete Remote Command Only 1117...

Page 31: ...wer 1137 RF Power Range 1138 Set Reference Power 1138 Power Ref 1138 Amptd Offset 1139 Modulation 1140 Frequency 1140 Frequency 1141 Channel 1141 GSM EDGE Channel Number Ranges 1142 W CDMA Channel Number Ranges 1143 CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Channel Number Ranges 1144 LTE FDD Channel Number Ranges 1146 LTE TDD Channel Number Ranges 1148 TDSCDMA Channel Number Ranges 1148 Radio Setup 1149 Radio Standard 115...

Page 32: ...ate 1214 PM 1214 PM 1214 PM Deviation 1215 PM Rate 1215 List Sequencer 1215 Sequencer 1216 Initiate Sequence 1216 List Sequencer Setup 1217 Number of Steps 1217 Current Step 1217 Insert Step Before 1218 Delete Step 1218 Clear List 1218 Step Trigger 1218 Transition Time 1220 Radio Setup 1221 Channel 1238 Frequency 1239 Power 1239 Waveform 1240 Step Duration 1247 Output Trigger 1249 Step Configurati...

Page 33: ...isition Time 1268 Gate View Start Time 1269 Gate Delay 1269 Gate Length 1270 Gate Source 1270 Video IF Envelope 1271 External 1 1273 External 2 1275 RF Burst 1277 Periodic Timer Frame Trigger 1281 Auto Holdoff 1292 Gate Preset Remote Command Only 1293 Gate Level Remote Command Only 1293 Gate Polarity Remote Command Only 1294 System 1295 Trace Detector 1296 Trace Type 1296 Chan Detector 1296 Chan D...

Page 34: ...ic Timer 1301 Period 1301 Offset 1301 Reset Offset Display 1301 Sync Source 1301 Off 1301 External 1 1301 External 2 1302 RF Burst 1302 Trig Delay 1302 Auto Holdoff 1302 Auto Trig 1302 Trig Holdoff 1302 User Preset 1303 User Preset 1303 User Preset All Modes 1304 Save User Preset 1305 View Display 1306 View Selection by Name Remote Command Only 1306 Views Selection by Number Remote Command only 13...

Page 35: ...q Total Pwr Ref 1319 Trace Window 1320 Results Window 1320 Rel Peak Pwr Freq PSD Ref 1321 Trace Window 1321 Results Window 1322 Rel Peak Pwr Freq Spectrum Pk Ref 1322 Trace Window 1323 Results Window 1323 Integrated Power 1324 Integrated Power Total Pwr Ref 1324 Trace Window 1326 Results Window 1326 Integrated Power PSD Ref 1327 Trace Window 1328 Results Window 1328 Integrated Power Spectrum Pk Re...

Page 36: ...e 1350 FREQ Channel 1351 Center Freq 1351 Center Frequency Presets 1352 RF Center Freq 1354 Ext Mix Center Freq 1355 I Q Center Freq 1356 CF Step 1356 Input Output 1358 Marker 1359 Select Marker 1359 Select Marker 1359 Marker Type 1359 Properties 1360 Select Marker 1360 Select Marker 1360 Relative To 1360 All Markers Off 1361 Marker X Axis Value Remote Command Only 1361 Marker X Axis Position Remo...

Page 37: ... Remote Command Only 1388 Fetch Fast Power Measurement Remote Command Only 1388 Execute Fast Power Measurement Remote Command Only 1388 Binary Read Fast Power Measurement Remote Command Only 1389 Diagnostic Binary Read Fast Power Measurement Remote Command Only 1389 Format Data Numeric Data Remote Command Only 1390 Format Data Byte Order Remote Command Only 1391 Meas Setup 1392 Avg Hold Num 1392 A...

Page 38: ...mote Command Only 1425 Mass Storage Data Remote Command Only 1425 Mass Storage Make Directory Remote Command Only 1425 Mass Storage Move Remote Command Only 1425 Mass Storage Remove Directory Remote Command Only 1426 Sequences 1426 Source Sequence 1427 Save As 1427 Data Export 1427 Measurement Results 1428 Meas Results File Definition 1428 Meas Results File Example 1430 Capture Buffer 1431 Save As...

Page 39: ...l Number Ranges 1449 Radio Setup 1450 Radio Standard 1451 Radio Band Link 1469 Set Reference Frequency 1469 Freq Reference 1470 Freq Offset 1471 Modulation Setup 1472 ARB 1472 ARB 1472 Select Waveform 1473 ARB Setup 1478 Trigger Type 1480 Trigger Source 1484 Trigger Initiate 1485 Waveform Sequences 1485 Waveform Utilities 1496 Marker Utilities 1506 Header Utilities 1511 Bus Trigger Command Remote ...

Page 40: ...Trigger 1550 Step Configuration Remote Command Only 1550 Clear List Remote Command Only 1558 Trigger Type 1559 BeginningOfStep 1559 DataMarker 1559 Manual Trigger Now 1560 Remote Software Trigger Remote command Only 1561 Query List Sequence Initiation Armed Status Remote Command Only 1561 Source Preset 1561 Span X Scale 1562 Span 1562 Full Span 1563 Last Span 1563 Sweep Control 1565 Acq Time 1565 ...

Page 41: ...nly 1596 Points 1597 System 1599 Trace Detector 1600 Trace Type 1600 Detector 1600 Auto 1601 Detector Selection 1601 Trigger 1603 Free Run 1603 Video 1603 Trigger Level 1603 Trig Slope 1603 Trig Delay 1603 External 1 1603 Trigger Level 1603 Trig Slope 1603 Trig Delay 1603 Zero Span Delay Comp 1603 External 2 1603 Trigger Level 1603 Trig Slope 1603 Trig Delay 1604 Zero Span Delay Comp 1604 RF Burst...

Page 42: ...7 System Display Settings 1617 Annotation Local Settings 1617 Themes 1618 12 Code Domain Measurement 1621 AMPTD Y Scale 1641 Ref Value 1641 Power Graph Metrics View CDP Window Y Ref Value 1641 CDP Graph CDE Graph View CDP Window Y Ref Value 1642 CDP Graph CDE Graph View CDE Window Y Ref Value 1643 I Q Error View Mag Error Window Y Ref Value 1643 I Q Error View Phase Error Window Y Ref Value 1644 I...

Page 43: ... 1657 Code Domain View CDP Window Y Scale Div 1657 Code Domain View Symbol Power Window Y Scale Div 1658 Demod Bits View CDP Window Y Scale Div 1658 Demod Bits View Symbol Power Window Y Scale Div 1659 Long Demod View Symbol Power Window Y Scale Div 1659 Ref Position 1660 I Q Error View Mag Error Window Y Ref Position 1660 I Q Error View Phase Error Window Y Ref Position 1661 I Q Error View Evm Wi...

Page 44: ... only 1684 Marker X Axis Value Remote Command only 1684 Marker X Axis Position Remote Command only 1685 Marker Y Axis Value Remote Command only 1686 Backward Compatibility SCPI Commands 1686 Marker Function 1687 Marker To 1688 Mkr Despread 1688 Meas 1689 Remote Measurement Functions 1689 Measurement Group of Commands 1690 Current Measurement Query Remote Command Only 1692 Limit Test Current Result...

Page 45: ...only 1720 Sync Type BTS 1720 Synchronization Symbol Rate BTS only 1721 Synchronization Code Number BTS only 1722 Primary Scramble Code BTS only 1723 Scramble Code Offset BTS only 1724 Scramble Code Type BTS only 1725 Symbol Boundary BTS only 1726 Test Model 1 BTS only 1729 3GPP TS25 141 Table 6 1 Test Model 1 2009 12 version S CCPCH included 1729 Test Model 1 w 16 DPCH w S CCPCH BTS only 1729 Test...

Page 46: ...only 1736 Custom Active Channel List for BTS Remote Command Only 1736 Initialize List Remote Command Only 1737 Append List Remote Command Only 1740 Replace List Remote Command Only 1742 Query List Remote Command Only 1744 Symbol Boundary Custom Active Channel List Number Of Entries BTS Remote Command Only 1746 Symbol Boundary Custom Active Channel List Load Preset Setting BTS Remote Command Only 1...

Page 47: ...7 Next Pk Right 1767 Next Pk Left 1767 Marker Delta 1768 Pk Pk Search 1768 Min Search 1768 Print 1769 Quick Save 1770 Recall 1772 State 1772 More Information 1774 From File 1774 Edit Register Names 1776 Register 1 thru Register 16 1776 Register 1 thru Register 16 1777 Sequences 1778 Source Sequence 1778 Open 1779 Data Import 1779 Capture Buffer 1780 Open 1780 Restart 1781 More Information 1781 Sav...

Page 48: ...d Only 1791 Sequences 1791 Source Sequence 1792 Save As 1792 Data Export 1792 Measurement Results 1793 Meas Results File Contents 1794 Marker Table 1794 Peak Table 1796 Spectrogram 1799 Capture Buffer 1803 Save As 1804 Screen Image 1804 Themes 1806 3D Color 1806 3D Monochrome 1806 Flat Color 1807 Flat Monochrome 1807 Save As 1807 Single Single Measurement Sweep 1808 More Information 1808 Source 18...

Page 49: ...elect Waveform 1845 ARB Setup 1850 Trigger Type 1852 Trigger Source 1856 Trigger Initiate 1857 Waveform Sequences 1857 Waveform Utilities 1868 Marker Utilities 1878 Header Utilities 1883 Bus Trigger Command Remote Command Only 1885 AM 1885 AM 1885 AM Depth 1885 AM Rate 1886 FM 1886 FM 1886 FM Deviation 1886 FM Rate 1887 PM 1887 PM 1887 PM Deviation 1888 PM Rate 1888 List Sequencer 1888 Sequencer 1...

Page 50: ...ftware Trigger Remote command Only 1933 Query List Sequence Initiation Armed Status Remote Command Only 1933 Source Preset 1933 SPAN X Scale 1934 Start Code Number 1934 Stop Code Number 1934 Expand 1935 Sweep Control 1936 Pause Resume 1936 System 1937 Trace Detector 1938 Trigger 1939 Free Run 1939 Video 1939 Trigger Level 1939 Trig Slope 1939 Trig Delay 1939 External 1 1939 Trigger Level 1939 Trig...

Page 51: ...Delay 1941 Baseband I Q 1941 I Q Mag 1941 Trigger Level 1941 Trig Slope 1941 Trig Delay 1941 I Demodulated 1942 Trigger Level 1942 Trig Slope 1942 Trig Delay 1942 Q Demodulated 1942 Trigger Level 1942 Trig Slope 1942 Trig Delay 1942 Input I 1942 Trigger Level 1942 Trig Slope 1942 Trig Delay 1942 Input Q 1942 Trigger Level 1942 Trig Slope 1943 Trig Delay 1943 Auxiliary Channel I Q Mag 1943 Trigger ...

Page 52: ...4 Power Bar Graph Metrics BTS 1954 CDP Code Domain Power Graph window 1955 Metrics window 1955 Power Bar Graph Metrics MS 1956 CDP Code Domain Power Graph window 1957 Metrics window 1957 Composite Symbol Boundary 1959 Symbol Rate 1960 CDP Graph and CDE Graph 1960 CDP Graph and CDE Graph BTS 1961 CDP Code Domain Power Graph window 1961 CDE Code Domain Error Graph window 1962 CDP Graph and CDE Graph...

Page 53: ...Metrics window 1973 Composite Symbol Boundary 1973 Symbol Rate 1974 Demod Bits 1975 Demod Bits BTS Except Long Mode 1975 CDP Code Domain Power Graph window 1976 Symbol Power vs Time window 1976 Demod Bits window 1977 Demod Bits MS Except Long Mode 1977 CDP Code Domain Power Graph window 1978 Symbol Power vs Time window 1978 Demod Bits window 1978 Demod Bits BTS Long Mode 1978 Symbol Power vs Time ...

Page 54: ...in Power View Power Bar Graph Window 2000 Range 2001 Range 2001 Adjust Range For Min Clip 2002 Pre Adjust for Min Clip 2002 Peak to Average 2003 Mixer Level Offset 2003 I Range 2004 1 V Peak 2005 0 5 V Peak 2005 0 25 V Peak 2005 0 125 V Peak 2005 Q Range Value 2005 Q Same as I 2006 1 V Peak 2007 0 5 V Peak 2007 0 25 V Peak 2007 0 125 V Peak 2007 Scale Div 2008 Scale Div I Q Error View EVM Window 2...

Page 55: ...17 Auto Couple 2018 More Information 2018 Auto Man Active Function keys 2018 Auto Man 1 of N keys 2018 BW 2020 Cont Continuous Measurement Sweep 2021 File 2023 FREQ Channel 2024 Center Freq 2024 Center Frequency Presets 2025 RF Center Freq 2027 Ext Mix Center Freq 2028 I Q Center Freq 2029 CF Step 2029 Input Output 2031 Marker 2032 Select Marker 2032 Backward Compatibility SCPI Commands 2032 Marke...

Page 56: ...ommand Only 2062 Execute Fast Power Measurement Remote Command Only 2062 Binary Read Fast Power Measurement Remote Command Only 2063 Diagnostic Binary Read Fast Power Measurement Remote Command Only 2063 Format Data Numeric Data Remote Command Only 2064 Format Data Byte Order Remote Command Only 2065 Meas Setup 2066 Avg Number 2066 Avg Mode 2066 Meas Offset 2067 Limits 2068 RMS EVM Composite 2068 ...

Page 57: ...DSCH w 6 DPCH BTS only 2091 Test Model 5 w 4 HS PDSCH w 14 DPCH BTS only 2092 Test Model 5 w 8 HS PDSCH w 30 DPCH BTS only 2093 Test Model 5 w 4 HS PDSCH w 4 DPCH BTS only 2093 Test Model 6 BTS only 2094 Test Model 6 w 8 HS PDSCH w 30 DPCH BTS only 2095 Test Model 6 w 4 HS PDSCH w 4 DPCH BTS only 2096 Custom 2096 Custom Active Channel List for BTS Remote Command Only 2096 Initialize List Remote Co...

Page 58: ...119 Mode 2120 Mode Preset 2121 How To Preset 2122 Mode Setup 2124 Peak Search 2125 Next Peak 2125 Next Pk Right 2125 Next Pk Left 2125 Marker Delta 2126 Pk Pk Search 2126 Min Search 2126 Print 2127 Quick Save 2128 Recall 2130 State 2130 More Information 2132 From File 2132 Edit Register Names 2134 Register 1 thru Register 16 2134 Register 1 thru Register 16 2135 Sequences 2136 Source Sequence 2136...

Page 59: ... Move Remote Command Only 2148 Mass Storage Remove Directory Remote Command Only 2149 Sequences 2149 Source Sequence 2150 Save As 2150 Data Export 2150 Measurement Results 2151 Meas Results File Contents 2152 Marker Table 2152 Peak Table 2154 Spectrogram 2157 Capture Buffer 2161 Save As 2162 Screen Image 2162 Themes 2164 3D Color 2164 3D Monochrome 2164 Flat Color 2165 Flat Monochrome 2165 Save As...

Page 60: ...e 2200 Freq Offset 2201 Modulation Setup 2202 ARB 2202 ARB 2202 Select Waveform 2203 ARB Setup 2208 Trigger Type 2210 Trigger Source 2214 Trigger Initiate 2215 Waveform Sequences 2215 Waveform Utilities 2226 Marker Utilities 2236 Header Utilities 2241 Bus Trigger Command Remote Command Only 2243 AM 2243 AM 2243 AM Depth 2243 AM Rate 2244 FM 2244 FM 2244 FM Deviation 2244 FM Rate 2245 PM 2245 PM 22...

Page 61: ... SPAN X Scale 2292 Ref Value 2292 Ref Value I Q Error View EVM Window 2292 Ref Value I Q Error View Mag Error Window 2293 Ref Value I Q Error View Phase Error Window 2293 Scale Div 2294 Scale Div I Q Error View EVM Window 2294 Scale Div I Q Error View Mag Error Window 2295 Scale Div I Q Error View Phase Error Window 2295 Ref Position 2296 Ref Position I Q Error View EVM Window 2296 Ref Position I ...

Page 62: ...Slope 2305 Trig Delay 2306 Zero Span Delay Comp 2306 RF Burst 2306 Absolute Trigger 2306 Relative Trigger 2306 Trig Slope 2306 Trig Delay 2306 Periodic Timer 2306 Period 2306 Offset 2306 Offset Adjust Remote Command Only 2306 Reset Offset Display 2306 Sync Source 2306 Off 2306 External 1 2307 External 2 2307 RF Burst 2307 Trig Delay 2307 Baseband I Q 2307 I Q Mag 2307 Trigger Level 2307 Trig Slope...

Page 63: ...2309 Auto Holdoff 2309 Auto Trig 2309 Trig Holdoff 2309 Holdoff Type 2309 User Preset 2310 User Preset 2310 User Preset All Modes 2311 Save User Preset 2312 View Display 2313 View Selection Remote Commands 2313 View Selection by Name Remote Command only 2314 View Selection by Number Remote Command only 2314 Display 2315 Annotation 2315 Meas Bar On Off 2316 Screen 2317 Active Function Values On Off...

Page 64: ... View MS 2331 EVM window 2331 Magnitude Error window 2332 Phase Error window 2332 Code Domain Power 2332 Code Domain Power View BTS 2332 Power Bar Graph window 2333 Metrics Window 2333 Code Domain Power View MS 2334 Power Bar Graph window 2335 Metrics window 2335 Peak Avg Metrics 2336 Peak Avg Metrics View BTS 2337 Peak Average Metrics window 2337 Peak Avg Metrics View MS 2339 Peak Average Metrics...

Page 65: ...2359 0 25 V Peak 2359 0 125 V Peak 2359 Q Range Value 2359 Q Same as I 2361 1 V Peak 2361 0 5 V Peak 2361 0 25 V Peak 2361 0 125 V Peak 2362 Presel Center 2362 Presel Adjust 2362 Auto Couple 2363 More Information 2363 Auto Man Active Function keys 2363 Auto Man 1 of N keys 2363 BW 2365 Info BW 2365 Info BW Control 2365 Filter Type 2366 Cont Continuous Measurement Sweep 2367 File 2369 FREQ Channel ...

Page 66: ...390 Calculate Peaks of Trace Data Remote Command Only 2395 Hardware Accelerated Fast Power Measurement Remote Command Only 2396 Reset Fast Power Measurement Remote Command Only 2396 Define Fast Power Measurement Remote Command Only 2397 Define Fast Power Measurement Query Remote Command Only 2406 Configure Fast Power Measurement Remote Command Only 2407 Initiate Fast Power Measurement Remote Comma...

Page 67: ...2424 Min Search 2424 Print 2426 Quick Save 2427 Recall 2429 State 2429 More Information 2431 From File 2431 Edit Register Names 2433 Register 1 thru Register 16 2433 Register 1 thru Register 16 2434 Sequences 2435 Source Sequence 2435 Open 2436 Data Import 2436 Capture Buffer 2437 Open 2437 Restart 2438 More Information 2438 Save 2440 State 2440 To File 2441 Edit Register Names 2443 More Informati...

Page 68: ... Sequence 2449 Save As 2449 Data Export 2449 Measurement Results 2450 Meas Results File Contents 2451 Marker Table 2451 Peak Table 2453 Spectrogram 2456 Capture Buffer 2460 Save As 2461 Screen Image 2461 Themes 2463 3D Color 2463 3D Monochrome 2463 Flat Color 2464 Flat Monochrome 2464 Save As 2464 Single Single Measurement Sweep 2465 More Information 2465 Source 2466 RF Output 2466 Amplitude 2466 ...

Page 69: ...etup 2507 Trigger Type 2509 Trigger Source 2513 Trigger Initiate 2514 Waveform Sequences 2514 Waveform Utilities 2525 Marker Utilities 2535 Header Utilities 2540 Bus Trigger Command Remote Command Only 2542 AM 2542 AM 2542 AM Depth 2542 AM Rate 2543 FM 2543 FM 2543 FM Deviation 2543 FM Rate 2544 PM 2544 PM 2544 PM Deviation 2545 PM Rate 2545 List Sequencer 2545 Sequencer 2546 Initiate Sequence 254...

Page 70: ...e command Only 2590 Query List Sequence Initiation Armed Status Remote Command Only 2590 Source Preset 2590 SPAN X Scale 2591 Sweep Control 2592 Pause 2592 System 2593 Trace Detector 2594 Trigger 2595 Free Run 2595 Video 2595 Trigger Level 2595 Trig Slope 2595 Trig Delay 2595 External 1 2595 Trigger Level 2595 Trig Slope 2595 Trig Delay 2595 Zero Span Delay Comp 2595 External 2 2595 Trigger Level ...

Page 71: ...g Delay 2597 I Demodulated 2598 Trigger Level 2598 Trig Slope 2598 Trig Delay 2598 Q Demodulated 2598 Trigger Level 2598 Trig Slope 2598 Trig Delay 2598 Input I 2598 Trigger Level 2598 Trig Slope 2598 Trig Delay 2598 Input Q 2598 Trigger Level 2598 Trig Slope 2599 Trig Delay 2599 Auxiliary Channel I Q Mag 2599 Trigger Level 2599 Trig Slope 2599 Trig Delay 2599 Trigger Center Frequency 2599 Trigger...

Page 72: ...on Local Settings 2609 Themes 2610 I Q Polar Vec Constln 2611 Chip Offset 2612 I Q Chips 2612 Interpolation 2613 45 Rotation 2613 Full Vector 2614 I Q Error View 2614 Mag Error vs Symbol Window 2615 Phase Error vs Symbol Window 2615 EVM vs Symbol Window 2615 Numeric Results Window 2616 15 Blank Heading 1 For Flare PD import DO NOT REMOVE FROM PD 2617 15 Power Control Measurement 2617 Range 2622 Pe...

Page 73: ...culate Compress Trace Data Query Remote Command Only 2646 Calculate Peaks of Trace Data Remote Command Only 2651 Hardware Accelerated Fast Power Measurement Remote Command Only 2652 Reset Fast Power Measurement Remote Command Only 2652 Define Fast Power Measurement Remote Command Only 2653 Define Fast Power Measurement Query Remote Command Only 2662 Configure Fast Power Measurement Remote Command ...

Page 74: ...1 Print 2682 Quick Save 2683 Recall 2685 State 2685 More Information 2687 From File 2687 Edit Register Names 2689 Register 1 thru Register 16 2689 Register 1 thru Register 16 2690 Sequences 2691 Source Sequence 2691 Open 2692 Data Import 2692 Capture Buffer 2693 Open 2693 Restart 2694 More Information 2694 Save 2696 State 2696 To File 2697 Edit Register Names 2699 More Information 2699 Register 1 ...

Page 75: ... Measurement Results 2706 Meas Results File Contents 2707 Marker Table 2707 Peak Table 2709 Spectrogram 2712 Capture Buffer 2716 Save As 2717 Screen Image 2717 Themes 2719 3D Color 2719 3D Monochrome 2719 Flat Color 2720 Flat Monochrome 2720 Save As 2720 Single Single Measurement Sweep 2721 More Information 2721 Source 2722 RF Output 2722 Amplitude 2722 RF Power 2723 RF Power Range 2724 Set Refere...

Page 76: ...gger Source 2769 Trigger Initiate 2770 Waveform Sequences 2770 Waveform Utilities 2781 Marker Utilities 2791 Header Utilities 2796 Bus Trigger Command Remote Command Only 2798 AM 2798 AM 2798 AM Depth 2798 AM Rate 2799 FM 2799 FM 2799 FM Deviation 2799 FM Rate 2800 PM 2800 PM 2800 PM Deviation 2801 PM Rate 2801 List Sequencer 2801 Sequencer 2802 Initiate Sequence 2802 List Sequencer Setup 2803 Num...

Page 77: ...846 Query List Sequence Initiation Armed Status Remote Command Only 2846 Source Preset 2846 Ref Value 2846 Scale Div 2847 Ref Position 2847 Auto Scaling 2848 System 2849 Trigger 2850 Free Run 2850 Video 2850 Trigger Level 2850 Trig Slope 2850 Trig Delay 2850 External 1 2850 Trigger Level 2850 Trig Slope 2850 Trig Delay 2850 Zero Span Delay Comp 2850 External 2 2850 Trigger Level 2850 Trig Slope 28...

Page 78: ...iew Display Remote SCPI Command for Selection by Name 2856 View Display Remote SCPI Command for Selection by Number 2856 Display 2857 Annotation 2857 Meas Bar On Off 2858 Screen 2859 Active Function Values On Off 2859 Title 2860 Change Title 2860 Clear Title 2861 Graticule 2862 System Display Settings 2862 Annotation Local Settings 2862 Themes 2863 Power Graph Metrics 2864 Slot Power Measurement 2...

Page 79: ...hase Measurement 2866 Phase Error window 2866 Metrics window 2867 Slot Number 2867 Chip Phase Trace 2868 Prev Page 2869 Next Page 2869 Scroll Up 2869 Scroll Down 2869 First Page 2869 Last Page 2870 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference lxxix ...

Page 80: ...Table of Contents lxxx W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 81: ... a signal source both of which interface with the front panel of the test set through an input output matrix and is run by its own instance of the XSA firmware application a fully loaded test set shows four independent XSA windows on its monitor display The E6640A can be configured to test cellular products with a standard 40 MHz of analysis bandwidth It could also be configured to test Wireless p...

Page 82: ...nt applications C Program Files Agilent Licensing You may want to keep a copy of your license key in a secure location To do this you can print out a copy of the display showing the license numbers If you should lose your license key call your nearest Keysight Technologies service or sales office for assistance Obtaining and Installing a License Key If you purchase an additional application that r...

Page 83: ...to do a software update To display a list of installed applications press System Show System Check the appropriate page of the Keysight web site for the latest available software versions according to the name of your instrument as follows http www keysight com find E6640A_software You can load the updated software package into the analyzer either from a USB drive or directly from the internet An ...

Page 84: ...m find e6640a 2 The home page for your instrument appears in some cases you may see an initial splash screen containing a button named View the Webpage which you should click to display the home page 3 Locate the Options Accessories tab as highlighted in the example below which shows the home page for the E6640A 4 Click the Options Accessories tab to display a list of available options and accesso...

Page 85: ...r the chapter Front and Rear Panel Features of the document Latest available on line document E6640A Getting Started Guide Embedded PDF installed with the latest firmware revision If you are viewing this information as a Help file in the instrument then you can click on the link above to open the PDF document W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 85 ...

Page 86: ... Panel Features of the document Latest available on line document E6640A Getting Started Guide Embedded PDF installed with the latest firmware revision If you are viewing this information as a Help file in the instrument then you can click on the links above to open the PDF document 86 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 87: ... the chapter Front and Rear Panel Features of the document Latest available on line document E6640A Getting Started Guide Embedded PDF installed with the latest firmware revision If you are viewing this information as a Help file in the instrument then you can click on the link above to open the PDF document W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 87 ...

Page 88: ...indows Virtual Front Panel The virtual front panel keys are Multi Window Zoom and Next Window These are all immediate action keys Windows Control Menu The menu items are Zoom Split Screen Next Window and Full screen These are all immediate action menu selections Zoom and Full Screen are toggle functions 88 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 89: ... selected window is outlined in green Zoom is local to each Measurement Each Measurement remembers its Zoom state The Zoom state of each Measurement is part of the Mode s state Data acquisition and processing for the other windows continues while a window is zoomed as does all SCPI communication with the other windows Remote Command DISPlay WINDow FORMat ZOOM Remote Command DISPlay WINDow FORMat T...

Page 90: ...hat all window specific key presses apply only to that window You can tell which window is selected by the thick green border around it If a window is not selected its boundary is gray If a window in a multi window display is zoomed it is still outlined in green If there is only one window the green outline is not used This allows the user to distinguish between a zoomed window and a display with ...

Page 91: ... For instrument lacking a physical front panel display you can watch the instrument display via external monitor or remote desktop connection Right Click If you plug in a mouse and right click on the analyzer screen a menu will appear as below Placing the mouse on one of the rows marked with a right arrow symbol will cause that row to expand as for example below where the mouse is hovered over the...

Page 92: ...This method can be used to access any of the front panel keys by using a mouse as for example if you are accessing the instrument through Remote Desktop The array of keys thus available is shown below 92 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 93: ...CTRL ALT T Auto Couple CTRL SHIFT C Bandwidth CTRL ALT B Source CTRL ALT U Marker CTRL ALT K Peak Search CTRL ALT P Marker To CTRL ALT N Marker Function CTRL ALT F System CTRL SHIFT Y Quick Save CTRL Q Save CTRL S Recall CTRL R Mode Preset CTRL M User Preset CTRL U Print CTRL P File CTRL SHIFT L Mode CTRL SHIFT M Measure CTRL ALT M Mode Setup CTRL SHIFT E Meas Setup CTRL ALT E Trigger CTRL SHIFT T...

Page 94: ...el Esc Del Delete Backspace Backspace Select Space Up Arrow Up Down Arrow Down Left Arrow Left Right Arrow Right Menu key 1 CTRL SHIFT F1 Menu key 2 CTRL SHIFT F2 Menu key 3 CTRL SHIFT F3 Menu key 4 CTRL SHIFT F4 Menu key 5 CTRL SHIFT F5 Menu key 6 CTRL SHIFT F6 Menu key 7 CTRL SHIFT F7 Backspace BACKSPACE Enter ENTER Tab Tab 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 0 0 94 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Appli...

Page 95: ...1 About the Test Set Mouse and Keyboard Control This is a pictorial view of the table W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 95 ...

Page 96: ... X Series test sets this information is contained in the document Security Features and Document of Volatility This document is not included in the instrument on disk library but it may be downloaded from the Keysight web site To obtain a copy of the document click on or browse to the following URL http www keysight com find security To locate and download the document select Model Number for exam...

Page 97: ...on This chapter provides overall information on W CDMA HSDPA and HSUPA communications systems and describes W CDMA 3GPP measurements made by the test set Undefined variable Primary ProductName W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 97 ...

Page 98: ...x multi part measurements used to create and maintain an interference free environment For example the documents include standardized test methods for the measurement of power in a carrier a spectrum emission mask and other critical measurements The instrument automatically makes these measurements using the measurement methods and limits defined in the documents The detailed results displayed by ...

Page 99: ...mation about the programming documentation included with your product What Programming Information is Available on page 100 STATus Subsystem on page 139 Common Commands on page 179 Undefined variable Primary ProductName W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 99 ...

Page 100: ...ce l The content in this manual is duplicated in the analyzer s Help the Help that you see for a key is identical to what you see in this manual Embedded Help in your instrument Describes all front panel keys and softkeys including SCPI commands for a measurement application Note that the content that you see in Help when you press a key is identical to what you see in the User s and Programmer s ...

Page 101: ...FF CALCulate ACPower MARKer 1 2 12 MODE CALCulate ACPower MARKer 1 2 12 PTPeak CALCulate ACPower MARKer 1 2 12 REFerence integer CALCulate ACPower MARKer 1 2 12 REFerence CALCulate ACPower MARKer 1 2 12 STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate ACPower MARKer 1 2 12 STATe CALCulate ACPower MARKer 1 2 12 TRACe 1 2 3 CALCulate ACPower MARKer 1 2 12 TRACe CALCulate ACPower MARKer 1 2 12 X freq CALCulate ACPower MAR...

Page 102: ...12 STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate CDPower MARKer 1 2 12 STATe CALCulate CDPower MARKer 1 2 12 SYMBol real CALCulate CDPower MARKer 1 2 12 SYMBol CALCulate CDPower MARKer 1 2 12 TRACe CDPower EVM MERRor PERRor SPOWer CPOWer CDError POLar CALCulate CDPower MARKer 1 2 12 TRACe CALCulate CDPower MARKer 1 2 12 X real CALCulate CDPower MARKer 1 2 12 X CALCulate CDPower MARKer 1 2 12 X POSition real CALCulat...

Page 103: ...teger CALCulate CHPower MARKer 1 2 12 REFerence CALCulate CHPower MARKer 1 2 12 STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate CHPower MARKer 1 2 12 STATe CALCulate CHPower MARKer 1 2 12 X real CALCulate CHPower MARKer 1 2 12 X CALCulate CHPower MARKer 1 2 12 X POSition real CALCulate CHPower MARKer 1 2 12 X POSition CALCulate CHPower MARKer 1 2 12 Y CALCulate CLIMits FAIL CALCulate DATA n COMPress BLOCk CFIT MAXimum...

Page 104: ... CALCulate FPOWer POWer 1 2 999 READ CALCulate FPOWer POWer 1 2 999 READ2 CALCulate FPOWer POWer 1 2 999 READ1 CALCulate FPOWer POWer 1 2 999 RESet CALCulate MCPower OFFSet LIST LIMit NEGative UPPer DATA PSAPowerSuite CALCulate MCPower OFFSet LIST LIMit POSitive UPPer DATA PSAPowerSuite CALCulate OBWidth LIMit FBLimit freq CALCulate OBWidth LIMit FBLimit CALCulate OBWidth LIMit TEST ON OFF 1 0 CAL...

Page 105: ...RHO DTXBurst 0 1 OFF ON CALCulate RHO DTXBurst CALCulate RHO IQOFfset INCLude OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate RHO IQOFfset INCLude CALCulate RHO LIMit CDERror real CALCulate RHO LIMit CDERror CALCulate RHO LIMit CPICh BTS real CALCulate RHO LIMit CPICh BTS CALCulate RHO LIMit CPICh BTS POWer real CALCulate RHO LIMit CPICh BTS POWer CALCulate RHO LIMit FERRor freq CALCulate RHO LIMit FERRor CALCulate RHO LIMi...

Page 106: ...OUPle STATe CALCulate SEMask MARKer 1 2 12 FUNCtion RESult CALCulate SEMask MARKer 1 2 12 MODE POSition OFF CALCulate SEMask MARKer 1 2 12 MODE CALCulate SEMask MARKer 1 2 12 X freq CALCulate SEMask MARKer 1 2 12 X CALCulate SEMask MARKer 1 2 12 X POSition real CALCulate SEMask MARKer 1 2 12 X POSition CALCulate SEMask MARKer 1 2 12 Y CALibration ALL CALibration ALL CALibration ALL NPENding CALibr...

Page 107: ...NDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe COUPle 0 1 OFF ON DISPlay ACPower VIEW 1 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe COUPle DISPlay ACPower VIEW 1 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision rel_ampl DISPlay ACPower VIEW 1 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision DISPlay ACPower VIEW 1 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel real DISPlay ACPower VIEW 1 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel DISPlay ACPower VIEW 1 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition TOP CENTer BOTTom DI...

Page 108: ...eal DISPlay CDPower VIEW3 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision real DISPlay CDPower VIEW3 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision DISPlay CDPower VIEW3 WINDow2 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision DISPlay CDPower VIEW3 WINDow3 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision DISPlay CDPower VIEW2 WINDow2 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision DISPlay CDPower VIEW4 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision DISPlay CDPower VIEW 1 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision DISPlay ...

Page 109: ...ct RFSPectrum SHOUlder DISPlay CHPower VIEW SELect PRESult CINFormation DISPlay CHPower VIEW SELect DISPlay CHPower VIEW SELect DISPlay CHPower VIEW SELect DISPlay CHPower VIEW 1 WINDow 1 BGRaph ON OFF 1 0 DISPlay CHPower VIEW 1 WINDow 1 BGRaph DISPlay CHPower VIEW 1 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe COUPle 0 1 OFF ON DISPlay CHPower VIEW 1 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe COUPle DISPlay CHPower VIEW 1 WINDow 1 TRACe ...

Page 110: ...ol VIEW 1 2 WINDow 1 TRACe X SCALe PDIVision time DISPlay PCONtrol VIEW 1 2 WINDow 1 TRACe X SCALe PDIVision DISPlay PCONtrol VIEW 1 2 WINDow 1 TRACe X SCALe RLEVel time DISPlay PCONtrol VIEW 1 2 WINDow 1 TRACe X SCALe RLEVel DISPlay PCONtrol VIEW 1 2 WINDow 1 TRACe X SCALe RPOSition LEFT CENTer RIGHt DISPlay PCONtrol VIEW 1 2 WINDow 1 TRACe X SCALe RPOSition DISPlay PCONtrol VIEW 1 2 WINDow 1 TRA...

Page 111: ...T CENTer RIGHt DISPlay RHO VIEW2 WINDow2 TRACe X SCALe RPOSition LEFT CENTer RIGHt DISPlay RHO VIEW2 WINDow3 TRACe X SCALe RPOSition LEFT CENTer RIGHt DISPlay RHO VIEW2 WINDow 1 TRACe X SCALe RPOSition DISPlay RHO VIEW2 WINDow3 TRACe X SCALe RPOSition DISPlay RHO VIEW2 WINDow2 TRACe X SCALe RPOSition DISPlay RHO VIEW6 WINDow3 TRACe Y SCALe COUPle 0 1 OFF ON DISPlay RHO VIEW2 WINDow2 TRACe Y SCALe ...

Page 112: ...IEW6 WINDow3 TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition TOP CENTer BOTTom DISPlay RHO VIEW2 WINDow2 TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition TOP CENTer BOTTom DISPlay RHO VIEW6 WINDow2 TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition DISPlay RHO VIEW6 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition DISPlay RHO VIEW6 WINDow3 TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition DISPlay RHO VIEW2 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition DISPlay RHO VIEW2 WINDow2 TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition DISPlay RHO VIEW2 WINDow3...

Page 113: ...FETCh OBWidth n FETCh OBWidth OBWidth FETCh OBWidth XDB FETCh PCONtrol n FETCh RHO n FETCh SEMask n FORMat BORDer NORMal SWAPped FORMat BORDer FORMat TRACe DATA ASCii INTeger 32 REAL 32 REAL 64 FORMat TRACe DATA GLOBal DEFault GLOBal FREQuency CENTer STATe 1 0 ON OFF GLOBal FREQuency CENTer STATe HCOPy ABORt HCOPy IMMediate INITiate ACP INITiate CDPower INITiate CHPower INITiate CONTinuous OFF ON ...

Page 114: ...D IDEN RLC SCPILC VSA89601 INSTrument SELect GSM INSTrument SELect SANalyzer INSTrument SELect INST SEL EMI INST SEL LTETDD INST SEL SCPILC INST SEL LTE MEASure ACP n MEASure CDPower n MEASure CHPower CHPower MEASure CHPower DENSity MEASure CHPower n MEASure EVMQpsk n MEASure OBWidth FERRor MEASure OBWidth n MEASure OBWidth OBWidth MEASure OBWidth XDB MEASure PCONtrol n MEASure RHO n MEASure SEMas...

Page 115: ... OUTPut EXTernal STATe ON OFF 1 0 OUTPut EXTernal STATe OUTPut MODulation STATe ON OFF 1 0 OUTPut MODulation STATe READ ACP n READ CDPower n READ CHPower CHPower READ CHPower DENSity READ CHPower n READ EVMQpsk n READ OBWidth FERRor READ OBWidth n READ OBWidth OBWidth READ OBWidth XDB READ PCONtrol n READ RHO n READ SEMask n SENSe measurement TRIGger SOURce SENSe measurement TRIGger SOURce IF SENS...

Page 116: ...ON OFF 1 0 SENSe ACPower CARRier 1 2 LIST FILTer RRC STATe SENSe ACPower CARRier 1 2 LIST METHod IBW RRC SENSe ACPower CARRier 1 2 LIST METHod SENSe ACPower CARRier 1 2 LIST PPResent YES NO SENSe ACPower CARRier 1 2 LIST PPResent SENSe ACPower CARRier 1 2 LIST WIDTh freq SENSe ACPower CARRier 1 2 LIST WIDTh SENSe ACPower CARRier 1 2 POWer real SENSe ACPower CARRier 1 2 POWer SENSe ACPower CARRier ...

Page 117: ...ANDwidth TYPE SENSe ACPower OFFSet 1 2 OUTer LIST BANDwidth VIDeo freq SENSe ACPower OFFSet 1 2 OUTer LIST BANDwidth VIDeo SENSe ACPower OFFSet 1 2 OUTer LIST BANDwidth VIDeo AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe ACPower OFFSet 1 2 OUTer LIST BANDwidth VIDeo AUTO SENSe ACPower OFFSet 1 2 OUTer LIST FILTer ALPHa real SENSe ACPower OFFSet 1 2 OUTer LIST FILTer ALPHa SENSe ACPower OFFSet 1 2 OUTer LIST FILTer RRC ST...

Page 118: ...wer FERRor TRANge WIDE NORMal SENSe CDPower FERRor TRANge SENSe CDPower FILTer ALPHa real SENSe CDPower FILTer ALPHa SENSe CDPower FILTer RRC STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe CDPower FILTer RRC STATe SENSe CDPower MCEStimator OFF ON 0 1 SENSe CDPower MCEStimator SENSe CDPower MCEStimator TIMing CHANnel GLOBal SENSe CDPower MCEStimator TIMing SENSe CDPower MICH SPRead integer SENSe CDPower MICH SPRead SENSe ...

Page 119: ...NC SCRamble BTS OFFSet integer SENSe CDPower SYNC SCRamble BTS OFFSet SENSe CDPower SYNC SCRamble BTS TYPE LEFT RIGHt STANdard SENSe CDPower SYNC SCRamble BTS TYPE SENSe CDPower SYNC SYMBol SPRead integer SENSe CDPower SYNC SYMBol SPRead SENSe CDPower SYNC SYMBol SRATe integer SENSe CDPower SYNC SYMBol SRATe SENSe CHPower AVERage COUNt integer SENSe CHPower AVERage COUNt SENSe CHPower AVERage STAT...

Page 120: ... rel_ampl SENSe CORRection BTS RF LOSS SENSe CORRection CSET ALL DELete SENSe CORRection CSET ALL STATe ON OFF 1 0 SENSe CORRection CSET ALL STATe SENSe CORRection CSET 1 ANTenna UNIT GAUSs PTESla UVM UAM UA NOConversion SENSe CORRection CSET 1 ANTenna UNIT SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 8 COMMent text SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 8 COMMent SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 8 DATA freq ampl SENSe CORRection CSET ...

Page 121: ...k BANDwidth RESolution SENSe EVMQpsk BANDwidth SHAPe GAUSsian FLATtop SENSe EVMQpsk BANDwidth SHAPe SENSe EVMQpsk BWIDth RESolution SENSe EVMQpsk BWIDth SHAPe SENSe EVMQpsk CRATe freq SENSe EVMQpsk CRATe SENSe EVMQpsk FILTer ALPHa real SENSe EVMQpsk FILTer ALPHa SENSe EVMQpsk FILTer RRC STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe EVMQpsk FILTer RRC STATe SENSe EVMQpsk SPECtrum NORMal INVert SENSe EVMQpsk SPECtrum SENS...

Page 122: ...NSe MCPower OFFSet 1 2 LIST BANDwidth INTegration PSAPowerSuite SENSe MCPower OFFSet 1 2 LIST BWIDth INTegration PSAPowerSuite SENSe MCPower OFFSet 1 2 LIST FREQuency PSAPowerSuite SENSe MCPower OFFSet 1 2 LIST RCARrier PSAWCDMA SENSe MCPower OFFSet 1 2 LIST TEST SENSe MCPower RCARrier 1 2 PSAPowerSuite SENSe OBWidth AVERage COUNt integer SENSe OBWidth AVERage COUNt SENSe OBWidth AVERage STATe ON ...

Page 123: ... TYPE FLATtop GAUSsian SENSe PCONtrol BANDwidth RESolution TYPE SENSe PCONtrol BWIDth RESolution SENSe PCONtrol BWIDth RESolution TYPE SENSe PCONtrol CAPTure TIME real SENSe PCONtrol CAPTure TIME SENSe PCONtrol CRATe freq SENSe PCONtrol CRATe SENSe PCONtrol FILTer RRC ALPHa real SENSe PCONtrol FILTer RRC ALPHa SENSe PCONtrol FILTer RRC AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe PCONtrol FILTer RRC AUTO SENSe PCONtrol ...

Page 124: ...ial REPeat SENSe RHO AVERage TCONtrol SENSe RHO CBUFfer OFFSet integer SENSe RHO CBUFfer OFFSet SENSe RHO CRATe freq SENSe RHO CRATe SENSe RHO EVMMinimize IQIMbalance OFF ON 0 1 SENSe RHO EVMMinimize IQIMbalance SENSe RHO FERRor TRANge WIDE NORMal SENSe RHO FERRor TRANge SENSe RHO FILTer RRC ALPHa real SENSe RHO FILTer RRC ALPHa SENSe RHO FILTer RRC STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe RHO FILTer RRC STATe SENS...

Page 125: ...Lot NUMBer SENSe RHO SSLot STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe RHO SSLot STATe SENSe RHO SWEep TIME TRANsient INCLude EXCLude SENSe RHO SWEep TIME TRANsient SENSe RHO SYNC BTS CPICh SCH SYMBol STTD A2CPich A1SCh A2SCh SENSe RHO SYNC BTS SENSe RHO SYNC CPICh ESTimator OFF ON 0 1 SENSe RHO SYNC CPICh ESTimator SENSe RHO SYNC MS DPCCh EDPCch PMESsage PPReamble SENSe RHO SYNC MS SENSe RHO SYNC SCRamble BTS integer...

Page 126: ...Mask BWIDth 1 2 RESolution SENSe SEMask BWIDth 1 2 VIDeo SENSe SEMask BWIDth 1 2 VIDeo RATio SENSe SEMask CARRier AUTO STATe OFF ON 1 0 SENSe SEMask CARRier AUTO STATe SENSe SEMask CARRier CPSD real SENSe SEMask CARRier CPSD SENSe SEMask CARRier PEAK POWer real SENSe SEMask CARRier PEAK POWer SENSe SEMask CARRier POWer real SENSe SEMask CARRier POWer SENSe SEMask DETector CARRier AUTO ON OFF 1 0 S...

Page 127: ...2 OUTer LIST SIDE BOTH NEGative POSitive SENSe SEMask OFFSet 1 2 OUTer LIST SIDE SENSe SEMask OFFSet 1 2 OUTer LIST STARt ABSolute real SENSe SEMask OFFSet 1 2 OUTer LIST STARt ABSolute SENSe SEMask OFFSet 1 2 OUTer LIST STARt RCARrier rel_ampl SENSe SEMask OFFSet 1 2 OUTer LIST STARt RCARrier SENSe SEMask OFFSet 1 2 OUTer LIST STATe ON OFF 1 0 SENSe SEMask OFFSet 1 2 OUTer LIST STATe SENSe SEMask...

Page 128: ...E LEVel SENSe VOLTage IQ I RANGe UPPer voltage SENSe VOLTage IQ I RANGe UPPer SENSe VOLTage IQ Q RANGe UPPer voltage SENSe VOLTage IQ Q RANGe UPPer SENSe VOLTage POWer IQ MIRRored OFF ON 0 1 SENSe VOLTage POWer IQ MIRRored SOURce AM DEPTh LINear SOURce AM DEPTh LINear SOURce AM INTernal FREQuency SOURce AM INTernal FREQuency SOURce AM STATe SOURce AM STATe SOURce FM DEViation SOURce FM DEViation S...

Page 129: ...SOURce LIST SETup OUTPut TRIGger bool bool bool SOURce LIST SETup RADio BAND enum enum enum SOURce LIST SETup RADio BAND SOURce LIST SETup RADio BAND LINK enum enum enum SOURce LIST SETup RADio BAND LINK SOURce LIST SETup TOCount time int time int time int SOURce LIST SETup TOCount SOURce LIST SETup TRANsition TIME time time time SOURce LIST SETup TRANsition TIME SOURce LIST SETup WAVeform string ...

Page 130: ... BANDX BANDXI BANDXII BANDXIII BANDXIV BANDXIX USCELL USPCS JAPAN KOREAN NMT IMT2K UPPER SECOND PAMR400 PAMR800 IMTEXT PCS1DOT9G AWS US2DOT5G PUBLIC LOWER NONE BAND1 BAND2 BAND3 BAND4 BAND5 BAND6 BAND7 BAND8 BAND10 BAND11 BAND12 BAND13 BAND14 BAND17 BAND18 BAND19 BAND20 BAND21 BAND24 BAND25 BAND26 BAND27 BAND28 BAND31 BAND33 BAND34 BAND35 BAND36 BAND37 BAND38 BAND39 BAND40 BAND41 BAND42 BAND43 BAN...

Page 131: ...RKer2 POSitive NEGative SOURce RADio ARB MPOLarity MARKer2 SOURce RADio ARB MPOLarity MARKer3 SOURce RADio ARB MPOLarity MARKer1 SOURce RADio ARB MPOLarity MARKer4 SOURce RADio ARB RETRigger ON OFF IMMediate SOURce RADio ARB RETRigger SOURce RADio ARB RSCaling real SOURce RADio ARB RSCaling SOURce RADio ARB SCLock RATE freq SOURce RADio ARB SCLock RATE SOURce RADio ARB SEQuence MWAVeform filename ...

Page 132: ...able CALibration EXTended NEEDed CONDition STATus QUEStionable CALibration EXTended NEEDed ENABle integer STATus QUEStionable CALibration EXTended NEEDed ENABle STATus QUEStionable CALibration EXTended NEEDed EVENt STATus QUEStionable CALibration EXTended NEEDed NTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable CALibration EXTended NEEDed NTRansition STATus QUEStionable CALibration EXTended NEEDed PTRansiti...

Page 133: ...y UNCalibrated ENABle STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated ENABle STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated EVENt STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated NTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated NTRansition STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated PTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated PTRansition STATus QUEStionable NTRansition integer STA...

Page 134: ...PUP SYSTem ERRor VERBose OFF ON 0 1 SYSTem ERRor VERBose SYSTem HELP HEADers SYSTem HID SYSTem IDN string SYSTem IDN SYSTem KLOCk OFF ON 0 1 SYSTem KLOCk SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform ADD string SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform CLEar int SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform FREE SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform LOCK int SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform NAME int SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform REPLace int string SYS...

Page 135: ...PRESet TYPE FACTory MODE USER SYSTem PRESet TYPE SYSTem PRESet USER SYSTem PRESet USER ALL SYSTem PRESet USER SAVE SYSTem PRINt THEMe TDColor TDMonochrome FCOLor FMONochrome SYSTem PRINt THEMe SYSTem PUP PROCess SYSTem SECurity USB WPRotect ENABle ON OFF 0 1 SYSTem SECurity USB WPRotect ENABle SYSTem SHOW OFF ERRor SYSTem HARDware LXI HWSTatistics ALIGnment SOFTware CAPPlication SYSTem SHOW SYSTem...

Page 136: ... time TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal2 DELay TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal1 DELay TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal1 DELay COMPensation OFF ON 0 1 TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal2 DELay COMPensation OFF ON 0 1 TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal1 DELay COMPensation TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal2 DELay COMPensation TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal2 DELay STATe OFF ON 0 1 TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal1 DELay STATe OFF ON 0 1 TRIGger SEQuence EXTer...

Page 137: ...SLOPe TRIGger SEQuence OFFSet time TRIGger SEQuence OFFSet TRIGger SEQuence OFFSet STATe OFF ON 0 1 TRIGger SEQuence OFFSet STATe TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst DELay time TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst DELay TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst DELay STATe OFF ON 0 1 TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst DELay STATe TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst LEVel TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst LEVel ABSolute ampl TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst LEVel ABSolute TR...

Page 138: ...r S2Marker S3Marker S4Marker OFF TRIGger TRIGger1 TRIGger2 SEQuence OUTPut TRIGger TRIGger1 TRIGger2 SEQuence OUTPut POLarity POSitive NEGative TRIGger TRIGger1 TRIGger2 SEQuence OUTPut POLarity UNIT ACPower POWer PSD DBMHZ DBMMHZ UNIT ACPower POWer PSD UNIT CHPower POWer PSD DBMHZ DBMMHZ UNIT CHPower POWer PSD 138 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 139: ... are already running This is not true of status commands All the commands in the spectrum analyzer are assumed to be overlapped unless a command description specifically says that it is sequential What Are Status Registers The status system contains multiple registers that are arranged in a hierarchical order The lower level status registers propagate their data to the higher level registers in th...

Page 140: ...s are inputs to the STATus QUEStionable register 2 The summary output from the STATus QUEStionable register is an input to the Status Byte Register See the overall system in Figure at the beginning of this section The STATus OPERation register set has no summarized inputs The inputs to the STATus OPERation CONDition register indicate the real time state of the instrument The STATus OPERation EVENt...

Page 141: ...e monitoring more than one device which supports SRQs you need to have the controller do something else while waiting you can t afford the performance penalty inherent to polling Use polling when your programming language development environment does not support SRQ interrupts you want to write a simple single purpose program and don t want the added complexity of setting up an SRQ handler To moni...

Page 142: ...ster for either type of change Using a Status Register Each bit in a register is represented by a numerical value based on its location See figure below This number is sent with the command to enable a particular bit If you want to enable more than one bit you would send the sum of all the bits that you want to monitor Figure Status Register Bit Values Bit 15 is not used to report status Example 1...

Page 143: ... you must 1 Determine which bit monitors the condition 2 Determine how that bit reports to the request service RQS bit of the status byte 3 Send SCPI commands to enable the bit that monitors the condition and to enable the summary bits that report the condition to the RQS bit 4 Enable the controller to respond to service requests When the condition changes the instrument sets its RQS bit The contr...

Page 144: ... requested service When you read the instrument s status byte register with a serial poll the RQS bit is reset to 0 Other bits in the register are not affected If the status register is configured to SRQ on end of measurement and the measurement is in continuous mode then restarting a measurement INIT command can cause the measuring bit to pulse low This causes an SRQ when you have not actually re...

Page 145: ...d reset by a serial poll The same bit position MSS is read non destructively by the STB command If you serial poll bit 6 it is read as RQS but if you send STB it reads bit 6 as MSS For more information refer to IEEE 488 2 standards section 11 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 145 ...

Page 146: ...his bit position indicates that the standard operation summary bit has been set The standard operation event register can then be read to determine the specific condition that caused this bit to be set To query the status byte register send the command STB The response will be the decimal sum of the bits which are set to 1 For example if bit number 7 and bit number 3 are set to 1 the decimal sum o...

Page 147: ...st The command SRE returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits previously enabled with the SRE integer command The service request enable register presets to zeros 0 Standard Event Status Register The standard event status register contains the following bits W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 147 ...

Page 148: ...ey has been pressed This is true even if the instrument is in local lockout mode 7 A 1 in this bit position indicates that the instrument has been turned off and then on The standard event status register is used to determine the specific event that set bit 5 in the status byte register To query the standard event status register send the command ESR The response will be the decimal sum of the bit...

Page 149: ...n see the OPC command located in the IEEE Common Commands section Bit Condition Operation 0 Calibrating The instrument is busy executing its Align Now process 3 Sweeping The instrument is busy taking a sweep 4 Measuring The instrument is busy making a measurement Measurements often require multiple sweeps They are initiated by keys under the MEASURE key or with the MEASure group of commands The bi...

Page 150: ... commands used for querying or masking that particular register Numeric values for bit patterns can be entered using decimal or hexadecimal representations i e 0 to 32767 is equivalent to H0 to H7FFF It is also equal to all ones 111111111111111 See the SCPI Basics information about using bit patterns for variable parameters Operation Register Operation Condition Query on page 150 Operation Enable ...

Page 151: ...tial command Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Operation Event Query This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Operation Event register The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register The data in this register is latched until it is queried Once queried the register is cleared Mode ...

Page 152: ... All Remote Command STATus OPERation PTRansition integer STATus OPERation PTRansition Example STAT OPER PTR 1 Align Now operation beginning will be reported to the Status Byte Register Preset 32767 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Preset the Status Byte Sets bits in most of the enable and transition registers to their default sta...

Page 153: ...ummary bit bit3 in the Status Byte Register The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable The preset condition is all bits in this enable register set to 0 To have any Questionable Events reported to the Status Byte Register one or more bits need to be set to 1 The Status Byte Event Register should be queried after each measurement to check the Questionable S...

Page 154: ... in the Questionable Event register when the condition register bit has a negative transition 1 to 0 The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Mode All Remote Command STATus QUEStionable NTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable NTRansition Example STAT QUES NTR 16 Temperature summary questionable cleared will be reported to the Status Byte Register Pr...

Page 155: ...tion on page 157 Questionable Calibration Condition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Calibration Condition register The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions Mode All Remote Command STATus QUEStionable CALibration CONDition Example STAT QUES CAL COND Preset 0 Status Bits OPC dependencies Sequential command I...

Page 156: ...data in this register is latched until it is queried Once queried the register is cleared Mode All Remote Command STATus QUEStionable CALibration EVENt Example STAT QUES CAL Preset 0 Status Bits OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Questionable Calibration Negative Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Condition register ...

Page 157: ...16384 Alignment is required Preset 32767 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Questionable Calibration Skipped Register Questionable Calibration Skipped Condition on page 157 Questionable Calibration Skipped Enable on page 158 Questionable Calibration Skipped Event Query on page 158 Questionable Calibration Skipped Negative Transitio...

Page 158: ...le Example STAT QUES CAL SKIP ENAB 1 Can be used to query if an EMI alignment skipped condition is detected Preset 32767 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Questionable Calibration Skipped Event Query This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Calibration Event register The register requires tha...

Page 159: ...mmand determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Skipped Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Skipped Event register when the condition register bit has a positive transition 0 to 1 The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Mode All Remote Command STATus QUEStionable CALibration SKIPped PTRansit...

Page 160: ... Extended Failure Event register which also sets bit 9 of the Questionable Calibration Register The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable Mode All Remote Command STATus QUEStionable CALibration EXTended FAILure ENABle integer STATus QUEStionable CALibration EXTended FAILure ENABle Example STAT QUES CAL EXT FAIL ENAB 1 Can be used to query if an EMI conduc...

Page 161: ...Stionable CALibration EXTended FAILure NTRansition Example STAT QUES CAL EXT FAIL NTR 1 EMI conducted align failure is not required Preset 0 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Positive Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Condition r...

Page 162: ...ted and reflects the current conditions Mode All Remote Command STATus QUEStionable CALibration EXTended NEEDed CONDition Example STAT QUES CAL EXT NEED COND Preset 0 Status Bits OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Enable This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Condition Regist...

Page 163: ...ts OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Negative Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Event register when the condition register bit has a negative transition 1 to 0 T...

Page 164: ...s required Preset 32767 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Questionable Frequency Register Questionable Frequency Condition on page 164 Questionable Frequency Enable on page 165 Questionable Frequency Event Query on page 165 Questionable Frequency Negative Transition on page 165 Questionable Frequency Positive Transition on page 16...

Page 165: ...Frequency Event Query This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Frequency Event register The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register The data in this register is latched until it is queried Once queried the register is cleared Mode All Remote Command STATus QUEStionable...

Page 166: ...m of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Mode All Remote Command STATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansition Example STAT QUES FREQ PTR 2 Frequency Reference became unlocked will be reported to the Frequency Summary of the Status Questionable register Preset 32767 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits OPC dependencies Sequential command Init...

Page 167: ... ENABle integer STATus QUEStionable INTegrity ENABle Example STAT QUES INT ENAB 8 Measurement Uncalibrated Summary will be reported to the Integrity Summary of the Status Questionable register Preset 32767 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Questionable Integrity Event Query This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bi...

Page 168: ...tial command Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Questionable Integrity Positive Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Event register when the condition register bit has a positive transition 0 to 1 The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want t...

Page 169: ...C dependencies Sequential command Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Questionable Integrity Signal Enable This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Signal Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Integrity Signal Event register which also sets the Integrity Summary bit bit 9 in the Questionable Register The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of ...

Page 170: ...e Questionable Integrity Signal Event register when the condition register bit has a negative transition 1 to 0 The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Mode All Remote Command STATus QUEStionable INTegrity SIGNal NTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable INTegrity SIGNal NTRansition Example STAT QUES INT SIGN NTR 4 Burst found will be reported to the...

Page 171: ...ted Positive Transition on page 173 Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition register The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions Mode All Remote Command STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated CONDition Example STAT QUES INT UNC COND Pr...

Page 172: ...it is queried Once queried the register is cleared Mode All Remote Command STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated EVENt Example STAT QUES INT UNC Preset 0 Status Bits OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Negative Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition register wi...

Page 173: ...ger STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated PTRansition Example STAT QUES INT UNC PTR 1 Oversweep Meas Uncal occurred will be reported to the Integrity Summary of the Status Questionable register Preset 32767 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Questionable Power Register Questionable Power Condition on page 173 Questionable Powe...

Page 174: ...le Example STAT QUES POW ENAB 32 50 MHz Input Pwr too High for Cal will be reported to the Power Summary of the Status Questionable register Preset 32767 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Questionable Power Event Query This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Power Event register The register...

Page 175: ...ntial command Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Questionable Power Positive Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Power Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Power Event register when the condition register bit has a positive transition 0 to 1 The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Mo...

Page 176: ...mperature Enable This command determines which bits in the Questionable Temperature Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Temperature Event register which also sets the Temperature Summary bit bit 4 in the Questionable Register The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable Mode All Remote Command STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature ENABle integer S...

Page 177: ...to enable Mode All Remote Command STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature NTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature NTRansition Example STAT QUES TEMP NTR 1 Reference Oscillator Oven not cold will be reported to the Temperature Summary of the Status Questionable register Preset 0 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Questionable Te...

Page 178: ...s Subsystem Temperature Summary of the Status Questionable register Preset 32767 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 178 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 179: ...r up of the TRX and invoking the All alignment The instrument stops any measurement currently underway performs the alignment then restarts the measurement from the beginning similar to pressing the Restart key If an interfering user signal is present at the RF Input the alignment is performed on all subsystems except the RF After completion the Error Condition message Align skipped 50 MHz interfe...

Page 180: ... Align Now All Key Path System Alignments Align Now Mode All Remote Command CALibration ALL CALibration ALL Example CAL Notes CALibration ALL returns 0 if successful CALibration ALL returns 1 if failed CALibration ALL is the same as CAL While Align Now All is performing the alignment bit 0 in the Status Operation register is set Completion or termination will clear bit 0 in the Status Operation re...

Page 181: ...uery until the bit is cleared 3 STATus QUEStionable CALibration CONDition Check if if there are any errors failures in previous calibration procedure Initial S W Revision X 14 20 Clear Status Clears the status byte register It does this by emptying the error queue and clearing all bits in all of the event registers The status byte register summarizes the states of the other registers It is also re...

Page 182: ... command errors bits 2 and 5 ESE Returns a 36 indicating that the query and command status bits are enabled Notes For related commands see the STATus subsystem and SYSTem ERRor NEXT commands Preset 255 State Saved Not saved in state Min 0 Max 255 Status Bits OPC dependencies Event Enable Register of the Standard Event Status Register Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Standard Event Status Regi...

Page 183: ...ed either by polling the OPC bit in SER or by setting up the status system such that a service request SRQ is asserted when the OPC bit is set The OPC query returns a 1 after all the current overlapped commands are complete So it holds off subsequent commands until the 1 is returned then the program continues This query can be used to synchronize events of other instruments on the external bus Rem...

Page 184: ... string of all the installed instrument options It is a comma separated list with quotes such as 503 P03 PFR To be IEEE compliant this command should return an arbitrary ascii variable that would not begin and end with quotes But the quotes are needed to be backward compatible with previous SA products and software So the actual implementation will use arbitrary ascii But quotes will be sent as th...

Page 185: ... the mode to a consistent state with all of the default couplings set Backwards Compatibility Notes In legacy analyzers RST did not set the analyzer to Single but in the X Series it does for compliance with the IEEE 488 2 specification In the X Series RST does not do a CLS clear the status bits and the error queue In legacy analyzers RST used to do the equivalent of SYSTem PRESet CLS and INITiate ...

Page 186: ...ng its contents Remote Command STB Example STB Returns a decimal value for the bits in the status byte register For example if a 16 is returned it indicates that bit 5 is set and one of the conditions monitored in the standard event status register is set Notes See related command CLS Status Bits OPC dependencies Status Byte Register all bits 0 7 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Trigger This ...

Page 187: ...to Continue This command causes the instrument to wait until all overlapped commands are completed before executing any additional commands There is no query form for the command Remote Command WAI Example INIT CONT OFF INIT WAI Sets the instrument to single sweep Starts a sweep and waits for its completion Status Bits OPC dependencies Not global to all remote ports or front panel OPC only conside...

Page 188: ...3 Programming the Test Set Common Commands 188 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 189: ...4 Input Output Functions Undefined variable Primary ProductName W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 189 ...

Page 190: ...he first menu under the Input Output key Key Path Front panel key Remote Command SENSe FEED RF AIQ EMIXer SENSe FEED Example FEED RF FEED Couplings The SENSe FEED RF command turns the calibrator OFF Preset This setting is unaffected by a Preset or power cycle It survives a Mode Preset and mode changes It is set to RF on a Restore Input Output Defaults or Restore System Defaults All State Saved Sav...

Page 191: ... settings are not part of each Mode s State they are saved in the Save State files so that all of the instrument settings can be recalled with Recall State as in legacy instruments Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Remote Command INPut MIXer EXTernal INTernal INPut MIXer Example INP MIX INT INP MIX Notes In legacy analyzers you choose between the Internal mixer or an External Mixer In the X Se...

Page 192: ...ut port RF coupling and current input impedance settings appear on this key as XX YY ZZ where XX is RF RF2 RFIO1 RFIO2 depending on what input is selected only appears on analyzers with multiple RF inputs YY is AC or DC ZZ is 50Ω or 75Ω Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 14 00 Input Z Correction Sets the input impedance for unit conversions This affects the results wh...

Page 193: ...put Remote Command SENSe FEED RF PORT INPut RFIN RFIN2 RFIO1 RFIO2 RFIO3 RFIO4 SENSe FEED RF PORT INPut Example FEED RF PORT RFIN Dependencies This key only appears in models that support multiple inputs If the SCPI command is sent with unsupported parameters in any other model an error is generated 221 1900 Settings conflict option not installed When any input is selected in a measurement that do...

Page 194: ... Specifies using the RFIO 1 port for the current measurement Key Path Input Output RF Input RF Input Port Example FEED RF PORT RFIO1 Dependencies RFIO1 is not available inE6607C If Multiport Adapter is ON Select RF Input to RFIO1 an error message is generated 221 Settings conflict RFIO1 or RFIO2 Port unavailable when Multiport Adapter is ON ReadBack RFIO 1 Initial S W Revision A 05 01 RFIO2 Specif...

Page 195: ... Station or an MS Mobile Station So in the Spectrum Analyzer mode MS and BTS would be grayed out and the only choice would be Ext Preamp Similarly in some of the digital communications applications Ext Preamp will be grayed out and you would have a choice of MS or BTS Key Path Input Output Couplings The Ext Preamp MS and BS keys may be grayed out depending on which measurement is currently selecte...

Page 196: ... over USB whenever it is connected to one of the analyzer s USB ports While the USB Preamplifier is plugged into one of the analyzer s USB ports the analyzer will consider it to be in the signal path of the RF Input and will apply the calibration data from the USB Preamp to measurements taken at the RF Input on 2 input boxes it will be considered to be in the signal path of RF Input 1 it is not su...

Page 197: ...nal Gain Max Mixer Level RF Atten This key is grayed out in modes that do not support MS Preset This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to 0 dB on a Restore Input Output Defaults or Restore System Defaults All State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 100 dB Max 100 dB Readback MS Ext Gain value dB Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe CORRection MS RF LOSS rel_ampl SENSe CO...

Page 198: ...tate Saved Saved in instrument state Min 100 dB Max 100 dB Readback BTS Ext Gain value dB Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe CORRection BTS RF LOSS rel_ampl SENSe CORRection BTS RF LOSS Example CORR BTS LOSS 10 sets the Ext Gain value to 10 dB and subsequently querying LOSS will give 10 dB CORR BTS LOSS 10 sets the Ext Gain value to 10 dB and subsequently querying LOSS will...

Page 199: ...rage buffer from an earlier acquisition You can also share raw data across certain measurements that support this feature The measurements must be capable of storing raw data There are three choices under this menu You can select Inputs which is the same as selecting one of the inputs from the input port for example RF AREF I Q or IFALign Selecting Capture Buffer allows you to use data that has be...

Page 200: ...ou switch to a measurement that does not support this feature Dependencies If you switch to a measurement that does not support this feature then the instrument switches to use Inputs and grays out this key If the grayed out key is pressed it generates a message Readback Stored Data Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Current Meas Capture Buffer Pressing this key stores the raw data of one measu...

Page 201: ...in the trace In the event where there are two correction amplitudes at the center frequency we apply the first one in the table Note that the corrections are applied as the data is taken therefore a trace in View Update Off will not be affected by changes made to the corrections table after the trace is put in View On the RF Input Output panel there are two full duplex RF ports RFIO1 and RFIO2 RF ...

Page 202: ... it to be applied to the data This state transition also automatically turns on Apply Corrections sets it to ON otherwise the correction would not take effect A new sweep is initiated if an amplitude correction is switched on or off Note that changing sending or loading corrections data does NOT directly initiate a sweep however in general these operations will turn corrections on which DOES initi...

Page 203: ...l be affected by the functions Key Path Input Output Corrections Mode SA I Q Analyzer Phase Noise VXA RTSA EMI Receiver DVB T H DTMB DVB T H DTMB W CDMA LTE LTE Adv FDD LTE LTE Adv TDD Sequence Analyzer BTooth Notes The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu Preset Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input Output Defaults Readback Correction 1 Correction 2 Correction 3 C...

Page 204: ... that this means that a correction file with an Antenna Unit can only be loaded into the Corrections 1 register Consequently only for Correction 1 does the dropdown in the Recall dialog include ant and if an attempt is made to load a correction file into any other Correction register which DOES contain an antenna unit a Mass Storage error is generated Preset Unaffected by Preset Set to NOC by Rest...

Page 205: ...ctions Properties Antenna Unit Example CORR CSET ANT PTES Readback dBpT Initial S W Revision A 02 00 dBG Sets the antenna unit to dBG If this correction is turned on and Apply Corrections is on the Y Axis Unit will then be forced to dBG and all other Y Axis Unit selections will be grayed out Key Path Input Output Corrections Properties Antenna Unit Example CORR CSET ANT GAUS Readback dBG Initial S...

Page 206: ...ctors at the frequency of interest center frequency of each bucket are summed and added to the amplitude All trace operations and post processing treat this post summation value as the true signal to use To effect this correction the goal for any particular start and stop frequency is to build a correction trace whose number of points matches the current Sweep Points setting of the instrument whic...

Page 207: ...linear scale like that of the spectrum analyzer this translates to If we interpolate on a linear scale we assume that the two points are connected by a straight line on the linear scale as below W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 207 ...

Page 208: ... 00 Modified at S W Revision A 14 00 Comment Sets an ASCII comment field which will be stored in an exported file Can be displayed in the active function area by selecting as the active function if desired to appear in a screen capture Key Path Input Output Corrections Properties Remote Command SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 8 COMMent text SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 8 COMMent Example CORR CSET1 COMM thi...

Page 209: ... at S W Revision A 14 00 RF Input The port that the current corrections will be applied to Key Path Input Output Corrections Properties RF Port Example CORR CSET RF PORT RFIN Dependencies Not available in E6607C Not available on E6640A with hardware M9431A ReadBack RF IN Initial S W Revision A 05 01 Modified at S W Revision A 14 00 RFOut The port that the current corrections will be applied to Key...

Page 210: ...t Corrections Properties RF Port Example CORR CSET RF PORT RFIO1 SOUR Readback Correct Source Correct Analyzer Sets the corrections for the RFIO1 port to be applied to the analyzer Key Path Input Output Corrections Properties RF Port Example CORR CSET RF PORT RFIO1 ANAL Readback Correct Analyzer Correct Source and Analyzer Sets the corrections for the RFIO1 port to be applied to both the source an...

Page 211: ...yzer Correct Source and Analyzer Sets the corrections for the RFIO2 port to be applied to both the source and the analyzer Key Path Input Output Corrections Properties RF Port Example CORR CSET RF PORT RFIO2 BOTH Readback Correct Source and Analyzer Edit Invokes the integrated editing facility for this correction set When entering the menu the editor window turns on the selected correction is turn...

Page 212: ...its range you should start and end the array at 0 dB The table editor will only operate properly if the analyzer is sweeping because its updates are tied to the sweep system Thus you should not try to use the editor in single sweep and it will be sluggish during compute intensive operations like narrow span FFT sweeps When exiting the edit menu by using the Return key or by pressing an instrument ...

Page 213: ... new point is not yet entered into the underlying table and the data in the row is displayed in light gray Key Path Input Output Corrections Edit Initial S W Revision A 02 00 Delete Point Deletes the currently selected point whether or not that point is being edited and selects the Navigate functionality The point following the currently selected point or the point preceding if there is none will ...

Page 214: ...s Remote Command SENSe CORRection CSET ALL STATe ON OFF 1 0 SENSe CORRection CSET ALL STATe Example SENS CORR CSET ALL OFF This command makes sure that no amplitude corrections are applied regardless of their individual on off settings Preset Not affected by Preset Set to OFF by Restore Input Output Defaults State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S W Revision A 02 00 Delete All Corrections ...

Page 215: ... 0 dB and 20 MHz 1 0 dB for correction set 1 Preset Empty after Restore Input Output Defaults Survives a shutdown or restart of analyzer application including a power cycle State Saved Saved in instrument state Min Freq 0 Hz Amptd 1000 dBm Max Freq 1 THz Amptd 1000 dBm Initial S W Revision A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 14 00 Merge Correction Data Remote Command Only The command takes an ASCII...

Page 216: ...ically switch to the external reference If it senses a 1 pulse per second signal it enters Pulse mode wherein the signal is used to adjust the internal reference When no signal is present it automatically switches to the internal reference No message is generated as the reference switches between pulse external and internal The monitoring of the external reference occurs approximately on 1 millise...

Page 217: ...e Command SENSe ROSCillator SOURce Notes The query SENSe ROSCillator SOURce returns the current switch setting This means 1 If it was set to SENSe but there is no external reference nor 1pps signal so the instrument is actually using the internal reference then this query returns INTernal and not SENSe 2 If it was set to SENSe and there is an external reference present the query returns EXTernal a...

Page 218: ...ample ROSC SOUR TYPE SENS Couplings If set to SENSe and the analyzer senses a 1 pulse per second signal it sets the System Alignments Timebase DAC setting to User This setting survives Preset and Power Cycle but is set to Calibrated on a System Restore Defaults Align or a System Restore Defaults All Readback Sense Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 14 00 Internal The ...

Page 219: ...Cillator EXTernal FREQuency freq SENSe ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency Example ROSC EXT FREQ 20 MHz sets the external reference frequency to 20 MHz but does not select the external reference ROSC SOUR TYPE EXT selects the external reference Dependencies Still available with Internal or Pulse selected to allow setup for when External is in use However the setting has no effect if the Internal Refere...

Page 220: ...put Output Defaults or Restore System Defaults All State Saved Saved in State Readback The current RF Output Port selected is read back to this key Initial S W Revision A 05 01 Modified at S W Revision A 14 00 RF Output The RF port that will be used for the current output Key Path Input Output RF Output Test Set Config RF Output Example FEED RF PORT OUTP RFO Notes On E6640A with hardware M9430A if...

Page 221: ... key allows you to set RF Input of RF Input Port menu and RF Output of RF Output Port menu which will correspond to RFIO3 and RFIO4 Key Path Input Output RF Output Test Set Config Dependencies This menu is available on E6640A with hardware M9430A It s not available on E6640A with hardware M9431A State Saved Saved in State Initial S W Revision A 14 00 RF Input Specify the RF Input port from RFIO3 a...

Page 222: ...utput settings like the frequency reference output trigger output and analog output Key Path Input Output Backwards Compatibility Notes In ESA there was not a user interface to enable the Video Output Analog Output Trigger Output or Gate Output In the X Series each of these physical connectors requires configuration thus the user interface has been added for X Series along with the potential for a...

Page 223: ...in instrument state Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Polarity Sets the output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector to trigger on either the positive or negative polarity Key Path Input Output Output Config Trig 1 2 Output Remote Command TRIGger TRIGger1 TRIGger2 SEQuence OUTPut POLarity POSitive NEGative TRIGger TRIGger1 TRIGger2 SEQuence OUTPut POLarity Example TRIG1 OUTP POL POS Preset...

Page 224: ...ng status bit is true Key Path Input Output Output Config Trig 1 2 Output Example TRIG1 OUTP MEAS Readback Measuring Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Main Trigger Selects the current instrument trigger signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector Key Path Input Output Output Config Trig 1 2 Output Example TRIG1 OUTP MAIN Readback Main Trigger Initial S W Revision Prior to A 0...

Page 225: ... Output Example TRIG1 OUTP OEV Readback Odd Even Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Trig Out Select the type of output signal that will be output from the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connectors Key Path Input Output Output Config Remote Command TRIGger TRIGger1 TRIGger2 SEQuence OUTPut HSWP MEASuring MAIN GATE GTRigger OEVen SPOint SSWeep SSETtled S1Marker S2Marker S3Marker S4Marker OFF TRIGger TR...

Page 226: ...aveform file Key Path Input Output Output Config Trig 1 2 Output Example TRIG1 OUTP S1M ReadBack Marker 1 Initial S W Revision A 05 01 Source Marker 2 Trigger output at marker 2 in current playing Waveform file Key Path Input Output Output Config Trig 1 2 Output Example TRIG1 OUTP S2M ReadBack Marker 2 Initial S W Revision A 05 01 Source Marker 3 Trigger output at marker 3 in current playing Wavef...

Page 227: ...et OFF State Saved Saved in Input Output State Readback line 1 of N selection variable Backwards Compatibility Notes Prior to A 04 00 OFF was the default functionality except when in the Analog Demod application or with Tune and Listen in which case it was DAUDio and there was no selection menu So for backwards compatibility with earlier X Series firmware versions Auto OUTP ANAL AUTO ON will dupli...

Page 228: ...de or measurement for which the selected output does not apply Key Path Input Output Output Config Analog Out Remote Command OUTPut ANALog AUTO OFF ON 0 1 OUTPut ANALog AUTO Example OUTP ANAL AUTO ON Preset ON State Saved Saved in Input Output State Initial S W Revision A 04 00 Off Turns off the analog output Key Path Input Output Output Config Analog Out Example OUTP ANAL OFF causes the analog ou...

Page 229: ...NPut 1 2 LISN PHASe L1 L2 L3 N INPut 1 2 LISN PHASe Example INP LISN PHAS L1 Couplings L2 L3 keys are grayed out when ENV216 is selected If the grayed out key is pressed an advisory message is generated If the equivalent SCPI command is sent this same message is generated as part of a 224 Illegal parameter value must apply ESH2Z5 to make this phase available warning Preset Set to N on a Restore In...

Page 230: ...ive Earth setting that is controlled via the AUX IO port Remote Command INPut 1 2 LISN PEARth GROunded FLOating INPut 1 2 LISN PEARth Example INP LISN PEAR GRO Dependencies Only available for ESH2Z5 This key is grayed out when a v network other than ESH2Z5 is selected If the grayed out key is pressed an advisory message is generated If the equivalent SCPI command is sent this same message is gener...

Page 231: ...5 Mode Functions Undefined variable Primary ProductName W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 231 ...

Page 232: ...1XEV LTE LTETDD LTEAFDD LTEATDD MSR DVB DTMB DCATV ISDBT CMMB WLAN CWLAN CWIMAXOFDM WIMAXFIXED IDEN RLC SCPILC VSA89601 INSTrument SELect Example INST SA Notes The available parameters are dependent upon installed and licensed applications resident in the instrument Parameters given here are an example specific parameters are in the individual Application A list of the valid mode choices is return...

Page 233: ...ded into memory is selected by either pressing that applications Mode key or sending that applications INST SEL command over SCPI there will be a pause while the Application is loaded During this pause a message box that says Loading application please wait is displayed Each application Mode that runs in the X Series signal analyzers consumes virtual memory The various applications consume varying...

Page 234: ...does not load and an error message is returned 225 Out of memory Insufficient resources to load Mode mode name where mode name is the SCPI parameter for the Mode in question for example SA for Spectrum Analyzer Mode Sequence Analyzer Selects the Sequence Analyzer mode for sequenced measurements Depending on licensed applications there may be a number of different measurements available in this mod...

Page 235: ...nts of signals following this standard There are several measurements available in this mode If you are using the Help feature this mode must be currently active to access its detailed information If it is not active exit the Help feature Esc key select the mode and re access Help Key Path Mode Example INST SEL EDGEGSM INST NSEL 13 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 0...

Page 236: ...ve to access its detailed information If it is not active exit the Help feature Esc key select the mode and re access Help Key Path Mode Example INST SEL TDSCDMA INST NSEL 211 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 cdma2000 Selects the cdma2000 mode for general purpose measurements of signals following this standard There are several measurements available in this mode If you are using the Help fea...

Page 237: ...L WLAN INST NSEL 217 Initial S W Revision A 09 491 LTE Advanced FDD As LTE Advanced FDD and LTE modes are converged into one single application the single softkey under Mode menu is designed to select the coverged mode The display mode of the LTE and LTE Advanced FDD are distinguished by the licenses If you are using the Help feature this mode must be currently active to access its detailed inform...

Page 238: ...e for general purpose measurements of WiMAX signals There are several measurements available in this mode If you are using the Help feature this mode must be currently active to access its detailed information If it is not active exit the Help feature Esc key select the mode and re access Help Key Path Mode Example INST SEL WIMAXOFDMA INST NSEL 75 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Application ...

Page 239: ... of commands cannot proceed until the instrument select is complete and the resultant SCPI trees are available Preset Not affected by Preset Set to default mode 1 for SA mode following Restore System Defaults State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Application Mode Catalog Query Remote Command Only Returns a string containing a comma separated list of names of a...

Page 240: ...rent Application Model on page 240 Current Application Revision on page 240 Current Application Options on page 241 Current Application Model Returns a string that is the Model Number of the currently selected application mode Remote Command SYSTem APPLication CURRent NAME Example SYST APPL Notes Query returns a quoted string that is the Model Number of the currently selected application Mode Exam...

Page 241: ... String length is a maximum of 255 characters Preset Not affected by a Preset State Saved Not saved in state per se the value will be the selected application when a Save is invoked Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Application Identification Catalog Remote Commands Only A catalog of the installed and licensed applications Modes can be queried for their identification Application Catalog Numbe...

Page 242: ... APPL CAT REV N9060A Notes Returned value is a quoted string of revision for the provided Model Number The revision will be a null string if the provided Model Number is not installed and licensed Example if SAMS is installed and licensed 1 0 0 0 Preset Not affected by a Preset State Saved Not saved in instrument state Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Application Catalog Options Returns a lis...

Page 243: ... S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 802 16 OFDMA WiMAX WiBro Selects the OFDMA mode for general purpose measurements of WiMAX signals There are several measurements available in this mode If you are using the Help feature this mode must be currently active to access its detailed information If it is not active exit the Help feature Esc key select the mode and re access Help Key Path Mode Example INST S...

Page 244: ...rker functions Easy to use Microsoft Windows graphical user interface For more information see the Agilent 89600 Series VSA web site at www agilent com find 89600vsa To learn more about how to use the 89600 VSA running in the X Series after the 89600 VSA software is running open the 89600 VSA Help and open the About Agilent X Series Signal Analyzer with 89600 VSA Software help topic Key Path Mode ...

Page 245: ...xit the Help feature Esc key select the mode and re access Help Key Path Mode Example INST SEL CDMA2K INST NSEL 10 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 GSM EDGE EDGE Evo Selects the GSM with EDGE mode for general purpose measurements of signals following this standard There are several measurements available in this mode If you are using the Help feature this mode must be currently active to acce...

Page 246: ...re access Help Key Path Mode Example INST SEL LTE INST NSEL 102 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 LTE TDD Selects the LTE TDD mode for general purpose measurements of signals following the LTE TDD standard There are several measurements available in this mode If you are using the Help feature this mode must be currently active to access its detailed information If it is not active exit the Hel...

Page 247: ...re Esc key select the mode and re access Help Key Path Mode Example INST SEL LTEATDD INST NSEL 108 Notes When the N9082A 82B 1FP exists the display mode name is LTE TDD When the N9082A 82B 1FP and N9082B 2FP all exist the display mode name is LTE TDD LTE A TDD Backwards Compatibility SCPI INST SEL LTETDD INST NSEL 105 Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Modified at S W Revision A 14 50 Sequence Analyzer ...

Page 248: ...owing this standard There are several measurements available in this mode If you are using the Help feature this mode must be currently active to access its detailed information If it is not active exit the Help feature Esc key select the mode and re access Help Key Path Mode Example INST SEL WCDMA INST NSEL 9 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 WLAN Selects the WLAN mode for general purpose mea...

Page 249: ...bal Settings while Global Center Freq is On will modify the Global Center Frequency When Global Center Freq is turned Off the Center Freq of the current mode is unchanged but now the Center Freq of each mode is once again independent When Mode Preset is pressed while Global Center Freq is On the Global Center Freq is preset to the preset Center Freq of the current mode This function is reset to Of...

Page 250: ...to Off This also occurs when System Restore Defaults All Modes is pressed Key Path Mode Setup Global Settings Remote Command INSTrument COUPle DEFault Example INST COUP DEF Backwards Compatibility SCPI GLOBal DEFault Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 250 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 251: ...Key Path Mode Setup Radio Mode WCDMA Scope Meas Global Remote Command SENSe RADio STANdard DEVice BTS MS SENSe RADio STANdard DEVice Example RAD STAN DEV MS RAD STAN DEV Preset MS State Saved Saved in instrument state Range BTS MS For E6640A the Radio Device is restricted to MS only BTS is not selectable Backwards Compatibility SCPI SENSe RADio DEVice Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Demod Ac...

Page 252: ...Range On Off Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 03 00 HSPA Enable Allows you to specify the HSPA option enable On or Off This selection is necessary because some of the auto detection functions that expect an HSPA signal are less tolerant when the signal is noisy or distorted When the HSPA signal is not expected turn HSPA Enable off Key Path Mode Setup Demod Mode WCDM...

Page 253: ...ive It gets the mode to a consistent state with all of the default couplings set Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Preset Type Remote Command Only As stated in the Backward Compatibility section to be compatible with ESA PSA the PRESet TYPE command will be implemented as a no op Mode All Remote Command SYSTem PRESet TYPE FACTory MODE USER SYSTem PRESet TYPE Example SYST PRES TYPE FACT Notes Th...

Page 254: ...lobal Center Freq is preset to the preset Center Freq of the current mode This function is reset to Off when the Restore Defaults key is pressed in the Global Settings menu or when System Restore Defaults All Modes is pressed Key Path Mode Setup Global Settings Scope Mode Global Remote Command INSTrument COUPle FREQuency CENTer ALL NONE INSTrument COUPle FREQuency CENTer Example INST COUP FREQ CEN...

Page 255: ...5 Mode Functions Mode Setup Example INST COUP DEF Backwards Compatibility SCPI GLOBal DEFault Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 255 ...

Page 256: ...5 Mode Functions Mode Setup 256 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 257: ...6 System Functions Undefined variable Primary ProductName W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 257 ...

Page 258: ...ser The File Explorer is a separate Windows application so to return to the analyzer once you are in the File Explorer you may either Exit the File Explorer by clicking on the red X in the upper right corner with a mouse Or use Alt Tab press and hold the Alt key and press and release the Tab key until the Analyzer logo is showing in the window in the center of the screen as shown above then releas...

Page 259: ...ion which causes the analyzer display to fill the screen Once the application is maximized this key is replaced by the Restore Down key Key Path File Mode All Notes No equivalent remote command for this key State Saved No Initial S W Revision A 05 01 Restore Down This key allows you to Restore Down the Instrument Application and reverses the action taken by Maximize This key is only visible when t...

Page 260: ...Display System Display Settings Theme The Theme control has a corresponding SCPI command Parameter Name Print Themes Parameter Type Enum Mode All Remote Command SYSTem PRINt THEMe TDColor TDMonochrome FCOLor FMONochrome SYSTem PRINt THEMe Example SYST PRIN THEM FCOL Setup SYSTem DEFault MISC Preset FCOL not part of Preset but is reset by Restore Misc Defaults or Restore System Defaults All and sur...

Page 261: ...own This key allows you to Restore Down the Instrument Application and reverses the action taken by Maximize This key is only visible when the application has been maximized and after the Restore Down action has been completed this key is replaced by the Maximize key Key Path File Mode All Notes No equivalent remote command for this key State Saved No Initial S W Revision A 05 01 Minimize The Mini...

Page 262: ...ion A dialog box is used to confirm that you intended to exit the application Key Path File Mode All Notes The Instrument Application willclose No further SCPI commands can be sent Use with caution Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 262 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 263: ... is already in progress Sending HCOPy ABORt will cause the analyzer to stop sending data to the printer although the printer may continue or even complete the print depending on how much data was sent to the printer before the user sent the ABORt command Key Path Front panel key Remote Command HCOPy IMMediate Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Key Path SCPI command only Remote Command HCOPy ABO...

Page 264: ...The list of errors displayed in the Errors screen does not automatically refresh You must press the Refresh key or leave the screen and return to it to refresh it History brings up a screen displaying the event log in chronological order with the newest event at the top The history queue can hold up to 100 messages if a message has a repeat count greater than 1 it only counts once against this num...

Page 265: ...age or Status lines and are logged to the event queue They never appear as text in the graticule area as they sometimes do in previous analyzers and they are never displayed in the settings panel at the top of the screen as they sometimes do by changing color in previous analyzers As a consequence of the above the user can only see one status condition the most recently generated without looking a...

Page 266: ...ional information is returned when you send the SYSTem ERRor query The additional information consists of the characters that stimulated the error This can aid you in debugging your test programs by indicating where in the parsing of a SCPI command the instrument encountered an invalid command or query Specifically with Verbose SCPI on the SYSTem ERRor query is expanded to show the SCPI data recei...

Page 267: ...current status conditions Mode Preset does not clear the error queue Restore System Defaults will clear all error queues CLS only clears the queue if it is sent remotely and RST does not affect any error queue Switching modes does not affect any error queues Key Path System Show Errors Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Status See History on page 266 Input Overload Enable Remote Command Only In...

Page 268: ...0 1 OFF ON Example SYST ERR OVER 1 Enable overload errors Preset Set to OFF by Restore Misc Defaults no Overload errors go to SCPI State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S W Revision A 10 01 Power Up Remote Command Only This serves to show the errors encountered during the application boot up such as mismatch FW FPGA missing Calibration data missing hardware and construction errors Remote C...

Page 269: ...rior to A 02 00 Show System contents Remote Command Only A remote command is available to obtain the contents of the Show System screen the entire contents not just the currently displayed page Remote Command SYSTem CONFigure SYSTem Example SYST CONF Notes The output is an IEEE Block format of the Show System contents Each line is separated with a new line character Initial S W Revision Prior to A...

Page 270: ...s The screen is formatted into two groupings product descriptive information and hardware information The hardware information is listed in a table format The Previous Page is grayed out if the first page of information is presently displayed The Next Page menu key is grayed out if the last page is information is presently displayed Key Path System Show Mode All Example SYST SHOW HARD Initial S W ...

Page 271: ... the instrument signal analyzer Mode All Remote Command SYSTem OPTions Example SYST OPT Notes The return string is a comma separated list of the installed options For example 503 P03 PFR SYSTem OPTions and OPT are the same State Saved No Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Lock the Front panel keys Remote Command Only Disables the instrument keyboard to prevent local input when the instrument is...

Page 272: ...with the New Line character hex 0x0A Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 SCPI Version Query Remote Command Only Returns the SCPI version number with which the instrument complies The SCPI industry standard changes regularly This command indicates the version used when the instrument SCPI commands were defined Remote Command SYSTem VERSion Example SYST VERS Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 D...

Page 273: ...digit representation of minute second is the two digit representation of second Unless the current account has Power User or Administrator privileges an error will be generated by this command and no action will be taken Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Module Name Remote Command Only Query only This will return the name of the instance as displayed on the xSA main window Mode All Remote Comm...

Page 274: ...ery only This will return the mnemonic of the instance as used in the command line Process mnemonic argument Mode All Remote Command SYSTem MODule MNEMonic Example SYST MOD MNEM Notes This will return the mnemonic of the instance as used in the command line Process mnemonic argument Preset Not affected by Preset and Restore System Defaults Misc State Saved No Initial S W Revision A 13 80 Module Li...

Page 275: ...e command SYST MOD ENAB mnemonic 0 1 will disable enable the configuration Notes Enabling a configuration that does not have a HW will result in run time errors when trying to start that configuration Trying to disable the default configuration will result in the error 221 Setting conflict Cannot disable default process configuration mnemonic Example SCPI syst mod enab TRX1 1 SCPI syst mod enab TR...

Page 276: ...ill enable this confutation Example SCPI syst mod def TRX1 SCPI syst mod enab TRX2 0 SCPI syst mod enab TRX2 0 SCPI syst mod def TRX2 SCPI syst mod enab TRX2 1 SCPI syst mod def TRX2 Mode All Remote Command SYSTem MODule DEFault SYSTem MODule DEFault mnemonic Example SYST MOD DEF SYST MOD DEF TRX1 Preset Not affected by Preset reset to Left with Restore System Defaults Misc State Saved No Initial ...

Page 277: ...er on The options are Mode and Input Output Defaults User Preset and Last State In products that run multiple instances of the X Series Application the same Power On type is shared between all the instances Key Path System Mode All Remote Command SYSTem PON TYPE MODE USER LAST SYSTem PON TYPE Example SYST PON TYPE MODE Preset This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to Mode on a Restore System De...

Page 278: ... is shared between all the instances An instrument could never power up for the first time in User Preset Key Path System Power On Mode All Example SYST PON TYPE USER Readback Text User Preset Backwards Compatibility Notes Power On User Preset will cause the instrument to power up in the power on mode not the last mode the instrument was in prior to shut down Also Power On User Preset will User Pr...

Page 279: ... Text Last State Backwards Compatibility Notes It is no longer possible to power up the analyzer in the last mode the analyzer was running with that mode in the preset state ESA PSA SYST PRESET TYPE MODE with SYST PON PRESET You can power on the analyzer in the last mode the instrument was running in its last state SYST PON TYPE LAST or you can specify the mode to power up in its preset state SYST...

Page 280: ... a Mode that is not preloaded is selected using the Mode menu or sending SCPI commands there will be a pause while the Application is loaded During this pause a message that says Loading application please wait is displayed Once loaded the application stays loaded so the next time you select it during a session there is no delay Preloading enables you to preload at startup to eliminate the runtime...

Page 281: ...n here is Virtual memory and is a limitation imposed by the operating system not by the amount of physical memory you have in your analyzer You select applications to preload by checking the boxes on the left Checked applications preload at startup The colored fuel bar indicates the total memory required when all the checked applications are loaded either preloaded or selected during runtime Here ...

Page 282: ...plication down in the list thus moving the selected application later in the Mode Menu Key Path System Power On Configure Applications Initial S W Revision A 02 00 Select Deselect Toggles the currently highlighted application in the list Key Path System Power On Configure Applications Initial S W Revision A 02 00 Save Changes and Exit Applies the configuration of the applications list The marked a...

Page 283: ...ime to resume sending commands to the instrument The wait time will be dependent upon which applications are pre loaded Initial S W Revision A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 04 00 Exit Without Saving Pressing this key will exit the Configure Applications utility without saving your changes Key Path System Power On Configure Applications Initial S W Revision A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 04 ...

Page 284: ...op which brings up a dialog box similar to the one under the System Power On Configure Applications key allowing you to choose which licensed applications are to be loaded when the analyzer program starts up This dialog box has mouse buttons on it that do the job the softkeys normally do in the System Power On Configure Applications menu In products that run multiple instances of the X Series Appl...

Page 285: ...cations load list is unchanged Preset Not affected by Preset State Saved Not saved in instrument state Initial S W Revision A 02 00 Configuration Memory Available Remote Command Only This remote command is used to query the amount of Virtual Memory remaining Remote Command SYSTem PON APPLication VMEMory AVAilable Example SYST PON APPL VMEM Preset Not affected by Preset Initial S W Revision A 02 00...

Page 286: ...s displayed in the system Settings Panel along the top of the display including a warning icon for conditions that may cause specifications to be impacted Key Path System Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Align Now Accesses alignment processes that are immediate action operations They perform complete operations and run until they are complete Key Path System Alignments Initial S W Revision Pr...

Page 287: ... the Error Conditions Align skipped 50 MHz interference and Align skipped 4 8 GHz interference are cleared the Error Condition Align Now RF required is cleared and bits 11 and 12 are cleared in the Status Questionable Calibration register Align Now All can be interrupted by pressing the Cancel ESC front panel key or remotely with Device Clear followed by the ABORt SCPI command When this occurs the...

Page 288: ... Example CAL Notes CAL returns 0 if successful CAL returns 1 if failed CALibration ALL is the same as CAL See additional remarks described with CALibration ALL Everything about CALibration ALL is synonymous with CAL including all conditions status register bits and couplings Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Mode All Remote Command CALibration ALL NPENding Example CAL NPEN Notes CALibration AL...

Page 289: ...ing the Cancel ESC front panel key or remotely with Device Clear followed by the ABORt SCPI command When this occurs the Error Condition message Align Now All required is generated and bit 14 is set in the Status Questionable Condition register This is because new alignment data may be used for an individual subsystem but not a full new set of data for all subsystems In EXM Source ARB play will be...

Page 290: ...intain specifications This alignment typically takes 2 minutes to complete This operation might be desirable if the alignments had been set to not include RF alignments or if previous RF alignments could not complete because of interference which has since been removed If an interfering user signal is present at the RF Input the alignment will terminate and generate the Error Condition message Ali...

Page 291: ...l will result in bits 11 and 12 to be set in the Status Questionable Calibration register to indicate Align Now RF is required An interfering user supplied signal will result in the instrument requiring an Align Now RF with the interfering signal removed Couplings Initializes the time for the Last Align Now RF Time Records the temperature for the Last Align Now RF Temperature Status Bits OPC depen...

Page 292: ...gnment and returns 0 if successful CAL SOUR Initiates an Alignment and returns 1 if failed Couplings Initializes the time for the Last Align Source Now All Time Records the temperature for the Last Align Source Now All Temperature Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Mode All Remote Command CALibration INTernal SOURce ALL NPENding Example CAL INT SOUR NPEN Notes CALibration INTernal SOURce ALL NPENding is...

Page 293: ...The query form of the remote commands CALibration IF will invoke the alignment of the IF subsystem and return a success or failure value Note In EXM Source ARB play will be turned off and the source states will not be restored after IF Alignment Mode All Remote Command CALibration IF CALibration IF Example CAL IF Notes CALibration IF returns 0 if successful CALibration IF returns 1 if failed While...

Page 294: ...ion Values which are displayed are only updated when the Show Alignment Statistics screen is invoked they are not updated while the Show Alignment Statistics screen is being displayed The remote commands that access this information obtain current values An example of the Show Alignment Statistics screen would be similar to A successful Align Now RF will set the Last Align RF temperature to the cu...

Page 295: ...lue is invalid if using default alignment data Align Now All required State Saved No Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Key Path Visual annotation in the Show Alignment Statistics screen Mode All Remote Command CALibration TIME LALL Example CAL TIME LALL Notes Value is the elapsed time in seconds since the last successful Align Now All or Align Now All but RF was executed State Saved No Initial...

Page 296: ... in the Show Alignment Statistics screen Mode All Remote Command CALibration TEMPerature LRF Example CAL TEMP LRF Notes Value is in degrees Centigrade at which the last successful Align Now RF was executed either individually or as a component of Align Now All State Saved No Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Key Path SCPI Only Mode All Remote Command CALibration TIME LIF Example CAL TIME LIF N...

Page 297: ...th Visual annotation in the Show Alignment Statistics screen Mode All Remote Command CALibration TEMPerature SOURce LALL Example CAL TEMP SOUR LALL Notes Value is in degrees Centigrade at which the last successful Align Now Sourcewas performed on the instrument State Saved No Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Restore Align Defaults Initializes the alignment user interface settings not alignment data to...

Page 298: ...plete Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Execute Expired Alignments Remote Command Only Alignments can be expired in the situation where Auto Align is in the state of Partial or Off This feature runs the alignments that have expired This is different than performing an Align All Now operation Align All Now performs an alignment of all subsystems regardless of whether they are needed or not with...

Page 299: ...ce Telnet port 5223 socket port 5225 SICL server 2 and HiSLIP server 2 will be assigned to third instance Telnet port 5323 socket port 5325 SICL server 3 and HiSLIP server 3 will be assigned to the fourth instance Key Path System I O Config Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 SCPI Telnet Turns the SCPI LAN telnet capability On or Off allowing you to limit SCPI access over LAN through telnet Key ...

Page 300: ...address of your analyzer inst0 Instrument Logical Unit The unique integer assigned to your analyzer when using SICL LAN 8 Emulated GPIB Name The name same as the remote SICL address of the device used when communicating with your analyzer gpib7 Emulated GPIB Logical Unit The unique integer assigned to your device when it is being controlled using SICL LAN 8 Emulated GPIB Address The emulated GPIB ...

Page 301: ...with a Restore System Defaults Misc State Saved No Range On Off Initial S W Revision A 11 00 SCPI Socket Control Port Remote Command Only Returns the TCP IP port number of the control socket associated with the SCPI socket session This query enables you to obtain the unique port number to open when a device clear is to be sent to the instrument Every time a connection is made to the SCPI socket th...

Page 302: ...vives shutdown and restart of the software and therefore survives a power cycle Preset This is unaffected by Preset but is set to Factory on a Restore System Defaults Misc State Saved No Initial S W Revision A 06 00 Modified at S W Revision x 14 50 Factory This key selects the factory setting for example Agilent Technologies E6640 MY00012345 E 14 50 where the fields are manufacturer model number s...

Page 303: ...current Mode has also specified a custom response in which case the current Mode s custom IDN response takes precedence over the System s but only while that Mode is the current Mode It survives shutdown and restart of the software and therefore survives a power cycle Null string as parameter restores the Factory setting example SYST IDN Preset This is unaffected by Preset but is set to the origin...

Page 304: ...is Key Path System Restore System Defaults Example SYST DEF INP Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Restore Power On Defaults This selection causes the Power On settings to be a reset to their default value This level of Restore System Defaults does not affect any other system settings mode settings and does not cause a mode switch The Power On settings and their default values are Power On Type...

Page 305: ...ues The confirmation dialog is Key Path System Restore System Defaults Example SYST DEF ALIG Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Restore Misc Defaults This selection causes miscellaneous system settings to be reset to their default values With this reset you lose the GPIB address and it is reset to 18 so this should be used with caution This level of Restore System Defaults does not affect any o...

Page 306: ...y Language English System Annotation ON Display Theme TDColor System IDN Response Factory result of IDN System IDN Response selection Factory Confirmation is required to restore the factory default values The confirmation dialog is Key Path System Restore System Defaults Example SYST DEF MISC Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision x 14 50 306 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applica...

Page 307: ... An All Mode will cause the currently running measurement to be aborted mode switch to the power on mode and activate the default measurement for the power on mode It gets the mode to a consistent state with all of the default couplings set Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 All This performs a comprehensive reset of ALL analyzer settings to their factory default values It resets all of the sys...

Page 308: ...tings Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 14 00 Control Panel Opens the Windows Control Panel The Control Panel is used to configure certain elements of Windows that are not configured through the hardkey softkey System menus This feature is not available if option SF1 is installed The Control Panel is a separate Windows application so to return to the analyzer once yo...

Page 309: ...ing the License Explorer Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Remote Comman d SYSTem LKEY OptionInfo LicenseInfo Example SYST LKEY N9073A 1FP 027253AD27F83CDA5673A9BA5F427FDA5E4F25AEB1017638211AC9F60D9C639FE539735909C551DE0 A91 Notes The OptionInfo contains the feature and the version You must specify the feature but can omit the version If you omit the version the system regards it as the latest...

Page 310: ...trary block data of all the installed instrument licenses The format of each license is as follows Feature Version Signature Expiration Date Serial Number for Transport Return Value Example 3136 N9073A 1FP 1 000 B043920A51CA N9060A 2FP 1 000 4D1D1164BE64 N9020A 508 1 000 389BC042F920 N9073A 1F1 1 000 5D71E9BA814C 13 aug 2005 arbitrary block data is NMMM data Where N is the number of digits that de...

Page 311: ...t is prohibited This user interface is a convenient way for the customer to disable write access to USB Key Path System Security Mode All Scope Mode Global Remote Command SYSTem SECurity USB WPRotect ENABle ON OFF 0 1 SYSTem SECurity USB WPRotect ENABle Example SYST SEC USB WPR ON Will set USB ports to Read only Notes When the USB ports are in Read only mode then no data can be stored to USB inclu...

Page 312: ...d only Initial S W Revision A 04 00 Diagnostics The Diagnostics key in the System menu gives you access to basic diagnostic capabilities of the instrument Key Path System Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Show Hardware Statistics Provides a display of various hardware statistics The statistics include the following High and Low temperature extremes Elapsed time that the instrument has been pow...

Page 313: ...pdated while the screen is displayed The tabular data should be directly printable Key Path System Diagnostics Mode All Notes The values displayed on the screen are only updated upon entry to the screen and not updated while the screen is being displayed Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 SCPI for Show Hardware Statistics Remote Commands Only Each of the hardware statistic items can be queriedv...

Page 314: ...ummary file can be retrieved from the instrument using the MMEM set of SCPI command once you have the fully qualified the path and file name If the self test fails the following error message will be generated 330 Self test failed see log file E Agilent Instrument FECTestLog txt If the self test passes an advisory message FEC self test completed successfully is generated Key Path System Diagnostic...

Page 315: ...isplay is as follows FEC Self Test Results Produce Number E6607C Serial Number MY51380437 Instrument S W 11 16 2012 2 51 19 PM FpgaVersionTest Date Time GMT Name MeasValue ValidRange Result 11 23 2012 16 13 56 Analog_FPGA 16 000 16 000 Pass 11 23 2012 16 13 56 Digital_FPGA 50 000 46 000 Pass 11 23 2012 16 13 56 CRFS_FPGA 38 000 38 000 Pass PowerSupplyTest Date Time GMT Name MeasValue ValidRange Re...

Page 316: ...k format of the Show FEC Self Test Results contents Each line is separated with a new line character Initial S W Revision A 12 50 Keysight Converged PSA IP Address SYSTem COMMunicate LAN ADDRess string SYSTem COMMunicate LAN ADDRess SYSTem COMMunicate LAN SELF IP string SYSTem COMMunicate LAN SELF IP Gateway SYSTem COMMunicate LAN DGATeway string SYSTem COMMunicate LAN DGATeway SYSTem COMMunicate ...

Page 317: ...vision Prior to A 02 00 System Powerdown Remote Command Only Remote Command SYSTem PDOWn NORMal FORCe Notes Shuts down the instrument in the normal way NORMal or forced way FORCe In case there is another application with modified data pending for saving the application prompt the user The system waits until the user responds in the normal mode It will go off after 20 seconds of wait in the force m...

Page 318: ...ices mice The front panel Local key Cancel Esc has no effect if Klock is ON Mode All Remote Command SYSTem KLOCk OFF ON 0 1 SYSTem KLOCk Example SYST KLOC ON Notes Keyboard lock remains in effect until turned off or the instrument is power cycled Preset Initialized to OFF at startup unaffected by Preset State Saved No Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 List SCPI Commands Remote Command Only Out...

Page 319: ...epending on the month and year Unless the current account has Power User or Administrator privileges an error will be generated by this command and no action will be taken Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Time Remote Command Only Sets or queries the time in the instrument Mode All Remote Command SYSTem TIME hour minute second SYSTem TIME Example SYST TIME 13 05 26 Notes hour is the two digit ...

Page 320: ...n a VISA address hlislip Mode All Remote Command SYSTem MODule INDex Example SYST MOD IND Notes It returns 0 if this instance s device number in a VISA address is 0 It returns 1 if this instance s device number in a VISA address is 1 It returns 2 if this instance s device number in a VISA address is 2 It returns 3 if this instance s device number in a VISA address is 3 Preset Not affected by Prese...

Page 321: ...led 1 5123 5125 3575 E6640AModules config TRX2 TRX3 TRX3 Disabled 2 5223 5225 3576 E6640AModules config TRX3 TRX4 TRX4 Disabled 3 5323 5325 3577 E6640AModules config TRX4 Preset Not affected by Preset reset to 0 with Restore System Defaults Misc State Saved No Initial S W Revision A 13 80 Module Enable Remote Command Only Query and command The query SYST MOD ENAB mnemonic returns 0 for disabled 1 ...

Page 322: ...Initial S W Revision A 13 80 Module Default Remote Command Only Query and command The query SYST MOD DEF returns the mnemonic of the default configuration The command SYST MOD DEF mnemonic will set that configuration as the default If the configuration was disabled the module default command on it will enable this confutation Example SCPI syst mod def TRX1 SCPI syst mod enab TRX2 0 SCPI syst mod e...

Page 323: ...MODule DEFault mnemonic Example SYST MOD DEF SYST MOD DEF TRX1 Preset Not affected by Preset reset to Left with Restore System Defaults Misc State Saved No Initial S W Revision A 13 80 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 323 ...

Page 324: ...6 System Functions System 324 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 325: ...7 Trigger Functions Undefined variable Primary ProductName W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 325 ...

Page 326: ...ent SEQuence SOURce EXTernal1 EXTernal2 IMMediate LINE FRAMe RFBurst VIDeo IF ALARm LAN IQMag IDEMod QDEMod IINPut QINPut AIQMag TV TRIGger measurement SEQuence SOURce where measurement is the measurement for which you wish to set the Source blank for the Swept SA measurement Example TRIG ACP SOUR EXT1 Selects the external 1 trigger input for the ACP measurement and the selected input TRIG SOUR VI...

Page 327: ...his backwards compatibility command does not apply to the monitor spectrum log plot and spot frequency measurements Backwards Compatibility SCPI SENSe measurement TRIGger SOURce IF In earlier instruments the parameter IF was used by apps for the video trigger so using the IF parameter selects VIDeo triggering Sending IF in the command causes VID to be returned to a query Backwards Compatibility SC...

Page 328: ...ed with radio device When radio device changes to BTS trigger source will be changed to EXTernal1 When radio device changes to MS trigger source will be set as RFBurst for RF or IQ Mag for BBIQ When TriggerSource is RFBurst or IQ Mag Measure Interval is grayed out ACP SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB LTE LTETDD CMMB ISDB T Digital Cable TV MSR IMM IQ not supported Tx Power SA ...

Page 329: ... BTS External 1 MS Periodic Timer GSM EDGE IQMag All others IMMMediate PVT WIMAXOFDMA RFB IMM EVM WIMAXOFDMA DVB T H DTMB LTE LTETDD CMMB ISDB T Digital Cable TV All but CMMB IMM CMMB Periodic Timer All but CMMB IMM CMMB External 1 LTE LTETDD supports Free Run Video and External 1 only SPEC BASIC IMM IMM LOG Plot PN IMM IQ not supported Spot Freq PN IMM IQ not supported GMSK PVT EDGE GSM RFB IMM G...

Page 330: ... used for the specified measurement when RF is the selected input The RF trigger source can be queried and changed even while another input is selected but it is inactive until RF becomes the selected input Note the inclusion of the measurement parameter in the command below Because each measurement remembers its own Trigger Source the command must be qualified with the measurement name Note that ...

Page 331: ...rned Available ranges and presets can vary from mode to mode Status Bits OPC dependencies The Status Operation Register bit 5 Waiting for Trigger is set at the same time as the Sweeping or Measuring bit is set It is cleared when the trigger actually occurs that is after the trigger event occurs and all the applicable trigger criteria have been met A corresponding pop up message Waiting for trigger...

Page 332: ...y with the selected trigger conditions are met generally when your trigger source signal meets the specified trigger level and polarity requirements In FFT measurements the trigger controls when the data acquisition begins for FFT conversion For each of the trigger sources you may define a set of operational parameters or settings which will be applied when that source is selected as the current t...

Page 333: ...Path Trigger Example TRIG SOUR IMM Swept SA measurement TRIG meas SOUR IMM Measurements other than Swept SA State Saved Saved in instrument state Status Bits OPC dependencies The Status Operation Register bit 5 Waiting for Trigger is set at the same time as the Sweeping or Measuring bit is set It is cleared when the trigger actually occurs that is after the trigger event occurs and all the applica...

Page 334: ...pplicable trigger criteria have been met A corresponding pop up message Waiting for trigger is generated if no trigger signal appears after approximately 2 sec This message goes away when a trigger signal appears Backwards Compatibility Notes In the past the Average detector was not available when Video triggering was on and consequently functions that set the detector to average such as Marker No...

Page 335: ...ved in instrument state Min 170 dBm Max 30 dBm Default Unit Depends on the current selected Y axis unit Backwards Compatibility SCPI TRIGger SEQuence IF LEVel TRIGger SEQuence IF LEVel Backwards Compatibility Notes This alias is provided for backward compatibility with VSA PSA comms apps Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Trig Slope Controls the trigger polarity It is set positive to trigger on...

Page 336: ...EQuence VIDeo DELay time TRIGger SEQuence VIDeo DELay TRIGger SEQuence VIDeo DELay STATe OFF ON 0 1 TRIGger SEQuence VIDeo DELay STATe Example TRIG VID DEL STAT ON TRIG VID DEL 100 ms Notes Video trigger delay may be set to negative values in time domain FFT and even swept It makes intuitive sense in time domain and works well in FFT mode where the bandwidth of the filter before the video trigger ...

Page 337: ...e Example TRIG OFFS ON TRIG OFFS 100 ms Notes These are ESA commands for trigger offset that allowed you to use a positive or negative delay when in zero span and in a Res BW 1 kHz For ESA compatibility X series analyzers keep track of this offset and adds it to the Trigger Delay for VIDeo LINE EXTernal1 or EXTernal2 whenever the value is sent to the hardware if in Zero Span and RBW 1 kHz Preset O...

Page 338: ...w sweep measurement Key Path Trigger External 1 Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal1 LEVel level TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal1 LEVel Example TRIG EXT1 LEV 0 4 V Couplings This same level is used for the Ext1 trigger source in the Trigger menu for the Ext1 selection in the Periodic Timer sync source in the Trigger menu and in the Gate Source menu and also for the Ext1 selection in the Gate Source...

Page 339: ...ept spans Key Path Trigger External 1 Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal1 DELay time TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal1 DELay TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal1 DELay STATe OFF ON 0 1 TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal1 DELay STATe Example TRIG EXT1 DEL STAT ON TRIG EXT1 DEL 100 ms Notes Video trigger delay may be set to negative values in time domain FFT and even swept It makes intuitive sense in time domain and wo...

Page 340: ...ero span measurements If the SCPI command is sent when the key is blanked an error is returned 221 Settings conflict Feature not supported for this measurement In analyzers shipping N9060A this feature requires N9060A 7FP Preset OFF State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S W Revision A 11 00 External 2 Pressing this key when it is not selected selects an external input signal as the trigger...

Page 341: ...EXTernal2 LEVel Example TRIG EXT2 LEV 1 1 V Couplings This same level is used for the Ext2 trigger source in the Trigger menu for the Ext2 selection in the Periodic Timer sync source in the Trigger menu and in the Gate Source menu and also for the Ext2 selection in the Gate Source menu Preset 1 2 V State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 5 V Max 5 V Default Unit V Backwards Compatibility SCPI TR...

Page 342: ...in time domain FFT and even swept It makes intuitive sense in time domain and works well in FFT mode where the bandwidth of the filter before the video trigger is about 1 25 span In swept spans negative settings of Trig Delay are treated as a zero setting within the internal hardware and the advisory message Neg Trig Delay unavailable in Swept Mode zero delay used is generated when such a delay is...

Page 343: ... Pressing this key when it is already selected accesses the RF Burst trigger setup menu In some models a variety of burst trigger circuitry is available resulting in various available burst trigger bandwidths The analyzer automatically chooses the appropriate trigger path based on the hardware configuration and other settings of the analyzer Key Path Trigger Example TRIG SOUR RFB Swept SA measurem...

Page 344: ...below the displayed signal level rather than simply to the displayed signal level This is only true for Amplitude Corrections not External Gain or Ref Level Offset functions If mode is Bluetooth the default value is 50 dBm Couplings This same level is used for the RF Burst trigger source in the Trigger menu for the RF Burst selection in the Periodic Timer sync source in the Trigger menu and in the...

Page 345: ...iffers from the previous by more than 0 5 dB the new level is sent to the hardware otherwise it is not updated to avoid slowing down the acquisition Steps 2 and 3 repeat for subsequent measurements Key Path Trigger RF Burst Scope Meas Global Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst LEVel RELative rel_ampl TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst LEVel RELative Example TRIG RFB LEV REL 10 dB sets the trigger level ...

Page 346: ...iggers Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Trig Delay Controls a time delay during which the analyzer will wait to begin a sweep after meeting the trigger criteria You can use negative delay to pre trigger the instrument in time domain or FFT but not in swept spans Key Path Trigger RF Burst Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst DELay time TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst DELay TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst...

Page 347: ...eping or Measuring bit is set It is cleared when the trigger actually occurs that is after the trigger event occurs and all the applicable trigger criteria have been met A corresponding pop up message Waiting for trigger is generated if no trigger signal appears after approximately 2 sec This message goes away when a trigger signal appears Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Periodic Timer Trigg...

Page 348: ...rigger to Ext1 and use then Ext1 as the sync source for the periodic timer The figure below illustrates this third example The top trace represents the even second clock It causes the periodic timer to synchronize with the leading edge shown The analyzer trigger occurs at a time delayed by the accumulated offset from the period trigger event The periodic timer continues to run and triggers continu...

Page 349: ...arameter is changed you are changing that accumulated offset You can reset the displayed offset using Reset Offset Display Changing the display does not change the value of the accumulated offset and you can still make additional changes to accumulated offset To avoid ambiguity we define that an increase in the offset parameter either from the knob or the SCPI adjust command serves to delay the ti...

Page 350: ...value defined with the Offset key Pressing this key redefines the currently displayed trigger location as the new trigger point that is 0 0 s offset The Offset key can then be used to add offset relative to this new timing Key Path Trigger Periodic Timer Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence FRAMe OFFSet DISPlay RESet Example TRIG FRAM OFFS DISP RES Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Sync Source Sele...

Page 351: ...he signal source frequency is locked to the analyzer frequency reference Key Path Trigger Periodic Timer Sync Source Example TRIG FRAM SYNC OFF Readback Off Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 External 1 Pressing this key when it is not selected selects an external input signal as the trigger A new sweep measurement will start when the external trigger condition is met using the external 1 input...

Page 352: ...sync source in the Trigger menu and in the Gate Source menu and also for the Ext1 selection in the Gate Source menu Preset 1 2 V State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 5 V Max 5 V Default Unit V Backwards Compatibility SCPI TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal LEVel For backward compatibility the parameter EXTernal is mapped to EXTernal1 Backwards Compatibility SCPI TRIGger SEQuence FRAMe EXTernal1 LEVel ...

Page 353: ...re is no second External input In these models the External 2 key is blanked and the EXTernal2 parameter will generate a Hardware missing Not available for this model number message Grayed out if in use by Point Trigger in the Source Setup menu Forced to Free Run if already selected and Point Trigger is set to External 2 State Saved Saved in instrument state Status Bits OPC dependencies The Status...

Page 354: ... for the trigger source in the Trigger menu and for the period timer sync source in the Trigger menu and in the Gate Source menu Preset POSitive State Saved Saved in instrument state Backwards Compatibility SCPI TRIGger SEQuence FRAMe EXTernal2 SLOPe Backwards Compatibility Notes The legacy TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe command affects the slopes for the VID LINE EXT1 EXT2 and RFB triggers Initial S W Re...

Page 355: ...he factory default was set to accommodate the expected IF levels for the RF path Key Path Trigger RF Burst Scope Meas Global Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst LEVel ABSolute ampl TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst LEVel ABSolute Example TRIG RFB LEV ABS 10 dBm sets the trigger level of the RF burst envelope signal to the absolute level of 10 dBm Notes Sending this command does not switch the setting f...

Page 356: ...odified at S W Revision A 04 00 Trigger Slope It is set positive to trigger on a rising edge and negative to trigger on a falling edge Key Path Trigger RF Burst Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst SLOPe POSitive NEGative TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst SLOPe Example TRIG RFB SLOP NEG Couplings This same slope is used in the RF Burst selection for the trigger source in the Trigger menu and for the per...

Page 357: ...r and Trigger Holdoff parameters Key Path Trigger Readback line Displays a summary of the Auto Trig and Holdoff settings in square brackets First line Auto Off or Auto On Second Line Hldf followed by If Holdoff is Off readback Off If Holdoff On and Type Normal readback value If Holdoff On and Type Above readback value followed by AL If Holdoff On and Type Below readback value followed by BL If Hol...

Page 358: ... and the holdoff time begins New trigger conditions will be ignored until the holdoff time expires For a free running trigger the holdoff value is the minimum time between triggers Key Path Trigger Auto Holdoff Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff time TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff STATe OFF ON 0 1 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff STATe Example TRIG HOLD STAT ON TRIG HOLD 100 ms Dep...

Page 359: ...In WLAN mode or WLAN radio standard in SA mode the peak power spectral density for 1 MHz is reported For measurement results and views see View Display on page 639 This topic contains the following sections Measurement Commands for Channel Power on page 360 Remote CommandResults for Channel Power Measurement on page 361 Undefined variable Primary ProductName W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Re...

Page 360: ...e CHPower CONFigure CHPower NDEFault INITiate CHPower FETCh CHPower n MEASure CHPower n READ CHPower n FETCh CHPower CHPower MEASure CHPower CHPower READ CHPower CHPower FETCh CHPower DENSity MEASure CHPower DENSity READ CHPower DENSity For more measurement related commands see the SENSe subsystem and the section Remote Measurement Functions on page 2642 360 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Re...

Page 361: ...Spectral Density dBm Hz BW compatibility functionality n Results Returned n 1 or not specified Returns scalar results 1 Channel Power is a floating point number representing the total channel power in the specified integration bandwidth 2 PSD Power Spectral Density is the power in the specified unit bandwidth The unit bandwidth is selected by the PSD Unit parameter in either dBm Hz or dBm MHz 2 Re...

Page 362: ... power in the specified unit bandwidth of the first segment The unit bandwidth is selected by the PSD Unit parameter in either dBm Hz or dBm MHz 3 Channel Power of the carrier of which the center frequency is indicated by Freq Segment 2is a floating point number representing the total channel power of the second segment in the specified integration bandwidth 4 PSD Power Spectral Density of the car...

Page 363: ... 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel real DISPlay CHPower VIEW 1 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel Example DISP CHP VIEW WIND TRAC Y RLEV 10 dBm DISP CHP VIEW WIND TRAC Y RLEV Notes You must be in the Spectrum Analysis mode W CDMA mode cdma2000 mode DVB T H mode DTMB CTTB mode ISDB T mode CMMB mode Digital Cable TV mode LTD mode LTE TDD mode WLAN mode 1xEVDO mode MSR LTE Advanced FDD TDD mode or WIMAX OFDMA mode t...

Page 364: ...state Min 100 Max 100 Initial S W Revision A 12 50 Adjust Range For Min Clip Sets the combination of attenuation and gain based on the current measured signal level so that clipping will be at a minimum This is an immediate action function that is it executes once when the key is pressed This key is grayed out in measurements that do not support this functionality Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Attenuatio...

Page 365: ...des will show the current value of Peak to Average ratio on the softkey However some applications will not permit changing the value In these situations the softkey will be grayed out Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Range Remote Command SENSe POWer RF RANGe PARatio real SENSe POWer RF RANGe PARatio Example POW RANG PAR 12 dB Notes In some Applications Modes this parameter will be read only meaning the valu...

Page 366: ...HPower VIEW 1 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision Example DISP CHP VIEW WIND TRAC Y PDIV 2 DISP CHP VIEW WIND TRAC Y PDIV Notes You must be in the Spectrum Analysis mode W CDMA mode cdma2000 mode DVB T H mode DTMB CTTB mode ISDB T mode CMMB mode Digital Cable TV mode LTE mode LTE TDD mode WLAN mode 1xEVDO mode MSR LTE Advanced FDD TDD mode or WIMAX OFDMA mode to use this command Use INSTrument SELect...

Page 367: ...vision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 Auto Scaling Toggles the Auto Scaling function between On and Off Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD Remote Command DISPlay CHPower VIEW 1 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe COUPle 0 1 OFF ON DISPlay CHPower VIEW 1 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe C...

Page 368: ...ll Auto Man parameters in manual mode It decouples all the coupled instrument parameters and is not recommended for making measurements Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 More Information There are two types of functions that have Auto Manual modes Auto Man Active Function keys An Auto Man toggle key controls the binary state associated with an instrument parameter by toggling between Auto wher...

Page 369: ...8 Channel Power Measurement Auto Couple W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 369 ...

Page 370: ...ier which is listed above When ResBW mode is Auto the narrowest RBW over the active carriers is selected for Multi carriers Key Path BW Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD Remote Command SENSe CHPower BANDwidth RESolution bandwidth SENSe CHPower BANDwidth RESolution SENSe CHPower BANDwidth RESolution AUTO ON OFF 1 ...

Page 371: ...o WCDMA 240 kHz C2K 24 kHz WIMAX OFDMA 100kHz 1xEVDO 30kHz DVB T H 3 9kHz DTMB CTTB 3 9kHz ISDB T 30kHz CMMB 3 9kHz LTE Auto LTETDD Auto Digital Cable TV 3 9kHz WLAN 100 kHz MSR 100kHz LTEAFDD LTEATDD Auto WCDMA C2K 1xEVDO WIMAX OFDMA DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR OFF SA LTE LTETDD LTEAFDD LTEATDD ON State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 1 Hz Max 8 MHz Backwards Compa...

Page 372: ...common hardware between the two circuits even though the Video BW filter is not actually in circuit when the detector is set to Average Because the purpose of the average detector and the VBW filter are the same either can be used to reduce the variance of the result Although the VBW filter is not in circuit when using the average detector the Video BW key can have an effect on Auto sweep time and...

Page 373: ... WIMAX OFDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD Remote Command SENSe CHPower BANDwidth SHAPe GAUSsian FLATtop SENSe CHPower BANDwidth SHAPe Example CHP BAND SHAP GAUS CHP BAND SHAP Preset GAUSsian State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Gaussian Flattop Backwards Compatibility SCPI SENSe CHPower BWIDth SHAPe Initial S W Revision Prior to A...

Page 374: ...ts etc when in Continuous mode When the average count reaches the Average Hold Number the count stops incrementing but the analyzer keeps sweeping See the Trace Detector section for the averaging formula used both before and after the Average Hold Number is reached The trigger condition must be met prior to each sweep The type of trace processing for multiple sweeps is set under the Trace Detector...

Page 375: ...the INIT CONT 0 command will place the analyzer in Single Sweep but will have no effect on the current sequence until k N at which point the current sequence will stop and the instrument will go to the idle state W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 375 ...

Page 376: ...8 Channel Power Measurement File File See File on page 258 376 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 377: ...Freq The center frequency setting is the same for all measurements within a mode that is it is Meas Global Some modes are also able to share a Mode Global center frequency value If this is the case the Mode will have a Global Settings key in its Mode Setup menu The Center Freq function sets and queries the Center Frequency for the currently selected input If your analyzer has multiple inputs and y...

Page 378: ... the SCPI command The other parameter is forced to a different value if needed to keep the Start and the Stop Frequencies within the analyzer s frequency range Preset Depends on instrument maximum frequency mode measurement and selected input See Center Frequency Presets on page 378 and RF Center Freq on page 380 and Ext Mix Center Freq and I Q Center Freq on page 382 State Saved Saved in instrume...

Page 379: ...26 5 GHz 26 55 GHz 526 N9038A 1 805 GHz 3 6 GHz 27 0 GHz 532 16 005 GHz 32 0 GHz 32 5 GHz 543 21 505 GHz 43 0 GHz TBD 544 22 005 GHz 44 0 GHz 44 5 GHz 550 25 005 GHz 50 0 GHz 51 GHz Input 2 Model CF after Mode Preset Stop Freq after Mode Preset Max Freq can t tune above N9000A opt C75 0 7505GHz 1 5 GHz 1 58 GHz N9038A 505 MHz 1 GHz 1 000025 GHz Tracking Generator Frequency Limits N9000A only Track...

Page 380: ...tly selected input Scope Meas Global Remote Command SENSe FREQuency RF CENTer freq SENSe FREQuency RF CENTer Example FREQ RF CENT 30 MHz Notes This command is the same in all modes but the parameter is Measurement Global So the value is independent in each mode and common across all the measurements in the mode Dependencies If the electronic soft attenuator is enabled any attempt to set Center Fre...

Page 381: ... command is the same in all modes but the parameter is Measurement Global So the value is independent in each mode and common across all the measurements in the mode Couplings When returning to External Mixing after having been switched to one of the other inputs e g RF you will come back into the settings that you had when you left External Mixing So you will come back to the band you were in wit...

Page 382: ...the input which is selected at the time the command is sent Note that the Center Freq function in the Frequency menu on the front panel always applies to the currently selected input Scope Meas Global Remote Command SENSe FREQuency IQ CENTer freq SENSe FREQuency IQ CENTer Example FREQ IQ CENT 30 MHz Notes This command is the same in all modes but the parameter is Measurement Global So the value is...

Page 383: ... results in an advisory message If the equivalent SCPI command is sent this same message is generated as part of a 221 Settings conflict warning Couplings When auto coupled in a non zero span the center frequency step size is set to 10 of the span When auto coupled in zero span the center frequency step size is set to the equivalent 3 dB RBW value Preset Auto ADEMOD 1 MHz ON State Saved Saved in i...

Page 384: ...8 Channel Power Measurement Input Output Input Output See Input Output on page 190 384 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 385: ...the active function is turned off Key Path Marker Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD Remote Command CALCulate CHPower MARKer 1 2 12 MODE POSition DELTa OFF CALCulate CHPower MARKer 1 2 12 MODE Example CALC CHP MARK3 MODE POS CALC CHP MARK3 MODE Notes If the selected marker is Off pressing Marker sets it to Normal ...

Page 386: ... REFerence integer CALCulate CHPower MARKer 1 2 12 REFerence Example CALC CHP MARK REF 5 CALC CHP MARK REF Notes A marker cannot be relative to itself so that choice is grayed out and if sent from SCPI generates error 221 Settings conflict marker cannot be relative to itself When queried a single value is returned the specified marker numbers relative marker You must be in the Spectrum Analysis or...

Page 387: ...ode is Normal or the offset from the marker s reference marker if the control mode is Delta The query is returned in the fundamental units for the current marker X Axis scale Hz for Frequency Preset After a preset all markers are turned OFF so Marker X Axis Value query returns a not a number NAN State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 9 9E 37 Max 9 9E 37 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Mod...

Page 388: ...EAFDD LTEATDD Remote Command CALCulate CHPower MARKer 1 2 12 Y Example CALC CHP MARK11 Y Preset Result dependent on Markers setup and signal source State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 Backward Compatibility SCPI Commands Sets or queries the state of a marker Setting a marker which is OFF to state ON or 1 puts it in No...

Page 389: ...8 Channel Power Measurement Marker W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 389 ...

Page 390: ...Marker Function There are no Marker Functions supported in Channel Power so this front panel key displays a blank menu when pressed Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 390 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 391: ...here is no Marker To functionality supported in Channel Power measurement so this front panel key displays a blank key menu when pressed Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 391 ...

Page 392: ...enter Help press the Help key and press that key Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Remote Measurement Functions This section contains the following topics Measurement Group of Commands on page 2643 Current Measurement Query Remote Command Only on page 2645 Limit Test Current Results Remote Command Only on page 2645 Data Query Remote Command Only on page 2645 Calculate ...

Page 393: ...II is the default format for the data output Older versions of Spectrum Analysis and Phase Noise mode measurements only use ASCII The binary data formats should be used for handling large blocks of data since they are smaller and faster than the ASCII format Refer to the FORMat DATA command for more information If you need to change some of the measurement parameters from the factory default setti...

Page 394: ... or is set to 1 If the n value is set to a value other than 1 the selected trace data results will be returned See each command for details of what types of scalar results or trace data results are available The binary data formats should be used for handling large blocks of data since they are smaller and transfer faster than the ASCII format FORMat DATA FETCh may be used to return results other ...

Page 395: ...they are smaller and faster than the ASCII format FORMat DATA Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Current Measurement Query Remote Command Only This command returns the name of the measurement that is currently running Remote Command CONFigure Example CONF Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Limit Test Current Results Remote Command Only Queries the status of the current measurement limit test...

Page 396: ...e DATA n COMPress BLOCk CFIT MAXimum MINimum MEAN DMEan RMS RMSCubed SAMPle SDEViation PPHase soffset length roffset rlimit Example To query the mean power of a set of GSM bursts Supply a signal that is a set of GSM bursts Select the IQ Waveform measurement in IQ Analyzer Mode Set the sweep time to acquire at least one burst Set the triggers such that acquisition happens at a known position relati...

Page 397: ...e that is the arithmetic mean of the data point values in dB dBm for the specified region s of trace data For I Q trace data the mean of the magnitudes of the I Q pairs is returned See the following equations If the original trace data is in dB this function returns the arithmetic mean of those log values not log of the mean power which is a more useful value The mean of the log is the better meas...

Page 398: ... for Specified Region s where Xi is the complex value representation of an I Q pair Xi its conjugate complex number and n is the number of I Q pairs in the specified region s Once you have the rms value for a region of trace data linear or I Q you may want to calculate the mean power You must convert this rms value peak volts to power in dBm SAMPle returns the first data value x y pair for the spe...

Page 399: ...fied by data point in PPHase The rms power of the specified region may be expressed as Power 10 x log 10 x RMS I Q value 10 The RMS I Q value peak volts is where Xi is the complex value representation of an I Q pair Xi its conjugate complex number and n is the number of I Q pairs in the specified region The arithmetic mean phase of the specified region may be expressed as where Yi is the unwrapped...

Page 400: ...be compressed into one value This parameter has a default value equal to the current trace length roffset repeat offset is an optional real number It is in seconds for time domain traces and is a dimensionless index 0 to Npoints 1 for frequency domain traces It defines the beginning of the next field of trace elements to be compressed This is relative to the beginning of the previous field This pa...

Page 401: ...ncy TIME Example Example for Swept SA measurement in Spectrum Analyzer Mode CALC DATA4 PEAK 40 10 FREQ GTDL This will identify the peaks of trace 4 that are above 40 dBm with excursions of at least 10 dB The peaks are returned in order of increasing frequency starting with the lowest frequency Only the peaks that are above the display line are returned Query Results 1 With FORMat DATA REAL 32 sele...

Page 402: ...forming real time overlapped FFTs at the hardware layer using software for basic post processing before returning the result to the user The upshot of this approach is improved throughput for user applications that require many sequential power measurements The analysis bandwidth of FP2 is limited by the licenses in the instrument but its maximum overall analysis bandwidth per acquisition is 40 MH...

Page 403: ... the configuration string Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Acquisition Time Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF AcquisitionTime 0 002 Notes The acquisition time parameter sets the time in which the entire spectrum is measured An increase in the acquisition time yields an improvement in measurement repeatability Preset 0 001 s Range 0 s to 1 s Default Unit Time s Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Center Frequency Ex...

Page 404: ...is subtracted from all measurements This effectively lowers the noise floor of the analyzer When noise correction is enabled the first measurement for a given set of input parameters will take extra time This is because the analyzer takes an extra acquisition with the RF input disconnected from the analyzer s front end to measure the noise of just the analyzer The measured noise floor is stored in...

Page 405: ...cause two acquisitions rather than a single acquisition are made when spur suppression is enabled the measurement time will always be slower when spur suppression is enabled Preset False Range True enable spur suppression or False disable spur suppression Default Unit Boolean Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Electronic Attenuator Bypass Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF ElecAttBypass False Notes The electron...

Page 406: ...F paths For example if the signal is less than 25 MHz wide then the user can select the B25M path to take advantage of additional filtering on this analog IF path Preset B40M Range B10M B25M B40M Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Include Power Spectrum Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF IncludePowerSpectrum True Notes The power spectrum parameter allows the user to read data on the entire spectrum for diagnost...

Page 407: ...Off Low Full Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Resolution Bandwidth Mode Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF PreAmpMode Low Notes The resolution bandwidth mode parameter allows the user to choose whether the RBW filter is automatically or manually set The BestSpeed value minimizes measurement time while the Narrowest value minimizes RBW size minimum of two FFT bins per RBW To manually specify an RBW set this pa...

Page 408: ...Revision A 14 00 Trigger Level Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF TriggerLevel 2 Notes The trigger level parameter sets the voltage value at which an external trigger is detected Preset 1 2 V Range 5 to 5 V Default Unit Volts Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Trigger Slope Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF TriggerSlope Negative Notes The trigger slope parameter indicates the direction of the edge trigger voltage for ...

Page 409: ...efault Unit Seconds Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Signal Input Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF SignalInput Fp50MHzCW Notes The signal input parameter allows the user to select between using the main RF input or the internal analyzer reference CW signal of 50 MHz Preset FpMainRf Range FpMainRf Fp50MHzCW Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Use Preselector Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF UsePreSelector True Notes The ...

Page 410: ...filter weighs all frequencies within the bandwidth equally The root raised cosine filter has an associated shape parameter defined by the FilterAlpha parameter All array parameters should have the same number of elements Alternatively if all the elements are the same value a single value with no square brackets can be used to define the parameter Preset IBW Range IBW RRC Initial S W Revision A 14 ...

Page 411: ...ers should have the same number of elements Alternatively if all the elements are the same value a single value with no square brackets can be used to define the parameter Preset BandPower Range BandPower BandDensity PeakPower PeakFrequency XdBBandwidth OccupiedBandwidth Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Channel Offset Frequency Array Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF OffsetFrequency 5e6 0 5e6 Notes The offse...

Page 412: ...power relative to the peak channel power over which the bandwidth is calculated The parameter value must be a negative number Preset 3 01 Range 200 to 0 dB Default Unit dB Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Define Fast Power Measurement Query Remote Command Only The DEFine command is used to retrieve a list of all defined parameters in an ASCII string format M o d e All R e m o t e C o m m a n d CALCula...

Page 413: ...setFrequency 0 Function BandPower FilterType IBW FilterAlpha 0 22 OccupiedBandwidthPercent 0 99 XdBBandwidth 3 01 DoNoiseCorrection False DoSpurSuppression False MeasurementMethod HardwareFFT IncludePowerSpectrum Fals e TriggerDelay 0 TriggerLevel 1 2 TriggerSlope Positive TriggerSource Free TriggerTimeout 1 I n i t i a l S W R e v i s i o n A 14 00 Configure Fast Power Measurement Remote Command ...

Page 414: ... separated ASCII values where m corresponds to the number of bandwidths defined 1 Declared function return in the 1st specified channel 2 Declared function return in the 2nd specified channel m Declared function return in the last specified channel The INIT and FETC command sequence performs the same functionality of a single CALC FPOW POW n query Units of the returned values are dependent on the ...

Page 415: ...oads and to visibly inspect the spectrum Mode All Remote Command CALCulate FPOWer POWer 1 2 999 READ2 Example CALC FPOW POW1 READ2 Notes Option FP2 is required Note Spectrum data is only returned if the IncludePowerSpectrum parameter is set to True If IncludePowerSpectrum is False the number of spectrum points will be zero 0 Units of the returned values are dependent on the Function parameter per ...

Page 416: ...ata is output in the current Y Axis unit When the data format is INTeger data is output in units of m dBm 001 dBm The INT 32 format returns binary 32 bit integer values in internal units m dBm in a definite length block Dependencies Sending a data format spec with an invalid number for example INT 48 generates no error The analyzer simply uses the default 8 for ASCii 32 for INTeger 32 for REAL Sen...

Page 417: ...or data transfer and other queries It controls whether binary data is transferred in normal or swapped mode This command affects only the byte order for setting and querying trace data for the TRACe DATA TRACe DATA CALCulate DATA n and FETCh SANalyzer n commands and queries By definition any command that says it uses FORMat DATA uses any format supported by FORMat DATA The NORMal order is a byte s...

Page 418: ...tting determines the averaging action Key Path Meas Setup Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD Remote Command SENSe CHPower AVERage COUNt integer SENSe CHPower AVERage COUNt SENSe CHPower AVERage STATe ON OFF 1 0 SENSe CHPower AVERage STATe Example CHP AVER COUN 15 CHP AVER COUN CHP AVER ON CHP AVER Notes You must b...

Page 419: ...each sweep When set to Repeat the measurement resets the average counter each time the specified number of averages is reached Key Path Meas Setup Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD Remote Command SENSe CHPower AVERage TCONtrol EXPonential REPeat SENSe CHPower AVERage TCONtrol Example CHP AVER TCON EXP CHP AVER TC...

Page 420: ...AX OFDMA mode to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Dependencies For MSR LTE Advanced FDD TDD mode this key is blank In order to keep backwards compitible with the legacy LTE FDD TDD the scpi command is supported in LTE LTE A converged application Couplings The minimum value of the span is coupled with the integration bandwidth Preset SA 2 MHz WCDMA 5 MHz C2K 1 23 MHz WIMAX OFD...

Page 421: ...HP FILT OFF CHP FILT Notes This parameter is normally used when TETRA is selected as the Radio Std You must be in the Spectrum Analysis mode DVB T H mode DTMB CTTB mode ISDB T mode CMMB mode LTE mode LTE TDD mode WLAN mode WIMAX OFMDA mode or W CDMA mode to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Dependencies For CDMA2K mode this key is blank For 1xEVDO mode this key is blank For MS...

Page 422: ...lank For 1xEVDO mode this key is blank For MSR mode this key is blank For LTE Advanced FDD TDD mode this key is blank In order to keep backwards compitible with the legacy LTE FDD TDD the scpi command is supported in LTE LTE A converged application For WLAN 802 11 ac 80 80 MHz RRC Weighted is not supported Preset OFF State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Integ BW RRC Weighted Initial S W Rev...

Page 423: ... the same as the symbol rate of the signal Key Path Meas Setup Method RRC Weighted Mode SA WCDMA WIMAX OFDMA DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN LTEAFDD LTEATDD Remote Command SENSe CHPower FILTer RRC BANDwidth real SENSe CHPower FILTer RRC BANDwidth Example CHP FILT BAND 10MHz CHP FILT BAND Notes This parameter is normally used when TETRA is selected as the Radio Std Yo...

Page 424: ...allows you to set up the test limit for channel power or power spectral density Key Path Meas Setup Initial S W Revision A 10 00 Power Limit If Power Limit is on Power Limit is used as threshold which can judge whether the real measured channel power can be passed or not If real measured channel power exceeds Power Limit channel power test fails otherwise it passes If Power Limit is off channel po...

Page 425: ...application For WLAN 802 11ac 80 MHz 80 MHz the power test and the PSD test are performed to both carriers Which means the power or PSD readouts of both carriers should be compared with the power or PSD limit individually and the test passes only when both values are lower than the limit Preset 16 00 SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV OFF WLAN ON State Sa...

Page 426: ...Off Always Pass For MSR mode this key is blank For LTE Advanced FDD TDD mode this key is blank For WLAN 802 11ac 80 MHz 80 MHz the power test and the PSD test are performed to both carriers Which means the PSD or power readouts of both carriers should be compared with the PSD or power limit individually and the test passes only when both values are lower than the limit Couplings The value is autom...

Page 427: ...Limit is off the returned value is always 0 pass When PSD Limit is on the returned value is 0 pass while PSD test passes and 1 fail while PSD test fails Initial S W Revision A 10 00 PSD Unit Sets the unit bandwidth for Power Spectral Density The available units are dBm Hz and dBm MHz Key Path Meas Setup Mode SA WCDMA WIMAX OFDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD...

Page 428: ...ey Path Meas Setup Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD Remote Command CONFigure CHPower Example CONF CHP Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 428 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 429: ...8 Channel Power Measurement Mode Mode See Mode on page 232 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 429 ...

Page 430: ...ment and gets the mode to a consistent state with all of the default couplings set Backwards Compatibility Notes In the X Series the legacy Factory Preset has been replaced with Mode Preset which only presets the currently active mode not the entire instrument In the X Series the way to preset the entire instrument is by using System Restore System Defaults All which behaves essentially the same w...

Page 431: ...les except the persistent ones Restore Mode Defaults resets ALL the Mode variables and all the Meas global and Meas local variables including the persistent ones Type Of Preset SCPI Command Front Panel Access Auto Couple COUPle ALL Auto Couple front panel key Meas Preset CONFigure Measurement Meas Setup Menu Mode Preset SYSTem PRESet Mode Preset green key Restore Mode Defaults INSTrument DEFault M...

Page 432: ...nt Mode Preset Power On Mode Preset SYSTem PON TYPE MODE System Menu Power On User Preset SYSTem PON TYPE USER System Menu Power On Last State SYSTem PON TYPE LAST System Menu 432 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 433: ...8 Channel Power Measurement Mode Setup Mode Setup See Mode Setup on page 251 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 433 ...

Page 434: ...et to Normal then a peak search is immediately performed Key Path Front panel key Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD Remote Command CALCulate CHPower MARKer 1 2 12 MAXimum Example CALC CHP MARK2 MAX Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 434 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applicati...

Page 435: ...8 Channel Power Measurement Print Print See Print on page 263 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 435 ...

Page 436: ... Trace State State_ Save Recall Screen Screen_ Save Recall Amplitude Corrections Ampcor_ Import Export Traces Trace_ Import Export Limit Lines LLine_ Import Export Measurement Result MeasR_ Import Export Capture Buffer CapBuf_ Import Export A four digit number is appended to the prefix to create a unique file name The numbering sequence starts at 0000 within each Mode for each file type and update...

Page 437: ...e fred_0000 csv Although 0000 is used in the example above the number that is used is actually the current number in the Meas Results sequence that is the number that would have been used if you had not entered your own file name If the filename you entered ends with _dddd where d any number making it look just like an auto file name then the next auto file name picks up where you left off with th...

Page 438: ...the sense that you can recall a state file from any X Series model number and any version of X Series software This is only possible if part of the recalling process goes through a limiting step after recalling the mode settings at least for settings that may vary with version number model number option and license differences If you try to recall a state file onto an instrument with less capabili...

Page 439: ...e SA for the Spectrum Analyzer See More Information on page 440 Key Path Recall Mode All Remote Command MMEMory LOAD STATe filename Example MMEM LOAD STAT myState state This recalls the file myState state on the default path Example MMEM LOAD STAT MyStateFile state This loads the state file data on the default file directory path into the instrument state Notes When you pick a file to recall the a...

Page 440: ...hen you use State to save and recall traces any trace whose data must be preserved should be placed in View or Blank mode before saving The following table describes the Trace Save and Recall possibilities You want to recall state and one trace s data leaving other traces unaffected Save Trace State from 1 trace Make sure that no other traces are updating they should all be in View or Blank mode w...

Page 441: ...such as Look In Look In The Look In field shows the path from which the file will be recalled and allows you to change the path using the up and down arrow keys to navigate to other paths the Enter key to open a directory and the Backspace key to go back one directory The Look In field first uses the last path from the Save As dialog Save In path for that same file type There is no softkey for dir...

Page 442: ...uses the current Open request to be cancelled The ESC key does the same thing Key Path Recall State Notes Brings up the Open dialog for recalling a State Save Type Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Edit Register Names You may enter a custom name on any of the Register keys to help you remember what you are using that state to save To do this press the Edit Register Names key choose the registe...

Page 443: ... Path Recall State Example RCL 1 Range 1 16 from front panel 1 128 from SCPI Readback Date and time with seconds resolution are displayed on the key OR A custom name of up to 30 characters entered using the Save State Edit Register Names key OR empty if no prior save operation has been performed to this register Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision Prior to A 11 00 Regist...

Page 444: ...egister Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision Prior to A 11 00 Sequences These keys allow you to import a Tab separated or txt file that will automatically setup all the parameters required for building a Sequence The parameters will automatically be loaded into the Stated Sequencer Once selected in order to import the selected Sequence Type you must select the Open key in...

Page 445: ...lication for manipulating csv files and then import it Importing Data loads measurement data from the specified file into the specified or default destination depending on the data type selected Selecting an Import Data menu key will not actually cause the importing to occur since the analyzer still needs to know from where to get the data Pressing the Open key in this menu brings up the Open dial...

Page 446: ...n other measurements this key is grayed out Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Open When you press Open the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu entitled File Open This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse The Tab and Arrow keys can also be used for dialog navigation See From File on page 2687in Recall State for a fu...

Page 447: ...The SWEEPING bit is set The MEASURING bit is set Backwards Compatibility Notes For Spectrum Analysis mode in ESA and PSA the Restart hardkey and the INITiate RESTart command restart trace averages displayed average count reset to 1 for a trace in Clear Write but did not restart Max Hold and Min Hold In the X Series the Restart hardkey and the INITiate RESTart command restart not only Trace Average...

Page 448: ...ndition is met and the analyzer stops sweeping once that sweep has completed However with Average Hold Number 1 and at least one trace set to Trace Average Max Hold or Min Hold SA Measurement or Averaging on most other measurements multiple sweeps data acquisitions are taken for a single measurement The trigger condition must be met prior to each sweep The sweep is stopped when the average count k...

Page 449: ...ings that are affected by Mode Preset as well as the additional settings affected by Restore Mode Defaults all of the Mode s settings In addition all of the settings of the Input Output system are included even though they are outside of the Mode s state because they are needed to restore the complete setup Persistent System settings for example Verbose SCPI are not affected by either Mode Preset ...

Page 450: ...ly ignored The command is sequential Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 To File When you press To File the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu entitled Save As This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse The Tab and Arrow keys can also be used for dialog navigation The Listed below are the functions of the various fie...

Page 451: ...e using the File Name key See the Quick Save on page 2683 documentation for more on the automatic file naming algorithm When you press the File Name key the analyzer displays the Alpha Editor Use the knob to choose the letter to add and the front panel Enter key to add the letter to the file name The BK character moves you back and the FW character moves you forward in the filename The Select key ...

Page 452: ...id register number an error message is generated 222 Data out of range Invalid register label number label is a string from 0 to 30 characters in length If a label exceeds 30 characters an error message is generated 150 String data error Label clipped to 30 characters label of length 0 erases the custom label and restores the default time and date label E g MMEM REG STAT LAB 1 Dependencies N9060A ...

Page 453: ...tance Although these 16 registers are the only registers available from the front panel there are 128 state registers available in the instrument Registers 17 128 are only available from the SCPI interface using the SAV command There is one set of 128 state registers in the instrument not one set for each Mode When a state is saved the Mode it was saved from is saved with it then when it is recall...

Page 454: ...A custom name of up to 30 characters entered using the Edit Register Names key OR empty if no prior save operation has been performed to this register Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 11 00 Mass Storage Catalog Remote Command Only Key path SCPI Only Remote Command MMEMory CATalog directory_name Notes The string must be a valid logical path Queries disk usage informa...

Page 455: ...second parameter specifies the destination The second form has four parameters In this form the first and third parameters specify the source The second and fourth parameters specify the directories The first pair of parameters specifies the source The second pair specifies the destination An error is generated if the source doesn t exist or the destination file already exists This command will ge...

Page 456: ...ame data It loads data into the file file_ name data is in 488 2 block format file_name is string data The query form is MMEMory DATA file_name with the response being the associated data in block format Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Mass Storage Make Directory Remote Command Only Key path SCPI Only Remote Command MMEMory MDIRectory directory_name Notes The string must be a valid logical p...

Page 457: ...I Only Remote Command MMEMory RDIRectory directory_name Notes The string must be a valid logical path Removes a directory The directory_name parameter specifies the directory name to be removed All files and directories under the specified directory shall also be removed This command will generate an access denied error if the folder is a restricted folder e g C Windows or is in a restricted folde...

Page 458: ...g algorithm The default path for all Sequence Files is My Documents Sequences Key Path Save Sequences Mode All Notes Brings up Save As dialog for saving a Sequence Save Type Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Data Export Exporting a data file stores data from the current measurement to mass storage files The Export Menu only contains data types that are supported by the current measurement Since the com...

Page 459: ...e RESults string Example MMEM STOR RES MeasR_0000 csv Notes If the save is initiated via SCPI and the file already exists the file will be overwritten The SCPI command exports Channel Power measurement results to the file specified as the parameter in the current path The default path is My Documents current mode data CHP results Using the C drive is strongly discouraged since it runs the risk of ...

Page 460: ...n Sweep Points Sweep Time Sweep Time Auto TriggerSource Video Bandwidth Y Axis Unit The file contains these data followed by MeasResult1 and MeasResult2 that flag the start of the measurement results Each line of Measurement Results consists of two comma separated values MeasResult1 value and MeasResult2 value MeasResult1 contains the same results as MEAS READ FETCh CHPower1 MeasResult2 MEAS READ ...

Page 461: ...ector Average IFGain FALSE IFGainAuto FALSE Impedance 50 Integ BW 2000000 Internal Preamp FALSE Internal Preamp Band Low PSD Unit DbmHz Resolution Band Width 27000 Resolution Bandwidth Shape Gaussian RRC Filter Alpha 0 22 RRC Filter BW 3840000 RRC Filter State FALSE Span 3000000 Sweep Points 1001 Sweep Time 0 004933333 Sweep Time Auto TRUE TriggerSource Free Video Bandwidth 270000 Y Axis Unit Deci...

Page 462: ...ve As the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu entitled Save As This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse The Tab and Arrow keys can also be used for dialog navigation See To File on page 2697 in Save State for a full description of this dialog and menu The default path for saving files is For all of the Trace Data File...

Page 463: ...ge key is pressed a thumbnail of the captured image is displayed as shown below When you continue on into the Save As menu and complete the Screen Image save the image depicted in the thumbnail is the one that gets saved showing the menus that were on the screen before going into the Save menus The save is performed immediately and does not wait until the measurement is complete After you have com...

Page 464: ...re Misc Defaults or Restore System Defaults All and survives subsequent running of the modes Readback 3D Color 3D Mono Flat Color Flat Mono Backwards Compatibility Notes In ESA and PSA we offer the choice of Reverse Bitmap or Reverse Metafile when saving screen images This is much like the Flat Color theme available in X Series Also if you selected Reverse Bitmap AND a black white screen image tha...

Page 465: ... Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Save As When you press Save As the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu entitled Save As This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse The Tab and Arrow keys can also be used for dialog navigation See To File on page 2697 in Save State for a full description of this dialog and menu The...

Page 466: ... in the idle state INIT IMM in ESA PSA Spectrum Analysis Mode does an implied ABORt In some other PSA Modes INIT IMM is ignored if not in the idle state The X Series follows the ESA PSA SA Mode model which may cause some Modes to have compatibility problems Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 More Information See Restart on page 2694 for details on the INIT IMMediate Restart function If you are ...

Page 467: ...on front panel to indicate out of scope Non forceful means user still can change this setting by SCPI but cannot change on front panel When set to OFF will make source leave list sequencer and this setting will be black out and take effect immediately When the RF Output is ON an RF annunciator is displayed in the system settings panel When the RF Output is turned Off the RF annunciator is cleared ...

Page 468: ...y and waveform etc When the source list sequence playing is complete the last step keeps playing and user can use this command to change the list sequence last step s output power The multiport adapter RFIO TX ports and GPS ports cannot ensure power accuracy when power setting is lower than 130dBm this power setting value is defined by the sum of RF Power setting and related amplitude correction v...

Page 469: ...entered power Where reference power equals the original RF Power entered under Source Amplitude RF Power and set as the reference power entered power equals a new value entered under Source Amplitude Amptd Offset In addition the displayed power value is the same as a new value entered under Source Amplitude RF Power If Power Ref is set to ON with a reference value set entering a value under Source...

Page 470: ... current output power Preset 0 00 dBm OFF Min 125 00 dBm Max 10 00 dBm Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Amptd Offset Allows you to specify the RF output power offset value When the amplitude offset is set to zero 0 and you set a new offset value positive or negative the displayed amplitude value will change as follows and the RF output power will not change Displayed value output power offset value Wh...

Page 471: ...n page 2802 is set to ON the list sequencer controls the source output and this key will be grayed out And this setting will be none forceful grey out on front panel to indicate out of scope Non forceful means user still can change this setting by SCPI but cannot change manually on front panel When setto Off will make source leave list sequencer and this setting will be black out and take effect i...

Page 472: ...put frequency Couplings The frequency value is coupled to the current channel band and number such that updates to the band and number will update the frequency value to the corresponding absolute frequency Preset 1 00 GHz If license F1A or 5WC is present the default Center Frequency should be 2 412GHz Min 10 00 MHz Max Hardware Dependant Option 503 3 6 GHz Option 504 3 8 GHz Option 506 6 00 GHz F...

Page 473: ...ss than sign to indicate the frequency is above or below the channel number Preset 1 Min Please refer to the tables below for the valid ranges Max Please refer to the tables below for the valid ranges Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM EDGE Channel Number Ranges Band Link Device Range Frequency MHz P GSM Uplink MS 1 n 124 890 0 0 2 n Downlink BS 1 n 124 935 0 0 2 n E GSM Uplink MS 0 n 124 975 n 1023...

Page 474: ... Band II Downlink 412 n 687 9662 n 9938 n 5 1850 1 n 5 Uplink 12 n 287 350 n 425 n 5 1850 1 n 5 Band III Downlink 1162 n 1513 n 5 1575 Uplink 937 n 1288 n 5 1525 Band IV Downlink 537 n 1738 1887 n 2087 n 5 1805 n 5 1735 1 Uplink 1312 n 1513 1662 n 1862 n 5 1450 n 5 1380 1 Band V Downlink 1007 n 1087 4357 n 4458 n 5 670 1 n 5 Uplink 782 n 862 4132 n 4233 n 5 670 1 n 5 Band VI Downlink 1037 n 1062 4...

Page 475: ...767 n 5 21 n 5 39 9 Band XIV Downlink 4117 n 4143 4167 n 4192 n 5 63 n 5 72 9 Uplink 3892 n 3918 3942 n 3967 n 5 12 n 5 2 1 Band XIX Downlink 712 n 763 787 n 837 n 5 735 n 5 720 1 Uplink 312 n 363 387 n 437 n 5 770 n 5 755 1 CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Channel Number Ranges Band Link Device Range Frequency MHz US Cellular Uplink MS reverse link 1 N 799 991 N 1023 1024 N 1323 0 030 N 825 000 0 030 N 1023 825 ...

Page 476: ...N 1536 479 000 0 020 N 1792 479 000 Downlink BS forward link 1 N 400 472 N 871 1039 N 1473 1536 N 1715 1792 N 2016 0 025 N 1 460 000 0 025 N 472 420 000 0 020 N 1024 461 010 0 025 N 1536 489 000 0 020 N 1792 489 000 IMT 2000 Band Uplink MS reverse link 0 N 1199 1920 000 0 050 N Downlink BS forward link 0 N 1199 2100 000 0 050 N Upper 700 MHz Band Uplink MS reverse link 0 N 240 776 000 0 050 N Down...

Page 477: ...k MS reverse link 1 N 400 472 N 871 1536 N 1715 0 025 N 1 450 000 0 025 N 472 410 000 0 025 N 1536 479 000 Downlink BS forward link Downlink BS forward link Downlink BS forward link 1 N 400 472 N 871 1536 N 1715 0 025 N 1 460 000 0 025 N 472 420 000 0 025 N 1536 489 000 800 PAMR Uplink MS reverse link 0 N 239 870 0125 0 025 N Downlink BS forward link 0 N 239 915 0125 0 025 N LTE FDD Channel Number...

Page 478: ...949 1427 9 22750 22750 22949 12 729 5010 5010 5179 699 23010 23010 23179 13 746 5180 5180 5279 777 23180 23180 23279 14 758 5280 5280 5379 788 23280 23280 23379 17 734 5730 5730 5849 704 23730 23730 23849 18 860 5850 5850 5999 815 23850 23850 23999 19 875 6000 6000 6149 830 24000 24000 24149 20 791 6150 6150 6449 832 24150 24150 24449 21 1495 9 6450 6450 6599 1447 9 24450 24450 24599 24 1525 7700 ...

Page 479: ...38650 38650 39649 41 2496 39650 39650 41589 2496 39650 39650 41589 42 3400 41590 41590 43589 3400 41590 41590 43589 43 3600 43590 43590 45589 3600 43590 43590 45589 Note The channel numbers that designate carrier frequencies so close to the operating band edges that the carrier extends beyond the operating band edge shall not be used This implies that the first 7 15 25 50 75 and 100 channel number...

Page 480: ...use 5 2 b 1850 1910 MHz 1930 1990 MHz 9254 to 9546 9654 to 9946 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 c 1910 1930 MHz 9554 to 9646 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 d 2570 2620 MHz 12854 to 13096 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 e 2300 2400 MHz 11504 to 11996 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 f 188...

Page 481: ...AND24 BAND25 BAND26 BAND27 BAND28 BAND31 BAND33 BAND34 BAND35 BAND36 BAND37 BAND38 BAND39 BAND40 BAND41 BAND42 BAND43 BAND44 BANDA BANDB BANDC BANDD BANDE BANDF SOURce FREQuency CHANnels BAND Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PGSM Notes Set this setting to NONE will grey out Channel on page 2727 Channel Initial S W Revision A 05 00 None Selects no radio standard for use When you have selected the radio ...

Page 482: ...1800 Selects DCS 1800 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND DCS1800 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 PCS 1900 Selects PCS 1900 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PCS1900 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM 450 Selects GSM 450 as the active channe...

Page 483: ...the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND GSM700 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 T GSM 810 Selects T GSM 810 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND T GSM810 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 WCDMA Sets WCDMA as the radio standard for use and accesses the W C...

Page 484: ...el band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDIII Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band IV Selects Band IV as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDIV Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band V Selects Band V as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio S...

Page 485: ...nnel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDVIII Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band IX Selects Band IX as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDIX Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band X Selects Band X as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radi...

Page 486: ...p Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDXIII Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIV Selects Band XIV as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDXIV Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIX Selects Band XIX as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN...

Page 487: ...EVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PCS Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Japan Cell Selects Japan Cell as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND JAPAN Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Korean PCS Selects Korean PCS as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ...

Page 488: ...R FREQ CHAN BAND UPPER Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Secondary 800 Selects Secondary 800 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND SECOND Initial S W Revision A 05 00 400 Euro PAMR Selects 400 Euro PAMR as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ ...

Page 489: ...xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PCS1DOT9G Initial S W Revision A 05 00 AWS Selects AWS as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND AWS Initial S W Revision A 05 00 US 2 5GHz Selects US 2 5 GHz as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND...

Page 490: ...dio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 1 Selects BAND 1 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND1 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 2 Selects BAND 2 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND2 Initial S W Revision A 09...

Page 491: ...09 50 BAND 6 Selects BAND 6 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND6 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 7 Selects BAND 7 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND7 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 8 Selects BAND 8 as the band for the cu...

Page 492: ...50 BAND 11 Selects BAND 11 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND11 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 12 Selects BAND 12 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND12 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 13 Selects BAND 13 as the band for t...

Page 493: ... 50 BAND 18 Selects BAND 18 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND18 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 19 Selects BAND 19 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND19 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 20 Selects BAND 20 as the band for ...

Page 494: ... 50 BAND 25 Selects BAND 25 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND25 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 26 Selects BAND 26 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND26 Initial S W Revision A 12 53 BAND 27 Selects BAND 27 as the band for ...

Page 495: ...standard for use and accesses the LTE TDD specific channel band sub menus Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 33 Selects BAND 33 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND33 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 34 Selects BAND 34 as the band for the current step Key P...

Page 496: ...p Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND37 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 38 Selects BAND 38 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND38 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 39 Selects BAND 39 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Se...

Page 497: ...cy Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND42 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 43 Selects BAND 43 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND43 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 44 Selects BAND 44 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TD...

Page 498: ...dard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDB Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND C Selects BAND C as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDC Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND D Selects BAND D as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND B...

Page 499: ...Radio Setup Remote Command SOURce RADio BAND LINK DOWN UP SOURce RADio BAND LINK Example SOUR RAD BAND LINK UP Preset DOWN Range DOWN UP Backwards Compatibility SCPI SOURce RADio DEVice BTS MS SOURce RADio DEVice Backwards Compatibility Notes BTS maps to the Downlink frequency MS maps to the Uplink frequency Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Set Reference Frequency This key allows you to set the freque...

Page 500: ...d is grayed out when the List Sequencer is turned ON Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Freq Reference This key allows you to toggle the state of the frequency reference When the frequency reference state is ON an annunciator is displayed on the main source view to indicate this state to the user When you use a frequency reference the signal generator outputs a frequency that is set relative to the refe...

Page 501: ...l change as follows and the RF output frequency will not change Displayed value output frequency offset value Where output frequency equals the original frequency entered under Source Frequency Frequency offset value equals the value entered under Source Frequency Freq Offset When the frequency offset is set to a value other than zero 0 and you enter a new frequency value under Source Frequency Fr...

Page 502: ...ttings panel When the ARB is turned Off the MOD annunciator is cleared Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB STATe ON OFF 1 0 SOURce RADio ARB STATe Example SOUR RAD ARB OFF SOUR RAD ARB Notes If the ARB is ON a user then loads or deletes another file to ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The waveform...

Page 503: ...re information about this adjustment Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB WAVeform string SOURce RADio ARB WAVeform Example SOUR RAD ARB WAV test_waveform bin Notes If intended waveform is not in the memory yet then issuing this command by SCPI will invoke ARB loading operation first which involves a delay of unpredictable length So this command shou...

Page 504: ... ARB Select Waveform Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Load Segment To ARB Memory Allows you to load the selected file into ARB memory On the front panel you select the file for loading to the ARB memory by highlighting the desired file in the list Using the SCPI command you specify the file name on the HDD NVWFM none volatile storage MSUS Mass Storage Unit Specifier is supported in the memory subsyste...

Page 505: ...es do not present on the instrument In this case a GUI only warning message 800 Operation complete Loaded filename successfully but no license required licenses installed User can install required licenses according to required licenses string to license it or multi pack license it Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Load All To ARB Memory Allows you to load all the segment files within the currently sel...

Page 506: ... for playback of a waveform sequence or a list sequence Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Notes No remote command SCPIfront panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Default Directory Allows you to change the default directory It is used as a search location for waveform segments that are required to be loaded into ARB memory for playback of a waveform sequen...

Page 507: ... If the ARB is ON and you load a file to ARB memory or delete a file from ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The waveform will be replayed after the ARB operation is finished Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Delete All From ARB Memory Allows you to remove all segments from ARB playback memory Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select...

Page 508: ...ARB Memory Full File List Remote Command Only Queries the test set for the string list of waveform segments in the ARB memory It returns a string list for waveform segment names in the ARB memory Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB FCATalog Example SOUR RAD ARB FCATalog Notes The return data is in the following format integer memory used integer memory free integer file count in ARB memory string stri...

Page 509: ... 00 Run Time Scaling Allows you to adjust the run time scaling value The run time scaling value is applied in real time while the waveform is playing Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB ARB Setup Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB RSCaling real SOURce RADio ARB RSCaling Example SOUR RAD ARB RSC 100 00 Notes This setting cannot be set in E6640A Grey out on menu and the value is fixed at 70 00 Depende...

Page 510: ...e Allows access to the trigger type sub menus The setting for trigger type determines the behavior of the waveform when it plays Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE CONTinuous SINGle SADVance GATE SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE CONT SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE Notes Gated trigger type will be implemented at a later release Pres...

Page 511: ... Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Trigger Type Continuous Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE CONT TRIG Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Reset Run Sets Reset and Run as the trigger response for the continuous trigger type Reset and Run sets the waveform generator to play a waveform sequence or segment continuously when the first trigger is received Subsequent triggers reset the waveform sequence or seg...

Page 512: ... W Revision A 05 00 Buffered Trigger Selects Buffered Trigger as the trigger response for single trigger type Buffered Trigger sets the waveform generator to play a waveform sequence or segment once when a trigger is received If a trigger is received during playback the waveform generator plays the sequence or segment to the end then plays the sequence or segment once more Key Path Source Modulati...

Page 513: ...te Command SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE SADVance TYPE SINGle CONTinuous SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE SADVance TYPE Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE SADV SING Preset CONTinuous Range Single Continuous Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Single Selects Single as the trigger response for Segment Advance trigger type With single selected once a trigger is received a segment is played once If a trigger is rec...

Page 514: ...d the waveform is triggered when you press the front panel Trigger key Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Trigger Source Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIGger KEY Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Bus Sets the current trigger source to Bus Selecting Bus trigger source enables triggering over GPIB LAN or USB using the SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger INITiate command Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Trigger Source...

Page 515: ...e Pressing this key changes the central view area to display the Waveform Sequence Creation and Editing view Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Notes No remote command SCPIfront panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Current Segment Specifies the selected sequence segment that will be affected by the menu functions Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build...

Page 516: ...arb Pressing this key changes the current view to the Waveform Management View Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Load Segment To ARB Memory Allows you to load the selected file into ARB memory On the front panel you select the file for loading to the ARB memory by highlighting the desired file in the list Using the SCPI command you specify the file n...

Page 517: ... Studio waveform wfm which contains invalid waveform header an error is generated If the ARB is ON when you load afile to ARB memory or delete a file from ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The waveform will be replayed after the ARB operation is finished ARB can be loaded into ARB memory even required licenses do not present on th...

Page 518: ... the new directory of interest The current directory is used for manually loading waveform segments into ARB memory for playback and as a search location for waveform segments that are required to be loaded into ARB memory for playback of a waveform sequence or a list sequence Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Notes No remote command SCPIfront panel only In...

Page 519: ...if ARB state is On the selected waveform will not be played In this case if the selected waveform is not used in List Sequence it can be deleted and the ARB state is turned Off If the ARB is ON and you load a file to ARB memory or delete a file from ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The waveform will be replayed after the ARB oper...

Page 520: ...Sequences Build New Sequence Insert New Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Load All To ARB Memory This key functions the same as Load All To ARB Memory on page 2829 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Insert New Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Change Directory This key functions the same a...

Page 521: ...ARB Memory on page 2831 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Insert New Waveform Segment in ARB Memory Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Query ARB Memory File List Remote Command Only This command functions the same as Query ARB Memory File List Remote Command Only on page 2763 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Edit Selected Waveform Allows access to t...

Page 522: ...ision A 05 00 Marker 2 Allows you to enable or disable marker 2 for the currently selected waveform For a waveform sequence you can enable and disable markers on a per segment basis allowing you to output markers from some waveform segments within the sequence but not for others Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Edit Selected Waveform Notes No remote comman...

Page 523: ...ial S W Revision A 05 00 Delete Segment Allows you to delete the selected segment from the waveform sequence Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Notes No remote command front panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Save Sequence Pressing this key displays the Save As dialog The sequence name is passed to the save as dialog to use as the filename for saving an...

Page 524: ...M3 M4 M1M2 M1M3 M1M4 M2M3 M2M4 M3M4 M1M2M3 M1M2M4 M1M3M4 M2M3M4 M1M2M3M4 ALL For additional description of each item see Notes below For Setup SCPI on page 524 For Setup SCPI SOURce RADio ARB SEQuence MWAVeform filename For additional description of each item see Notes For Query SCPI on page 525 below Example For setup SOUR RAD ARB SEQ NVWFM testSeq1 seq NVWFM wfmSegment1 wfm 10 M2M3M4 NVWFM wfmSe...

Page 525: ...VWFM or have an error in the waveform sequence file path an error is generated Notes Error Checks for Query SCPI command Continued If the specified waveform sequence file name suffix is not seq error is generated If you use an unsupported MSUS that is not NVWFM or have an error in the waveform segment file path an error is generated If the first specified waveform file cannot be found an error is ...

Page 526: ...nitial S W Revision A 05 00 Waveform Utilities Allows you access to the waveform utilities sub menus Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Multi Pack Licenses Allows you access to the Multi Pack License sub menus Pressing this key also changes the central view area to display the Multi Pack License Management view On modular instrument like E6630A or E6640A multi pack l...

Page 527: ...lent signal sources You can use either one of them Since adding a waveform segment to a Multi Pack license causes the license slot to enter the trial period of only 48 hours pressing this key causes a confirmation dialog to be displayed to ensure you do want to add the waveform segment to the Multi Pack If you attempt to license a waveform that is already licensed using another slot an error is ge...

Page 528: ...a waveform file has been loaded it needs to be loaded again Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB LOAD string Example SOUR RAD ARB LOAD D VARB testwaveform bin or SOUR RAD ARB LOAD NVWFM testwaveform bin Notes Because loading the file involves a delay of unpredictable length this command should be followed by the query OPC which ...

Page 529: ...otes string specifies the directory on the HDD to load the files into ARB memory from When in Sequence Analyzer mode and Include Source is Yes an attempt to load all files from a directory to ARB memory is rejected with an error When Include Source is No and there is insufficient free ARB memory to load all the waveforms when the ARB memory is full the copy ceases and an error is generated If you ...

Page 530: ...Hard Disk on page 2828 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Add Waveform Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Load Segment To ARB Memory This key functions the same as Load Segment To ARB Memory on page 2828 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Add Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Loa...

Page 531: ...e Waveform Add view Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Replace Waveform Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform REPLace int string or SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform REPLace int string Example SYST LKEY WAV REPL 1 myotherwaveform wfm or SYST LIC WAV REPL 1 myotherwaveform wfm Notes The second SCPI SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform REPLace is provided to be consistent...

Page 532: ...ARB Memory on page 2829 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Replace Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Change Directory This key functions the same as Change Directory on page 2830 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Replace Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to ...

Page 533: ...ock Waveform in Slot If the selected slot is in the trial state or the lock required state the waveform that occupies the slot is locked and permanently licensed Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform LOCK int or SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform LOCK int Example SYST LKEY WAV LOCK 1 or SYST LIC WAV LOCK 1 Notes The second SCPI S...

Page 534: ... slot number exceeds total available slot number Nonexistent is returned Range Locked Available Trail LockRequired Nonexistent Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Slots Free Query Remote Command Only Returns the number of license slots free Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform FREE or SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform FREE Example SYST LKEY WAV FREE or SYST LIC WAV FREE Notes The second SCPI SYSTem LICense FP...

Page 535: ...ess than or equals 0 an error is generated Result type is string If input slot number exceeds total available slot number Nonexistent is returned If no waveform stored in the specified slot then empty string is returned Initial S W Revision A 12 00 Slot Waveform Unique ID Query Remote Command Only Returns the waveform unique ID of the specified slot Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform UID int or S...

Page 536: ...nal Studio waveform has a unique id recorded in header So if the unique ids are same that means they are same one waveform So besides SCPI to query locked waveform name list also provide a SCPI to query locked waveform unique id list Initial S W Revision A 11 00 Marker Utilities Allows access to the marker utilities sub menus Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Marker...

Page 537: ...RB Marker Utilities Marker Polarity Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB MPOLarity MARKer2 POSitive NEGative SOURce RADio ARB MPOLarity MARKer2 Example SOUR RAD ARB MPOL MARK2 NEG Dependencies When a new waveform is selected for playback the settings contained within the associated waveform header file are applied to the ARB The marker polarity is one of the values stored within the header file If the ...

Page 538: ...ed within the header file If the newly selected waveform file has an associated header file the marker polarity is updated with the value from the header file The marker polarity will remain unchanged if the newly selected waveform does not have an associated header file Preset Pos Range Neg Pos Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Marker Routing Allows access to the marker routing sub menus which allow y...

Page 539: ... RF blanking setting is updated with the value from the header file The pulse RF blanking setting will remain unchanged if the newly selected waveform does not have an associated header file Range None M1 M2 M3 M4 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 None Sets no marker to be used for the pulse RF blanking function essentially turning the RF blanking function off Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Marke...

Page 540: ...e polarity this is when there are no maker points Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Marker Utilities Marker Routing Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB MDEStination ALCHold NONE M1 M2 M3 M4 SOURce RADio ARB MDEStination ALCHold Example SOUR RAD ARB MDES ALCH NONE Dependencies When a new waveform is selected for playback the settings contained within the associated waveform header file are applied t...

Page 541: ...arker Utilities Marker Routing ALC Hold Example SOUR RAD ARB MDES PULS M3 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Marker 4 Sets marker 4 to be used for the ALC hold function Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Marker Utilities Marker Routing ALC Hold Example SOUR RAD ARB MDES PULS M4 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Header Utilities Allows access to the header utilities sub menu Pressing this key also causes th...

Page 542: ...nal Studio waveform contains a unique waveform ID which recorded in the header This command allows you to query the unique waveform ID from the header This is a SCPI only command User can also checkError Reference source not found for waveform unique ID display Remote Command MMEMory HEADer ID file name Example MMEM HEAD ID test wfm query the waveform already loaded into the ARB memory MMEM HEAD I...

Page 543: ...amplitude modulation Turning AM on when another modulation format is already on results in the previous modulation format being turned off and the generation of an error Key Path Source Modulation Setup AM Remote Command SOURce AM STATe SOURce AM STATe Example SOUR AM STAT OFF Preset Off Range On Off Initial S W Revision A 05 00 AM Depth Allows you to set the amplitude modulation depth in percent ...

Page 544: ...ion Key Path Source Modulation Setup Initial S W Revision A 05 00 FM Enables or disables the frequency modulation Turning FM on when another modulation format is already on results in the previous modulation format being turned off and the generation of an error Key Path Source Modulation Setup FM Remote Command SOURce FM STATe SOURce FM STATe Example SOUR FM STAT OFF Preset Off Range On Off Initi...

Page 545: ...SOUR FM INT FREQ 40 0 Hz Preset 400 0 Hz Min 10 Hz Max 40 kHz Initial S W Revision A 05 00 PM Allows access to the menu for configuring the phase modulation Key Path Source Modulation Setup Initial S W Revision A 05 00 PM Enables or disables the phase modulation Turning PM on when another modulation format is already on results in the previous modulation format being turned off and the generation ...

Page 546: ... 10 Hz Max 40 kHz Initial S W Revision A 05 00 List Sequencer Allows you access to the sub menus for configuring the list sequencer List sequences allows you to enter frequencies and amplitudes at unequal intervals in nonlinear ascending descending or random order Each step within the list can also include its own waveform file for playback step duration trigger event and trigger output The comple...

Page 547: ...e output of the source Couplings When in Sequence Analyzer mode and the list sequencer state is Off Include Source is forced to No and the Include Source key is grayed out When in Sequence Analyzer mode and the list sequencer state is On Include Source is available to set And an ARB memory related operation like load or delete will be rejected Preset Off Range On Off Initial S W Revision A 05 00 I...

Page 548: ...ist Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST NUMBer STEPs integer SOURce LIST NUMBer STEPs Example SOUR LIST NUMB STEP 1 Notes Increasing the number of steps creates additional steps at the end of the list with all the settings within the steps set to their default values Decreasing the number of steps removes steps from the end of the list The settings within the removed steps ar...

Page 549: ...ion A 05 00 Delete Step Allows you to delete the current step Deleting a step will automatically decrease the Step Count parameter by 1 If sequence only has one step left delete step will be rejected and popup error 221 Setting conflict Cannot delete current step minimum number of steps reached Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Notes No remote command Front Panel key only If the ...

Page 550: ...sion A 05 00 Internal Sets the trigger input for the current step to Internal Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Step Trigger Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET INP TRIG INT Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Manual Trigger Key Sets the trigger input for the current step to Manual Trigger Key Any step in the sequence set to Manual will cause the sequence e...

Page 551: ... 40 Notes Note When on E6640A trigger 2 is a bi directional trigger port So when trigger 2 has been configured as OUTPUT type choosing External 2 as the input trigger for the current step will generate error Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Transition Time Allows you to specify the transition time for the current step The transition time is the amount of time allowed for the source to settle at the cu...

Page 552: ...vision A 05 00 Radio Setup Allows you access to the sub menus for setting up the radio standard band and radio band link direction for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Notes No remote command front panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Radio Standard Allows access to the sub menus for selecting the radio standard and the associated radio band for use in the cu...

Page 553: ...ion A 05 00 GSM EDGE Pressing this key once selects GSM EDGE as the radio standard and the current GSM EDGE band as the active channel band Pressing this key again allows access to the sub menus for selecting a different GSM EDGE band Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 05 00 P GSM Selects P GSM as the band for the current step Key ...

Page 554: ...uencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM 450 Selects GSM 450 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM 480 Selects GSM 480 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standa...

Page 555: ...ws access to the sub menus for selecting a different WCDMA band Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band I Selects Band I as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band II Selects Band II as the band for the current step Ke...

Page 556: ...encer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band VII Selects Band VII as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band VIII Selects Band VIII as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standar...

Page 557: ...encer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIII Selects Band XIII as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIV Selects Band XIV as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standar...

Page 558: ...dio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 US PCS Selects US PCS as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Japan Cell Selects Japan Cell as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO In...

Page 559: ...W Revision A 05 00 Secondary 800 Selects Secondary 800 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 400 Euro PAMR Selects 400 Euro PAMR as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A...

Page 560: ...rd CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 US 2 5GHz Selects US 2 5 GHz as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 700 Public Safety Selects 700 Public Safety as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 200...

Page 561: ... 50 BAND 2 Selects BAND 2 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 3 Selects BAND 3 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 4 Selects BAND 4 as the band for the current step Key Pat...

Page 562: ...Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 9 Selects BAND 9 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 10 Selects BAND 10 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE In...

Page 563: ...t Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 17 Selects BAND 17 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 18 Selects BAND 18 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LT...

Page 564: ...t Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 25 Selects BAND 25 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 26 Selects BAND 26 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LT...

Page 565: ...for use and accesses the LTE TDD specific channel band sub menus Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 33 Selects BAND 33 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND33 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 34 Selects BAND 34 as the band for the current step Key Path Sourc...

Page 566: ...p Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND37 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 38 Selects BAND 38 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND38 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 39 Selects BAND 39 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Se...

Page 567: ...quency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND42 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 43 Selects BAND 43 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND43 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 44 Selects BAND 44 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Rad...

Page 568: ...dard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDB Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND C Selects BAND C as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDC Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND D Selects BAND D as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND B...

Page 569: ... calculate the downlink frequency according to a downlink formula together with selected channel band and channel number Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup RADio BAND LINK DOWN UP SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup RADio BAND LINK Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET RAD BAND LINK UP SOUR LIST STEP2 SET RAD BAND LINK Notes SCPI is...

Page 570: ...ath Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup CNFRequency double SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup CNFRequency Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET CNFR 1GHz SOUR LIST STEP2 SET CNFR Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 This SCPI is used to setup channel number or frequency setting according to current Radio Band setting If Radio Band is NONE then it s fre...

Page 571: ...s power setting lower than 130dBm on MPA GPS ports then popup warning message These are only warning messages and check is performed when RF is ON Notes The Min and Max value here defined UI settable amplitude range This range is larger than actual amplitude range with level accuracy defined in spec Dependencies The RF power is dependent on the RF output port and frequency such that the current fr...

Page 572: ... Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 If the selected waveform contains header which contains ARB play parameters source list sequence will automatically apply header settings of the selected waveform in that step Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Continue Previous Sets the current step to continue with playback of the waveform from the previous step When continuing the previous waveform the ARB playb...

Page 573: ...r NVWFM MSUS or specifying a full path For more information see Memory Subsystem Remote Command Only If a file of the same name already exists within ARB memory it is overwritten If you wish to load two segments of the same name you must rename one of the segments before loading it into ARB memory To rename a segment you can either use Windows File Explorer or the MMEMory COPY command NOTE When a ...

Page 574: ...the same name already exists within ARB memory it is overwritten If you wish to load two segments of the same name you must rename one of the segments before loading it into ARB memory To rename a segment you can either use Windows File Explorer or the MEMory COPY command NOTE When a waveform file is loaded to ARB memory burst timing adjustments are made automatically based on whether or not a Mul...

Page 575: ...h location for selecting waveforms using SCPI Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB DEFault DIRectory string SOURce RADio ARB DEFault DIRectory Example SOUR RAD ARB DEF DIR D ArbFiles SOUR RAD ARB DEF DIR State Saved Persistent survives a power cycle and a preset but not saved in the instrument state Initial S W Revision A 05 00 ...

Page 576: ... you to remove all segments from ARB playback memory Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments in ARB Memory Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB DELete ALL Example SOUR RAD ARB DELete ALL Notes When in Sequence Analyzer mode and Include Source is Yes an attempt to delete all files from ARB memory is rejected with an error When Include Source is No and you attempt to delete all file...

Page 577: ...er Setup Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Default Directory This key functions the same as Default Directory on page 2830 Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Segments in ARB Memory This key functions the same as Segments in ARB Memory on page 2830 Key Path Source List Sequencer ...

Page 578: ...SET DUR TYPE TIME SOUR LIST STEP2 SET DUR TYPE Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 Notes If Step Duration is set to Time or Play Count for the last step the last step of ARB keeps playing as if set to Continuous until the set Time has expired or until the Play Count setting is reached However you can query Error Reference source not found Source Sweeping Condition Message to find out if the curr...

Page 579: ...nd Continuous Abort according to current Duration Type setting is Play Count or Duraton Time or Continuous Abort If current Duration Type is Continuous then popup error 221 Settings conflict Cannot accept time or count input when step duration type is Continuous on step Notes If Duration Time is set for the last step the last step of ARB keeps playing as if set to Continuous after set time expires...

Page 580: ... occur on both Internal and External2 paths Select Off will turn off trigger output Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup OUTPut TRIGger ON OFF 1 0 SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup OUTPut TRIGger Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET OUTP TRIG ON SOUR LIST STEP2 SET OUTP TRIG Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 Preset Off Range On Off Initial...

Page 581: ...824 5 Frequency Channel Number freq chan num specifies the frequency in Hz or the channel number for the step The channel number and frequency are combined as one parameter that represents the frequency or channel number depending on the radio band setting If the radio band is set to NONE this value is interpreted as a frequency value in Hz If the radio band is set to a valid band this value is in...

Page 582: ...LIST SETup INPut TRIGger enum enum enum SOURce LIST SETup INPut TRIGger Example SOUR LIST SET INP TRIG IMM INT EXT2 SOUR LIST SET INP TRIG Notes The command is to setup below parameter array of whole list sequence Step Trigger enum specifies the input trigger for the step For details of the valid types of step trigger see Step Trigger on page 2804 If input parameter number exceeds the step number ...

Page 583: ...Number of Steps As a step is setup the value entered run through several levels of validation R e m o t e C o m m a n d SOURce LIST SETup RADio BAND enum enum enum SOURce LIST SETup RADio BAND E x a m p l e SOUR LIST SET RAD BAND PGSM EGSM RGSM SOUR LIST SET RAD BAND N o t e s The command is to setup below parameter array of whole list sequence Radio Band enum specifies the radio band for the step...

Page 584: ...AND37 BAND38 BAND39 BAND40 BAN D41 BAND42 BAND43 BANDA BANDB BANDC BANDD BANDE BANDF D e p e n d e n c i e s The range is 1 to 1000 which is determined by the number of steps you have configured For details see Number of Steps on page 2803 I n i t i a l S W R e v i s i o n A 09 40 584 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 585: ...or Channel Number parameter array of the whole List Sequencer at one time The number of array is same as step number defined in Number of Steps on page 2803 Number of Steps As a step is setup the value entered run through several levels of validation Remote Command SOURce LIST SETup CNFRequency double double double SOURce LIST SETup CNFRequency Example SOUR LIST SET CNFR 1GHz 100MHz 100MHz SOUR LI...

Page 586: ... will be updated Dependencies The range is 1 to 1000 which is determined by the number of steps you have configured For details see Number of Steps on page 2803 Initial S W Revision A 09 40 Step Configuration of Waveform parameter list Remote Command Only This SCPI command is to configure Waveform parameter array of the whole List Sequencer at one time The number of array is same as step number de...

Page 587: ...uration enum specifies the duration of the step The duration can be specified to be either time or play count of the ARB file associated with the step or continuous If Waveform is set to CW this value cannot be set to Play Count and an error will be generated If continuous is selected the following Time or Count value is ignored For further details of this setting see Step Duration on page 2833 If...

Page 588: ...ter list Remote Command Only This SCPI command is to configure Output Trigger parameter array of the whole List Sequencer at one time The number of array is same as step number defined in Number of Steps on page 2803 Number of Steps As a step is setup the value entered run through several levels of validation Remote Command SOURce LIST SETup OUTPut TRIGger bool bool bool SOURce LIST SETup OUTPut T...

Page 589: ...p DATamarker Initial S W Revision A 14 00 BeginningOfStep Sets the output trigger type as BeginningOfStep for the whole source sequence Key Path Source List Sequencer Trigger Type Example SOUR LIST TRIG TYP BEG Notes SCPI is supported after A 14 00 Initial S W Revision A 14 00 DataMarker Sets the output trigger type as DataMarker for the whole source sequence When DataMarker is selected which mark...

Page 590: ...xample SOUR LIST TRIG TYPE MARK M3 Notes SCPI is supported after A 14 00 Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Marker 4 Sets the output trigger maker routing to Marker 4 for DataMarker in the whole source sequence Key Path Source List Sequencer Trigger Type DataMarker Example SOUR LIST TRIG TYPE MARK M4 Notes SCPI is supported after A 14 00 Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Manual Trigger Now Pressing this key ...

Page 591: ...ry only SCPI Returning 1 if list sequence has been initiated successfully returning 0 if not Once get 0 you can use SYST ERR to query what error happened Just like OPC this command can be blocked until event status IsSourceSweeping happens and then returns Doing so can help user s script query armed status only once during the time interval of the initiation As an ancillary SCPI of existing SCPI S...

Page 592: ...to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Dependencies For MSR mode this key is blank For LTE Advanced FDD TDD mode this key is blank In order to keep backwards compitible with the legacy LTE FDD TDD the scpi command is supported in LTE LTE A converged application For WLAN 802 11ac 80 MHz 80 MHz the key is not enabled and its value is coupled with the spacing between the center fre...

Page 593: ...240 MHz if Radio Std is 802 11ac 80 MHz 80 MHz 360 MHz State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 100 Hz Max Hardware Maximum Span Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 A14 50 Full Span Changes the span to show the full frequency range of the spectrum analyzer Key Path Span X Scale Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD...

Page 594: ...WIMAX OFDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN LTEAFDD LTEATDD Remote Command SENSe CHPower FREQuency SPAN PREVious Example CHP FREQ SPAN PREV Notes You must be in the Spectrum Analysis mode W CDMA mode cdma2000 mode DVB T H mode DTMB CTTB mode ISDB T mode CMMB mode Digital Cable TV mode LTE mode LTE TDD mode WLAN mode 1xEVDO mode or WIMAX OFDMA mode to use this ...

Page 595: ... DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD Remote Command SENSe CHPower SWEep TIME time SENSe CHPower SWEep TIME SENSe CHPower SWEep TIME AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe CHPower SWEep TIME AUTO Example CHP SWE TIME 25ms CHP SWE TIME CHP SWE TIME AUTO OFF CHP SWE TIME AUTO Preset SA WIMAX OFDMA Automatically Calculated WCDMA 1 0 ms CDMA2K 9 4ms 1xEVDO 2 66ms DVB T H A...

Page 596: ...still low errors Norm is the preferred setting of Auto Sweep Time Auto Sweep Time is set to Norm on a Preset or Auto Couple This means that in the Preset or Auto Coupled state instrument amplitude accuracy specifications do not apply Key Path Sweep Control Sweep Setup Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD Remote Comm...

Page 597: ...by Meas Preset Key Path Sweep Control Scope Meas Global Readback The state and method of Gate as Off FFT or On FFT Note that for measurements that only support gated FFT the method is nonetheless read back but always as FFT Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Gate On Off Turns the gate function on and off When the Gate Function is on the selected Gate Method is used along with the gate settings ...

Page 598: ... the split screen Gate View In these measurements when the Gate View is on the regular view of the current measurement traces and results are reduced vertically to about 70 of the regular height The Zero Span window showing the positions of the Gate is shown between the Measurement Bar and the reduced measurement window By reducing the height of the measurement window some of the annotation on the...

Page 599: ...ing to the rules in section Gate View Setup on page 1571 When Gate View is turned off Sweep Time is set to the normal Swept SA measurement sweep time If Gate View is on and Gate is off then turning on Gate turns off Gate View Preset OFF State Saved Saved in instrument state Range On Off Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 A sample of the Gate View screen in the Swept SA measurement is shown in t...

Page 600: ... main sweep window and give no indication that the Gate is shut off or that the Gate View window is triggered from the Gate Source When in Gate View vertical lines are displayed in the Gate View window as follows Green lines are displayed at the gate edges as follows in Edge Gate a line is shown for Delay and one for the end of the Gate period defined by Length You can adjust the position of the g...

Page 601: ...Dependencies Gate View Acquisition Time is initialized On Preset after initializing delay and length Every time the Gate Method is set changed 1 Compute the location of the gate stop line which you know is at time t tmin GateDelay GateLength Preset 519 3 µs WiMAX OFDMA 5 ms GSM EDGE 1 ms State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 100 ns Max 6000 s Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Gate View Sta...

Page 602: ...s of time are required or no units otherwise an invalid suffix error message will be generated Preset 57 7 us WiMAX OFDMA 71 us GSM EDGE 600 us WLAN 500 us WLAN 36 us State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0 0 us Max 100 s Backwards Compatibility SCPI SENSe SWEep TIME GATE DELay ESA compatibility Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Gate Length Controls the length of time that the gate is on a...

Page 603: ...ction key for example Trigger Level Trigger Delay etc also affect the corresponding settings under the Trigger menu keys The SCPI commands used for these are the same for Trigger and Gate since there is only one setting which affects both Gate and Trigger Example to set the Trigger Level for External 1 you use the command TRIG EXT1 LEV regardless of whether you are using External 1 as a Trigger So...

Page 604: ...rresponding pop up message Waiting for trigger is generated if no trigger signal appears after approximately 2 sec This message goes away when a trigger signal appears Backwards Compatibility Notes In the past the Average detector was not available when Video triggering was on and consequently functions that set the detector to average such as Marker Noise or Band Intvl Power were not available wh...

Page 605: ...e current selected Y axis unit Backwards Compatibility SCPI TRIGger SEQuence IF LEVel TRIGger SEQuence IF LEVel Backwards Compatibility Notes This alias is provided for backward compatibility with VSA PSA comms apps Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Trig Slope Controls the trigger polarity It is set positive to trigger on a rising edge and negative to trigger on a falling edge Key Path Trigger...

Page 606: ...ncies Grayed out if in use by Point Trigger in the Source Setup menu Forced to Free Run if already selected and Point Trigger is set to External 1 State Saved Saved in instrument state Status Bits OPC dependencies The Status Operation Register bit 5 Waiting for Trigger is set at the same time as the Sweeping or Measuring bit is set It is cleared when the trigger actually occurs that is after the t...

Page 607: ...he Trigger menu and in the Gate Source menu Preset POSitive State Saved Saved in instrument state Backwards Compatibility SCPI TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal SLOPe For backward compatibility the parameter EXTernal is mapped to EXTernal1 Backwards Compatibility SCPI TRIGger SEQuence FRAMe EXTernal1 SLOPe Backwards Compatibility Notes The legacy TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe command affects the slopes for the V...

Page 608: ... menu Key Path Trigger Example TRIG SOUR EXT2 Swept SA measurement TRIG meas SOUR EXT2 Measurements other than Swept SA Dependencies In some models there is no second External input In these models the External 2 key is blanked and the EXTernal2 parameter will generate a Hardware missing Not available for this model number message Grayed out if in use by Point Trigger in the Source Setup menu Forc...

Page 609: ...nd TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal2 SLOPe POSitive NEGative TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal2 SLOPe Example TRIG EXT2 SLOP NEG Couplings This same slope is used in the Ext2 selection for the trigger source in the Trigger menu and for the period timer sync source in the Trigger menu and in the Gate Source menu Preset POSitive State Saved Saved in instrument state Backwards Compatibility SCPI TRIGger SEQuence FR...

Page 610: ...ed accesses the RF Burst trigger setup menu In some models a variety of burst trigger circuitry is available resulting in various available burst trigger bandwidths The analyzer automatically chooses the appropriate trigger path based on the hardware configuration and other settings of the analyzer Key Path Trigger Example TRIG SOUR RFB Swept SA measurement TRIG meas SOUR RFB Measurements other th...

Page 611: ...at far below the displayed signal level rather than simply to the displayed signal level This is only true for Amplitude Corrections not External Gain or Ref Level Offset functions If mode is Bluetooth the default value is 50 dBm Couplings This same level is used for the RF Burst trigger source in the Trigger menu for the RF Burst selection in the Periodic Timer sync source in the Trigger menu and...

Page 612: ...level differs from the previous by more than 0 5 dB the new level is sent to the hardware otherwise it is not updated to avoid slowing down the acquisition Steps 2 and 3 repeat for subsequent measurements Key Path Trigger RF Burst Scope Meas Global Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst LEVel RELative rel_ampl TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst LEVel RELative Example TRIG RFB LEV REL 10 dB sets the trigger...

Page 613: ...lects the internal periodic timer signal as the trigger Triggering occurrences are set by the Period parameter which is modified by the Sync Source and Offset Pressing this key when it is already selected accesses the periodic timer trigger setup functions If you do not have a sync source selected it is Off then the internal timer will not be synchronized with any external timing events Key Path T...

Page 614: ...e temporarily instead of Offset In this case we might tune to the signal in a narrow span and use the RF Burst trigger to synchronize the periodic timer Then we would turn the sync source off so that it would not miss trigger Miss triggering can occur when we are tuned so far away from the RF burst trigger that it is no longer reliable A third example would be to synchronize to a signal that has a...

Page 615: ... Source selection of the period timer Preset 20 ms GSM 4 615383 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 100 000 ns Max 559 0000 ms Default Unit S Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Offset Adjusts the accumulated offset between the periodic timer events and the trigger event Adjusting the accumulated offset is different than setting an offset and requires explanation The periodic timer is usua...

Page 616: ...e period of the trigger waveform Note also that Offset is used only when the sync source is set to OFF otherwise delay is used see section Trig Delay on page 357 An increase in the offset parameter either from the knob or the SCPI adjust command serves to delay the timing of the trigger event Notes When the SCPI command is sent the value shown on the key and the Active Function if this happens to ...

Page 617: ...ery Dependencies The invalid data indicator turns on when the offset is changed until the next sweep measurement completes Couplings The same offset is used in the Gate Source selection of the period timer Preset 0 s State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 10 000 s Max 10 000 s Default Unit S Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Reset Offset Display Resets the value of the periodic trigger offs...

Page 618: ...etting is read back to this key and it is also Readback to the previous Periodic Timer trigger key Backwards Compatibility SCPI TRIGger SEQuence FRAMe SYNC EXTernal For backward compatibility the parameter EXTernal is mapped to EXTernal1 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 03 00 A 14 00 Off Turns off the sync source for your periodic trigger With the sync source off th...

Page 619: ...1 trigger input will trigger a new sweep measurement Key Path Trigger External 1 Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal1 LEVel level TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal1 LEVel Example TRIG EXT1 LEV 0 4 V Couplings This same level is used for the Ext1 trigger source in the Trigger menu for the Ext1 selection in the Periodic Timer sync source in the Trigger menu and in the Gate Source menu and also for the ...

Page 620: ...ed accesses the external 2 trigger setup menu Key Path Trigger Example TRIG SOUR EXT2 Swept SA measurement TRIG meas SOUR EXT2 Measurements other than Swept SA Dependencies In some models there is no second External input In these models the External 2 key is blanked and the EXTernal2 parameter will generate a Hardware missing Not available for this model number message Grayed out if in use by Poi...

Page 621: ...ernal 2 Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal2 SLOPe POSitive NEGative TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal2 SLOPe Example TRIG EXT2 SLOP NEG Couplings This same slope is used in the Ext2 selection for the trigger source in the Trigger menu and for the period timer sync source in the Trigger menu and in the Gate Source menu Preset POSitive State Saved Saved in instrument state Backwards Compatibility SCPI...

Page 622: ...ute Trigger Level Sets the absolute trigger level for the RF burst envelope When using the External Mixing path the Absolute Trigger Level is uncalibrated because the factory default was set to accommodate the expected IF levels for the RF path Key Path Trigger RF Burst Scope Meas Global Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst LEVel ABSolute ampl TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst LEVel ABSolute Example TRI...

Page 623: ...ial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 04 00 Trigger Slope It is set positive to trigger on a rising edge and negative to trigger on a falling edge Key Path Trigger RF Burst Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst SLOPe POSitive NEGative TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst SLOPe Example TRIG RFB SLOP NEG Couplings This same slope is used in the RF Burst selection for the trigger source ...

Page 624: ...s State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0 ms Max 500 ms Default Unit s Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Auto Holdoff Opens up a menu that lets you adjust Auto Trigger and Trigger Holdoff parameters Key Path Trigger Readback line Displays a summary of the Auto Trig and Holdoff settings in square brackets First line Auto Off or Auto On Second Line Hldf followed by If Holdoff is Off readback...

Page 625: ...satisfied the trigger occurs the delay begins and the holdoff time begins New trigger conditions will be ignored until the holdoff time expires For a free running trigger the holdoff value is the minimum time between triggers Key Path Trigger Auto Holdoff Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff time TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff STATe OFF ON 0 1 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff STATe E...

Page 626: ...al 1 2 LEVel Notes This command is simply an alias to TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal 1 2 LEVel For details refer Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Gate Polarity Remote Command Only Sets the polarity for the gate signal This setup is now done using the gate trigger s slope setting When Positive Pos is selected a positive going edge Edge or a high voltage Level will satisfy the gate condition after t...

Page 627: ...ce data is cleared Key Path Sweep Control Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD Remote Command SENSe CHPower SWEep POINts integer SENSe CHPower SWEep POINts Example CHP SWE POIN 501 CHP SWE POIN Notes Whenever the number of sweep points changes All trace data is erased Any traces with Update Off also go to Display Of...

Page 628: ...8 Channel Power Measurement Sweep Control Max 20001 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 628 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 629: ...8 Channel Power Measurement System System See System on page 264 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 629 ...

Page 630: ...Example TRAC CHP TYPE WRIT TRAC CHP TYPE Notes WRITe Clear Write AVERage Average MAXHold Maximum Hold MINHold Minimum Hold Couplings When Detector setting is Auto SENSe CHPower DETector AUTO Detector SENSe CHPower DETector FUNCtion switches aligning with the switch of this parameter NORMal with WRITe Clear Write AVERage with AVERage POSitive peak with MAXHold and NEGative peak with MINHold Preset ...

Page 631: ...e to Auto Key Path Trace Detector Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD Remote Command SENSe CHPower DETector AUTO ON OFF 1 0 SENSe CHPower DETector AUTO Example CHP DET AUTO ON CHP DET AUTO Couplings When Detector setting is Auto SENSe CHPower DETector AUTO Detector SENSe CHPower DETector FUNCtion switches aligning ...

Page 632: ...d is Power Average RMS The Peak detector determines the maximum of the signal within the sweep points The Sample detector indicates the instantaneous level of the signal at the center of the sweep points represented by each display point The Negative Peak detector determines the minimum of the signal within the sweep points Couplings When Detector setting is Auto SENSe CHPower DETector AUTO Detect...

Page 633: ...Delay See Trig Delay on page 336 External 1 See External 1 on page 1588 Trigger Level See Trigger Level on page 1589 Trig Slope See Trig Slope on page 1589 Trig Delay See Trig Delay on page 339 Zero Span Delay Comp See Zero Span Delay Comp On Off on page 1577 External 2 See External 2 on page 1590 Trigger Level See Trigger Level on page 1590 Trig Slope See Trig Slope on page 1591 W CDMA HSPA Measu...

Page 634: ... Relative Trigger Level on page 1582 Trig Slope See Trigger Slope on page 1593 Trig Delay See Trig Delay on page 346 Periodic Timer See Periodic Timer Frame Trigger on page 1583 Period See Period on page 1585 Offset See Offset on page 1585 Reset Offset Display See Reset Offset Display on page 1587 Sync Source See Sync Source on page 1587 Off See Off on page 1588 External 1 See External 1 on page 1...

Page 635: ... page 1590 Trig Slope See Trig Slope on page 1591 RF Burst See RF Burst on page 1591 Absolute Trigger See Absolute Trigger Level on page 1592 Trig Slope See Trigger Slope on page 1593 Trig Delay See Trig Delay on page 357 Auto Holdoff See Auto Holdoff on page 1594 Auto Trig See Auto Trig on page 1594 Trig Holdoff See Trig Holdoff on page 1595 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 635 ...

Page 636: ...h as it can in legacy analyzers If you want to recall all modes to their user preset file state you will need to do a User Preset after mode switching into each mode User Preset recalls mode state which can now include data like traces whereas on ESA and PSA User Preset did not affect data Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 User Preset User Preset sets the state of the currently active mode bac...

Page 637: ...all of the User Preset files for each mode switches to the power on mode and activates the saved measurement from the power on mode User Preset file When the instrument is secured all of the user preset files are converted back to their default user preset files The User Preset function does the following Aborts the currently running measurement Switches the Mode to the power on mode Restores the ...

Page 638: ...mode and its State You can recall this User Preset file by pressing the User Preset menu key or sending the SYST PRES USER remote command This same state is also saved by the Save State function Key Path User Preset Remote Command SYSTem PRESet USER SAVE Example SYST PRES USER SAVE Notes SYST PRES SAVE creates the same file as if the user requested a SAV or a MMEM STOR STAT except User Preset Save...

Page 639: ... a Bar Graph trace on the spectrum trace Spectrum View with Bar Graph off Spectrum View with Bar Graph on This View is the same as the Spectrum view but has a blue bar between the markers that indicates the measured output power level The bar graph is activated when the Bar Graph Soft Key is set to ON under the View Display menu The actual measured output power level is displayed on the display at...

Page 640: ...N 802 11ac 80 80 MHz the spectrum view is changed a little so that the results of both carrier segments can be displayed Spectrum View with Bar Graph off for WLAN 802 11ac 80 80 MHz Spectrum View with Bar Graph on for WLAN 802 11ac 80 80 MHz 640 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 641: ...ter frequency can be displayed in either offset or absolute frequency depending on Carrier Freq The table can be scrolled by Carrier Result on Meas Setup menu or by Select Carrier on Config Carriers menu The highlighted row changes as either Carrier Result or Select Carrier is changed The highlighted row and these keys are not coupled View selection by name MSR and LTE Advanced FDD TDD only Select...

Page 642: ...W NSEL Preset 1 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 1 Max 2 Initial S W Revision A 10 00 View selection by name DTMB CTTB DVB T H only Selects the results view The following SCPI command allows you to select the desired measurement view by enumeration Key Path No equivalent front panel key Mode DVB T H DTMB CTTB Remote Command DISPlay CHPower VIEW SELect RFSPectrum SHOUlder MASK DISPlay CHPo...

Page 643: ... System Display Settings key apply to all measurements in all modes Key Path Display Key Path View Display Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Annotation Turns on and off various parts of the display annotation The annotation is divided up into four categories 1 Meas Bar This is the measurement bar at the top of the screen It does not include the settings panel or the Active Function Turning off...

Page 644: ...ly Key Path View Display Display Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Meas Bar On Off This function turns the Measurement Bar on and off including the settings panel When off the graticule area expands to fill the area formerly occupied by the Measurement Bar Key Path View Display Display Annotation Remote Command DISPlay ANNotation MBAR STATe OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay ANNotation MBAR STATe Example DISP...

Page 645: ...he 1 5 gap above the graticule as described in the Trace Detector chapter Key Path View Display Display Annotation Remote Command DISPlay ANNotation SCReen STATe OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay ANNotation SCReen STATe Example DISP ANN SCR OFF Dependencies Grayed out and forced to OFF when System Display Settings Annotation is set to Off Preset On This should remain Off through a Preset when System DisplaySetti...

Page 646: ...Preset On This should remain Off through a Preset when System DisplaySettings Annotation is set to Off State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Title Displays menu keys that enable you to change or clear a title on your display Key Path View Display Display Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Change Title Writes a title into the measurement name field in the ba...

Page 647: ...DATA This Is My Title This example is for Measurements other than Swept SA Both set the title to This Is My Title Notes Pressing this key cancels any active function When a title is edited the previous title remains intact it is not cleared and the cursor goes at the end so that characters can be added or BKSP can be used to go back over previous characters Preset No title measurement name instead...

Page 648: ...of the meas local annotation settings When it is All Off it forces ScreenAnnotation Meas Bar Trace and Active Function Values settings to be OFF for all measurements in all modes This provides the security based annotation off function of previous analyzers hence it uses the legacy SCPI command When it is All Off the Screen Meas Bar Trace and Active Function Values keys under the Display Annotatio...

Page 649: ...ty Notes In ESA and PSA we offer the choice of Reverse Bitmap or Reverse Metafile when saving screen images This is much like the Flat Color theme available in X Series Also if you selected Reverse Bitmap AND a black white screen image that would be much like Flat Monochrome In other words each of the X Series themes has a similar screen image type in ESA PSA But they are not identical Initial S W...

Page 650: ...ectrumOthers View Display Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD Remote Command DISPlay CHPower VIEW 1 WINDow 1 BGRaph ON OFF 1 0 DISPlay CHPower VIEW 1 WINDow 1 BGRaph Example DISP CHP VIEW WIND BGR ON DISP CHP VIEW WIND BGR Notes You must be in the Spectrum Analysis mode W CDMA mode cdma2000 mode DVB T H mode DTMB C...

Page 651: ...or as spectrum data with measurement data at specified offsets For measurement results and views see View Display on page 972 This topic contains the following sections Measurement Commands for ACP on page 652 Remote Command Results for ACP Measurement on page 653 Undefined variable Primary ProductName W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 651 ...

Page 652: ...rieve the measurement results CONFigure ACP CONFigure ACP NDEFault INITiate ACP FETCh ACP n READ ACP n MEASure ACP n For more measurement related commands see the SENSe subsystem and the section Remote Measurement Functions on page 2642 652 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 653: ... dBm MHz 7 Upper offset A relative power dB 8 Upper offset A absolute power dBm Hz or dBm MHz 9 Lower offset B relative power dB 10 Lower offset B absolute power dBm Hz or dBm MHz 11 Upper offset B relative power dB 12 Upper offset B absolute power dBm Hz or dBm MHz 25 Lower offset F relative power dB 26 Lower offset F absolute power dBm Hz or dBm MHz 27 Upper offset F relative power dB 28 Upper o...

Page 654: ...er offset A relative power dB 6 Lower offset A absolute power dBm Hz or dBm MHz 7 Upper offset A relative power dB 8 Upper offset A absolute power dBm Hz or dBm MHz 9 Lower offset B relative power dB 10 Lower offset B absolute power dBm Hz or dBm MHz 11 Upper offset B relative power dB 12 Upper offset B absolute power dBm Hz or dBm MHz 25 Lower offset F relative power dB 26 Lower offset F absolute...

Page 655: ...absolute power dBm 47 Upper offset F relative power dB 48 Upper offset F absolute power dBm If the results are not available 999 0 is returned Meas Type Power spectral density reference n 2 Returns 48 scalar results in the following order 1 Channel 1 relative power dB 2 Channel 1 absolute power dBm Hz or dBm MHz 3 Channel 2 relative power dB 4 Channel 2 absolute power dBm Hz or dBm MHz 23 Channel ...

Page 656: ...t 8 Upper offset B absolute limit result 21 Lower offset F relative limit result 22 Lower offset F absolute limit result 23 Upper offset F relative limit result 24 Upper offset F absolute limit result Meas Type Power spectral density reference n 3 Returns 24 scalar values of the pass fail 0 passed or 1 failed determined by testing the relative to the reference carrier and by testing the absolute p...

Page 657: ...ber of Carriers relative power dB 2 Number of Carriers Channel Number of Carriers absolute power dBm If the results are not available 9 91E 37 is returned Meas Type Power spectral density reference n 7 Returns 2 Number of Carriers scalar results in the following order The Number of Carriers is the value filled in Carriers under Carrier Setup menu If license N9060A 5FP is enabled max value of Numbe...

Page 658: ...B T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV Remote Command DISPlay ACPower VIEW 1 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel real DISPlay ACPower VIEW 1 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel Example DISP ACP VIEW WIND TRAC Y RLEV 100 DISP ACP VIEW WIND TRAC Y RLEV Notes You must be in the mode that includes ACP measurements to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Couplings When the Auto Scaling is On this v...

Page 659: ... 50 Adjust Range For Min Clip Sets the combination of attenuation and gain based on the current measured signal level so that clipping will be at a minimum This is an immediate action function that is it executes once when the key is pressed This key is grayed out in measurements that do not support this functionality Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Attenuation Remote Command SENSe POWer RF RANGe OPTimize ...

Page 660: ...wever some applications will not permit changing the value In these situations the softkey will be grayed out Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Range Remote Command SENSe POWer RF RANGe PARatio real SENSe POWer RF RANGe PARatio Example POW RANG PAR 12 dB Notes In some Applications Modes this parameter will be read only meaning the value will appear on the softkey and query via SCPI but not changeable In such...

Page 661: ...WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision Example DISP ACP VIEW WIND TRAC Y PDIV 5 DISP ACP VIEW WIND TRAC Y PDIV Notes You must be in the mode that includes ACP measurements to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Couplings When the Auto Scaling is On this value is automatically determined by the measurement result When you set a value manually Auto Scaling automatically changes to Off P...

Page 662: ...DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Remote Command DISPlay ACPower VIEW 1 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe COUPle 0 1 OFF ON DISPlay ACPower VIEW 1 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe COUPle Example DISP ACP VIEW WIND TRAC Y COUP ON DISP ACP VIEW WIND TRAC Y COUP Notes You must be in the mode that includes ACP measurements to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Couplings When Auto Scaling is On a...

Page 663: ...to Man parameters in manual mode It decouples all the coupled instrument parameters and is not recommended for making measurements Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 More Information There are two types of functions that have Auto Manual modes Auto Man Active Function keys An Auto Man toggle key controls the binary state associated with an instrument parameter by toggling between Auto where the...

Page 664: ...9 ACP Measurement Auto Couple 664 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 665: ...Power BANDwidth RESolution AUTO Example ACP BAND 25kHz ACP BAND ACP BAND AUTO ON ACP BAND AUTO Notes This key is available only in IBW mode This parameter is preset by the Meas Method selection Preset values are as follows IBW 100 kHz IBWR 27 kHz FAST WCDMA 390 kHz You must be in the mode that includes ACP measurements to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Dependencies When Mea...

Page 666: ...MAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Remote Command SENSe ACPower BANDwidth VIDeo freq SENSe ACPower BANDwidth VIDeo SENSe ACPower BANDwidth VIDeo AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe ACPower BANDwidth VIDeo AUTO Example ACP BAND VID 1kHz ACP BAND VID ACP BWID VID AUTO ON ACP BWID VID AUTO Notes The values shown in this table reflect the conditions after a Mode Preset Dependencies W...

Page 667: ... LTE MSR ON LTETDD ON State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 1 Hz Max 50 MHz Backwards Compatibility SCPI SENSe ACPower BWIDth VIDeo Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 RBW Control Accesses a menu that enables you to select the filter bandwidth and type Key Path BW Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Filter Type Selects the type of bandwidth filter t...

Page 668: ... Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 Filter BW Selects a Gaussian filter based on its 3 dB Normal bandwidth or its 6 dB bandwidth Key Path BW RBW Control Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Remote Command SENSe ACPower BANDwidth TYPE DB3 DB6 SENSe ACPower BANDwidth TYPE Example ACP BAND TYPE DB3 ACP BAND TYPE Dependencies When Filter Type is ...

Page 669: ...9 ACP Measurement BW W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 669 ...

Page 670: ...c when in Continuous mode When the average count reaches the Average Hold Number the count stops incrementing but the analyzer keeps sweeping See the Trace Detector section for the averaging formula used both before and after the Average Hold Number is reached The trigger condition must be met prior to each sweep The type of trace processing for multiple sweeps is set under the Trace Detector key ...

Page 671: ...NIT CONT 0 command will place the analyzer in Single Sweep but will have no effect on the current sequence until k N at which point the current sequence will stop and the instrument will go to the idle state W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 671 ...

Page 672: ...9 ACP Measurement File File See File on page 258 672 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 673: ...The center frequency setting is the same for all measurements within a mode that is it is Meas Global Some modes are also able to share a Mode Global center frequency value If this is the case the Mode will have a Global Settings key in its Mode Setup menu The Center Freq function sets and queries the Center Frequency for the currently selected input If your analyzer has multiple inputs and you se...

Page 674: ...SCPI command The other parameter is forced to a different value if needed to keep the Start and the Stop Frequencies within the analyzer s frequency range Preset Depends on instrument maximum frequency mode measurement and selected input See Center Frequency Presets on page 674 and RF Center Freq on page 676 and Ext Mix Center Freq and I Q Center Freq on page 678 State Saved Saved in instrument st...

Page 675: ...GHz 26 55 GHz 526 N9038A 1 805 GHz 3 6 GHz 27 0 GHz 532 16 005 GHz 32 0 GHz 32 5 GHz 543 21 505 GHz 43 0 GHz TBD 544 22 005 GHz 44 0 GHz 44 5 GHz 550 25 005 GHz 50 0 GHz 51 GHz Input 2 Model CF after Mode Preset Stop Freq after Mode Preset Max Freq can t tune above N9000A opt C75 0 7505GHz 1 5 GHz 1 58 GHz N9038A 505 MHz 1 GHz 1 000025 GHz Tracking Generator Frequency Limits N9000A only Tracking G...

Page 676: ...elected input Scope Meas Global Remote Command SENSe FREQuency RF CENTer freq SENSe FREQuency RF CENTer Example FREQ RF CENT 30 MHz Notes This command is the same in all modes but the parameter is Measurement Global So the value is independent in each mode and common across all the measurements in the mode Dependencies If the electronic soft attenuator is enabled any attempt to set Center Frequenc...

Page 677: ...and is the same in all modes but the parameter is Measurement Global So the value is independent in each mode and common across all the measurements in the mode Couplings When returning to External Mixing after having been switched to one of the other inputs e g RF you will come back into the settings that you had when you left External Mixing So you will come back to the band you were in with the...

Page 678: ...nput which is selected at the time the command is sent Note that the Center Freq function in the Frequency menu on the front panel always applies to the currently selected input Scope Meas Global Remote Command SENSe FREQuency IQ CENTer freq SENSe FREQuency IQ CENTer Example FREQ IQ CENT 30 MHz Notes This command is the same in all modes but the parameter is Measurement Global So the value is inde...

Page 679: ...lts in an advisory message If the equivalent SCPI command is sent this same message is generated as part of a 221 Settings conflict warning Couplings When auto coupled in a non zero span the center frequency step size is set to 10 of the span When auto coupled in zero span the center frequency step size is set to the equivalent 3 dB RBW value Preset Auto ADEMOD 1 MHz ON State Saved Saved in instru...

Page 680: ...9 ACP Measurement Input Output Input Output See Input Output on page 190 680 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 681: ...trol mode If the current control mode is Off there is no active function and the active function is turned off Key Path Marker Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Remote Command CALCulate ACPower MARKer 1 2 12 MODE POSition DELTa OFF CALCulate ACPower MARKer 1 2 12 MODE Example CALC ACP MARK2 MODE DELT CALC ACP MARK2 MODE Notes If the selected mar...

Page 682: ...cted marker will be relative to its reference marker Key Path Marker Properties Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Remote Command CALCulate ACPower MARKer 1 2 12 REFerence integer CALCulate ACPower MARKer 1 2 12 REFerence Example CALC ACP MARK2 REF 6 CALC ACP MARK2 REF Notes A marker cannot be relative to itself so that choice is grayed out and i...

Page 683: ...ple CALC ACP MARK2 TRAC 2 CALC ACP MARK2 TRAC Notes If the selected marker is Off pressing Marker sets it to Normal and places it at the center of the screen on the trace determined by the Marker Trace rules At the same time Marker X Axis Value appears on the Active Function area Default Active Function the active function for the selected marker s current control mode If the current control mode ...

Page 684: ...t state Range On Off Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 Marker All Off Turns all active markers off Key Path Marker Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Remote Command CALCulate ACPower MARKer AOFF Example CALC ACP MARK AOFF Dependencies This key is unavailable when Meas Method on page 747 is set to RBW I...

Page 685: ...MB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Remote Command CALCulate ACPower MARKer 1 2 12 X POSition real CALCulate ACPower MARKer 1 2 12 X POSition Example CALC ACP MARK10 X POS 0 CALC ACP MARK10 X POS Notes The query returns the marker s absolute X Axis value in trace points if the control mode is Normal or the offset from the marker s reference marker in trace points if the control mode is Delta The value ...

Page 686: ... to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 Backward Compatibility Remote Commands Sets or queries the state of a marker Setting a marker which is off to the on state or 1 puts it in Normal mode and places it at the center of the screen Mode SA WCDMA WIMAXOFDMA CDMA2K TDSCDMA CDMA1XEV DVB DTMB ISDBT CMMB LTE LTETDD Remote Command CALCulate ACPower MARKer 1 2 12 STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate ...

Page 687: ...ction There are no Marker Functions supported in the ACP measurement The front panel key will display a blank key menu when pressed Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 687 ...

Page 688: ...r To There is no Marker To functionality supported in ACP The front panel key will display a blank key menu when pressed Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 688 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 689: ... Help press the Help key and press that key Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Remote Measurement Functions This section contains the following topics Measurement Group of Commands on page 2643 Current Measurement Query Remote Command Only on page 2645 Limit Test Current Results Remote Command Only on page 2645 Data Query Remote Command Only on page 2645 Calculate Compr...

Page 690: ... the default format for the data output Older versions of Spectrum Analysis and Phase Noise mode measurements only use ASCII The binary data formats should be used for handling large blocks of data since they are smaller and faster than the ASCII format Refer to the FORMat DATA command for more information If you need to change some of the measurement parameters from the factory default settings y...

Page 691: ...s set to 1 If the n value is set to a value other than 1 the selected trace data results will be returned See each command for details of what types of scalar results or trace data results are available The binary data formats should be used for handling large blocks of data since they are smaller and transfer faster than the ASCII format FORMat DATA FETCh may be used to return results other than ...

Page 692: ...are smaller and faster than the ASCII format FORMat DATA Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Current Measurement Query Remote Command Only This command returns the name of the measurement that is currently running Remote Command CONFigure Example CONF Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Limit Test Current Results Remote Command Only Queries the status of the current measurement limit testing I...

Page 693: ...A n COMPress BLOCk CFIT MAXimum MINimum MEAN DMEan RMS RMSCubed SAMPle SDEViation PPHase soffset length roffset rlimit Example To query the mean power of a set of GSM bursts Supply a signal that is a set of GSM bursts Select the IQ Waveform measurement in IQ Analyzer Mode Set the sweep time to acquire at least one burst Set the triggers such that acquisition happens at a known position relative to...

Page 694: ...t is the arithmetic mean of the data point values in dB dBm for the specified region s of trace data For I Q trace data the mean of the magnitudes of the I Q pairs is returned See the following equations If the original trace data is in dB this function returns the arithmetic mean of those log values not log of the mean power which is a more useful value The mean of the log is the better measureme...

Page 695: ...Specified Region s where Xi is the complex value representation of an I Q pair Xi its conjugate complex number and n is the number of I Q pairs in the specified region s Once you have the rms value for a region of trace data linear or I Q you may want to calculate the mean power You must convert this rms value peak volts to power in dBm SAMPle returns the first data value x y pair for the specifie...

Page 696: ...by data point in PPHase The rms power of the specified region may be expressed as Power 10 x log 10 x RMS I Q value 10 The RMS I Q value peak volts is where Xi is the complex value representation of an I Q pair Xi its conjugate complex number and n is the number of I Q pairs in the specified region The arithmetic mean phase of the specified region may be expressed as where Yi is the unwrapped phas...

Page 697: ...mpressed into one value This parameter has a default value equal to the current trace length roffset repeat offset is an optional real number It is in seconds for time domain traces and is a dimensionless index 0 to Npoints 1 for frequency domain traces It defines the beginning of the next field of trace elements to be compressed This is relative to the beginning of the previous field This paramet...

Page 698: ...IME Example Example for Swept SA measurement in Spectrum Analyzer Mode CALC DATA4 PEAK 40 10 FREQ GTDL This will identify the peaks of trace 4 that are above 40 dBm with excursions of at least 10 dB The peaks are returned in order of increasing frequency starting with the lowest frequency Only the peaks that are above the display line are returned Query Results 1 With FORMat DATA REAL 32 selected ...

Page 699: ...ng real time overlapped FFTs at the hardware layer using software for basic post processing before returning the result to the user The upshot of this approach is improved throughput for user applications that require many sequential power measurements The analysis bandwidth of FP2 is limited by the licenses in the instrument but its maximum overall analysis bandwidth per acquisition is 40 MHz FP2...

Page 700: ...configuration string Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Acquisition Time Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF AcquisitionTime 0 002 Notes The acquisition time parameter sets the time in which the entire spectrum is measured An increase in the acquisition time yields an improvement in measurement repeatability Preset 0 001 s Range 0 s to 1 s Default Unit Time s Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Center Frequency Example...

Page 701: ...btracted from all measurements This effectively lowers the noise floor of the analyzer When noise correction is enabled the first measurement for a given set of input parameters will take extra time This is because the analyzer takes an extra acquisition with the RF input disconnected from the analyzer s front end to measure the noise of just the analyzer The measured noise floor is stored in a ca...

Page 702: ... two acquisitions rather than a single acquisition are made when spur suppression is enabled the measurement time will always be slower when spur suppression is enabled Preset False Range True enable spur suppression or False disable spur suppression Default Unit Boolean Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Electronic Attenuator Bypass Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF ElecAttBypass False Notes The electronic at...

Page 703: ...hs For example if the signal is less than 25 MHz wide then the user can select the B25M path to take advantage of additional filtering on this analog IF path Preset B40M Range B10M B25M B40M Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Include Power Spectrum Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF IncludePowerSpectrum True Notes The power spectrum parameter allows the user to read data on the entire spectrum for diagnostic pu...

Page 704: ...ow Full Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Resolution Bandwidth Mode Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF PreAmpMode Low Notes The resolution bandwidth mode parameter allows the user to choose whether the RBW filter is automatically or manually set The BestSpeed value minimizes measurement time while the Narrowest value minimizes RBW size minimum of two FFT bins per RBW To manually specify an RBW set this paramet...

Page 705: ...ion A 14 00 Trigger Level Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF TriggerLevel 2 Notes The trigger level parameter sets the voltage value at which an external trigger is detected Preset 1 2 V Range 5 to 5 V Default Unit Volts Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Trigger Slope Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF TriggerSlope Negative Notes The trigger slope parameter indicates the direction of the edge trigger voltage for detec...

Page 706: ...t Unit Seconds Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Signal Input Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF SignalInput Fp50MHzCW Notes The signal input parameter allows the user to select between using the main RF input or the internal analyzer reference CW signal of 50 MHz Preset FpMainRf Range FpMainRf Fp50MHzCW Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Use Preselector Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF UsePreSelector True Notes The prese...

Page 707: ...r weighs all frequencies within the bandwidth equally The root raised cosine filter has an associated shape parameter defined by the FilterAlpha parameter All array parameters should have the same number of elements Alternatively if all the elements are the same value a single value with no square brackets can be used to define the parameter Preset IBW Range IBW RRC Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Ch...

Page 708: ...hould have the same number of elements Alternatively if all the elements are the same value a single value with no square brackets can be used to define the parameter Preset BandPower Range BandPower BandDensity PeakPower PeakFrequency XdBBandwidth OccupiedBandwidth Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Channel Offset Frequency Array Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF OffsetFrequency 5e6 0 5e6 Notes The offset fre...

Page 709: ... relative to the peak channel power over which the bandwidth is calculated The parameter value must be a negative number Preset 3 01 Range 200 to 0 dB Default Unit dB Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Define Fast Power Measurement Query Remote Command Only The DEFine command is used to retrieve a list of all defined parameters in an ASCII string format M o d e All R e m o t e C o m m a n d CALCulate FP...

Page 710: ...equency 0 Function BandPower FilterType IBW FilterAlpha 0 22 OccupiedBandwidthPercent 0 99 XdBBandwidth 3 01 DoNoiseCorrection False DoSpurSuppression False MeasurementMethod HardwareFFT IncludePowerSpectrum Fals e TriggerDelay 0 TriggerLevel 1 2 TriggerSlope Positive TriggerSource Free TriggerTimeout 1 I n i t i a l S W R e v i s i o n A 14 00 Configure Fast Power Measurement Remote Command Only ...

Page 711: ...rated ASCII values where m corresponds to the number of bandwidths defined 1 Declared function return in the 1st specified channel 2 Declared function return in the 2nd specified channel m Declared function return in the last specified channel The INIT and FETC command sequence performs the same functionality of a single CALC FPOW POW n query Units of the returned values are dependent on the Funct...

Page 712: ...and to visibly inspect the spectrum Mode All Remote Command CALCulate FPOWer POWer 1 2 999 READ2 Example CALC FPOW POW1 READ2 Notes Option FP2 is required Note Spectrum data is only returned if the IncludePowerSpectrum parameter is set to True If IncludePowerSpectrum is False the number of spectrum points will be zero 0 Units of the returned values are dependent on the Function parameter per chann...

Page 713: ...s output in the current Y Axis unit When the data format is INTeger data is output in units of m dBm 001 dBm The INT 32 format returns binary 32 bit integer values in internal units m dBm in a definite length block Dependencies Sending a data format spec with an invalid number for example INT 48 generates no error The analyzer simply uses the default 8 for ASCii 32 for INTeger 32 for REAL Sending ...

Page 714: ...ta transfer and other queries It controls whether binary data is transferred in normal or swapped mode This command affects only the byte order for setting and querying trace data for the TRACe DATA TRACe DATA CALCulate DATA n and FETCh SANalyzer n commands and queries By definition any command that says it uses FORMat DATA uses any format supported by FORMat DATA The NORMal order is a byte sequen...

Page 715: ...mination control setting determines the average action Key Path Meas Setup Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Remote Command SENSe ACPower AVERage COUNt integer SENSe ACPower AVERage COUNt SENSe ACPower AVERage STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe ACPower AVERage STATe Example ACP AVER COUN 250 ACP AVER COUN ACP AVER OFF ACP AVER Notes You must be in the mode ...

Page 716: ...nential REPeat SENSe ACPower AVERage TCONtrol Example ACP AVER TCON EXP ACP AVER TCON Notes You must be in the mode that includes ACP measurements to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Preset EXPonential State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Exp Repeat Backwards Compatibility SCPI SENSe ACPR AVERage TCONtrol Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A...

Page 717: ...m Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 Ref Carrier Sets the reference carrier Relative power measurements are made from the reference carrier If set to Auto the measurement selects the carrier with the highest power as the reference carrier and the Ref Carrier parameter is updated If a value is entered when Ref Carrier Mode is set to Auto the mode changes ...

Page 718: ... SENSe MCPower RCARrier 1 2 PSA Power Suite Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 Ref Car Freq Sets the reference carrier frequency Key Path Meas Setup Carrier Setup Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA 1xEVDO TD SCDMA DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV Remote Command SENSe ACPower CARRier 1 2 RCFRequency freq SENSe ACPower CARRier 1 2 RCFRe...

Page 719: ...een If there is only one carrier present the Reference Carrier Frequency will be the same as the Center Frequency Preset Calculated based on the current Center Frequency State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 79 999995 MHz Max Hardware Dependent Option 503 3 699999995 GHz Option 508 8 499999995 GHz Option 513 13 799999995 GHz Option 526 26 999999995 GHz Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Mod...

Page 720: ...n the SA mode Carrier sub op code 1 is used for both BTS and MS The Unit Terminator keys differ depending on whether or not the mode supports Y Axis Unit and also which Y Axis Unit is selected You must be in the mode that includes ACP measurements to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Power Ref State SENSe ACPower CARRier 1 2 AUTO STATe is not available in MSR mode Dependencies...

Page 721: ...se this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Dependencies This key is available only when the Meas Type is PSDRef If the Meas Type is not PSDRef this key is grayed out Couplings The value of PSD is automatically converted when PSD Unit is changed Preset 0 0 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 999 Max 999 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 ...

Page 722: ... there are no carriers to the left will be assigned as the reference carrier This also applies to the scenario where there are only two carriers configured as having power present and you configure only one carrier to have no power present Key Path Meas Setup Carrier Setup Configure Carriers Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA 1xEVDO TD SCDMA DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV Rem...

Page 723: ... ACPower CARRier 1 2 LIST WIDTh Example ACP CARR2 LIST WIDT 25kHz ACP CARR2 LIST WIDT Notes Carrier sub op code 1 for BTS 2 for MS Default is BTS Note that Carrier sub op code 2 is supported only in Non SA modes In the SA mode Carrier sub op code 1 is used for both BTS and MS When setting these values remotely the position in the list sent corresponds to the carrier Missing values are not permitte...

Page 724: ...MB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV Remote Command SENSe ACPower CARRier 1 2 LIST BANDwidth INTegration freq freq freq freq freq freq SENSe ACPower CARRier 1 2 LIST BANDwidth INTegration Example ACP CARR2 LIST BAND 25kHz ACP CARR2 LIST BAND Notes In the WCDMA mode the preset default value is defined as 3 84 MHz But internally 4 6848 MHz is used as the default value Carrier sub op code ...

Page 725: ... INTegration SENSe ACPower CARRier 1 2 LIST BWIDth INTegration SENSe MCPower CARRier 1 2 LIST BANDwidth INTegration PSA Power Suite SENSe MCPower CARRier 1 2 LIST BWIDth INTegration PSA Power Suite Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 Method for Carrier Accesses the carrier configuration method settings Key Path Meas Setup Carrier Setup Configure Carriers ...

Page 726: ...Filter Alpha for Carrier Inputs the alpha value for the filter used in the current carrier configuration Key Path Meas Setup Carrier Setup Configure Carriers Method RRC Weighted Mode SA WCDMA WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV Remote Command SENSe ACPower CARRier 1 2 LIST FILTer ALPHa real real real real real real SENSe ACPower CARRier 1 2 LIST FILTer AL...

Page 727: ...e 1 for BTS 2 for MS Default is BTS Note that Carrier sub op code 2 is supported only in Non SA modes In the SA mode Carrier sub op code 1 is used for both BTS and MS You must be in the mode that includes ACP measurements to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Couplings When Couple is selected the carrier settings are coupled to carrier 1 Coupled parameters are Carrier Power Pre...

Page 728: ...ate value is entered individually by selecting the desired carrier on the carrier menu key using the up down arrows RPG or numeric keypad Then enter the Offset Freq State using the Offset Frequency key The list contains up to six 6 entries depending on the mode selected for offset frequencies Each offset frequency in the list corresponds to a reference bandwidth in the bandwidth list An offset fre...

Page 729: ...fset Frequency might affect the Span See the Span key section for details Preset SA 3 MHz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 3 MHz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz WCDMA 5 0 MHz 10 0 MHz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 5 0 MHz 10 0 MHz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz WIMAX OFDMA 10 MHz 20 MHz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 10 MHz 20 MHz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz C2K 750KHz 1 980 MHz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 885 kHz 1 980 MHz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz TD SCDMA 1 6 MH...

Page 730: ...ation Bandwidth menu key You can turn off not use specific offsets with the SENSe ACP OFFSet n OUTer LIST STATe command Key Path Meas Setup Offset Limits Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Remote Command SENSe ACPower OFFSet 1 2 OUTer LIST BANDwidth INTegration freq freq freq freq freq freq SENSe ACPower OFFSet 1 2 OUTer LIST BANDwidth INTegratio...

Page 731: ... MHz 7 56 MHz ISDB T 5 6 MHz 5 6 MHz 5 6 MHz 5 6 MHz 5 6 MHz 5 6 MHz 5 6 MHz 5 6 MHz 5 6 MHz 5 6 MHz 5 6 MHz 5 6 MHz CMMB 7 512 MHz 7 512 MHz 7 512 MHz 7 512 MHz 7 512 MHz 7 512 MHz 7 512 MHz 7 512 MHz 7 512 MHz 7 512 MHz 7 512 MHz 7 512 MHz LTE LTETDD 4 515 MHz 4 515 MHz 4 515 MHz 4 515 MHz 4 515 MHz 4 515 MHz 4 5 MHz 4 5 MHz 4 5 MHz 4 5 MHz 4 5 MHz 4 5 MHz Digital Cable TV 8 0 MHz 8 0 MHz 8 0 MH...

Page 732: ...Offset sub op code 2 is supported only in Non SA modes In the SA mode Offset sub op code 1 is used for both BTS and MS You must be in the mode that includes ACP measurements to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Dependencies When Meas Method is RBW or FAST this key is grayed out and disabled If the key is pressed an advisory message is generated If the equivalent remote command...

Page 733: ...0 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 A 13 00 Video BW Enables you to change the analyzer post detection filter VBW Key Path Meas Setup Offset Limits Offset BW Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Remote Command SENSe ACPower OFFSet 1 2 OUTer LIST BANDwidth VIDeo freq freq freq freq freq freq SENSe ACPower OFFSet 1 2 OUTer LIST BANDwidth VIDeo...

Page 734: ...0 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz DTMB CTTB 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz ISDB T 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz CMMB 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 kHz 390 ...

Page 735: ...disabled Since Res BW Mode for the offset is preset to Auto on changing Meas Method to RBW or FAST this key is grayed out and disabled too If the key is pressed an advisory message is generated If the equivalent remote command is sent a Setting conflict warning is generated Couplings See the description above Preset GAUSsian GAUSsian GAUSsian GAUSsian GAUSsian GAUSsian State Saved Saved in instrum...

Page 736: ... conflict warning is generated Preset DB3 DB3 DB3 DB3 DB3 DB3 State Saved Saved in instrument state Range 3 dB Normal 6 dB Backwards Compatibility SCPI SENSe ACPower OFFSet 1 2 LIST BWIDth TYPE Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 A 13 00 Limits Limits key accesses a menu of functions that contains Select Offset Abs Limit Rel Limit and Fail Mask parameters...

Page 737: ...d MS You must be in the mode that includes ACP measurements to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Couplings None If current mode is DTMB CTTB or CMMB and current device type is Transmitter the value from position 2 to position 4 are coupled changing any one will change the others Preset SA 0dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm 0dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm WCDMA 50 dBm 50 dBm...

Page 738: ... OFFSet n OUTer LIST STATe command The query returns the six 6 sets of real numbers that are the current amplitude test limits relative to the carrier for each offset Offset n n 1 is base station and n 2 is mobiles The default is base station 1 Key Path Meas Setup Offset Limits Limits Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Remote Command SENSe ACPowe...

Page 739: ...at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 A 04 00 A 13 00 Positive Offset Limit SCPI only Enables you to set the upper limit for the upper segment of the specified offset pair Mode SA WCDMA CDMA2K WIMAXOFDMA TDSCDMA CDMA1XEV DVB DTMB LTE LTETDD Remote Command CALCulate ACPower OFFSet OUTer LIST LIMit POSitive UPPer DATA real real real real real real CALCulate ACPower OFFSet OUTer LIST LIMit POSitive UPPer D...

Page 740: ... NEGative UPPer DATA Example CALC ACP OFFS LIST LIM NEG DATA 0 0 0 0 0 0 CALC ACP OFFS LIST LIM NEG DATA Notes SCPI only command Preset SA 45 60 0 0 0 0 45 60 0 0 0 0 WCDMA 44 2 49 2 49 2 49 2 49 2 49 2 32 2 42 2 42 2 42 2 42 2 42 2 C2K 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WIMAX OFDMA 50 60 0 0 0 0 TD SCDMA 40 45 45 45 45 45 33 43 43 43 43 43 1xEVDO 45 55 55 55 55 55 45 55 55 55 55 55 DVB T H 60 60 0 0 0 0 60 ...

Page 741: ...mple ACP OFFS2 LIST RPSD 10 10 10 10 10 10 ACP OFFS2 LIST RPSD Notes Offset sub op code 1 for BTS 2 for MS Default is BTS Note that Offset sub op code 2 is supported only in Non SA modes In the SA mode Offset sub op code 1 is used for both BTS and MS You must be in the mode that includes ACP measurements to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Preset SA 28 87 dB 43 87 dB 0 dB 0 d...

Page 742: ...surement results is larger than the limit for Rel Lim Car or Rel Lim PSD Abs OR Rel Fail is shown if one of the absolute ACP measurement results is larger than the limit for Abs Limit OR one of the relative ACP measurement results is larger than the limit for Rel Lim Car or Rel Lim PSD Key Path Meas Setup Offset Limits Limits Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T C...

Page 743: ...only BOTH Both of the negative lower and positive upper sidebands POSitive Positive upper sideband only Key Path Meas Setup Offset Limits Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DTMB CTTB DVB T H LTE LTETDD Remote Command SENSe ACPower OFFSet 1 2 OUTer LIST SIDE NEGative BOTH POSitive NEGative BOTH POSitive NEGative BOTH POSitive NEGative BOTH POSitive NEGative BOTH POSitive NEGative BOTH PO...

Page 744: ...RRC STATe Example ACP OFFS LIST FILT 1 0 0 ACP OFFS LIST FILT Notes 1 ON RRC Weighted 0 OFF Integ BW This parameter is not available for cdma2000 and 1xEVDO You must be in the mode that includes ACP measurements to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Preset SA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WCDMA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 C2K NO WIMAX OFDMA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TD SCDMA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ...

Page 745: ...e this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Preset SA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WCDMA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 C2K NO WIMAX OFDMA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TD SCDMA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 DVB T H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DTMB CTTB 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISDB T 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CMMB 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LTE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LTETDD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 State Saved Saved in i...

Page 746: ...ed Saved in instrument state Min 0 01 Max 1 00 Initial S W Revision A 03 00 Modified at S W Revision A 13 00 Offset Frequency Define This key allows you to select Offset definition Each standard defines each Offset from Carrier 3GPP2 requires the From Carrier Center to MeasBW Closer Edge definition LTE conformance test requires From Carrier Edge to MeasBW Center and or From Carrier Edge to MeasBW ...

Page 747: ...al S W Revision A 03 00 Modified at S W Revision A 13 00 Carrier Result Allows you to view and scroll through the carrier power results Key Path Meas Setup Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Couplings This key will be grayed out if there is only one carrier Preset 1 State Saved No Min 1 Max Number of carriers Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00...

Page 748: ...ffset Limit RRC Weighting Filter Alpha and Noise Correction softkeys in Meas Setup menu Key Path Meas Setup Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Remote Command SENSe ACPower METHod IBW IBWRange FAST RBW SENSe ACPower METHod Example ACP METH IBW ACP METH Notes FAST mode is only supported for WCDMA and C2K signal You must be in the WCDMA or C2K mode or SA mod...

Page 749: ...the measurement bandwidth Total Pwr Ref TPR sets the reference to the total carrier power PSD Ref PSDR sets the reference to the power spectral density of the carrier Key Path Meas Setup Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Remote Command SENSe ACPower TYPE TPRef PSDRef SENSe ACPower TYPE Example ACP TYPE PSDR ACP TYPE Notes You must be in the mode...

Page 750: ...00 Limit Test Turns limit checking for each offset On or Off The limits may be specified within the Offset menu for each offset both sides of the carrier For results that fail the limit a red F is appended In the Combined view the bar turns red Key Path Meas Setup Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Remote Command CALCulate ACPower LIMit STATe OFF...

Page 751: ... to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 Offset RRC Weighting Backward Compatibility SCPI Mode SA WCDMA TD SCDMA WIMAX OFDMA DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Remote Command SENSe ACPower FILTer RRC STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe ACPower FILTer RRC STATe Example ACP FILT OFF ACP FILT Notes This parameter is not available for cdma2000 and 1xEVDO The backwards Compatibility SCPI command S...

Page 752: ...bility SCPI command SENSe ACPR FILTer RRC ALPHa is provided to support same functionality as SENSe ACPr FILTer RRC ALPHa PSA W CDMA PSA cdma2000 and PSA 1xEVDO due to ACPr node conflicts with ACPower node You must be in the mode that includes ACP measurements to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Couplings This command is an alias to SENSe ACPower OFFSet 1 2 LIST FILTer ALPhHa ...

Page 753: ... the mode Maximum of Array length depends on the number of carriers Couplings This command is an alias to SENSe ACPower CARRier 1 2 LIST FILTer RRC STATe The enum value translates as follows RRC Weighted 1 ON Integ BW 0 OFF Maximum of Array length depends on the number of carriers Preset SA IBW WCDMA RRC WIMAX OFDMA IBW TD SCDMA RRC DVB T H IBW DTMB CTTB RRC ISDB T IBW CMMB IBW LTE MSR IBW LTETDD ...

Page 754: ...9 ACP Measurement Mode Mode See Mode on page 232 754 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 755: ...and gets the mode to a consistent state with all of the default couplings set Backwards Compatibility Notes In the X Series the legacy Factory Preset has been replaced with Mode Preset which only presets the currently active mode not the entire instrument In the X Series the way to preset the entire instrument is by using System Restore System Defaults All which behaves essentially the same way as...

Page 756: ...xcept the persistent ones Restore Mode Defaults resets ALL the Mode variables and all the Meas global and Meas local variables including the persistent ones Type Of Preset SCPI Command Front Panel Access Auto Couple COUPle ALL Auto Couple front panel key Meas Preset CONFigure Measurement Meas Setup Menu Mode Preset SYSTem PRESet Mode Preset green key Restore Mode Defaults INSTrument DEFault Mode S...

Page 757: ...de Preset Power On Mode Preset SYSTem PON TYPE MODE System Menu Power On User Preset SYSTem PON TYPE USER System Menu Power On Last State SYSTem PON TYPE LAST System Menu W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 757 ...

Page 758: ...9 ACP Measurement Mode Setup Mode Setup See Mode Setup on page 251 758 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 759: ... C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Remote Command CALCulate ACPower MARKer 1 2 12 MAXimum NEXT Example CALC ACP MARK2 MAX NEXT Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 Next Pk Right Moves the selected marker to the nearest peak to the right of the current marker that meets all enabled peak criteria Key Path Peak Search Mo...

Page 760: ...section for more information Key Path Peak Search Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Pk Pk Search Finds and displays the amplitude and frequency or time if in zero span differences between the highest and lowest y axis value Key Path Peak Search Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Remote Command CALCulate ACPower MARKer 1 2 12 PTPeak Example CA...

Page 761: ...X OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Remote Command CALCulate ACPower MARKer 1 2 12 MINimum Example CALC ACP MARK MIN Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 761 ...

Page 762: ...9 ACP Measurement Print Print See Print on page 263 762 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 763: ...e State State_ Save Recall Screen Screen_ Save Recall Amplitude Corrections Ampcor_ Import Export Traces Trace_ Import Export Limit Lines LLine_ Import Export Measurement Result MeasR_ Import Export Capture Buffer CapBuf_ Import Export A four digit number is appended to the prefix to create a unique file name The numbering sequence starts at 0000 within each Mode for each file type and updates inc...

Page 764: ...d_0000 csv Although 0000 is used in the example above the number that is used is actually the current number in the Meas Results sequence that is the number that would have been used if you had not entered your own file name If the filename you entered ends with _dddd where d any number making it look just like an auto file name then the next auto file name picks up where you left off with the suf...

Page 765: ...ense that you can recall a state file from any X Series model number and any version of X Series software This is only possible if part of the recalling process goes through a limiting step after recalling the mode settings at least for settings that may vary with version number model number option and license differences If you try to recall a state file onto an instrument with less capability th...

Page 766: ...for the Spectrum Analyzer See More Information on page 767 Key Path Recall Mode All Remote Command MMEMory LOAD STATe filename Example MMEM LOAD STAT myState state This recalls the file myState state on the default path Example MMEM LOAD STAT MyStateFile state This loads the state file data on the default file directory path into the instrument state Notes When you pick a file to recall the analyz...

Page 767: ...ou use State to save and recall traces any trace whose data must be preserved should be placed in View or Blank mode before saving The following table describes the Trace Save and Recall possibilities You want to recall state and one trace s data leaving other traces unaffected Save Trace State from 1 trace Make sure that no other traces are updating they should all be in View or Blank mode when t...

Page 768: ...as Look In Look In The Look In field shows the path from which the file will be recalled and allows you to change the path using the up and down arrow keys to navigate to other paths the Enter key to open a directory and the Backspace key to go back one directory The Look In field first uses the last path from the Save As dialog Save In path for that same file type There is no softkey for directly...

Page 769: ...the current Open request to be cancelled The ESC key does the same thing Key Path Recall State Notes Brings up the Open dialog for recalling a State Save Type Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Edit Register Names You may enter a custom name on any of the Register keys to help you remember what you are using that state to save To do this press the Edit Register Names key choose the register who...

Page 770: ... Recall State Example RCL 1 Range 1 16 from front panel 1 128 from SCPI Readback Date and time with seconds resolution are displayed on the key OR A custom name of up to 30 characters entered using the Save State Edit Register Names key OR empty if no prior save operation has been performed to this register Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision Prior to A 11 00 Register 1 ...

Page 771: ...er Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision Prior to A 11 00 Sequences These keys allow you to import a Tab separated or txt file that will automatically setup all the parameters required for building a Sequence The parameters will automatically be loaded into the Stated Sequencer Once selected in order to import the selected Sequence Type you must select the Open key in the ...

Page 772: ...ion for manipulating csv files and then import it Importing Data loads measurement data from the specified file into the specified or default destination depending on the data type selected Selecting an Import Data menu key will not actually cause the importing to occur since the analyzer still needs to know from where to get the data Pressing the Open key in this menu brings up the Open dialog an...

Page 773: ...er measurements this key is grayed out Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Open When you press Open the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu entitled File Open This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse The Tab and Arrow keys can also be used for dialog navigation See From File on page 2687in Recall State for a full de...

Page 774: ...WEEPING bit is set The MEASURING bit is set Backwards Compatibility Notes For Spectrum Analysis mode in ESA and PSA the Restart hardkey and the INITiate RESTart command restart trace averages displayed average count reset to 1 for a trace in Clear Write but did not restart Max Hold and Min Hold In the X Series the Restart hardkey and the INITiate RESTart command restart not only Trace Average but ...

Page 775: ...on is met and the analyzer stops sweeping once that sweep has completed However with Average Hold Number 1 and at least one trace set to Trace Average Max Hold or Min Hold SA Measurement or Averaging on most other measurements multiple sweeps data acquisitions are taken for a single measurement The trigger condition must be met prior to each sweep The sweep is stopped when the average count k equa...

Page 776: ...that are affected by Mode Preset as well as the additional settings affected by Restore Mode Defaults all of the Mode s settings In addition all of the settings of the Input Output system are included even though they are outside of the Mode s state because they are needed to restore the complete setup Persistent System settings for example Verbose SCPI are not affected by either Mode Preset or Re...

Page 777: ...nored The command is sequential Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 To File When you press To File the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu entitled Save As This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse The Tab and Arrow keys can also be used for dialog navigation The Listed below are the functions of the various fields i...

Page 778: ...ng the File Name key See the Quick Save on page 2683 documentation for more on the automatic file naming algorithm When you press the File Name key the analyzer displays the Alpha Editor Use the knob to choose the letter to add and the front panel Enter key to add the letter to the file name The BK character moves you back and the FW character moves you forward in the filename The Select key on th...

Page 779: ...gister number an error message is generated 222 Data out of range Invalid register label number label is a string from 0 to 30 characters in length If a label exceeds 30 characters an error message is generated 150 String data error Label clipped to 30 characters label of length 0 erases the custom label and restores the default time and date label E g MMEM REG STAT LAB 1 Dependencies N9060A 7FP o...

Page 780: ... Although these 16 registers are the only registers available from the front panel there are 128 state registers available in the instrument Registers 17 128 are only available from the SCPI interface using the SAV command There is one set of 128 state registers in the instrument not one set for each Mode When a state is saved the Mode it was saved from is saved with it then when it is recalled th...

Page 781: ...tom name of up to 30 characters entered using the Edit Register Names key OR empty if no prior save operation has been performed to this register Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 11 00 Mass Storage Catalog Remote Command Only Key path SCPI Only Remote Command MMEMory CATalog directory_name Notes The string must be a valid logical path Queries disk usage information ...

Page 782: ...d parameter specifies the destination The second form has four parameters In this form the first and third parameters specify the source The second and fourth parameters specify the directories The first pair of parameters specifies the source The second pair specifies the destination An error is generated if the source doesn t exist or the destination file already exists This command will generat...

Page 783: ...ata It loads data into the file file_ name data is in 488 2 block format file_name is string data The query form is MMEMory DATA file_name with the response being the associated data in block format Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Mass Storage Make Directory Remote Command Only Key path SCPI Only Remote Command MMEMory MDIRectory directory_name Notes The string must be a valid logical path C...

Page 784: ...y Remote Command MMEMory RDIRectory directory_name Notes The string must be a valid logical path Removes a directory The directory_name parameter specifies the directory name to be removed All files and directories under the specified directory shall also be removed This command will generate an access denied error if the folder is a restricted folder e g C Windows or is in a restricted folder and...

Page 785: ...orithm The default path for all Sequence Files is My Documents Sequences Key Path Save Sequences Mode All Notes Brings up Save As dialog for saving a Sequence Save Type Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Data Export Exporting a data file stores data from the current measurement to mass storage files The Export Menu only contains data types that are supported by the current measurement Since the commonly...

Page 786: ...EMory STORe RESults string Example MMEM STOR RES MeasR_0000 csv Notes If the save is initiated via SCPI and the file already exists the file will be overwritten The SCPI command exports ACP measurement results to the file specified as the parameter in the current path The default path is My Documents current mode data ACP results Using the C drive is strongly discouraged since it runs the risk of ...

Page 787: ... Frequency Step Center Frequency Step State Detector Auto Detector Selection Electrical Atten Electrical Atten State External Array Trigger Delay External Array Trigger Delay State External Array Trigger Level External Array Trigger Slope Filter Alpha Filter BW Filter Type Internal Preamp Internal Preamp Band Limit Test Line Trigger Delay Line Trigger Delay State Line Trigger Slope W CDMA HSPA Mea...

Page 788: ...fset Filter Type Offset Freq Offset Freq State Offset Integ BW Offset Method Offset Rel Lim Car Offset Rel Lim PSD Offset Res BW Offset Res BW Mode Offset Video BW Offset Video BW Mode Periodic Timer Period Periodic Timer Sync Source Periodic Timer Trigger Delay Periodic Timer Trigger Delay State Points Power Ref Power Ref State Preselector Adjust PSD Ref 788 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications R...

Page 789: ...eo BW Auto The file contains these data followed by MeasResult1 MeasResult2 and MeasResult3 that flag the start of the measurement results Each line of Measurement Results consists of three comma separated values MeasResult1 value MeasResult2 value and MeasResult3 value MeasResult1 contains the same result as MEAS READ FETCh ACPower1 MeasResult2 MEAS READ FETCh ACPower2 MeasResult3 MEAS READ FETCh...

Page 790: ...ential Average Number 10 Average State TRUE Bar Graph TRUE Carrier Coupling TRUE TRUE TRU E TRU E TRU E TRU E TRU E TRU E TRU E TRU E TRU E TRU E Carrier Pwr Present Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Carrier Spacing 5000000 5000 000 500 000 0 500 000 0 500 000 0 500 000 0 500 000 0 500 000 0 500 000 0 500 000 0 500 000 0 500 000 0 Carriers 1 Center Frequency 1 33E 10 Center Frequency...

Page 791: ...0 2 2 Filter BW Minus3dB Filter Type Gaussian Internal Preamp FALSE Internal Preamp Band Low Limit Test FALSE Line Trigger Delay 1 00E 06 Line Trigger Delay State FALSE Line Trigger Slope Positive Meas Method IbwSpeed Meas Type TPRef Measurement Noise Bandwidth 2000000 2000 000 200 000 0 200 000 0 200 000 0 200 000 0 200 000 0 200 000 0 200 000 0 200 000 0 200 000 0 200 000 0 Mechanical Atten 10 M...

Page 792: ... Integ BW 2000000 2000 000 200 000 0 200 000 0 200 000 0 200 000 0 Offset Method FALSE Offset Rel Lim Car 45 60 0 0 0 0 Offset Rel Lim PSD 28 87 43 87 0 0 0 0 Offset Res BW 220000 2200 00 220 000 220 000 220 000 220 000 Offset Res BW Mode TRUE TRUE TRU E TRU E TRU E TRU E Offset Video BW 22000 2200 0 220 00 220 00 220 00 220 00 Offset Video BW Mode TRUE TRUE TRU E TRU E TRU E TRU E Periodic Timer ...

Page 793: ... Top Ref Value 30 Res BW 220000 Res BW Mode FALSE RFBurst Trigger Delay 1 00E 06 RFBurst Trigger Delay State FALSE RFBurst Trigger Level Abs 20 RFBurst Trigger Level Rel 6 RFBurst Trigger Level Type Absolute RFBurst Trigger Slope Positive Scale Div 10 Span 8000000 Sweep Time 0 02 Sweep Time Auto TRUE Trigger Holdoff 0 1 Trigger Holdoff State FALSE W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 793...

Page 794: ...ath Save Data Mode WCDMA Example MMEM STOR CAPT MyCaptureData bin This stores the capture data in the file MyCaptureData bin in the default directory Dependencies Capture buffer functionality is available for the Code Domain and Modulation Accuracy measurements In other measurements this key is grayed out Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Save As When you press Save As the analyzer brings up a...

Page 795: ... Image Pressing Screen Image accesses a menu of functions that enable you to specify a format and location for the saved screen image It brings up a menu that allows you to specify the color scheme of the Screen Image Themes or navigate to the Save As dialog to perform the actual save Screen Image files contain an exact representation of the analyzer display They cannot be loaded back onto the ana...

Page 796: ...screen data For versions previous to A 01 55 if you initiate a screen image save by navigating through the Save menus the image that is saved will contain the Save menu softkeys not the menus and the active function that were on the screen when you first pressed the Save front panel key Key Path Save Mode All Remote Command MMEMory STORe SCReen filename Example MMEM STOR SCR myScreen png This stor...

Page 797: ...e Flat Color theme available in X Series Also if you selected Reverse Bitmap AND a black white screen image that would be much like Flat Monochrome In other words each of the X Series themes has a similar screen image type in ESA PSA But they are not identical Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 3D Color Selects a standard color theme with each object filled shaded and colored as designed Key Pa...

Page 798: ...d Save As This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse The Tab and Arrow keys can also be used for dialog navigation See To File on page 2697 in Save State for a full description of this dialog and menu The default path for Screen Images is My Documents mode name screen where mode name is the parameter used to select the mode with t...

Page 799: ...he idle state INIT IMM in ESA PSA Spectrum Analysis Mode does an implied ABORt In some other PSA Modes INIT IMM is ignored if not in the idle state The X Series follows the ESA PSA SA Mode model which may cause some Modes to have compatibility problems Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 More Information See Restart on page 2694 for details on the INIT IMMediate Restart function If you are alrea...

Page 800: ...ont panel to indicate out of scope Non forceful means user still can change this setting by SCPI but cannot change on front panel When set to OFF will make source leave list sequencer and this setting will be black out and take effect immediately When the RF Output is ON an RF annunciator is displayed in the system settings panel When the RF Output is turned Off the RF annunciator is cleared If th...

Page 801: ... waveform etc When the source list sequence playing is complete the last step keeps playing and user can use this command to change the list sequence last step s output power The multiport adapter RFIO TX ports and GPS ports cannot ensure power accuracy when power setting is lower than 130dBm this power setting value is defined by the sum of RF Power setting and related amplitude correction value ...

Page 802: ...ed power Where reference power equals the original RF Power entered under Source Amplitude RF Power and set as the reference power entered power equals a new value entered under Source Amplitude Amptd Offset In addition the displayed power value is the same as a new value entered under Source Amplitude RF Power If Power Ref is set to ON with a reference value set entering a value under Source Ampl...

Page 803: ...ent output power Preset 0 00 dBm OFF Min 125 00 dBm Max 10 00 dBm Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Amptd Offset Allows you to specify the RF output power offset value When the amplitude offset is set to zero 0 and you set a new offset value positive or negative the displayed amplitude value will change as follows and the RF output power will not change Displayed value output power offset value Where o...

Page 804: ...e 2802 is set to ON the list sequencer controls the source output and this key will be grayed out And this setting will be none forceful grey out on front panel to indicate out of scope Non forceful means user still can change this setting by SCPI but cannot change manually on front panel When setto Off will make source leave list sequencer and this setting will be black out and take effect immedi...

Page 805: ...requency Couplings The frequency value is coupled to the current channel band and number such that updates to the band and number will update the frequency value to the corresponding absolute frequency Preset 1 00 GHz If license F1A or 5WC is present the default Center Frequency should be 2 412GHz Min 10 00 MHz Max Hardware Dependant Option 503 3 6 GHz Option 504 3 8 GHz Option 506 6 00 GHz For E6...

Page 806: ...an sign to indicate the frequency is above or below the channel number Preset 1 Min Please refer to the tables below for the valid ranges Max Please refer to the tables below for the valid ranges Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM EDGE Channel Number Ranges Band Link Device Range Frequency MHz P GSM Uplink MS 1 n 124 890 0 0 2 n Downlink BS 1 n 124 935 0 0 2 n E GSM Uplink MS 0 n 124 975 n 1023 890 ...

Page 807: ... II Downlink 412 n 687 9662 n 9938 n 5 1850 1 n 5 Uplink 12 n 287 350 n 425 n 5 1850 1 n 5 Band III Downlink 1162 n 1513 n 5 1575 Uplink 937 n 1288 n 5 1525 Band IV Downlink 537 n 1738 1887 n 2087 n 5 1805 n 5 1735 1 Uplink 1312 n 1513 1662 n 1862 n 5 1450 n 5 1380 1 Band V Downlink 1007 n 1087 4357 n 4458 n 5 670 1 n 5 Uplink 782 n 862 4132 n 4233 n 5 670 1 n 5 Band VI Downlink 1037 n 1062 4387 n...

Page 808: ... 5 21 n 5 39 9 Band XIV Downlink 4117 n 4143 4167 n 4192 n 5 63 n 5 72 9 Uplink 3892 n 3918 3942 n 3967 n 5 12 n 5 2 1 Band XIX Downlink 712 n 763 787 n 837 n 5 735 n 5 720 1 Uplink 312 n 363 387 n 437 n 5 770 n 5 755 1 CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Channel Number Ranges Band Link Device Range Frequency MHz US Cellular Uplink MS reverse link 1 N 799 991 N 1023 1024 N 1323 0 030 N 825 000 0 030 N 1023 825 000 0...

Page 809: ...6 479 000 0 020 N 1792 479 000 Downlink BS forward link 1 N 400 472 N 871 1039 N 1473 1536 N 1715 1792 N 2016 0 025 N 1 460 000 0 025 N 472 420 000 0 020 N 1024 461 010 0 025 N 1536 489 000 0 020 N 1792 489 000 IMT 2000 Band Uplink MS reverse link 0 N 1199 1920 000 0 050 N Downlink BS forward link 0 N 1199 2100 000 0 050 N Upper 700 MHz Band Uplink MS reverse link 0 N 240 776 000 0 050 N Downlink ...

Page 810: ...reverse link 1 N 400 472 N 871 1536 N 1715 0 025 N 1 450 000 0 025 N 472 410 000 0 025 N 1536 479 000 Downlink BS forward link Downlink BS forward link Downlink BS forward link 1 N 400 472 N 871 1536 N 1715 0 025 N 1 460 000 0 025 N 472 420 000 0 025 N 1536 489 000 800 PAMR Uplink MS reverse link 0 N 239 870 0125 0 025 N Downlink BS forward link 0 N 239 915 0125 0 025 N LTE FDD Channel Number Rang...

Page 811: ...427 9 22750 22750 22949 12 729 5010 5010 5179 699 23010 23010 23179 13 746 5180 5180 5279 777 23180 23180 23279 14 758 5280 5280 5379 788 23280 23280 23379 17 734 5730 5730 5849 704 23730 23730 23849 18 860 5850 5850 5999 815 23850 23850 23999 19 875 6000 6000 6149 830 24000 24000 24149 20 791 6150 6150 6449 832 24150 24150 24449 21 1495 9 6450 6450 6599 1447 9 24450 24450 24599 24 1525 7700 7700 ...

Page 812: ... 38650 39649 41 2496 39650 39650 41589 2496 39650 39650 41589 42 3400 41590 41590 43589 3400 41590 41590 43589 43 3600 43590 43590 45589 3600 43590 43590 45589 Note The channel numbers that designate carrier frequencies so close to the operating band edges that the carrier extends beyond the operating band edge shall not be used This implies that the first 7 15 25 50 75 and 100 channel numbers at ...

Page 813: ... 2 b 1850 1910 MHz 1930 1990 MHz 9254 to 9546 9654 to 9946 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 c 1910 1930 MHz 9554 to 9646 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 d 2570 2620 MHz 12854 to 13096 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 e 2300 2400 MHz 11504 to 11996 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 f 1880 192...

Page 814: ... BAND25 BAND26 BAND27 BAND28 BAND31 BAND33 BAND34 BAND35 BAND36 BAND37 BAND38 BAND39 BAND40 BAND41 BAND42 BAND43 BAND44 BANDA BANDB BANDC BANDD BANDE BANDF SOURce FREQuency CHANnels BAND Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PGSM Notes Set this setting to NONE will grey out Channel on page 2727 Channel Initial S W Revision A 05 00 None Selects no radio standard for use When you have selected the radio stand...

Page 815: ...Selects DCS 1800 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND DCS1800 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 PCS 1900 Selects PCS 1900 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PCS1900 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM 450 Selects GSM 450 as the active channel ban...

Page 816: ...ctive channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND GSM700 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 T GSM 810 Selects T GSM 810 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND T GSM810 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 WCDMA Sets WCDMA as the radio standard for use and accesses the W CDMA s...

Page 817: ...nd Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDIII Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band IV Selects Band IV as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDIV Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band V Selects Band V as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standa...

Page 818: ...band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDVIII Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band IX Selects Band IX as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDIX Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band X Selects Band X as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Sta...

Page 819: ...io Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDXIII Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIV Selects Band XIV as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDXIV Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIX Selects Band XIX as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND...

Page 820: ...Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PCS Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Japan Cell Selects Japan Cell as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND JAPAN Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Korean PCS Selects Korean PCS as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN...

Page 821: ...Q CHAN BAND UPPER Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Secondary 800 Selects Secondary 800 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND SECOND Initial S W Revision A 05 00 400 Euro PAMR Selects 400 Euro PAMR as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN ...

Page 822: ... Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PCS1DOT9G Initial S W Revision A 05 00 AWS Selects AWS as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND AWS Initial S W Revision A 05 00 US 2 5GHz Selects US 2 5 GHz as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND US2D...

Page 823: ...etup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 1 Selects BAND 1 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND1 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 2 Selects BAND 2 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND2 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 B...

Page 824: ... BAND 6 Selects BAND 6 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND6 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 7 Selects BAND 7 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND7 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 8 Selects BAND 8 as the band for the current...

Page 825: ...ND 11 Selects BAND 11 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND11 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 12 Selects BAND 12 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND12 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 13 Selects BAND 13 as the band for the cu...

Page 826: ...AND 18 Selects BAND 18 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND18 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 19 Selects BAND 19 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND19 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 20 Selects BAND 20 as the band for the c...

Page 827: ...AND 25 Selects BAND 25 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND25 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 26 Selects BAND 26 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND26 Initial S W Revision A 12 53 BAND 27 Selects BAND 27 as the band for the c...

Page 828: ...ard for use and accesses the LTE TDD specific channel band sub menus Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 33 Selects BAND 33 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND33 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 34 Selects BAND 34 as the band for the current step Key Path S...

Page 829: ... Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND37 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 38 Selects BAND 38 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND38 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 39 Selects BAND 39 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup R...

Page 830: ...dio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND42 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 43 Selects BAND 43 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND43 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 44 Selects BAND 44 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Exa...

Page 831: ...TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDB Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND C Selects BAND C as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDC Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND D Selects BAND D as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDD ...

Page 832: ... Setup Remote Command SOURce RADio BAND LINK DOWN UP SOURce RADio BAND LINK Example SOUR RAD BAND LINK UP Preset DOWN Range DOWN UP Backwards Compatibility SCPI SOURce RADio DEVice BTS MS SOURce RADio DEVice Backwards Compatibility Notes BTS maps to the Downlink frequency MS maps to the Uplink frequency Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Set Reference Frequency This key allows you to set the frequency r...

Page 833: ...grayed out when the List Sequencer is turned ON Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Freq Reference This key allows you to toggle the state of the frequency reference When the frequency reference state is ON an annunciator is displayed on the main source view to indicate this state to the user When you use a frequency reference the signal generator outputs a frequency that is set relative to the reference...

Page 834: ...nge as follows and the RF output frequency will not change Displayed value output frequency offset value Where output frequency equals the original frequency entered under Source Frequency Frequency offset value equals the value entered under Source Frequency Freq Offset When the frequency offset is set to a value other than zero 0 and you enter a new frequency value under Source Frequency Frequen...

Page 835: ...s panel When the ARB is turned Off the MOD annunciator is cleared Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB STATe ON OFF 1 0 SOURce RADio ARB STATe Example SOUR RAD ARB OFF SOUR RAD ARB Notes If the ARB is ON a user then loads or deletes another file to ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The waveform will...

Page 836: ...formation about this adjustment Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB WAVeform string SOURce RADio ARB WAVeform Example SOUR RAD ARB WAV test_waveform bin Notes If intended waveform is not in the memory yet then issuing this command by SCPI will invoke ARB loading operation first which involves a delay of unpredictable length So this command should be...

Page 837: ...Select Waveform Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Load Segment To ARB Memory Allows you to load the selected file into ARB memory On the front panel you select the file for loading to the ARB memory by highlighting the desired file in the list Using the SCPI command you specify the file name on the HDD NVWFM none volatile storage MSUS Mass Storage Unit Specifier is supported in the memory subsystem bec...

Page 838: ... not present on the instrument In this case a GUI only warning message 800 Operation complete Loaded filename successfully but no license required licenses installed User can install required licenses according to required licenses string to license it or multi pack license it Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Load All To ARB Memory Allows you to load all the segment files within the currently selected...

Page 839: ...playback of a waveform sequence or a list sequence Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Notes No remote command SCPIfront panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Default Directory Allows you to change the default directory It is used as a search location for waveform segments that are required to be loaded into ARB memory for playback of a waveform sequence an...

Page 840: ...he ARB is ON and you load a file to ARB memory or delete a file from ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The waveform will be replayed after the ARB operation is finished Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Delete All From ARB Memory Allows you to remove all segments from ARB playback memory Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Wave...

Page 841: ...emory Full File List Remote Command Only Queries the test set for the string list of waveform segments in the ARB memory It returns a string list for waveform segment names in the ARB memory Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB FCATalog Example SOUR RAD ARB FCATalog Notes The return data is in the following format integer memory used integer memory free integer file count in ARB memory string string st...

Page 842: ...un Time Scaling Allows you to adjust the run time scaling value The run time scaling value is applied in real time while the waveform is playing Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB ARB Setup Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB RSCaling real SOURce RADio ARB RSCaling Example SOUR RAD ARB RSC 100 00 Notes This setting cannot be set in E6640A Grey out on menu and the value is fixed at 70 00 Dependencies...

Page 843: ...ows access to the trigger type sub menus The setting for trigger type determines the behavior of the waveform when it plays Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE CONTinuous SINGle SADVance GATE SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE CONT SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE Notes Gated trigger type will be implemented at a later release Preset CO...

Page 844: ...Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Trigger Type Continuous Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE CONT TRIG Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Reset Run Sets Reset and Run as the trigger response for the continuous trigger type Reset and Run sets the waveform generator to play a waveform sequence or segment continuously when the first trigger is received Subsequent triggers reset the waveform sequence or segment ...

Page 845: ...vision A 05 00 Buffered Trigger Selects Buffered Trigger as the trigger response for single trigger type Buffered Trigger sets the waveform generator to play a waveform sequence or segment once when a trigger is received If a trigger is received during playback the waveform generator plays the sequence or segment to the end then plays the sequence or segment once more Key Path Source Modulation Se...

Page 846: ...mmand SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE SADVance TYPE SINGle CONTinuous SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE SADVance TYPE Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE SADV SING Preset CONTinuous Range Single Continuous Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Single Selects Single as the trigger response for Segment Advance trigger type With single selected once a trigger is received a segment is played once If a trigger is received...

Page 847: ... waveform is triggered when you press the front panel Trigger key Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Trigger Source Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIGger KEY Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Bus Sets the current trigger source to Bus Selecting Bus trigger source enables triggering over GPIB LAN or USB using the SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger INITiate command Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Trigger Source Exam...

Page 848: ...ssing this key changes the central view area to display the Waveform Sequence Creation and Editing view Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Notes No remote command SCPIfront panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Current Segment Specifies the selected sequence segment that will be affected by the menu functions Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New ...

Page 849: ...ressing this key changes the current view to the Waveform Management View Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Load Segment To ARB Memory Allows you to load the selected file into ARB memory On the front panel you select the file for loading to the ARB memory by highlighting the desired file in the list Using the SCPI command you specify the file name o...

Page 850: ...io waveform wfm which contains invalid waveform header an error is generated If the ARB is ON when you load afile to ARB memory or delete a file from ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The waveform will be replayed after the ARB operation is finished ARB can be loaded into ARB memory even required licenses do not present on the ins...

Page 851: ...new directory of interest The current directory is used for manually loading waveform segments into ARB memory for playback and as a search location for waveform segments that are required to be loaded into ARB memory for playback of a waveform sequence or a list sequence Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Notes No remote command SCPIfront panel only Initial...

Page 852: ...B state is On the selected waveform will not be played In this case if the selected waveform is not used in List Sequence it can be deleted and the ARB state is turned Off If the ARB is ON and you load a file to ARB memory or delete a file from ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The waveform will be replayed after the ARB operation...

Page 853: ...nces Build New Sequence Insert New Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Load All To ARB Memory This key functions the same as Load All To ARB Memory on page 2829 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Insert New Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Change Directory This key functions the same as Cha...

Page 854: ...emory on page 2831 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Insert New Waveform Segment in ARB Memory Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Query ARB Memory File List Remote Command Only This command functions the same as Query ARB Memory File List Remote Command Only on page 2763 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Edit Selected Waveform Allows access to the su...

Page 855: ... A 05 00 Marker 2 Allows you to enable or disable marker 2 for the currently selected waveform For a waveform sequence you can enable and disable markers on a per segment basis allowing you to output markers from some waveform segments within the sequence but not for others Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Edit Selected Waveform Notes No remote command fro...

Page 856: ... W Revision A 05 00 Delete Segment Allows you to delete the selected segment from the waveform sequence Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Notes No remote command front panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Save Sequence Pressing this key displays the Save As dialog The sequence name is passed to the save as dialog to use as the filename for saving and the...

Page 857: ... M1M2 M1M3 M1M4 M2M3 M2M4 M3M4 M1M2M3 M1M2M4 M1M3M4 M2M3M4 M1M2M3M4 ALL For additional description of each item see Notes below For Setup SCPI on page 857 For Setup SCPI SOURce RADio ARB SEQuence MWAVeform filename For additional description of each item see Notes For Query SCPI on page 858 below Example For setup SOUR RAD ARB SEQ NVWFM testSeq1 seq NVWFM wfmSegment1 wfm 10 M2M3M4 NVWFM wfmSegment...

Page 858: ...or have an error in the waveform sequence file path an error is generated Notes Error Checks for Query SCPI command Continued If the specified waveform sequence file name suffix is not seq error is generated If you use an unsupported MSUS that is not NVWFM or have an error in the waveform segment file path an error is generated If the first specified waveform file cannot be found an error is gener...

Page 859: ...l S W Revision A 05 00 Waveform Utilities Allows you access to the waveform utilities sub menus Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Multi Pack Licenses Allows you access to the Multi Pack License sub menus Pressing this key also changes the central view area to display the Multi Pack License Management view On modular instrument like E6630A or E6640A multi pack licens...

Page 860: ...signal sources You can use either one of them Since adding a waveform segment to a Multi Pack license causes the license slot to enter the trial period of only 48 hours pressing this key causes a confirmation dialog to be displayed to ensure you do want to add the waveform segment to the Multi Pack If you attempt to license a waveform that is already licensed using another slot an error is generat...

Page 861: ...eform file has been loaded it needs to be loaded again Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB LOAD string Example SOUR RAD ARB LOAD D VARB testwaveform bin or SOUR RAD ARB LOAD NVWFM testwaveform bin Notes Because loading the file involves a delay of unpredictable length this command should be followed by the query OPC which holds...

Page 862: ...string specifies the directory on the HDD to load the files into ARB memory from When in Sequence Analyzer mode and Include Source is Yes an attempt to load all files from a directory to ARB memory is rejected with an error When Include Source is No and there is insufficient free ARB memory to load all the waveforms when the ARB memory is full the copy ceases and an error is generated If you speci...

Page 863: ...Disk on page 2828 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Add Waveform Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Load Segment To ARB Memory This key functions the same as Load Segment To ARB Memory on page 2828 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Add Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Load All...

Page 864: ...eform Add view Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Replace Waveform Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform REPLace int string or SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform REPLace int string Example SYST LKEY WAV REPL 1 myotherwaveform wfm or SYST LIC WAV REPL 1 myotherwaveform wfm Notes The second SCPI SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform REPLace is provided to be consistent with...

Page 865: ...emory on page 2829 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Replace Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Change Directory This key functions the same as Change Directory on page 2830 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Replace Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 ...

Page 866: ...aveform in Slot If the selected slot is in the trial state or the lock required state the waveform that occupies the slot is locked and permanently licensed Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform LOCK int or SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform LOCK int Example SYST LKEY WAV LOCK 1 or SYST LIC WAV LOCK 1 Notes The second SCPI SYSTem...

Page 867: ... number exceeds total available slot number Nonexistent is returned Range Locked Available Trail LockRequired Nonexistent Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Slots Free Query Remote Command Only Returns the number of license slots free Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform FREE or SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform FREE Example SYST LKEY WAV FREE or SYST LIC WAV FREE Notes The second SCPI SYSTem LICense FPACk W...

Page 868: ...han or equals 0 an error is generated Result type is string If input slot number exceeds total available slot number Nonexistent is returned If no waveform stored in the specified slot then empty string is returned Initial S W Revision A 12 00 Slot Waveform Unique ID Query Remote Command Only Returns the waveform unique ID of the specified slot Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform UID int or SYSTem...

Page 869: ...tudio waveform has a unique id recorded in header So if the unique ids are same that means they are same one waveform So besides SCPI to query locked waveform name list also provide a SCPI to query locked waveform unique id list Initial S W Revision A 11 00 Marker Utilities Allows access to the marker utilities sub menus Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Marker Pola...

Page 870: ...rker Utilities Marker Polarity Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB MPOLarity MARKer2 POSitive NEGative SOURce RADio ARB MPOLarity MARKer2 Example SOUR RAD ARB MPOL MARK2 NEG Dependencies When a new waveform is selected for playback the settings contained within the associated waveform header file are applied to the ARB The marker polarity is one of the values stored within the header file If the newly...

Page 871: ...thin the header file If the newly selected waveform file has an associated header file the marker polarity is updated with the value from the header file The marker polarity will remain unchanged if the newly selected waveform does not have an associated header file Preset Pos Range Neg Pos Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Marker Routing Allows access to the marker routing sub menus which allow you to...

Page 872: ...lanking setting is updated with the value from the header file The pulse RF blanking setting will remain unchanged if the newly selected waveform does not have an associated header file Range None M1 M2 M3 M4 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 None Sets no marker to be used for the pulse RF blanking function essentially turning the RF blanking function off Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Marker Uti...

Page 873: ...arity this is when there are no maker points Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Marker Utilities Marker Routing Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB MDEStination ALCHold NONE M1 M2 M3 M4 SOURce RADio ARB MDEStination ALCHold Example SOUR RAD ARB MDES ALCH NONE Dependencies When a new waveform is selected for playback the settings contained within the associated waveform header file are applied to the...

Page 874: ... Utilities Marker Routing ALC Hold Example SOUR RAD ARB MDES PULS M3 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Marker 4 Sets marker 4 to be used for the ALC hold function Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Marker Utilities Marker Routing ALC Hold Example SOUR RAD ARB MDES PULS M4 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Header Utilities Allows access to the header utilities sub menu Pressing this key also causes the cen...

Page 875: ...tudio waveform contains a unique waveform ID which recorded in the header This command allows you to query the unique waveform ID from the header This is a SCPI only command User can also checkError Reference source not found for waveform unique ID display Remote Command MMEMory HEADer ID file name Example MMEM HEAD ID test wfm query the waveform already loaded into the ARB memory MMEM HEAD ID D V...

Page 876: ...tude modulation Turning AM on when another modulation format is already on results in the previous modulation format being turned off and the generation of an error Key Path Source Modulation Setup AM Remote Command SOURce AM STATe SOURce AM STATe Example SOUR AM STAT OFF Preset Off Range On Off Initial S W Revision A 05 00 AM Depth Allows you to set the amplitude modulation depth in percent Key P...

Page 877: ...ey Path Source Modulation Setup Initial S W Revision A 05 00 FM Enables or disables the frequency modulation Turning FM on when another modulation format is already on results in the previous modulation format being turned off and the generation of an error Key Path Source Modulation Setup FM Remote Command SOURce FM STATe SOURce FM STATe Example SOUR FM STAT OFF Preset Off Range On Off Initial S ...

Page 878: ...FM INT FREQ 40 0 Hz Preset 400 0 Hz Min 10 Hz Max 40 kHz Initial S W Revision A 05 00 PM Allows access to the menu for configuring the phase modulation Key Path Source Modulation Setup Initial S W Revision A 05 00 PM Enables or disables the phase modulation Turning PM on when another modulation format is already on results in the previous modulation format being turned off and the generation of an...

Page 879: ...z Max 40 kHz Initial S W Revision A 05 00 List Sequencer Allows you access to the sub menus for configuring the list sequencer List sequences allows you to enter frequencies and amplitudes at unequal intervals in nonlinear ascending descending or random order Each step within the list can also include its own waveform file for playback step duration trigger event and trigger output The complexitie...

Page 880: ...put of the source Couplings When in Sequence Analyzer mode and the list sequencer state is Off Include Source is forced to No and the Include Source key is grayed out When in Sequence Analyzer mode and the list sequencer state is On Include Source is available to set And an ARB memory related operation like load or delete will be rejected Preset Off Range On Off Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Initia...

Page 881: ...equencer List Sequencer Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST NUMBer STEPs integer SOURce LIST NUMBer STEPs Example SOUR LIST NUMB STEP 1 Notes Increasing the number of steps creates additional steps at the end of the list with all the settings within the steps set to their default values Decreasing the number of steps removes steps from the end of the list The settings within the removed steps are not...

Page 882: ... 05 00 Delete Step Allows you to delete the current step Deleting a step will automatically decrease the Step Count parameter by 1 If sequence only has one step left delete step will be rejected and popup error 221 Setting conflict Cannot delete current step minimum number of steps reached Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Notes No remote command Front Panel key only If the list ...

Page 883: ...A 05 00 Internal Sets the trigger input for the current step to Internal Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Step Trigger Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET INP TRIG INT Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Manual Trigger Key Sets the trigger input for the current step to Manual Trigger Key Any step in the sequence set to Manual will cause the sequence execut...

Page 884: ...otes Note When on E6640A trigger 2 is a bi directional trigger port So when trigger 2 has been configured as OUTPUT type choosing External 2 as the input trigger for the current step will generate error Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Transition Time Allows you to specify the transition time for the current step The transition time is the amount of time allowed for the source to settle at the current...

Page 885: ...n A 05 00 Radio Setup Allows you access to the sub menus for setting up the radio standard band and radio band link direction for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Notes No remote command front panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Radio Standard Allows access to the sub menus for selecting the radio standard and the associated radio band for use in the current...

Page 886: ... 05 00 GSM EDGE Pressing this key once selects GSM EDGE as the radio standard and the current GSM EDGE band as the active channel band Pressing this key again allows access to the sub menus for selecting a different GSM EDGE band Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 05 00 P GSM Selects P GSM as the band for the current step Key Path ...

Page 887: ...r List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM 450 Selects GSM 450 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM 480 Selects GSM 480 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard GS...

Page 888: ...cess to the sub menus for selecting a different WCDMA band Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band I Selects Band I as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band II Selects Band II as the band for the current step Key Pat...

Page 889: ... List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band VII Selects Band VII as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band VIII Selects Band VIII as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCD...

Page 890: ... List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIII Selects Band XIII as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIV Selects Band XIV as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCD...

Page 891: ...tandard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 US PCS Selects US PCS as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Japan Cell Selects Japan Cell as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial...

Page 892: ...ision A 05 00 Secondary 800 Selects Secondary 800 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 400 Euro PAMR Selects 400 Euro PAMR as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 0...

Page 893: ...MA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 US 2 5GHz Selects US 2 5 GHz as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 700 Public Safety Selects 700 Public Safety as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xE...

Page 894: ...AND 2 Selects BAND 2 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 3 Selects BAND 3 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 4 Selects BAND 4 as the band for the current step Key Path Sou...

Page 895: ...ncer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 9 Selects BAND 9 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 10 Selects BAND 10 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial...

Page 896: ...uencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 17 Selects BAND 17 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 18 Selects BAND 18 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Ini...

Page 897: ...uencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 25 Selects BAND 25 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 26 Selects BAND 26 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Ini...

Page 898: ...se and accesses the LTE TDD specific channel band sub menus Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 33 Selects BAND 33 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND33 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 34 Selects BAND 34 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Fre...

Page 899: ... Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND37 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 38 Selects BAND 38 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND38 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 39 Selects BAND 39 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup R...

Page 900: ...y Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND42 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 43 Selects BAND 43 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND43 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 44 Selects BAND 44 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Se...

Page 901: ...TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDB Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND C Selects BAND C as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDC Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND D Selects BAND D as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDD ...

Page 902: ...ulate the downlink frequency according to a downlink formula together with selected channel band and channel number Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup RADio BAND LINK DOWN UP SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup RADio BAND LINK Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET RAD BAND LINK UP SOUR LIST STEP2 SET RAD BAND LINK Notes SCPI is supp...

Page 903: ...ource List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup CNFRequency double SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup CNFRequency Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET CNFR 1GHz SOUR LIST STEP2 SET CNFR Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 This SCPI is used to setup channel number or frequency setting according to current Radio Band setting If Radio Band is NONE then it s frequenc...

Page 904: ...er setting lower than 130dBm on MPA GPS ports then popup warning message These are only warning messages and check is performed when RF is ON Notes The Min and Max value here defined UI settable amplitude range This range is larger than actual amplitude range with level accuracy defined in spec Dependencies The RF power is dependent on the RF output port and frequency such that the current frequen...

Page 905: ...s SCPI is supported after A 09 40 If the selected waveform contains header which contains ARB play parameters source list sequence will automatically apply header settings of the selected waveform in that step Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Continue Previous Sets the current step to continue with playback of the waveform from the previous step When continuing the previous waveform the ARB playback w...

Page 906: ...FM MSUS or specifying a full path For more information see Memory Subsystem Remote Command Only If a file of the same name already exists within ARB memory it is overwritten If you wish to load two segments of the same name you must rename one of the segments before loading it into ARB memory To rename a segment you can either use Windows File Explorer or the MMEMory COPY command NOTE When a wavef...

Page 907: ...ame name already exists within ARB memory it is overwritten If you wish to load two segments of the same name you must rename one of the segments before loading it into ARB memory To rename a segment you can either use Windows File Explorer or the MEMory COPY command NOTE When a waveform file is loaded to ARB memory burst timing adjustments are made automatically based on whether or not a Multipor...

Page 908: ...ation for selecting waveforms using SCPI Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB DEFault DIRectory string SOURce RADio ARB DEFault DIRectory Example SOUR RAD ARB DEF DIR D ArbFiles SOUR RAD ARB DEF DIR State Saved Persistent survives a power cycle and a preset but not saved in the instrument state Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Segme...

Page 909: ...to remove all segments from ARB playback memory Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments in ARB Memory Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB DELete ALL Example SOUR RAD ARB DELete ALL Notes When in Sequence Analyzer mode and Include Source is Yes an attempt to delete all files from ARB memory is rejected with an error When Include Source is No and you attempt to delete all files fro...

Page 910: ...tup Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Default Directory This key functions the same as Default Directory on page 2830 Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Segments in ARB Memory This key functions the same as Segments in ARB Memory on page 2830 Key Path Source List Sequencer List ...

Page 911: ...UR TYPE TIME SOUR LIST STEP2 SET DUR TYPE Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 Notes If Step Duration is set to Time or Play Count for the last step the last step of ARB keeps playing as if set to Continuous until the set Time has expired or until the Play Count setting is reached However you can query Error Reference source not found Source Sweeping Condition Message to find out if the current l...

Page 912: ...ntinuous Abort according to current Duration Type setting is Play Count or Duraton Time or Continuous Abort If current Duration Type is Continuous then popup error 221 Settings conflict Cannot accept time or count input when step duration type is Continuous on step Notes If Duration Time is set for the last step the last step of ARB keeps playing as if set to Continuous after set time expires Howe...

Page 913: ...r on both Internal and External2 paths Select Off will turn off trigger output Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup OUTPut TRIGger ON OFF 1 0 SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup OUTPut TRIGger Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET OUTP TRIG ON SOUR LIST STEP2 SET OUTP TRIG Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 Preset Off Range On Off Initial S W ...

Page 914: ... Frequency Channel Number freq chan num specifies the frequency in Hz or the channel number for the step The channel number and frequency are combined as one parameter that represents the frequency or channel number depending on the radio band setting If the radio band is set to NONE this value is interpreted as a frequency value in Hz If the radio band is set to a valid band this value is interpr...

Page 915: ...SETup INPut TRIGger enum enum enum SOURce LIST SETup INPut TRIGger Example SOUR LIST SET INP TRIG IMM INT EXT2 SOUR LIST SET INP TRIG Notes The command is to setup below parameter array of whole list sequence Step Trigger enum specifies the input trigger for the step For details of the valid types of step trigger see Step Trigger on page 2804 If input parameter number exceeds the step number defin...

Page 916: ...r of Steps As a step is setup the value entered run through several levels of validation R e m o t e C o m m a n d SOURce LIST SETup RADio BAND enum enum enum SOURce LIST SETup RADio BAND E x a m p l e SOUR LIST SET RAD BAND PGSM EGSM RGSM SOUR LIST SET RAD BAND N o t e s The command is to setup below parameter array of whole list sequence Radio Band enum specifies the radio band for the step For ...

Page 917: ... BAND38 BAND39 BAND40 BAN D41 BAND42 BAND43 BANDA BANDB BANDC BANDD BANDE BANDF D e p e n d e n c i e s The range is 1 to 1000 which is determined by the number of steps you have configured For details see Number of Steps on page 2803 I n i t i a l S W R e v i s i o n A 09 40 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 917 ...

Page 918: ...annel Number parameter array of the whole List Sequencer at one time The number of array is same as step number defined in Number of Steps on page 2803 Number of Steps As a step is setup the value entered run through several levels of validation Remote Command SOURce LIST SETup CNFRequency double double double SOURce LIST SETup CNFRequency Example SOUR LIST SET CNFR 1GHz 100MHz 100MHz SOUR LIST SE...

Page 919: ... be updated Dependencies The range is 1 to 1000 which is determined by the number of steps you have configured For details see Number of Steps on page 2803 Initial S W Revision A 09 40 Step Configuration of Waveform parameter list Remote Command Only This SCPI command is to configure Waveform parameter array of the whole List Sequencer at one time The number of array is same as step number defined...

Page 920: ...on enum specifies the duration of the step The duration can be specified to be either time or play count of the ARB file associated with the step or continuous If Waveform is set to CW this value cannot be set to Play Count and an error will be generated If continuous is selected the following Time or Count value is ignored For further details of this setting see Step Duration on page 2833 If inpu...

Page 921: ...ist Remote Command Only This SCPI command is to configure Output Trigger parameter array of the whole List Sequencer at one time The number of array is same as step number defined in Number of Steps on page 2803 Number of Steps As a step is setup the value entered run through several levels of validation Remote Command SOURce LIST SETup OUTPut TRIGger bool bool bool SOURce LIST SETup OUTPut TRIGge...

Page 922: ...amarker Initial S W Revision A 14 00 BeginningOfStep Sets the output trigger type as BeginningOfStep for the whole source sequence Key Path Source List Sequencer Trigger Type Example SOUR LIST TRIG TYP BEG Notes SCPI is supported after A 14 00 Initial S W Revision A 14 00 DataMarker Sets the output trigger type as DataMarker for the whole source sequence When DataMarker is selected which marker to...

Page 923: ...e SOUR LIST TRIG TYPE MARK M3 Notes SCPI is supported after A 14 00 Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Marker 4 Sets the output trigger maker routing to Marker 4 for DataMarker in the whole source sequence Key Path Source List Sequencer Trigger Type DataMarker Example SOUR LIST TRIG TYPE MARK M4 Notes SCPI is supported after A 14 00 Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Manual Trigger Now Pressing this key provi...

Page 924: ...ly SCPI Returning 1 if list sequence has been initiated successfully returning 0 if not Once get 0 you can use SYST ERR to query what error happened Just like OPC this command can be blocked until event status IsSourceSweeping happens and then returns Doing so can help user s script query armed status only once during the time interval of the initiation As an ancillary SCPI of existing SCPI SOUR L...

Page 925: ...O DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Remote Command SENSe ACPower FREQuency SPAN freq SENSe ACPower FREQuency SPAN Example ACP FREQ SPAN 25MHz ACP FREQ SPAN Notes You must be in the mode that includes ACP measurements to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Couplings The span value is clipped when the carrier settings and or the offset settings are changed The value is chan...

Page 926: ...surements to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 Last Span Changes the span to the previous span setting If no previous span value exists then the span will remain unchanged Key Path SPAN X Scale Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Remote Command SENS...

Page 927: ...DMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Remote Command SENSe ACPower SWEep TIME time SENSe ACPower SWEep TIME SENSe ACPower SWEep TIME AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe ACPower SWEep TIME AUTO Example ACP SWE TIME 50ms ACP SWE TIME ACP SWE TIME AUTO OFF ACP SWE TIME AUTO Notes This parameter is preset by Meas Method selection Preset values are as follows IBW 29 ms IBWR 108...

Page 928: ...Eep TIME AUTO RULes NORMal ACCuracy SENSe ACPower SWEep TIME AUTO RULes Example ACP SWE TIME AUTO RUL NORM ACP SWE TIME AUTO RUL Notes Set to Norm when Auto Couple is pressed or sent remotely Preset SA WCDMA C2K TD SCDMA 1xEVDO LTE LTETDD ACCuracy WIMAX OFDMA NORMal State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Norm Accy Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 ...

Page 929: ... method is nonetheless read back but always as FFT Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Gate On Off Turns the gate function on and off When the Gate Function is on the selected Gate Method is used along with the gate settings and the signal at the gate source to control the sweep system with the gate signal Not all measurements allow every type of Gate Methods When Gate is on the annunciation in ...

Page 930: ...ero Span window showing the positions of the Gate is shown between the Measurement Bar and the reduced measurement window By reducing the height of the measurement window some of the annotation on the Data Display may not fit and is not shown Key Path Sweep Control Gate Remote Command SENSe SWEep EGATe VIEW ON OFF 1 0 SENSe SWEep EGATe VIEW Example SWE EGAT VIEW ON turns on the gate view Dependenc...

Page 931: ...nt sweep time If Gate View is on and Gate is off then turning on Gate turns off Gate View Preset OFF State Saved Saved in instrument state Range On Off Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 A sample of the Gate View screen in the Swept SA measurement is shown in the following graphic A sample of the Gate View screen in other measurements is shown in the following graphic This example is for the AC...

Page 932: ... sweep window and give no indication that the Gate is shut off or that the Gate View window is triggered from the Gate Source When in Gate View vertical lines are displayed in the Gate View window as follows Green lines are displayed at the gate edges as follows in Edge Gate a line is shown for Delay and one for the end of the Gate period defined by Length You can adjust the position of the green ...

Page 933: ...dencies Gate View Acquisition Time is initialized On Preset after initializing delay and length Every time the Gate Method is set changed 1 Compute the location of the gate stop line which you know is at time t tmin GateDelay GateLength Preset 519 3 µs WiMAX OFDMA 5 ms GSM EDGE 1 ms State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 100 ns Max 6000 s Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Gate View Start Ti...

Page 934: ...time are required or no units otherwise an invalid suffix error message will be generated Preset 57 7 us WiMAX OFDMA 71 us GSM EDGE 600 us WLAN 500 us WLAN 36 us State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0 0 us Max 100 s Backwards Compatibility SCPI SENSe SWEep TIME GATE DELay ESA compatibility Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Gate Length Controls the length of time that the gate is on after ...

Page 935: ... key for example Trigger Level Trigger Delay etc also affect the corresponding settings under the Trigger menu keys The SCPI commands used for these are the same for Trigger and Gate since there is only one setting which affects both Gate and Trigger Example to set the Trigger Level for External 1 you use the command TRIG EXT1 LEV regardless of whether you are using External 1 as a Trigger Source ...

Page 936: ...onding pop up message Waiting for trigger is generated if no trigger signal appears after approximately 2 sec This message goes away when a trigger signal appears Backwards Compatibility Notes In the past the Average detector was not available when Video triggering was on and consequently functions that set the detector to average such as Marker Noise or Band Intvl Power were not available when th...

Page 937: ...rent selected Y axis unit Backwards Compatibility SCPI TRIGger SEQuence IF LEVel TRIGger SEQuence IF LEVel Backwards Compatibility Notes This alias is provided for backward compatibility with VSA PSA comms apps Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Trig Slope Controls the trigger polarity It is set positive to trigger on a rising edge and negative to trigger on a falling edge Key Path Trigger Vide...

Page 938: ... Grayed out if in use by Point Trigger in the Source Setup menu Forced to Free Run if already selected and Point Trigger is set to External 1 State Saved Saved in instrument state Status Bits OPC dependencies The Status Operation Register bit 5 Waiting for Trigger is set at the same time as the Sweeping or Measuring bit is set It is cleared when the trigger actually occurs that is after the trigge...

Page 939: ...igger menu and in the Gate Source menu Preset POSitive State Saved Saved in instrument state Backwards Compatibility SCPI TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal SLOPe For backward compatibility the parameter EXTernal is mapped to EXTernal1 Backwards Compatibility SCPI TRIGger SEQuence FRAMe EXTernal1 SLOPe Backwards Compatibility Notes The legacy TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe command affects the slopes for the VID LI...

Page 940: ... Key Path Trigger Example TRIG SOUR EXT2 Swept SA measurement TRIG meas SOUR EXT2 Measurements other than Swept SA Dependencies In some models there is no second External input In these models the External 2 key is blanked and the EXTernal2 parameter will generate a Hardware missing Not available for this model number message Grayed out if in use by Point Trigger in the Source Setup menu Forced to...

Page 941: ...IGger SEQuence EXTernal2 SLOPe POSitive NEGative TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal2 SLOPe Example TRIG EXT2 SLOP NEG Couplings This same slope is used in the Ext2 selection for the trigger source in the Trigger menu and for the period timer sync source in the Trigger menu and in the Gate Source menu Preset POSitive State Saved Saved in instrument state Backwards Compatibility SCPI TRIGger SEQuence FRAMe E...

Page 942: ...cesses the RF Burst trigger setup menu In some models a variety of burst trigger circuitry is available resulting in various available burst trigger bandwidths The analyzer automatically chooses the appropriate trigger path based on the hardware configuration and other settings of the analyzer Key Path Trigger Example TRIG SOUR RFB Swept SA measurement TRIG meas SOUR RFB Measurements other than Sw...

Page 943: ...r below the displayed signal level rather than simply to the displayed signal level This is only true for Amplitude Corrections not External Gain or Ref Level Offset functions If mode is Bluetooth the default value is 50 dBm Couplings This same level is used for the RF Burst trigger source in the Trigger menu for the RF Burst selection in the Periodic Timer sync source in the Trigger menu and in t...

Page 944: ... differs from the previous by more than 0 5 dB the new level is sent to the hardware otherwise it is not updated to avoid slowing down the acquisition Steps 2 and 3 repeat for subsequent measurements Key Path Trigger RF Burst Scope Meas Global Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst LEVel RELative rel_ampl TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst LEVel RELative Example TRIG RFB LEV REL 10 dB sets the trigger leve...

Page 945: ... the internal periodic timer signal as the trigger Triggering occurrences are set by the Period parameter which is modified by the Sync Source and Offset Pressing this key when it is already selected accesses the periodic timer trigger setup functions If you do not have a sync source selected it is Off then the internal timer will not be synchronized with any external timing events Key Path Trigge...

Page 946: ...porarily instead of Offset In this case we might tune to the signal in a narrow span and use the RF Burst trigger to synchronize the periodic timer Then we would turn the sync source off so that it would not miss trigger Miss triggering can occur when we are tuned so far away from the RF burst trigger that it is no longer reliable A third example would be to synchronize to a signal that has a refe...

Page 947: ...ce selection of the period timer Preset 20 ms GSM 4 615383 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 100 000 ns Max 559 0000 ms Default Unit S Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Offset Adjusts the accumulated offset between the periodic timer events and the trigger event Adjusting the accumulated offset is different than setting an offset and requires explanation The periodic timer is usually n...

Page 948: ...iod of the trigger waveform Note also that Offset is used only when the sync source is set to OFF otherwise delay is used see section Trig Delay on page 357 An increase in the offset parameter either from the knob or the SCPI adjust command serves to delay the timing of the trigger event Notes When the SCPI command is sent the value shown on the key and the Active Function if this happens to be th...

Page 949: ...ependencies The invalid data indicator turns on when the offset is changed until the next sweep measurement completes Couplings The same offset is used in the Gate Source selection of the period timer Preset 0 s State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 10 000 s Max 10 000 s Default Unit S Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Reset Offset Display Resets the value of the periodic trigger offset di...

Page 950: ...g is read back to this key and it is also Readback to the previous Periodic Timer trigger key Backwards Compatibility SCPI TRIGger SEQuence FRAMe SYNC EXTernal For backward compatibility the parameter EXTernal is mapped to EXTernal1 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 03 00 A 14 00 Off Turns off the sync source for your periodic trigger With the sync source off the tim...

Page 951: ...gger input will trigger a new sweep measurement Key Path Trigger External 1 Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal1 LEVel level TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal1 LEVel Example TRIG EXT1 LEV 0 4 V Couplings This same level is used for the Ext1 trigger source in the Trigger menu for the Ext1 selection in the Periodic Timer sync source in the Trigger menu and in the Gate Source menu and also for the Ext1 ...

Page 952: ...cesses the external 2 trigger setup menu Key Path Trigger Example TRIG SOUR EXT2 Swept SA measurement TRIG meas SOUR EXT2 Measurements other than Swept SA Dependencies In some models there is no second External input In these models the External 2 key is blanked and the EXTernal2 parameter will generate a Hardware missing Not available for this model number message Grayed out if in use by Point Tr...

Page 953: ... 2 Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal2 SLOPe POSitive NEGative TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal2 SLOPe Example TRIG EXT2 SLOP NEG Couplings This same slope is used in the Ext2 selection for the trigger source in the Trigger menu and for the period timer sync source in the Trigger menu and in the Gate Source menu Preset POSitive State Saved Saved in instrument state Backwards Compatibility SCPI TRIG...

Page 954: ...rigger Level Sets the absolute trigger level for the RF burst envelope When using the External Mixing path the Absolute Trigger Level is uncalibrated because the factory default was set to accommodate the expected IF levels for the RF path Key Path Trigger RF Burst Scope Meas Global Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst LEVel ABSolute ampl TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst LEVel ABSolute Example TRIG RFB...

Page 955: ... W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 04 00 Trigger Slope It is set positive to trigger on a rising edge and negative to trigger on a falling edge Key Path Trigger RF Burst Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst SLOPe POSitive NEGative TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst SLOPe Example TRIG RFB SLOP NEG Couplings This same slope is used in the RF Burst selection for the trigger source in th...

Page 956: ...te Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0 ms Max 500 ms Default Unit s Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Auto Holdoff Opens up a menu that lets you adjust Auto Trigger and Trigger Holdoff parameters Key Path Trigger Readback line Displays a summary of the Auto Trig and Holdoff settings in square brackets First line Auto Off or Auto On Second Line Hldf followed by If Holdoff is Off readback Off ...

Page 957: ...fied the trigger occurs the delay begins and the holdoff time begins New trigger conditions will be ignored until the holdoff time expires For a free running trigger the holdoff value is the minimum time between triggers Key Path Trigger Auto Holdoff Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff time TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff STATe OFF ON 0 1 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff STATe Exampl...

Page 958: ...2 LEVel Notes This command is simply an alias to TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal 1 2 LEVel For details refer Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Gate Polarity Remote Command Only Sets the polarity for the gate signal This setup is now done using the gate trigger s slope setting When Positive Pos is selected a positive going edge Edge or a high voltage Level will satisfy the gate condition after the de...

Page 959: ...xample ACP SWE POIN 500 ACP SWE POIN Notes Whenever the number of sweep points changes All trace data is erased Any traces with Update Off will also go to Display Off like going from View to Blank in the older analyzers Acquisition time is re quantized Any limit lines that are on will be updated If averaging hold is on averaging hold starts over Couplings Whenever the number of sweep points change...

Page 960: ...9 ACP Measurement System System See System on page 264 960 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 961: ... of the trace type Clear Write Trace Average Max Hold Min Hold for the selected trace Key Path Trace Detector Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Remote Command TRACe 1 2 3 ACPower TYPE WRITe AVERage MAXHold MINHold TRACe 1 2 3 ACPower TYPE Example TRAC ACP TYPE MINH TRAC ACP TYPE Notes WRITe Clear Write AVERage Average MAXHold Maximum Hold MINHol...

Page 962: ...te commands to control these two variables Selecting a trace type Clear Write Trace Average Max Hold Min Hold for a trace pressing the key or sending the equivalent remote command puts the trace in Trace On state Update On and Display On even if that trace type was already selected When Meas Method is RBW or FAST this key is grayed out Preset Trace On State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Tr...

Page 963: ...ng choices are available Auto the detector selected is set to AVERage unless the Radio Standard defaults state otherwise e g it is set to Peak for Radio Standard PDC when Device both MS and BTS and when Radio Standard NADC and Device MS Normal the detector determines the peak of the CW like signals and it yields alternating maximums and minimums of noise like signals This is also referred to as Ro...

Page 964: ...to Manual all Traces use the same detector type When Average State Off then Trace Types AVERage MaxHold and MinHold will not function since Averaging is required to be on for them to operate Preset ON State Saved Saved in instrument state Range ON OFF Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 Detector Selection Selects a detector to be used by the analyzer for ...

Page 965: ... of CW signals as accurately as peak or normal but they do measure noise without the biases of peak detection When a detector selection is made the menu returns to the previous menu Couplings When Detector setting is Auto SENSe ACPower DETector AUTO Detector is set to what the Radio Standard defaults states see detector section for all conditions of Trace Type and for all traces When set to Manual...

Page 966: ... See Trig Delay on page 336 External 1 See External 1 on page 1588 Trigger Level See Trigger Level on page 1589 Trig Slope See Trig Slope on page 1589 Trig Delay See Trig Delay on page 339 Zero Span Delay Comp See Zero Span Delay Comp On Off on page 1577 External 2 See External 2 on page 1590 Trigger Level See Trigger Level on page 1590 Trig Slope See Trig Slope on page 1591 966 W CDMA HSPA Measur...

Page 967: ...tive Trigger Level on page 1582 Trig Slope See Trigger Slope on page 1593 Trig Delay See Trig Delay on page 346 Periodic Timer See Periodic Timer Frame Trigger on page 1583 Period See Period on page 1585 Offset See Offset on page 1585 Reset Offset Display See Reset Offset Display on page 1587 Sync Source See Sync Source on page 1587 Off See Off on page 1588 External 1 See External 1 on page 1588 W...

Page 968: ... 1590 Trig Slope See Trig Slope on page 1591 RF Burst See RF Burst on page 1591 Absolute Trigger See Absolute Trigger Level on page 1592 Trig Slope See Trigger Slope on page 1593 Trig Delay See Trig Delay on page 357 Auto Holdoff See Auto Holdoff on page 1594 Auto Trig See Auto Trig on page 1594 Trig Holdoff See Trig Holdoff on page 1595 968 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 969: ...it can in legacy analyzers If you want to recall all modes to their user preset file state you will need to do a User Preset after mode switching into each mode User Preset recalls mode state which can now include data like traces whereas on ESA and PSA User Preset did not affect data Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 User Preset User Preset sets the state of the currently active mode back to ...

Page 970: ...f the User Preset files for each mode switches to the power on mode and activates the saved measurement from the power on mode User Preset file When the instrument is secured all of the user preset files are converted back to their default user preset files The User Preset function does the following Aborts the currently running measurement Switches the Mode to the power on mode Restores the User ...

Page 971: ...and its State You can recall this User Preset file by pressing the User Preset menu key or sending the SYST PRES USER remote command This same state is also saved by the Save State function Key Path User Preset Remote Command SYSTem PRESet USER SAVE Example SYST PRES USER SAVE Notes SYST PRES SAVE creates the same file as if the user requested a SAV or a MMEM STOR STAT except User Preset Save does...

Page 972: ...ews only contain one view Spectrum View The results of the measurement can be displayed as a single spectrum trace view or displayed with a Bar Graph trace on the spectrum trace The display consists of the following two windows Spectrum Window on page 974 Results Window on page 974 The following two views are only for DTMB CTTB and CMMB DTMB and CMMB Transmitter 972 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applica...

Page 973: ...9 ACP Measurement View Display DTMB and CMMB Exciter W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 973 ...

Page 974: ... on Results Window The text window displays the following results Total Carrier Power This is the total power of all the carriers with carrier power present set to yes The power is calculated by integrating across the bandwidth declared by the Carrier Integ Bw parameter for each carrier and then totaling the sums The total integration bandwidth is shown as part of the result This will be the total...

Page 975: ...displayed The selected Carrier Result is 9 or greater in normal multi carrier power results view In this case the last 4 carrier power results will be displayed The zoom mode is selected In this case all carrier power ranges can be displayed Offset Relative Power This is the power in the offsets relative to the reference carrier The power is calculated by integrating across the bandwidth declared ...

Page 976: ...reen It does not include the settings panel or the Active Function Turning off the Meas Bar turns off the settings panel and the Active Function When the Meas Bar is off the graticule area expands to fill the area formerly occupied by the Meas Bar 2 Screen Annotation this is the annotation and annunciation around the graticule including any annotation on lines such as the display line the threshol...

Page 977: ...t Bar Key Path View Display Display Annotation Remote Command DISPlay ANNotation MBAR STATe OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay ANNotation MBAR STATe Example DISP ANN MBAR OFF Dependencies Grayed out and forced to OFF when System Display Settings Annotation is set to Off Preset On This should remain Off through a Preset when System DisplaySettings Annotation is set to Off State Saved Saved in instrument state Init...

Page 978: ...ation SCReen STATe OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay ANNotation SCReen STATe Example DISP ANN SCR OFF Dependencies Grayed out and forced to OFF when System Display Settings Annotation is set to Off Preset On This should remain Off through a Preset when System DisplaySettings Annotation is set to Off State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Active Function Values On Off Turns on...

Page 979: ...t On This should remain Off through a Preset when System DisplaySettings Annotation is set to Off State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Title Displays menu keys that enable you to change or clear a title on your display Key Path View Display Display Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Change Title Writes a title into the measurement name field in the banner ...

Page 980: ...This Is My Title This example is for Measurements other than Swept SA Both set the title to This Is My Title Notes Pressing this key cancels any active function When a title is edited the previous title remains intact it is not cleared and the cursor goes at the end so that characters can be added or BKSP can be used to go back over previous characters Preset No title measurement name instead Stat...

Page 981: ...e meas local annotation settings When it is All Off it forces ScreenAnnotation Meas Bar Trace and Active Function Values settings to be OFF for all measurements in all modes This provides the security based annotation off function of previous analyzers hence it uses the legacy SCPI command When it is All Off the Screen Meas Bar Trace and Active Function Values keys under the Display Annotation men...

Page 982: ...tes In ESA and PSA we offer the choice of Reverse Bitmap or Reverse Metafile when saving screen images This is much like the Flat Color theme available in X Series Also if you selected Reverse Bitmap AND a black white screen image that would be much like Flat Monochrome In other words each of the X Series themes has a similar screen image type in ESA PSA But they are not identical Initial S W Revi...

Page 983: ...ph Turns the Bar Graph On and Off Key Path View Display Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Remote Command DISPlay ACPower VIEW 1 WINDow 1 BGRaph OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay ACPower VIEW 1 WINDow 1 BGRaph Example DISP ACP VIEW WIND BGR OFF DISP ACP VIEW WIND BGR Notes You must be in the mode that includes ACP measurements to use this command Use INSTrument...

Page 984: ...9 ACP Measurement View Display 984 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 985: ...r power For measurement results and views see View Display on page 1306 This topic contains the following sections Measurement Commands for Spectrum Emission Mask on page 986 Remote Command Results for Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement on page 987 Number of Offsets on page 1002 Undefined variable Primary ProductName W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 985 ...

Page 986: ...turn 999 0 when their results are queried via SCPI CONFigure SEMask CONFigure SEMask NDEFault INITiate SEMask FETCh SEMask n MEASure SEMask n READ SEMask n For more measurement related commands see the SENSe subsystem and the section Remote Measurement Functions on page 2642 986 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 987: ...lute peak power on the negative offset A dBm 15 Peak power offset frequency from the center or carrier edge frequency in the negative offset A depending on Offset Frequency Define settings Hz 16 Relative integrated power on the positive offset A dBc 17 Absolute integrated power on the positive offset A dBm 18 Relative peak power on the positive offset A dBc 19 Absolute peak power on the positive o...

Page 988: ...power on the negative offset A dB 12 Absolute integrated power on the negative offset A dBm Hz 13 Relative peak power on the negative offset A dB 14 Absolute peak power on the negative offset A dBm Hz 15 Peak power offset frequency from the center or carrier edge frequency in the negative offset A depending on Offset Frequency Define settings Hz 16 Relative integrated power on the positive offset ...

Page 989: ... Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 9 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 10 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 11 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 12 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 13 Relative peak power on the negative offset A dB 14 Absolute peak power on the negative offset A dBm 15 Peak power offset frequency from the center or carrier edge frequency in...

Page 990: ...e power of the carrier of which the frequency is indicated by Freq Segment 2 dBm 5 Peak frequency in the center frequency reference area Hz 6 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 7 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 8 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 9 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 10 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 11 Relative integrated power on the neg...

Page 991: ...lowing order 1 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 2 Absolute reference power dBm Hz 3 Absolute power of the carrier of which the frequency is indicated by Freq Segment 1 dBm Hz 4 Absolute power of the carrier of which the frequency is indicated by Freq Segment 2 dBm Hz 5 Peak frequency in the center frequency reference area Hz 6 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 7 Reserved for the f...

Page 992: ... of data points is 2001 All 3 Returns the displayed frequency domain absolute limit trace data separated by comma The number of data points is 2001 All 4 Returns the displayed frequency domain relative limit trace data separated by comma The number of data points is 2001 All see details 5 Meas Type Total Power Reference Returns comma separated scalar values in dBm of the absolute integrated power ...

Page 993: ...ues in dBm Hz of the absolute integrated power of the segment frequencies The length of the result depends on the number of available offset See Number of Offsets on page 1002 1 Power spectral density reference dBm Hz 2 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 3 Absolute integrated power at negative offset frequency A 4 Absolute integrated power at positive offset frequency A 25 Absolute integrat...

Page 994: ...erence dBm 2 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 3 Absolute peak power at negative offset frequency A 4 Absolute peak power at positive offset frequency A 25 Absolute peak power at negative offset frequency L 26 Absolute peak power at positive offset frequency L In MSR and LTE Advanced FDD TDD mode Returns outer offset results when Non Contiguous Meas Region is set to Outer and returns inner...

Page 995: ...leases All 6 Meas Type Power Spectral Density Reference Returns comma separated scalar values in dBc Hz of the integrated power relative to the carrier at the segment frequencies The length of the result depends on the number of available offset See Number of Offsets on page 1002 When in the MSR and LTE Advanced FDD TDD mode returns outer offset results when Non Contiguous Meas Region is set to Ou...

Page 996: ...ode returns outer offset results when Non Contiguous Meas Region is set to Outer and returns inner offset results when it is set to Inner in the following order 1 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 2 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 3 At negative offset frequency A 4 At positive offset frequency A 25 At negative offset frequency L 26 At positive offset frequency L The number of val...

Page 997: ...er Returns comma separated scalar values in dBm of the absolute peak power of the segment frequencies The length of the result depends on the number of available offset See Number of Offsets on page 1002 When in the MSR and LTE Advanced FDD TDD mode returns outer offset results when Non Contiguous Meas Region is set to Outer and returns inner offset results when it is set to Inner in the following...

Page 998: ... Contiguous Meas Region is set to Outer and returns inner offset results when it is set to Inner in the following order 1 Relative integrated power on the negative offset A dBc 2 Absolute integrated power on the negative offset A dBm 3 Relative peak power on the negative offset A dBc 4 Absolute peak power on the negative offset A dBm 5 Peak power offset frequency from the center or carrier edge fr...

Page 999: ...ive peak power on the positive offset A dB 9 Absolute peak power on the positive offset A dBm Hz 10 Peak power offset frequency from the center or carrier edge frequency in the positive offset A depending on Offset Frequency Define settings Hz 11 Relative integrated power on the negative offset B dB 119 Absolute peak power on the positive offset L dBm Hz 120 Peak power offset frequency from the ce...

Page 1000: ...bject to change in future releases All 15 Meas Type Total Power Reference Returns comma separated scalar results in the following order When in the MSR and LTE Advanced FDD TDD mode returns outer offset results when Non Contiguous Meas Region is set to Outer and returns inner offset results when it is set to Inner in the following order 1 Minimum margin from limit line on the negative offset A dB ...

Page 1001: ...10 Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1001 ...

Page 1002: ...ption as below Mode The number of available offsets WLAN 12 Offset A to L Other modes with option N9060A 7FP 12 Offset A to L Other modes without option N9060A 7FP 6 Offset A to F Key Path Meas Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 11 00 A 14 00 1002 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1003: ...LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD Remote Command DISPlay SEMask VIEW 1 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel real DISPlay SEMask VIEW 1 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel Example DISP SEM VIEW WIND TRAC Y RLEV 100 DISP SEM VIEW WIND TRAC Y RLEV Notes You must be in the mode that includes SEM measurement to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Couplings When the Auto Scaling is ...

Page 1004: ...ision A 12 50 Adjust Range For Min Clip Sets the combination of attenuation and gain based on the current measured signal level so that clipping will be at a minimum This is an immediate action function that is it executes once when the key is pressed This key is grayed out in measurements that do not support this functionality Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Attenuation Remote Command SENSe POWer RF RANGe...

Page 1005: ...oftkey However some applications will not permit changing the value In these situations the softkey will be grayed out Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Range Remote Command SENSe POWer RF RANGe PARatio real SENSe POWer RF RANGe PARatio Example POW RANG PAR 12 dB Notes In some Applications Modes this parameter will be read only meaning the value will appear on the softkey and query via SCPI but not changeabl...

Page 1006: ...EW 1 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision Example DISP SEM VIEW WIND TRAC Y PDIV 15dB DISP SEM VIEW WIND TRAC Y PDIV Notes You must be in the mode that includes SEM measurement to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Couplings When the Auto Scaling is On this value is automatically determined by the measurement result When you set a value manually Auto Scaling automatically changes t...

Page 1007: ...r Ref Value manually Auto Scaling automatically changes to Off Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DTMB CTTB DVB T H ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD Remote Command DISPlay SEMask VIEW 1 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe COUPle 0 1 ON OFF DISPlay SEMask VIEW 1 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe COUPle Example DISP SEM VIEW WIND TRAC Y COUP OFF DISP SEM VIE...

Page 1008: ...uts all Auto Man parameters in manual mode It decouples all the coupled instrument parameters and is not recommended for making measurements Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 More Information There are two types of functions that have Auto Manual modes Auto Man Active Function keys An Auto Man toggle key controls the binary state associated with an instrument parameter by toggling between Auto...

Page 1009: ...10 Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement Auto Couple W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1009 ...

Page 1010: ...tomatically selected for each carriers and offsets so that measurement speed and accuracy is optimized Key Path BW Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD Remote Command SENSe SEMask BANDwidth SHAPe ASENse GAUSsian FLATtop SENSe SEMask BANDwidth SHAPe Example SEM BAND SHAP GAUS SEM BAND SHAP Couplings See the ...

Page 1011: ...rements etc when in Continuous mode When the average count reaches the Average Hold Number the count stops incrementing but the analyzer keeps sweeping See the Trace Detector section for the averaging formula used both before and after the Average Hold Number is reached The trigger condition must be met prior to each sweep The type of trace processing for multiple sweeps is set under the Trace Det...

Page 1012: ...weep the INIT CONT 0 command will place the analyzer in Single Sweep but will have no effect on the current sequence until k N at which point the current sequence will stop and the instrument will go to the idle state 1012 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1013: ...10 Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement File File See File on page 258 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1013 ...

Page 1014: ...er Freq The center frequency setting is the same for all measurements within a mode that is it is Meas Global Some modes are also able to share a Mode Global center frequency value If this is the case the Mode will have a Global Settings key in its Mode Setup menu The Center Freq function sets and queries the Center Frequency for the currently selected input If your analyzer has multiple inputs an...

Page 1015: ... the SCPI command The other parameter is forced to a different value if needed to keep the Start and the Stop Frequencies within the analyzer s frequency range Preset Depends on instrument maximum frequency mode measurement and selected input See Center Frequency Presets on page 1015 and RF Center Freq on page 1017 and Ext Mix Center Freq and I Q Center Freq on page 1019 State Saved Saved in instr...

Page 1016: ... GHz 26 5 GHz 26 55 GHz 526 N9038A 1 805 GHz 3 6 GHz 27 0 GHz 532 16 005 GHz 32 0 GHz 32 5 GHz 543 21 505 GHz 43 0 GHz TBD 544 22 005 GHz 44 0 GHz 44 5 GHz 550 25 005 GHz 50 0 GHz 51 GHz Input 2 Model CF after Mode Preset Stop Freq after Mode Preset Max Freq can t tune above N9000A opt C75 0 7505GHz 1 5 GHz 1 58 GHz N9038A 505 MHz 1 GHz 1 000025 GHz Tracking Generator Frequency Limits N9000A only ...

Page 1017: ...rrently selected input Scope Meas Global Remote Command SENSe FREQuency RF CENTer freq SENSe FREQuency RF CENTer Example FREQ RF CENT 30 MHz Notes This command is the same in all modes but the parameter is Measurement Global So the value is independent in each mode and common across all the measurements in the mode Dependencies If the electronic soft attenuator is enabled any attempt to set Center...

Page 1018: ...This command is the same in all modes but the parameter is Measurement Global So the value is independent in each mode and common across all the measurements in the mode Couplings When returning to External Mixing after having been switched to one of the other inputs e g RF you will come back into the settings that you had when you left External Mixing So you will come back to the band you were in...

Page 1019: ... not the input which is selected at the time the command is sent Note that the Center Freq function in the Frequency menu on the front panel always applies to the currently selected input Scope Meas Global Remote Command SENSe FREQuency IQ CENTer freq SENSe FREQuency IQ CENTer Example FREQ IQ CENT 30 MHz Notes This command is the same in all modes but the parameter is Measurement Global So the val...

Page 1020: ...s and results in an advisory message If the equivalent SCPI command is sent this same message is generated as part of a 221 Settings conflict warning Couplings When auto coupled in a non zero span the center frequency step size is set to 10 of the span When auto coupled in zero span the center frequency step size is set to the equivalent 3 dB RBW value Preset Auto ADEMOD 1 MHz ON State Saved Saved...

Page 1021: ...10 Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement Input Output Input Output See Input Output on page 190 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1021 ...

Page 1022: ...tive function and the active function is turned off Key Path Marker Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DTMB CTTB DVB T H ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD Remote Command CALCulate SEMask MARKer 1 2 12 MODE POSition OFF CALCulate SEMask MARKer 1 2 12 MODE Example CALC SEM MARK MODE POS CALC SEM MARK MODE Notes If the selected marker is Off pressing Marker s...

Page 1023: ...d Saved in instrument state Range On Off Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 All Markers Off Turns all active markers off in all views Key Path Marker Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DTMB CTTB DVB T H ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD Remote Command CALCulate SEMask MARKer AOFF Example CALC SEM MARK AOFF Initia...

Page 1024: ... if the control mode is Off but is the SCPI equivalent of entering a value if the control mode is Normal except in trace points rather than X Axis Scale units The entered value is immediately translated into the current X Axis Scale units for setting the value of the marker Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DTMB CTTB DVB T H ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD LTEA...

Page 1025: ...TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD Remote Command CALCulate SEMask MARKer 1 2 12 Y Example CALC SEM MARK11 Y 10 dBm CALC SEM MARK11 Y Notes Since the result value is always calculated from acquisition data the default value is arbitrary although the Preset Default values is defined Preset Result dependent on markers setup and signal source State Saved No Backwards Compatibility SCPI CALCulate SEMask MARK...

Page 1026: ...Marker Function There are no Marker Functions supported in Spectrum Emission Mask so this front panel key displays a blank menu when pressed Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 1026 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1027: ...ker To There is no Marker To functionality supported in Spectrum Emission Mask so this front panel key displays a blank menu when pressed Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1027 ...

Page 1028: ...en reenter Help press the Help key and press that key Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Remote Measurement Functions This section contains the following topics Measurement Group of Commands on page 2643 Current Measurement Query Remote Command Only on page 2645 Limit Test Current Results Remote Command Only on page 2645 Data Query Remote Command Only on page 2645 Calcu...

Page 1029: ... ASCII is the default format for the data output Older versions of Spectrum Analysis and Phase Noise mode measurements only use ASCII The binary data formats should be used for handling large blocks of data since they are smaller and faster than the ASCII format Refer to the FORMat DATA command for more information If you need to change some of the measurement parameters from the factory default s...

Page 1030: ...luded or is set to 1 If the n value is set to a value other than 1 the selected trace data results will be returned See each command for details of what types of scalar results or trace data results are available The binary data formats should be used for handling large blocks of data since they are smaller and transfer faster than the ASCII format FORMat DATA FETCh may be used to return results o...

Page 1031: ...ince they are smaller and faster than the ASCII format FORMat DATA Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Current Measurement Query Remote Command Only This command returns the name of the measurement that is currently running Remote Command CONFigure Example CONF Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Limit Test Current Results Remote Command Only Queries the status of the current measurement limit...

Page 1032: ...Culate DATA n COMPress BLOCk CFIT MAXimum MINimum MEAN DMEan RMS RMSCubed SAMPle SDEViation PPHase soffset length roffset rlimit Example To query the mean power of a set of GSM bursts Supply a signal that is a set of GSM bursts Select the IQ Waveform measurement in IQ Analyzer Mode Set the sweep time to acquire at least one burst Set the triggers such that acquisition happens at a known position r...

Page 1033: ...value that is the arithmetic mean of the data point values in dB dBm for the specified region s of trace data For I Q trace data the mean of the magnitudes of the I Q pairs is returned See the following equations If the original trace data is in dB this function returns the arithmetic mean of those log values not log of the mean power which is a more useful value The mean of the log is the better ...

Page 1034: ...Pairs for Specified Region s where Xi is the complex value representation of an I Q pair Xi its conjugate complex number and n is the number of I Q pairs in the specified region s Once you have the rms value for a region of trace data linear or I Q you may want to calculate the mean power You must convert this rms value peak volts to power in dBm SAMPle returns the first data value x y pair for th...

Page 1035: ...specified by data point in PPHase The rms power of the specified region may be expressed as Power 10 x log 10 x RMS I Q value 10 The RMS I Q value peak volts is where Xi is the complex value representation of an I Q pair Xi its conjugate complex number and n is the number of I Q pairs in the specified region The arithmetic mean phase of the specified region may be expressed as where Yi is the unwr...

Page 1036: ...will be compressed into one value This parameter has a default value equal to the current trace length roffset repeat offset is an optional real number It is in seconds for time domain traces and is a dimensionless index 0 to Npoints 1 for frequency domain traces It defines the beginning of the next field of trace elements to be compressed This is relative to the beginning of the previous field Th...

Page 1037: ...EQuency TIME Example Example for Swept SA measurement in Spectrum Analyzer Mode CALC DATA4 PEAK 40 10 FREQ GTDL This will identify the peaks of trace 4 that are above 40 dBm with excursions of at least 10 dB The peaks are returned in order of increasing frequency starting with the lowest frequency Only the peaks that are above the display line are returned Query Results 1 With FORMat DATA REAL 32 ...

Page 1038: ...by peforming real time overlapped FFTs at the hardware layer using software for basic post processing before returning the result to the user The upshot of this approach is improved throughput for user applications that require many sequential power measurements The analysis bandwidth of FP2 is limited by the licenses in the instrument but its maximum overall analysis bandwidth per acquisition is ...

Page 1039: ...ed in the configuration string Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Acquisition Time Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF AcquisitionTime 0 002 Notes The acquisition time parameter sets the time in which the entire spectrum is measured An increase in the acquisition time yields an improvement in measurement repeatability Preset 0 001 s Range 0 s to 1 s Default Unit Time s Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Center Frequen...

Page 1040: ...zer is subtracted from all measurements This effectively lowers the noise floor of the analyzer When noise correction is enabled the first measurement for a given set of input parameters will take extra time This is because the analyzer takes an extra acquisition with the RF input disconnected from the analyzer s front end to measure the noise of just the analyzer The measured noise floor is store...

Page 1041: ...d Because two acquisitions rather than a single acquisition are made when spur suppression is enabled the measurement time will always be slower when spur suppression is enabled Preset False Range True enable spur suppression or False disable spur suppression Default Unit Boolean Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Electronic Attenuator Bypass Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF ElecAttBypass False Notes The elec...

Page 1042: ...nt IF paths For example if the signal is less than 25 MHz wide then the user can select the B25M path to take advantage of additional filtering on this analog IF path Preset B40M Range B10M B25M B40M Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Include Power Spectrum Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF IncludePowerSpectrum True Notes The power spectrum parameter allows the user to read data on the entire spectrum for diag...

Page 1043: ...ange Off Low Full Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Resolution Bandwidth Mode Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF PreAmpMode Low Notes The resolution bandwidth mode parameter allows the user to choose whether the RBW filter is automatically or manually set The BestSpeed value minimizes measurement time while the Narrowest value minimizes RBW size minimum of two FFT bins per RBW To manually specify an RBW set th...

Page 1044: ...S W Revision A 14 00 Trigger Level Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF TriggerLevel 2 Notes The trigger level parameter sets the voltage value at which an external trigger is detected Preset 1 2 V Range 5 to 5 V Default Unit Volts Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Trigger Slope Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF TriggerSlope Negative Notes The trigger slope parameter indicates the direction of the edge trigger voltage ...

Page 1045: ... s Default Unit Seconds Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Signal Input Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF SignalInput Fp50MHzCW Notes The signal input parameter allows the user to select between using the main RF input or the internal analyzer reference CW signal of 50 MHz Preset FpMainRf Range FpMainRf Fp50MHzCW Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Use Preselector Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF UsePreSelector True Notes ...

Page 1046: ...dth filter weighs all frequencies within the bandwidth equally The root raised cosine filter has an associated shape parameter defined by the FilterAlpha parameter All array parameters should have the same number of elements Alternatively if all the elements are the same value a single value with no square brackets can be used to define the parameter Preset IBW Range IBW RRC Initial S W Revision A...

Page 1047: ...ameters should have the same number of elements Alternatively if all the elements are the same value a single value with no square brackets can be used to define the parameter Preset BandPower Range BandPower BandDensity PeakPower PeakFrequency XdBBandwidth OccupiedBandwidth Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Channel Offset Frequency Array Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF OffsetFrequency 5e6 0 5e6 Notes The o...

Page 1048: ...the power relative to the peak channel power over which the bandwidth is calculated The parameter value must be a negative number Preset 3 01 Range 200 to 0 dB Default Unit dB Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Define Fast Power Measurement Query Remote Command Only The DEFine command is used to retrieve a list of all defined parameters in an ASCII string format M o d e All R e m o t e C o m m a n d CAL...

Page 1049: ...0 OffsetFrequency 0 Function BandPower FilterType IBW FilterAlpha 0 22 OccupiedBandwidthPercent 0 99 XdBBandwidth 3 01 DoNoiseCorrection False DoSpurSuppression False MeasurementMethod HardwareFFT IncludePowerSpectrum Fals e TriggerDelay 0 TriggerLevel 1 2 TriggerSlope Positive TriggerSource Free TriggerTimeout 1 I n i t i a l S W R e v i s i o n A 14 00 Configure Fast Power Measurement Remote Com...

Page 1050: ...omma separated ASCII values where m corresponds to the number of bandwidths defined 1 Declared function return in the 1st specified channel 2 Declared function return in the 2nd specified channel m Declared function return in the last specified channel The INIT and FETC command sequence performs the same functionality of a single CALC FPOW POW n query Units of the returned values are dependent on ...

Page 1051: ...verloads and to visibly inspect the spectrum Mode All Remote Command CALCulate FPOWer POWer 1 2 999 READ2 Example CALC FPOW POW1 READ2 Notes Option FP2 is required Note Spectrum data is only returned if the IncludePowerSpectrum parameter is set to True If IncludePowerSpectrum is False the number of spectrum points will be zero 0 Units of the returned values are dependent on the Function parameter ...

Page 1052: ...ii data is output in the current Y Axis unit When the data format is INTeger data is output in units of m dBm 001 dBm The INT 32 format returns binary 32 bit integer values in internal units m dBm in a definite length block Dependencies Sending a data format spec with an invalid number for example INT 48 generates no error The analyzer simply uses the default 8 for ASCii 32 for INTeger 32 for REAL...

Page 1053: ...der for data transfer and other queries It controls whether binary data is transferred in normal or swapped mode This command affects only the byte order for setting and querying trace data for the TRACe DATA TRACe DATA CALCulate DATA n and FETCh SANalyzer n commands and queries By definition any command that says it uses FORMat DATA uses any format supported by FORMat DATA The NORMal order is a b...

Page 1054: ... or off Key Path Meas Setup Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DTMB CTTB DVB T H ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD Remote Command SENSe SEMask AVERage COUNt integer SENSe SEMask AVERage COUNt SENSe SEMask AVERage STATe ON OFF 1 0 SENSe SEMask AVERage STATe Example SEM AVER COUN 100 SEM AVER COUN SEM AVER ON SEM AVER Notes You must be in the mode that inclu...

Page 1055: ...NSTrument SELect to set the mode Preset SA WCDMA C2K TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DTMB CTTB DVB T H ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD TPRef WIMAX OFDMA WLAN SPRef State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Total Pwr Ref PSD Ref Spectrum Peak Ref Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 Ref Channel Accesses a menu that enables you to set up the me...

Page 1056: ...MHz DVB T H 7 61MHz ISDB T 5 6MHz CMMB 7 512MHz LTE 4 515MHz 4 5MHz LTETDD 4 515MHz 4 5MHz Digital Cable TV 6 9MHz WLAN if Radio Std is 802 11a g OFDM DSSS OFDM 802 11n 20 MHz 802 11ac 20 MHz 18 MHz if Radio Std is 802 11b g DSSS CCK PBCC 22 MHz if Radio Std is 802 11n 40MHz 802 11ac 40 MHz 38 MHz if Radio Std is 802 11ac 80 MHz 78 MHz if Radio Std is 802 11ac 160 MHz 158 MHz if Radio Std is 802 1...

Page 1057: ...etween the center frequencies of the two carriers When the difference is either less than 80 MHz or greater than 565 MHz a setting conflict error message is displayed Chan Span Carrier Spacing Chan IntegBW Preset SA 5 0 MHz WCDMA 5 0 MHz 5 0 MHz C2K 1 25 MHz 1 25 MHz WIMAX OFDMA 10 MHz 10 MHz TD SCDMA 1 6 MHz 1 6 MHz 1xEVDO 1 25 MHz DTMB CTTB 10 MHz DVB T H 10 MHz ISDB T 8 MHz CMMB 10 MHz LTE 5 MH...

Page 1058: ... SWE TIME 9ms SEM SWE TIME SEM SWE TIME AUTO OFF SEM SWE TIME AUTO Notes Sub op code 1 is for BTS 2 for MS Default is BTS You must be in the mode that includes SEM measurement to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Couplings When the time is set manually Auto is set to OFF Value is coupled with Channel Detector selection Channel Resolution BW Channel Video BW if the state is Aut...

Page 1059: ...ion SENSe SEMask BANDwidth 1 2 RESolution AUTO OFF ON 1 0 SENSe SEMask BANDwidth 1 2 RESolution AUTO Example SEM BAND 100 kHz SEM BAND SEM BAND AUTO ON SEM BAND AUTO Notes Bandwidth sub op code 1 is for BTS 2 for MS Default is BTS You must be in the mode that includes SEM measurement to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Couplings When Res BW is set manually Channel Resolution ...

Page 1060: ...FDD LTEATDD Remote Command SENSe SEMask BANDwidth 1 2 VIDeo bandwidth SENSe SEMask BANDwidth 1 2 VIDeo SENSe SEMask BANDwidth 1 2 VIDeo AUTO OFF ON 1 0 SENSe SEMask BANDwidth 1 2 VIDeo AUTO Example SEM BAND VID 100 kHz SEM BAND VID SEM BAND VID AUTO ON SEM BAND VID AUTO Notes Bandwidth sub op code 1 is for BTS 2 for MS Default is BTS You must be in the mode that includes SEM measurement to use thi...

Page 1061: ...SCDMA mode 1xEVDO DTMB CTTB DVB T H ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD Remote Command SENSe SEMask BANDwidth 1 2 VIDeo RATio real SENSe SEMask BANDwidth 1 2 VIDeo RATio SENSe SEMask BANDwidth 1 2 VIDeo RATio AUTO OFF ON 1 0 SENSe SEMask BANDwidth 1 2 VIDeo RATio AUTO Example SEM BAND VID RAT 0 1 SEM BAND VID RAT SEM BAND VID RAT AUTO ON SEM BAND VID RAT AUTO Notes Ban...

Page 1062: ...f Channel Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Total Power Sets the power in the carrier ref channel that is used to compute the relative power values for the offsets When the state is set to auto this value is set to the measured carrier reference power When set to manual the result takes on the last measured value or can be manually entered For WLAN 802 11ac 80 MHz 80 MHz the higher of the powe...

Page 1063: ...A 03 00 PSD Sets the power spectral density in the carrier that is used to compute the relative power spectral density values for the offsets when Meas Type is set to PSD Ref When the state is set to auto this will be set to the measured carrier power spectral density For WLAN 802 11ac 80 MHz 80 MHz the higher of the power density readouts of the two carriers is used for computing the relative PSD...

Page 1064: ...nel Power Ref Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DTMB CTTB DVB T H ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN Remote Command SENSe SEMask CARRier PEAK POWer real SENSe SEMask CARRier PEAK POWer Example SEM CARR PEAK 80 SEM CARR PEAK POWER Notes Although the default value is defined the value is recalculated by the measurement result just after completing the measurement Carrier sub op...

Page 1065: ...nge MSR LTEATDD LTEAFDD WLAN A B C D E F G H I J K L Other modes without option N9060A 7FP A B C D E F Other modes with option N9060A 7FP A B C D E F G H I J K L Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 A 10 00 A 11 00 A 14 00 Start Freq Specifies the start frequency for the currently selected offset Also enables you to toggle that offset between On and Off Mi...

Page 1066: ...Hz 1 980 MHz 2 250 MHz 8 0 MHz 12 0 MHz 12 0 MHz WIMAX OFDMA 4 75 MHz 5 45 MHz 9 75 MHz 14 75 MHz 19 75 MHz 24 75 MHz 4 75 MHz 5 45 MHz 9 75 MHz 14 75 MHz 19 75 MHz 24 75 MHz TD SCDMA 81 5kHz 1015 kHz 1815 kHz 2 3 MHz 2 3 MHz 2 3 MHz 815 kHz 1 8 MHz 2 9 MHz 2 9 MHz 2 9 MHz 2 9 MHz 1xEVDO 750 0 kHz 780 0 kHz 1 98 MHz 3 25 MHz 7 MHz 7 MHz 885 0 kHz 1 98 MHz 1 98 MHz 1 98 MHz 1 98 MHz 1 98 MHz LTE LT...

Page 1067: ...N OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF LTE LTETDD ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF When option N9060A 7FP is installed in these modes the preset value of Offset G L is the same as the Offset F value WLAN if Radio Std is 802 11b g DSSS CCK PBCC ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF if Radio Std is 802 11a g OFDM DSSS OFDM 802 11n 20MHz 40MHz ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF...

Page 1068: ...et value is as follows SA 2 715 MHz 3 515 MHz 4 00 MHz 8 00 MHz 12 50 MHz 15 0 MHz WCDMA 2 715 MHz 3 515 MHz 4 000 MHz 8 000 MHz 12 50 MHz 15 0 MHz 3 485 MHz 7 500 MHz 8 500 MHz 12 00 MHz 15 00 MHz 18 0 MHz C2K 780 0kHz 1 980 MHz 4 0 MHz 4 0 MHz 12 0 MHz 12 0 MHz 1 980 MHz4 0 MHz 4 0 MHz 11 5 MHz 14 5 MHz 14 5 MHz WIMAX OFDMA 5 45 MHz 9 75 MHz 14 75 MHz 19 75 MHz 24 75 MHz 29 75 MHz 5 45 MHz 9 75 ...

Page 1069: ...he Acq Time mode between Auto and Man Missing values are not permitted that is if you want to change values 2 and 6 you must send all values up to 6 Subsequent values will remain as they were The query for this parameter always returns 12 values Key Path Meas Setup Offset Limits Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DTMB CTTB DVB T H ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD...

Page 1070: ...bility SCPI SENSe SEMask OFFSet 1 2 LIST SWEep TIME Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 A 10 00 A 11 00 A 14 00 Offset Side Specifies which offset side to measure You can turn off not use specific offsets with SENSe SEMask OFFSet n OUTer LIST STATe BOTH Both of the negative lower and positive upper sidebands NEGative Negative lower sideband only POSitive ...

Page 1071: ...or to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 A 10 00 A 11 00 A 14 00 Res BW Specifies which Resolution BW filter to use when measuring the currently selected offset Offset Res BW Mode allows the instrument to determine the optimum Resolution BW filter to use when measuring the currently selected offset When changing the Meas BW parameter if the Res BW needs to be changed to adhere to the...

Page 1072: ... 30 00 kHz 100 00 kHz 1 000 MHz 1 00 MHz 30 00 kHz 1 000 MHz 1 000 MHz 1 000 MHz 1 000 MHz 1 00 MHz C2K 3 00 kHz 30 00 kHz 30 00 kHz 6 2 kHz 1 000 MHz 1 00 MHz 30 00 kHz 30 00 kHz 6 2 kHz 1 000 MHz 1 000 MHz 1 00 MHz WIMAX OFDMA 100 KHz 100 KHz 100 KHz 100 KHz 100 KHz 100 KHz 100 KHz 100 KHz 100 KHz 100 KHz 100 KHz 100 KHz TD SCDMA 30 kHz 30 kHz 30 kHz 50 kHz 1 MHz 1 MHz 30 kHz 30 kHz 50 kHz 1 MHz...

Page 1073: ...at is if you want to change values 2 and 6 you must send all values up to 6 Subsequent values will remain as they were The query for this parameter always returns 12 values Key Path Meas Setup Offset Limits Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DTMB CTTB DVB T HISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN Remote Command SENSe SEMask OFFSet 1 2 OUTer LIST BANDwidth IMULti integer SENSe SEMa...

Page 1074: ...for this parameter always returns 12 values Key Path Meas Setup Offset Limits Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAXOFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DTMB CTTB DVB T H ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD Remote Command SENSe SEMask OFFSet 1 2 OUTer LIST BANDwidth VIDeo freq SENSe SEMask OFFSet 1 2 OUTer LIST BANDwidth VIDeo SENSe SEMask OFFSet 1 2 OUTer LIST BANDwidth VIDeo AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe...

Page 1075: ... always returns 12 values Key Path Meas Setup Offset Limits Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DTMB CTTB DVB T H ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD Remote Command SENSe SEMask OFFSet 1 2 OUTer LIST BANDwidth VIDeo RATio real SENSe SEMask OFFSet 1 2 OUTer LIST BANDwidth VIDeo RATio SENSe SEMask OFFSet 1 2 OUTer LIST BANDwidth VIDeo RATio AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENS...

Page 1076: ...ial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 A 10 00 A 11 00 A 14 00 Limits Accesses a menu that enables you to set the power limits for start and stop frequencies of the selected offsets Key Path Meas Setup Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Select Offset Selects the offset upper and lower and displays the memory selection menu that enables you to store a set of p...

Page 1077: ... SENSe SEMask OFFSet 1 2 OUTer LIST STARt ABSolute Example SEM OFFS2 LIST STAR ABS 12 50 dBm 12 50 dBm 24 50 dBm 11 50 dBm 11 50 dBm 11 50 dBm SEM OFFS2 LIST STAR ABS Notes Comma separated list of values OFFSet1 is for BTS 2 for MS Default is BTS You must be in the mode that includes SEM measurement to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Couplings If the current mode is DVB T H ...

Page 1078: ... 12 00 dBm 69 00 dBm 69 00 dBm 69 00 dBm 69 00 dBm 69 00 dBm 69 00 dBm 69 00 dBm 69 00 dBm 69 00 dBm if Radio Std is 802 11ac 80 MHz 80 MHz 69 00 dBm 69 00 dBm 69 00 dBm 69 00 dBm 69 00 dBm 69 00 dBm 69 00 dBm 69 00 dBm 69 00 dBm 69 00 dBm 69 00 dBm 69 00 dBm State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 200 dBm Max 50 dBm Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 ...

Page 1079: ...ally according to the limit type Preset For modes except MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD and WLAN without option N9060A 7FP the preset value is as follows SA WIMAX OFDMA 14 00 dBm 26 00 dBm 26 00 dBm 13 00 dBm 13 00 dBm 13 00 dBm WCDMA 12 50 dBm 24 50 dBm 24 50 dBm 11 50 dBm 11 50 dBm 11 50 dBm 69 6 dBm 54 3 dBm 54 3 dBm 54 3 dBm 54 3 dBm 54 3 dBm C2K 27 00 dBm 27 00 dBm 27 00 dBm 46 00 dBm 13 00 dBm 13 00 dB...

Page 1080: ...F TD SCDMA ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 1xEVDO ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF LTE LTETDD OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON When option N9060A 7FP is installed in these modes the preset value of Offset G L is the same as the Offset F value WLAN if Radio Std is 802 11a g OFDM DSSS OFDM 802 11n 20MHz 40MHz 802 11 ac 20MHz 40MHz 80MHz 160MHz OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON if ...

Page 1081: ... T this value will be modified automatically according to the limit type If the current mode is WLAN and radio std is 802 11n Rel Start limits will be set to following values when frequency changed to above 5GHz 0 dB 20 00 dB 28 00 dB 40 00 dB 40 00 dB 40 00 dB 40 00 dB 40 00 dB 40 00 dB 40 00 dB 40 00 dB 40 00 dB Preset For modes except MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD and WLAN without option N9060A 7FP the p...

Page 1082: ...offset The relative power level limit ranges from 200 to 50 dBc The fail condition is set remotely by SENSe SEMask OFFSet n OUTer LIST TEST for each offset channel You can turn off not use specific offset channels remotely with SENSe SEMask OFFSet n OUTer LIST STATe The SCPI query returns values currently set to the offset stop relative power limits Missing values are not permitted that is if you ...

Page 1083: ...4 00 dB 54 00 dB 54 00 dB 54 00 dB 54 00 dB WIMAX OFDMA 25 dB 32 dB 50 dB 50 dB 50 dB 50 dB TD SCDMA 54 00 dB 62 00 dB 62 00 dB 47 00 dB 47 00 dB 47 00 dB 49 00 dB 58 945 dB 44 00 dB 44 00 dB 44 00 dB 44 00 dB 1xEVDO 45dB 45 00 dB 55 00 dB 55 00 dB 55 00 dB 55 00 dB 42dB 54 00 dB 54 00 dB 54 00 dB 54 00 dB 54 00 dB LTE LTETDD 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB Digital Cable TV 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB ...

Page 1084: ... OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 200 dB Max 50 dB Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 A 10 00 A 11 00 A 14 00 Fail Mask Selects one of the logic keys for fail conditions between the measurement results and the test limits Absolute and Relative both check the results against the respective limit OR checks against b...

Page 1085: ... ABS ABS AND AND AND AND AND AND C2K REL REL REL ABS REL REL AND AND ABS REL REL REL WIMAX OFDMA REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL TD SCDMA ABS ABS ABS ABS ABS ABS AND AND AND AND AND AND 1xEVDO REL REL REL ABS REL REL AND AND AND OR AND AND LTE LTDTDD ABS ABS ABS ABS ABS ABS Digital Cable TV REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL When option N9060A 7FP is installed in these...

Page 1086: ... Edge definition CTOCenter From carrier center to the center of offset measuring filter CTOEdge From carrier center to the nominal 3 dB point of the offset measuring filter closer to the carrier ETOCenter From Center Frequency Span of Ref Channel 2 for lower offset Center Frequency Span of Ref Channel 2 for upper offset of the carrier closest to each offset to the center of offset measuring filter...

Page 1087: ...YPE ETOC SEM OFFS TYPE Notes You must be in the mode that includes SEM measurements to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Preset SA WCDMA WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA DVB T H DTMB CTTB ISDB T CMMB Digital Cable TV CTOC C2K CTOE 1xEVDO CTOE LTE ETOC LTETDD ETOC State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Carrier Center To Meas BW Center Carrier Center To Meas BW Edge Carrier Edge To Mea...

Page 1088: ...Trument SELect to set the mode Dependencies WLAN RRC Weight is not supported when the radio standard is WLAN 802 11ac 80 80MHz Preset SA WIMAX OFDMA DVB T H ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD WLAN MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD OFF WCDMA TD SCDMA DTMB CTTB Digital Cable TV ON State Saved Saved in instrument state Range RRCWeight IntegBW Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 Filte...

Page 1089: ...tup Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DTMB CTTB DVB T H ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD Remote Command CONFigure SEMask Example CONF SEM Notes You must be in the mode that includes SEM measurement to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Couplings Selecting Meas Preset will restore all measurement parameters to their default values Init...

Page 1090: ...10 Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement Mode Mode See Mode on page 232 1090 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1091: ...asurement and gets the mode to a consistent state with all of the default couplings set Backwards Compatibility Notes In the X Series the legacy Factory Preset has been replaced with Mode Preset which only presets the currently active mode not the entire instrument In the X Series the way to preset the entire instrument is by using System Restore System Defaults All which behaves essentially the s...

Page 1092: ...ariables except the persistent ones Restore Mode Defaults resets ALL the Mode variables and all the Meas global and Meas local variables including the persistent ones Type Of Preset SCPI Command Front Panel Access Auto Couple COUPle ALL Auto Couple front panel key Meas Preset CONFigure Measurement Meas Setup Menu Mode Preset SYSTem PRESet Mode Preset green key Restore Mode Defaults INSTrument DEFa...

Page 1093: ...urement Mode Preset Power On Mode Preset SYSTem PON TYPE MODE System Menu Power On User Preset SYSTem PON TYPE USER System Menu Power On Last State SYSTem PON TYPE LAST System Menu W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1093 ...

Page 1094: ...10 Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement Mode Setup Mode Setup See Mode Setup on page 251 1094 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1095: ...ch Peak Search There is no Peak Search supported in Spectrum Emission Mask so this front panel key displays a blank menu when pressed Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1095 ...

Page 1096: ...10 Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement Print Print See Print on page 263 1096 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1097: ...call Trace State State_ Save Recall Screen Screen_ Save Recall Amplitude Corrections Ampcor_ Import Export Traces Trace_ Import Export Limit Lines LLine_ Import Export Measurement Result MeasR_ Import Export Capture Buffer CapBuf_ Import Export A four digit number is appended to the prefix to create a unique file name The numbering sequence starts at 0000 within each Mode for each file type and up...

Page 1098: ...ll be fred_0000 csv Although 0000 is used in the example above the number that is used is actually the current number in the Meas Results sequence that is the number that would have been used if you had not entered your own file name If the filename you entered ends with _dddd where d any number making it look just like an auto file name then the next auto file name picks up where you left off wit...

Page 1099: ...y in the sense that you can recall a state file from any X Series model number and any version of X Series software This is only possible if part of the recalling process goes through a limiting step after recalling the mode settings at least for settings that may vary with version number model number option and license differences If you try to recall a state file onto an instrument with less cap...

Page 1100: ...ample SA for the Spectrum Analyzer See More Information on page 1101 Key Path Recall Mode All Remote Command MMEMory LOAD STATe filename Example MMEM LOAD STAT myState state This recalls the file myState state on the default path Example MMEM LOAD STAT MyStateFile state This loads the state file data on the default file directory path into the instrument state Notes When you pick a file to recall ...

Page 1101: ...way When you use State to save and recall traces any trace whose data must be preserved should be placed in View or Blank mode before saving The following table describes the Trace Save and Recall possibilities You want to recall state and one trace s data leaving other traces unaffected Save Trace State from 1 trace Make sure that no other traces are updating they should all be in View or Blank m...

Page 1102: ...alog such as Look In Look In The Look In field shows the path from which the file will be recalled and allows you to change the path using the up and down arrow keys to navigate to other paths the Enter key to open a directory and the Backspace key to go back one directory The Look In field first uses the last path from the Save As dialog Save In path for that same file type There is no softkey fo...

Page 1103: ...t causes the current Open request to be cancelled The ESC key does the same thing Key Path Recall State Notes Brings up the Open dialog for recalling a State Save Type Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Edit Register Names You may enter a custom name on any of the Register keys to help you remember what you are using that state to save To do this press the Edit Register Names key choose the reg...

Page 1104: ...d Key Path Recall State Example RCL 1 Range 1 16 from front panel 1 128 from SCPI Readback Date and time with seconds resolution are displayed on the key OR A custom name of up to 30 characters entered using the Save State Edit Register Names key OR empty if no prior save operation has been performed to this register Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision Prior to A 11 00 R...

Page 1105: ...his register Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision Prior to A 11 00 Sequences These keys allow you to import a Tab separated or txt file that will automatically setup all the parameters required for building a Sequence The parameters will automatically be loaded into the Stated Sequencer Once selected in order to import the selected Sequence Type you must select the Open k...

Page 1106: ...C Application for manipulating csv files and then import it Importing Data loads measurement data from the specified file into the specified or default destination depending on the data type selected Selecting an Import Data menu key will not actually cause the importing to occur since the analyzer still needs to know from where to get the data Pressing the Open key in this menu brings up the Open...

Page 1107: ...ts In other measurements this key is grayed out Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Open When you press Open the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu entitled File Open This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse The Tab and Arrow keys can also be used for dialog navigation See From File on page 2687in Recall State for ...

Page 1108: ...ared The SWEEPING bit is set The MEASURING bit is set Backwards Compatibility Notes For Spectrum Analysis mode in ESA and PSA the Restart hardkey and the INITiate RESTart command restart trace averages displayed average count reset to 1 for a trace in Clear Write but did not restart Max Hold and Min Hold In the X Series the Restart hardkey and the INITiate RESTart command restart not only Trace Av...

Page 1109: ...er condition is met and the analyzer stops sweeping once that sweep has completed However with Average Hold Number 1 and at least one trace set to Trace Average Max Hold or Min Hold SA Measurement or Averaging on most other measurements multiple sweeps data acquisitions are taken for a single measurement The trigger condition must be met prior to each sweep The sweep is stopped when the average co...

Page 1110: ... settings that are affected by Mode Preset as well as the additional settings affected by Restore Mode Defaults all of the Mode s settings In addition all of the settings of the Input Output system are included even though they are outside of the Mode s state because they are needed to restore the complete setup Persistent System settings for example Verbose SCPI are not affected by either Mode Pr...

Page 1111: ...simply ignored The command is sequential Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 To File When you press To File the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu entitled Save As This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse The Tab and Arrow keys can also be used for dialog navigation The Listed below are the functions of the various...

Page 1112: ...lename using the File Name key See the Quick Save on page 2683 documentation for more on the automatic file naming algorithm When you press the File Name key the analyzer displays the Alpha Editor Use the knob to choose the letter to add and the front panel Enter key to add the letter to the file name The BK character moves you back and the FW character moves you forward in the filename The Select...

Page 1113: ...invalid register number an error message is generated 222 Data out of range Invalid register label number label is a string from 0 to 30 characters in length If a label exceeds 30 characters an error message is generated 150 String data error Label clipped to 30 characters label of length 0 erases the custom label and restores the default time and date label E g MMEM REG STAT LAB 1 Dependencies N9...

Page 1114: ...g instance Although these 16 registers are the only registers available from the front panel there are 128 state registers available in the instrument Registers 17 128 are only available from the SCPI interface using the SAV command There is one set of 128 state registers in the instrument not one set for each Mode When a state is saved the Mode it was saved from is saved with it then when it is r...

Page 1115: ...y OR A custom name of up to 30 characters entered using the Edit Register Names key OR empty if no prior save operation has been performed to this register Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 11 00 Mass Storage Catalog Remote Command Only Key path SCPI Only Remote Command MMEMory CATalog directory_name Notes The string must be a valid logical path Queries disk usage in...

Page 1116: ... the second parameter specifies the destination The second form has four parameters In this form the first and third parameters specify the source The second and fourth parameters specify the directories The first pair of parameters specifies the source The second pair specifies the destination An error is generated if the source doesn t exist or the destination file already exists This command wi...

Page 1117: ...ile_name data It loads data into the file file_ name data is in 488 2 block format file_name is string data The query form is MMEMory DATA file_name with the response being the associated data in block format Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Mass Storage Make Directory Remote Command Only Key path SCPI Only Remote Command MMEMory MDIRectory directory_name Notes The string must be a valid logi...

Page 1118: ... SCPI Only Remote Command MMEMory RDIRectory directory_name Notes The string must be a valid logical path Removes a directory The directory_name parameter specifies the directory name to be removed All files and directories under the specified directory shall also be removed This command will generate an access denied error if the folder is a restricted folder e g C Windows or is in a restricted f...

Page 1119: ...aming algorithm The default path for all Sequence Files is My Documents Sequences Key Path Save Sequences Mode All Notes Brings up Save As dialog for saving a Sequence Save Type Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Data Export Exporting a data file stores data from the current measurement to mass storage files The Export Menu only contains data types that are supported by the current measurement Since the...

Page 1120: ...d MMEMory STORe RESults string Example MMEM STOR RES MeasR_0000 csv Notes If the save is initiated via SCPI and the file already exists the file will be overwritten The SCPI command exports Spectrum Emission Mask measurement results to the file specified as the parameter in the current path The default path is My Documents current mode data SEM results Using the C drive is strongly discouraged sin...

Page 1121: ...VbwRbwRatio ChanVbwRbwRatioAuto ChanVideoBW ChanVideoBWAuto Electrical Atten Electrical Atten Bypass Electrical Atten State External1 Trigger Delay External1 Trigger Delay State External1 Trigger Level External1 Trigger Slope External2 Trigger Delay External2 Trigger Delay State External2 Trigger Level External2 Trigger Slope FilterAlpha Internal Preamp Internal Preamp Band Line Trigger Delay W CD...

Page 1122: ...MaskBTS OffsetLimitFailMaskMS OffsetLimitRelStartBTS OffsetLimitRelStartMS OffsetLimitRelStopBTS OffsetLimitRelStopMS OffsetMeasBWBTS OffsetMeasBWMS OffsetResolutionBWAutoBTS OffsetResolutionBWAutoMS OffsetResolutionBWBTS OffsetResolutionBWMS OffsetSideBTS OffsetSideMS OffsetStartFrequencyBTS OffsetStartFrequencyMS OffsetStateBTS OffsetStateMS OffsetStopFrequencyBTS OffsetStopFrequencyMS OffsetSwe...

Page 1123: ...MS PeakReference Periodic Timer Period Periodic Timer Sync Source Periodic Timer Trigger Delay Periodic Timer Trigger Delay State PowerReference PSDReference Radio Device RFBurst Trigger Delay RFBurst Trigger Delay State RFBurst Trigger Level Abs RFBurst Trigger Level Rel RFBurst Trigger Level Type RFBurst Trigger Slope RrcFilter SemAverageNumber SemAverageState TotalAtten Trigger Holdoff Trigger ...

Page 1124: ... READ FETCh SEMask1 MeasResult2 MEAS READ FETCh SEMask2 MeasResult3 MEAS READ FETCh SEMask3 continues in the same manner The exported file is in CSV format with a csv extension The Meas Results file when imported into Excel shows the following data MeasResult SA SEM A 10 53 N90 30A 526 ALV ATP B1X B1Y B25 B40 BBA CR3 CRP DCF DDA DP2 DRD EA3 EDP EMC EP1 ERC ESC ESP EXM FSA LFE LNP MAT MPB NFE NUL P...

Page 1125: ...uto TRUE TRUE ChanVbwRbw Ratio 1 1 ChanVbwRbw RatioAuto FALS E FALS E ChanVideoBW 100 000 100 000 ChanVideoBW Auto TRUE TRUE Electrical Atten 0 Electrical Atten Bypass TRUE Electrical Atten State FALS E External1 Trigger Delay 1 00 E 06 External1 Trigger Delay State FALS E External1 Trigger Level 1 2 External1 Trigger Slope Posit ive External2 Trigger Delay 1 00 E 06 External2 FALS W CDMA HSPA Mea...

Page 1126: ...cto r Peak OffsetDetecto rState TRUE OffsetLimitAb sStartBTS 14 14 26 13 13 13 OffsetLimitAb sStartMS 14 14 26 13 13 13 OffsetLimitAb sStopBTS 14 26 26 13 13 13 OffsetLimitAb sStopMS 14 26 26 13 13 13 OffsetLimitFai lMaskBTS ABSo lute ABSo lute ABSo lute ABSolute ABSo lute ABSo lute OffsetLimitFai lMaskMS ABSo lute ABSo lute ABSo lute ABSolute ABSo lute ABSo lute OffsetLimitRel StartBTS 30 30 30 3...

Page 1127: ...encyBTS 251 500 0 271 500 0 351 500 0 4000000 800 000 0 125 000 00 OffsetStartFre quencyMS 251 500 0 271 500 0 351 500 0 4000000 800 000 0 125 000 00 OffsetStateBT S TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE FALS E OffsetStateM S TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE FALS E OffsetStopFre quencyBTS 271 500 0 351 500 0 400 000 0 8000000 125 000 00 150 000 00 OffsetStopFre quencyMS 271 500 0 351 500 0 400 000 0 8000000 125 000 00...

Page 1128: ...E TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE OffsetVideoB WAutoMS TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE OffsetVideoB WBTS 300 300 300 10000 100 00 100 00 OffsetVideoB WMS 300 300 300 10000 100 00 100 00 PeakReferenc e 82 9 957 Periodic Timer Period 0 02 Periodic Timer Sync Source None Periodic Timer Trigger Delay 1 00 E 06 Periodic Timer Trigger Delay State FALS E PowerReferen ce 73 6 966 PSDReferenc e 139 54 Radio Device ...

Page 1129: ...riggerSource Free Video Trigger Delay 1 00 E 06 Video Trigger Delay State FALS E Video Trigger Level 25 Video Trigger Slope Posit ive Video Selection AbsP wrFr eq MeasResult1 Meas Resul t2 Meas Resul t3 Meas Resul t4 MeasResu lt5 Meas Resul t6 Meas Resul t7 Meas Resul t8 Meas Resul t9 Meas Result 10 Meas Result 11 Meas Result 12 999 78 8 935 9 13 999 73 6966 3340998 79 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 ...

Page 1130: ...ion Accuracy measurements In other measurements this key is grayed out Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Save As When you press Save As the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu entitled Save As This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse The Tab and Arrow keys can also be used for dialog navigation See To File on page...

Page 1131: ...d back onto the analyzer but they can be loaded into your PC for use in many popular applications The image to be saved is actually captured when the Save front panel key is pressed and kept in temporary storage to be used if you ask for a Screen Image save When the Screen Image key is pressed a thumbnail of the captured image is displayed as shown below When you continue on into the Save As menu ...

Page 1132: ...age Remote Command MMEMory STORe SCReen THEMe TDColor TDMonochrome FCOLor FMONochrome MMEMory STORe SCReen THEMe Example MMEM STOR SCR THEM TDM Preset 3D Color Is not part of Preset but is reset by Restore Misc Defaults or Restore System Defaults All and survives subsequent running of the modes Readback 3D Color 3D Mono Flat Color Flat Mono Backwards Compatibility Notes In ESA and PSA we offer the...

Page 1133: ...mes Example MMEM STOR SCR THEM FMON Readback Flat Mono Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Save As When you press Save As the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu entitled Save As This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse The Tab and Arrow keys can also be used for dialog navigation See To File on page 2697 in Save St...

Page 1134: ...10 Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement Save 1134 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1135: ...u are in the idle state INIT IMM in ESA PSA Spectrum Analysis Mode does an implied ABORt In some other PSA Modes INIT IMM is ignored if not in the idle state The X Series follows the ESA PSA SA Mode model which may cause some Modes to have compatibility problems Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 More Information See Restart on page 2694 for details on the INIT IMMediate Restart function If you...

Page 1136: ... out on front panel to indicate out of scope Non forceful means user still can change this setting by SCPI but cannot change on front panel When set to OFF will make source leave list sequencer and this setting will be black out and take effect immediately When the RF Output is ON an RF annunciator is displayed in the system settings panel When the RF Output is turned Off the RF annunciator is cle...

Page 1137: ...uency and waveform etc When the source list sequence playing is complete the last step keeps playing and user can use this command to change the list sequence last step s output power The multiport adapter RFIO TX ports and GPS ports cannot ensure power accuracy when power setting is lower than 130dBm this power setting value is defined by the sum of RF Power setting and related amplitude correcti...

Page 1138: ...wer entered power Where reference power equals the original RF Power entered under Source Amplitude RF Power and set as the reference power entered power equals a new value entered under Source Amplitude Amptd Offset In addition the displayed power value is the same as a new value entered under Source Amplitude RF Power If Power Ref is set to ON with a reference value set entering a value under So...

Page 1139: ...h the current output power Preset 0 00 dBm OFF Min 125 00 dBm Max 10 00 dBm Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Amptd Offset Allows you to specify the RF output power offset value When the amplitude offset is set to zero 0 and you set a new offset value positive or negative the displayed amplitude value will change as follows and the RF output power will not change Displayed value output power offset val...

Page 1140: ...er on page 2802 is set to ON the list sequencer controls the source output and this key will be grayed out And this setting will be none forceful grey out on front panel to indicate out of scope Non forceful means user still can change this setting by SCPI but cannot change manually on front panel When setto Off will make source leave list sequencer and this setting will be black out and take effe...

Page 1141: ...utput frequency Couplings The frequency value is coupled to the current channel band and number such that updates to the band and number will update the frequency value to the corresponding absolute frequency Preset 1 00 GHz If license F1A or 5WC is present the default Center Frequency should be 2 412GHz Min 10 00 MHz Max Hardware Dependant Option 503 3 6 GHz Option 504 3 8 GHz Option 506 6 00 GHz...

Page 1142: ...or less than sign to indicate the frequency is above or below the channel number Preset 1 Min Please refer to the tables below for the valid ranges Max Please refer to the tables below for the valid ranges Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM EDGE Channel Number Ranges Band Link Device Range Frequency MHz P GSM Uplink MS 1 n 124 890 0 0 2 n Downlink BS 1 n 124 935 0 0 2 n E GSM Uplink MS 0 n 124 975 n...

Page 1143: ...8 n 5 Band II Downlink 412 n 687 9662 n 9938 n 5 1850 1 n 5 Uplink 12 n 287 350 n 425 n 5 1850 1 n 5 Band III Downlink 1162 n 1513 n 5 1575 Uplink 937 n 1288 n 5 1525 Band IV Downlink 537 n 1738 1887 n 2087 n 5 1805 n 5 1735 1 Uplink 1312 n 1513 1662 n 1862 n 5 1450 n 5 1380 1 Band V Downlink 1007 n 1087 4357 n 4458 n 5 670 1 n 5 Uplink 782 n 862 4132 n 4233 n 5 670 1 n 5 Band VI Downlink 1037 n 1...

Page 1144: ... n 3767 n 5 21 n 5 39 9 Band XIV Downlink 4117 n 4143 4167 n 4192 n 5 63 n 5 72 9 Uplink 3892 n 3918 3942 n 3967 n 5 12 n 5 2 1 Band XIX Downlink 712 n 763 787 n 837 n 5 735 n 5 720 1 Uplink 312 n 363 387 n 437 n 5 770 n 5 755 1 CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Channel Number Ranges Band Link Device Range Frequency MHz US Cellular Uplink MS reverse link 1 N 799 991 N 1023 1024 N 1323 0 030 N 825 000 0 030 N 1023 ...

Page 1145: ... 025 N 1536 479 000 0 020 N 1792 479 000 Downlink BS forward link 1 N 400 472 N 871 1039 N 1473 1536 N 1715 1792 N 2016 0 025 N 1 460 000 0 025 N 472 420 000 0 020 N 1024 461 010 0 025 N 1536 489 000 0 020 N 1792 489 000 IMT 2000 Band Uplink MS reverse link 0 N 1199 1920 000 0 050 N Downlink BS forward link 0 N 1199 2100 000 0 050 N Upper 700 MHz Band Uplink MS reverse link 0 N 240 776 000 0 050 N...

Page 1146: ...Uplink MS reverse link 1 N 400 472 N 871 1536 N 1715 0 025 N 1 450 000 0 025 N 472 410 000 0 025 N 1536 479 000 Downlink BS forward link Downlink BS forward link Downlink BS forward link 1 N 400 472 N 871 1536 N 1715 0 025 N 1 460 000 0 025 N 472 420 000 0 025 N 1536 489 000 800 PAMR Uplink MS reverse link 0 N 239 870 0125 0 025 N Downlink BS forward link 0 N 239 915 0125 0 025 N LTE FDD Channel N...

Page 1147: ...50 4949 1427 9 22750 22750 22949 12 729 5010 5010 5179 699 23010 23010 23179 13 746 5180 5180 5279 777 23180 23180 23279 14 758 5280 5280 5379 788 23280 23280 23379 17 734 5730 5730 5849 704 23730 23730 23849 18 860 5850 5850 5999 815 23850 23850 23999 19 875 6000 6000 6149 830 24000 24000 24149 20 791 6150 6150 6449 832 24150 24150 24449 21 1495 9 6450 6450 6599 1447 9 24450 24450 24599 24 1525 7...

Page 1148: ...300 38650 38650 39649 41 2496 39650 39650 41589 2496 39650 39650 41589 42 3400 41590 41590 43589 3400 41590 41590 43589 43 3600 43590 43590 45589 3600 43590 43590 45589 Note The channel numbers that designate carrier frequencies so close to the operating band edges that the carrier extends beyond the operating band edge shall not be used This implies that the first 7 15 25 50 75 and 100 channel nu...

Page 1149: ...ubclause 5 2 b 1850 1910 MHz 1930 1990 MHz 9254 to 9546 9654 to 9946 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 c 1910 1930 MHz 9554 to 9646 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 d 2570 2620 MHz 12854 to 13096 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 e 2300 2400 MHz 11504 to 11996 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 ...

Page 1150: ...D21 BAND24 BAND25 BAND26 BAND27 BAND28 BAND31 BAND33 BAND34 BAND35 BAND36 BAND37 BAND38 BAND39 BAND40 BAND41 BAND42 BAND43 BAND44 BANDA BANDB BANDC BANDD BANDE BANDF SOURce FREQuency CHANnels BAND Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PGSM Notes Set this setting to NONE will grey out Channel on page 2727 Channel Initial S W Revision A 05 00 None Selects no radio standard for use When you have selected the r...

Page 1151: ...DCS 1800 Selects DCS 1800 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND DCS1800 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 PCS 1900 Selects PCS 1900 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PCS1900 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM 450 Selects GSM 450 as the active ch...

Page 1152: ...0 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND GSM700 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 T GSM 810 Selects T GSM 810 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND T GSM810 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 WCDMA Sets WCDMA as the radio standard for use and accesses th...

Page 1153: ...hannel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDIII Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band IV Selects Band IV as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDIV Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band V Selects Band V as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Rad...

Page 1154: ...e channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDVIII Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band IX Selects Band IX as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDIX Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band X Selects Band X as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup...

Page 1155: ...Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDXIII Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIV Selects Band XIV as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDXIV Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIX Selects Band XIX as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ ...

Page 1156: ...0 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PCS Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Japan Cell Selects Japan Cell as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND JAPAN Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Korean PCS Selects Korean PCS as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR ...

Page 1157: ... SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND UPPER Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Secondary 800 Selects Secondary 800 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND SECOND Initial S W Revision A 05 00 400 Euro PAMR Selects 400 Euro PAMR as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR F...

Page 1158: ...00 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PCS1DOT9G Initial S W Revision A 05 00 AWS Selects AWS as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND AWS Initial S W Revision A 05 00 US 2 5GHz Selects US 2 5 GHz as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN ...

Page 1159: ...y Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 1 Selects BAND 1 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND1 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 2 Selects BAND 2 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND2 Initial S W Revision ...

Page 1160: ...n A 09 50 BAND 6 Selects BAND 6 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND6 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 7 Selects BAND 7 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND7 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 8 Selects BAND 8 as the band for th...

Page 1161: ... 09 50 BAND 11 Selects BAND 11 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND11 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 12 Selects BAND 12 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND12 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 13 Selects BAND 13 as the band f...

Page 1162: ... A 09 50 BAND 18 Selects BAND 18 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND18 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 19 Selects BAND 19 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND19 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 20 Selects BAND 20 as the band...

Page 1163: ... A 09 50 BAND 25 Selects BAND 25 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND25 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 26 Selects BAND 26 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND26 Initial S W Revision A 12 53 BAND 27 Selects BAND 27 as the band...

Page 1164: ...dio standard for use and accesses the LTE TDD specific channel band sub menus Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 33 Selects BAND 33 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND33 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 34 Selects BAND 34 as the band for the current step K...

Page 1165: ...t step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND37 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 38 Selects BAND 38 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND38 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 39 Selects BAND 39 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Rad...

Page 1166: ...quency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND42 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 43 Selects BAND 43 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND43 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 44 Selects BAND 44 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LT...

Page 1167: ... Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDB Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND C Selects BAND C as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDC Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND D Selects BAND D as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN B...

Page 1168: ...ncy Radio Setup Remote Command SOURce RADio BAND LINK DOWN UP SOURce RADio BAND LINK Example SOUR RAD BAND LINK UP Preset DOWN Range DOWN UP Backwards Compatibility SCPI SOURce RADio DEVice BTS MS SOURce RADio DEVice Backwards Compatibility Notes BTS maps to the Downlink frequency MS maps to the Uplink frequency Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Set Reference Frequency This key allows you to set the fr...

Page 1169: ...e and is grayed out when the List Sequencer is turned ON Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Freq Reference This key allows you to toggle the state of the frequency reference When the frequency reference state is ON an annunciator is displayed on the main source view to indicate this state to the user When you use a frequency reference the signal generator outputs a frequency that is set relative to the ...

Page 1170: ... will change as follows and the RF output frequency will not change Displayed value output frequency offset value Where output frequency equals the original frequency entered under Source Frequency Frequency offset value equals the value entered under Source Frequency Freq Offset When the frequency offset is set to a value other than zero 0 and you enter a new frequency value under Source Frequenc...

Page 1171: ...em settings panel When the ARB is turned Off the MOD annunciator is cleared Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB STATe ON OFF 1 0 SOURce RADio ARB STATe Example SOUR RAD ARB OFF SOUR RAD ARB Notes If the ARB is ON a user then loads or deletes another file to ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The wav...

Page 1172: ...or more information about this adjustment Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB WAVeform string SOURce RADio ARB WAVeform Example SOUR RAD ARB WAV test_waveform bin Notes If intended waveform is not in the memory yet then issuing this command by SCPI will invoke ARB loading operation first which involves a delay of unpredictable length So this command...

Page 1173: ...Setup ARB Select Waveform Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Load Segment To ARB Memory Allows you to load the selected file into ARB memory On the front panel you select the file for loading to the ARB memory by highlighting the desired file in the list Using the SCPI command you specify the file name on the HDD NVWFM none volatile storage MSUS Mass Storage Unit Specifier is supported in the memory sub...

Page 1174: ...censes do not present on the instrument In this case a GUI only warning message 800 Operation complete Loaded filename successfully but no license required licenses installed User can install required licenses according to required licenses string to license it or multi pack license it Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Load All To ARB Memory Allows you to load all the segment files within the currently...

Page 1175: ...emory for playback of a waveform sequence or a list sequence Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Notes No remote command SCPIfront panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Default Directory Allows you to change the default directory It is used as a search location for waveform segments that are required to be loaded into ARB memory for playback of a waveform s...

Page 1176: ... Off If the ARB is ON and you load a file to ARB memory or delete a file from ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The waveform will be replayed after the ARB operation is finished Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Delete All From ARB Memory Allows you to remove all segments from ARB playback memory Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Se...

Page 1177: ...uery ARB Memory Full File List Remote Command Only Queries the test set for the string list of waveform segments in the ARB memory It returns a string list for waveform segment names in the ARB memory Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB FCATalog Example SOUR RAD ARB FCATalog Notes The return data is in the following format integer memory used integer memory free integer file count in ARB memory string...

Page 1178: ...A 05 00 Run Time Scaling Allows you to adjust the run time scaling value The run time scaling value is applied in real time while the waveform is playing Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB ARB Setup Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB RSCaling real SOURce RADio ARB RSCaling Example SOUR RAD ARB RSC 100 00 Notes This setting cannot be set in E6640A Grey out on menu and the value is fixed at 70 00 Dep...

Page 1179: ... Type Allows access to the trigger type sub menus The setting for trigger type determines the behavior of the waveform when it plays Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE CONTinuous SINGle SADVance GATE SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE CONT SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE Notes Gated trigger type will be implemented at a later release ...

Page 1180: ...gers Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Trigger Type Continuous Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE CONT TRIG Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Reset Run Sets Reset and Run as the trigger response for the continuous trigger type Reset and Run sets the waveform generator to play a waveform sequence or segment continuously when the first trigger is received Subsequent triggers reset the waveform sequence or...

Page 1181: ...ial S W Revision A 05 00 Buffered Trigger Selects Buffered Trigger as the trigger response for single trigger type Buffered Trigger sets the waveform generator to play a waveform sequence or segment once when a trigger is received If a trigger is received during playback the waveform generator plays the sequence or segment to the end then plays the sequence or segment once more Key Path Source Mod...

Page 1182: ... Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE SADVance TYPE SINGle CONTinuous SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE SADVance TYPE Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE SADV SING Preset CONTinuous Range Single Continuous Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Single Selects Single as the trigger response for Segment Advance trigger type With single selected once a trigger is received a segment is played once If a trigger i...

Page 1183: ...lected the waveform is triggered when you press the front panel Trigger key Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Trigger Source Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIGger KEY Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Bus Sets the current trigger source to Bus Selecting Bus trigger source enables triggering over GPIB LAN or USB using the SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger INITiate command Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Trigger S...

Page 1184: ...quence Pressing this key changes the central view area to display the Waveform Sequence Creation and Editing view Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Notes No remote command SCPIfront panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Current Segment Specifies the selected sequence segment that will be affected by the menu functions Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences ...

Page 1185: ... D varb Pressing this key changes the current view to the Waveform Management View Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Load Segment To ARB Memory Allows you to load the selected file into ARB memory On the front panel you select the file for loading to the ARB memory by highlighting the desired file in the list Using the SCPI command you specify the fi...

Page 1186: ...ignal Studio waveform wfm which contains invalid waveform header an error is generated If the ARB is ON when you load afile to ARB memory or delete a file from ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The waveform will be replayed after the ARB operation is finished ARB can be loaded into ARB memory even required licenses do not present ...

Page 1187: ...lect the new directory of interest The current directory is used for manually loading waveform segments into ARB memory for playback and as a search location for waveform segments that are required to be loaded into ARB memory for playback of a waveform sequence or a list sequence Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Notes No remote command SCPIfront panel onl...

Page 1188: ...ven if ARB state is On the selected waveform will not be played In this case if the selected waveform is not used in List Sequence it can be deleted and the ARB state is turned Off If the ARB is ON and you load a file to ARB memory or delete a file from ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The waveform will be replayed after the ARB ...

Page 1189: ...orm Sequences Build New Sequence Insert New Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Load All To ARB Memory This key functions the same as Load All To ARB Memory on page 2829 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Insert New Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Change Directory This key functions the sa...

Page 1190: ...From ARB Memory on page 2831 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Insert New Waveform Segment in ARB Memory Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Query ARB Memory File List Remote Command Only This command functions the same as Query ARB Memory File List Remote Command Only on page 2763 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Edit Selected Waveform Allows access...

Page 1191: ...W Revision A 05 00 Marker 2 Allows you to enable or disable marker 2 for the currently selected waveform For a waveform sequence you can enable and disable markers on a per segment basis allowing you to output markers from some waveform segments within the sequence but not for others Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Edit Selected Waveform Notes No remote c...

Page 1192: ...Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Delete Segment Allows you to delete the selected segment from the waveform sequence Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Notes No remote command front panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Save Sequence Pressing this key displays the Save As dialog The sequence name is passed to the save as dialog to use as the filename for savin...

Page 1193: ... M2 M3 M4 M1M2 M1M3 M1M4 M2M3 M2M4 M3M4 M1M2M3 M1M2M4 M1M3M4 M2M3M4 M1M2M3M4 ALL For additional description of each item see Notes below For Setup SCPI on page 1193 For Setup SCPI SOURce RADio ARB SEQuence MWAVeform filename For additional description of each item see Notes For Query SCPI on page 1194 below Example For setup SOUR RAD ARB SEQ NVWFM testSeq1 seq NVWFM wfmSegment1 wfm 10 M2M3M4 NVWFM...

Page 1194: ...not NVWFM or have an error in the waveform sequence file path an error is generated Notes Error Checks for Query SCPI command Continued If the specified waveform sequence file name suffix is not seq error is generated If you use an unsupported MSUS that is not NVWFM or have an error in the waveform segment file path an error is generated If the first specified waveform file cannot be found an erro...

Page 1195: ...nly Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Waveform Utilities Allows you access to the waveform utilities sub menus Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Multi Pack Licenses Allows you access to the Multi Pack License sub menus Pressing this key also changes the central view area to display the Multi Pack License Management view On modular instrument like E6630A or E6640A multi p...

Page 1196: ... Agilent signal sources You can use either one of them Since adding a waveform segment to a Multi Pack license causes the license slot to enter the trial period of only 48 hours pressing this key causes a confirmation dialog to be displayed to ensure you do want to add the waveform segment to the Multi Pack If you attempt to license a waveform that is already licensed using another slot an error i...

Page 1197: ...ter a waveform file has been loaded it needs to be loaded again Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB LOAD string Example SOUR RAD ARB LOAD D VARB testwaveform bin or SOUR RAD ARB LOAD NVWFM testwaveform bin Notes Because loading the file involves a delay of unpredictable length this command should be followed by the query OPC wh...

Page 1198: ...arb Notes string specifies the directory on the HDD to load the files into ARB memory from When in Sequence Analyzer mode and Include Source is Yes an attempt to load all files from a directory to ARB memory is rejected with an error When Include Source is No and there is insufficient free ARB memory to load all the waveforms when the ARB memory is full the copy ceases and an error is generated If...

Page 1199: ...s on Hard Disk on page 2828 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Add Waveform Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Load Segment To ARB Memory This key functions the same as Load Segment To ARB Memory on page 2828 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Add Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 0...

Page 1200: ...icense Waveform Add view Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Replace Waveform Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform REPLace int string or SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform REPLace int string Example SYST LKEY WAV REPL 1 myotherwaveform wfm or SYST LIC WAV REPL 1 myotherwaveform wfm Notes The second SCPI SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform REPLace is provided to be consi...

Page 1201: ...l To ARB Memory on page 2829 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Replace Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Change Directory This key functions the same as Change Directory on page 2830 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Replace Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prio...

Page 1202: ...00 Lock Waveform in Slot If the selected slot is in the trial state or the lock required state the waveform that occupies the slot is locked and permanently licensed Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform LOCK int or SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform LOCK int Example SYST LKEY WAV LOCK 1 or SYST LIC WAV LOCK 1 Notes The second SC...

Page 1203: ...nput slot number exceeds total available slot number Nonexistent is returned Range Locked Available Trail LockRequired Nonexistent Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Slots Free Query Remote Command Only Returns the number of license slots free Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform FREE or SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform FREE Example SYST LKEY WAV FREE or SYST LIC WAV FREE Notes The second SCPI SYSTem LICens...

Page 1204: ...er less than or equals 0 an error is generated Result type is string If input slot number exceeds total available slot number Nonexistent is returned If no waveform stored in the specified slot then empty string is returned Initial S W Revision A 12 00 Slot Waveform Unique ID Query Remote Command Only Returns the waveform unique ID of the specified slot Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform UID int ...

Page 1205: ... Signal Studio waveform has a unique id recorded in header So if the unique ids are same that means they are same one waveform So besides SCPI to query locked waveform name list also provide a SCPI to query locked waveform unique id list Initial S W Revision A 11 00 Marker Utilities Allows access to the marker utilities sub menus Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Ma...

Page 1206: ...tup ARB Marker Utilities Marker Polarity Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB MPOLarity MARKer2 POSitive NEGative SOURce RADio ARB MPOLarity MARKer2 Example SOUR RAD ARB MPOL MARK2 NEG Dependencies When a new waveform is selected for playback the settings contained within the associated waveform header file are applied to the ARB The marker polarity is one of the values stored within the header file If...

Page 1207: ... stored within the header file If the newly selected waveform file has an associated header file the marker polarity is updated with the value from the header file The marker polarity will remain unchanged if the newly selected waveform does not have an associated header file Preset Pos Range Neg Pos Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Marker Routing Allows access to the marker routing sub menus which al...

Page 1208: ...pulse RF blanking setting is updated with the value from the header file The pulse RF blanking setting will remain unchanged if the newly selected waveform does not have an associated header file Range None M1 M2 M3 M4 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 None Sets no marker to be used for the pulse RF blanking function essentially turning the RF blanking function off Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB ...

Page 1209: ...ative polarity this is when there are no maker points Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Marker Utilities Marker Routing Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB MDEStination ALCHold NONE M1 M2 M3 M4 SOURce RADio ARB MDEStination ALCHold Example SOUR RAD ARB MDES ALCH NONE Dependencies When a new waveform is selected for playback the settings contained within the associated waveform header file are appli...

Page 1210: ...RB Marker Utilities Marker Routing ALC Hold Example SOUR RAD ARB MDES PULS M3 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Marker 4 Sets marker 4 to be used for the ALC hold function Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Marker Utilities Marker Routing ALC Hold Example SOUR RAD ARB MDES PULS M4 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Header Utilities Allows access to the header utilities sub menu Pressing this key also cause...

Page 1211: ...h Signal Studio waveform contains a unique waveform ID which recorded in the header This command allows you to query the unique waveform ID from the header This is a SCPI only command User can also checkError Reference source not found for waveform unique ID display Remote Command MMEMory HEADer ID file name Example MMEM HEAD ID test wfm query the waveform already loaded into the ARB memory MMEM H...

Page 1212: ... the amplitude modulation Turning AM on when another modulation format is already on results in the previous modulation format being turned off and the generation of an error Key Path Source Modulation Setup AM Remote Command SOURce AM STATe SOURce AM STATe Example SOUR AM STAT OFF Preset Off Range On Off Initial S W Revision A 05 00 AM Depth Allows you to set the amplitude modulation depth in per...

Page 1213: ...ulation Key Path Source Modulation Setup Initial S W Revision A 05 00 FM Enables or disables the frequency modulation Turning FM on when another modulation format is already on results in the previous modulation format being turned off and the generation of an error Key Path Source Modulation Setup FM Remote Command SOURce FM STATe SOURce FM STATe Example SOUR FM STAT OFF Preset Off Range On Off I...

Page 1214: ...ple SOUR FM INT FREQ 40 0 Hz Preset 400 0 Hz Min 10 Hz Max 40 kHz Initial S W Revision A 05 00 PM Allows access to the menu for configuring the phase modulation Key Path Source Modulation Setup Initial S W Revision A 05 00 PM Enables or disables the phase modulation Turning PM on when another modulation format is already on results in the previous modulation format being turned off and the generat...

Page 1215: ...z Min 10 Hz Max 40 kHz Initial S W Revision A 05 00 List Sequencer Allows you access to the sub menus for configuring the list sequencer List sequences allows you to enter frequencies and amplitudes at unequal intervals in nonlinear ascending descending or random order Each step within the list can also include its own waveform file for playback step duration trigger event and trigger output The c...

Page 1216: ...ls the output of the source Couplings When in Sequence Analyzer mode and the list sequencer state is Off Include Source is forced to No and the Include Source key is grayed out When in Sequence Analyzer mode and the list sequencer state is On Include Source is available to set And an ARB memory related operation like load or delete will be rejected Preset Off Range On Off Initial S W Revision A 05...

Page 1217: ...rce List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST NUMBer STEPs integer SOURce LIST NUMBer STEPs Example SOUR LIST NUMB STEP 1 Notes Increasing the number of steps creates additional steps at the end of the list with all the settings within the steps set to their default values Decreasing the number of steps removes steps from the end of the list The settings within the removed ste...

Page 1218: ...Revision A 05 00 Delete Step Allows you to delete the current step Deleting a step will automatically decrease the Step Count parameter by 1 If sequence only has one step left delete step will be rejected and popup error 221 Setting conflict Cannot delete current step minimum number of steps reached Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Notes No remote command Front Panel key only If...

Page 1219: ... Revision A 05 00 Internal Sets the trigger input for the current step to Internal Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Step Trigger Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET INP TRIG INT Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Manual Trigger Key Sets the trigger input for the current step to Manual Trigger Key Any step in the sequence set to Manual will cause the seque...

Page 1220: ...A 09 40 Notes Note When on E6640A trigger 2 is a bi directional trigger port So when trigger 2 has been configured as OUTPUT type choosing External 2 as the input trigger for the current step will generate error Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Transition Time Allows you to specify the transition time for the current step The transition time is the amount of time allowed for the source to settle at th...

Page 1221: ...W Revision A 05 00 Radio Setup Allows you access to the sub menus for setting up the radio standard band and radio band link direction for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Notes No remote command front panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Radio Standard Allows access to the sub menus for selecting the radio standard and the associated radio band for use in th...

Page 1222: ...evision A 05 00 GSM EDGE Pressing this key once selects GSM EDGE as the radio standard and the current GSM EDGE band as the active channel band Pressing this key again allows access to the sub menus for selecting a different GSM EDGE band Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 05 00 P GSM Selects P GSM as the band for the current step ...

Page 1223: ...t Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM 450 Selects GSM 450 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM 480 Selects GSM 480 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio S...

Page 1224: ... allows access to the sub menus for selecting a different WCDMA band Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band I Selects Band I as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band II Selects Band II as the band for the current st...

Page 1225: ... Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band VII Selects Band VII as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band VIII Selects Band VIII as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio St...

Page 1226: ... Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIII Selects Band XIII as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIV Selects Band XIV as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio St...

Page 1227: ...up Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 US PCS Selects US PCS as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Japan Cell Selects Japan Cell as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEV...

Page 1228: ...l S W Revision A 05 00 Secondary 800 Selects Secondary 800 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 400 Euro PAMR Selects 400 Euro PAMR as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revisi...

Page 1229: ...andard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 US 2 5GHz Selects US 2 5 GHz as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 700 Public Safety Selects 700 Public Safety as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA...

Page 1230: ... A 09 50 BAND 2 Selects BAND 2 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 3 Selects BAND 3 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 4 Selects BAND 4 as the band for the current step Ke...

Page 1231: ...List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 9 Selects BAND 9 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 10 Selects BAND 10 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard L...

Page 1232: ...e List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 17 Selects BAND 17 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 18 Selects BAND 18 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standa...

Page 1233: ...e List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 25 Selects BAND 25 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 26 Selects BAND 26 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standa...

Page 1234: ...ard for use and accesses the LTE TDD specific channel band sub menus Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 33 Selects BAND 33 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND33 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 34 Selects BAND 34 as the band for the current step Key Path S...

Page 1235: ...t step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND37 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 38 Selects BAND 38 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND38 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 39 Selects BAND 39 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Rad...

Page 1236: ...e Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND42 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 43 Selects BAND 43 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND43 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 44 Selects BAND 44 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setu...

Page 1237: ... Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDB Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND C Selects BAND C as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDC Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND D Selects BAND D as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN B...

Page 1238: ...will calculate the downlink frequency according to a downlink formula together with selected channel band and channel number Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup RADio BAND LINK DOWN UP SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup RADio BAND LINK Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET RAD BAND LINK UP SOUR LIST STEP2 SET RAD BAND LINK Notes SCP...

Page 1239: ...ey Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup CNFRequency double SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup CNFRequency Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET CNFR 1GHz SOUR LIST STEP2 SET CNFR Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 This SCPI is used to setup channel number or frequency setting according to current Radio Band setting If Radio Band is NONE then it s...

Page 1240: ...exists power setting lower than 130dBm on MPA GPS ports then popup warning message These are only warning messages and check is performed when RF is ON Notes The Min and Max value here defined UI settable amplitude range This range is larger than actual amplitude range with level accuracy defined in spec Dependencies The RF power is dependent on the RF output port and frequency such that the curre...

Page 1241: ... name Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 If the selected waveform contains header which contains ARB play parameters source list sequence will automatically apply header settings of the selected waveform in that step Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Continue Previous Sets the current step to continue with playback of the waveform from the previous step When continuing the previous waveform the ARB ...

Page 1242: ...ither NVWFM MSUS or specifying a full path For more information see Memory Subsystem Remote Command Only If a file of the same name already exists within ARB memory it is overwritten If you wish to load two segments of the same name you must rename one of the segments before loading it into ARB memory To rename a segment you can either use Windows File Explorer or the MMEMory COPY command NOTE Whe...

Page 1243: ... of the same name already exists within ARB memory it is overwritten If you wish to load two segments of the same name you must rename one of the segments before loading it into ARB memory To rename a segment you can either use Windows File Explorer or the MEMory COPY command NOTE When a waveform file is loaded to ARB memory burst timing adjustments are made automatically based on whether or not a...

Page 1244: ...search location for selecting waveforms using SCPI Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB DEFault DIRectory string SOURce RADio ARB DEFault DIRectory Example SOUR RAD ARB DEF DIR D ArbFiles SOUR RAD ARB DEF DIR State Saved Persistent survives a power cycle and a preset but not saved in the instrument state Initial S W Revision A 0...

Page 1245: ...lows you to remove all segments from ARB playback memory Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments in ARB Memory Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB DELete ALL Example SOUR RAD ARB DELete ALL Notes When in Sequence Analyzer mode and Include Source is Yes an attempt to delete all files from ARB memory is rejected with an error When Include Source is No and you attempt to delete all ...

Page 1246: ...uencer Setup Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Default Directory This key functions the same as Default Directory on page 2830 Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Segments in ARB Memory This key functions the same as Segments in ARB Memory on page 2830 Key Path Source List Sequen...

Page 1247: ...TEP2 SET DUR TYPE TIME SOUR LIST STEP2 SET DUR TYPE Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 Notes If Step Duration is set to Time or Play Count for the last step the last step of ARB keeps playing as if set to Continuous until the set Time has expired or until the Play Count setting is reached However you can query Error Reference source not found Source Sweeping Condition Message to find out if the...

Page 1248: ...ime and Continuous Abort according to current Duration Type setting is Play Count or Duraton Time or Continuous Abort If current Duration Type is Continuous then popup error 221 Settings conflict Cannot accept time or count input when step duration type is Continuous on step Notes If Duration Time is set for the last step the last step of ARB keeps playing as if set to Continuous after set time ex...

Page 1249: ...will occur on both Internal and External2 paths Select Off will turn off trigger output Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup OUTPut TRIGger ON OFF 1 0 SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup OUTPut TRIGger Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET OUTP TRIG ON SOUR LIST STEP2 SET OUTP TRIG Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 Preset Off Range On Off Ini...

Page 1250: ...age 2824 5 Frequency Channel Number freq chan num specifies the frequency in Hz or the channel number for the step The channel number and frequency are combined as one parameter that represents the frequency or channel number depending on the radio band setting If the radio band is set to NONE this value is interpreted as a frequency value in Hz If the radio band is set to a valid band this value ...

Page 1251: ...Rce LIST SETup INPut TRIGger enum enum enum SOURce LIST SETup INPut TRIGger Example SOUR LIST SET INP TRIG IMM INT EXT2 SOUR LIST SET INP TRIG Notes The command is to setup below parameter array of whole list sequence Step Trigger enum specifies the input trigger for the step For details of the valid types of step trigger see Step Trigger on page 2804 If input parameter number exceeds the step num...

Page 1252: ...803 Number of Steps As a step is setup the value entered run through several levels of validation R e m o t e C o m m a n d SOURce LIST SETup RADio BAND enum enum enum SOURce LIST SETup RADio BAND E x a m p l e SOUR LIST SET RAD BAND PGSM EGSM RGSM SOUR LIST SET RAD BAND N o t e s The command is to setup below parameter array of whole list sequence Radio Band enum specifies the radio band for the ...

Page 1253: ...D36 BAND37 BAND38 BAND39 BAND40 BAN D41 BAND42 BAND43 BANDA BANDB BANDC BANDD BANDE BANDF D e p e n d e n c i e s The range is 1 to 1000 which is determined by the number of steps you have configured For details see Number of Steps on page 2803 I n i t i a l S W R e v i s i o n A 09 40 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1253 ...

Page 1254: ...ncy or Channel Number parameter array of the whole List Sequencer at one time The number of array is same as step number defined in Number of Steps on page 2803 Number of Steps As a step is setup the value entered run through several levels of validation Remote Command SOURce LIST SETup CNFRequency double double double SOURce LIST SETup CNFRequency Example SOUR LIST SET CNFR 1GHz 100MHz 100MHz SOU...

Page 1255: ...umber will be updated Dependencies The range is 1 to 1000 which is determined by the number of steps you have configured For details see Number of Steps on page 2803 Initial S W Revision A 09 40 Step Configuration of Waveform parameter list Remote Command Only This SCPI command is to configure Waveform parameter array of the whole List Sequencer at one time The number of array is same as step numb...

Page 1256: ...tep Duration enum specifies the duration of the step The duration can be specified to be either time or play count of the ARB file associated with the step or continuous If Waveform is set to CW this value cannot be set to Play Count and an error will be generated If continuous is selected the following Time or Count value is ignored For further details of this setting see Step Duration on page 28...

Page 1257: ...arameter list Remote Command Only This SCPI command is to configure Output Trigger parameter array of the whole List Sequencer at one time The number of array is same as step number defined in Number of Steps on page 2803 Number of Steps As a step is setup the value entered run through several levels of validation Remote Command SOURce LIST SETup OUTPut TRIGger bool bool bool SOURce LIST SETup OUT...

Page 1258: ...fstep DATamarker Initial S W Revision A 14 00 BeginningOfStep Sets the output trigger type as BeginningOfStep for the whole source sequence Key Path Source List Sequencer Trigger Type Example SOUR LIST TRIG TYP BEG Notes SCPI is supported after A 14 00 Initial S W Revision A 14 00 DataMarker Sets the output trigger type as DataMarker for the whole source sequence When DataMarker is selected which ...

Page 1259: ...ker Example SOUR LIST TRIG TYPE MARK M3 Notes SCPI is supported after A 14 00 Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Marker 4 Sets the output trigger maker routing to Marker 4 for DataMarker in the whole source sequence Key Path Source List Sequencer Trigger Type DataMarker Example SOUR LIST TRIG TYPE MARK M4 Notes SCPI is supported after A 14 00 Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Manual Trigger Now Pressing this...

Page 1260: ...s Query only SCPI Returning 1 if list sequence has been initiated successfully returning 0 if not Once get 0 you can use SYST ERR to query what error happened Just like OPC this command can be blocked until event status IsSourceSweeping happens and then returns Doing so can help user s script query armed status only once during the time interval of the initiation As an ancillary SCPI of existing S...

Page 1261: ...cludes SEM measurement to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Couplings If Auto Scaling is set to On this value is automatically determined by the measurement result When you set this value manually Auto Scaling automatically changes to Off Preset 1 0 GHz State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 1000 GHz Max 1000 GHz Default Unit Hz Initial S W Revision A 11 00 Scale Div Sets t...

Page 1262: ...DD LTEATDD Remote Command DISPlay SEMask VIEW 1 WINDow 1 TRACe X SCALe RPOSition LEFT CENTer RIGHt DISPlay SEMask VIEW 1 WINDow 1 TRACe X SCALe RPOSition Example DISP SEM VIEW WIND TRAC X RPOS LEFT DISP SEM VIEW WIND TRAC X RPOS Notes You must be in a mode that includes the SEM measurement to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Preset CENTer State Saved Yes Saved in instrument s...

Page 1263: ... Scaling is On and the Restart front panel key is pressed this function automatically determines the scale per division and reference values based on the measurement results When you set a value to either Scale Div or Ref Value manually Auto Scaling automatically changes to Off Preset 1 State Saved Yes Saved in instrument state Range On Off Initial S W Revision A 11 00 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Appl...

Page 1264: ...ing them with other events Gate setup parameters are the same for all measurements they do not change as you change measurements Settings like these are called Meas Global and are unaffected by Meas Preset Key Path Sweep Control Scope Meas Global Readback The state and method of Gate as Off FFT or On FFT Note that for measurements that only support gated FFT the method is nonetheless read back but...

Page 1265: ...TE STATe ESA compatibility Backwards Compatibility Notes In ESA Trig Delay On and Gate On could not be active at the same time This dependency does not exist in PSA or in the X Series Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Gate View On Off Turning on Gate View in the Swept SA measurement provides a single window gate view display Turning on Gate View in other measurements shows the split screen Gat...

Page 1266: ... is set to Zero Span Gate View automatically turns off whenever a Span other than Zero is selected Gate View automatically turns off if you press the Last Span key while in Gate View and the instrument returns to the Span it was in before entering Gate View even if that is Zero Span When Gate View is turned on the sweep time used is the gate view sweep time This is set according to the rules in se...

Page 1267: ...ssion Mask Measurement Sweep Control A sample of the Gate View screen in other measurements is shown in the following graphic This example is for the ACP measurement W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1267 ...

Page 1268: ...e position of the green lines by adjusting the gate length and the gate delay These lines update in the Gate View window as the active function changes even if the window is not being updated In Gated FFT their location is relative to the left edge of the screen A blue line is displayed showing the delay reference that is the reference point for the Gate Delay within the Zero Span window The blue ...

Page 1269: ...me are required or no units otherwise an invalid suffix error message will be generated See error 131 Preset 0 ms State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0 Max 500 ms Initial S W Revision A 10 00 Gate Delay Controls the length of time from the time the gate condition goes True until the gate is turned on Key Path Sweep Control Gate Remote Command SENSe SWEep EGATe DELay time SENSe SWEep EGATe DE...

Page 1270: ...nits otherwise an invalid suffix error message will be generated Preset 461 6 us WiMAX OFDMA 50 us GSM EDGE 200 us WLAN 1 54 ms WLAN 32 us State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 100 ns Max 5 s Backwards Compatibility SCPI SENSe SWEep TIME GATE LENGth ESA compatibility Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Gate Source The menus under the Gate Source key are the same as those under the Trigger ke...

Page 1271: ...nal as the trigger The Video trigger condition is met when the video signal the filtered and detected version of the input signal including both RBW and VBW filtering crosses the video trigger level When the detector selected for all active traces is the average detector the video signal for triggering does not include any VBW filtering The video trigger level is shown as a labeled line on the dis...

Page 1272: ... swept triggering Amplitude Corrections are not taken into account by the Video Trig Level For example if you have given yourself effective gain with an amplitude correction factor the Video Trigger will not fire until you have dropped the trigger line that far below the displayed signal level rather than simply dropping it down to the displayed signal level Note that other corrections specificall...

Page 1273: ... state Backwards Compatibility Notes In ESA PSA the Trigger Slope was global to all triggers In the X Series the slope can be set individually for each Trigger Source For backward compatibility the global SLOPe command updates all instances of trigger slope VID LINE EXT1 EXT2 TV RFB The query returns the trigger slope setting of the currently selected trigger source Initial S W Revision Prior to A...

Page 1274: ...1 LEV 0 4 V Couplings This same level is used for the Ext1 trigger source in the Trigger menu for the Ext1 selection in the Periodic Timer sync source in the Trigger menu and in the Gate Source menu and also for the Ext1 selection in the Gate Source menu Preset 1 2 V State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 5 V Max 5 V Default Unit V Backwards Compatibility SCPI TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal LEVel Fo...

Page 1275: ...se the Zero Span Delay Comp On Off feature to enable or disable zero span delay compensation Key Path Trigger External 1 Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal1 DELay COMPensation OFF ON 0 1 TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal1 DELay COMPensation Example TRIG EXT1 DEL COMP ON Dependencies No effect except in zero span but not locked out in nonzero spans Blanked in modes that do not support zero span measu...

Page 1276: ... generated if no trigger signal appears after approximately 2 sec This message goes away when a trigger signal appears Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 03 00 Trigger Level Sets the value where the external 2 trigger input will trigger a new sweep measurement Key Path Trigger External 2 Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal2 LEVel TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal2 LEVel ...

Page 1277: ...ses it is desirable to eliminate this delay so that trigger events line up exactly with the zero time point in zero span You can use the Zero Span Delay Comp On Off feature to enable or disable zero span delay compensation Key Path Trigger External 2 Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal2 DELay COMPensation OFF ON 0 1 TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal2 DELay COMPensation Example TRIG EXT2 DEL COMP ON D...

Page 1278: ...bsolute Trigger Level Sets the absolute trigger level for the RF burst envelope When using the External Mixing path the Absolute Trigger Level is uncalibrated because the factory default was set to accommodate the expected IF levels for the RF path Key Path Trigger RF Burst Scope Meas Global Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst LEVel ABSolute ampl TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst LEVel ABSolute Example...

Page 1279: ...he advanced triggering hardware required the relative burst trigger function is implemented in software in some measurements and is unavailable in other measurements When implemented in software the relative RF Burst trigger function is implemented as follows 1 The measurement starts with the absolute RF Burst trigger setting If it cannot get a trigger with that level auto trigger fires and the ac...

Page 1280: ...your analyzer and the current measurement does not support Relative triggering Preset 6 dB GSM 25 dB State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 45 dB Max 0 dB Default Unit dB or dBc Backwards Compatibility SCPI TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst LEVel This legacy command is aliased to TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst LEVel RELative because the PSA had ONLY relative burst triggering Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02...

Page 1281: ...l appears after approximately 2 sec This message goes away when a trigger signal appears Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Periodic Timer Triggering This feature selects the internal periodic timer signal as the trigger Trigger occurrences are set by the Periodic Timer parameter which is modified by the Sync Source and Offset The figure below shows the action of the periodic timer trigger Befo...

Page 1282: ...d trigger event The periodic timer continues to run and triggers continue to occur with a periodicity determined by the analyzer time base The timer output labeled late event will drift away from its ideal time due to imperfect matching between the time base of the signal being measured and the time base of the analyzer and also because of imperfect setting of the period parameter But the synchron...

Page 1283: ...arameter either from the knob or the SCPI adjust command serves to delay the timing of the trigger event Key Path Trigger Periodic Timer Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence FRAMe OFFSet time TRIGger SEQuence FRAMe OFFSet Example TRIG FRAM OFFS 1 2 ms Notes The front panel interface for example the knob and this command adjust the accumulated offset which is shown on the active function display However...

Page 1284: ...ise delay is used see section Trig Delay on page 357 An increase in the offset parameter either from the knob or the SCPI adjust command serves to delay the timing of the trigger event Notes The front panel interface for example the knob and the TRIG FRAM OFFS command adjust the accumulated offset which is shown on the active function display However the actual amount sent to the hardware is the d...

Page 1285: ...source in a conditional branch setup menu accessed from the Sync Source menu Note that these settings match those in the Trigger and Gate Source menus that is each trigger source has only one value of level and slope regardless of which menu it is accessed from Key Path Trigger Periodic Timer Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence FRAMe SYNC EXTernal1 EXTernal2 RFBurst OFF TRIGger SEQuence FRAMe SYNC Exa...

Page 1286: ...nd Point Trigger is set to External 1 State Saved Saved in instrument state Status Bits OPC dependencies The Status Operation Register bit 5 Waiting for Trigger is set at the same time as the Sweeping or Measuring bit is set It is cleared when the trigger actually occurs that is after the trigger event occurs and all the applicable trigger criteria have been met A corresponding pop up message Wait...

Page 1287: ... Trigger menu and for the period timer sync source in the Trigger menu and in the Gate Source menu Preset POSitive State Saved Saved in instrument state Backwards Compatibility SCPI TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal SLOPe For backward compatibility the parameter EXTernal is mapped to EXTernal1 Backwards Compatibility SCPI TRIGger SEQuence FRAMe EXTernal1 SLOPe Backwards Compatibility Notes The legacy TRIG...

Page 1288: ... applicable trigger criteria have been met A corresponding pop up message Waiting for trigger is generated if no trigger signal appears after approximately 2 sec This message goes away when a trigger signal appears Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 03 00 Trigger Level Sets the value where the external 2 trigger input will trigger a new sweep measurement Key Path Trig...

Page 1289: ...y selected accesses the RF Burst trigger setup menu In some models a variety of burst trigger circuitry is available resulting in various available burst trigger bandwidths The analyzer automatically chooses the appropriate trigger path based on the hardware configuration and other settings of the analyzer Key Path Trigger Example TRIG SOUR RFB Swept SA measurement TRIG meas SOUR RFB Measurements ...

Page 1290: ...igger will not fire until you have set the trigger level that far below the displayed signal level rather than simply to the displayed signal level This is only true for Amplitude Corrections not External Gain or Ref Level Offset functions If mode is Bluetooth the default value is 50 dBm Couplings This same level is used for the RF Burst trigger source in the Trigger menu for the RF Burst selectio...

Page 1291: ...Gger SEQuence SLOPe command affects the slopes for the VID LINE EXT1 EXT2 and RFB triggers Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Sync Holdoff Sync Holdoff specifies the duration that the sync source signal must be kept false before the transition to true to be recognized as the sync timing The periodic timer phase is aligned when the sync source signal becomes true after the Holdoff time is satisf...

Page 1292: ...ision A 02 00 Auto Trig Sets the time that the analyzer will wait for the trigger conditions to be met If they are not met after that much time then the analyzer is triggered anyway Key Path Trigger Auto Holdoff Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence ATRigger time TRIGger SEQuence ATRigger TRIGger SEQuence ATRigger STATe OFF ON 0 1 TRIGger SEQuence ATRigger STATe Example TRIG ATR STAT ON TRIG ATR 100 ms ...

Page 1293: ... Feature not supported for this Input is displayed If the SCPI command is sent the error Settings conflict Feature not supported for this Input is generated Preset Off 100 ms State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0 s Max 0 5 s Default Unit s Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Gate Preset Remote Command Only Presets the time gated spectrum analysis capability This command sets gate parameter...

Page 1294: ...will satisfy the gate condition after the delay set with the Gate Delay key When Negative Neg is selected a negative going edge Edge or a low voltage Level will satisfy the gate condition after the delay Remote Command SENSe SWEep EGATe POLarity NEGative POSitive SENSe SWEep EGATe POLarity Example SWE EGAT POL NEG SWE EGAT POL Preset POSitive State Saved Saved in instrument state Backwards Compati...

Page 1295: ...10 Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement System System See System on page 264 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1295 ...

Page 1296: ...Hold Minimum Hold Couplings When Detector setting is Auto SENSe SEMask DETector AUTO Detector SENSe SEMask DETector FUNCtion switches aligning with the switch of this parameter NORMal with WRITe Clear Write AVERage with AVERage POSitive peak with MAXHold and NEGative peak with MINHold Preset AVERage State Saved Saved in instrument state Range WRITe AVERage MAXHold MINHold Initial S W Revision Prio...

Page 1297: ... SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DTMB CTTB DVB T H ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD Remote Command SENSe SEMask DETector CARRier AUTO ON OFF 1 0 SENSe SEMask DETector CARRier AUTO Example SEM DET CARR AUTO OFF SEM DET CARR AUTO Notes See Couplings in the Trace Type section You must be in the mode that includes SEM measurement to use this command Use INSTrum...

Page 1298: ...type and the trace averaging function Normal the detector determines the peak of the CW like signals and it yields alternating maximums and minimums of noise like signals This is also referred to as Rosenfell detection Average the detector determines the average of the signal within the sweep points The averaging method depends upon the Average Type selection voltage power or log scales Peak the d...

Page 1299: ...SCDMA 1xEVDO DTMB CTTB DVB T H ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD Remote Command SENSe SEMask DETector OFFSet FUNCtion AVERage NEGative NORMal POSitive SAMPle SENSe SEMask DETector OFFSet FUNCtion Example SEM DET OFFS AVER SEM DET OFFS Notes When you manually select a detector instead of selecting Auto that detector is used regardless of other analyzer settings Note T...

Page 1300: ...Trig Delay See Trig Delay on page 336 External 1 See External 1 on page 1588 Trigger Level See Trigger Level on page 1589 Trig Slope See Trig Slope on page 1589 Trig Delay See Trig Delay on page 339 Zero Span Delay Comp See Zero Span Delay Comp On Off on page 1577 External 2 See External 2 on page 1590 Trigger Level See Trigger Level on page 1590 Trig Slope See Trig Slope on page 1591 1300 W CDMA ...

Page 1301: ... See Relative Trigger Level on page 1582 Trig Slope See Trigger Slope on page 1593 Trig Delay See Trig Delay on page 346 Periodic Timer See Periodic Timer Frame Trigger on page 1583 Period See Period on page 1585 Offset See Offset on page 1585 Reset Offset Display See Reset Offset Display on page 1587 Sync Source See Sync Source on page 1587 Off See Off on page 1588 External 1 See External 1 on pa...

Page 1302: ...l on page 1590 Trig Slope See Trig Slope on page 1591 RF Burst See RF Burst on page 1591 Absolute Trigger See Absolute Trigger Level on page 1592 Trig Slope See Trigger Slope on page 1593 Trig Delay See Trig Delay on page 357 Auto Holdoff See Auto Holdoff on page 1594 Auto Trig See Auto Trig on page 1594 Trig Holdoff See Trig Holdoff on page 1595 1302 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference...

Page 1303: ...switch as it can in legacy analyzers If you want to recall all modes to their user preset file state you will need to do a User Preset after mode switching into each mode User Preset recalls mode state which can now include data like traces whereas on ESA and PSA User Preset did not affect data Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 User Preset User Preset sets the state of the currently active mod...

Page 1304: ...alls all of the User Preset files for each mode switches to the power on mode and activates the saved measurement from the power on mode User Preset file When the instrument is secured all of the user preset files are converted back to their default user preset files The User Preset function does the following Aborts the currently running measurement Switches the Mode to the power on mode Restores...

Page 1305: ...ive mode and its State You can recall this User Preset file by pressing the User Preset menu key or sending the SYST PRES USER remote command This same state is also saved by the Save State function Key Path User Preset Remote Command SYSTem PRESet USER SAVE Example SYST PRES USER SAVE Notes SYST PRES SAVE creates the same file as if the user requested a SAV or a MMEM STOR STAT except User Preset ...

Page 1306: ...e SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DTMB CTTB DVB T H ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD Remote Command DISPlay SEMask VIEW SELect APFReq RPFReq IPOWer CINFormation DISPlay SEMask VIEW SELect Example DISP SEM VIEW IPOW DISP SEM VIEW Notes You must be in the mode that includes SEM measurement to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Preset SA WC...

Page 1307: ... LTETDD Digital Cable TV MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD 1 WIMAX OFDMA WLAN 2 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 1 Max MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD 4 Other modes 3 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 02 00 A 03 00 A 10 00 Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Display The Display menu is common to most measurements and is used for configuring items on the dis...

Page 1308: ...cluding any annotation on lines such as the display line the threshold line etc This does NOT include the marker number or the N dB result When off the graticule expands to fill the entire graticule area 3 Trace annotation these are the labels on the traces showing their detector or their math mode 4 Active Function annotation this is the active function display in the meas bar and all of the acti...

Page 1309: ...ld line etc and the y axis annotation This does NOT include marker annotation or the N dB result When off the graticule expands to fill the entire graticule area leaving only the 1 5 gap above the graticule as described in the Trace Detector chapter Key Path View Display Display Annotation Remote Command DISPlay ANNotation SCReen STATe OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay ANNotation SCReen STATe Example DISP ANN SC...

Page 1310: ... Off Preset On This should remain Off through a Preset when System DisplaySettings Annotation is set to Off State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Title Displays menu keys that enable you to change or clear a title on your display Key Path View Display Display Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Change Title Writes a title into the measurement name field in t...

Page 1311: ...TITL DATA This Is My Title This example is for Measurements other than Swept SA Both set the title to This Is My Title Notes Pressing this key cancels any active function When a title is edited the previous title remains intact it is not cleared and the cursor goes at the end so that characters can be added or BKSP can be used to go back over previous characters Preset No title measurement name in...

Page 1312: ...ride of the meas local annotation settings When it is All Off it forces ScreenAnnotation Meas Bar Trace and Active Function Values settings to be OFF for all measurements in all modes This provides the security based annotation off function of previous analyzers hence it uses the legacy SCPI command When it is All Off the Screen Meas Bar Trace and Active Function Values keys under the Display Anno...

Page 1313: ...ibility Notes In ESA and PSA we offer the choice of Reverse Bitmap or Reverse Metafile when saving screen images This is much like the Flat Color theme available in X Series Also if you selected Reverse Bitmap AND a black white screen image that would be much like Flat Monochrome In other words each of the X Series themes has a similar screen image type in ESA PSA But they are not identical Initia...

Page 1314: ... Image Themes Example MMEM STOR SCR THEM FMON Readback Flat Mono Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Abs Pwr Freq Sets the display to the Absolute Peak Power and Frequency view The views differ depending on the setting of the measurement type Meas Type under the Measurement Setup menu Abs Peak Pwr Freq Total Pwr Ref on page 1314 Abs Peak Pwr Freq PSD Ref on page 1316 Abs Peak Pwr Freq Spectrum P...

Page 1315: ...te power at the reference area Channel Integration Bandwidth Start Hz Start frequency for offset Stop Hz Stop frequency for offset Meas BW Hz Measurement bandwidth for offset Lower Peak dBm Absolute peak power on minimum margin point of the negative offset Lower Δlim dB Minimum margin from limit line which is decided by Fail Mask setting on the negative offset W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications ...

Page 1316: ...r Δlim dB Minimum margin from limit line which is decided by Fail Mask setting on the positive offset Upper Freq Hz Frequency on minimum margin point of the positive offset Abs Peak Pwr Freq PSD Ref This view consists of the following two windows Trace Window on page 1316 Results Window on page 1317 Trace Window Corresponding Trace yellow Combined trace from carrier and each offset 1316 W CDMA HSP...

Page 1317: ...the negative offset Lower Δlim dB Minimum margin from limit line which is decided by Fail Mask setting on the negative offset Lower Freq Hz Frequency on minimum margin point of the negative offset Upper dBm Hz Absolute power spectrum density of the positive offset Upper Δlim dB Minimum margin from limit line which is decided by Fail Mask setting on the positive offset Upper Freq Hz Frequency on mi...

Page 1318: ... Bandwidth Spectrum Peak Ref n 5 1st element Spectrum peak power reference at the reference area Start Hz Start frequency for offset Stop Hz Stop frequency for offset Meas BW Hz Measurement bandwidth for offset Lower dBm Absolute peak power on minimum margin point of the negative offset Lower Δlim dB Minimum margin from limit line which is decided by Fail Mask setting on the negative offset 1318 W...

Page 1319: ...f the positive offset Key Path View Display Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Rel Pwr Freq Sets the display to the Relative Peak Power and Frequency view The views differ depending on the setting of the measurement type Meas Type under the Measurement Setup menu Rel Peak Pwr Freq Total Pwr Ref on page 1319 Rel Peak Pwr Freq PSD Ref on page 1321 Rel Peak Pwr Freq Spectrum Pk Ref on page 1322 Re...

Page 1320: ...te power at the reference area Channel Integration Bandwidth Start Hz Start frequency for offset Stop Hz Stop frequency for offset Meas BW Hz Measurement bandwidth for offset Lower Peak dBc Relative peak power on minimum margin point of the negative offset Lower ΔLim dB Minimum margin from limit line which is decided by Fail Mask setting on the negative offset 1320 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applicat...

Page 1321: ...r ΔLim dB Minimum margin from limit line which is decided by Fail Mask setting on the positive offset Upper Freq Hz Frequency on minimum margin point of the positive offset Rel Peak Pwr Freq PSD Ref This view consists of the following two windows Trace Window on page 1321 Results Window on page 1322 Trace Window Corresponding Trace yellow Combined trace from carrier and each offset W CDMA HSPA Mea...

Page 1322: ...the negative offset Lower ΔLim dB Minimum margin from limit line which is decided by Fail Mask setting on the negative offset Lower Freq Hz Frequency on minimum margin point of the negative offset Upper dB Relative power spectrum density of the positive offset Upper ΔLim dB Minimum margin from limit line which is decided by Fail Mask setting on the positive offset Upper Freq Hz Frequency on minimu...

Page 1323: ...tegration Bandwidth Spectrum Peak Ref n 5 1st element Spectrum peak power reference at the reference area Start Hz Start frequency for offset Stop Hz Stop frequency for offset Meas BW Hz Measurement bandwidth for offset Lower Peak dB Relative peak power on minimum margin point of the negative offset Lower ΔLim dB Minimum margin from limit line which is decided by Fail Mask setting W CDMA HSPA Meas...

Page 1324: ...er Freq Hz Frequency on minimum margin point of the positive offset Key Path View Display Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Integrated Power Sets the display to the Integrated Power view The views differ depending on the setting of the measurement type Meas Type under the Measurement Setup menu Integrated Power Total Pwr Ref on page 1324 Integrated Power PSD Ref on page 1327 Integrated Power S...

Page 1325: ...pectrum Emission Mask Measurement View Display For WLAN 802 11ac 80 80 MHz power readouts of both of the carriers are displayed in the lower result window W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1325 ...

Page 1326: ...e area Channel Integration Bandwidth Start Hz Start frequency for offset Stop Hz Stop frequency for offset Meas BW Hz Measurement bandwidth for offset Lower Integ dBc Relative integrated power on the negative offset Lower ΔLim dB Minimum margin from limit line which is decided by Fail Mask setting on the negative offset Lower Integ dBm Absolute integrated power on the negative offset 1326 W CDMA H...

Page 1327: ...m limit line which is decided by Fail Mask setting on the positive offset Upper Integ dBm Absolute integrated power on the positive offset Integrated Power PSD Ref Trace Window on page 1328 Results Window on page 1328 For WLAN 802 11ac 80 80 MHz power readouts of both of the carriers are displayed in the lower result window W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1327 ...

Page 1328: ...hannel Integration Bandwidth PSD Ref n 5 1st element Power spectral density reference at the reference area Start Hz Start frequency for offset Stop Hz Stop frequency for offset Meas BW Hz Measurement bandwidth for offset Lower dB Relative power spectrum density of the negative offset Lower ΔLim dB Minimum margin from limit line which is decided by Fail Mask setting on the negative offset 1328 W C...

Page 1329: ...r ΔLim dB Minimum margin from limit line which is decided by Fail Mask setting on the positive offset Upper dBm Hz Absolute power spectrum density of the negative offset Integrated Power Spectrum Pk Ref Trace Window on page 1326 Results Window on page 1326 For WLAN 802 11ac 80 80 MHz power readouts of both of the carriers are displayed in the lower result window W CDMA HSPA Measurement Application...

Page 1330: ...gration Bandwidth Spectrum Peak Ref n 5 1st element Peak power at the reference area Start Hz Start frequency for offset Stop Hz Stop frequency for offset Meas BW Hz Measurement bandwidth for offset Lower Peak dB Relative peak power on minimum margin point of the negative offset Lower Δlim dB Minimum margin from limit line which is decided by Fail Mask setting on the negative offset 1330 W CDMA HS...

Page 1331: ...Lines Toggles the limit lines display function for the spectrum emission mask measurements On and Off Key Path View Display Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO DTMB CTTB DVB T H ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD Digital Cable TV WLAN MSR LTEAFDD LTEATDD Remote Command CALCulate SEMask LLINe STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate SEMask LLINe STATe Example CALC SEM LLIN STAT OFF CALC SEM LLIN STAT Notes You mus...

Page 1332: ...10 Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement View Display 1332 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1333: ...tal mean power of a signal For measurement results and views see View Display on page 1609 This topic contains the following sections Remote Commands for Occupied Bandwidth on page 1334 Remote Command Results for Occupied Bandwidth Measurement on page 1335 Undefined variable Primary ProductName W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1333 ...

Page 1334: ... OBWidth NDEFault INITiate OBWidth FETCh OBWidth n MEASure OBWidth n READ OBWidth n FETCh OBWidth OBWidth MEASure OBWidth OBWidth READ OBWidth OBWidth FETCh OBWidth FERRor MEASure OBWidth FERRor READ OBWidth FERRor FETCh OBWidth XDB MEASure OBWidth XDB READ OBWidth XDB See also the section Remote Measurement Functions on page 2642 1334 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1335: ...ecified Returns 7 scalar results in the following order 1 Occupied bandwidth Hz 2 Total Power dBm Total Power will be obsolete in TD SCDMA mode this place will be replaced by NaN 3 Span Hz 4 Spectrum Trace Points points 5 Res BW Hz 6 Transmit Frequency Error Hz 7 x DB Bandwidth Hz 2 Returns the frequency domain spectrum trace data array for the entire frequency range being measured Key Path Meas I...

Page 1336: ...mand DISPlay OBWidth VIEW 1 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel real DISPlay OBWidth VIEW 1 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel Example DISP OBW VIEW WIND TRAC Y RLEV 125 DISP OBW VIEW WIND TRAC Y RLEV Notes You must be in the Spectrum Analysis mode W CDMA mode cdma2000 mode TD SCDMA mode ISDB T mode CMMB mode BLUETOOTH mode LTE mode LTE TDD mode WLAN mode 1xEVDO mode MSR or WIMAX OFDMA mode to use this comma...

Page 1337: ... instrument state Min 100 Max 100 Initial S W Revision A 12 50 Adjust Range For Min Clip Sets the combination of attenuation and gain based on the current measured signal level so that clipping will be at a minimum This is an immediate action function that is it executes once when the key is pressed This key is grayed out in measurements that do not support this functionality Key Path AMPTD Y Scal...

Page 1338: ...ications Modes will show the current value of Peak to Average ratio on the softkey However some applications will not permit changing the value In these situations the softkey will be grayed out Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Range Remote Command SENSe POWer RF RANGe PARatio real SENSe POWer RF RANGe PARatio Example POW RANG PAR 12 dB Notes In some Applications Modes this parameter will be read only meani...

Page 1339: ...mpl DISPlay OBWidth VIEW 1 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision Example DISP OBW VIEW WIND TRAC Y PDIV 5 DISP OBW VIEW WIND TRAC Y PDIV Notes You must be in the Spectrum Analysis mode W CDMA mode cdma2000 mode TD SCDMA mode ISDB T mode CMMB mode LTE mode LTE TDD mode BLUETOOTH mode WLAN mode 1xEVDO mode MSR or WIMAX OFDMA mode to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Couplings When th...

Page 1340: ...Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 03 00 Auto Scaling Allows you to toggle the Auto Scaling function between On and Off Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD BLUETOOTH WLAN MSR Remote Command DISPlay OBWidth VIEW 1 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe COUPle 0 1 OFF ON DISPlay OBWidth VIEW 1 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe COUPle Example DISP OBW VIEW WIND T...

Page 1341: ...enter 3017 for more information Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Presel Adjust Allows you to manually adjust the preselector filter frequency to optimize its response to the signal of interest This function is only available when Presel Center is available See Preselector Adjust 3020 for more information Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 W CDM...

Page 1342: ...s all Auto Man parameters in manual mode It decouples all the coupled instrument parameters and is not recommended for making measurements Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 More Information There are two types of functions that have Auto Manual modes Auto Man Active Function keys An Auto Man toggle key controls the binary state associated with an instrument parameter by toggling between Auto w...

Page 1343: ...11 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Auto Couple W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1343 ...

Page 1344: ... OBW BAND AUTO Notes You must be in the Spectrum Analysis mode W CDMA mode cdma2000 mode TD SCDMA mode ISDB T mode CMMB mode LTE mode LTE TDD mode BLUETOOTH mode WLAN mode 1xEVDO mode MSR or WIMAX OFDMA mode to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Couplings Sweep time is coupled to RBW As the RBW changes the sweep time if set to Auto is changed to maintain amplitude calibration V...

Page 1345: ...h VIDeo AUTO ON OFF 1 0 SENSe OBWidth BANDwidth VIDeo AUTO Example OBW BAND VID 5 MHz OBW BAND VID OBW BAND VID AUTO ON OBW BAND VID AUTO Notes You must be in the Spectrum Analysis mode W CDMA mode cdma2000 mode TD SCDMA mode ISDB T mode CMMB mode LTE mode LTE TDD mode BLUETOOTH mode WLAN mode 1xEVDO mode MSR or WIMAX OFDMA mode to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Dependencie...

Page 1346: ... to Resolution Bandwidth Video Bandwidth to Resolution Bandwidth Ratio Preset SA LTE LTETDD WLAN MSR Auto WCDMA 300 kHz CDMA2K 120 kHz WIMAX OFDMA 1 MHz TD SCDMA 300 kHz 1xEVDO 300 kHz ISDB T 300 Hz CMMB 3 kHz BLUETOOTH 30 kHz ON ISDB T CMMB OFF State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 1 Hz Max 50 MHz Backwards Compatibility SCPI SENSe OBWidth BWIDth VIDeo Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Mo...

Page 1347: ...AUSsian State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Gaussian Flattop Backwards Compatibility SCPI SENSe OBWidth BWIDth SHAPe Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 03 00 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1347 ...

Page 1348: ...ments etc when in Continuous mode When the average count reaches the Average Hold Number the count stops incrementing but the analyzer keeps sweeping See the Trace Detector section for the averaging formula used both before and after the Average Hold Number is reached The trigger condition must be met prior to each sweep The type of trace processing for multiple sweeps is set under the Trace Detec...

Page 1349: ...ep the INIT CONT 0 command will place the analyzer in Single Sweep but will have no effect on the current sequence until k N at which point the current sequence will stop and the instrument will go to the idle state W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1349 ...

Page 1350: ...11 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement File File See File on page 258 1350 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1351: ... Freq The center frequency setting is the same for all measurements within a mode that is it is Meas Global Some modes are also able to share a Mode Global center frequency value If this is the case the Mode will have a Global Settings key in its Mode Setup menu The Center Freq function sets and queries the Center Frequency for the currently selected input If your analyzer has multiple inputs and ...

Page 1352: ...he SCPI command The other parameter is forced to a different value if needed to keep the Start and the Stop Frequencies within the analyzer s frequency range Preset Depends on instrument maximum frequency mode measurement and selected input See Center Frequency Presets on page 1352 and RF Center Freq on page 1354 and Ext Mix Center Freq and I Q Center Freq on page 1356 State Saved Saved in instrum...

Page 1353: ...Hz 26 5 GHz 26 55 GHz 526 N9038A 1 805 GHz 3 6 GHz 27 0 GHz 532 16 005 GHz 32 0 GHz 32 5 GHz 543 21 505 GHz 43 0 GHz TBD 544 22 005 GHz 44 0 GHz 44 5 GHz 550 25 005 GHz 50 0 GHz 51 GHz Input 2 Model CF after Mode Preset Stop Freq after Mode Preset Max Freq can t tune above N9000A opt C75 0 7505GHz 1 5 GHz 1 58 GHz N9038A 505 MHz 1 GHz 1 000025 GHz Tracking Generator Frequency Limits N9000A only Tr...

Page 1354: ...ently selected input Scope Meas Global Remote Command SENSe FREQuency RF CENTer freq SENSe FREQuency RF CENTer Example FREQ RF CENT 30 MHz Notes This command is the same in all modes but the parameter is Measurement Global So the value is independent in each mode and common across all the measurements in the mode Dependencies If the electronic soft attenuator is enabled any attempt to set Center F...

Page 1355: ...is command is the same in all modes but the parameter is Measurement Global So the value is independent in each mode and common across all the measurements in the mode Couplings When returning to External Mixing after having been switched to one of the other inputs e g RF you will come back into the settings that you had when you left External Mixing So you will come back to the band you were in w...

Page 1356: ...ot the input which is selected at the time the command is sent Note that the Center Freq function in the Frequency menu on the front panel always applies to the currently selected input Scope Meas Global Remote Command SENSe FREQuency IQ CENTer freq SENSe FREQuency IQ CENTer Example FREQ IQ CENT 30 MHz Notes This command is the same in all modes but the parameter is Measurement Global So the value...

Page 1357: ...and results in an advisory message If the equivalent SCPI command is sent this same message is generated as part of a 221 Settings conflict warning Couplings When auto coupled in a non zero span the center frequency step size is set to 10 of the span When auto coupled in zero span the center frequency step size is set to the equivalent 3 dB RBW value Preset Auto ADEMOD 1 MHz ON State Saved Saved i...

Page 1358: ...11 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Input Output Input Output See Input Output on page 190 1358 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1359: ...is Value appears on the Active Function area Key Path Marker Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD BLUETOOTH WLAN MSR Remote Command CALCulate OBWidth MARKer 1 2 12 MODE POSition DELTa OFF CALCulate OBWidth MARKer 1 2 12 MODE Example CALC OBW MARK MODE POS CALC OBW MARK MODE Notes If the selected marker is Off pressing Marker sets it to Normal and places it at the ce...

Page 1360: ...nt measurement Key Path Marker Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Select Marker Displays 12 markers available for selection Key Path Marker Properties Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Relative To Selects the desired marker The selected marker will be relative to its reference marker Key Path Marker Properties Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD BLUETOOTH WL...

Page 1361: ...ision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 03 00 All Markers Off Turns off all markers Key Path Marker Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD BLUETOOTH WLAN MSR Remote Command CALCulate OBWidth MARKer AOFF Example CALC OBW MARK AOFF Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 03 00 Marker X Axis Value Remote Command Only Sets the marker X A...

Page 1362: ...LCulate OBWidth MARKer 1 2 12 X POSition real CALCulate OBWidth MARKer 1 2 12 X POSition Example CALC OBW MARK10 X POS 0 CALC OBW MARK10 X POS Notes The query returns the marker s absolute X Axis value in trace points if the control mode is Normal or the offset from the marker s reference marker in trace points if the control mode is Delta Preset After a preset all markers are turned OFF so Marker...

Page 1363: ...r which is OFF to state ON or 1 puts it in Normal mode and places it at the center of the screen Key Path SCPI only Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD BLUETOOTH WLAN MSR Remote Command CALCulate OBWidth MARKer 1 2 12 STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate OBWidth MARKer 1 2 12 STATe Example CALC OBW MARK3 STAT ON CALC OBW MARK3 STAT Preset OFF State Saved Saved in instrument ...

Page 1364: ...Function Marker Function There are no Marker Functions supported in this measurement When pressed this key displays a blank menu Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 1364 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1365: ...er To Marker To There is no Marker To functionality supported in this measurement When pressed this key displays a blank menu Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1365 ...

Page 1366: ... reenter Help press the Help key and press that key Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Remote Measurement Functions This section contains the following topics Measurement Group of Commands on page 2643 Current Measurement Query Remote Command Only on page 2645 Limit Test Current Results Remote Command Only on page 2645 Data Query Remote Command Only on page 2645 Calcula...

Page 1367: ...SCII is the default format for the data output Older versions of Spectrum Analysis and Phase Noise mode measurements only use ASCII The binary data formats should be used for handling large blocks of data since they are smaller and faster than the ASCII format Refer to the FORMat DATA command for more information If you need to change some of the measurement parameters from the factory default set...

Page 1368: ...ded or is set to 1 If the n value is set to a value other than 1 the selected trace data results will be returned See each command for details of what types of scalar results or trace data results are available The binary data formats should be used for handling large blocks of data since they are smaller and transfer faster than the ASCII format FORMat DATA FETCh may be used to return results oth...

Page 1369: ...ce they are smaller and faster than the ASCII format FORMat DATA Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Current Measurement Query Remote Command Only This command returns the name of the measurement that is currently running Remote Command CONFigure Example CONF Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Limit Test Current Results Remote Command Only Queries the status of the current measurement limit t...

Page 1370: ...late DATA n COMPress BLOCk CFIT MAXimum MINimum MEAN DMEan RMS RMSCubed SAMPle SDEViation PPHase soffset length roffset rlimit Example To query the mean power of a set of GSM bursts Supply a signal that is a set of GSM bursts Select the IQ Waveform measurement in IQ Analyzer Mode Set the sweep time to acquire at least one burst Set the triggers such that acquisition happens at a known position rel...

Page 1371: ...lue that is the arithmetic mean of the data point values in dB dBm for the specified region s of trace data For I Q trace data the mean of the magnitudes of the I Q pairs is returned See the following equations If the original trace data is in dB this function returns the arithmetic mean of those log values not log of the mean power which is a more useful value The mean of the log is the better me...

Page 1372: ...irs for Specified Region s where Xi is the complex value representation of an I Q pair Xi its conjugate complex number and n is the number of I Q pairs in the specified region s Once you have the rms value for a region of trace data linear or I Q you may want to calculate the mean power You must convert this rms value peak volts to power in dBm SAMPle returns the first data value x y pair for the ...

Page 1373: ...ecified by data point in PPHase The rms power of the specified region may be expressed as Power 10 x log 10 x RMS I Q value 10 The RMS I Q value peak volts is where Xi is the complex value representation of an I Q pair Xi its conjugate complex number and n is the number of I Q pairs in the specified region The arithmetic mean phase of the specified region may be expressed as where Yi is the unwrap...

Page 1374: ...ll be compressed into one value This parameter has a default value equal to the current trace length roffset repeat offset is an optional real number It is in seconds for time domain traces and is a dimensionless index 0 to Npoints 1 for frequency domain traces It defines the beginning of the next field of trace elements to be compressed This is relative to the beginning of the previous field This...

Page 1375: ...uency TIME Example Example for Swept SA measurement in Spectrum Analyzer Mode CALC DATA4 PEAK 40 10 FREQ GTDL This will identify the peaks of trace 4 that are above 40 dBm with excursions of at least 10 dB The peaks are returned in order of increasing frequency starting with the lowest frequency Only the peaks that are above the display line are returned Query Results 1 With FORMat DATA REAL 32 se...

Page 1376: ... peforming real time overlapped FFTs at the hardware layer using software for basic post processing before returning the result to the user The upshot of this approach is improved throughput for user applications that require many sequential power measurements The analysis bandwidth of FP2 is limited by the licenses in the instrument but its maximum overall analysis bandwidth per acquisition is 40...

Page 1377: ... in the configuration string Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Acquisition Time Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF AcquisitionTime 0 002 Notes The acquisition time parameter sets the time in which the entire spectrum is measured An increase in the acquisition time yields an improvement in measurement repeatability Preset 0 001 s Range 0 s to 1 s Default Unit Time s Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Center Frequency...

Page 1378: ...r is subtracted from all measurements This effectively lowers the noise floor of the analyzer When noise correction is enabled the first measurement for a given set of input parameters will take extra time This is because the analyzer takes an extra acquisition with the RF input disconnected from the analyzer s front end to measure the noise of just the analyzer The measured noise floor is stored ...

Page 1379: ...Because two acquisitions rather than a single acquisition are made when spur suppression is enabled the measurement time will always be slower when spur suppression is enabled Preset False Range True enable spur suppression or False disable spur suppression Default Unit Boolean Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Electronic Attenuator Bypass Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF ElecAttBypass False Notes The electr...

Page 1380: ... IF paths For example if the signal is less than 25 MHz wide then the user can select the B25M path to take advantage of additional filtering on this analog IF path Preset B40M Range B10M B25M B40M Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Include Power Spectrum Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF IncludePowerSpectrum True Notes The power spectrum parameter allows the user to read data on the entire spectrum for diagno...

Page 1381: ...ge Off Low Full Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Resolution Bandwidth Mode Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF PreAmpMode Low Notes The resolution bandwidth mode parameter allows the user to choose whether the RBW filter is automatically or manually set The BestSpeed value minimizes measurement time while the Narrowest value minimizes RBW size minimum of two FFT bins per RBW To manually specify an RBW set this...

Page 1382: ...W Revision A 14 00 Trigger Level Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF TriggerLevel 2 Notes The trigger level parameter sets the voltage value at which an external trigger is detected Preset 1 2 V Range 5 to 5 V Default Unit Volts Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Trigger Slope Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF TriggerSlope Negative Notes The trigger slope parameter indicates the direction of the edge trigger voltage fo...

Page 1383: ... Default Unit Seconds Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Signal Input Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF SignalInput Fp50MHzCW Notes The signal input parameter allows the user to select between using the main RF input or the internal analyzer reference CW signal of 50 MHz Preset FpMainRf Range FpMainRf Fp50MHzCW Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Use Preselector Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF UsePreSelector True Notes Th...

Page 1384: ...h filter weighs all frequencies within the bandwidth equally The root raised cosine filter has an associated shape parameter defined by the FilterAlpha parameter All array parameters should have the same number of elements Alternatively if all the elements are the same value a single value with no square brackets can be used to define the parameter Preset IBW Range IBW RRC Initial S W Revision A 1...

Page 1385: ...eters should have the same number of elements Alternatively if all the elements are the same value a single value with no square brackets can be used to define the parameter Preset BandPower Range BandPower BandDensity PeakPower PeakFrequency XdBBandwidth OccupiedBandwidth Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Channel Offset Frequency Array Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF OffsetFrequency 5e6 0 5e6 Notes The off...

Page 1386: ...e power relative to the peak channel power over which the bandwidth is calculated The parameter value must be a negative number Preset 3 01 Range 200 to 0 dB Default Unit dB Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Define Fast Power Measurement Query Remote Command Only The DEFine command is used to retrieve a list of all defined parameters in an ASCII string format M o d e All R e m o t e C o m m a n d CALCu...

Page 1387: ...OffsetFrequency 0 Function BandPower FilterType IBW FilterAlpha 0 22 OccupiedBandwidthPercent 0 99 XdBBandwidth 3 01 DoNoiseCorrection False DoSpurSuppression False MeasurementMethod HardwareFFT IncludePowerSpectrum Fals e TriggerDelay 0 TriggerLevel 1 2 TriggerSlope Positive TriggerSource Free TriggerTimeout 1 I n i t i a l S W R e v i s i o n A 14 00 Configure Fast Power Measurement Remote Comma...

Page 1388: ...ma separated ASCII values where m corresponds to the number of bandwidths defined 1 Declared function return in the 1st specified channel 2 Declared function return in the 2nd specified channel m Declared function return in the last specified channel The INIT and FETC command sequence performs the same functionality of a single CALC FPOW POW n query Units of the returned values are dependent on th...

Page 1389: ...rloads and to visibly inspect the spectrum Mode All Remote Command CALCulate FPOWer POWer 1 2 999 READ2 Example CALC FPOW POW1 READ2 Notes Option FP2 is required Note Spectrum data is only returned if the IncludePowerSpectrum parameter is set to True If IncludePowerSpectrum is False the number of spectrum points will be zero 0 Units of the returned values are dependent on the Function parameter pe...

Page 1390: ... data is output in the current Y Axis unit When the data format is INTeger data is output in units of m dBm 001 dBm The INT 32 format returns binary 32 bit integer values in internal units m dBm in a definite length block Dependencies Sending a data format spec with an invalid number for example INT 48 generates no error The analyzer simply uses the default 8 for ASCii 32 for INTeger 32 for REAL S...

Page 1391: ...r for data transfer and other queries It controls whether binary data is transferred in normal or swapped mode This command affects only the byte order for setting and querying trace data for the TRACe DATA TRACe DATA CALCulate DATA n and FETCh SANalyzer n commands and queries By definition any command that says it uses FORMat DATA uses any format supported by FORMat DATA The NORMal order is a byt...

Page 1392: ...r of average counts the average mode termination control setting determines the average action Key Path Meas Setup Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD BLUETOOTH WLAN MSR Remote Command SENSe OBWidth AVERage COUNt integer SENSe OBWidth AVERage COUNt SENSe OBWidth AVERage STATe ON OFF 1 0 SENSe OBWidth AVERage STATe Example OBW AVER COUN 1500 OBW AVER COUN OBW AVER O...

Page 1393: ...OBWidth AVERage TCONtrol Example OBW AVER TCON REP OBW AVER TCON Notes You must be in the Spectrum Analysis mode W CDMA mode cdma2000 mode TD SCDMA mode ISDB T mode CMMB mode LTE mode LTE TDD mode BLUETOOTH mode WLAN mode 1xEVDO mode MSR or WIMAX OFDMA mode to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Preset EXP State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Exp Repeat Initial S W Revisi...

Page 1394: ...width between two points on the signal which is x dB down from the highest signal point within the OBW Span Key Path Meas Setup Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD BLUETOOTH WLAN MSR Remote Command SENSe OBWidth XDB rel_ampl SENSe OBWidth XDB Example OBW XDB 20 OBW XDB Notes You must be in the Spectrum Analysis mode W CDMA mode cdma2000 mode TD SCDMA mode ISDB T mo...

Page 1395: ...de cdma2000 mode TD SCDMA mode ISDB T mode CMMB mode LTE mode LTE TDD mode BLUETOOTH mode WLAN mode 1xEVDO mode or WIMAX OFDMA mode to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Preset SA WCDMA 5 MHz C2K 1 48 MHz WIMAX OFDMA 10 MHz TD SCDMA 1 6 MHz 1xEVDO 1 48 MHz ISDB T 5 7 MHz CMMB 7 512 MHz LTE LTETDD 5 MHz BLUETOOTH 1 MHz WLAN If Radio Std is 802 11a g OFDM DSSS OFDM 20MHz If Radio...

Page 1396: ... Key Path SCPI Only Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD BLUETOOTH WLAN MSR Remote Command SENSe OBWidth MAXHold ON OFF 1 0 SENSe OBWidth MAXHold Example OBW MAXH ON OBW MAXH Notes You must be in the Spectrum Analysis mode W CDMA mode cdma2000 mode TD SCDMA mode ISDB T mode CMMB mode LTE mode LTE TDD mode BLUETOOTH mode WLAN mode 1xEVDO mode MSR or WIMAX OFDMA mode ...

Page 1397: ...11 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Meas Setup Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 03 00 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1397 ...

Page 1398: ...11 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Mode Mode See Mode on page 232 1398 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1399: ...urement and gets the mode to a consistent state with all of the default couplings set Backwards Compatibility Notes In the X Series the legacy Factory Preset has been replaced with Mode Preset which only presets the currently active mode not the entire instrument In the X Series the way to preset the entire instrument is by using System Restore System Defaults All which behaves essentially the sam...

Page 1400: ...iables except the persistent ones Restore Mode Defaults resets ALL the Mode variables and all the Meas global and Meas local variables including the persistent ones Type Of Preset SCPI Command Front Panel Access Auto Couple COUPle ALL Auto Couple front panel key Meas Preset CONFigure Measurement Meas Setup Menu Mode Preset SYSTem PRESet Mode Preset green key Restore Mode Defaults INSTrument DEFaul...

Page 1401: ...ement Mode Preset Power On Mode Preset SYSTem PON TYPE MODE System Menu Power On User Preset SYSTem PON TYPE USER System Menu Power On Last State SYSTem PON TYPE LAST System Menu W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1401 ...

Page 1402: ...11 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Mode Setup Mode Setup See Mode Setup on page 251 1402 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1403: ... causes the selected marker to be set to Normal then a peak search is immediately performed Key Path Front panel key Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD BLUETOOTH WLAN MSR Remote Command CALCulate OBWidth MARKer 1 2 12 MAXimum Example CALC OBW MARK2 MAX Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 03 00 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Refer...

Page 1404: ...11 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Print Print See Print on page 263 1404 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1405: ...ll Trace State State_ Save Recall Screen Screen_ Save Recall Amplitude Corrections Ampcor_ Import Export Traces Trace_ Import Export Limit Lines LLine_ Import Export Measurement Result MeasR_ Import Export Capture Buffer CapBuf_ Import Export A four digit number is appended to the prefix to create a unique file name The numbering sequence starts at 0000 within each Mode for each file type and upda...

Page 1406: ... be fred_0000 csv Although 0000 is used in the example above the number that is used is actually the current number in the Meas Results sequence that is the number that would have been used if you had not entered your own file name If the filename you entered ends with _dddd where d any number making it look just like an auto file name then the next auto file name picks up where you left off with ...

Page 1407: ...in the sense that you can recall a state file from any X Series model number and any version of X Series software This is only possible if part of the recalling process goes through a limiting step after recalling the mode settings at least for settings that may vary with version number model number option and license differences If you try to recall a state file onto an instrument with less capab...

Page 1408: ...ple SA for the Spectrum Analyzer See More Information on page 1409 Key Path Recall Mode All Remote Command MMEMory LOAD STATe filename Example MMEM LOAD STAT myState state This recalls the file myState state on the default path Example MMEM LOAD STAT MyStateFile state This loads the state file data on the default file directory path into the instrument state Notes When you pick a file to recall th...

Page 1409: ...y When you use State to save and recall traces any trace whose data must be preserved should be placed in View or Blank mode before saving The following table describes the Trace Save and Recall possibilities You want to recall state and one trace s data leaving other traces unaffected Save Trace State from 1 trace Make sure that no other traces are updating they should all be in View or Blank mod...

Page 1410: ...og such as Look In Look In The Look In field shows the path from which the file will be recalled and allows you to change the path using the up and down arrow keys to navigate to other paths the Enter key to open a directory and the Backspace key to go back one directory The Look In field first uses the last path from the Save As dialog Save In path for that same file type There is no softkey for ...

Page 1411: ...causes the current Open request to be cancelled The ESC key does the same thing Key Path Recall State Notes Brings up the Open dialog for recalling a State Save Type Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Edit Register Names You may enter a custom name on any of the Register keys to help you remember what you are using that state to save To do this press the Edit Register Names key choose the regis...

Page 1412: ...Key Path Recall State Example RCL 1 Range 1 16 from front panel 1 128 from SCPI Readback Date and time with seconds resolution are displayed on the key OR A custom name of up to 30 characters entered using the Save State Edit Register Names key OR empty if no prior save operation has been performed to this register Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision Prior to A 11 00 Reg...

Page 1413: ...s register Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision Prior to A 11 00 Sequences These keys allow you to import a Tab separated or txt file that will automatically setup all the parameters required for building a Sequence The parameters will automatically be loaded into the Stated Sequencer Once selected in order to import the selected Sequence Type you must select the Open key...

Page 1414: ...Application for manipulating csv files and then import it Importing Data loads measurement data from the specified file into the specified or default destination depending on the data type selected Selecting an Import Data menu key will not actually cause the importing to occur since the analyzer still needs to know from where to get the data Pressing the Open key in this menu brings up the Open d...

Page 1415: ... In other measurements this key is grayed out Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Open When you press Open the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu entitled File Open This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse The Tab and Arrow keys can also be used for dialog navigation See From File on page 2687in Recall State for a ...

Page 1416: ...ed The SWEEPING bit is set The MEASURING bit is set Backwards Compatibility Notes For Spectrum Analysis mode in ESA and PSA the Restart hardkey and the INITiate RESTart command restart trace averages displayed average count reset to 1 for a trace in Clear Write but did not restart Max Hold and Min Hold In the X Series the Restart hardkey and the INITiate RESTart command restart not only Trace Aver...

Page 1417: ... condition is met and the analyzer stops sweeping once that sweep has completed However with Average Hold Number 1 and at least one trace set to Trace Average Max Hold or Min Hold SA Measurement or Averaging on most other measurements multiple sweeps data acquisitions are taken for a single measurement The trigger condition must be met prior to each sweep The sweep is stopped when the average coun...

Page 1418: ...ettings that are affected by Mode Preset as well as the additional settings affected by Restore Mode Defaults all of the Mode s settings In addition all of the settings of the Input Output system are included even though they are outside of the Mode s state because they are needed to restore the complete setup Persistent System settings for example Verbose SCPI are not affected by either Mode Pres...

Page 1419: ...mply ignored The command is sequential Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 To File When you press To File the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu entitled Save As This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse The Tab and Arrow keys can also be used for dialog navigation The Listed below are the functions of the various f...

Page 1420: ...name using the File Name key See the Quick Save on page 2683 documentation for more on the automatic file naming algorithm When you press the File Name key the analyzer displays the Alpha Editor Use the knob to choose the letter to add and the front panel Enter key to add the letter to the file name The BK character moves you back and the FW character moves you forward in the filename The Select k...

Page 1421: ...valid register number an error message is generated 222 Data out of range Invalid register label number label is a string from 0 to 30 characters in length If a label exceeds 30 characters an error message is generated 150 String data error Label clipped to 30 characters label of length 0 erases the custom label and restores the default time and date label E g MMEM REG STAT LAB 1 Dependencies N906...

Page 1422: ...instance Although these 16 registers are the only registers available from the front panel there are 128 state registers available in the instrument Registers 17 128 are only available from the SCPI interface using the SAV command There is one set of 128 state registers in the instrument not one set for each Mode When a state is saved the Mode it was saved from is saved with it then when it is rec...

Page 1423: ...OR A custom name of up to 30 characters entered using the Edit Register Names key OR empty if no prior save operation has been performed to this register Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 11 00 Mass Storage Catalog Remote Command Only Key path SCPI Only Remote Command MMEMory CATalog directory_name Notes The string must be a valid logical path Queries disk usage info...

Page 1424: ...he second parameter specifies the destination The second form has four parameters In this form the first and third parameters specify the source The second and fourth parameters specify the directories The first pair of parameters specifies the source The second pair specifies the destination An error is generated if the source doesn t exist or the destination file already exists This command will...

Page 1425: ...e_name data It loads data into the file file_ name data is in 488 2 block format file_name is string data The query form is MMEMory DATA file_name with the response being the associated data in block format Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Mass Storage Make Directory Remote Command Only Key path SCPI Only Remote Command MMEMory MDIRectory directory_name Notes The string must be a valid logica...

Page 1426: ...CPI Only Remote Command MMEMory RDIRectory directory_name Notes The string must be a valid logical path Removes a directory The directory_name parameter specifies the directory name to be removed All files and directories under the specified directory shall also be removed This command will generate an access denied error if the folder is a restricted folder e g C Windows or is in a restricted fol...

Page 1427: ...ing algorithm The default path for all Sequence Files is My Documents Sequences Key Path Save Sequences Mode All Notes Brings up Save As dialog for saving a Sequence Save Type Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Data Export Exporting a data file stores data from the current measurement to mass storage files The Export Menu only contains data types that are supported by the current measurement Since the c...

Page 1428: ... Remote Command MMEMory STORe RESults string Example MMEM STOR RES MeasR_0000 csv Notes If the save is initiated via SCPI and the file already exists the file will be overwritten The SCPI command exports Occupied Bandwidth measurement results to the file specified as the parameter in the current path The default path is My Documents current mode data OBW results Using the C drive is strongly disco...

Page 1429: ...Band Limit Limit State Max Hold Mechanical Atten MechanicalAttenStepEnum OBW Percent Pwr Resolution Band Width Resolution Bandwidth Shape Span Sweep Points Sweep Time Sweep Time Auto TriggerSource Video Bandwidth x DB The data above is followed in the file by a line containing MeasResult1 and MeasResult2 This line forms a header for each set of measurement results which appear in subsequent lines ...

Page 1430: ...w MeasResult SA OBW A 10 53 N9030A 526 ALV ATP B1X B1Y B25 B40 BBA CR3 CRP DCF DDA DP2 DRD EA3 EDP EMC EP1 ERC ESC ESP EXM FSA LFE LNP MAT MPB NFE NUL P26 PFR PNC RTL RTS S40 SB1 SEC SM1 TVT YAS YAV 1 Auto Sweep Time Rules Normal Average Mode Exponential Average Number 10 Average State TRUE Center Frequency 1 33E 10 Detector Average IFGain FALSE IFGainAuto FALSE Internal Preamp FALSE Internal Prea...

Page 1431: ...ctionality is available for the Code Domain and Modulation Accuracy measurements In other measurements this key is grayed out Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Save As When you press Save As the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu entitled Save As This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse The Tab and Arrow keys can...

Page 1432: ...Screen Image files contain an exact representation of the analyzer display They cannot be loaded back onto the analyzer but they can be loaded into your PC for use in many popular applications The image to be saved is actually captured when the Save front panel key is pressed and kept in temporary storage to be used if you ask for a Screen Image save When the Screen Image key is pressed a thumbnai...

Page 1433: ...dialogs It allows you to choose between themes to be used when saving the screen image Key Path Save Screen Image Remote Command MMEMory STORe SCReen THEMe TDColor TDMonochrome FCOLor FMONochrome MMEMory STORe SCReen THEMe Example MMEM STOR SCR THEM TDM Preset 3D Color Is not part of Preset but is reset by Restore Misc Defaults or Restore System Defaults All and survives subsequent running of the ...

Page 1434: ...A 02 00 Flat Monochrome Selects a format that is like Flat Color But only black is used no colors not even gray and no fill Key Path Save Screen Image Themes Example MMEM STOR SCR THEM FMON Readback Flat Mono Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Save As When you press Save As the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu entitled Save As This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields...

Page 1435: ...used to select the mode with the INST SEL command for example SA for the Spectrum Analyzer Key Path Save Screen Image Notes Brings up Save As dialog for saving a Screen Image Save Type Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1435 ...

Page 1436: ...are in the idle state INIT IMM in ESA PSA Spectrum Analysis Mode does an implied ABORt In some other PSA Modes INIT IMM is ignored if not in the idle state The X Series follows the ESA PSA SA Mode model which may cause some Modes to have compatibility problems Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 More Information See Restart on page 2694 for details on the INIT IMMediate Restart function If you a...

Page 1437: ...ut on front panel to indicate out of scope Non forceful means user still can change this setting by SCPI but cannot change on front panel When set to OFF will make source leave list sequencer and this setting will be black out and take effect immediately When the RF Output is ON an RF annunciator is displayed in the system settings panel When the RF Output is turned Off the RF annunciator is clear...

Page 1438: ...ncy and waveform etc When the source list sequence playing is complete the last step keeps playing and user can use this command to change the list sequence last step s output power The multiport adapter RFIO TX ports and GPS ports cannot ensure power accuracy when power setting is lower than 130dBm this power setting value is defined by the sum of RF Power setting and related amplitude correction...

Page 1439: ...r entered power Where reference power equals the original RF Power entered under Source Amplitude RF Power and set as the reference power entered power equals a new value entered under Source Amplitude Amptd Offset In addition the displayed power value is the same as a new value entered under Source Amplitude RF Power If Power Ref is set to ON with a reference value set entering a value under Sour...

Page 1440: ...the current output power Preset 0 00 dBm OFF Min 125 00 dBm Max 10 00 dBm Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Amptd Offset Allows you to specify the RF output power offset value When the amplitude offset is set to zero 0 and you set a new offset value positive or negative the displayed amplitude value will change as follows and the RF output power will not change Displayed value output power offset value...

Page 1441: ... on page 2802 is set to ON the list sequencer controls the source output and this key will be grayed out And this setting will be none forceful grey out on front panel to indicate out of scope Non forceful means user still can change this setting by SCPI but cannot change manually on front panel When setto Off will make source leave list sequencer and this setting will be black out and take effect...

Page 1442: ...put frequency Couplings The frequency value is coupled to the current channel band and number such that updates to the band and number will update the frequency value to the corresponding absolute frequency Preset 1 00 GHz If license F1A or 5WC is present the default Center Frequency should be 2 412GHz Min 10 00 MHz Max Hardware Dependant Option 503 3 6 GHz Option 504 3 8 GHz Option 506 6 00 GHz F...

Page 1443: ... less than sign to indicate the frequency is above or below the channel number Preset 1 Min Please refer to the tables below for the valid ranges Max Please refer to the tables below for the valid ranges Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM EDGE Channel Number Ranges Band Link Device Range Frequency MHz P GSM Uplink MS 1 n 124 890 0 0 2 n Downlink BS 1 n 124 935 0 0 2 n E GSM Uplink MS 0 n 124 975 n 1...

Page 1444: ...n 5 Band II Downlink 412 n 687 9662 n 9938 n 5 1850 1 n 5 Uplink 12 n 287 350 n 425 n 5 1850 1 n 5 Band III Downlink 1162 n 1513 n 5 1575 Uplink 937 n 1288 n 5 1525 Band IV Downlink 537 n 1738 1887 n 2087 n 5 1805 n 5 1735 1 Uplink 1312 n 1513 1662 n 1862 n 5 1450 n 5 1380 1 Band V Downlink 1007 n 1087 4357 n 4458 n 5 670 1 n 5 Uplink 782 n 862 4132 n 4233 n 5 670 1 n 5 Band VI Downlink 1037 n 106...

Page 1445: ... 3767 n 5 21 n 5 39 9 Band XIV Downlink 4117 n 4143 4167 n 4192 n 5 63 n 5 72 9 Uplink 3892 n 3918 3942 n 3967 n 5 12 n 5 2 1 Band XIX Downlink 712 n 763 787 n 837 n 5 735 n 5 720 1 Uplink 312 n 363 387 n 437 n 5 770 n 5 755 1 CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Channel Number Ranges Band Link Device Range Frequency MHz US Cellular Uplink MS reverse link 1 N 799 991 N 1023 1024 N 1323 0 030 N 825 000 0 030 N 1023 82...

Page 1446: ...25 N 1536 479 000 0 020 N 1792 479 000 Downlink BS forward link 1 N 400 472 N 871 1039 N 1473 1536 N 1715 1792 N 2016 0 025 N 1 460 000 0 025 N 472 420 000 0 020 N 1024 461 010 0 025 N 1536 489 000 0 020 N 1792 489 000 IMT 2000 Band Uplink MS reverse link 0 N 1199 1920 000 0 050 N Downlink BS forward link 0 N 1199 2100 000 0 050 N Upper 700 MHz Band Uplink MS reverse link 0 N 240 776 000 0 050 N D...

Page 1447: ...link MS reverse link 1 N 400 472 N 871 1536 N 1715 0 025 N 1 450 000 0 025 N 472 410 000 0 025 N 1536 479 000 Downlink BS forward link Downlink BS forward link Downlink BS forward link 1 N 400 472 N 871 1536 N 1715 0 025 N 1 460 000 0 025 N 472 420 000 0 025 N 1536 489 000 800 PAMR Uplink MS reverse link 0 N 239 870 0125 0 025 N Downlink BS forward link 0 N 239 915 0125 0 025 N LTE FDD Channel Num...

Page 1448: ... 4949 1427 9 22750 22750 22949 12 729 5010 5010 5179 699 23010 23010 23179 13 746 5180 5180 5279 777 23180 23180 23279 14 758 5280 5280 5379 788 23280 23280 23379 17 734 5730 5730 5849 704 23730 23730 23849 18 860 5850 5850 5999 815 23850 23850 23999 19 875 6000 6000 6149 830 24000 24000 24149 20 791 6150 6150 6449 832 24150 24150 24449 21 1495 9 6450 6450 6599 1447 9 24450 24450 24599 24 1525 770...

Page 1449: ...0 38650 38650 39649 41 2496 39650 39650 41589 2496 39650 39650 41589 42 3400 41590 41590 43589 3400 41590 41590 43589 43 3600 43590 43590 45589 3600 43590 43590 45589 Note The channel numbers that designate carrier frequencies so close to the operating band edges that the carrier extends beyond the operating band edge shall not be used This implies that the first 7 15 25 50 75 and 100 channel numb...

Page 1450: ...clause 5 2 b 1850 1910 MHz 1930 1990 MHz 9254 to 9546 9654 to 9946 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 c 1910 1930 MHz 9554 to 9646 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 d 2570 2620 MHz 12854 to 13096 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 e 2300 2400 MHz 11504 to 11996 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 f ...

Page 1451: ...1 BAND24 BAND25 BAND26 BAND27 BAND28 BAND31 BAND33 BAND34 BAND35 BAND36 BAND37 BAND38 BAND39 BAND40 BAND41 BAND42 BAND43 BAND44 BANDA BANDB BANDC BANDD BANDE BANDF SOURce FREQuency CHANnels BAND Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PGSM Notes Set this setting to NONE will grey out Channel on page 2727 Channel Initial S W Revision A 05 00 None Selects no radio standard for use When you have selected the rad...

Page 1452: ...S 1800 Selects DCS 1800 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND DCS1800 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 PCS 1900 Selects PCS 1900 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PCS1900 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM 450 Selects GSM 450 as the active chan...

Page 1453: ...as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND GSM700 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 T GSM 810 Selects T GSM 810 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND T GSM810 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 WCDMA Sets WCDMA as the radio standard for use and accesses the ...

Page 1454: ...nnel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDIII Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band IV Selects Band IV as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDIV Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band V Selects Band V as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio...

Page 1455: ...channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDVIII Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band IX Selects Band IX as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDIX Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band X Selects Band X as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup R...

Page 1456: ...tup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDXIII Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIV Selects Band XIV as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDXIV Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIX Selects Band XIX as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CH...

Page 1457: ...1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PCS Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Japan Cell Selects Japan Cell as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND JAPAN Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Korean PCS Selects Korean PCS as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FR...

Page 1458: ...OUR FREQ CHAN BAND UPPER Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Secondary 800 Selects Secondary 800 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND SECOND Initial S W Revision A 05 00 400 Euro PAMR Selects 400 Euro PAMR as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FRE...

Page 1459: ... 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PCS1DOT9G Initial S W Revision A 05 00 AWS Selects AWS as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND AWS Initial S W Revision A 05 00 US 2 5GHz Selects US 2 5 GHz as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BA...

Page 1460: ...Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 1 Selects BAND 1 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND1 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 2 Selects BAND 2 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND2 Initial S W Revision A ...

Page 1461: ...A 09 50 BAND 6 Selects BAND 6 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND6 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 7 Selects BAND 7 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND7 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 8 Selects BAND 8 as the band for the ...

Page 1462: ...9 50 BAND 11 Selects BAND 11 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND11 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 12 Selects BAND 12 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND12 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 13 Selects BAND 13 as the band for...

Page 1463: ... 09 50 BAND 18 Selects BAND 18 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND18 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 19 Selects BAND 19 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND19 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 20 Selects BAND 20 as the band f...

Page 1464: ... 09 50 BAND 25 Selects BAND 25 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND25 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 26 Selects BAND 26 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND26 Initial S W Revision A 12 53 BAND 27 Selects BAND 27 as the band f...

Page 1465: ...o standard for use and accesses the LTE TDD specific channel band sub menus Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 33 Selects BAND 33 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND33 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 34 Selects BAND 34 as the band for the current step Key...

Page 1466: ...step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND37 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 38 Selects BAND 38 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND38 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 39 Selects BAND 39 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio...

Page 1467: ...ency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND42 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 43 Selects BAND 43 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND43 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 44 Selects BAND 44 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE ...

Page 1468: ...tandard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDB Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND C Selects BAND C as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDC Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND D Selects BAND D as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAN...

Page 1469: ...y Radio Setup Remote Command SOURce RADio BAND LINK DOWN UP SOURce RADio BAND LINK Example SOUR RAD BAND LINK UP Preset DOWN Range DOWN UP Backwards Compatibility SCPI SOURce RADio DEVice BTS MS SOURce RADio DEVice Backwards Compatibility Notes BTS maps to the Downlink frequency MS maps to the Uplink frequency Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Set Reference Frequency This key allows you to set the freq...

Page 1470: ...and is grayed out when the List Sequencer is turned ON Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Freq Reference This key allows you to toggle the state of the frequency reference When the frequency reference state is ON an annunciator is displayed on the main source view to indicate this state to the user When you use a frequency reference the signal generator outputs a frequency that is set relative to the re...

Page 1471: ...ill change as follows and the RF output frequency will not change Displayed value output frequency offset value Where output frequency equals the original frequency entered under Source Frequency Frequency offset value equals the value entered under Source Frequency Freq Offset When the frequency offset is set to a value other than zero 0 and you enter a new frequency value under Source Frequency ...

Page 1472: ... settings panel When the ARB is turned Off the MOD annunciator is cleared Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB STATe ON OFF 1 0 SOURce RADio ARB STATe Example SOUR RAD ARB OFF SOUR RAD ARB Notes If the ARB is ON a user then loads or deletes another file to ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The wavef...

Page 1473: ... more information about this adjustment Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB WAVeform string SOURce RADio ARB WAVeform Example SOUR RAD ARB WAV test_waveform bin Notes If intended waveform is not in the memory yet then issuing this command by SCPI will invoke ARB loading operation first which involves a delay of unpredictable length So this command s...

Page 1474: ...tup ARB Select Waveform Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Load Segment To ARB Memory Allows you to load the selected file into ARB memory On the front panel you select the file for loading to the ARB memory by highlighting the desired file in the list Using the SCPI command you specify the file name on the HDD NVWFM none volatile storage MSUS Mass Storage Unit Specifier is supported in the memory subsy...

Page 1475: ...nses do not present on the instrument In this case a GUI only warning message 800 Operation complete Loaded filename successfully but no license required licenses installed User can install required licenses according to required licenses string to license it or multi pack license it Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Load All To ARB Memory Allows you to load all the segment files within the currently s...

Page 1476: ...ory for playback of a waveform sequence or a list sequence Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Notes No remote command SCPIfront panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Default Directory Allows you to change the default directory It is used as a search location for waveform segments that are required to be loaded into ARB memory for playback of a waveform seq...

Page 1477: ...ff If the ARB is ON and you load a file to ARB memory or delete a file from ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The waveform will be replayed after the ARB operation is finished Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Delete All From ARB Memory Allows you to remove all segments from ARB playback memory Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Sele...

Page 1478: ...ry ARB Memory Full File List Remote Command Only Queries the test set for the string list of waveform segments in the ARB memory It returns a string list for waveform segment names in the ARB memory Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB FCATalog Example SOUR RAD ARB FCATalog Notes The return data is in the following format integer memory used integer memory free integer file count in ARB memory string s...

Page 1479: ...05 00 Run Time Scaling Allows you to adjust the run time scaling value The run time scaling value is applied in real time while the waveform is playing Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB ARB Setup Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB RSCaling real SOURce RADio ARB RSCaling Example SOUR RAD ARB RSC 100 00 Notes This setting cannot be set in E6640A Grey out on menu and the value is fixed at 70 00 Depen...

Page 1480: ...ype Allows access to the trigger type sub menus The setting for trigger type determines the behavior of the waveform when it plays Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE CONTinuous SINGle SADVance GATE SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE CONT SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE Notes Gated trigger type will be implemented at a later release Pr...

Page 1481: ...rs Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Trigger Type Continuous Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE CONT TRIG Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Reset Run Sets Reset and Run as the trigger response for the continuous trigger type Reset and Run sets the waveform generator to play a waveform sequence or segment continuously when the first trigger is received Subsequent triggers reset the waveform sequence or s...

Page 1482: ...l S W Revision A 05 00 Buffered Trigger Selects Buffered Trigger as the trigger response for single trigger type Buffered Trigger sets the waveform generator to play a waveform sequence or segment once when a trigger is received If a trigger is received during playback the waveform generator plays the sequence or segment to the end then plays the sequence or segment once more Key Path Source Modul...

Page 1483: ...emote Command SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE SADVance TYPE SINGle CONTinuous SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE SADVance TYPE Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE SADV SING Preset CONTinuous Range Single Continuous Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Single Selects Single as the trigger response for Segment Advance trigger type With single selected once a trigger is received a segment is played once If a trigger is ...

Page 1484: ...cted the waveform is triggered when you press the front panel Trigger key Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Trigger Source Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIGger KEY Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Bus Sets the current trigger source to Bus Selecting Bus trigger source enables triggering over GPIB LAN or USB using the SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger INITiate command Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Trigger Sou...

Page 1485: ...ence Pressing this key changes the central view area to display the Waveform Sequence Creation and Editing view Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Notes No remote command SCPIfront panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Current Segment Specifies the selected sequence segment that will be affected by the menu functions Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Bu...

Page 1486: ... varb Pressing this key changes the current view to the Waveform Management View Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Load Segment To ARB Memory Allows you to load the selected file into ARB memory On the front panel you select the file for loading to the ARB memory by highlighting the desired file in the list Using the SCPI command you specify the file...

Page 1487: ...nal Studio waveform wfm which contains invalid waveform header an error is generated If the ARB is ON when you load afile to ARB memory or delete a file from ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The waveform will be replayed after the ARB operation is finished ARB can be loaded into ARB memory even required licenses do not present on...

Page 1488: ...ct the new directory of interest The current directory is used for manually loading waveform segments into ARB memory for playback and as a search location for waveform segments that are required to be loaded into ARB memory for playback of a waveform sequence or a list sequence Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Notes No remote command SCPIfront panel only ...

Page 1489: ...n if ARB state is On the selected waveform will not be played In this case if the selected waveform is not used in List Sequence it can be deleted and the ARB state is turned Off If the ARB is ON and you load a file to ARB memory or delete a file from ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The waveform will be replayed after the ARB op...

Page 1490: ...m Sequences Build New Sequence Insert New Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Load All To ARB Memory This key functions the same as Load All To ARB Memory on page 2829 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Insert New Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Change Directory This key functions the same...

Page 1491: ...om ARB Memory on page 2831 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Insert New Waveform Segment in ARB Memory Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Query ARB Memory File List Remote Command Only This command functions the same as Query ARB Memory File List Remote Command Only on page 2763 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Edit Selected Waveform Allows access t...

Page 1492: ...Revision A 05 00 Marker 2 Allows you to enable or disable marker 2 for the currently selected waveform For a waveform sequence you can enable and disable markers on a per segment basis allowing you to output markers from some waveform segments within the sequence but not for others Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Edit Selected Waveform Notes No remote com...

Page 1493: ...itial S W Revision A 05 00 Delete Segment Allows you to delete the selected segment from the waveform sequence Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Notes No remote command front panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Save Sequence Pressing this key displays the Save As dialog The sequence name is passed to the save as dialog to use as the filename for saving ...

Page 1494: ...2 M3 M4 M1M2 M1M3 M1M4 M2M3 M2M4 M3M4 M1M2M3 M1M2M4 M1M3M4 M2M3M4 M1M2M3M4 ALL For additional description of each item see Notes below For Setup SCPI on page 1494 For Setup SCPI SOURce RADio ARB SEQuence MWAVeform filename For additional description of each item see Notes For Query SCPI on page 1495 below Example For setup SOUR RAD ARB SEQ NVWFM testSeq1 seq NVWFM wfmSegment1 wfm 10 M2M3M4 NVWFM w...

Page 1495: ...t NVWFM or have an error in the waveform sequence file path an error is generated Notes Error Checks for Query SCPI command Continued If the specified waveform sequence file name suffix is not seq error is generated If you use an unsupported MSUS that is not NVWFM or have an error in the waveform segment file path an error is generated If the first specified waveform file cannot be found an error ...

Page 1496: ...y Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Waveform Utilities Allows you access to the waveform utilities sub menus Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Multi Pack Licenses Allows you access to the Multi Pack License sub menus Pressing this key also changes the central view area to display the Multi Pack License Management view On modular instrument like E6630A or E6640A multi pac...

Page 1497: ...gilent signal sources You can use either one of them Since adding a waveform segment to a Multi Pack license causes the license slot to enter the trial period of only 48 hours pressing this key causes a confirmation dialog to be displayed to ensure you do want to add the waveform segment to the Multi Pack If you attempt to license a waveform that is already licensed using another slot an error is ...

Page 1498: ...r a waveform file has been loaded it needs to be loaded again Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB LOAD string Example SOUR RAD ARB LOAD D VARB testwaveform bin or SOUR RAD ARB LOAD NVWFM testwaveform bin Notes Because loading the file involves a delay of unpredictable length this command should be followed by the query OPC whic...

Page 1499: ...b Notes string specifies the directory on the HDD to load the files into ARB memory from When in Sequence Analyzer mode and Include Source is Yes an attempt to load all files from a directory to ARB memory is rejected with an error When Include Source is No and there is insufficient free ARB memory to load all the waveforms when the ARB memory is full the copy ceases and an error is generated If y...

Page 1500: ...on Hard Disk on page 2828 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Add Waveform Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Load Segment To ARB Memory This key functions the same as Load Segment To ARB Memory on page 2828 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Add Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 ...

Page 1501: ...ense Waveform Add view Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Replace Waveform Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform REPLace int string or SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform REPLace int string Example SYST LKEY WAV REPL 1 myotherwaveform wfm or SYST LIC WAV REPL 1 myotherwaveform wfm Notes The second SCPI SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform REPLace is provided to be consist...

Page 1502: ...To ARB Memory on page 2829 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Replace Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Change Directory This key functions the same as Change Directory on page 2830 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Replace Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior ...

Page 1503: ... Lock Waveform in Slot If the selected slot is in the trial state or the lock required state the waveform that occupies the slot is locked and permanently licensed Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform LOCK int or SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform LOCK int Example SYST LKEY WAV LOCK 1 or SYST LIC WAV LOCK 1 Notes The second SCPI...

Page 1504: ...ut slot number exceeds total available slot number Nonexistent is returned Range Locked Available Trail LockRequired Nonexistent Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Slots Free Query Remote Command Only Returns the number of license slots free Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform FREE or SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform FREE Example SYST LKEY WAV FREE or SYST LIC WAV FREE Notes The second SCPI SYSTem LICense ...

Page 1505: ... less than or equals 0 an error is generated Result type is string If input slot number exceeds total available slot number Nonexistent is returned If no waveform stored in the specified slot then empty string is returned Initial S W Revision A 12 00 Slot Waveform Unique ID Query Remote Command Only Returns the waveform unique ID of the specified slot Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform UID int or...

Page 1506: ...ignal Studio waveform has a unique id recorded in header So if the unique ids are same that means they are same one waveform So besides SCPI to query locked waveform name list also provide a SCPI to query locked waveform unique id list Initial S W Revision A 11 00 Marker Utilities Allows access to the marker utilities sub menus Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Mark...

Page 1507: ...p ARB Marker Utilities Marker Polarity Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB MPOLarity MARKer2 POSitive NEGative SOURce RADio ARB MPOLarity MARKer2 Example SOUR RAD ARB MPOL MARK2 NEG Dependencies When a new waveform is selected for playback the settings contained within the associated waveform header file are applied to the ARB The marker polarity is one of the values stored within the header file If t...

Page 1508: ...tored within the header file If the newly selected waveform file has an associated header file the marker polarity is updated with the value from the header file The marker polarity will remain unchanged if the newly selected waveform does not have an associated header file Preset Pos Range Neg Pos Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Marker Routing Allows access to the marker routing sub menus which allo...

Page 1509: ...lse RF blanking setting is updated with the value from the header file The pulse RF blanking setting will remain unchanged if the newly selected waveform does not have an associated header file Range None M1 M2 M3 M4 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 None Sets no marker to be used for the pulse RF blanking function essentially turning the RF blanking function off Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Ma...

Page 1510: ...ive polarity this is when there are no maker points Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Marker Utilities Marker Routing Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB MDEStination ALCHold NONE M1 M2 M3 M4 SOURce RADio ARB MDEStination ALCHold Example SOUR RAD ARB MDES ALCH NONE Dependencies When a new waveform is selected for playback the settings contained within the associated waveform header file are applied...

Page 1511: ... Marker Utilities Marker Routing ALC Hold Example SOUR RAD ARB MDES PULS M3 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Marker 4 Sets marker 4 to be used for the ALC hold function Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Marker Utilities Marker Routing ALC Hold Example SOUR RAD ARB MDES PULS M4 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Header Utilities Allows access to the header utilities sub menu Pressing this key also causes ...

Page 1512: ...Signal Studio waveform contains a unique waveform ID which recorded in the header This command allows you to query the unique waveform ID from the header This is a SCPI only command User can also checkError Reference source not found for waveform unique ID display Remote Command MMEMory HEADer ID file name Example MMEM HEAD ID test wfm query the waveform already loaded into the ARB memory MMEM HEA...

Page 1513: ...he amplitude modulation Turning AM on when another modulation format is already on results in the previous modulation format being turned off and the generation of an error Key Path Source Modulation Setup AM Remote Command SOURce AM STATe SOURce AM STATe Example SOUR AM STAT OFF Preset Off Range On Off Initial S W Revision A 05 00 AM Depth Allows you to set the amplitude modulation depth in perce...

Page 1514: ...ation Key Path Source Modulation Setup Initial S W Revision A 05 00 FM Enables or disables the frequency modulation Turning FM on when another modulation format is already on results in the previous modulation format being turned off and the generation of an error Key Path Source Modulation Setup FM Remote Command SOURce FM STATe SOURce FM STATe Example SOUR FM STAT OFF Preset Off Range On Off Ini...

Page 1515: ...e SOUR FM INT FREQ 40 0 Hz Preset 400 0 Hz Min 10 Hz Max 40 kHz Initial S W Revision A 05 00 PM Allows access to the menu for configuring the phase modulation Key Path Source Modulation Setup Initial S W Revision A 05 00 PM Enables or disables the phase modulation Turning PM on when another modulation format is already on results in the previous modulation format being turned off and the generatio...

Page 1516: ...Min 10 Hz Max 40 kHz Initial S W Revision A 05 00 List Sequencer Allows you access to the sub menus for configuring the list sequencer List sequences allows you to enter frequencies and amplitudes at unequal intervals in nonlinear ascending descending or random order Each step within the list can also include its own waveform file for playback step duration trigger event and trigger output The com...

Page 1517: ... the output of the source Couplings When in Sequence Analyzer mode and the list sequencer state is Off Include Source is forced to No and the Include Source key is grayed out When in Sequence Analyzer mode and the list sequencer state is On Include Source is available to set And an ARB memory related operation like load or delete will be rejected Preset Off Range On Off Initial S W Revision A 05 0...

Page 1518: ...e List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST NUMBer STEPs integer SOURce LIST NUMBer STEPs Example SOUR LIST NUMB STEP 1 Notes Increasing the number of steps creates additional steps at the end of the list with all the settings within the steps set to their default values Decreasing the number of steps removes steps from the end of the list The settings within the removed steps...

Page 1519: ...vision A 05 00 Delete Step Allows you to delete the current step Deleting a step will automatically decrease the Step Count parameter by 1 If sequence only has one step left delete step will be rejected and popup error 221 Setting conflict Cannot delete current step minimum number of steps reached Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Notes No remote command Front Panel key only If t...

Page 1520: ...evision A 05 00 Internal Sets the trigger input for the current step to Internal Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Step Trigger Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET INP TRIG INT Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Manual Trigger Key Sets the trigger input for the current step to Manual Trigger Key Any step in the sequence set to Manual will cause the sequenc...

Page 1521: ...09 40 Notes Note When on E6640A trigger 2 is a bi directional trigger port So when trigger 2 has been configured as OUTPUT type choosing External 2 as the input trigger for the current step will generate error Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Transition Time Allows you to specify the transition time for the current step The transition time is the amount of time allowed for the source to settle at the ...

Page 1522: ...Revision A 05 00 Radio Setup Allows you access to the sub menus for setting up the radio standard band and radio band link direction for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Notes No remote command front panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Radio Standard Allows access to the sub menus for selecting the radio standard and the associated radio band for use in the ...

Page 1523: ...ision A 05 00 GSM EDGE Pressing this key once selects GSM EDGE as the radio standard and the current GSM EDGE band as the active channel band Pressing this key again allows access to the sub menus for selecting a different GSM EDGE band Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 05 00 P GSM Selects P GSM as the band for the current step Ke...

Page 1524: ...Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM 450 Selects GSM 450 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM 480 Selects GSM 480 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Sta...

Page 1525: ...llows access to the sub menus for selecting a different WCDMA band Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band I Selects Band I as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band II Selects Band II as the band for the current step...

Page 1526: ...equencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band VII Selects Band VII as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band VIII Selects Band VIII as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Stan...

Page 1527: ...equencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIII Selects Band XIII as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIV Selects Band XIV as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Stan...

Page 1528: ... Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 US PCS Selects US PCS as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Japan Cell Selects Japan Cell as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO...

Page 1529: ...S W Revision A 05 00 Secondary 800 Selects Secondary 800 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 400 Euro PAMR Selects 400 Euro PAMR as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision...

Page 1530: ...dard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 US 2 5GHz Selects US 2 5 GHz as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 700 Public Safety Selects 700 Public Safety as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2...

Page 1531: ... 09 50 BAND 2 Selects BAND 2 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 3 Selects BAND 3 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 4 Selects BAND 4 as the band for the current step Key ...

Page 1532: ...st Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 9 Selects BAND 9 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 10 Selects BAND 10 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE...

Page 1533: ...List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 17 Selects BAND 17 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 18 Selects BAND 18 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard...

Page 1534: ...List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 25 Selects BAND 25 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 26 Selects BAND 26 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard...

Page 1535: ...d for use and accesses the LTE TDD specific channel band sub menus Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 33 Selects BAND 33 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND33 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 34 Selects BAND 34 as the band for the current step Key Path Sou...

Page 1536: ...step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND37 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 38 Selects BAND 38 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND38 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 39 Selects BAND 39 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio...

Page 1537: ...Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND42 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 43 Selects BAND 43 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND43 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 44 Selects BAND 44 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup ...

Page 1538: ...tandard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDB Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND C Selects BAND C as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDC Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND D Selects BAND D as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAN...

Page 1539: ...ll calculate the downlink frequency according to a downlink formula together with selected channel band and channel number Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup RADio BAND LINK DOWN UP SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup RADio BAND LINK Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET RAD BAND LINK UP SOUR LIST STEP2 SET RAD BAND LINK Notes SCPI ...

Page 1540: ... Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup CNFRequency double SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup CNFRequency Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET CNFR 1GHz SOUR LIST STEP2 SET CNFR Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 This SCPI is used to setup channel number or frequency setting according to current Radio Band setting If Radio Band is NONE then it s f...

Page 1541: ...ists power setting lower than 130dBm on MPA GPS ports then popup warning message These are only warning messages and check is performed when RF is ON Notes The Min and Max value here defined UI settable amplitude range This range is larger than actual amplitude range with level accuracy defined in spec Dependencies The RF power is dependent on the RF output port and frequency such that the current...

Page 1542: ...ame Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 If the selected waveform contains header which contains ARB play parameters source list sequence will automatically apply header settings of the selected waveform in that step Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Continue Previous Sets the current step to continue with playback of the waveform from the previous step When continuing the previous waveform the ARB pl...

Page 1543: ...her NVWFM MSUS or specifying a full path For more information see Memory Subsystem Remote Command Only If a file of the same name already exists within ARB memory it is overwritten If you wish to load two segments of the same name you must rename one of the segments before loading it into ARB memory To rename a segment you can either use Windows File Explorer or the MMEMory COPY command NOTE When ...

Page 1544: ...f the same name already exists within ARB memory it is overwritten If you wish to load two segments of the same name you must rename one of the segments before loading it into ARB memory To rename a segment you can either use Windows File Explorer or the MEMory COPY command NOTE When a waveform file is loaded to ARB memory burst timing adjustments are made automatically based on whether or not a M...

Page 1545: ...arch location for selecting waveforms using SCPI Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB DEFault DIRectory string SOURce RADio ARB DEFault DIRectory Example SOUR RAD ARB DEF DIR D ArbFiles SOUR RAD ARB DEF DIR State Saved Persistent survives a power cycle and a preset but not saved in the instrument state Initial S W Revision A 05 ...

Page 1546: ...ws you to remove all segments from ARB playback memory Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments in ARB Memory Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB DELete ALL Example SOUR RAD ARB DELete ALL Notes When in Sequence Analyzer mode and Include Source is Yes an attempt to delete all files from ARB memory is rejected with an error When Include Source is No and you attempt to delete all fi...

Page 1547: ...ncer Setup Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Default Directory This key functions the same as Default Directory on page 2830 Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Segments in ARB Memory This key functions the same as Segments in ARB Memory on page 2830 Key Path Source List Sequence...

Page 1548: ...P2 SET DUR TYPE TIME SOUR LIST STEP2 SET DUR TYPE Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 Notes If Step Duration is set to Time or Play Count for the last step the last step of ARB keeps playing as if set to Continuous until the set Time has expired or until the Play Count setting is reached However you can query Error Reference source not found Source Sweeping Condition Message to find out if the c...

Page 1549: ...e and Continuous Abort according to current Duration Type setting is Play Count or Duraton Time or Continuous Abort If current Duration Type is Continuous then popup error 221 Settings conflict Cannot accept time or count input when step duration type is Continuous on step Notes If Duration Time is set for the last step the last step of ARB keeps playing as if set to Continuous after set time expi...

Page 1550: ...ll occur on both Internal and External2 paths Select Off will turn off trigger output Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup OUTPut TRIGger ON OFF 1 0 SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup OUTPut TRIGger Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET OUTP TRIG ON SOUR LIST STEP2 SET OUTP TRIG Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 Preset Off Range On Off Initi...

Page 1551: ...e 2824 5 Frequency Channel Number freq chan num specifies the frequency in Hz or the channel number for the step The channel number and frequency are combined as one parameter that represents the frequency or channel number depending on the radio band setting If the radio band is set to NONE this value is interpreted as a frequency value in Hz If the radio band is set to a valid band this value is...

Page 1552: ...e LIST SETup INPut TRIGger enum enum enum SOURce LIST SETup INPut TRIGger Example SOUR LIST SET INP TRIG IMM INT EXT2 SOUR LIST SET INP TRIG Notes The command is to setup below parameter array of whole list sequence Step Trigger enum specifies the input trigger for the step For details of the valid types of step trigger see Step Trigger on page 2804 If input parameter number exceeds the step numbe...

Page 1553: ...3 Number of Steps As a step is setup the value entered run through several levels of validation R e m o t e C o m m a n d SOURce LIST SETup RADio BAND enum enum enum SOURce LIST SETup RADio BAND E x a m p l e SOUR LIST SET RAD BAND PGSM EGSM RGSM SOUR LIST SET RAD BAND N o t e s The command is to setup below parameter array of whole list sequence Radio Band enum specifies the radio band for the st...

Page 1554: ...6 BAND37 BAND38 BAND39 BAND40 BAN D41 BAND42 BAND43 BANDA BANDB BANDC BANDD BANDE BANDF D e p e n d e n c i e s The range is 1 to 1000 which is determined by the number of steps you have configured For details see Number of Steps on page 2803 I n i t i a l S W R e v i s i o n A 09 40 1554 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1555: ...y or Channel Number parameter array of the whole List Sequencer at one time The number of array is same as step number defined in Number of Steps on page 2803 Number of Steps As a step is setup the value entered run through several levels of validation Remote Command SOURce LIST SETup CNFRequency double double double SOURce LIST SETup CNFRequency Example SOUR LIST SET CNFR 1GHz 100MHz 100MHz SOUR ...

Page 1556: ...ber will be updated Dependencies The range is 1 to 1000 which is determined by the number of steps you have configured For details see Number of Steps on page 2803 Initial S W Revision A 09 40 Step Configuration of Waveform parameter list Remote Command Only This SCPI command is to configure Waveform parameter array of the whole List Sequencer at one time The number of array is same as step number...

Page 1557: ...p Duration enum specifies the duration of the step The duration can be specified to be either time or play count of the ARB file associated with the step or continuous If Waveform is set to CW this value cannot be set to Play Count and an error will be generated If continuous is selected the following Time or Count value is ignored For further details of this setting see Step Duration on page 2833...

Page 1558: ...ameter list Remote Command Only This SCPI command is to configure Output Trigger parameter array of the whole List Sequencer at one time The number of array is same as step number defined in Number of Steps on page 2803 Number of Steps As a step is setup the value entered run through several levels of validation Remote Command SOURce LIST SETup OUTPut TRIGger bool bool bool SOURce LIST SETup OUTPu...

Page 1559: ...tep DATamarker Initial S W Revision A 14 00 BeginningOfStep Sets the output trigger type as BeginningOfStep for the whole source sequence Key Path Source List Sequencer Trigger Type Example SOUR LIST TRIG TYP BEG Notes SCPI is supported after A 14 00 Initial S W Revision A 14 00 DataMarker Sets the output trigger type as DataMarker for the whole source sequence When DataMarker is selected which ma...

Page 1560: ...r Example SOUR LIST TRIG TYPE MARK M3 Notes SCPI is supported after A 14 00 Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Marker 4 Sets the output trigger maker routing to Marker 4 for DataMarker in the whole source sequence Key Path Source List Sequencer Trigger Type DataMarker Example SOUR LIST TRIG TYPE MARK M4 Notes SCPI is supported after A 14 00 Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Manual Trigger Now Pressing this k...

Page 1561: ...Query only SCPI Returning 1 if list sequence has been initiated successfully returning 0 if not Once get 0 you can use SYST ERR to query what error happened Just like OPC this command can be blocked until event status IsSourceSweeping happens and then returns Doing so can help user s script query armed status only once during the time interval of the initiation As an ancillary SCPI of existing SCP...

Page 1562: ...SPAN AUTO ON OFF 0 1 SENSe OBWidth FREQuency SPAN AUTO Example OBW FREQ SPAN 2 4 MHz OBW FREQ SPAN OBW FREQ SPAN AUTO 0 OBW FREQ SPAN AUTO Notes Span Auto Detector SENSe OBWidth FREQuency SPAN AUTO is only available in MSR mode The BAF SCPI is MSR only Couplings When changing the Occupied Bandwidth Span the Resolution Bandwidth and Video Bandwidth are set to AUTO to prevent the span from clipping ...

Page 1563: ...DMA ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD BLUETOOTH WLAN Remote Command SENSe OBWidth FREQuency SPAN FULL Example OBW FREQ SPAN FULL Notes You must be in the Spectrum Analysis mode W CDMA mode ISDB T mode CMMB mode LTE mode LTE TDD mode BLUETOOTH mode WLAN mode cdma2000 mode MSR or WIMAX OFDMA mode to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Dependencies For MSR mode this key is blank Couplings Sel...

Page 1564: ...ode CMMB mode LTE mode LTE TDD mode BLUETOOTH mode WLAN mode cdma2000 mode MSR or WIMAX OFDMA mode to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Couplings Selecting last span changes the measurement span value Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 03 00 1564 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1565: ...C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD BLUETOOTH WLAN MSR Remote Command SENSe OBWidth SWEep TIME time SENSe OBWidth SWEep TIME SENSe OBWidth SWEep TIME AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe OBWidth SWEep TIME AUTO Example OBW SWE TIME 50 ms OBW SWE TIME OBW SWE TIME AUTO ON OBW SWE TIME AUTO Couplings When you manually change the Time this state automatically goes to Man Preset SA WIMAX OFDMA C2K...

Page 1566: ...on a Preset or Auto Couple This means that in the Preset or Auto Coupled state instrument amplitude accuracy specifications do not apply Key Path Sweep Control Sweep Setup Mode SA WCDMA C2K WIMAX OFDMA TD SCDMA 1xEVDO ISDB T CMMB LTE LTETDD BLUETOOTH WLAN MSR Remote Command SENSe OBWidth SWEep TIME AUTO RULes NORMal ACCuracy SENSe OBWidth SWEep TIME AUTO RULes Example OBW SWE TIME AUTO RUL NORM OB...

Page 1567: ...s and the signal at the gate source to control the sweep system with the gate signal Not all measurements allow every type of Gate Methods When Gate is on the annunciation in the measurement bar reflects that it is on and what method is used as seen in the following Gate FFT annunciator graphic Key Path Sweep Control Gate Remote Command SENSe SWEep EGATe STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe SWEep EGATe STATe Ex...

Page 1568: ...ATe VIEW ON OFF 1 0 SENSe SWEep EGATe VIEW Example SWE EGAT VIEW ON turns on the gate view Dependencies In the Swept SA measurement In Gate View the regular Acq Time key is grayed out When pressed the grayed out key puts up the informational message Use Gate View Sweep Time in the Gate menu In the other measurements When you turn Gate View on the lower window takes on the current state of the inst...

Page 1569: ...ved in instrument state Range On Off Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 A sample of the Gate View screen in the Swept SA measurement is shown in the following graphic A sample of the Gate View screen in other measurements is shown in the following graphic This example is for the ACP measurement W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1569 ...

Page 1570: ...he main sweep window and give no indication that the Gate is shut off or that the Gate View window is triggered from the Gate Source When in Gate View vertical lines are displayed in the Gate View window as follows Green lines are displayed at the gate edges as follows in Edge Gate a line is shown for Delay and one for the end of the Gate period defined by Length You can adjust the position of the...

Page 1571: ...ms Dependencies Gate View Acquisition Time is initialized On Preset after initializing delay and length Every time the Gate Method is set changed 1 Compute the location of the gate stop line which you know is at time t tmin GateDelay GateLength Preset 519 3 µs WiMAX OFDMA 5 ms GSM EDGE 1 ms State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 100 ns Max 6000 s Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Gate View ...

Page 1572: ...its of time are required or no units otherwise an invalid suffix error message will be generated Preset 57 7 us WiMAX OFDMA 71 us GSM EDGE 600 us WLAN 500 us WLAN 36 us State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0 0 us Max 100 s Backwards Compatibility SCPI SENSe SWEep TIME GATE DELay ESA compatibility Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Gate Length Controls the length of time that the gate is on...

Page 1573: ...election key for example Trigger Level Trigger Delay etc also affect the corresponding settings under the Trigger menu keys The SCPI commands used for these are the same for Trigger and Gate since there is only one setting which affects both Gate and Trigger Example to set the Trigger Level for External 1 you use the command TRIG EXT1 LEV regardless of whether you are using External 1 as a Trigger...

Page 1574: ... corresponding pop up message Waiting for trigger is generated if no trigger signal appears after approximately 2 sec This message goes away when a trigger signal appears Backwards Compatibility Notes In the past the Average detector was not available when Video triggering was on and consequently functions that set the detector to average such as Marker Noise or Band Intvl Power were not available...

Page 1575: ...the current selected Y axis unit Backwards Compatibility SCPI TRIGger SEQuence IF LEVel TRIGger SEQuence IF LEVel Backwards Compatibility Notes This alias is provided for backward compatibility with VSA PSA comms apps Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Trig Slope Controls the trigger polarity It is set positive to trigger on a rising edge and negative to trigger on a falling edge Key Path Trigg...

Page 1576: ...dencies Grayed out if in use by Point Trigger in the Source Setup menu Forced to Free Run if already selected and Point Trigger is set to External 1 State Saved Saved in instrument state Status Bits OPC dependencies The Status Operation Register bit 5 Waiting for Trigger is set at the same time as the Sweeping or Measuring bit is set It is cleared when the trigger actually occurs that is after the...

Page 1577: ... the Trigger menu and in the Gate Source menu Preset POSitive State Saved Saved in instrument state Backwards Compatibility SCPI TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal SLOPe For backward compatibility the parameter EXTernal is mapped to EXTernal1 Backwards Compatibility SCPI TRIGger SEQuence FRAMe EXTernal1 SLOPe Backwards Compatibility Notes The legacy TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe command affects the slopes for the...

Page 1578: ...tup menu Key Path Trigger Example TRIG SOUR EXT2 Swept SA measurement TRIG meas SOUR EXT2 Measurements other than Swept SA Dependencies In some models there is no second External input In these models the External 2 key is blanked and the EXTernal2 parameter will generate a Hardware missing Not available for this model number message Grayed out if in use by Point Trigger in the Source Setup menu F...

Page 1579: ...mmand TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal2 SLOPe POSitive NEGative TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal2 SLOPe Example TRIG EXT2 SLOP NEG Couplings This same slope is used in the Ext2 selection for the trigger source in the Trigger menu and for the period timer sync source in the Trigger menu and in the Gate Source menu Preset POSitive State Saved Saved in instrument state Backwards Compatibility SCPI TRIGger SEQuence...

Page 1580: ...ected accesses the RF Burst trigger setup menu In some models a variety of burst trigger circuitry is available resulting in various available burst trigger bandwidths The analyzer automatically chooses the appropriate trigger path based on the hardware configuration and other settings of the analyzer Key Path Trigger Example TRIG SOUR RFB Swept SA measurement TRIG meas SOUR RFB Measurements other...

Page 1581: ... that far below the displayed signal level rather than simply to the displayed signal level This is only true for Amplitude Corrections not External Gain or Ref Level Offset functions If mode is Bluetooth the default value is 50 dBm Couplings This same level is used for the RF Burst trigger source in the Trigger menu for the RF Burst selection in the Periodic Timer sync source in the Trigger menu ...

Page 1582: ...st level differs from the previous by more than 0 5 dB the new level is sent to the hardware otherwise it is not updated to avoid slowing down the acquisition Steps 2 and 3 repeat for subsequent measurements Key Path Trigger RF Burst Scope Meas Global Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst LEVel RELative rel_ampl TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst LEVel RELative Example TRIG RFB LEV REL 10 dB sets the trig...

Page 1583: ...selects the internal periodic timer signal as the trigger Triggering occurrences are set by the Period parameter which is modified by the Sync Source and Offset Pressing this key when it is already selected accesses the periodic timer trigger setup functions If you do not have a sync source selected it is Off then the internal timer will not be synchronized with any external timing events Key Path...

Page 1584: ...rce temporarily instead of Offset In this case we might tune to the signal in a narrow span and use the RF Burst trigger to synchronize the periodic timer Then we would turn the sync source off so that it would not miss trigger Miss triggering can occur when we are tuned so far away from the RF burst trigger that it is no longer reliable A third example would be to synchronize to a signal that has...

Page 1585: ...ate Source selection of the period timer Preset 20 ms GSM 4 615383 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 100 000 ns Max 559 0000 ms Default Unit S Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Offset Adjusts the accumulated offset between the periodic timer events and the trigger event Adjusting the accumulated offset is different than setting an offset and requires explanation The periodic timer is u...

Page 1586: ...the period of the trigger waveform Note also that Offset is used only when the sync source is set to OFF otherwise delay is used see section Trig Delay on page 357 An increase in the offset parameter either from the knob or the SCPI adjust command serves to delay the timing of the trigger event Notes When the SCPI command is sent the value shown on the key and the Active Function if this happens t...

Page 1587: ... query Dependencies The invalid data indicator turns on when the offset is changed until the next sweep measurement completes Couplings The same offset is used in the Gate Source selection of the period timer Preset 0 s State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 10 000 s Max 10 000 s Default Unit S Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Reset Offset Display Resets the value of the periodic trigger o...

Page 1588: ... setting is read back to this key and it is also Readback to the previous Periodic Timer trigger key Backwards Compatibility SCPI TRIGger SEQuence FRAMe SYNC EXTernal For backward compatibility the parameter EXTernal is mapped to EXTernal1 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 03 00 A 14 00 Off Turns off the sync source for your periodic trigger With the sync source off ...

Page 1589: ...al 1 trigger input will trigger a new sweep measurement Key Path Trigger External 1 Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal1 LEVel level TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal1 LEVel Example TRIG EXT1 LEV 0 4 V Couplings This same level is used for the Ext1 trigger source in the Trigger menu for the Ext1 selection in the Periodic Timer sync source in the Trigger menu and in the Gate Source menu and also for t...

Page 1590: ...ected accesses the external 2 trigger setup menu Key Path Trigger Example TRIG SOUR EXT2 Swept SA measurement TRIG meas SOUR EXT2 Measurements other than Swept SA Dependencies In some models there is no second External input In these models the External 2 key is blanked and the EXTernal2 parameter will generate a Hardware missing Not available for this model number message Grayed out if in use by ...

Page 1591: ...External 2 Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal2 SLOPe POSitive NEGative TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal2 SLOPe Example TRIG EXT2 SLOP NEG Couplings This same slope is used in the Ext2 selection for the trigger source in the Trigger menu and for the period timer sync source in the Trigger menu and in the Gate Source menu Preset POSitive State Saved Saved in instrument state Backwards Compatibility S...

Page 1592: ...olute Trigger Level Sets the absolute trigger level for the RF burst envelope When using the External Mixing path the Absolute Trigger Level is uncalibrated because the factory default was set to accommodate the expected IF levels for the RF path Key Path Trigger RF Burst Scope Meas Global Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst LEVel ABSolute ampl TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst LEVel ABSolute Example T...

Page 1593: ...nitial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 04 00 Trigger Slope It is set positive to trigger on a rising edge and negative to trigger on a falling edge Key Path Trigger RF Burst Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst SLOPe POSitive NEGative TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst SLOPe Example TRIG RFB SLOP NEG Couplings This same slope is used in the RF Burst selection for the trigger sour...

Page 1594: ...0 ms State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0 ms Max 500 ms Default Unit s Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Auto Holdoff Opens up a menu that lets you adjust Auto Trigger and Trigger Holdoff parameters Key Path Trigger Readback line Displays a summary of the Auto Trig and Holdoff settings in square brackets First line Auto Off or Auto On Second Line Hldf followed by If Holdoff is Off readb...

Page 1595: ...is satisfied the trigger occurs the delay begins and the holdoff time begins New trigger conditions will be ignored until the holdoff time expires For a free running trigger the holdoff value is the minimum time between triggers Key Path Trigger Auto Holdoff Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff time TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff STATe OFF ON 0 1 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff STAT...

Page 1596: ...rnal 1 2 LEVel Notes This command is simply an alias to TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal 1 2 LEVel For details refer Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Gate Polarity Remote Command Only Sets the polarity for the gate signal This setup is now done using the gate trigger s slope setting When Positive Pos is selected a positive going edge Edge or a high voltage Level will satisfy the gate condition after...

Page 1597: ...ts Example OBW SWE POIN 1500 OBW SWE POIN Notes This function is not available when signal identification is set to On external mixing Affected by log sweep Grayed out in measurements that don t support swept Blanked in modes that do not support swept Whenever the number of sweep points change All trace data is erased Any traces with Update Off also go to Display Off like going from View to Blank ...

Page 1598: ...11 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Sweep Control 1598 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1599: ...11 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement System System See System on page 264 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1599 ...

Page 1600: ...W TYPE MINH TRAC OBW TYPE Notes WRITe Clear Write AVERage Average MAXHold Maximum Hold MINHold Minimum Hold Couplings When Detector setting is Auto SENSe OBWidth DETector AUTO Detector SENSe OBWidth DETector FUNCtion switches aligning with the switch of this parameter NORMal with WRITe Clear Write AVERage with AVERage POSitive peak with MAXHold and NEGative peak with MINHold Preset AVERage BLUETOO...

Page 1601: ...on marker functions trace functions and trace averaging functions for the current measurement Key Path Trace Detector Remote Command SENSe OBWidth DETector AUTO ON OFF 1 0 SENSe OBWidth DETector AUTO Example OBW DET AUTO ON OBW DET AUTO Couplings When Detector setting is Auto SENSe OBWidth DETector AUTO Detector SENSe OBWidth DETector FUNCtion switches aligning with the switch of this parameter NO...

Page 1602: ...Power Average RMS The Peak detector determines the maximum of the signal within the sweep points The Sample detector indicates the instantaneous level of the signal at the center of the sweep points represented by each display point The Negative Peak detector determines the minimum of the signal within the sweep points Couplings When Detector setting is Auto SENSe OBWidth DETector AUTO Detector SE...

Page 1603: ...ig Delay See Trig Delay on page 336 External 1 See External 1 on page 1588 Trigger Level See Trigger Level on page 1589 Trig Slope See Trig Slope on page 1589 Trig Delay See Trig Delay on page 339 Zero Span Delay Comp See Zero Span Delay Comp On Off on page 1577 External 2 See External 2 on page 1590 Trigger Level See Trigger Level on page 1590 Trig Slope See Trig Slope on page 1591 W CDMA HSPA Me...

Page 1604: ...ee Relative Trigger Level on page 1582 Trig Slope See Trigger Slope on page 1593 Trig Delay See Trig Delay on page 346 Periodic Timer See Periodic Timer Frame Trigger on page 1583 Period See Period on page 1585 Offset See Offset on page 1585 Reset Offset Display See Reset Offset Display on page 1587 Sync Source See Sync Source on page 1587 Off See Off on page 1588 External 1 See External 1 on page...

Page 1605: ...on page 1590 Trig Slope See Trig Slope on page 1591 RF Burst See RF Burst on page 1591 Absolute Trigger See Absolute Trigger Level on page 1592 Trig Slope See Trigger Slope on page 1593 Trig Delay See Trig Delay on page 357 Auto Holdoff See Auto Holdoff on page 1594 Auto Trig See Auto Trig on page 1594 Trig Holdoff See Trig Holdoff on page 1595 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1605 ...

Page 1606: ...itch as it can in legacy analyzers If you want to recall all modes to their user preset file state you will need to do a User Preset after mode switching into each mode User Preset recalls mode state which can now include data like traces whereas on ESA and PSA User Preset did not affect data Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 User Preset User Preset sets the state of the currently active mode ...

Page 1607: ...ls all of the User Preset files for each mode switches to the power on mode and activates the saved measurement from the power on mode User Preset file When the instrument is secured all of the user preset files are converted back to their default user preset files The User Preset function does the following Aborts the currently running measurement Switches the Mode to the power on mode Restores t...

Page 1608: ...e mode and its State You can recall this User Preset file by pressing the User Preset menu key or sending the SYST PRES USER remote command This same state is also saved by the Save State function Key Path User Preset Remote Command SYSTem PRESet USER SAVE Example SYST PRES USER SAVE Notes SYST PRES SAVE creates the same file as if the user requested a SAV or a MMEM STOR STAT except User Preset Sa...

Page 1609: ...umber of dBs down from the highest signal point within the OBW Span For example If the x dB parameter is set to 26 dB and the Occupied BW Span is set to 10 MHz then the maximum signal power level is first determined from the 10 MHz wide trace sweep Next the two furthest frequencies below xdb_f1 and above xdb_f2 the frequency of the maximum level occurrence are found where the signal level is 26 dB...

Page 1610: ...11 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement View Display For TD SCDMA mode only 1610 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1611: ...11 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement View Display For Bluetooth mode only W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1611 ...

Page 1612: ... measurements in all modes Key Path Display Key Path View Display Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Annotation Turns on and off various parts of the display annotation The annotation is divided up into four categories 1 Meas Bar This is the measurement bar at the top of the screen It does not include the settings panel or the Active Function Turning off the Meas Bar turns off the settings pane...

Page 1613: ...traces showing their detector or their math mode 4 Active Function annotation this is the active function display in the meas bar and all of the active function values displayed on softkeys See the figure below Each type of annotation can be turned on and off individually Key Path View Display Display Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Meas Bar On Off This function turns the Measurement Bar on ...

Page 1614: ...When off the graticule expands to fill the entire graticule area leaving only the 1 5 gap above the graticule as described in the Trace Detector chapter Key Path View Display Display Annotation Remote Command DISPlay ANNotation SCReen STATe OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay ANNotation SCReen STATe Example DISP ANN SCR OFF Dependencies Grayed out and forced to OFF when System Display Settings Annotation is set to...

Page 1615: ...ff Preset On This should remain Off through a Preset when System DisplaySettings Annotation is set to Off State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Title Displays menu keys that enable you to change or clear a title on your display Key Path View Display Display Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Change Title Writes a title into the measurement name field in the...

Page 1616: ...TL DATA This Is My Title This example is for Measurements other than Swept SA Both set the title to This Is My Title Notes Pressing this key cancels any active function When a title is edited the previous title remains intact it is not cleared and the cursor goes at the end so that characters can be added or BKSP can be used to go back over previous characters Preset No title measurement name inst...

Page 1617: ...de of the meas local annotation settings When it is All Off it forces ScreenAnnotation Meas Bar Trace and Active Function Values settings to be OFF for all measurements in all modes This provides the security based annotation off function of previous analyzers hence it uses the legacy SCPI command When it is All Off the Screen Meas Bar Trace and Active Function Values keys under the Display Annota...

Page 1618: ...ility Notes In ESA and PSA we offer the choice of Reverse Bitmap or Reverse Metafile when saving screen images This is much like the Flat Color theme available in X Series Also if you selected Reverse Bitmap AND a black white screen image that would be much like Flat Monochrome In other words each of the X Series themes has a similar screen image type in ESA PSA But they are not identical Initial ...

Page 1619: ...mple MMEM STOR SCR THEM FCOL Readback Flat Color Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Flat Monochrome Selects a format that is like Flat Color But only black is used no colors not even gray and no fill Key Path Save Screen Image Themes Example MMEM STOR SCR THEM FMON Readback Flat Mono Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1619 ...

Page 1620: ...11 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement View Display 1620 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1621: ...Therefore it does not provide pass fail type of results For more details see Code Domain Measurement Description on page 1640 below This topic contains the following sections Measurement Commands for Code Domain on page 1622 Remote Command Results for Code Domain on page 1623 Undefined variable Primary ProductName W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1621 ...

Page 1622: ...e the measurement results CONFigure CDPower CONFigure CDPower NDEFault INITiate CDPower FETCh CDPower n READ CDPower n MEASure CDPower n For measurement related commands that are shared with other measurements see the section Remote Measurement Functions on page 2642 1622 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1623: ... 16QAM QPSK BPSK are returned but 64QAM 4PAM are not returned Therefore 64QAM channel is measured and returned as either 16QAM or QPSK and 4PAM channel is measured and returned as BPSK When W CDMA HSPA option license is not enabled QPSK BPSK are returned but 64QAM 16QAM 4PAM are not returned Therefore either 64QAM or 16QAM channel is measured and returned as QPSK and 4PAM channel is measured and r...

Page 1624: ...DPCH BTS tHS DPCCH MS See item 8 for Total Power over one slot specified by Meas Offset 6 Channel Power floating dBc or dBm The absolute or relative relative to Total Power power of the selected code over the measurement period selected by Meas Offset Meas Interval and tDPCH BTS tHS DPCCH MS 7 tDPCH tHS DPCCH floating x256 chips BTS mode In tDPCH auto detection mode the offset delay time for the s...

Page 1625: ... In MS mode the value returned is 999 0 15 Number of active channel floating no unit The number of active channel for one slot specified by Meas Offset 16 P SCH Primary SCH Power floating dBm The P SCH power over one slot specified by Meas Offset In MS mode the value returned is 999 0 17 S SCH Secondary SCH Power floating dBm The S SCH power over one slot specified by Meas Offset In MS mode the va...

Page 1626: ...TS mode the value returned is 999 0 not specified or n 1 continued 42 DPDCH 2 Beta Measured floating no unit 43 If Sync Type is DPCCH the measured value of the DPDCH 2 beta factor over one slot specified by Meas Offset 44 If DPCH E DPCH not Config 1 the value returned is 999 0 45 If Sync Type is PRACH Message the value returned is 999 0 46 In BTS mode the value returned is 999 0 47 DPDCH 3 Beta Me...

Page 1627: ... slot specified by Meas Offset 75 In BTS mode the value returned is 999 0 76 Q Channel Maximum Inactive Power floating dBc or dBm 77 The maximum average power of inactive Q channels over one slot specified by Meas Offset 78 In BTS mode the value returned is 999 0 79 Nominal Ratio Between HS DPCCH And DPCCH floating 80 If Sync Type is DPCCH amplitude ratio of the nominal value based on the measured...

Page 1628: ... is DPCCH the DPCCH slot format value used for synchronization is returned 0 0 Slot Format 0 1 0 Slot Format 1 2 0 Slot Format 2 3 0 Slot Format 3 4 0 Slot Format 4 5 0 Slot Format 5 If Sync Type is PRACH the value returned is 999 0 In BTS mode the value returned is 999 0 91 Preamble Signature floating BTS mode Always the returned value is 999 0 MS mode In Preamble Signature auto detection mode th...

Page 1629: ...onfig is one of Config 2 w DPCH Config 2 w o DPCH and Config 3 the measured value of E DPDCH on I axis C8 128 C7 64 C6 32 C5 16 C4 8 C3 4 C2 2 or C1 1 beta factor If DPCH E DPCH Config is Config 1 the value returned is 999 0 If Sync Type is PRACH Message the value returned is 999 0 In BTS mode the value returned is 999 0 97 E DPDCH 2nd on Q axis Beta Measured floating If Sync Type is DPCCH and DPC...

Page 1630: ...preading factor 15 ksps the symbol rate is duplicated active symbol rate 15 ksps times N 256 1st number 1st in phase code symbol rate over one slot specified by Meas Offset including SCH period 2nd number 1st quad phase code symbol rate over one slot specified by Meas Offset including SCH period 2N 1 th number Nth in phase code symbol rate over one slot specified by Meas Offset including SCH perio...

Page 1631: ... the 1st symbol decision point 2nd number Q of the 1st symbol decision point 3rd number I of the 2nd symbol decision point 4th number Q of the 2nd symbol decision point 2N 1 th number I of the Nth symbol decision point 2N th number Q of the Nth symbol decision point IQ Corrected Measured Trace is scaled as follows QPSK The values of I and Q in the measured trace are normalized by the maximum value...

Page 1632: ... 2N th number quad phase bit of the Nth I Q pair where N is the number of the symbols in the entire capture length If a channel s modulation scheme is 16QAM queried data represents alternating i1 q1 i2 and q2 sequences as follows 1st number i1 bit of the 1st symbol 2nd number q1 bit of the 1st symbol 3rd number i2 bit of the 1st symbol 4th number q2 bit of the 1st symbol 5th number i1 bit of the 2...

Page 1633: ...t number i1 bit of the 1st symbol for 4PAM on I branch 2nd number i2 bit of the 1st symbol for 4PAM on I branch 3rd number q bit of the 1st symbol for BPSK on Q branch 4th number i1 bit of the 2nd symbol for 4PAM on I branch 5th number i2 bit of the 2nd symbol for 4PAM on I branch 6th number q bit of the 2nd symbol for BPSK on Q branch 3N 2 th number i1 bit of the Nth symbol for 4PAM on I branch 3...

Page 1634: ...e entire capture length n 12 Demod Bits For Selected Measurement Period Returns series of floating point numbers of symbol values for the selected code channel for the measurement period selected by Meas Offset Meas Interval and tDPCH BTS tHS DPCCH MS If CALCulate CDPower DBITs FORMat is set to BINary and CALCulate CDPower PCKM is set to OFF each value in the trace is either 0 0 or 1 0 If CALCulat...

Page 1635: ... data represents alternating i1 q1 i2 q2 i3 and q3 sequences as follows 1st number i1 bit of the 1st symbol 2nd number q1 bit of the 1st symbol 3rd number i2 bit of the 1st symbol 4th number q2 bit of the 1st symbol 5th number i3 bit of the 1st symbol 6th number q3 bit of the 1st symbol 6N 5 th number i1 bit of the Nth symbol 6N 4 th number q1 bit of the Nth symbol 6N 3 th number i2 bit of the Nth...

Page 1636: ...follows 1st number i bit of the 1st symbol for BPSK on I branch 2nd number q1 bit of the 1st symbol for 4PAM on Q branch 3rd number q2 bit of the 1st symbol for 4PAM on Q branch 4th number i bit of the 2nd symbol for BPSK on I branch 5th number q1 bit of the 2nd symbol for 4PAM on Q branch 6th number q2 bit of the 2nd symbol for 4PAM on Q branch 3N 2 th number i bit of the Nth symbol for BPSK on I...

Page 1637: ...nch channels 4PAM No DTX Float value 00 0 I1 I2 0 Q For BPSK on I branch channels and 4PAM on Q branch channels 4PAM No DTX Float value 00 0 0 I Q1 Q2 The returned data is a sequence of float numbers as follows 1st number Packed Demod bits of 1st symbol 2nd number Packed Demod bits of 2nd symbol 3rd number Packed Demod bits of 3rd symbol Nth number Packed Demod bits of Nth symbol where N is the nu...

Page 1638: ... of the number is 0 0 QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying 2 0 16QAM 16Quadrature Amplified Modulation 4 0 64QAM 64Quadrature Amplified Modulation 10 0 BPSK Binary Phase Shift Keying on I branch only 11 0 BPSK Binary Phase Shift Keying on Q branch only 12 0 4PAM Pulse Amplitude Modulation on I branch only 13 0 4PAM Pulse Amplitude Modulation on Q branch only 14 0 BPSK on I branch and BPSK on Q branc...

Page 1639: ...ode Domain Measurement Index n Mnemonic Results Returned 7 Reserved NaN returned 8 Reserved NaN returned 9 Reserved NaN returned 10 Reserved NaN returned W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1639 ...

Page 1640: ...nd uplink are quite different Even though some key parameters and mnemonics are shared by downlink and uplink the measurement functions are context sensitive depending on the Radio Device selection Key Path Meas Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 1640 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1641: ...onality depends on the selected view and window For details of each selection see Power Graph Metrics View CDP Window Y Ref Value on page 1641 CDP Graph CDE Graph View CDP Window Y Ref Value on page 1642 CDP Graph CDE Graph View CDE Window Y Ref Value on page 1643 I Q Error View Mag Error Window Y Ref Value on page 1643 I Q Error View Phase Error Window Y Ref Value on page 1644 I Q Error View EVM ...

Page 1642: ...ior to A 02 00 CDP Graph CDE Graph View CDP Window Y Ref Value Sets the absolute power reference value for Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error graph views in the CDP window Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay CDPower VIEW2 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel real DISPlay CDPower VIEW2 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel Example DISP CDP VIEW2 WIND TRAC Y RLEV 10 0 DISP CDP VIEW2 WIND ...

Page 1643: ...Max 250 0 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 I Q Error View Mag Error Window Y Ref Value Sets the absolute power reference value for the magnitude error view in the I Q Error window Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay CDPower VIEW3 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel real DISPlay CDPower VIEW3 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel Example DISP CDP VIEW3 WIND TRAC Y RLEV 0 0 DISP CDP VIEW...

Page 1644: ... Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 I Q Error View EVM Window Y Ref Value Sets the absolute power reference value for the EVM view in the I Q Error window Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay CDPower VIEW3 WINDow3 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel real DISPlay CDPower VIEW3 WINDow3 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel Example DISP CDP VIEW3 WIND3 TRAC Y RLEV 1 0 DISP CDP VIEW3 WIND3 TRAC Y RLEV Notes Ta...

Page 1645: ...mbol power view in the CDP window Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay CDPower VIEW4 WINDow2 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel real DISPlay CDPower VIEW4 WINDow2 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel Example DISP CDP VIEW4 WIND2 TRAC Y RLEV 1 0 DISP CDP VIEW4 WIND2 TRAC Y RLEV Notes Target window to control depends on the SubOpCode Couplings When Auto Scaling on page 1663 is set to On this value is automati...

Page 1646: ...ets the absolute power reference value for the symbol power view of the Demod Bits function in the CDP window Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay CDPower VIEW5 WINDow2 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel real DISPlay CDPower VIEW5 WINDow2 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel Example DISP CDP VIEW5 WIND2 TRAC Y RLEV 1 0 DISP CDP VIEW5 WIND2 TRAC Y RLEV Notes Target window to control depends on the SubOpCode ...

Page 1647: ...0 0 Max 250 0 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Range This key is only available when I Q is the selected input It replaces the Attenuation key in that case Each input channel I and Q has four internal gain ranges The maximum allowed voltage in each gain range is slightly more than the nominal value so the break point between ranges is a couple of millivolts higher than the nominal setting a p...

Page 1648: ...s are affected by the External Gain parameters and by the Center Frequency The hardware compensates for frequency response and alters the Range setting Preset 0 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 100 Max 100 Initial S W Revision A 12 50 Adjust Range For Min Clip Sets the combination of attenuation and gain based on the current measured signal level so that clipping will be at a minimum This...

Page 1649: ...S W Revision A 03 00 Peak to Average The Peak to Average Ratio is used with the Range setting to optimize the level control in the instrument The value is the ratio in dB of the peak power to the average power of the signal to be measured A ratio of 0 should be used for sinusoidal signals for 802 11g OFDM signals use 9 dB All Applications Modes will show the current value of Peak to Average ratio ...

Page 1650: ...ain range for the I channel when Input Path is I Only or I and I Q and it is used for both the I and Q channels when the Input Path is I jQ See I Q Gain Ranges Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Range Remote Command SENSe VOLTage IQ I RANGe UPPer voltage SENSe VOLTage IQ I RANGe UPPer Example Set the I Range to 0 5 V Peak VOLT IQ RANG 0 5 V Notes The numeric entries are mapped to the smallest gain range whose...

Page 1651: ...ange states 1V Peak 0 5V Peak 0 25V Peak and 0 125V Peak will vary with Reference Z Here are some examples 50Ω 10 4 2 8 75Ω 8 2 2 2 3 8 9 8 600Ω 0 8 6 8 12 8 18 9 Preset 10 0 dBm Range 20 dBm to 10 dBm Min 20 dBm Max 10 dBm Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 1 V Peak Set the channel gain state to 1 Volt Peak Key Path AMPTD Y Scale I Range Q Range Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 0 5 V Peak...

Page 1652: ...Q channel range settings Couplings When Q Same as I is On the I Range value will be copied to the Q Range and the range value keys are disabled Changing the value will also set Range Man Preset 1 V Peak State Saved Saved in instrument state Range 1 V Peak 0 5 V Peak 0 25 V Peak 0 125 V Peak Min 0 125 V Max 1 V Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe POWer IQ Q RANGe UPPer ampl S...

Page 1653: ...ime Q Same as I is Off the I and Q channel setups will be identical Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Range Q Range Remote Command SENSe VOLTage POWer IQ MIRRored OFF ON 0 1 SENSe VOLTage POWer IQ MIRRored Example Turn off the mirroring of I Range to Q Range VOLT IQ MIRR OFF POW IQ MIRR OFF Couplings When On the I Range value is mirrored copied to the Q Range Preset On State Saved Saved in instrument state R...

Page 1654: ...ges to Off This functionality depends on the selected view and window For details of each selection see Power Graph Metrics View CDP Window Y Scale Div on page 1655 CDP Graph CDE Graph View CDP Window Y Scale Div on page 1655 CDP Graph CDE Graph View CDE Window Y Scale Div on page 1656 I Q Error View Mag Error Window Y Scale Div on page 1656 I Q Error View Phase Error Window Y Scale Div on page 16...

Page 1655: ...pCode Preset 10 00 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0 10 Max 20 00 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 CDP Graph CDE Graph View CDP Window Y Scale Div Sets the vertical display sensitivity measurement result for Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error graph views in the CDP window Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay CDPower VIEW2 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision rea...

Page 1656: ...ts the sensitivity measurement result for the magnitude error view in the I Q Error window Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay CDPower VIEW3 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision real DISPlay CDPower VIEW3 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision Example DISP CDP VIEW3 WIND TRAC Y PDIV 5 0 DISP CDP VIEW3 WIND TRAC Y PDIV Notes Target window to control depends on the SubOpCode Couplings If ...

Page 1657: ...cale Div Sets the sensitivity measurement result for the EVM view in the I Q Error window Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay CDPower VIEW3 WINDow3 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision real DISPlay CDPower VIEW3 WINDow3 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision Example DISP CDP VIEW3 WIND3 TRAC Y PDIV 5 0 DISP CDP VIEW3 WIND3 TRAC Y PDIV Notes Target window to control depends on the SubOpCode Couplings If A...

Page 1658: ...PTD Y Scale Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay CDPower VIEW4 WINDow2 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision real DISPlay CDPower VIEW4 WINDow2 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision Example DISP CDP VIEW4 WIND2 TRAC Y PDIV 5 0 DISP CDP VIEW4 WIND2 TRAC Y PDIV Notes Target window to control depends on the SubOpCode Couplings If Auto Scaling on page 1663 is set to On this value is automatically determined by the measurement resul...

Page 1659: ...2 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision real DISPlay CDPower VIEW5 WINDow2 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision Example DISP CDP VIEW5 WIND2 TRAC Y PDIV 5 0 DISP CDP VIEW5 WIND2 TRAC Y PDIV Notes Target window to control depends on the SubOpCode Couplings If Auto Scaling on page 1663 is set to On this value is automatically determined by the measurement result When you set this value manually Auto Scaling automatically chan...

Page 1660: ...ds on the selected view and window For details of each selection see I Q Error View Mag Error Window Y Ref Position on page 1660 I Q Error View Phase Error Window Y Ref Position on page 1661 I Q Error View Evm Window Y Ref Position on page 1661 Demod Bits View Symbol Power Window Y Ref Position on page 1662 Long Demod View Symbol Power Window Y Ref Position on page 1662 Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Init...

Page 1661: ...TRAC Y RPOS CENT DISP CDP VIEW3 WIND2 TRAC Y RPOS Notes Target window to control depends on the SubOpCode Preset CENTer State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Top Ctr Bot Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 I Q Error View Evm Window Y Ref Position Positions the Y axis scale reference level at the top center or bottom of the display in the EVM view of the I Q Error window Key Path Span X Sca...

Page 1662: ...OpCode Preset CENTer State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Top Ctr Bot Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Long Demod View Symbol Power Window Y Ref Position Positions the Y axis scale reference level at the top center or bottom of the display in the in the symbol power view of the Demod Bits Long mode function in the CDP window Key Path Span X Scale Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay CDPow...

Page 1663: ...les the Auto Scaling function between On and Off for the magnitude error view of the I Q Error window Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay CDPower VIEW3 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe COUPle 0 1 OFF ON DISPlay CDPower VIEW3 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe COUPle Example DISP CDP VIEW3 WIND TRAC Y COUP ON DISP CDP VIEW3 WIND TRAC Y COUP Notes Target window to control depends on the SubOpCode Cou...

Page 1664: ...Scaling function between On and Off in the EVM view of the I Q Error window Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay CDPower VIEW3 WINDow3 TRACe Y SCALe COUPle 0 1 OFF ON DISPlay CDPower VIEW3 WINDow3 TRACe Y SCALe COUPle Example DISP CDP VIEW3 WIND3 TRAC Y COUP ON DISP CDP VIEW3 WIND3 TRAC Y COUP Notes Target window to control depends on the SubOpCode Couplings Upon pressing the f...

Page 1665: ... 00 Long Demod View Symbol Power Window Y Auto Scaling Toggles the Auto Scaling function between On and Off in the symbol power view of the Demod Bits Long mode function in the CDP window Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay CDPower VIEW6 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe COUPle 0 1 OFF ON DISPlay CDPower VIEW6 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe COUPle Example DISP CDP VIEW6 WIND TRAC Y COUP ON DISP ...

Page 1666: ...nformation This is only available when the selected input is RF Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 03 00 µW Path Control The µW Path Control functions include the µW Preselector Bypass Option MPB and Low Noise Path Option LNP controls in the High Band path circuits See uW Path Control 4027 under AMPTD Y Scale for more information Key Path AMPTD ...

Page 1667: ...l Auto Man parameters in manual mode It decouples all the coupled instrument parameters and is not recommended for making measurements Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 More Information There are two types of functions that have Auto Manual modes Auto Man Active Function keys An Auto Man toggle key controls the binary state associated with an instrument parameter by toggling between Auto where...

Page 1668: ...12 Code Domain Measurement Auto Couple 1668 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1669: ...ere is no BW functionality supported in the Code Domain measurement The front panel key displays a blank menu when pressed Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1669 ...

Page 1670: ...s etc when in Continuous mode When the average count reaches the Average Hold Number the count stops incrementing but the analyzer keeps sweeping See the Trace Detector section for the averaging formula used both before and after the Average Hold Number is reached The trigger condition must be met prior to each sweep The type of trace processing for multiple sweeps is set under the Trace Detector ...

Page 1671: ...he INIT CONT 0 command will place the analyzer in Single Sweep but will have no effect on the current sequence until k N at which point the current sequence will stop and the instrument will go to the idle state W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1671 ...

Page 1672: ...12 Code Domain Measurement File File See File on page 258 1672 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1673: ...eq The center frequency setting is the same for all measurements within a mode that is it is Meas Global Some modes are also able to share a Mode Global center frequency value If this is the case the Mode will have a Global Settings key in its Mode Setup menu The Center Freq function sets and queries the Center Frequency for the currently selected input If your analyzer has multiple inputs and you...

Page 1674: ...SCPI command The other parameter is forced to a different value if needed to keep the Start and the Stop Frequencies within the analyzer s frequency range Preset Depends on instrument maximum frequency mode measurement and selected input See Center Frequency Presets on page 1674 and RF Center Freq on page 1676 and Ext Mix Center Freq and I Q Center Freq on page 1678 State Saved Saved in instrument...

Page 1675: ...6 5 GHz 26 55 GHz 526 N9038A 1 805 GHz 3 6 GHz 27 0 GHz 532 16 005 GHz 32 0 GHz 32 5 GHz 543 21 505 GHz 43 0 GHz TBD 544 22 005 GHz 44 0 GHz 44 5 GHz 550 25 005 GHz 50 0 GHz 51 GHz Input 2 Model CF after Mode Preset Stop Freq after Mode Preset Max Freq can t tune above N9000A opt C75 0 7505GHz 1 5 GHz 1 58 GHz N9038A 505 MHz 1 GHz 1 000025 GHz Tracking Generator Frequency Limits N9000A only Tracki...

Page 1676: ...ly selected input Scope Meas Global Remote Command SENSe FREQuency RF CENTer freq SENSe FREQuency RF CENTer Example FREQ RF CENT 30 MHz Notes This command is the same in all modes but the parameter is Measurement Global So the value is independent in each mode and common across all the measurements in the mode Dependencies If the electronic soft attenuator is enabled any attempt to set Center Freq...

Page 1677: ...command is the same in all modes but the parameter is Measurement Global So the value is independent in each mode and common across all the measurements in the mode Couplings When returning to External Mixing after having been switched to one of the other inputs e g RF you will come back into the settings that you had when you left External Mixing So you will come back to the band you were in with...

Page 1678: ...he input which is selected at the time the command is sent Note that the Center Freq function in the Frequency menu on the front panel always applies to the currently selected input Scope Meas Global Remote Command SENSe FREQuency IQ CENTer freq SENSe FREQuency IQ CENTer Example FREQ IQ CENT 30 MHz Notes This command is the same in all modes but the parameter is Measurement Global So the value is ...

Page 1679: ...results in an advisory message If the equivalent SCPI command is sent this same message is generated as part of a 221 Settings conflict warning Couplings When auto coupled in a non zero span the center frequency step size is set to 10 of the span When auto coupled in zero span the center frequency step size is set to the equivalent 3 dB RBW value Preset Auto ADEMOD 1 MHz ON State Saved Saved in in...

Page 1680: ...12 Code Domain Measurement Input Output Input Output See Input Output on page 190 1680 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1681: ...en on the trace determined by the Marker Trace rules At the same time reference value of the selected marker appears on the Active Function area When Marker Trace is POLar I Q Polar Delta is not supported Key Path Marker Mode WCDMA Remote Command CALCulate CDPower MARKer 1 2 12 MODE POSition DELTa OFF CALCulate CDPower MARKer 1 2 12 MODE Example CALC CDP MARK MODE POS CALC CDP MARK MODE Notes When...

Page 1682: ...rker Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Relative To Selects the marker the selected marker will be relative to its reference marker Key Path Marker Properties Mode WCDMA Remote Command CALCulate CDPower MARKer 1 2 12 REFerence integer CALCulate CDPower MARKer 1 2 12 REFerence Example CALC CDP MARK REF 4 CALC CDP MARK REF Notes A marker cannot be relative to itself so that choice is grayed out a...

Page 1683: ... When this function is true On moving any marker causes an equal X axis movement of every other marker except those located to the polar trace and Chip value of the marker located to the polar trace which is not Off including Fixed markers Equal X Axis movement refers to the difference between each marker s X Axis value in the fundamental x axis units of the trace that marker is on and the X Axis ...

Page 1684: ...query returns the marker s symbol value in the trace if the control mode is Normal The query is returned in symbols If the marker is Off the response is not a number This parameter has different meanings between the cases where the marker trace is set to Symbol I Q Polar Vector and others In the Symbol I Q Polar Vector Graph X Axis Value is also the measured value therefore this parameter is meani...

Page 1685: ...mote Command only Sets the marker X position in trace points It has no effect if the control mode is Off but is the SCPI equivalent of entering a value if the control mode is Normal or Delta except in trace points rather than X Axis Scale units The entered value is immediately translated into the current X Axis Scale units for setting the value of the marker Mode WCDMA Remote Command CALCulate CDP...

Page 1686: ...12 FUNCtion RESult Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Backward Compatibility SCPI Commands Sets or queries the state of a marker Setting a marker that is OFF to state ON or 1 puts it in Normal mode and places it at the center of the screen Mode WCDMA Remote Command CALCulate CDPower MARKer 1 2 12 STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate CDPower MARKer 1 2 12 STATe Example CALC CDP MARK3 STATe ON CALC CDP MAR...

Page 1687: ...tion There are no Marker Function operations supported in the Code Domain measurement The front panel key displays a blank menu when pressed Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1687 ...

Page 1688: ... screen as a normal type marker Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Mkr Despread Executes post processing for the selected marker Key Path Marker Mkr Despread Mode WCDMA Remote Command CALCulate CDPower MARKer 1 2 12 SET DESPread Example CALC CDP MARK4 SET DESP Dependencies This function is available only when the marker trace is either CDPower or CDError Initial S W Rev...

Page 1689: ...nter Help press the Help key and press that key Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Remote Measurement Functions This section contains the following topics Measurement Group of Commands on page 2643 Current Measurement Query Remote Command Only on page 2645 Limit Test Current Results Remote Command Only on page 2645 Data Query Remote Command Only on page 2645 Calculate C...

Page 1690: ...I is the default format for the data output Older versions of Spectrum Analysis and Phase Noise mode measurements only use ASCII The binary data formats should be used for handling large blocks of data since they are smaller and faster than the ASCII format Refer to the FORMat DATA command for more information If you need to change some of the measurement parameters from the factory default settin...

Page 1691: ...or is set to 1 If the n value is set to a value other than 1 the selected trace data results will be returned See each command for details of what types of scalar results or trace data results are available The binary data formats should be used for handling large blocks of data since they are smaller and transfer faster than the ASCII format FORMat DATA FETCh may be used to return results other t...

Page 1692: ...hey are smaller and faster than the ASCII format FORMat DATA Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Current Measurement Query Remote Command Only This command returns the name of the measurement that is currently running Remote Command CONFigure Example CONF Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Limit Test Current Results Remote Command Only Queries the status of the current measurement limit testi...

Page 1693: ... DATA n COMPress BLOCk CFIT MAXimum MINimum MEAN DMEan RMS RMSCubed SAMPle SDEViation PPHase soffset length roffset rlimit Example To query the mean power of a set of GSM bursts Supply a signal that is a set of GSM bursts Select the IQ Waveform measurement in IQ Analyzer Mode Set the sweep time to acquire at least one burst Set the triggers such that acquisition happens at a known position relativ...

Page 1694: ... that is the arithmetic mean of the data point values in dB dBm for the specified region s of trace data For I Q trace data the mean of the magnitudes of the I Q pairs is returned See the following equations If the original trace data is in dB this function returns the arithmetic mean of those log values not log of the mean power which is a more useful value The mean of the log is the better measu...

Page 1695: ...for Specified Region s where Xi is the complex value representation of an I Q pair Xi its conjugate complex number and n is the number of I Q pairs in the specified region s Once you have the rms value for a region of trace data linear or I Q you may want to calculate the mean power You must convert this rms value peak volts to power in dBm SAMPle returns the first data value x y pair for the spec...

Page 1696: ...ied by data point in PPHase The rms power of the specified region may be expressed as Power 10 x log 10 x RMS I Q value 10 The RMS I Q value peak volts is where Xi is the complex value representation of an I Q pair Xi its conjugate complex number and n is the number of I Q pairs in the specified region The arithmetic mean phase of the specified region may be expressed as where Yi is the unwrapped ...

Page 1697: ...e compressed into one value This parameter has a default value equal to the current trace length roffset repeat offset is an optional real number It is in seconds for time domain traces and is a dimensionless index 0 to Npoints 1 for frequency domain traces It defines the beginning of the next field of trace elements to be compressed This is relative to the beginning of the previous field This par...

Page 1698: ...cy TIME Example Example for Swept SA measurement in Spectrum Analyzer Mode CALC DATA4 PEAK 40 10 FREQ GTDL This will identify the peaks of trace 4 that are above 40 dBm with excursions of at least 10 dB The peaks are returned in order of increasing frequency starting with the lowest frequency Only the peaks that are above the display line are returned Query Results 1 With FORMat DATA REAL 32 selec...

Page 1699: ...orming real time overlapped FFTs at the hardware layer using software for basic post processing before returning the result to the user The upshot of this approach is improved throughput for user applications that require many sequential power measurements The analysis bandwidth of FP2 is limited by the licenses in the instrument but its maximum overall analysis bandwidth per acquisition is 40 MHz...

Page 1700: ...the configuration string Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Acquisition Time Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF AcquisitionTime 0 002 Notes The acquisition time parameter sets the time in which the entire spectrum is measured An increase in the acquisition time yields an improvement in measurement repeatability Preset 0 001 s Range 0 s to 1 s Default Unit Time s Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Center Frequency Exa...

Page 1701: ...s subtracted from all measurements This effectively lowers the noise floor of the analyzer When noise correction is enabled the first measurement for a given set of input parameters will take extra time This is because the analyzer takes an extra acquisition with the RF input disconnected from the analyzer s front end to measure the noise of just the analyzer The measured noise floor is stored in ...

Page 1702: ...ause two acquisitions rather than a single acquisition are made when spur suppression is enabled the measurement time will always be slower when spur suppression is enabled Preset False Range True enable spur suppression or False disable spur suppression Default Unit Boolean Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Electronic Attenuator Bypass Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF ElecAttBypass False Notes The electroni...

Page 1703: ... paths For example if the signal is less than 25 MHz wide then the user can select the B25M path to take advantage of additional filtering on this analog IF path Preset B40M Range B10M B25M B40M Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Include Power Spectrum Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF IncludePowerSpectrum True Notes The power spectrum parameter allows the user to read data on the entire spectrum for diagnosti...

Page 1704: ...ff Low Full Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Resolution Bandwidth Mode Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF PreAmpMode Low Notes The resolution bandwidth mode parameter allows the user to choose whether the RBW filter is automatically or manually set The BestSpeed value minimizes measurement time while the Narrowest value minimizes RBW size minimum of two FFT bins per RBW To manually specify an RBW set this par...

Page 1705: ...evision A 14 00 Trigger Level Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF TriggerLevel 2 Notes The trigger level parameter sets the voltage value at which an external trigger is detected Preset 1 2 V Range 5 to 5 V Default Unit Volts Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Trigger Slope Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF TriggerSlope Negative Notes The trigger slope parameter indicates the direction of the edge trigger voltage for d...

Page 1706: ...fault Unit Seconds Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Signal Input Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF SignalInput Fp50MHzCW Notes The signal input parameter allows the user to select between using the main RF input or the internal analyzer reference CW signal of 50 MHz Preset FpMainRf Range FpMainRf Fp50MHzCW Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Use Preselector Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF UsePreSelector True Notes The p...

Page 1707: ...ilter weighs all frequencies within the bandwidth equally The root raised cosine filter has an associated shape parameter defined by the FilterAlpha parameter All array parameters should have the same number of elements Alternatively if all the elements are the same value a single value with no square brackets can be used to define the parameter Preset IBW Range IBW RRC Initial S W Revision A 14 0...

Page 1708: ...rs should have the same number of elements Alternatively if all the elements are the same value a single value with no square brackets can be used to define the parameter Preset BandPower Range BandPower BandDensity PeakPower PeakFrequency XdBBandwidth OccupiedBandwidth Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Channel Offset Frequency Array Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF OffsetFrequency 5e6 0 5e6 Notes The offset...

Page 1709: ...ower relative to the peak channel power over which the bandwidth is calculated The parameter value must be a negative number Preset 3 01 Range 200 to 0 dB Default Unit dB Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Define Fast Power Measurement Query Remote Command Only The DEFine command is used to retrieve a list of all defined parameters in an ASCII string format M o d e All R e m o t e C o m m a n d CALCulat...

Page 1710: ...etFrequency 0 Function BandPower FilterType IBW FilterAlpha 0 22 OccupiedBandwidthPercent 0 99 XdBBandwidth 3 01 DoNoiseCorrection False DoSpurSuppression False MeasurementMethod HardwareFFT IncludePowerSpectrum Fals e TriggerDelay 0 TriggerLevel 1 2 TriggerSlope Positive TriggerSource Free TriggerTimeout 1 I n i t i a l S W R e v i s i o n A 14 00 Configure Fast Power Measurement Remote Command O...

Page 1711: ...separated ASCII values where m corresponds to the number of bandwidths defined 1 Declared function return in the 1st specified channel 2 Declared function return in the 2nd specified channel m Declared function return in the last specified channel The INIT and FETC command sequence performs the same functionality of a single CALC FPOW POW n query Units of the returned values are dependent on the F...

Page 1712: ...ads and to visibly inspect the spectrum Mode All Remote Command CALCulate FPOWer POWer 1 2 999 READ2 Example CALC FPOW POW1 READ2 Notes Option FP2 is required Note Spectrum data is only returned if the IncludePowerSpectrum parameter is set to True If IncludePowerSpectrum is False the number of spectrum points will be zero 0 Units of the returned values are dependent on the Function parameter per c...

Page 1713: ...ta is output in the current Y Axis unit When the data format is INTeger data is output in units of m dBm 001 dBm The INT 32 format returns binary 32 bit integer values in internal units m dBm in a definite length block Dependencies Sending a data format spec with an invalid number for example INT 48 generates no error The analyzer simply uses the default 8 for ASCii 32 for INTeger 32 for REAL Send...

Page 1714: ...r data transfer and other queries It controls whether binary data is transferred in normal or swapped mode This command affects only the byte order for setting and querying trace data for the TRACe DATA TRACe DATA CALCulate DATA n and FETCh SANalyzer n commands and queries By definition any command that says it uses FORMat DATA uses any format supported by FORMat DATA The NORMal order is a byte se...

Page 1715: ...e domain power is computed as the absolute power RELative Code domain power is computed relative to the mean power Key Path Meas Setup Mode WCDMA Remote Command CALCulate CDPower TYPE RELative ABSolute CALCulate CDPower TYPE Example CALC CDP TYPE REL CALC CDP TYPE Preset RELative State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Abs Rel Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Symbol Rate Sets a symbol rat...

Page 1716: ... 511 when CALCulate CDPower SRATe 7500 0 to 255 when CALCulate CDPower SRATe 15000 0 to 127 when CALCulate CDPower SRATe 30000 0 to 63 when CALCulate CDPower SRATe 60000 0 to 31 when CALCulate CDPower SRATe 120000 0 to 15 when CALCulate CDPower SRATe 240000 0 to 7 when CALCulate CDPower SRATe 480000 0 to 3 when CALCulate CDPower SRATe 960000 0 to 1 when CALCulate CDPower SRATe 1920000 Min 0 Max Th...

Page 1717: ...eeds to be installed and enabled Otherwise this parameter is not available and SCPI commands for Modulation Scheme do not have effect To select QAM64 W CDMA HSPA option needs to be installed and enabled Otherwise the softkey for 64QAM is unavailable and the SCPI command to select QAM64 is not valid You must be in W CDMA mode to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Dependencies Th...

Page 1718: ...ted automatically Preset 1 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 1 Max Capture Interval in slot Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Meas Offset Sets the timing offset of measurement interval in slots 1 slot 666 6 us The sum of CALCulate CDPower SWEep TIME and CALCulate CDPower SWEep OFFSet must be equal to or less than SENSe CDPower CAPTure TIME 15 If the sum exceeds this value CALCulate CDP...

Page 1719: ... Rate setting Antenna 2 CPICH Synchronizes with the STTD Antenna 2 common pilot channel Pilot aided Timing Est imator Enables additional symbol timing estimation to each detected code channel through the demod calculation process by referring to the pilot channel Antenna 2 CPICH timing correlation Antenna 1 TSTD SCH Synchronizes with the TSTD SCH Antenna 1 Antenna 2 TSTD SCH Synchronizes with the ...

Page 1720: ...ind that the peak symbol EVM result is unexpectedly high compared to the RMS symbol EVM result Key Path Meas Setup Sync Type CPICH Meas Setup Sync Type Antenna 2 CPICH Mode WCDMA Remote Command SENSe CDPower SYNC CPICh ESTimator OFF ON 0 1 SENSe CDPower SYNC CPICh ESTimator Example CDP SYNC CPIC EST 0 CDP SYNC CPIC EST Notes This command is effective when SENSe RADio DEVice is set to BTS and SENSe...

Page 1721: ...S PDSCH symbol cannot be used to synchronize Key Path Meas Setup Mode WCDMA Remote Command SENSe CDPower SYNC BTS CPICh SCH SYMBol A2CPich A1SCh A2SCh SENSe CDPower SYNC BTS Example CDP SYNC SCH CDP SYNC Notes This command is effective when SENSe RADio DEVice is set to BTS Couplings SYMBol synchronizes to the code symbol specified by SENSe CDPower SYNC SYMBol SRATe and the SENSe CDPower SYNC SYMBo...

Page 1722: ...SENSe CDPower SYNC BTS is set to SYMBol SENSe CDPower SYNC SYMBol SRATe Preset 1 State Saved Saved in instrument state Range 0 to 511 when SENSe CDPower SYNC SYMBol SRATe 7500 0 to 255 when SENSe CDPower SYNC SYMBol SRATe 15000 0 to 127 when SENSe CDPower SYNC SYMBol SRATe 30000 0 to 63 when SENSe CDPower SYNC SYMBol SRATe 60000 0 to 31 when SENSe CDPower SYNC SYMBol SRATe 120000 0 to 15 when SENS...

Page 1723: ...15 secondary scrambling codes The primary scrambling codes consist of scrambling codes n 16 i where i 0 511 The i th set of secondary scrambling codes consists of scrambling codes 16 i k where k 1 15 There is a one to one mapping between each primary scrambling code and 15 secondary scrambling codes in a set such that i th primary scrambling code corresponds to i th set of secondary scrambling cod...

Page 1724: ...amble BTS AUTO Example CDP SYNC SCR AUTO 1 CDP SYNC SCR AUTO Notes Autodetect is available when the following conditions are met Option N W9073A BFP auto scramble code detection is installed SENSe RADio DEVice is set to BTS Sync Type for BTS is set to SCH or CPICH Capture Interval is equal to or more than 1 frame Preset OFF State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Autodetect Manual Initial S W ...

Page 1725: ...t alternative scrambling code whose number is the primary scramble code number 8192 is used RIGHt the right alternative scrambling code whose number is the primary scrambling code number 16384 is used STANdard the standard scrambling code whose number is the primary scrambling code number is used Key Path Meas Setup Mode WCDMA Remote Command SENSe CDPower SYNC SCRamble BTS TYPE LEFT RIGHt STANdard...

Page 1726: ...e Code Domain Power Measurement to Test Model 1 with 64 DPCH channels and 1 S CCPCH channel Test Model 2 Accesses a menu to allow selections of Test Model 2 with S CCPCH Test Model 2 w S CCPCH SCPI Enum TM2SC Select this to set the Code Domain Power measurement to Test Model 2 with 1 S CCPCH channel Test Model 3 Accesses a menu to allow further selections from Test Model 3 with 16 or 32 DPCH chann...

Page 1727: ...efined active channels By choosing it you can specify a customized list of active channels using the following remote command Initialize List Append List and Replace List For details of available remote only commands see Custom Active Channel List for BTS Remote Command Only on page 1736 Key Path Meas Setup Mode WCDMA Remote Command SENSe CDPower SBOundary BTS AUTO TM1D4SC TM1D8SC TM1D16 TM1D32 TM...

Page 1728: ...st Model 1 w 64 DPCH w S CCPCH Test Model 1 w 16 DPCH Test Model 1 w 32 DPCH Test Model 1 w 64 DPCH Test Model 2 w S_CCPCH Test Model 2 Test Model 3 w 4 DPCH w S CCPCH Test Model 3 w 8 DPCH w S CCPCH Test Model 3 w 16 DPCH w S CCPCH Test Model 3 w 32 DPCH w S CCPCH Test Model 3 w 16 DPCH Test Model 3 w 32 DPCH Test Model 4 w P CPICH Test Model 4 Test Model 5 w 2 HS PDSCH w 6 DPCH Test Model 5 w 4 ...

Page 1729: ...Table Note Only applicable to Home BS Key Path Meas Setup Symbol Boundary Mode WCDMA Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 10 01 Test Model 1 w 16 DPCH w S CCPCH BTS only Selects standard Test Model 1 w 16 DPCH w S CCPCH See also 3GPP TS25 141 Table 6 1 Test Model 1 2009 12 version S CCPCH included on page 1729 Key Path Meas Setup Symbol Boundary Test Model 1 Initial S W...

Page 1730: ...ial S W Revision A 10 01 Test Model 1 w 8 DPCH w S CCPCH BTS only Selects standard Test Model 1 w 4DPCH w S CCPCH See also 3GPP TS25 141 Table 6 1 Test Model 1 2009 12 version S CCPCH included on page 1729 Key Path Meas Setup Symbol Boundary Test Model 1 Initial S W Revision A 10 01 Test Model 2 BTS only Enables you to select one from a variety of configurations using Test Model 2 3GPP TS25 141 Ta...

Page 1731: ...2 version S CCPCH included Type Number of Channels Fraction of Power 16 32 Level settings dB 16 32 Channelization Code Timing offset x256Tchip P CCPCH SCH 1 15 8 15 8 12 6 7 9 8 8 9 11 1 0 Primary CPICH 1 15 8 15 8 12 6 7 9 8 8 9 11 0 0 PICH 1 2 5 2 5 5 1 6 16 16 13 18 16 120 S CCPCH containing PCH SF 256 1 2 5 2 5 5 1 6 16 16 13 18 3 0 DPCH SF 256 4 8 16 32 63 4 63 4 63 7 80 4 in total See 3GPP T...

Page 1732: ...Boundary Test Model 3 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Test Model 3 w 4 DPCH w S CCPCH BTS only Selects standard Test Model 3 w 4 DPCH w S CCPCH See also Test Model 3 w 4 DPCH w S CCPCH BTS only on page 1732 Key Path Meas Setup Symbol Boundary Test Model 1 Initial S W Revision A 10 01 Test Model 3 w 8 DPCH w S CCPCH BTS only Selects standard Test Model 3 w 8 DPCH w S CCPCH See also Test Model...

Page 1733: ...ymbol Boundary Test Model 4 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Test Model 4 w no CPICH BTS only Selects standard Test Model 4 w no CPICH See also Test Model 4 w CPICH BTS only on page 1733 Key Path Meas Setup Symbol Boundary Test Model 4 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Test Model 5 BTS only Enables you to select one from a variety of configurations using Test Model 5 This feature is avail...

Page 1734: ...1 table 6 6D Table Note 2 HS PDSCH shall be taken together with 6 DPCH 4 HS PDSCH shall be taken with 14 DPCH or for Home BS only 4 DPCH and 8 HS PDSCH shall be taken together with 30 DPCH Key Path Meas Setup Symbol Boundary Mode WCDMA Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 10 01 Test Model 5 w 2 HS PDSCH w 6 DPCH BTS only Selects standard Test Model 5 w 2 HS PDSCH w 6 DP...

Page 1735: ... BTS Only Enables you to select one from a variety of configurations using Test Model 6 This feature is available when both HSPA Enable and HSPA Enable are on 3GPP TS25 141 Table 6 6E Test Model 6 Active Channels Type Number of Channels Fraction of Power Level setting dB Channelization Code Timing offset x256Tchip P CCPCH SCH 1 7 9 11 1 0 Primary CPICH 1 7 9 11 0 0 PICH 1 1 3 19 16 120 S CCPCH con...

Page 1736: ...iven parameter to the 1st channel entry See Initialize List Remote Command Only on page 1737 APPend Stores given channel to the next empty entry to the pre existing entries See Append List Remote Command Only on page 1740 REPLace Replaces the specified entry with the given parameter See Replace List Remote Command Only on page 1742 CHANnel Queries the information of the channel specified by the en...

Page 1737: ...ializes the current custom active channel list This creates a new entry with the given parameter Parameter Name Value Description 1 symbol_rate Specifies symbol rate of the channel 2 code_num Specifies code number of the channel W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1737 ...

Page 1738: ...mbol_rate code_num QPSK QAM16 QAM64 Example In order to predefine the following channels CPICH C8 0 P CCPCH C8 1 S CCPCH C8 3 PICH C8 16 HS DPCCH C4 15 16QAM modulated CDP SBO LIST INIT 15000 0 QPSK CDP SBO LIST APP 15000 1 QPSK CDP SBO LIST APP 15000 3 QPSK CDP SBO LIST APP 15000 16 QPSK CDP SBO LIST APP 240000 15 QAM16 CDP SBO LIST NCH 5 CDP SBO LIST CHAN 1 15000 0 QPSK CDP SBO LIST CHAN 2 15000...

Page 1739: ...onflict This error is reported if the given code channel overlaps other code channel on code domain For example if a user sends the following two commands the second command causes the error message because C7 0 overlaps C8 0 SENSe CDPower SBOundary LIST BTS INIT 15000 0 QPSK The example above is OK SENSe CDPower SBOundary LIST BTS APPend 30000 0 QPSK C7 0 overlaps C8 0 Dependencies 1 This command...

Page 1740: ...ith symbol rate 240000 Only when HSPA functionality is enabled QAM16 parameter is allowed QAM64 Specifies the channel s modulation scheme is QAM64 This choice is available only for channels with symbol rate 240000 Only when both HSPA functionality and HSPA functionality are enabled QAM64 is valid to select Mode WCDMA Remote Command SENSe CDPower SBOundary LIST BTS APPend symbol_rate code_num QPSK ...

Page 1741: ...TS APPend 15001 8 QPSK The 1st parameter value Symbol Rate is not allowed Only the values given in Range field are valid for the Symbol Rate You may specify these in numeric form but they are interpreted as an enumeration and the error results if the value does not translate to one in the list 3 Data out of range This error is reported if parameter value is out of range For example SENSe CDPower S...

Page 1742: ...0 Replace List Remote Command Only Replaces the entry of the custom active channel list for BTS Parameter Name Value Description 1 entry_id Specifies entry ID of the channel to replace 2 symbol_rate Specifies symbol rate of the channel 3 code_num Specifies code number of the channel 4 QPSK Specifies the channel s modulation scheme is QPSK QAM16 Specifies the channel s modulation scheme is QAM16 Th...

Page 1743: ...n parameter is invalid If an error is reported the SCPI command is rejected and the instrument s settings do not change 1 Missing Parameter This error is reported if the number of parameters is less than 4 For example SENSe CDPower SBOundary LIST BTS REPLace 1 15000 0 The 4th parameter is missing 2 Illegal parameter value This error is reported if parameter type is invalid or if enum value is inva...

Page 1744: ...s On QAM64 for the 4th parameter is available only when both HSPA Enable and HSPA Enable are on State Saved Saved in instrument state Range The entry ID must be 1 entry_id The number of entries that have been defined See Test Model 1 BTS only on page 1729 symbol_rate 7500 15000 30000 60000 120000 240000 480000 960000 0 code_num 511 if symbol_rate 7500 0 code_num 255 if symbol_rate 15000 0 code_num...

Page 1745: ...imum number of entries is 512 Default value of the parameter By default there is one channel defined CPICH C8 0 In order to query the default entry specify 1 for entry_id SENSe CDPower SBOundary LIST BTS CHANnel 1 The instrument returns an array of three values 15000 0 QPSK Query command needs entry_id parameter entry_id parameter is always required for query command The range of the parameter is ...

Page 1746: ...and SENSe CDPower SBOundary LIST BTS NCHannels Example SENS CDP SBO LIST BTS NCH Notes This command is a query only command Dependencies This command is effective when SENSe RADio DEVice is set to BTS and SENSe CDPower SBOundary BTS is set to CUSTom Preset 1 State Saved No Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Symbol Boundary Custom Active Channel List Load Preset Setting BTS Remote Command Only L...

Page 1747: ...ed remote command see Frame Capture Interval Remote Command only on page 1748 Key Path Meas Setup Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Capture Interval Selection This set of keys allows you to set the data capture length from 1 slot to 16 frames that will be used in the acquisition 1 frame 10 ms Key Path Meas Setup Capture Interval Mode WCDMA Couplings Changing this parameter forces a change 1 sl...

Page 1748: ... 80 ms 1 15 frame equals 1 slot Other numeric values between 1 and 16 are rounded to the nearest integer entries between integers are rounded up excepting for entries above 16 which are rounded down to 16 Min 0 067 Max 16 0 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Symbol Analysis Accesses the Symbol Analysis Menus Key Path Meas Setup Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 tDPCH BTS Only Toggles betwee...

Page 1749: ... CALCulate CDPower TDPCh AUTO is OFF This value is set at its auto number if Time Offset detection Auto mode is set to ON OFF tDPCH can manually be set by CALCulate CDPower TDPCh ON tDPCH is given automatically as a result of measurement for the specified Code Channel Preset 0 ON State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0 Max 149 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 DTX Burst Detect For downlink...

Page 1750: ...e 180 0 The input value is rounded to the nearest value in the following 0 45 90 135 180 225 135 270 90 315 45 Preset 0 0 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 135 0 Max 180 0 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Sync Start Slot Toggles the Sync Start Slot state between on and off Turning the Sync Start Slot parameter On and specifying the slot number to measure as the first slot you can use ...

Page 1751: ...t number detection mode on or off Dependencies This key is grayed out when device is MS and Sync Type is PRACH Message Preset 0 OFF State Saved Saved in instrument state Range 0 to 14 Min 0 Max 14 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Spectrum Toggles the spectrum function between Normal and Invert Invert This function conjugates the spectrum which is equivalent to taking the negative of the quadr...

Page 1752: ... to set more specific parameters for the measurement Key Path Meas Setup Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Active Set Threshold Toggles the active channel identification function between Auto and Man When set to Auto the active channels are determined automatically by the internal algorithm When set to Man the active channel identification is determined by a user definable threshold ranging fr...

Page 1753: ...reset 0 0 ON State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 100 0 Max 0 0 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 RRC Filter Control Allows you to change the status ON OFF of the Root Raised Cosine RRC filter This ON OFF state change requires a measurement restart Key Path Meas Setup Advanced Mode WCDMA Remote Command SENSe CDPower FILTer RRC STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe CDPower FILTer RRC STATe Example CDP FI...

Page 1754: ... Saved in instrument state Min 3 456 MHz Max 4 224 MHz Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Multi Channel Estimator Toggles the multi channel estimator function by MMSE between On and Off On The individual code channels are aligned to the pilot channel to improve the phase error whether each code phase is aligned or not This takes a longer time Off The phase information is computed from one coded...

Page 1755: ...ator is ON this parameter is valid When Multi Channel Estimator is OFF this setting is forced to GLOBAL and the menu key is grayed out Preset GLOBal State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Ch by Ch Global Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Frequency Error Tolerance Range Specifies the frequency error tolerance range You can select one of the following ranges Normal Wide Wide provides the wi...

Page 1756: ...ymbol EVM measurement results Key Path Meas Setup Advanced Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Frequency Compensation Toggles the setting of the frequency compensation to calculate the symbol EVM Key Path Meas Setup Advanced Symbol EVM Compensation Mode WCDMA Remote Command CALCulate CDPower SEVM FCOMpen ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate CDPower SEVM FCOMpen Example CALC CDP SEVM FCOM ON CALC CDP SEVM FCOM P...

Page 1757: ...SENSe CDPower PICH SPRead integer SENSe CDPower PICH SPRead Example CDP PICH SPR 5 CDP PICH SPR Notes If PICH Code Number and MICH Code Number are the same the channel is considered as PICH This parameter is meaningful only when Symbol Boundary setting is Auto Dependencies This parameter is available only for BTS Preset 16 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 2 Max 255 Initial S W Revision Pr...

Page 1758: ...l S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 SCH Suppression Subtracts the primary and secondary SCH power leakage from other code channels during the demodulation process in the instrument This improves symbol EVM magnitude error and phase error measurement accuracy Downlink channels with low coding gain can suffer interference of primary and secondary SCH because they are not orthogonal with other code chann...

Page 1759: ...ed and HSPA option is enabled Otherwise this key and the SCPI command are unavailable Preset 15000 State Saved Saved in instrument state Range 15000 30000 60000 120000 240000 480000 960000 Initial S W Revision A 10 01 S CCPCH Code Number BTS only To calculate the EVM value correctly specifies the code number for S CCPCH Secondary Common Control Physical Channel which might be modulated with 64QAM ...

Page 1760: ...l is packed into 1 float value in bit slice manner as follows 64QAM No DTX Float value 0 X5X4X3X2X1X0 X5 I1 X4 Q1 X3 I2 X2 Q2 X1 I3 X0 Q3 16QAM No DTX Float value 0 0X3X2X1X0 X3 I1 X2 Q1 X1 I2 X0 Q2 QPSK With DTX Float value 0 0M1M0B1B01 4PAM No DTX Float value 0 0 I1 I2 Q1 Q2 4PAM on I branch and BPSK on Q branch No DTX Float value 0 0 I1 I2 0 Q BPSK on I branch and 4PAM on Q branch No DTX Float ...

Page 1761: ...er PACKed OFF PKM1 CALCulate CDPower PACKed Example CALC CDP PACK OFF CALC CDP PACK Preset OFF State Saved Saved in instrument state Range OFF PKM1 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 03 00 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1761 ...

Page 1762: ...12 Code Domain Measurement Mode Mode See Mode on page 232 1762 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1763: ...ment and gets the mode to a consistent state with all of the default couplings set Backwards Compatibility Notes In the X Series the legacy Factory Preset has been replaced with Mode Preset which only presets the currently active mode not the entire instrument In the X Series the way to preset the entire instrument is by using System Restore System Defaults All which behaves essentially the same w...

Page 1764: ...es except the persistent ones Restore Mode Defaults resets ALL the Mode variables and all the Meas global and Meas local variables including the persistent ones Type Of Preset SCPI Command Front Panel Access Auto Couple COUPle ALL Auto Couple front panel key Meas Preset CONFigure Measurement Meas Setup Menu Mode Preset SYSTem PRESet Mode Preset green key Restore Mode Defaults INSTrument DEFault Mo...

Page 1765: ...t Mode Preset Power On Mode Preset SYSTem PON TYPE MODE System Menu Power On User Preset SYSTem PON TYPE USER System Menu Power On Last State SYSTem PON TYPE LAST System Menu W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1765 ...

Page 1766: ...12 Code Domain Measurement Mode Setup Mode Setup See Mode Setup on page 251 1766 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1767: ...Key Path Peak Search Mode WCDMA Remote Command CALCulate CDPower MARKer 1 2 12 MAXimum NEXT Example CALC CDP MARK2 MAX NEXT Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Next Pk Right Moves the selected marker to the nearest peak right of the current marker that meets all enabled peak criteria Key Path Peak Search Mode WCDMA Remote Command CALCulate CDPower MARKer 1 2 12 MAXimum RIGHt Example CALC CDP MAR...

Page 1768: ... the highest and lowest y axis value Key Path Peak Search Mode WCDMA Remote Command CALCulate CDPower MARKer 1 2 12 PTPeak Example CALC CDP MARK PTP Notes Turns on the Marker active function Dependencies This key is not available grayed out when Couple Markers on page 1683 is on Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Min Search Moves the selected marker to the minimum y axis value on the current tr...

Page 1769: ...12 Code Domain Measurement Print Print See Print on page 263 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1769 ...

Page 1770: ...Trace State State_ Save Recall Screen Screen_ Save Recall Amplitude Corrections Ampcor_ Import Export Traces Trace_ Import Export Limit Lines LLine_ Import Export Measurement Result MeasR_ Import Export Capture Buffer CapBuf_ Import Export A four digit number is appended to the prefix to create a unique file name The numbering sequence starts at 0000 within each Mode for each file type and updates...

Page 1771: ... fred_0000 csv Although 0000 is used in the example above the number that is used is actually the current number in the Meas Results sequence that is the number that would have been used if you had not entered your own file name If the filename you entered ends with _dddd where d any number making it look just like an auto file name then the next auto file name picks up where you left off with the...

Page 1772: ...he sense that you can recall a state file from any X Series model number and any version of X Series software This is only possible if part of the recalling process goes through a limiting step after recalling the mode settings at least for settings that may vary with version number model number option and license differences If you try to recall a state file onto an instrument with less capabilit...

Page 1773: ... SA for the Spectrum Analyzer See More Information on page 1774 Key Path Recall Mode All Remote Command MMEMory LOAD STATe filename Example MMEM LOAD STAT myState state This recalls the file myState state on the default path Example MMEM LOAD STAT MyStateFile state This loads the state file data on the default file directory path into the instrument state Notes When you pick a file to recall the a...

Page 1774: ...en you use State to save and recall traces any trace whose data must be preserved should be placed in View or Blank mode before saving The following table describes the Trace Save and Recall possibilities You want to recall state and one trace s data leaving other traces unaffected Save Trace State from 1 trace Make sure that no other traces are updating they should all be in View or Blank mode wh...

Page 1775: ...uch as Look In Look In The Look In field shows the path from which the file will be recalled and allows you to change the path using the up and down arrow keys to navigate to other paths the Enter key to open a directory and the Backspace key to go back one directory The Look In field first uses the last path from the Save As dialog Save In path for that same file type There is no softkey for dire...

Page 1776: ...ses the current Open request to be cancelled The ESC key does the same thing Key Path Recall State Notes Brings up the Open dialog for recalling a State Save Type Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Edit Register Names You may enter a custom name on any of the Register keys to help you remember what you are using that state to save To do this press the Edit Register Names key choose the register...

Page 1777: ...Path Recall State Example RCL 1 Range 1 16 from front panel 1 128 from SCPI Readback Date and time with seconds resolution are displayed on the key OR A custom name of up to 30 characters entered using the Save State Edit Register Names key OR empty if no prior save operation has been performed to this register Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision Prior to A 11 00 Registe...

Page 1778: ...gister Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision Prior to A 11 00 Sequences These keys allow you to import a Tab separated or txt file that will automatically setup all the parameters required for building a Sequence The parameters will automatically be loaded into the Stated Sequencer Once selected in order to import the selected Sequence Type you must select the Open key in ...

Page 1779: ...ication for manipulating csv files and then import it Importing Data loads measurement data from the specified file into the specified or default destination depending on the data type selected Selecting an Import Data menu key will not actually cause the importing to occur since the analyzer still needs to know from where to get the data Pressing the Open key in this menu brings up the Open dialo...

Page 1780: ... other measurements this key is grayed out Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Open When you press Open the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu entitled File Open This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse The Tab and Arrow keys can also be used for dialog navigation See From File on page 2687in Recall State for a ful...

Page 1781: ...he SWEEPING bit is set The MEASURING bit is set Backwards Compatibility Notes For Spectrum Analysis mode in ESA and PSA the Restart hardkey and the INITiate RESTart command restart trace averages displayed average count reset to 1 for a trace in Clear Write but did not restart Max Hold and Min Hold In the X Series the Restart hardkey and the INITiate RESTart command restart not only Trace Average ...

Page 1782: ...dition is met and the analyzer stops sweeping once that sweep has completed However with Average Hold Number 1 and at least one trace set to Trace Average Max Hold or Min Hold SA Measurement or Averaging on most other measurements multiple sweeps data acquisitions are taken for a single measurement The trigger condition must be met prior to each sweep The sweep is stopped when the average count k ...

Page 1783: ...ngs that are affected by Mode Preset as well as the additional settings affected by Restore Mode Defaults all of the Mode s settings In addition all of the settings of the Input Output system are included even though they are outside of the Mode s state because they are needed to restore the complete setup Persistent System settings for example Verbose SCPI are not affected by either Mode Preset o...

Page 1784: ...y ignored The command is sequential Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 To File When you press To File the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu entitled Save As This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse The Tab and Arrow keys can also be used for dialog navigation The Listed below are the functions of the various fiel...

Page 1785: ... using the File Name key See the Quick Save on page 2683 documentation for more on the automatic file naming algorithm When you press the File Name key the analyzer displays the Alpha Editor Use the knob to choose the letter to add and the front panel Enter key to add the letter to the file name The BK character moves you back and the FW character moves you forward in the filename The Select key o...

Page 1786: ...id register number an error message is generated 222 Data out of range Invalid register label number label is a string from 0 to 30 characters in length If a label exceeds 30 characters an error message is generated 150 String data error Label clipped to 30 characters label of length 0 erases the custom label and restores the default time and date label E g MMEM REG STAT LAB 1 Dependencies N9060A ...

Page 1787: ...ance Although these 16 registers are the only registers available from the front panel there are 128 state registers available in the instrument Registers 17 128 are only available from the SCPI interface using the SAV command There is one set of 128 state registers in the instrument not one set for each Mode When a state is saved the Mode it was saved from is saved with it then when it is recalle...

Page 1788: ... custom name of up to 30 characters entered using the Edit Register Names key OR empty if no prior save operation has been performed to this register Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 11 00 Mass Storage Catalog Remote Command Only Key path SCPI Only Remote Command MMEMory CATalog directory_name Notes The string must be a valid logical path Queries disk usage informat...

Page 1789: ...econd parameter specifies the destination The second form has four parameters In this form the first and third parameters specify the source The second and fourth parameters specify the directories The first pair of parameters specifies the source The second pair specifies the destination An error is generated if the source doesn t exist or the destination file already exists This command will gen...

Page 1790: ...me data It loads data into the file file_ name data is in 488 2 block format file_name is string data The query form is MMEMory DATA file_name with the response being the associated data in block format Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Mass Storage Make Directory Remote Command Only Key path SCPI Only Remote Command MMEMory MDIRectory directory_name Notes The string must be a valid logical pa...

Page 1791: ... Only Remote Command MMEMory RDIRectory directory_name Notes The string must be a valid logical path Removes a directory The directory_name parameter specifies the directory name to be removed All files and directories under the specified directory shall also be removed This command will generate an access denied error if the folder is a restricted folder e g C Windows or is in a restricted folder...

Page 1792: ... algorithm The default path for all Sequence Files is My Documents Sequences Key Path Save Sequences Mode All Notes Brings up Save As dialog for saving a Sequence Save Type Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Data Export Exporting a data file stores data from the current measurement to mass storage files The Export Menu only contains data types that are supported by the current measurement Since the comm...

Page 1793: ...lename Example MMEM STOR RES MTAB myResults csv Saves the results from the current marker table to the file myResults csv in the current path MMEM STOR RES PTAB myResults csv Saves the results from the current peak table to the file myResults csv in the current path MMEM STOR RES SPEC myResults csv Saves the results from the current Spectrogram display to the file myResults csv in the current path...

Page 1794: ...s Results file format Imagine that at the point where a Marker Table Meas Result is requested the following screen is showing Then the Meas Results file when opened would show the following data MeasurementR esult Swept SA A 01 40_R0017 N9020A 526 B25 PFR P26 EA3 1 Result Type Marker Table Ref Level 0 Number of Points 1001 Sweep Time 0 0662666 1794 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1795: ...gger Level 1 2 Trigger Slope Positive Trigger Delay 1 00E 06 Phase Noise Optimization Fast Swept If Gain Low FFT If Gain Autorange RF Coupling AC FFT Width 411900 Ext Ref 10000000 Input RF RF Calibrator Off Attenuation 10 Ref Level Offset 0 External Gain 0 X Axis Units Hz Y Axis Units dBm DATA MKR MODE TR C SCL X Y FUNCTI ON FUNCTIO N WIDTH FUNCTI ON VALUE FUNCTI ON UNIT 1 Normal 1 Freque ncy 2 23...

Page 1796: ...00 0 None 10 Normal 3 Freque ncy 1 1454E 10 75 1 61 Band Density 1 3250E 06 138 97 3 dBm Hz 11 Off 1 Freque ncy 0 0000E 00 0 Off 0 0000E 00 0 None 12 Off 1 Freque ncy 0 0000E 00 0 Off 0 0000E 00 0 None The numbers appear in the file exactly as they appear onscreen If it says 11 454 GHz onscreen then in the file it is 11 454E 09 The metadata header is very similar to the metadata used in the trace ...

Page 1797: ...Peak Threshold State On Off Peak Excursion Peak Excursion State On Off Display Line Peak Readout All AboveDL BelowDL Peak Sort Freq Amptd These fields are then followed by the data for the Peak Table itself Note that the label for the Frequency column changes to Time in 0 span Here is what the table for the above display looks like MeasurementResult Swept SA A 01 40_R0017 N9020A 526 B25 PFR P26 EA...

Page 1798: ...is Scale Lin PreAmp State Off PreAmp Band Low Trigger Source Free Trigger Level 1 2 Trigger Slope Positive Trigger Delay 1 00E 06 Phase Noise Optimization Fast Swept If Gain Low FFT If Gain Autorange RF Coupling AC FFT Width 411900 Ext Ref 10000000 Input RF RF Calibrator Off Attenuation 10 Ref Level Offset 0 External Gain 0 X Axis Units Hz Y Axis Units dBm Peak Threshold 85 Peak Threshold State On...

Page 1799: ...05 60 89 16 9 5920E 05 60 90 17 18 19 20 Spectrogram This section discusses the Spectrogram Results file format The Spectrogram choice only appears if option EDP is licensed The Spectrogram results are the same as a Trace data export except that instead of having just one trace s data all 300 traces appear one after the other Each trace has its own data mark the data for Spectrogram Trace 0 follow...

Page 1800: ...ample if the absolute start time is 13 23 45 678 on January 30 2012 this row would look like Start Time 20120130132345678 NOTE The resolution of the absolute time stored is 1 ms which matches up with the fact that the fastest sweep time is also 1 ms However there is no specification for the absolute accuracy of the clock in the analyzer nor is there any facility provided to allow the user to set t...

Page 1801: ...lt file for the above display Note the start time of 20120425142808700 showing in the last row before the first DATA row and the relative time of 5 299231048 showing in the first DATA row Result Type Spectrogram MeasResult Swept SA A 11 00 01 N9020A 503 508 513 526 ALL ALV B1C B1X B25 B2X B40 BAB BBA CR3 CRP DP2 DRD EA3 EDP EMC EP1 ERC ESC ESP EXM FSA HBA K03 LFE MPB P03 P08 P13 P26 PFR RTL RTS S4...

Page 1802: ...Math Oper1 Trace5 Trace Math Oper2 Trace6 Trace Math Offset 0 Trace Name Trace1 X Axis Units Hz Y Axis Units dBm Start Time 20120425142808700 DATA 5 299231048 5999984415 76 34749519 5999984440 77 28097006 5999984465 75 32317869 5999984490 73 64417681 5999984515 72 67154604 o o o 6000009315 77 94423277 6000009340 79 51829697 6000009365 78 46108961 6000009390 78 46108957 6000009415 76 59570596 DATA2...

Page 1803: ...2 5999984440 75 76485645 5999984465 76 67718717 5999984490 78 79238489 5999984515 83 72680212 o o o 6000009315 71 3942461 6000009340 72 28308332 6000009365 73 92684489 6000009390 75 45548832 6000009415 75 17904815 Capture Buffer Allows you to store captured data for reuse in demod measurements using Save Recall functionality for Capture Buffer Capture Buffer is saved and loaded as IQ Data with pro...

Page 1804: ...r dialog navigation See To File on page 2697 in Save State for a full description of this dialog and menu The default path for saving files is For all of the Trace Data Files My Documents mode name data traces For all of the Limit Data Files My Documents mode name data limits For all of the Measurement Results Data Files My Documents mode name data measurement name results For all of the Capture B...

Page 1805: ... saved showing the menus that were on the screen before going into the Save menus The save is performed immediately and does not wait until the measurement is complete After you have completed the save the Quick Save front panel key lets you quickly repeat the last save performed using an auto named file with the current screen data For versions previous to A 01 55 if you initiate a screen image s...

Page 1806: ...tes In ESA and PSA we offer the choice of Reverse Bitmap or Reverse Metafile when saving screen images This is much like the Flat Color theme available in X Series Also if you selected Reverse Bitmap AND a black white screen image that would be much like Flat Monochrome In other words each of the X Series themes has a similar screen image type in ESA PSA But they are not identical Initial S W Revi...

Page 1807: ... Save As the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu entitled Save As This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse The Tab and Arrow keys can also be used for dialog navigation See To File on page 2697 in Save State for a full description of this dialog and menu The default path for Screen Images is My Documents mode name scr...

Page 1808: ...in the idle state INIT IMM in ESA PSA Spectrum Analysis Mode does an implied ABORt In some other PSA Modes INIT IMM is ignored if not in the idle state The X Series follows the ESA PSA SA Mode model which may cause some Modes to have compatibility problems Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 More Information See Restart on page 2694 for details on the INIT IMMediate Restart function If you are a...

Page 1809: ...n front panel to indicate out of scope Non forceful means user still can change this setting by SCPI but cannot change on front panel When set to OFF will make source leave list sequencer and this setting will be black out and take effect immediately When the RF Output is ON an RF annunciator is displayed in the system settings panel When the RF Output is turned Off the RF annunciator is cleared I...

Page 1810: ... and waveform etc When the source list sequence playing is complete the last step keeps playing and user can use this command to change the list sequence last step s output power The multiport adapter RFIO TX ports and GPS ports cannot ensure power accuracy when power setting is lower than 130dBm this power setting value is defined by the sum of RF Power setting and related amplitude correction va...

Page 1811: ...ntered power Where reference power equals the original RF Power entered under Source Amplitude RF Power and set as the reference power entered power equals a new value entered under Source Amplitude Amptd Offset In addition the displayed power value is the same as a new value entered under Source Amplitude RF Power If Power Ref is set to ON with a reference value set entering a value under Source ...

Page 1812: ...current output power Preset 0 00 dBm OFF Min 125 00 dBm Max 10 00 dBm Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Amptd Offset Allows you to specify the RF output power offset value When the amplitude offset is set to zero 0 and you set a new offset value positive or negative the displayed amplitude value will change as follows and the RF output power will not change Displayed value output power offset value Whe...

Page 1813: ... page 2802 is set to ON the list sequencer controls the source output and this key will be grayed out And this setting will be none forceful grey out on front panel to indicate out of scope Non forceful means user still can change this setting by SCPI but cannot change manually on front panel When setto Off will make source leave list sequencer and this setting will be black out and take effect im...

Page 1814: ... frequency Couplings The frequency value is coupled to the current channel band and number such that updates to the band and number will update the frequency value to the corresponding absolute frequency Preset 1 00 GHz If license F1A or 5WC is present the default Center Frequency should be 2 412GHz Min 10 00 MHz Max Hardware Dependant Option 503 3 6 GHz Option 504 3 8 GHz Option 506 6 00 GHz For ...

Page 1815: ...s than sign to indicate the frequency is above or below the channel number Preset 1 Min Please refer to the tables below for the valid ranges Max Please refer to the tables below for the valid ranges Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM EDGE Channel Number Ranges Band Link Device Range Frequency MHz P GSM Uplink MS 1 n 124 890 0 0 2 n Downlink BS 1 n 124 935 0 0 2 n E GSM Uplink MS 0 n 124 975 n 1023 ...

Page 1816: ...Band II Downlink 412 n 687 9662 n 9938 n 5 1850 1 n 5 Uplink 12 n 287 350 n 425 n 5 1850 1 n 5 Band III Downlink 1162 n 1513 n 5 1575 Uplink 937 n 1288 n 5 1525 Band IV Downlink 537 n 1738 1887 n 2087 n 5 1805 n 5 1735 1 Uplink 1312 n 1513 1662 n 1862 n 5 1450 n 5 1380 1 Band V Downlink 1007 n 1087 4357 n 4458 n 5 670 1 n 5 Uplink 782 n 862 4132 n 4233 n 5 670 1 n 5 Band VI Downlink 1037 n 1062 43...

Page 1817: ...67 n 5 21 n 5 39 9 Band XIV Downlink 4117 n 4143 4167 n 4192 n 5 63 n 5 72 9 Uplink 3892 n 3918 3942 n 3967 n 5 12 n 5 2 1 Band XIX Downlink 712 n 763 787 n 837 n 5 735 n 5 720 1 Uplink 312 n 363 387 n 437 n 5 770 n 5 755 1 CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Channel Number Ranges Band Link Device Range Frequency MHz US Cellular Uplink MS reverse link 1 N 799 991 N 1023 1024 N 1323 0 030 N 825 000 0 030 N 1023 825 0...

Page 1818: ... 1536 479 000 0 020 N 1792 479 000 Downlink BS forward link 1 N 400 472 N 871 1039 N 1473 1536 N 1715 1792 N 2016 0 025 N 1 460 000 0 025 N 472 420 000 0 020 N 1024 461 010 0 025 N 1536 489 000 0 020 N 1792 489 000 IMT 2000 Band Uplink MS reverse link 0 N 1199 1920 000 0 050 N Downlink BS forward link 0 N 1199 2100 000 0 050 N Upper 700 MHz Band Uplink MS reverse link 0 N 240 776 000 0 050 N Downl...

Page 1819: ... MS reverse link 1 N 400 472 N 871 1536 N 1715 0 025 N 1 450 000 0 025 N 472 410 000 0 025 N 1536 479 000 Downlink BS forward link Downlink BS forward link Downlink BS forward link 1 N 400 472 N 871 1536 N 1715 0 025 N 1 460 000 0 025 N 472 420 000 0 025 N 1536 489 000 800 PAMR Uplink MS reverse link 0 N 239 870 0125 0 025 N Downlink BS forward link 0 N 239 915 0125 0 025 N LTE FDD Channel Number ...

Page 1820: ...49 1427 9 22750 22750 22949 12 729 5010 5010 5179 699 23010 23010 23179 13 746 5180 5180 5279 777 23180 23180 23279 14 758 5280 5280 5379 788 23280 23280 23379 17 734 5730 5730 5849 704 23730 23730 23849 18 860 5850 5850 5999 815 23850 23850 23999 19 875 6000 6000 6149 830 24000 24000 24149 20 791 6150 6150 6449 832 24150 24150 24449 21 1495 9 6450 6450 6599 1447 9 24450 24450 24599 24 1525 7700 7...

Page 1821: ...8650 38650 39649 41 2496 39650 39650 41589 2496 39650 39650 41589 42 3400 41590 41590 43589 3400 41590 41590 43589 43 3600 43590 43590 45589 3600 43590 43590 45589 Note The channel numbers that designate carrier frequencies so close to the operating band edges that the carrier extends beyond the operating band edge shall not be used This implies that the first 7 15 25 50 75 and 100 channel numbers...

Page 1822: ...se 5 2 b 1850 1910 MHz 1930 1990 MHz 9254 to 9546 9654 to 9946 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 c 1910 1930 MHz 9554 to 9646 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 d 2570 2620 MHz 12854 to 13096 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 e 2300 2400 MHz 11504 to 11996 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 f 1880...

Page 1823: ...ND24 BAND25 BAND26 BAND27 BAND28 BAND31 BAND33 BAND34 BAND35 BAND36 BAND37 BAND38 BAND39 BAND40 BAND41 BAND42 BAND43 BAND44 BANDA BANDB BANDC BANDD BANDE BANDF SOURce FREQuency CHANnels BAND Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PGSM Notes Set this setting to NONE will grey out Channel on page 2727 Channel Initial S W Revision A 05 00 None Selects no radio standard for use When you have selected the radio s...

Page 1824: ...800 Selects DCS 1800 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND DCS1800 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 PCS 1900 Selects PCS 1900 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PCS1900 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM 450 Selects GSM 450 as the active channel...

Page 1825: ...he active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND GSM700 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 T GSM 810 Selects T GSM 810 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND T GSM810 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 WCDMA Sets WCDMA as the radio standard for use and accesses the W CD...

Page 1826: ...l band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDIII Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band IV Selects Band IV as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDIV Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band V Selects Band V as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio St...

Page 1827: ...nel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDVIII Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band IX Selects Band IX as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDIX Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band X Selects Band X as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio...

Page 1828: ... Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDXIII Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIV Selects Band XIV as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDXIV Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIX Selects Band XIX as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN ...

Page 1829: ...VDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PCS Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Japan Cell Selects Japan Cell as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND JAPAN Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Korean PCS Selects Korean PCS as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ ...

Page 1830: ... FREQ CHAN BAND UPPER Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Secondary 800 Selects Secondary 800 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND SECOND Initial S W Revision A 05 00 400 Euro PAMR Selects 400 Euro PAMR as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ C...

Page 1831: ...EVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PCS1DOT9G Initial S W Revision A 05 00 AWS Selects AWS as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND AWS Initial S W Revision A 05 00 US 2 5GHz Selects US 2 5 GHz as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND ...

Page 1832: ...io Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 1 Selects BAND 1 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND1 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 2 Selects BAND 2 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND2 Initial S W Revision A 09 ...

Page 1833: ...9 50 BAND 6 Selects BAND 6 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND6 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 7 Selects BAND 7 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND7 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 8 Selects BAND 8 as the band for the cur...

Page 1834: ...0 BAND 11 Selects BAND 11 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND11 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 12 Selects BAND 12 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND12 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 13 Selects BAND 13 as the band for th...

Page 1835: ...50 BAND 18 Selects BAND 18 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND18 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 19 Selects BAND 19 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND19 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 20 Selects BAND 20 as the band for t...

Page 1836: ...50 BAND 25 Selects BAND 25 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND25 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 26 Selects BAND 26 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND26 Initial S W Revision A 12 53 BAND 27 Selects BAND 27 as the band for t...

Page 1837: ...tandard for use and accesses the LTE TDD specific channel band sub menus Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 33 Selects BAND 33 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND33 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 34 Selects BAND 34 as the band for the current step Key Pa...

Page 1838: ... Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND37 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 38 Selects BAND 38 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND38 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 39 Selects BAND 39 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Set...

Page 1839: ...y Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND42 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 43 Selects BAND 43 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND43 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 44 Selects BAND 44 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD...

Page 1840: ...ard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDB Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND C Selects BAND C as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDC Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND D Selects BAND D as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BA...

Page 1841: ...adio Setup Remote Command SOURce RADio BAND LINK DOWN UP SOURce RADio BAND LINK Example SOUR RAD BAND LINK UP Preset DOWN Range DOWN UP Backwards Compatibility SCPI SOURce RADio DEVice BTS MS SOURce RADio DEVice Backwards Compatibility Notes BTS maps to the Downlink frequency MS maps to the Uplink frequency Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Set Reference Frequency This key allows you to set the frequen...

Page 1842: ... is grayed out when the List Sequencer is turned ON Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Freq Reference This key allows you to toggle the state of the frequency reference When the frequency reference state is ON an annunciator is displayed on the main source view to indicate this state to the user When you use a frequency reference the signal generator outputs a frequency that is set relative to the refer...

Page 1843: ... change as follows and the RF output frequency will not change Displayed value output frequency offset value Where output frequency equals the original frequency entered under Source Frequency Frequency offset value equals the value entered under Source Frequency Freq Offset When the frequency offset is set to a value other than zero 0 and you enter a new frequency value under Source Frequency Fre...

Page 1844: ...tings panel When the ARB is turned Off the MOD annunciator is cleared Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB STATe ON OFF 1 0 SOURce RADio ARB STATe Example SOUR RAD ARB OFF SOUR RAD ARB Notes If the ARB is ON a user then loads or deletes another file to ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The waveform ...

Page 1845: ...e information about this adjustment Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB WAVeform string SOURce RADio ARB WAVeform Example SOUR RAD ARB WAV test_waveform bin Notes If intended waveform is not in the memory yet then issuing this command by SCPI will invoke ARB loading operation first which involves a delay of unpredictable length So this command shoul...

Page 1846: ...ARB Select Waveform Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Load Segment To ARB Memory Allows you to load the selected file into ARB memory On the front panel you select the file for loading to the ARB memory by highlighting the desired file in the list Using the SCPI command you specify the file name on the HDD NVWFM none volatile storage MSUS Mass Storage Unit Specifier is supported in the memory subsystem...

Page 1847: ...s do not present on the instrument In this case a GUI only warning message 800 Operation complete Loaded filename successfully but no license required licenses installed User can install required licenses according to required licenses string to license it or multi pack license it Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Load All To ARB Memory Allows you to load all the segment files within the currently sele...

Page 1848: ...for playback of a waveform sequence or a list sequence Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Notes No remote command SCPIfront panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Default Directory Allows you to change the default directory It is used as a search location for waveform segments that are required to be loaded into ARB memory for playback of a waveform sequenc...

Page 1849: ...If the ARB is ON and you load a file to ARB memory or delete a file from ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The waveform will be replayed after the ARB operation is finished Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Delete All From ARB Memory Allows you to remove all segments from ARB playback memory Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select ...

Page 1850: ...RB Memory Full File List Remote Command Only Queries the test set for the string list of waveform segments in the ARB memory It returns a string list for waveform segment names in the ARB memory Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB FCATalog Example SOUR RAD ARB FCATalog Notes The return data is in the following format integer memory used integer memory free integer file count in ARB memory string strin...

Page 1851: ...00 Run Time Scaling Allows you to adjust the run time scaling value The run time scaling value is applied in real time while the waveform is playing Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB ARB Setup Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB RSCaling real SOURce RADio ARB RSCaling Example SOUR RAD ARB RSC 100 00 Notes This setting cannot be set in E6640A Grey out on menu and the value is fixed at 70 00 Dependen...

Page 1852: ... Allows access to the trigger type sub menus The setting for trigger type determines the behavior of the waveform when it plays Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE CONTinuous SINGle SADVance GATE SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE CONT SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE Notes Gated trigger type will be implemented at a later release Prese...

Page 1853: ...Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Trigger Type Continuous Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE CONT TRIG Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Reset Run Sets Reset and Run as the trigger response for the continuous trigger type Reset and Run sets the waveform generator to play a waveform sequence or segment continuously when the first trigger is received Subsequent triggers reset the waveform sequence or segm...

Page 1854: ...W Revision A 05 00 Buffered Trigger Selects Buffered Trigger as the trigger response for single trigger type Buffered Trigger sets the waveform generator to play a waveform sequence or segment once when a trigger is received If a trigger is received during playback the waveform generator plays the sequence or segment to the end then plays the sequence or segment once more Key Path Source Modulatio...

Page 1855: ...e Command SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE SADVance TYPE SINGle CONTinuous SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE SADVance TYPE Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE SADV SING Preset CONTinuous Range Single Continuous Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Single Selects Single as the trigger response for Segment Advance trigger type With single selected once a trigger is received a segment is played once If a trigger is rece...

Page 1856: ... the waveform is triggered when you press the front panel Trigger key Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Trigger Source Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIGger KEY Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Bus Sets the current trigger source to Bus Selecting Bus trigger source enables triggering over GPIB LAN or USB using the SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger INITiate command Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Trigger Source ...

Page 1857: ... Pressing this key changes the central view area to display the Waveform Sequence Creation and Editing view Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Notes No remote command SCPIfront panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Current Segment Specifies the selected sequence segment that will be affected by the menu functions Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build ...

Page 1858: ...rb Pressing this key changes the current view to the Waveform Management View Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Load Segment To ARB Memory Allows you to load the selected file into ARB memory On the front panel you select the file for loading to the ARB memory by highlighting the desired file in the list Using the SCPI command you specify the file na...

Page 1859: ...Studio waveform wfm which contains invalid waveform header an error is generated If the ARB is ON when you load afile to ARB memory or delete a file from ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The waveform will be replayed after the ARB operation is finished ARB can be loaded into ARB memory even required licenses do not present on the...

Page 1860: ...the new directory of interest The current directory is used for manually loading waveform segments into ARB memory for playback and as a search location for waveform segments that are required to be loaded into ARB memory for playback of a waveform sequence or a list sequence Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Notes No remote command SCPIfront panel only Ini...

Page 1861: ...f ARB state is On the selected waveform will not be played In this case if the selected waveform is not used in List Sequence it can be deleted and the ARB state is turned Off If the ARB is ON and you load a file to ARB memory or delete a file from ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The waveform will be replayed after the ARB opera...

Page 1862: ...equences Build New Sequence Insert New Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Load All To ARB Memory This key functions the same as Load All To ARB Memory on page 2829 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Insert New Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Change Directory This key functions the same as...

Page 1863: ...RB Memory on page 2831 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Insert New Waveform Segment in ARB Memory Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Query ARB Memory File List Remote Command Only This command functions the same as Query ARB Memory File List Remote Command Only on page 2763 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Edit Selected Waveform Allows access to th...

Page 1864: ...sion A 05 00 Marker 2 Allows you to enable or disable marker 2 for the currently selected waveform For a waveform sequence you can enable and disable markers on a per segment basis allowing you to output markers from some waveform segments within the sequence but not for others Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Edit Selected Waveform Notes No remote command...

Page 1865: ...al S W Revision A 05 00 Delete Segment Allows you to delete the selected segment from the waveform sequence Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Notes No remote command front panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Save Sequence Pressing this key displays the Save As dialog The sequence name is passed to the save as dialog to use as the filename for saving and...

Page 1866: ... M4 M1M2 M1M3 M1M4 M2M3 M2M4 M3M4 M1M2M3 M1M2M4 M1M3M4 M2M3M4 M1M2M3M4 ALL For additional description of each item see Notes below For Setup SCPI on page 1866 For Setup SCPI SOURce RADio ARB SEQuence MWAVeform filename For additional description of each item see Notes For Query SCPI on page 1867 below Example For setup SOUR RAD ARB SEQ NVWFM testSeq1 seq NVWFM wfmSegment1 wfm 10 M2M3M4 NVWFM wfmSe...

Page 1867: ...WFM or have an error in the waveform sequence file path an error is generated Notes Error Checks for Query SCPI command Continued If the specified waveform sequence file name suffix is not seq error is generated If you use an unsupported MSUS that is not NVWFM or have an error in the waveform segment file path an error is generated If the first specified waveform file cannot be found an error is g...

Page 1868: ...itial S W Revision A 05 00 Waveform Utilities Allows you access to the waveform utilities sub menus Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Multi Pack Licenses Allows you access to the Multi Pack License sub menus Pressing this key also changes the central view area to display the Multi Pack License Management view On modular instrument like E6630A or E6640A multi pack li...

Page 1869: ...ent signal sources You can use either one of them Since adding a waveform segment to a Multi Pack license causes the license slot to enter the trial period of only 48 hours pressing this key causes a confirmation dialog to be displayed to ensure you do want to add the waveform segment to the Multi Pack If you attempt to license a waveform that is already licensed using another slot an error is gen...

Page 1870: ... waveform file has been loaded it needs to be loaded again Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB LOAD string Example SOUR RAD ARB LOAD D VARB testwaveform bin or SOUR RAD ARB LOAD NVWFM testwaveform bin Notes Because loading the file involves a delay of unpredictable length this command should be followed by the query OPC which h...

Page 1871: ...tes string specifies the directory on the HDD to load the files into ARB memory from When in Sequence Analyzer mode and Include Source is Yes an attempt to load all files from a directory to ARB memory is rejected with an error When Include Source is No and there is insufficient free ARB memory to load all the waveforms when the ARB memory is full the copy ceases and an error is generated If you s...

Page 1872: ...ard Disk on page 2828 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Add Waveform Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Load Segment To ARB Memory This key functions the same as Load Segment To ARB Memory on page 2828 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Add Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Load...

Page 1873: ... Waveform Add view Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Replace Waveform Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform REPLace int string or SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform REPLace int string Example SYST LKEY WAV REPL 1 myotherwaveform wfm or SYST LIC WAV REPL 1 myotherwaveform wfm Notes The second SCPI SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform REPLace is provided to be consistent ...

Page 1874: ...RB Memory on page 2829 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Replace Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Change Directory This key functions the same as Change Directory on page 2830 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Replace Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A...

Page 1875: ...ck Waveform in Slot If the selected slot is in the trial state or the lock required state the waveform that occupies the slot is locked and permanently licensed Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform LOCK int or SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform LOCK int Example SYST LKEY WAV LOCK 1 or SYST LIC WAV LOCK 1 Notes The second SCPI SY...

Page 1876: ...slot number exceeds total available slot number Nonexistent is returned Range Locked Available Trail LockRequired Nonexistent Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Slots Free Query Remote Command Only Returns the number of license slots free Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform FREE or SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform FREE Example SYST LKEY WAV FREE or SYST LIC WAV FREE Notes The second SCPI SYSTem LICense FPA...

Page 1877: ...ss than or equals 0 an error is generated Result type is string If input slot number exceeds total available slot number Nonexistent is returned If no waveform stored in the specified slot then empty string is returned Initial S W Revision A 12 00 Slot Waveform Unique ID Query Remote Command Only Returns the waveform unique ID of the specified slot Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform UID int or SY...

Page 1878: ...al Studio waveform has a unique id recorded in header So if the unique ids are same that means they are same one waveform So besides SCPI to query locked waveform name list also provide a SCPI to query locked waveform unique id list Initial S W Revision A 11 00 Marker Utilities Allows access to the marker utilities sub menus Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Marker ...

Page 1879: ...B Marker Utilities Marker Polarity Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB MPOLarity MARKer2 POSitive NEGative SOURce RADio ARB MPOLarity MARKer2 Example SOUR RAD ARB MPOL MARK2 NEG Dependencies When a new waveform is selected for playback the settings contained within the associated waveform header file are applied to the ARB The marker polarity is one of the values stored within the header file If the n...

Page 1880: ...d within the header file If the newly selected waveform file has an associated header file the marker polarity is updated with the value from the header file The marker polarity will remain unchanged if the newly selected waveform does not have an associated header file Preset Pos Range Neg Pos Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Marker Routing Allows access to the marker routing sub menus which allow yo...

Page 1881: ...RF blanking setting is updated with the value from the header file The pulse RF blanking setting will remain unchanged if the newly selected waveform does not have an associated header file Range None M1 M2 M3 M4 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 None Sets no marker to be used for the pulse RF blanking function essentially turning the RF blanking function off Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Marker...

Page 1882: ... polarity this is when there are no maker points Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Marker Utilities Marker Routing Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB MDEStination ALCHold NONE M1 M2 M3 M4 SOURce RADio ARB MDEStination ALCHold Example SOUR RAD ARB MDES ALCH NONE Dependencies When a new waveform is selected for playback the settings contained within the associated waveform header file are applied to...

Page 1883: ...rker Utilities Marker Routing ALC Hold Example SOUR RAD ARB MDES PULS M3 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Marker 4 Sets marker 4 to be used for the ALC hold function Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Marker Utilities Marker Routing ALC Hold Example SOUR RAD ARB MDES PULS M4 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Header Utilities Allows access to the header utilities sub menu Pressing this key also causes the...

Page 1884: ...al Studio waveform contains a unique waveform ID which recorded in the header This command allows you to query the unique waveform ID from the header This is a SCPI only command User can also checkError Reference source not found for waveform unique ID display Remote Command MMEMory HEADer ID file name Example MMEM HEAD ID test wfm query the waveform already loaded into the ARB memory MMEM HEAD ID...

Page 1885: ...mplitude modulation Turning AM on when another modulation format is already on results in the previous modulation format being turned off and the generation of an error Key Path Source Modulation Setup AM Remote Command SOURce AM STATe SOURce AM STATe Example SOUR AM STAT OFF Preset Off Range On Off Initial S W Revision A 05 00 AM Depth Allows you to set the amplitude modulation depth in percent K...

Page 1886: ...on Key Path Source Modulation Setup Initial S W Revision A 05 00 FM Enables or disables the frequency modulation Turning FM on when another modulation format is already on results in the previous modulation format being turned off and the generation of an error Key Path Source Modulation Setup FM Remote Command SOURce FM STATe SOURce FM STATe Example SOUR FM STAT OFF Preset Off Range On Off Initia...

Page 1887: ...OUR FM INT FREQ 40 0 Hz Preset 400 0 Hz Min 10 Hz Max 40 kHz Initial S W Revision A 05 00 PM Allows access to the menu for configuring the phase modulation Key Path Source Modulation Setup Initial S W Revision A 05 00 PM Enables or disables the phase modulation Turning PM on when another modulation format is already on results in the previous modulation format being turned off and the generation o...

Page 1888: ...10 Hz Max 40 kHz Initial S W Revision A 05 00 List Sequencer Allows you access to the sub menus for configuring the list sequencer List sequences allows you to enter frequencies and amplitudes at unequal intervals in nonlinear ascending descending or random order Each step within the list can also include its own waveform file for playback step duration trigger event and trigger output The complex...

Page 1889: ... output of the source Couplings When in Sequence Analyzer mode and the list sequencer state is Off Include Source is forced to No and the Include Source key is grayed out When in Sequence Analyzer mode and the list sequencer state is On Include Source is available to set And an ARB memory related operation like load or delete will be rejected Preset Off Range On Off Initial S W Revision A 05 00 In...

Page 1890: ...st Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST NUMBer STEPs integer SOURce LIST NUMBer STEPs Example SOUR LIST NUMB STEP 1 Notes Increasing the number of steps creates additional steps at the end of the list with all the settings within the steps set to their default values Decreasing the number of steps removes steps from the end of the list The settings within the removed steps are...

Page 1891: ...on A 05 00 Delete Step Allows you to delete the current step Deleting a step will automatically decrease the Step Count parameter by 1 If sequence only has one step left delete step will be rejected and popup error 221 Setting conflict Cannot delete current step minimum number of steps reached Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Notes No remote command Front Panel key only If the l...

Page 1892: ...ion A 05 00 Internal Sets the trigger input for the current step to Internal Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Step Trigger Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET INP TRIG INT Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Manual Trigger Key Sets the trigger input for the current step to Manual Trigger Key Any step in the sequence set to Manual will cause the sequence ex...

Page 1893: ...40 Notes Note When on E6640A trigger 2 is a bi directional trigger port So when trigger 2 has been configured as OUTPUT type choosing External 2 as the input trigger for the current step will generate error Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Transition Time Allows you to specify the transition time for the current step The transition time is the amount of time allowed for the source to settle at the cur...

Page 1894: ...ision A 05 00 Radio Setup Allows you access to the sub menus for setting up the radio standard band and radio band link direction for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Notes No remote command front panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Radio Standard Allows access to the sub menus for selecting the radio standard and the associated radio band for use in the cur...

Page 1895: ...on A 05 00 GSM EDGE Pressing this key once selects GSM EDGE as the radio standard and the current GSM EDGE band as the active channel band Pressing this key again allows access to the sub menus for selecting a different GSM EDGE band Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 05 00 P GSM Selects P GSM as the band for the current step Key P...

Page 1896: ...encer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM 450 Selects GSM 450 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM 480 Selects GSM 480 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standar...

Page 1897: ...s access to the sub menus for selecting a different WCDMA band Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band I Selects Band I as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band II Selects Band II as the band for the current step Key...

Page 1898: ...ncer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band VII Selects Band VII as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band VIII Selects Band VIII as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard...

Page 1899: ...ncer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIII Selects Band XIII as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIV Selects Band XIV as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard...

Page 1900: ...io Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 US PCS Selects US PCS as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Japan Cell Selects Japan Cell as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Ini...

Page 1901: ... Revision A 05 00 Secondary 800 Selects Secondary 800 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 400 Euro PAMR Selects 400 Euro PAMR as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A ...

Page 1902: ...d CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 US 2 5GHz Selects US 2 5 GHz as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 700 Public Safety Selects 700 Public Safety as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000...

Page 1903: ...50 BAND 2 Selects BAND 2 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 3 Selects BAND 3 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 4 Selects BAND 4 as the band for the current step Key Path...

Page 1904: ...equencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 9 Selects BAND 9 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 10 Selects BAND 10 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Ini...

Page 1905: ... Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 17 Selects BAND 17 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 18 Selects BAND 18 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE...

Page 1906: ... Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 25 Selects BAND 25 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 26 Selects BAND 26 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE...

Page 1907: ...or use and accesses the LTE TDD specific channel band sub menus Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 33 Selects BAND 33 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND33 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 34 Selects BAND 34 as the band for the current step Key Path Source...

Page 1908: ... Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND37 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 38 Selects BAND 38 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND38 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 39 Selects BAND 39 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Set...

Page 1909: ...uency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND42 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 43 Selects BAND 43 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND43 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 44 Selects BAND 44 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radi...

Page 1910: ...ard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDB Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND C Selects BAND C as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDC Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND D Selects BAND D as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BA...

Page 1911: ...calculate the downlink frequency according to a downlink formula together with selected channel band and channel number Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup RADio BAND LINK DOWN UP SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup RADio BAND LINK Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET RAD BAND LINK UP SOUR LIST STEP2 SET RAD BAND LINK Notes SCPI is ...

Page 1912: ...th Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup CNFRequency double SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup CNFRequency Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET CNFR 1GHz SOUR LIST STEP2 SET CNFR Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 This SCPI is used to setup channel number or frequency setting according to current Radio Band setting If Radio Band is NONE then it s freq...

Page 1913: ... power setting lower than 130dBm on MPA GPS ports then popup warning message These are only warning messages and check is performed when RF is ON Notes The Min and Max value here defined UI settable amplitude range This range is larger than actual amplitude range with level accuracy defined in spec Dependencies The RF power is dependent on the RF output port and frequency such that the current fre...

Page 1914: ...Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 If the selected waveform contains header which contains ARB play parameters source list sequence will automatically apply header settings of the selected waveform in that step Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Continue Previous Sets the current step to continue with playback of the waveform from the previous step When continuing the previous waveform the ARB playba...

Page 1915: ... NVWFM MSUS or specifying a full path For more information see Memory Subsystem Remote Command Only If a file of the same name already exists within ARB memory it is overwritten If you wish to load two segments of the same name you must rename one of the segments before loading it into ARB memory To rename a segment you can either use Windows File Explorer or the MMEMory COPY command NOTE When a w...

Page 1916: ...he same name already exists within ARB memory it is overwritten If you wish to load two segments of the same name you must rename one of the segments before loading it into ARB memory To rename a segment you can either use Windows File Explorer or the MEMory COPY command NOTE When a waveform file is loaded to ARB memory burst timing adjustments are made automatically based on whether or not a Mult...

Page 1917: ... location for selecting waveforms using SCPI Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB DEFault DIRectory string SOURce RADio ARB DEFault DIRectory Example SOUR RAD ARB DEF DIR D ArbFiles SOUR RAD ARB DEF DIR State Saved Persistent survives a power cycle and a preset but not saved in the instrument state Initial S W Revision A 05 00 S...

Page 1918: ...you to remove all segments from ARB playback memory Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments in ARB Memory Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB DELete ALL Example SOUR RAD ARB DELete ALL Notes When in Sequence Analyzer mode and Include Source is Yes an attempt to delete all files from ARB memory is rejected with an error When Include Source is No and you attempt to delete all files...

Page 1919: ...r Setup Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Default Directory This key functions the same as Default Directory on page 2830 Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Segments in ARB Memory This key functions the same as Segments in ARB Memory on page 2830 Key Path Source List Sequencer L...

Page 1920: ...ET DUR TYPE TIME SOUR LIST STEP2 SET DUR TYPE Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 Notes If Step Duration is set to Time or Play Count for the last step the last step of ARB keeps playing as if set to Continuous until the set Time has expired or until the Play Count setting is reached However you can query Error Reference source not found Source Sweeping Condition Message to find out if the curre...

Page 1921: ...d Continuous Abort according to current Duration Type setting is Play Count or Duraton Time or Continuous Abort If current Duration Type is Continuous then popup error 221 Settings conflict Cannot accept time or count input when step duration type is Continuous on step Notes If Duration Time is set for the last step the last step of ARB keeps playing as if set to Continuous after set time expires ...

Page 1922: ...occur on both Internal and External2 paths Select Off will turn off trigger output Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup OUTPut TRIGger ON OFF 1 0 SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup OUTPut TRIGger Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET OUTP TRIG ON SOUR LIST STEP2 SET OUTP TRIG Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 Preset Off Range On Off Initial ...

Page 1923: ...24 5 Frequency Channel Number freq chan num specifies the frequency in Hz or the channel number for the step The channel number and frequency are combined as one parameter that represents the frequency or channel number depending on the radio band setting If the radio band is set to NONE this value is interpreted as a frequency value in Hz If the radio band is set to a valid band this value is int...

Page 1924: ...IST SETup INPut TRIGger enum enum enum SOURce LIST SETup INPut TRIGger Example SOUR LIST SET INP TRIG IMM INT EXT2 SOUR LIST SET INP TRIG Notes The command is to setup below parameter array of whole list sequence Step Trigger enum specifies the input trigger for the step For details of the valid types of step trigger see Step Trigger on page 2804 If input parameter number exceeds the step number d...

Page 1925: ...umber of Steps As a step is setup the value entered run through several levels of validation R e m o t e C o m m a n d SOURce LIST SETup RADio BAND enum enum enum SOURce LIST SETup RADio BAND E x a m p l e SOUR LIST SET RAD BAND PGSM EGSM RGSM SOUR LIST SET RAD BAND N o t e s The command is to setup below parameter array of whole list sequence Radio Band enum specifies the radio band for the step ...

Page 1926: ...ND37 BAND38 BAND39 BAND40 BAN D41 BAND42 BAND43 BANDA BANDB BANDC BANDD BANDE BANDF D e p e n d e n c i e s The range is 1 to 1000 which is determined by the number of steps you have configured For details see Number of Steps on page 2803 I n i t i a l S W R e v i s i o n A 09 40 1926 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1927: ...r Channel Number parameter array of the whole List Sequencer at one time The number of array is same as step number defined in Number of Steps on page 2803 Number of Steps As a step is setup the value entered run through several levels of validation Remote Command SOURce LIST SETup CNFRequency double double double SOURce LIST SETup CNFRequency Example SOUR LIST SET CNFR 1GHz 100MHz 100MHz SOUR LIS...

Page 1928: ...will be updated Dependencies The range is 1 to 1000 which is determined by the number of steps you have configured For details see Number of Steps on page 2803 Initial S W Revision A 09 40 Step Configuration of Waveform parameter list Remote Command Only This SCPI command is to configure Waveform parameter array of the whole List Sequencer at one time The number of array is same as step number def...

Page 1929: ...ration enum specifies the duration of the step The duration can be specified to be either time or play count of the ARB file associated with the step or continuous If Waveform is set to CW this value cannot be set to Play Count and an error will be generated If continuous is selected the following Time or Count value is ignored For further details of this setting see Step Duration on page 2833 If ...

Page 1930: ...er list Remote Command Only This SCPI command is to configure Output Trigger parameter array of the whole List Sequencer at one time The number of array is same as step number defined in Number of Steps on page 2803 Number of Steps As a step is setup the value entered run through several levels of validation Remote Command SOURce LIST SETup OUTPut TRIGger bool bool bool SOURce LIST SETup OUTPut TR...

Page 1931: ... DATamarker Initial S W Revision A 14 00 BeginningOfStep Sets the output trigger type as BeginningOfStep for the whole source sequence Key Path Source List Sequencer Trigger Type Example SOUR LIST TRIG TYP BEG Notes SCPI is supported after A 14 00 Initial S W Revision A 14 00 DataMarker Sets the output trigger type as DataMarker for the whole source sequence When DataMarker is selected which marke...

Page 1932: ...ample SOUR LIST TRIG TYPE MARK M3 Notes SCPI is supported after A 14 00 Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Marker 4 Sets the output trigger maker routing to Marker 4 for DataMarker in the whole source sequence Key Path Source List Sequencer Trigger Type DataMarker Example SOUR LIST TRIG TYPE MARK M4 Notes SCPI is supported after A 14 00 Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Manual Trigger Now Pressing this key p...

Page 1933: ...y only SCPI Returning 1 if list sequence has been initiated successfully returning 0 if not Once get 0 you can use SYST ERR to query what error happened Just like OPC this command can be blocked until event status IsSourceSweeping happens and then returns Doing so can help user s script query armed status only once during the time interval of the initiation As an ancillary SCPI of existing SCPI SO...

Page 1934: ...CDOMain SPAN STARt integer DISPlay CDPower CDOMain SPAN STARt Example DISP CDP CDOM SPAN STAR 5 DISP CDP CDOM SPAN STAR Notes The max value is device sensitive BTS 448 MS 192 Couplings Start Code Number and Stop Code Number on page 1934 are coupled to each other according to A Stop Code Number Start Code Number and B Stop Code Number Start Code Number 63 When changing the start code number if it d...

Page 1935: ... the start code number is changed to satisfy A and C C Stop Code Number Start Code Number 63 Preset 511 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 63 Max 511 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Expand Toggles the expanding function of the code domain power graph between On and Off If set to On the CDP graph is expanded horizontally to show 64 spread codes centered at the scale or the marker posit...

Page 1936: ...ion Prior to A 02 00 Pause Resume Pauses a measurement after the current data acquisition is complete When Paused the label on the key changes to Resume Pressing Resume resumes the measurement at the point it was at when paused See Pause Resume for details Key Path Sweep Control Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 1936 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1937: ...12 Code Domain Measurement System System See System on page 264 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1937 ...

Page 1938: ...tor There is no Trace Detector functionality supported in the Code Domain measurement The front panel key displays a blank menu when pressed Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 1938 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1939: ...elay See Trig Delay on page 336 External 1 See External 1 on page 1588 Trigger Level See Trigger Level on page 1589 Trig Slope See Trig Slope on page 1589 Trig Delay See Trig Delay on page 339 Zero Span Delay Comp See Zero Span Delay Comp On Off on page 1577 External 2 See External 2 on page 1590 Trigger Level See Trigger Level on page 1590 Trig Slope See Trig Slope on page 1591 W CDMA HSPA Measur...

Page 1940: ...on page 1582 Trig Slope See Trigger Slope on page 1593 Trig Delay See Trig Delay on page 346 Periodic Timer See Periodic Timer Frame Trigger on page 1583 Period See Period on page 1585 Offset See Offset on page 1585 Offset Adjust Remote Command Only See Offset Adjust Remote Command Only on page 1586 Reset Offset Display See Reset Offset Display on page 1587 Sync Source See Sync Source on page 1587...

Page 1941: ...vel on page 1590 Trig Slope See Trig Slope on page 1591 RF Burst See RF Burst on page 1591 Absolute Trigger See Absolute Trigger Level on page 1592 Trig Slope See Trigger Slope on page 1593 Trig Delay See Trig Delay on page 357 Baseband I Q See ___ on page X I Q Mag See ___ on page X Trigger Level See ___ on page X Trig Slope See ___ on page X Trig Delay See ___ on page X W CDMA HSPA Measurement A...

Page 1942: ...age X Q Demodulated See ___ on page X Trigger Level See ___ on page X Trig Slope See ___ on page X Trig Delay See ___ on page X Input I See ___ on page X Trigger Level See ___ on page X Trig Slope See ___ on page X Trig Delay See ___ on page X Input Q See ___ on page X Trigger Level See ___ on page X 1942 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1943: ...___ on page X Trig Slope See ___ on page X Trig Delay See ___ on page X Trigger Center Frequency See ___ on page X Trigger Bandwidth See ___ on page X Auto Holdoff See Auto Holdoff on page 1594 Auto Trig See Auto Trig on page 1594 Trig Holdoff See Trig Holdoff on page 1595 Holdoff Type See ___ on page X W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1943 ...

Page 1944: ... as it can in legacy analyzers If you want to recall all modes to their user preset file state you will need to do a User Preset after mode switching into each mode User Preset recalls mode state which can now include data like traces whereas on ESA and PSA User Preset did not affect data Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 User Preset User Preset sets the state of the currently active mode back...

Page 1945: ...ll of the User Preset files for each mode switches to the power on mode and activates the saved measurement from the power on mode User Preset file When the instrument is secured all of the user preset files are converted back to their default user preset files The User Preset function does the following Aborts the currently running measurement Switches the Mode to the power on mode Restores the U...

Page 1946: ...ode and its State You can recall this User Preset file by pressing the User Preset menu key or sending the SYST PRES USER remote command This same state is also saved by the Save State function Key Path User Preset Remote Command SYSTem PRESet USER SAVE Example SYST PRES USER SAVE Notes SYST PRES SAVE creates the same file as if the user requested a SAV or a MMEM STOR STAT except User Preset Save ...

Page 1947: ...evision Prior to A 02 00 Annotation Turns on and off various parts of the display annotation The annotation is divided up into four categories 1 Meas Bar This is the measurement bar at the top of the screen It does not include the settings panel or the Active Function Turning off the Meas Bar turns off the settings panel and the Active Function When the Meas Bar is off the graticule area expands t...

Page 1948: ...ement Bar Key Path View Display Display Annotation Remote Command DISPlay ANNotation MBAR STATe OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay ANNotation MBAR STATe Example DISP ANN MBAR OFF Dependencies Grayed out and forced to OFF when System Display Settings Annotation is set to Off Preset On This should remain Off through a Preset when System DisplaySettings Annotation is set to Off State Saved Saved in instrument state ...

Page 1949: ...NNotation SCReen STATe OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay ANNotation SCReen STATe Example DISP ANN SCR OFF Dependencies Grayed out and forced to OFF when System Display Settings Annotation is set to Off Preset On This should remain Off through a Preset when System DisplaySettings Annotation is set to Off State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Active Function Values On Off Turn...

Page 1950: ...reset On This should remain Off through a Preset when System DisplaySettings Annotation is set to Off State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Title Displays menu keys that enable you to change or clear a title on your display Key Path View Display Display Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Change Title Writes a title into the measurement name field in the ban...

Page 1951: ...ATA This Is My Title This example is for Measurements other than Swept SA Both set the title to This Is My Title Notes Pressing this key cancels any active function When a title is edited the previous title remains intact it is not cleared and the cursor goes at the end so that characters can be added or BKSP can be used to go back over previous characters Preset No title measurement name instead ...

Page 1952: ...f the meas local annotation settings When it is All Off it forces ScreenAnnotation Meas Bar Trace and Active Function Values settings to be OFF for all measurements in all modes This provides the security based annotation off function of previous analyzers hence it uses the legacy SCPI command When it is All Off the Screen Meas Bar Trace and Active Function Values keys under the Display Annotation...

Page 1953: ...y Notes In ESA and PSA we offer the choice of Reverse Bitmap or Reverse Metafile when saving screen images This is much like the Flat Color theme available in X Series Also if you selected Reverse Bitmap AND a black white screen image that would be much like Flat Monochrome In other words each of the X Series themes has a similar screen image type in ESA PSA But they are not identical Initial S W ...

Page 1954: ...ng the following two windows Power Bar Graph window upper Metrics window lower The parameters displayed in these windows differ depending on the setting of Radio Device in the Mode Setup menu see Radio on page 251 For details of each view see Power Bar Graph Metrics BTS on page 1954 Power Bar Graph Metrics MS on page 1956 When the parameter Capture Interval is set to Long Mode 4 8 or 16 Frame this...

Page 1955: ...or the slot specified by the measOffset Not averaged through measInterval Metrics window Name Corresponding Results Explanation Total Power n 1 8th Total Power Note 1 nn nn dBm Total Active Ch n 1 9th Total active power Note 1 nnn nnn dBc CPICH n 1 10th Common Pilot CPICH power Note 1 nn nnn dBc PSCH n 1 16th nnn nn dBm W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1955 ...

Page 1956: ... Num of Active Ch n 1 15th Number of active channels Note 1 nnn Note 1 These traces and scalar results are for the slot specified by the Meas Offset Not averaged over Meas Interval SCH burst period the first 10 of each slot is included in the measurement SCH s interference is suppressed if SCH Suppress setting is On Note 2 Primary and Secondary SCH power is estimated by MMSE algorithm Power Bar Gr...

Page 1957: ...wer n 2 Metrics window Name Corresponding Results Explanation Total Power n 1 8th Total Power nn nn dBm Total Active Ch n 1 9th Total active power Note 1 nnn nnn dBc DPCCH Power n 1 18th DPCCH power PRACH Message Control Power Note 1 nn nnn dBc DPCCH Beta n 1 20th n nnn W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1957 ...

Page 1958: ...eta Measured Note 1 n nnn DPDCH Beta 6 n 1 27th DPDCH 6 Beta Measured Note 1 n nnn E DPDCH Beta 1st on I n 1 39th E DPDCH 1st on I axis Beta Measured Note 1 n nnn E DPDCH Beta 1st on Q n 1 40th E DPDCH 1st on Q axis Beta Measured Note 1 n nnn E DPDCH Beta 2nd on I n 1 41st E DPDCH 2nd on I axis Beta Measured This result is used only when there are two E DPDCHs on I axis In this case beta for E DPD...

Page 1959: ...1 nnn Note 1 These traces and scalar results are for the slot specified by the Meas Offset Not averaged over Meas Interval Composite Symbol Boundary Turns the composite code channel display function on or off The Composite Symbol Boundary for Power Bar Graph and CDE Graph functions are coupled to each other Key Path View Display Power Graph Metrics Mode WCDMA Remote Command CALCulate CDPower SBOun...

Page 1960: ...e when Composite is On Couplings The functions of Display Symbol Rate for Power Bar Graph and CDE Graph are coupled to each other Preset 15000 State Saved Saved in instrument state Range 7500 15000 30000 60000 120000 240000 480000 960000 for BTS 15000 30000 60000 120000 240000 480000 960000 1920000 for MS Default Unit sps Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 03 00 CDP G...

Page 1961: ...961 CDP Graph and CDE Graph MS on page 1962 Key Path View Display Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 CDP Graph and CDE Graph BTS The figure below shows an example of this view For details of each window see CDP Code Domain Power Graph window on page 1961 CDE Code Domain Error Graph window on page 1962 CDP Code Domain Power Graph window Marker Operation Yes Corresponding Trace CDPower n 2 W CDMA...

Page 1962: ...ding Trace CDError n 13 Note 1 These traces and scalar results are for the slot specified by the Meas Offset Not averaged over Meas Interval CDP Graph and CDE Graph MS The figure below shows an example of this view when Radio Device is set to MS For details of each window see CDP Code Domain Power Graph window on page 1963 CDE Code Domain Error Graph window on page 1963 1962 W CDMA HSPA Measuremen...

Page 1963: ...ew Display Power Graph Metrics Mode WCDMA Remote Command CALCulate CDPower SBOundary COMPosite OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate CDPower SBOundary COMPosite Example CALC CDP SBO COMP ON CALC CDP SBO COMP Notes Only valid for CDPower Bar Graph window and CDE Graph window Dependencies This command is effective only when the SENSe CDPOwer CAPTure TIME Capture Interval is set to 0 067 1 0 2 0 and 3 0 Couplings Set...

Page 1964: ...000 960000 1920000 for MS Default Unit sps Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 03 00 I Q Error Quad View Provides a combination view of magnitude error phase error Symbol EVM and the summary data using the following four windows Magnitude Error window upper left Phase Error window upper right Symbol EVM window lower left Metrics window lower right When the parameter Ca...

Page 1965: ...r details of each window see Magnitude Error window on page 1965 Phase Error window on page 1965 EVM window on page 1966 Metrics window on page 1966 Magnitude Error window Marker Operation Yes Corresponding Trace MERRor n 6 Phase Error window Marker Operation Yes Corresponding Trace PERRor n 7 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1965 ...

Page 1966: ...e error nn nn rms Phase Error n 1 4th Symbol phase error nn nn rms Total Power n 1 5th Total power nn nn dBm Channel Power n 1 6th Channel Power nn nn dBc tDPCH n 1 7th tDPCH nnn Note 1 The result metrics window indicates the modulation scheme QPSK or 16QAM that was used in the measurement If modulation scheme setting is Auto the result is auto detected one If the setting is manual either QPSK or ...

Page 1967: ...ow on page 1968 Magnitude Error window See Note 1 below Marker Operation Yes Corresponding Trace MERRor n 6 Phase Error window See Note 1 2 below Marker Operation Yes Corresponding Trace PERRor n 7 EVM window See Note 1 below W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1967 ...

Page 1968: ...itude error Note 1 nn nn rms Phase Error n 1 4th Symbol phase error Note 2 nn nn rms Total Power n 1 5th Total power nn nn dBm Channel Power n 1 6th Channel Power nn nn dBc tHS DPCCH n 1 7th tHS DPCCH nnn Note 1 When I Q Branch is either I BPSK or Q BPSK EVM of single code Channel is calculated independently between I and Q each other When I Q Branch is IQC Combined EVM is calculated based on comb...

Page 1969: ...age 1975 is available The parameters displayed in these windows depend on the setting of Radio Device in the Mode Setup menu see Radio on page 251 For details of each window in the view for each of these settings see Code Domain Quad View BTS on page 1969 Code Domain Quad View MS on page 1971 Key Path View Display Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Code Domain Quad View BTS The figure below sho...

Page 1970: ...ponding Trace CDPower n 2 Note 1 These traces and scalar results are for the slot specified by the Meas Offset Not averaged over Meas Interval Symbol Power vs Time window This window is identical to the Symbol Power vs Time window in the view Demod Bits on page 1975 Marker Operation Yes Corresponding Trace SPOWer n 9 CPOWer n 10 1970 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1971: ...Power n 1 5th Total power nn nn dBm Channel Power n 1 6th Channel Power nn nn dBc Note 1 Result metrics window indicates the modulation scheme QPSK or 16QAM that was used in the measurement If modulation scheme setting is Auto the result is auto detected one If the setting is manual either QPSK or 16QAM the result is the same as the specified one Code Domain Quad View MS The figure below shows an ...

Page 1972: ...ponding Trace CDPower n 2 Note 1 These traces and scalar results are for the slot specified by the Meas Offset Not averaged over Meas Interval Symbol Power vs Time window This window is identical to the Symbol Power vs Time window in the view Demod Bits on page 1975 Marker Operation Yes Corresponding Trace SPOWer n 9 CPOWer n 10 1972 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1973: ...evel 2 9 2 960ksps 9 7 5ksps Y OVSF code number 0 2x 1 N 7 5 15 30 960 ksps RMS EVM n 1 1st RMS symbol EVM nn nn rms Pk EVM n 1 2nd Peak symbol EVM nn nn pk Magnitude Error n 1 3rd Symbol magnitude error nn nn rms Phase Error n 1 4th Symbol phase error nn nn rms Total Power n 1 5th Total power nn nn dBm Channel Power n 1 6th Channel Power nn nn dBc tHS DPCCH n 1 7th tHS DPCCH nnn Composite Symbol ...

Page 1974: ...Culate CDPower SRATe command The functions of Display Symbol Rate for Power Bar Graph and CDE Graph are coupled to each other Key Path View Display Power Graph Metrics Mode WCDMA Remote Command CALCulate CDPower SBOundary SRATe integer CALCulate CDPower SBOundary SRATe Example CALC CDP SBO SRAT 30000 CALC CDP SBO SRAT Notes Only valid for CDP Bar Graph window and CDE Graph window 192000 choice for...

Page 1975: ...es Two windows Symbol Chip Power vs Time window upper Demod Bits text window lower See Demod Bits BTS Long Mode on page 1978 or Demod Bits MS Long Mode on page 1979 When the Demod Bits window is active in the Demod Bits view window the View Display key accesses the menu to allow the following controls to read the bit stream measurement results Prev Page on page 1982 Returns one page back to the pr...

Page 1976: ...e 1977 CDP Code Domain Power Graph window Marker Operation Yes Corresponding Trace CDPower n 2 Note 1 These traces and scalar results are for the slot specified by the Meas Offset Not averaged over Meas Interval Symbol Power vs Time window Marker Operation Yes Corresponding Trace SPOWer n 9 CPOWer n 10 1976 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1977: ...s not shown as the physical channel name It is simply shown by Code Level and Index Cx y x Code Level y Code Index Demod Bits MS Except Long Mode The figure below shows an example of this view when Radio Device is set to MS For details of each window see CDP Code Domain Power Graph window on page 1978 Symbol Power vs Time window on page 1978 Demod Bits window on page 1978 W CDMA HSPA Measurement A...

Page 1978: ...Demod Bits by Meas Offset and Meas Interval n 12 Note 1 When Capture Interval is less than 1 frame the channel type is not shown as the physical channel name It s simply shown by Code Level and Index Cx y x Code Level y Code Index Demod Bits BTS Long Mode The figure below shows an example of this view when Radio Device is set to BTS For details of each window see Symbol Power vs Time window on pag...

Page 1979: ...Operation No Corresponding Trace Selected Demod Bits by Meas Offset and Meas Interval n 12 Demod Bits MS Long Mode The figure below shows an example of this view when Radio Device is set to MS For details of each window see Symbol Power vs Time window on page 1980 Demod Bits window on page 1980 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1979 ...

Page 1980: ...esponding Trace Selected Demod Bits by Meas Offset and Meas Interval n 12 Composite Symbol Boundary Turns the composite code channel display function on or off The Composite Symbol Boundary for Power Bar Graph and CDE Graph functions are coupled to each other Key Path View Display Power Graph Metrics Mode WCDMA 1980 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1981: ...nd The functions of Display Symbol Rate for Power Bar Graph and CDE Graph are coupled to each other Key Path View Display Power Graph Metrics Mode WCDMA Remote Command CALCulate CDPower SBOundary SRATe integer CALCulate CDPower SBOundary SRATe Example CALC CDP SBO SRAT 30000 CALC CDP SBO SRAT Notes Only valid for CDP Bar Graph window and CDE Graph window 192000 choice for MS is available only when...

Page 1982: ...ocus There is no equivalent SCPI command Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Scroll Up Moves one line upward from the current page of the measurement results with each key press Key Path View Display Demod Bits Mode WCDMA Notes The Demod Bits window must have the focus There is no equivalent SCPI command Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Scroll Down Moves one line downward from the current p...

Page 1983: ...enu key is displayed and active if Radio Device is BTS and Demod Bits window is selected Binary Demodulated bits are displayed in binary format Hex Demodulated bits are displayed in hexadecimal format The Demod Bits view changes as the above settings change This functionality works only when all the following conditions are met 1 Radio Device is BTS 2 the Symbol Rate is 240 ksps 3 the modulation s...

Page 1984: ... BFOR Preset BINary State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Binary Hex Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Composite Chip Power Toggles the composite chip power display function between On and Off Key Path View Display Code Domain Quad View Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay CDPower CPOWer STATe 0 1 OFF ON DISPlay CDPower CPOWer STATe Example DISP CDP CPOW ON DISP CDP CPOW Notes Only valid fo...

Page 1985: ...d the code domain error Not available if the SENSe CDPower CAPTure TIME Capture Interval is 4 0 or 8 0 or 16 0 Long Mode SEVM 3 I Q Error Quad View Symbol EVM provides a combination view of magnitude error phase error Symbol EVM and the summary data Not available if the SENSe CDPower CAPTure TIME Capture Interval is set to 4 0 or 8 0 Long Mode QUAD 4 Code Domain Quad View Provides a combination vi...

Page 1986: ...iew Demod Bits Long Demod Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 View Selection by Number Remote Command only Displays the numeric values of the measurement results For a complete list of Numeric ID values for use with this command see View Selection Remote Command only on page 1985 above Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay CDPower VIEW NSELect integer DISPlay CDPower VIEW NSELect Example DISP CDP VI...

Page 1987: ...fy a transmitter For more details see Modulation Accuracy Measurement Description on page 1996 below This topic contains the following sections Measurement Commands for Modulation Accuracy on page 1988 Remote Command Results for Modulation Accuracy on page 1989 Undefined variable Primary ProductName W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 1987 ...

Page 1988: ...wing commands and queries are used to retrieve the measurement results CONFigure RHO CONFigure RHO NDEFault INITiate RHO FETCh RHO n READ RHO n MEASure RHO n For more measurement related commands see the section Remote Measurement Functions on page 2642 1988 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 1989: ...g point number in dB of the I and Q error magnitude squared offset from the origin 6 Frequency error Average is a floating point number in Hz of the frequency error in the measured signal 7 Rho Average is a floating point number of Rho 8 Peak Code Domain Error Peak Hold is a floating point number in dB of the Peak Code Domain Error relative to the mean power 9 Peak Code Domain Error Channel Number...

Page 1990: ... of Capture Interval The first number is the symbol 0 decision point There are X points per symbol X points chip Therefore the decision points are at 0 1 X 2 X 3 X 4 Chip Phase Error Phase error trace returns a series of floating point numbers in degrees that represent each sample in the phase error trace of Capture Interval There are X points per symbol X points chip Therefore the decision points...

Page 1991: ...1st Active Channel 2nd number OVSF Code number for 1st Active Channel 3rd number in BTS 999 or in MS either 1 I or 1 Q for 1st Active Channel 4th number Power Level in dB for 1st Active Channel 5th number Code Domain Error for 1st Active Channel N 1 5 1th number Symbol Rate for Nth Active Channel N 1 5 2th number OVSF Code number for Nth Active Channel N 1 5 3th number 999 in BTS or either 1 I or ...

Page 1992: ...ase of Peak CDE I Phase 1 0 for MS Q Phase 1 0 for MS IQ 999 0 for BTS 4th number Peak CDE Value of 1st slot in Capture Interval 4 N 1 th number Peak CDE Code Level of Nth slot in Capture Interval 4 N 2 th number Peak CDE Code Index of Nth slot in Capture Interval 4 N 3 th number I Q Phase of Peak CDE I Phase 1 0 for MS Q Phase 1 0 for MS IQ 999 0 for BTS 4 N 4 th Number Peak CDE value of Nth slot...

Page 1993: ... is a floating point number in chip of the pilot phase timing from the acquisition trigger point 12 CPICH power over a slot is a floating point number in dB of CPICH power over a measurement slot In the MS mode the value returned is 999 13 Total power over a slot is a floating point number in dBm of total RF power over a measurement slot 15 Peak Hold Results Peak Hold scalar results trace returns ...

Page 1994: ...e Channel 4th number Relative Code Domain Error for 1st Active Channel 5th number 999 Reserved for Mod Format for 1st Active Channel N 1 5 1th number Symbol Rate for Nth Active Channel N 1 5 2th number OVSF Code number for Nth Active Channel N 1 5 3th number 999 in BTS or either 1 I or 1 Q in MS for Nth Active Channel N 1 5 4th number Relative Code Domain Error for Nth Active Channel N 5 th number...

Page 1995: ...VSF Code Number of Peak Relative Code Domain Error channel In BTS mode the value returned is 999 5 Peak Relative Code Domain Error Channel I or Q is a floating point number that specifies whether the Peak Relative Code Domain Error channel is on I 1 or Q 1 In the BTS mode the value returned is 999 6 Reserved The value returned is 999 7 Reserved The value returned is 999 8 Reserved The value return...

Page 1996: ...lity metrics along with EVM and Modulation Accuracy Rho power Rho is the ratio of the correlated power in a multi coded channel to the total signal power This measurement takes into account all possible error mechanisms in the entire transmission chain including baseband filtering I Q modulation anomalies filter amplitude and phase non linearities and power amplifier distortions This provides an o...

Page 1997: ...page 1998 Ref Value I Q Error View Phase Error Window on page 1998 Ref Value Slot CDE EVM View Evm Window on page 1999 Ref Value Slot CDE EVM View Peak CDE Window on page 1999 Ref Value Slot CDE EVM View Freq Error Window on page 2000 Ref Value Code Domain Power View Power Bar Graph Window on page 2000 Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Ref Value I Q Error View EVM Window...

Page 1998: ...rmined by the measurement result When you set this value manually Auto Scaling is automatically set to Off Preset 0 00 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 500 0 Max 500 0 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Ref Value I Q Error View Phase Error Window Sets the absolute power reference value in the phase error window Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay RHO VIEW2 WINDow3 ...

Page 1999: ...uto Scaling is automatically set to Off Preset 0 00 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 500 0 Max 500 0 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Ref Value Slot CDE EVM View Peak CDE Window Sets the absolute power reference value of the slot by slot results in the peak code domain error window Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay RHO VIEW6 WINDow2 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel real DI...

Page 2000: ...d Couplings If Auto Scaling is set to On this value is automatically determined by the measurement result When you set this value manually Auto Scaling is automatically set to Off Preset 0 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 4 3214 GHz Max 4 3214 GHz Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Ref Value Code Domain Power View Power Bar Graph Window Sets the reference value for code domain power me...

Page 2001: ...eak Point 0 dB 0 7071 1 0 2 0 10 n a 6 dB 0 3536 0 5 1 0 4 0 502 V Peak 12 dB 0 1768 0 25 0 5 2 0 252 V Peak 18 dB 0 0884 0 125 0 25 8 0 127 V Peak Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Notes Visible only when the selected input is I Q State Saved No Readback Text When Range is Auto Auto When Range is Man and I Q are the same range value When Range is Man and I Q are different I I range value Q Q range value See...

Page 2002: ... Attenuation Remote Command SENSe POWer RF RANGe OPTimize IMMediate Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 03 00 Pre Adjust for Min Clip If this function is on it does the adjustment described under Adjust Range For Min Clip each time a measurement restarts Therefore in Continuous measurement mode it only executes before the first measurement Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Attenu...

Page 2003: ...s parameter will be read only meaning the value will appear on the softkey and query via SCPI but not changeable In such applications the softkey will be grayed out Attempting to change the value via SCPI will be ignored and no error message will be generated Preset 10 dB State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0 dB Max 20 dB Initial S W Revision A 13 00 Mixer Level Offset Mixer level offset is ...

Page 2004: ...e Range 1 V Peak 0 5 V Peak 0 25 V Peak 0 125 V Peak Min 0 125 V Max 1 V Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe POWer IQ I RANGe UPPer ampl SENSe POWer IQ I RANGe UPPer Example Set the I Range to 0 5 V Peak when Reference Z is 50Ω and to 1 0 V Peak when Reference Z is 75Ω POW IQ RANG 4 dBm Notes The POWer form of the command is provided for convenience It maps to the same under...

Page 2005: ...o 0 125 Volt Peak Key Path AMPTD Y Scale I Range Q Range Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Q Range Value This is the internal gain range for the Q channel See I Q Gain Ranges The Q Range only applies to Input Path Q Only and Ind I Q For input I jQ the I Range determines both I and Q channel range settings Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Range Remote Command SENSe VOLTage IQ Q RANGe UPPer voltage SENSe ...

Page 2006: ...enience It maps to the same underlying gain range parameter as the VOLTage form of the command The Reference Z not the Q channel Input Z is used to convert the power to peak voltage which is then used to set the Q Range as with the VOLTage form of the command The power values of the 4 range states 1V Peak 0 5V Peak 0 25V Peak and 0 125V Peak will vary with Reference Z Here are some examples 50Ω 10...

Page 2007: ... On otherwise none Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 1 V Peak Set the channel gain state to 1 Volt Peak Key Path AMPTD Y Scale I Range Q Range Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 0 5 V Peak Set the channel gain state to 0 5 Volt Peak Key Path AMPTD Y Scale I Range Q Range Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 0 25 V Peak Set the channel gain state to 0 25 Volt Peak Key Path AMPTD Y Scale I R...

Page 2008: ... CDE EVM View Peak CDE Window on page 2010 Scale Div Slot CDE EVM View Freq Error Window on page 2010 Scale Div Code Domain Power View Power Bar Graph Window on page 2011 Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Scale Div I Q Error View EVM Window Sets the sensitivity measurement result in the EVM window Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay RHO VIEW2 WINDow ...

Page 2009: ...00 Max 50 0 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Scale Div I Q Error View Phase Error Window Sets the sensitivity measurement result in the phase error window Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay RHO VIEW2 WINDow3 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision real DISPlay RHO VIEW2 WINDow3 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision Example DISP RHO VIEW2 WIND3 TRAC Y PDIV 10 0 DISP RHO VIEW2 WIND3 TRAC Y PDIV Couplin...

Page 2010: ...lot by slot results in the peak code domain error window Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay RHO VIEW6 WINDow2 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision real DISPlay RHO VIEW6 WINDow2 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision Example DISP RHO VIEW6 WIND2 TRAC Y PDIV 10 0 DISP RHO VIEW6 WIND2 TRAC Y PDIV Couplings If Auto Scaling is set to On this value is automatically determined by the measurement result When y...

Page 2011: ...mote Command DISPlay RHO VIEW3 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision real DISPlay RHO VIEW3 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision Example DISP RHO VIEW3 WIND TRAC Y PDIV 10 0 DISP RHO VIEW3 WIND TRAC Y PDIV Preset 10 00 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0 10 Max 20 00 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Ref Position Positions the Y axis scale reference level at the top center or bottom of the disp...

Page 2012: ...S TOP DISP RHO VIEW2 WIND TRAC Y RPOS Preset BOTTom State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Ref Position I Q Error View Mag Error Window Sets the reference position of the vertical axis in the magnitude error window Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay RHO VIEW2 WINDow2 TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition TOP CENTer BOTTom DISPlay RHO VIEW2 WINDow2 TRACe...

Page 2013: ...INDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition TOP CENTer BOTTom DISPlay RHO VIEW6 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition Example DISP RHO VIEW6 WIND TRAC Y RPOS TOP DISP RHO VIEW6 WIND TRAC Y RPOS Preset BOTTom State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Ref Position Slot CDE EVM View Peak CDE Window Sets the reference position of the vertical axis for the slot by slot results in the p...

Page 2014: ...ference values based on the measurement results When you set a value to either Scale Div or Ref Value manually Auto Scaling automatically changes to Off Details of the Auto Scaling functionality depend on the selected view and window as described in the following sections Auto Scaling I Q Error View EVM Window on page 2014 Auto Scaling I Q Error View Mag Error Window on page 2015 Auto Scaling I Q ...

Page 2015: ... I Q Error View Mag Error Window When Auto Scaling is On pressing the Restart front panel key automatically displays the scale per division and reference value results for the vertical axis in the magnitude error window Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay RHO VIEW2 WINDow2 TRACe Y SCALe COUPle 0 1 OFF ON DISPlay RHO VIEW2 WINDow2 TRACe Y SCALe COUPle Example DISP RHO VIEW2 WIN...

Page 2016: ...rror view Preset ON State Saved Saved in instrument state Range On Off Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Auto Scaling Slot CDE EVM View Evm Window When Auto Scaling is On pressing the Restart front panel key automatically displays the scale per division and reference value results for the slot by slot results in the EVM graph window Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay RHO ...

Page 2017: ...E EVM view Preset ON State Saved Saved in instrument state Range On Off Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Auto Scaling Slot CDE EVM View Freq Error Window When Auto Scaling is On pressing the Restart front panel key automatically displays the scale per division and reference value results for the slot by slot results in the frequency error window Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Mode WCDMA Remote Comman...

Page 2018: ...ONE puts all Auto Man parameters in manual mode It decouples all the coupled instrument parameters and is not recommended for making measurements Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 More Information There are two types of functions that have Auto Manual modes Auto Man Active Function keys An Auto Man toggle key controls the binary state associated with an instrument parameter by toggling between...

Page 2019: ...13 Modulation Accuracy Composite EVM Measurement Auto Couple W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2019 ...

Page 2020: ...W BW There is no BW functionality supported in the Modulation Accuracy measurement The front panel key displays a blank menu when pressed Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 2020 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2021: ...measurements etc when in Continuous mode When the average count reaches the Average Hold Number the count stops incrementing but the analyzer keeps sweeping See the Trace Detector section for the averaging formula used both before and after the Average Hold Number is reached The trigger condition must be met prior to each sweep The type of trace processing for multiple sweeps is set under the Trac...

Page 2022: ...ent Sweep the INIT CONT 0 command will place the analyzer in Single Sweep but will have no effect on the current sequence until k N at which point the current sequence will stop and the instrument will go to the idle state 2022 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2023: ...13 Modulation Accuracy Composite EVM Measurement File File See File on page 258 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2023 ...

Page 2024: ...s Center Freq The center frequency setting is the same for all measurements within a mode that is it is Meas Global Some modes are also able to share a Mode Global center frequency value If this is the case the Mode will have a Global Settings key in its Mode Setup menu The Center Freq function sets and queries the Center Frequency for the currently selected input If your analyzer has multiple inp...

Page 2025: ...pad or the SCPI command The other parameter is forced to a different value if needed to keep the Start and the Stop Frequencies within the analyzer s frequency range Preset Depends on instrument maximum frequency mode measurement and selected input See Center Frequency Presets on page 2025 and RF Center Freq on page 2027 and Ext Mix Center Freq and I Q Center Freq on page 2029 State Saved Saved in...

Page 2026: ...3 255 GHz 26 5 GHz 26 55 GHz 526 N9038A 1 805 GHz 3 6 GHz 27 0 GHz 532 16 005 GHz 32 0 GHz 32 5 GHz 543 21 505 GHz 43 0 GHz TBD 544 22 005 GHz 44 0 GHz 44 5 GHz 550 25 005 GHz 50 0 GHz 51 GHz Input 2 Model CF after Mode Preset Stop Freq after Mode Preset Max Freq can t tune above N9000A opt C75 0 7505GHz 1 5 GHz 1 58 GHz N9038A 505 MHz 1 GHz 1 000025 GHz Tracking Generator Frequency Limits N9000A ...

Page 2027: ...the currently selected input Scope Meas Global Remote Command SENSe FREQuency RF CENTer freq SENSe FREQuency RF CENTer Example FREQ RF CENT 30 MHz Notes This command is the same in all modes but the parameter is Measurement Global So the value is independent in each mode and common across all the measurements in the mode Dependencies If the electronic soft attenuator is enabled any attempt to set ...

Page 2028: ...Notes This command is the same in all modes but the parameter is Measurement Global So the value is independent in each mode and common across all the measurements in the mode Couplings When returning to External Mixing after having been switched to one of the other inputs e g RF you will come back into the settings that you had when you left External Mixing So you will come back to the band you w...

Page 2029: ...ut is not the input which is selected at the time the command is sent Note that the Center Freq function in the Frequency menu on the front panel always applies to the currently selected input Scope Meas Global Remote Command SENSe FREQuency IQ CENTer freq SENSe FREQuency IQ CENTer Example FREQ IQ CENT 30 MHz Notes This command is the same in all modes but the parameter is Measurement Global So th...

Page 2030: ... fails and results in an advisory message If the equivalent SCPI command is sent this same message is generated as part of a 221 Settings conflict warning Couplings When auto coupled in a non zero span the center frequency step size is set to 10 of the span When auto coupled in zero span the center frequency step size is set to the equivalent 3 dB RBW value Preset Auto ADEMOD 1 MHz ON State Saved ...

Page 2031: ...13 Modulation Accuracy Composite EVM Measurement Input Output Input Output See Input Output on page 190 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2031 ...

Page 2032: ... S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Backward Compatibility SCPI Commands Sets or queries the state of a marker Setting a marker that is OFF to state ON 1 puts it in Normal mode and places it at the center of the screen Mode WCDMA Remote Command CALCulate RHO MARKer 1 2 12 STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate RHO MARKer 1 2 12 STATe Example CALC RHO MARK3 STATE ON CALC RHO MARK3 STATE Preset OFF State Saved Saved...

Page 2033: ...es it at the center of the screen on the trace determined by the Marker Trace rules At the same time Marker X Axis Value appears on the Active Function area Default Active Function The active function for the selected marker s current control mode If the current control mode is Off there is no active function and the active function is turned off Active Function Display the marker Chip value for t...

Page 2034: ... value is returned the specified marker number s relative marker You must be in the Spectrum Analysis mode or GSM mode to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Preset 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 1 Max 12 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Marker Trace Assigns the specified marker to the designated trace Key Path Marker Mode WCDMA Remote ...

Page 2035: ...N CALC RHO MARK COUP Notes When the marker is assigned to the IQ Measured Polar graph a Chip value is coupled instead of an X Axis value Preset OFF State Saved Saved in instrument state Range On Off Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 All Markers Off Turns off all markers Key Path Marker Mode WCDMA Remote Command CALCulate RHO MARKer AOFF Example CALC RHO MARK AOFF Initial S W Revision Prior to ...

Page 2036: ...trol mode is Off but is the SCPI equivalent of entering an X value if the control mode is Normal or Delta This command is not valid when Marker Trace is POLar I Q Polar The Marker Chip Value is supported instead Mode WCDMA Remote Command CALCulate RHO MARKer 1 2 12 X real CALCulate RHO MARKer 1 2 12 X Example CALC RHO MARK3 X 0 0 CALC RHO MARK3 X Notes If no suffix is sent the fundamental units fo...

Page 2037: ...arker is Off the response is not a number NAN This command is not available when Marker Trace of the selected marker CALCulate RHO MARKer 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 TRACe is set to POLar In this case this command is ignored Preset After a preset all Markers are turned OFF so Marker X Axis Value query returns a not a number NAN State Saved No Min 9 9E 37 Max 9 9E 37 Initial S W Revision Prior to A ...

Page 2038: ...Function Marker Function There are no Marker Functions supported in Modulation Accuracy The front panel key displays a blank menu when pressed Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 2038 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2039: ...er To Marker To There is no Marker To functionality supported in Modulation Accuracy The front panel key displays a blank menu when pressed Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2039 ...

Page 2040: ...nt then reenter Help press the Help key and press that key Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Remote Measurement Functions This section contains the following topics Measurement Group of Commands on page 2643 Current Measurement Query Remote Command Only on page 2645 Limit Test Current Results Remote Command Only on page 2645 Data Query Remote Command Only on page 2645 ...

Page 2041: ...ilable ASCII is the default format for the data output Older versions of Spectrum Analysis and Phase Noise mode measurements only use ASCII The binary data formats should be used for handling large blocks of data since they are smaller and faster than the ASCII format Refer to the FORMat DATA command for more information If you need to change some of the measurement parameters from the factory def...

Page 2042: ...t included or is set to 1 If the n value is set to a value other than 1 the selected trace data results will be returned See each command for details of what types of scalar results or trace data results are available The binary data formats should be used for handling large blocks of data since they are smaller and transfer faster than the ASCII format FORMat DATA FETCh may be used to return resu...

Page 2043: ...ata since they are smaller and faster than the ASCII format FORMat DATA Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Current Measurement Query Remote Command Only This command returns the name of the measurement that is currently running Remote Command CONFigure Example CONF Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Limit Test Current Results Remote Command Only Queries the status of the current measurement ...

Page 2044: ...d CALCulate DATA n COMPress BLOCk CFIT MAXimum MINimum MEAN DMEan RMS RMSCubed SAMPle SDEViation PPHase soffset length roffset rlimit Example To query the mean power of a set of GSM bursts Supply a signal that is a set of GSM bursts Select the IQ Waveform measurement in IQ Analyzer Mode Set the sweep time to acquire at least one burst Set the triggers such that acquisition happens at a known posit...

Page 2045: ...ingle value that is the arithmetic mean of the data point values in dB dBm for the specified region s of trace data For I Q trace data the mean of the magnitudes of the I Q pairs is returned See the following equations If the original trace data is in dB this function returns the arithmetic mean of those log values not log of the mean power which is a more useful value The mean of the log is the b...

Page 2046: ...Data Pairs for Specified Region s where Xi is the complex value representation of an I Q pair Xi its conjugate complex number and n is the number of I Q pairs in the specified region s Once you have the rms value for a region of trace data linear or I Q you may want to calculate the mean power You must convert this rms value peak volts to power in dBm SAMPle returns the first data value x y pair f...

Page 2047: ... are specified by data point in PPHase The rms power of the specified region may be expressed as Power 10 x log 10 x RMS I Q value 10 The RMS I Q value peak volts is where Xi is the complex value representation of an I Q pair Xi its conjugate complex number and n is the number of I Q pairs in the specified region The arithmetic mean phase of the specified region may be expressed as where Yi is the...

Page 2048: ...data will be compressed into one value This parameter has a default value equal to the current trace length roffset repeat offset is an optional real number It is in seconds for time domain traces and is a dimensionless index 0 to Npoints 1 for frequency domain traces It defines the beginning of the next field of trace elements to be compressed This is relative to the beginning of the previous fie...

Page 2049: ...ude FREQuency TIME Example Example for Swept SA measurement in Spectrum Analyzer Mode CALC DATA4 PEAK 40 10 FREQ GTDL This will identify the peaks of trace 4 that are above 40 dBm with excursions of at least 10 dB The peaks are returned in order of increasing frequency starting with the lowest frequency Only the peaks that are above the display line are returned Query Results 1 With FORMat DATA RE...

Page 2050: ...this by peforming real time overlapped FFTs at the hardware layer using software for basic post processing before returning the result to the user The upshot of this approach is improved throughput for user applications that require many sequential power measurements The analysis bandwidth of FP2 is limited by the licenses in the instrument but its maximum overall analysis bandwidth per acquisitio...

Page 2051: ...defined in the configuration string Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Acquisition Time Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF AcquisitionTime 0 002 Notes The acquisition time parameter sets the time in which the entire spectrum is measured An increase in the acquisition time yields an improvement in measurement repeatability Preset 0 001 s Range 0 s to 1 s Default Unit Time s Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Center Fr...

Page 2052: ... analyzer is subtracted from all measurements This effectively lowers the noise floor of the analyzer When noise correction is enabled the first measurement for a given set of input parameters will take extra time This is because the analyzer takes an extra acquisition with the RF input disconnected from the analyzer s front end to measure the noise of just the analyzer The measured noise floor is...

Page 2053: ... method Because two acquisitions rather than a single acquisition are made when spur suppression is enabled the measurement time will always be slower when spur suppression is enabled Preset False Range True enable spur suppression or False disable spur suppression Default Unit Boolean Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Electronic Attenuator Bypass Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF ElecAttBypass False Notes Th...

Page 2054: ...ifferent IF paths For example if the signal is less than 25 MHz wide then the user can select the B25M path to take advantage of additional filtering on this analog IF path Preset B40M Range B10M B25M B40M Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Include Power Spectrum Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF IncludePowerSpectrum True Notes The power spectrum parameter allows the user to read data on the entire spectrum fo...

Page 2055: ...Off Range Off Low Full Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Resolution Bandwidth Mode Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF PreAmpMode Low Notes The resolution bandwidth mode parameter allows the user to choose whether the RBW filter is automatically or manually set The BestSpeed value minimizes measurement time while the Narrowest value minimizes RBW size minimum of two FFT bins per RBW To manually specify an RBW s...

Page 2056: ...itial S W Revision A 14 00 Trigger Level Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF TriggerLevel 2 Notes The trigger level parameter sets the voltage value at which an external trigger is detected Preset 1 2 V Range 5 to 5 V Default Unit Volts Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Trigger Slope Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF TriggerSlope Negative Notes The trigger slope parameter indicates the direction of the edge trigger vo...

Page 2057: ...ge 0 1 s Default Unit Seconds Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Signal Input Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF SignalInput Fp50MHzCW Notes The signal input parameter allows the user to select between using the main RF input or the internal analyzer reference CW signal of 50 MHz Preset FpMainRf Range FpMainRf Fp50MHzCW Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Use Preselector Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF UsePreSelector True ...

Page 2058: ...bandwidth filter weighs all frequencies within the bandwidth equally The root raised cosine filter has an associated shape parameter defined by the FilterAlpha parameter All array parameters should have the same number of elements Alternatively if all the elements are the same value a single value with no square brackets can be used to define the parameter Preset IBW Range IBW RRC Initial S W Revi...

Page 2059: ...ay parameters should have the same number of elements Alternatively if all the elements are the same value a single value with no square brackets can be used to define the parameter Preset BandPower Range BandPower BandDensity PeakPower PeakFrequency XdBBandwidth OccupiedBandwidth Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Channel Offset Frequency Array Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF OffsetFrequency 5e6 0 5e6 Notes...

Page 2060: ...ecify the power relative to the peak channel power over which the bandwidth is calculated The parameter value must be a negative number Preset 3 01 Range 200 to 0 dB Default Unit dB Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Define Fast Power Measurement Query Remote Command Only The DEFine command is used to retrieve a list of all defined parameters in an ASCII string format M o d e All R e m o t e C o m m a n...

Page 2061: ...000000 OffsetFrequency 0 Function BandPower FilterType IBW FilterAlpha 0 22 OccupiedBandwidthPercent 0 99 XdBBandwidth 3 01 DoNoiseCorrection False DoSpurSuppression False MeasurementMethod HardwareFFT IncludePowerSpectrum Fals e TriggerDelay 0 TriggerLevel 1 2 TriggerSlope Positive TriggerSource Free TriggerTimeout 1 I n i t i a l S W R e v i s i o n A 14 00 Configure Fast Power Measurement Remot...

Page 2062: ...ns m comma separated ASCII values where m corresponds to the number of bandwidths defined 1 Declared function return in the 1st specified channel 2 Declared function return in the 2nd specified channel m Declared function return in the last specified channel The INIT and FETC command sequence performs the same functionality of a single CALC FPOW POW n query Units of the returned values are depende...

Page 2063: ... ADC overloads and to visibly inspect the spectrum Mode All Remote Command CALCulate FPOWer POWer 1 2 999 READ2 Example CALC FPOW POW1 READ2 Notes Option FP2 is required Note Spectrum data is only returned if the IncludePowerSpectrum parameter is set to True If IncludePowerSpectrum is False the number of spectrum points will be zero 0 Units of the returned values are dependent on the Function para...

Page 2064: ...or ASCii data is output in the current Y Axis unit When the data format is INTeger data is output in units of m dBm 001 dBm The INT 32 format returns binary 32 bit integer values in internal units m dBm in a definite length block Dependencies Sending a data format spec with an invalid number for example INT 48 generates no error The analyzer simply uses the default 8 for ASCii 32 for INTeger 32 fo...

Page 2065: ...te order for data transfer and other queries It controls whether binary data is transferred in normal or swapped mode This command affects only the byte order for setting and querying trace data for the TRACe DATA TRACe DATA CALCulate DATA n and FETCh SANalyzer n commands and queries By definition any command that says it uses FORMat DATA uses any format supported by FORMat DATA The NORMal order i...

Page 2066: ...o use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Preset 10 ON State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 1 Max 10000 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Avg Mode Selects the type of termination control used for the averaging function This determines the averaging action after the specified number of data acquisitions average count is reached You can select between the Exp exponential and ...

Page 2067: ...ntial REPeat SENSe RHO AVERage TCONtrol Example RHO AVER TCON EXP RHO AVER TCON Preset REPeat State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Exp Repeat Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Meas Offset Sets the timing offset of the capture interval in slots where 1 slot 666 6 us If the Capture Interval is set to 1 slot Fast Mode the Meas Offset is fixed at 0 Key Path Meas Setup Mode WCDMA Remote Comm...

Page 2068: ...site RMS EVM measurement pass fail test Key Path Meas Setup Limits Mode WCDMA Remote Command CALCulate RHO LIMit RMS real CALCulate RHO LIMit RMS Example CALC RHO LIM RMS 10 0 CALC RHO LIM RMS Preset 17 5 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0 00 Max 100 00 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Peak EVM Composite Sets the limit for the composite peak EVM measurement pass fail test Key Path Me...

Page 2069: ...d CALCulate RHO LIMit RHO real CALCulate RHO LIMit RHO Example CALC RHO LIM RHO 0 9 CALC RHO LIM RHO Preset 0 50000 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0 Max 1 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Peak Code Domain Error Sets the limit in dB for the composite Peak Code Domain Error measurement pass fail test Key Path Meas Setup Limits Mode WCDMA Remote Command CALCulate RHO LIMit CDERror rea...

Page 2070: ...ior to A 02 00 CPICH Reference Sets the limit for CPICH Reference Power relative power to total carrier power in dB Key Path Meas Setup Limits Mode WCDMA Remote Command CALCulate RHO LIMit CPICh BTS POWer real CALCulate RHO LIMit CPICh BTS POWer Example CALC RHO LIM CPIC POW 30 0 CALC RHO LIM CPIC POW Dependencies The limit value set by this command is used only when SENSe RADio DEVice is set to B...

Page 2071: ...erring to the pilot channel CPICH timing correlation SCH Synchronize with the synchronization channel SCH Symbol Based Allows you to access the menu that allows you to select the code symbol to synchronize with Symbol Rate Allows you to set the symbol rate ranging from 7 5 to 960 ksps The parameter automatically sets the maximum value for Code Number when appropriate Code Number Allows you to set ...

Page 2072: ...iming correlation It is expected to improve symbol reference vector estimation robustness for some specific impairment conditions for example the signal under test is assumed to have asymmetric filter response Note that this function would not always be effective to any signal condition on the contrary turning the key on may decrease the estimation robustness and measurement speed for some differe...

Page 2073: ...evision Prior to A 02 00 Synchronization Code Number BTS only Sets the spread code number of the code symbol to synchronize with The range depends on the Symbol Rate setting This command is available only for BTS Key Path Meas Setup Sync Type Symbol Based Mode WCDMA Remote Command SENSe RHO SYNC SYMBol SPRead integer SENSe RHO SYNC SYMBol SPRead Example RHO SYNC SYMB SPR 3 RHO SYNC SYMB SPR Notes ...

Page 2074: ...ch PMESsage PPReamble SENSe RHO SYNC MS Example RHO SYNC MS DPCC RHO SYNC MS Notes This command is effective when SENSe RADio DEVice is set to MS Preset DPCCh State Saved Saved in instrument state Range DPCCH E DPCCH C8 1 IPRACH Message PRACH Preamble Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 08 00 A 10 01 P Scramble Code BTS only Sets a numeric value for the primary scrambl...

Page 2075: ...t alternative scrambling code and a right alternative scrambling code that may be used for compressed frames The left alternative scrambling code corresponding to scrambling code k is scrambling code number k 8192 while the right alternative scrambling code corresponding to scrambling code k is scrambling code number k 16384 The alternative scrambling codes can be used for compressed frames In thi...

Page 2076: ...lot pattern to synchronize with This key is available when DPCCH is selected under Sync Type The command is effective when the SENSe RHO SYNC MS command is set to DPCCh Formats 0A 0B 2A 2B 5A and 5B are not supported because the compressed mode is not supported For details of the fields for each available slot format see DPCCH fields information TS25 211 V 3 9 0 on page 2077 Key Path Meas Setup Mo...

Page 2077: ...0 10 4 1 3 2 10 14 5B 15 15 256 150 10 3 1 4 2 8 9 Scramble Code Offset BTS only Sets the number of scramble code offsets needed to make the modulation accuracy measurement This key is not available if Device is set to MS Key Path Meas Setup Mode WCDMA Remote Command SENSe RHO SYNC SCRamble BTS OFFSet integer SENSe RHO SYNC SCRamble BTS OFFSet Example RHO SYNC SCR OFFS 5 RHO SYNC SCR OFFS Notes Th...

Page 2078: ...o set the scramble code type to Std standard Left or Right to make the modulation accuracy measurement This key is not available if Device is set to MS LEFT the left alternative scrambling code whose number is the primary scramble code number 8192 is used RIGHt the right alternative scrambling code whose number is the primary scrambling code number 16384 is used STANdard the standard scrambling co...

Page 2079: ...els and 1 S CCPCH channel Test Model 1 w 32 DPCH w S CCPCH SCPI Enum TM1D32 Select this to set the Modulation Accuracy Measurement to Test Model 1 with 32 DPCH channels and 1 S CCPCH channel Test Model 1 w 64 DPCH w S CCPCH SCPI Enum TM1D64 Select this to set the Modulation Accuracy Measurement to Test Model 1 with 64 DPCH channels and 1 S CCPCH channel Test Model 2 Accesses a menu with selections...

Page 2080: ...S PDSCH channels and 4 DPCH channels Test Model 6 Accesses a menu to allow further selections of Test Model 6 This feature is available when both HSPA Enable and HSPA Enable are on Test Model 6 w 8 HS PDSCH w 30 DPCH SCPI Enum TM6H8 Select this to set the Modulation Accuracy Measurement to Test Model 6 with 8 HS PDSCH channels and 30 DPCH channels Test Model 6 w 4 HS PDSCH w 4 DPCH SCPI Enum TM6D4...

Page 2081: ... w S CCPCH Test Model 3 w 8 DPCH w S CCPCH Otherwise these keys are unavailable and the SCPI commands do not have effect Couplings This command is effective when SENSe RADio DEVice is set to BTS When the Radio Device selection is MS this softkey is replaced by Symbol Boundary MS Preset AUTO State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Auto Detect Test Model 1 w 4 DPCH w S CCPCH Test Model 1 w 8 DPC...

Page 2082: ...CH SCH 1 10 10 1 0 Primary CPICH 1 10 10 0 0 PICH 1 1 6 18 16 120 S CCPCH containing PCH SF 256 1 1 6 18 3 0 DPCH SF 128 4 8 16 32 64 76 8 in total See 3GPP TS25 141 table 6 2 See 3GPP TS25 141 table 6 2 See 3GPP TS25 141 table 6 2 Table Note Only applicable to Home BS Key Path Meas Setup Symbol Boundary Predefined Test Models Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 07 00 ...

Page 2083: ...t Model 1 w 32 DPCH w S CCPCH 3GPP TS25 141 Table 6 1 Test Model 1 2009 12 version S CCPCH included Type Number of Channels Fraction of Power Level setting dB Channelization Code Timing offset x256Tchip P CCPCH SCH 1 10 10 1 0 Primary CPICH 1 10 10 0 0 PICH 1 1 6 18 16 120 S CCPCH containing PCH SF 256 1 1 6 18 3 0 DPCH SF 128 4 8 16 32 64 76 8 in total See 3GPP TS25 141 table 6 2 See 3GPP TS25 14...

Page 2084: ...st Model 1 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 07 00 Test Model 1 w 4 DPCH w S CCPCH BTS only Selects standard Test Model 1 w 4DPCH w S CCPCH 3GPP TS25 141 Table 6 1 Test Model 1 2009 12 version S CCPCH included Type Number of Channels Fraction of Power Level setting dB Channelization Code Timing offset x256Tchip P CCPCH SCH 1 10 10 1 0 Primary CPICH 1 10 10 0 0 PICH 1...

Page 2085: ...S25 141 table 6 2 Table Note Only applicable to Home BS Key Path Meas Setup Symbol Boundary Predefined Test Models Test Model 1 Initial S W Revision A 07 00 Test Model 2 BTS only Allows you to select one from a variety of configurations using Test Model 2 3GPP TS25 141 Table 6 3 Test Model 2 2002 09 version S CCPCH included Type Number of Channels Fraction of Power Level setting dB Channelization ...

Page 2086: ...t Model 2 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Test Model 3 BTS only Allows you to select one from a variety of configurations using Test Model 3 3GPP TS25 141 Table 6 4 Test Model 3 2009 12 version Type Number of Channels Fraction of Power 16 32 Level settings dB 16 32 Channelization Code Timing offset x256Tchip P CCPCH SCH 1 15 8 15 8 12 6 7 9 8 8 9 11 1 0 Primary CPICH 1 15 8 15 8 12 6 7 9 8 8...

Page 2087: ... 13 18 16 120 S CCPCH containing PCH SF 256 1 2 5 2 5 5 1 6 16 16 13 18 3 0 DPCH SF 256 4 8 16 32 63 4 63 4 63 7 80 4 in total See 3GPP TS25 141 table 6 5 See 3GPP TS25 141 table 6 5 See 3GPP TS25 141 table 6 5 Table Note Only applicable to Home BS Key Path Meas Setup Symbol Boundary Predefined Test Models Test Model 3 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 07 00 Test Mod...

Page 2088: ...st Model 3 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 07 00 Test Model 3 w 4 DPCH w S CCPCH BTS only Selects standard Test Model 3 w 4 DPCH w S CCPCH 3GPP TS25 141 Table 6 4 Test Model 3 2009 12 version Type Number of Channels Fraction of Power 16 32 Level settings dB 16 32 Channelization Code Timing offset x256Tchip P CCPCH SCH 1 15 8 15 8 12 6 7 9 8 8 9 11 1 0 Primary CPICH...

Page 2089: ...6 13 18 16 120 S CCPCH containing PCH SF 256 1 2 5 2 5 5 1 6 16 16 13 18 3 0 DPCH SF 256 4 8 16 32 63 4 63 4 63 7 80 4 in total See 3GPP TS25 141 table 6 5 See 3GPP TS25 141 table 6 5 See 3GPP TS25 141 table 6 5 Table Note Only applicable to Home BS Key Path Meas Setup Symbol Boundary Predefined Test Models Test Model 3 Initial S W Revision A 07 00 Test Model 4 BTS only Allows you to select one fr...

Page 2090: ...1 1 10 10 0 0 Primary CPICH1 Table Note 1 The CPICH channel is optional Key Path Meas Setup Symbol Boundary Predefined Test Models Test Model 4 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Test Model 4 Selects standard Test Model 4 w no CPICH 3GPP TS25 141 Table 6 6 Test Model 4 Active Channels Type Number of Channels Fraction of Power Level setting dB Channelization Code Timing offset Type PCCPCH SCH 1 ...

Page 2091: ...6C See 3GPP TS25 141 table 6 6C See 3GPP TS25 141 table 6 6C HS PDSCH 16QAM 8 4 2 63 6 63 4 63 2 in total See 3GPP TS25 141 table 6 6D See 3GPP TS25 141 table 6 6D See 3GPP TS25 141 table 6 6D Table Note 2 HS PDSCH shall be taken together with 6 DPCH 4 HS PDSCH shall be taken with 14 DPCH or for Home BS only 4 DPCH and 8 HS PDSCH shall be taken together with 30 DPCH Key Path Meas Setup Symbol Boun...

Page 2092: ...ith 30 DPCH Key Path Meas Setup Symbol Boundary Predefined Test Models Test Model 5 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 07 00 Test Model 5 w 4 HS PDSCH w 14 DPCH BTS only Selects standard Test Model 5 w 4 HS PDSCH w 14 DPCH 3GPP TS25 141 Table 6 6A Test Model 5 Active Channels 2009 12 version Type Number of Channels Fraction of Power Level setting dB Channelization Cod...

Page 2093: ...ng PCH SF 256 1 1 3 19 3 0 DPCH SF 128 30 14 6 4 14 14 2 14 4 14 2 in total See 3GPP TS25 141 table 6 6 B See 3GPP TS25 141 table 6 6B See 3GPP TS25 141 table 6 6 B HS SCCH 2 4 in total See 3GPP TS25 141 table 6 6C See 3GPP TS25 141 table 6 6C See 3GPP TS25 141 table 6 6C HS PDSCH 16QAM 8 4 2 63 6 63 4 63 2 in total See 3GPP TS25 141 table 6 6D See 3GPP TS25 141 table 6 6D See 3GPP TS25 141 table ...

Page 2094: ...hall be taken together with 6 DPCH 4 HS PDSCH shall be taken with 14 DPCH or for Home BS only 4 DPCH and 8 HS PDSCH shall be taken together with 30 DPCH Key Path Meas Setup Symbol Boundary Predefined Test Models Test Model 5 Initial S W Revision A 07 00 Test Model 6 BTS only 3GPP TS25 141 Table 6 6E Test Model 6 Active Channels This feature is available when both HSPA Enable and HSPA Enable are on...

Page 2095: ...w 8 HS PDSCH w 30 DPCH 3GPP TS25 141 Table 6 6A Test Model 6 Active Channels 2009 12 version Type Number of Channels Fraction of Power Level setting dB Channelization Code Timing offset x256Tchip P CCPCH SCH 1 7 9 11 1 0 Primary CPICH 1 7 9 11 0 0 PICH 1 1 3 19 16 120 S CCPCH containing PCH SF 256 1 1 3 19 3 0 DPCH SF 128 30 4 27 1 in total See 3GPP TS25 141 table 6 6F See 3GPP TS25 141 table 6 6F...

Page 2096: ...6 6F See 3GPP TS25 141 table 6 6F HS SCCH 2 4 in total See 3GPP TS25 141 table 6 6G See 3GPP TS25 141 table 6 6G See 3GPP TS25 141 table 6 6G Table Note 8 HS PDSCH shall be taken together with 30 DPCH and for Home BS only 4 HS PDSCH shall be taken with 4 DPCH Key Path Meas Setup Symbol Boundary Predefined Test Models Test Model 6 Initial S W Revision A 07 00 Custom Provides a flexible way to speci...

Page 2097: ...ter Replace List Remote Command only on page 2103 CHANnel Queries the information of the channel specified by the entry id Query List Remote Command only on page 2105 NCHannel Queries the number of channels currently defined Query List Remote Command only on page 2105 PRESet Cleans up all channel entries Then stores channel entries for a given test model Load Preset Setting BTS Remote Command Only...

Page 2098: ...nly Initializes the current custom active channel list This creates a new entry with the specified parameters Parameter Name Value Description 1 symbol_rate Specifies symbol rate of the channel 2 code_num Specifies code number of the channel 2098 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2099: ..._rate code_num QPSK QAM16 QAM64 Example In order to predefine the following channels CPICH C8 0 P CCPCH C8 1 S CCPCH C8 3 PICH C8 16 HS DPCCH C4 15 16QAM modulated RHO SBO LIST INIT 15000 0 QPSK RHO SBO LIST APP 15000 1 QPSK RHO SBO LIST APP 15000 3 QPSK RHO SBO LIST APP 15000 16 QPSK RHO SBO LIST APP 240000 15 QAM16 RHO SBO LIST BTS NCH 5 RHO SBO LIST CHAN 1 15000 0 QPSK RHO SBO LIST CHAN 2 15000...

Page 2100: ...This error is reported if parameter value is out of range For example SENSe RHO SBOundary LIST BTS INIT 15000 256 QPSK ß 2nd parameter is out of range 4 Setting Conflict This error is reported if the given code channel overlaps another code channel in modulation accuracy For example if a user sends the following two commands the second command causes the error message because C7 0 overlaps C8 0 SE...

Page 2101: ...M64 This choice is available only for channels with symbol rate 240000 Only when both HSPA functionality and HSPA functionality are operative QAM64 is valid to select Mode WCDMA Remote Command SENSe RHO SBOundary LIST BTS APPend symbol_rate code_num QPSK QAM16 QAM64 Example In order to predefine the following channels CPICH C8 0 P CCPCH C8 1 S CCPCH C8 3 PICH C8 16 HS DPCCH C4 15 16QAM modulated R...

Page 2102: ... ß 1st parameter value Symbol Rate is not allowed Only the values given in the Range field are valid for the Symbol Rate You may specify these in numeric form but they are interpreted as an enumeration and the error results if the value does not translate to one in the list 3 Data out of range This error is reported if parameter value is out of range For example SENSe RHO SBOundary LIST BTS APPend...

Page 2103: ... is QAM16 This choice is available only for channels with a symbol rate of 240000 Only when HSPA functionality is operative QAM16 parameter is allowed QAM64 Specifies the channel s modulation scheme is QAM64 This choice is available only for channels with symbol rate 240000 Only when both HSPA and HSPA functionalities are operative QAM64 is valid to select Mode WCDMA Remote Command SENSe RHO SBOun...

Page 2104: ...le SENSe RHO SBOundary LIST BTS REPLace 1 15000 0 ß 4th parameter is missing 2 Illegal parameter value This error is reported if parameter type is invalid or if enum value is invalid For example SENSe RHO SBOundary LIST BTS REPLace 1 15000 ON QPSK ß 3rd parameter must be integer SENSe RHO SBOundary LIST BTS REPLace 1 15001 8 QPSK ß 2nd parameter value Symbol Rate is not allowed Only the values giv...

Page 2105: ...bol_rate 240000 0 code_num 7 if symbol_rate 480000 0 code_num 3 if symbol_rate 960000 QAM16 and QAM64 for the 4th parameter available only for channels with a symbol rate of 240000 For other channels specify QPSK Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 03 00 Query List Remote Command only This command returns the entry of the custom active channel list for BTS See also Num...

Page 2106: ...1 for entry_id SENSe RHO SBOundary LIST BTS CHANnel 1 The instrument returns an array of three values 15000 0 QPSK Query command needs entry_id parameter The entry_id parameter is always required for a query command The range of the parameter is from 1 to the total number of channels you have defined For example if you have defined two channels you can query them as follows SENSe RHO SBOundary LIS...

Page 2107: ...ing BTS Remote Command Only BTS only Loads preset setting to the custom active channel list BTS This is a command only command it does not support a query Mode WCDMA Remote Command SENSe RHO SBOundary LIST BTS PRESet TM1D16 TM1D32 TM1D64 TM1D16SC TM1D32SC TM1D64SC TM2 TM2SC TM3D16 TM3D32 TM3D16SC TM3D32SC TM4 TM4CP TM5H2 TM5H4 TM5H8 TM6H8 Example SENSe RHO SBOundary LIST BTS PRESet TM1D64 Notes 1 ...

Page 2108: ...nd SENSe RHO SBOundary MS AUTO CUSTom SENSe RHO SBOundary MS Example SENS RHO SBO MS CUST SENS RHO SBO MS Notes This parameter is effective when SENSe RADio DEVice is set to MS Couplings This softkey is active when the Radio Device selection is MS and Capture Intvl is set to one of the following 1 slot 3 slot 1 frame 2 frame or 3 frame This softkey is inactive and therefore grayed out if the Radio...

Page 2109: ... Min 0 Max 14 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Transient Period Exclude MS only Selects either to include or to exclude the transient period The transient period is specified in the 3GPP standard TS 34 121 as 25 µs before each slot boundary and 25 µs after each slot boundary The 3GPP standard requires that the transient period is not included for the power measurement This command is availabl...

Page 2110: ...strument state Range Normal Invert Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Advanced Accesses the menu that allows you to set the I Q origin offset function active channel identification function alpha value of the Root Raised Cosine RRC filter and chip rate Key Path Meas Setup Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 EVM Result I Q Offset Toggles the I Q origin offset function between Std standard and ...

Page 2111: ...THReshold AUTO OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate RHO ASET THReshold AUTO Example CALC RHO ASET THR 20 0 CALC RHO ASET THR CALC RHO ASET THR AUTO ON CALC RHO ASET THR AUTO Notes This command is effective when SENSe RHO SBOundary BTS is set to AUTO For MS this command is always effective Turn the automatic mode On or Off for the active channel identification function OFF The active channel identification for eac...

Page 2112: ...of the Root Raised Cosine RRC filter Key Path Meas Setup Advanced Mode WCDMA Remote Command SENSe RHO FILTer RRC ALPHa real SENSe RHO FILTer RRC ALPHa Example RHO FILT ALPH 0 3 RHO FILT ALPH Preset 0 22 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0 01 Max 0 50 Backwards Compatibility SCPI SENSe RHO ALPHa Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Chip Rate Sets the chip rate Key Path Meas Setup Advanced ...

Page 2113: ...XB Notes When the HSPA option is enabled this parameter is active and effective for both uplink and downlink When disabled this parameter is active and effective only for downlink Preset OFF State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 03 00 Multi Channel Estimator Allows you to toggle the multi channel estimator function for MMSE between O...

Page 2114: ...reset GLOBal State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Ch by Ch Global Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Frequency Error Tolerance Range Selects the frequency error tolerance range from either Normal or Wide NORMal provides a more stringent range of frequency tolerance which is useful when you want to accurately demodulate signals of higher complexity For example when composite channels are ...

Page 2115: ... integer SENSe RHO PICH SPRead Example RHO PICH SPR 16 RHO PICH SPR Notes If PICH Code Number and MICH Code Number are the same the channel is considered as PICH This parameter is meaningful only when the Symbol Boundary setting is Auto Dependencies This parameter is available only when Direction is BTS Preset 16 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0 Max 255 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 0...

Page 2116: ...CH code number setting Dependencies This parameter is available only when Direction is BTS Preset 2 OFF State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 2 Max 255 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 S CCPCH Symbol Rate BTS only To calculate the EVM value correctly specifies the symbol rate for S CCPCH Secondary Common Control Physical Channel which might be modulated with 64QAM and is hard to detect as...

Page 2117: ... DEVice is set to BTS This parameter is available only when both W CDMA HSPA option N9073A 3FP and HSPA option N9073A 2FP licenses are installed and HSPA option is enabled Otherwise this key and the SCPI command are unavailable Preset 3 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0 Max 255 when SENSe RHO SCCPch SRATe 15000 127 when SENSe RHO SCCPch SRATe 30000 63 when SENSe RHO SCCPch SRATe 60000 31...

Page 2118: ...e IQ Quadrature Error for Receiver Device Under Test DUT between on and off The Compensation is not valid for Transmitter DUT ON IQ Imbalance measurement results are compensated by taking account of Frequency Offset which is added before IQ Imbalance addition on DUT OFF IQ Imbalance measurement results are not compensated for the Frequency Offset Key Path Meas Setup Advanced Mode WCDMA Remote Comm...

Page 2119: ... OFFS Notes This parameter is available only when Data Source is Capture Buffer Preset 0 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0 Max 239 Initial S W Revision A 13 00 Meas Preset Restores all measurement parameters to their default values Key Path Meas Setup Mode WCDMA Remote Command CONFigure RHO Example CONF RHO Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Refere...

Page 2120: ...13 Modulation Accuracy Composite EVM Measurement Mode Mode See Mode on page 232 2120 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2121: ...ult measurement and gets the mode to a consistent state with all of the default couplings set Backwards Compatibility Notes In the X Series the legacy Factory Preset has been replaced with Mode Preset which only presets the currently active mode not the entire instrument In the X Series the way to preset the entire instrument is by using System Restore System Defaults All which behaves essentially...

Page 2122: ...bal variables except the persistent ones Restore Mode Defaults resets ALL the Mode variables and all the Meas global and Meas local variables including the persistent ones Type Of Preset SCPI Command Front Panel Access Auto Couple COUPle ALL Auto Couple front panel key Meas Preset CONFigure Measurement Meas Setup Menu Mode Preset SYSTem PRESet Mode Preset green key Restore Mode Defaults INSTrument...

Page 2123: ... Measurement Mode Preset Power On Mode Preset SYSTem PON TYPE MODE System Menu Power On User Preset SYSTem PON TYPE USER System Menu Power On Last State SYSTem PON TYPE LAST System Menu W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2123 ...

Page 2124: ...13 Modulation Accuracy Composite EVM Measurement Mode Setup Mode Setup See Mode Setup on page 251 2124 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2125: ...elected marker to the peak that has the next highest amplitude that is less than the marker s current value Key Path Peak Search Mode WCDMA Remote Command CALCulate RHO MARKer 1 2 12 MAXimum NEXT Example CALC RHO MARK2 MAX NEXT Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Next Pk Right Moves the selected marker to the nearest peak to the right of the current marker that meets all enabled peak criteria Ke...

Page 2126: ...ncy or time if in zero span differences between the highest and lowest y axis value Key Path Peak Search Mode WCDMA Remote Command CALCulate RHO MARKer 1 2 12 PTPeak Example CALC RHO MARK PTP Notes Turns on the Marker Δ active function Dependencies Grayed out when Coupled Markers is on Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Min Search Moves the selected marker to the minimum y axis value on the cur...

Page 2127: ...13 Modulation Accuracy Composite EVM Measurement Print Print See Print on page 263 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2127 ...

Page 2128: ...ave Recall Trace State State_ Save Recall Screen Screen_ Save Recall Amplitude Corrections Ampcor_ Import Export Traces Trace_ Import Export Limit Lines LLine_ Import Export Measurement Result MeasR_ Import Export Capture Buffer CapBuf_ Import Export A four digit number is appended to the prefix to create a unique file name The numbering sequence starts at 0000 within each Mode for each file type ...

Page 2129: ...ave will be fred_0000 csv Although 0000 is used in the example above the number that is used is actually the current number in the Meas Results sequence that is the number that would have been used if you had not entered your own file name If the filename you entered ends with _dddd where d any number making it look just like an auto file name then the next auto file name picks up where you left o...

Page 2130: ...bility in the sense that you can recall a state file from any X Series model number and any version of X Series software This is only possible if part of the recalling process goes through a limiting step after recalling the mode settings at least for settings that may vary with version number model number option and license differences If you try to recall a state file onto an instrument with les...

Page 2131: ...for example SA for the Spectrum Analyzer See More Information on page 2132 Key Path Recall Mode All Remote Command MMEMory LOAD STATe filename Example MMEM LOAD STAT myState state This recalls the file myState state on the default path Example MMEM LOAD STAT MyStateFile state This loads the state file data on the default file directory path into the instrument state Notes When you pick a file to r...

Page 2132: ...ght away When you use State to save and recall traces any trace whose data must be preserved should be placed in View or Blank mode before saving The following table describes the Trace Save and Recall possibilities You want to recall state and one trace s data leaving other traces unaffected Save Trace State from 1 trace Make sure that no other traces are updating they should all be in View or Bl...

Page 2133: ...he dialog such as Look In Look In The Look In field shows the path from which the file will be recalled and allows you to change the path using the up and down arrow keys to navigate to other paths the Enter key to open a directory and the Backspace key to go back one directory The Look In field first uses the last path from the Save As dialog Save In path for that same file type There is no softk...

Page 2134: ...alog It causes the current Open request to be cancelled The ESC key does the same thing Key Path Recall State Notes Brings up the Open dialog for recalling a State Save Type Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Edit Register Names You may enter a custom name on any of the Register keys to help you remember what you are using that state to save To do this press the Edit Register Names key choose t...

Page 2135: ...erated Key Path Recall State Example RCL 1 Range 1 16 from front panel 1 128 from SCPI Readback Date and time with seconds resolution are displayed on the key OR A custom name of up to 30 characters entered using the Save State Edit Register Names key OR empty if no prior save operation has been performed to this register Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision Prior to A 11...

Page 2136: ... to this register Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision Prior to A 11 00 Sequences These keys allow you to import a Tab separated or txt file that will automatically setup all the parameters required for building a Sequence The parameters will automatically be loaded into the Stated Sequencer Once selected in order to import the selected Sequence Type you must select the O...

Page 2137: ...mon PC Application for manipulating csv files and then import it Importing Data loads measurement data from the specified file into the specified or default destination depending on the data type selected Selecting an Import Data menu key will not actually cause the importing to occur since the analyzer still needs to know from where to get the data Pressing the Open key in this menu brings up the...

Page 2138: ...urements In other measurements this key is grayed out Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Open When you press Open the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu entitled File Open This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse The Tab and Arrow keys can also be used for dialog navigation See From File on page 2687in Recall Stat...

Page 2139: ...s cleared The SWEEPING bit is set The MEASURING bit is set Backwards Compatibility Notes For Spectrum Analysis mode in ESA and PSA the Restart hardkey and the INITiate RESTart command restart trace averages displayed average count reset to 1 for a trace in Clear Write but did not restart Max Hold and Min Hold In the X Series the Restart hardkey and the INITiate RESTart command restart not only Tra...

Page 2140: ...trigger condition is met and the analyzer stops sweeping once that sweep has completed However with Average Hold Number 1 and at least one trace set to Trace Average Max Hold or Min Hold SA Measurement or Averaging on most other measurements multiple sweeps data acquisitions are taken for a single measurement The trigger condition must be met prior to each sweep The sweep is stopped when the avera...

Page 2141: ...e the settings that are affected by Mode Preset as well as the additional settings affected by Restore Mode Defaults all of the Mode s settings In addition all of the settings of the Input Output system are included even though they are outside of the Mode s state because they are needed to restore the complete setup Persistent System settings for example Verbose SCPI are not affected by either Mo...

Page 2142: ... 1 is simply ignored The command is sequential Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 To File When you press To File the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu entitled Save As This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse The Tab and Arrow keys can also be used for dialog navigation The Listed below are the functions of the v...

Page 2143: ...is filename using the File Name key See the Quick Save on page 2683 documentation for more on the automatic file naming algorithm When you press the File Name key the analyzer displays the Alpha Editor Use the knob to choose the letter to add and the front panel Enter key to add the letter to the file name The BK character moves you back and the FW character moves you forward in the filename The S...

Page 2144: ...es an invalid register number an error message is generated 222 Data out of range Invalid register label number label is a string from 0 to 30 characters in length If a label exceeds 30 characters an error message is generated 150 String data error Label clipped to 30 characters label of length 0 erases the custom label and restores the default time and date label E g MMEM REG STAT LAB 1 Dependenc...

Page 2145: ...unning instance Although these 16 registers are the only registers available from the front panel there are 128 state registers available in the instrument Registers 17 128 are only available from the SCPI interface using the SAV command There is one set of 128 state registers in the instrument not one set for each Mode When a state is saved the Mode it was saved from is saved with it then when it...

Page 2146: ...he key OR A custom name of up to 30 characters entered using the Edit Register Names key OR empty if no prior save operation has been performed to this register Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 11 00 Mass Storage Catalog Remote Command Only Key path SCPI Only Remote Command MMEMory CATalog directory_name Notes The string must be a valid logical path Queries disk usa...

Page 2147: ...e and the second parameter specifies the destination The second form has four parameters In this form the first and third parameters specify the source The second and fourth parameters specify the directories The first pair of parameters specifies the source The second pair specifies the destination An error is generated if the source doesn t exist or the destination file already exists This comma...

Page 2148: ...ATA file_name data It loads data into the file file_ name data is in 488 2 block format file_name is string data The query form is MMEMory DATA file_name with the response being the associated data in block format Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Mass Storage Make Directory Remote Command Only Key path SCPI Only Remote Command MMEMory MDIRectory directory_name Notes The string must be a valid...

Page 2149: ...y path SCPI Only Remote Command MMEMory RDIRectory directory_name Notes The string must be a valid logical path Removes a directory The directory_name parameter specifies the directory name to be removed All files and directories under the specified directory shall also be removed This command will generate an access denied error if the folder is a restricted folder e g C Windows or is in a restri...

Page 2150: ...file naming algorithm The default path for all Sequence Files is My Documents Sequences Key Path Save Sequences Mode All Notes Brings up Save As dialog for saving a Sequence Save Type Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Data Export Exporting a data file stores data from the current measurement to mass storage files The Export Menu only contains data types that are supported by the current measurement Sin...

Page 2151: ...Ctrogram filename Example MMEM STOR RES MTAB myResults csv Saves the results from the current marker table to the file myResults csv in the current path MMEM STOR RES PTAB myResults csv Saves the results from the current peak table to the file myResults csv in the current path MMEM STOR RES SPEC myResults csv Saves the results from the current Spectrogram display to the file myResults csv in the c...

Page 2152: ...r Table Meas Results file format Imagine that at the point where a Marker Table Meas Result is requested the following screen is showing Then the Meas Results file when opened would show the following data MeasurementR esult Swept SA A 01 40_R0017 N9020A 526 B25 PFR P26 EA3 1 Result Type Marker Table Ref Level 0 Number of Points 1001 Sweep Time 0 0662666 2152 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications R...

Page 2153: ...ce Free Trigger Level 1 2 Trigger Slope Positive Trigger Delay 1 00E 06 Phase Noise Optimization Fast Swept If Gain Low FFT If Gain Autorange RF Coupling AC FFT Width 411900 Ext Ref 10000000 Input RF RF Calibrator Off Attenuation 10 Ref Level Offset 0 External Gain 0 X Axis Units Hz Y Axis Units dBm DATA MKR MODE TR C SCL X Y FUNCTI ON FUNCTIO N WIDTH FUNCTI ON VALUE FUNCTI ON UNIT 1 Normal 1 Freq...

Page 2154: ...ff 0 0000E 00 0 None 10 Normal 3 Freque ncy 1 1454E 10 75 1 61 Band Density 1 3250E 06 138 97 3 dBm Hz 11 Off 1 Freque ncy 0 0000E 00 0 Off 0 0000E 00 0 None 12 Off 1 Freque ncy 0 0000E 00 0 Off 0 0000E 00 0 None The numbers appear in the file exactly as they appear onscreen If it says 11 454 GHz onscreen then in the file it is 11 454E 09 The metadata header is very similar to the metadata used in...

Page 2155: ... Threshold Peak Threshold State On Off Peak Excursion Peak Excursion State On Off Display Line Peak Readout All AboveDL BelowDL Peak Sort Freq Amptd These fields are then followed by the data for the Peak Table itself Note that the label for the Frequency column changes to Time in 0 span Here is what the table for the above display looks like MeasurementResult Swept SA A 01 40_R0017 N9020A 526 B25...

Page 2156: ... Swept X Axis Scale Lin PreAmp State Off PreAmp Band Low Trigger Source Free Trigger Level 1 2 Trigger Slope Positive Trigger Delay 1 00E 06 Phase Noise Optimization Fast Swept If Gain Low FFT If Gain Autorange RF Coupling AC FFT Width 411900 Ext Ref 10000000 Input RF RF Calibrator Off Attenuation 10 Ref Level Offset 0 External Gain 0 X Axis Units Hz Y Axis Units dBm Peak Threshold 85 Peak Thresho...

Page 2157: ...15 9 5140E 05 60 89 16 9 5920E 05 60 90 17 18 19 20 Spectrogram This section discusses the Spectrogram Results file format The Spectrogram choice only appears if option EDP is licensed The Spectrogram results are the same as a Trace data export except that instead of having just one trace s data all 300 traces appear one after the other Each trace has its own data mark the data for Spectrogram Tra...

Page 2158: ...S So for example if the absolute start time is 13 23 45 678 on January 30 2012 this row would look like Start Time 20120130132345678 NOTE The resolution of the absolute time stored is 1 ms which matches up with the fact that the fastest sweep time is also 1 ms However there is no specification for the absolute accuracy of the clock in the analyzer nor is there any facility provided to allow the us...

Page 2159: ...om the result file for the above display Note the start time of 20120425142808700 showing in the last row before the first DATA row and the relative time of 5 299231048 showing in the first DATA row Result Type Spectrogram MeasResult Swept SA A 11 00 01 N9020A 503 508 513 526 ALL ALV B1C B1X B25 B2X B40 BAB BBA CR3 CRP DP2 DRD EA3 EDP EMC EP1 ERC ESC ESP EXM FSA HBA K03 LFE MPB P03 P08 P13 P26 PFR...

Page 2160: ... Off Trace Math Oper1 Trace5 Trace Math Oper2 Trace6 Trace Math Offset 0 Trace Name Trace1 X Axis Units Hz Y Axis Units dBm Start Time 20120425142808700 DATA 5 299231048 5999984415 76 34749519 5999984440 77 28097006 5999984465 75 32317869 5999984490 73 64417681 5999984515 72 67154604 o o o 6000009315 77 94423277 6000009340 79 51829697 6000009365 78 46108961 6000009390 78 46108957 6000009415 76 595...

Page 2161: ... 75 56751112 5999984440 75 76485645 5999984465 76 67718717 5999984490 78 79238489 5999984515 83 72680212 o o o 6000009315 71 3942461 6000009340 72 28308332 6000009365 73 92684489 6000009390 75 45548832 6000009415 75 17904815 Capture Buffer Allows you to store captured data for reuse in demod measurements using Save Recall functionality for Capture Buffer Capture Buffer is saved and loaded as IQ Da...

Page 2162: ... be used for dialog navigation See To File on page 2697 in Save State for a full description of this dialog and menu The default path for saving files is For all of the Trace Data Files My Documents mode name data traces For all of the Limit Data Files My Documents mode name data limits For all of the Measurement Results Data Files My Documents mode name data measurement name results For all of th...

Page 2163: ...e that gets saved showing the menus that were on the screen before going into the Save menus The save is performed immediately and does not wait until the measurement is complete After you have completed the save the Quick Save front panel key lets you quickly repeat the last save performed using an auto named file with the current screen data For versions previous to A 01 55 if you initiate a scr...

Page 2164: ...tibility Notes In ESA and PSA we offer the choice of Reverse Bitmap or Reverse Metafile when saving screen images This is much like the Flat Color theme available in X Series Also if you selected Reverse Bitmap AND a black white screen image that would be much like Flat Monochrome In other words each of the X Series themes has a similar screen image type in ESA PSA But they are not identical Initi...

Page 2165: ...n you press Save As the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu entitled Save As This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse The Tab and Arrow keys can also be used for dialog navigation See To File on page 2697 in Save State for a full description of this dialog and menu The default path for Screen Images is My Documents mo...

Page 2166: ...if you are in the idle state INIT IMM in ESA PSA Spectrum Analysis Mode does an implied ABORt In some other PSA Modes INIT IMM is ignored if not in the idle state The X Series follows the ESA PSA SA Mode model which may cause some Modes to have compatibility problems Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 More Information See Restart on page 2694 for details on the INIT IMMediate Restart function I...

Page 2167: ... grey out on front panel to indicate out of scope Non forceful means user still can change this setting by SCPI but cannot change on front panel When set to OFF will make source leave list sequencer and this setting will be black out and take effect immediately When the RF Output is ON an RF annunciator is displayed in the system settings panel When the RF Output is turned Off the RF annunciator i...

Page 2168: ...r frequency and waveform etc When the source list sequence playing is complete the last step keeps playing and user can use this command to change the list sequence last step s output power The multiport adapter RFIO TX ports and GPS ports cannot ensure power accuracy when power setting is lower than 130dBm this power setting value is defined by the sum of RF Power setting and related amplitude co...

Page 2169: ...nce power entered power Where reference power equals the original RF Power entered under Source Amplitude RF Power and set as the reference power entered power equals a new value entered under Source Amplitude Amptd Offset In addition the displayed power value is the same as a new value entered under Source Amplitude RF Power If Power Ref is set to ON with a reference value set entering a value un...

Page 2170: ...r with the current output power Preset 0 00 dBm OFF Min 125 00 dBm Max 10 00 dBm Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Amptd Offset Allows you to specify the RF output power offset value When the amplitude offset is set to zero 0 and you set a new offset value positive or negative the displayed amplitude value will change as follows and the RF output power will not change Displayed value output power offse...

Page 2171: ...equencer on page 2802 is set to ON the list sequencer controls the source output and this key will be grayed out And this setting will be none forceful grey out on front panel to indicate out of scope Non forceful means user still can change this setting by SCPI but cannot change manually on front panel When setto Off will make source leave list sequencer and this setting will be black out and tak...

Page 2172: ...ep s output frequency Couplings The frequency value is coupled to the current channel band and number such that updates to the band and number will update the frequency value to the corresponding absolute frequency Preset 1 00 GHz If license F1A or 5WC is present the default Center Frequency should be 2 412GHz Min 10 00 MHz Max Hardware Dependant Option 503 3 6 GHz Option 504 3 8 GHz Option 506 6 ...

Page 2173: ...than or less than sign to indicate the frequency is above or below the channel number Preset 1 Min Please refer to the tables below for the valid ranges Max Please refer to the tables below for the valid ranges Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM EDGE Channel Number Ranges Band Link Device Range Frequency MHz P GSM Uplink MS 1 n 124 890 0 0 2 n Downlink BS 1 n 124 935 0 0 2 n E GSM Uplink MS 0 n 124 ...

Page 2174: ...n 9888 n 5 Band II Downlink 412 n 687 9662 n 9938 n 5 1850 1 n 5 Uplink 12 n 287 350 n 425 n 5 1850 1 n 5 Band III Downlink 1162 n 1513 n 5 1575 Uplink 937 n 1288 n 5 1525 Band IV Downlink 537 n 1738 1887 n 2087 n 5 1805 n 5 1735 1 Uplink 1312 n 1513 1662 n 1862 n 5 1450 n 5 1380 1 Band V Downlink 1007 n 1087 4357 n 4458 n 5 670 1 n 5 Uplink 782 n 862 4132 n 4233 n 5 670 1 n 5 Band VI Downlink 103...

Page 2175: ...8 3702 n 3767 n 5 21 n 5 39 9 Band XIV Downlink 4117 n 4143 4167 n 4192 n 5 63 n 5 72 9 Uplink 3892 n 3918 3942 n 3967 n 5 12 n 5 2 1 Band XIX Downlink 712 n 763 787 n 837 n 5 735 n 5 720 1 Uplink 312 n 363 387 n 437 n 5 770 n 5 755 1 CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Channel Number Ranges Band Link Device Range Frequency MHz US Cellular Uplink MS reverse link 1 N 799 991 N 1023 1024 N 1323 0 030 N 825 000 0 030 N...

Page 2176: ...010 0 025 N 1536 479 000 0 020 N 1792 479 000 Downlink BS forward link 1 N 400 472 N 871 1039 N 1473 1536 N 1715 1792 N 2016 0 025 N 1 460 000 0 025 N 472 420 000 0 020 N 1024 461 010 0 025 N 1536 489 000 0 020 N 1792 489 000 IMT 2000 Band Uplink MS reverse link 0 N 1199 1920 000 0 050 N Downlink BS forward link 0 N 1199 2100 000 0 050 N Upper 700 MHz Band Uplink MS reverse link 0 N 240 776 000 0 ...

Page 2177: ...link Uplink MS reverse link 1 N 400 472 N 871 1536 N 1715 0 025 N 1 450 000 0 025 N 472 410 000 0 025 N 1536 479 000 Downlink BS forward link Downlink BS forward link Downlink BS forward link 1 N 400 472 N 871 1536 N 1715 0 025 N 1 460 000 0 025 N 472 420 000 0 025 N 1536 489 000 800 PAMR Uplink MS reverse link 0 N 239 870 0125 0 025 N Downlink BS forward link 0 N 239 915 0125 0 025 N LTE FDD Chan...

Page 2178: ...750 4750 4949 1427 9 22750 22750 22949 12 729 5010 5010 5179 699 23010 23010 23179 13 746 5180 5180 5279 777 23180 23180 23279 14 758 5280 5280 5379 788 23280 23280 23379 17 734 5730 5730 5849 704 23730 23730 23849 18 860 5850 5850 5999 815 23850 23850 23999 19 875 6000 6000 6149 830 24000 24000 24149 20 791 6150 6150 6449 832 24150 24150 24449 21 1495 9 6450 6450 6599 1447 9 24450 24450 24599 24 ...

Page 2179: ...9649 2300 38650 38650 39649 41 2496 39650 39650 41589 2496 39650 39650 41589 42 3400 41590 41590 43589 3400 41590 41590 43589 43 3600 43590 43590 45589 3600 43590 43590 45589 Note The channel numbers that designate carrier frequencies so close to the operating band edges that the carrier extends beyond the operating band edge shall not be used This implies that the first 7 15 25 50 75 and 100 chan...

Page 2180: ... in subclause 5 2 b 1850 1910 MHz 1930 1990 MHz 9254 to 9546 9654 to 9946 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 c 1910 1930 MHz 9554 to 9646 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 d 2570 2620 MHz 12854 to 13096 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 e 2300 2400 MHz 11504 to 11996 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause...

Page 2181: ...0 BAND21 BAND24 BAND25 BAND26 BAND27 BAND28 BAND31 BAND33 BAND34 BAND35 BAND36 BAND37 BAND38 BAND39 BAND40 BAND41 BAND42 BAND43 BAND44 BANDA BANDB BANDC BANDD BANDE BANDF SOURce FREQuency CHANnels BAND Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PGSM Notes Set this setting to NONE will grey out Channel on page 2727 Channel Initial S W Revision A 05 00 None Selects no radio standard for use When you have selected ...

Page 2182: ...05 00 DCS 1800 Selects DCS 1800 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND DCS1800 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 PCS 1900 Selects PCS 1900 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PCS1900 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM 450 Selects GSM 450 as the act...

Page 2183: ...SM 700 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND GSM700 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 T GSM 810 Selects T GSM 810 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND T GSM810 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 WCDMA Sets WCDMA as the radio standard for use and access...

Page 2184: ...tive channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDIII Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band IV Selects Band IV as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDIV Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band V Selects Band V as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Set...

Page 2185: ...active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDVIII Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band IX Selects Band IX as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDIX Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band X Selects Band X as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio ...

Page 2186: ...Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDXIII Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIV Selects Band XIV as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDXIV Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIX Selects Band XIX as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR...

Page 2187: ...MA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PCS Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Japan Cell Selects Japan Cell as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND JAPAN Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Korean PCS Selects Korean PCS as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example...

Page 2188: ...xample SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND UPPER Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Secondary 800 Selects Secondary 800 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND SECOND Initial S W Revision A 05 00 400 Euro PAMR Selects 400 Euro PAMR as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example ...

Page 2189: ...DMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PCS1DOT9G Initial S W Revision A 05 00 AWS Selects AWS as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND AWS Initial S W Revision A 05 00 US 2 5GHz Selects US 2 5 GHz as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ...

Page 2190: ...equency Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 1 Selects BAND 1 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND1 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 2 Selects BAND 2 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND2 Initial S W Rev...

Page 2191: ...evision A 09 50 BAND 6 Selects BAND 6 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND6 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 7 Selects BAND 7 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND7 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 8 Selects BAND 8 as the band ...

Page 2192: ...sion A 09 50 BAND 11 Selects BAND 11 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND11 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 12 Selects BAND 12 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND12 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 13 Selects BAND 13 as the ...

Page 2193: ...ision A 09 50 BAND 18 Selects BAND 18 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND18 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 19 Selects BAND 19 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND19 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 20 Selects BAND 20 as the...

Page 2194: ...ision A 09 50 BAND 25 Selects BAND 25 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND25 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 26 Selects BAND 26 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND26 Initial S W Revision A 12 53 BAND 27 Selects BAND 27 as the...

Page 2195: ...the radio standard for use and accesses the LTE TDD specific channel band sub menus Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 33 Selects BAND 33 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND33 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 34 Selects BAND 34 as the band for the current ...

Page 2196: ...urrent step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND37 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 38 Selects BAND 38 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND38 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 39 Selects BAND 39 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequenc...

Page 2197: ...ce Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND42 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 43 Selects BAND 43 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND43 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 44 Selects BAND 44 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Stand...

Page 2198: ...Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDB Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND C Selects BAND C as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDC Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND D Selects BAND D as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ C...

Page 2199: ...Frequency Radio Setup Remote Command SOURce RADio BAND LINK DOWN UP SOURce RADio BAND LINK Example SOUR RAD BAND LINK UP Preset DOWN Range DOWN UP Backwards Compatibility SCPI SOURce RADio DEVice BTS MS SOURce RADio DEVice Backwards Compatibility Notes BTS maps to the Downlink frequency MS maps to the Uplink frequency Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Set Reference Frequency This key allows you to set ...

Page 2200: ...ailable and is grayed out when the List Sequencer is turned ON Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Freq Reference This key allows you to toggle the state of the frequency reference When the frequency reference state is ON an annunciator is displayed on the main source view to indicate this state to the user When you use a frequency reference the signal generator outputs a frequency that is set relative t...

Page 2201: ... value will change as follows and the RF output frequency will not change Displayed value output frequency offset value Where output frequency equals the original frequency entered under Source Frequency Frequency offset value equals the value entered under Source Frequency Freq Offset When the frequency offset is set to a value other than zero 0 and you enter a new frequency value under Source Fr...

Page 2202: ... system settings panel When the ARB is turned Off the MOD annunciator is cleared Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB STATe ON OFF 1 0 SOURce RADio ARB STATe Example SOUR RAD ARB OFF SOUR RAD ARB Notes If the ARB is ON a user then loads or deletes another file to ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation Th...

Page 2203: ...ory for more information about this adjustment Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB WAVeform string SOURce RADio ARB WAVeform Example SOUR RAD ARB WAV test_waveform bin Notes If intended waveform is not in the memory yet then issuing this command by SCPI will invoke ARB loading operation first which involves a delay of unpredictable length So this co...

Page 2204: ...tion Setup ARB Select Waveform Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Load Segment To ARB Memory Allows you to load the selected file into ARB memory On the front panel you select the file for loading to the ARB memory by highlighting the desired file in the list Using the SCPI command you specify the file name on the HDD NVWFM none volatile storage MSUS Mass Storage Unit Specifier is supported in the memor...

Page 2205: ...red licenses do not present on the instrument In this case a GUI only warning message 800 Operation complete Loaded filename successfully but no license required licenses installed User can install required licenses according to required licenses string to license it or multi pack license it Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Load All To ARB Memory Allows you to load all the segment files within the cur...

Page 2206: ...ARB memory for playback of a waveform sequence or a list sequence Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Notes No remote command SCPIfront panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Default Directory Allows you to change the default directory It is used as a search location for waveform segments that are required to be loaded into ARB memory for playback of a wavef...

Page 2207: ...turned Off If the ARB is ON and you load a file to ARB memory or delete a file from ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The waveform will be replayed after the ARB operation is finished Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Delete All From ARB Memory Allows you to remove all segments from ARB playback memory Key Path Source Modulation Setup ...

Page 2208: ... 00 Query ARB Memory Full File List Remote Command Only Queries the test set for the string list of waveform segments in the ARB memory It returns a string list for waveform segment names in the ARB memory Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB FCATalog Example SOUR RAD ARB FCATalog Notes The return data is in the following format integer memory used integer memory free integer file count in ARB memory s...

Page 2209: ...ision A 05 00 Run Time Scaling Allows you to adjust the run time scaling value The run time scaling value is applied in real time while the waveform is playing Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB ARB Setup Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB RSCaling real SOURce RADio ARB RSCaling Example SOUR RAD ARB RSC 100 00 Notes This setting cannot be set in E6640A Grey out on menu and the value is fixed at 70 ...

Page 2210: ...rigger Type Allows access to the trigger type sub menus The setting for trigger type determines the behavior of the waveform when it plays Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE CONTinuous SINGle SADVance GATE SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE CONT SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE Notes Gated trigger type will be implemented at a later re...

Page 2211: ...t triggers Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Trigger Type Continuous Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE CONT TRIG Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Reset Run Sets Reset and Run as the trigger response for the continuous trigger type Reset and Run sets the waveform generator to play a waveform sequence or segment continuously when the first trigger is received Subsequent triggers reset the waveform seque...

Page 2212: ... Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Buffered Trigger Selects Buffered Trigger as the trigger response for single trigger type Buffered Trigger sets the waveform generator to play a waveform sequence or segment once when a trigger is received If a trigger is received during playback the waveform generator plays the sequence or segment to the end then plays the sequence or segment once more Key Path Sourc...

Page 2213: ... Type Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE SADVance TYPE SINGle CONTinuous SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE SADVance TYPE Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE SADV SING Preset CONTinuous Range Single Continuous Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Single Selects Single as the trigger response for Segment Advance trigger type With single selected once a trigger is received a segment is played once If a trig...

Page 2214: ...is selected the waveform is triggered when you press the front panel Trigger key Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Trigger Source Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIGger KEY Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Bus Sets the current trigger source to Bus Selecting Bus trigger source enables triggering over GPIB LAN or USB using the SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger INITiate command Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Trig...

Page 2215: ...rm sequence Pressing this key changes the central view area to display the Waveform Sequence Creation and Editing view Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Notes No remote command SCPIfront panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Current Segment Specifies the selected sequence segment that will be affected by the menu functions Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Seque...

Page 2216: ...ory is D varb Pressing this key changes the current view to the Waveform Management View Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Load Segment To ARB Memory Allows you to load the selected file into ARB memory On the front panel you select the file for loading to the ARB memory by highlighting the desired file in the list Using the SCPI command you specify ...

Page 2217: ...d a Signal Studio waveform wfm which contains invalid waveform header an error is generated If the ARB is ON when you load afile to ARB memory or delete a file from ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The waveform will be replayed after the ARB operation is finished ARB can be loaded into ARB memory even required licenses do not pre...

Page 2218: ... to select the new directory of interest The current directory is used for manually loading waveform segments into ARB memory for playback and as a search location for waveform segments that are required to be loaded into ARB memory for playback of a waveform sequence or a list sequence Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Notes No remote command SCPIfront pan...

Page 2219: ...s On even if ARB state is On the selected waveform will not be played In this case if the selected waveform is not used in List Sequence it can be deleted and the ARB state is turned Off If the ARB is ON and you load a file to ARB memory or delete a file from ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The waveform will be replayed after th...

Page 2220: ... Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Insert New Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Load All To ARB Memory This key functions the same as Load All To ARB Memory on page 2829 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Insert New Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Change Directory This key functions ...

Page 2221: ... All From ARB Memory on page 2831 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Insert New Waveform Segment in ARB Memory Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Query ARB Memory File List Remote Command Only This command functions the same as Query ARB Memory File List Remote Command Only on page 2763 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Edit Selected Waveform Allows a...

Page 2222: ...al S W Revision A 05 00 Marker 2 Allows you to enable or disable marker 2 for the currently selected waveform For a waveform sequence you can enable and disable markers on a per segment basis allowing you to output markers from some waveform segments within the sequence but not for others Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Edit Selected Waveform Notes No rem...

Page 2223: ...abled Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Delete Segment Allows you to delete the selected segment from the waveform sequence Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Notes No remote command front panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Save Sequence Pressing this key displays the Save As dialog The sequence name is passed to the save as dialog to use as the filename for...

Page 2224: ...NE M1 M2 M3 M4 M1M2 M1M3 M1M4 M2M3 M2M4 M3M4 M1M2M3 M1M2M4 M1M3M4 M2M3M4 M1M2M3M4 ALL For additional description of each item see Notes below For Setup SCPI on page 2224 For Setup SCPI SOURce RADio ARB SEQuence MWAVeform filename For additional description of each item see Notes For Query SCPI on page 2225 below Example For setup SOUR RAD ARB SEQ NVWFM testSeq1 seq NVWFM wfmSegment1 wfm 10 M2M3M4 ...

Page 2225: ...t is not NVWFM or have an error in the waveform sequence file path an error is generated Notes Error Checks for Query SCPI command Continued If the specified waveform sequence file name suffix is not seq error is generated If you use an unsupported MSUS that is not NVWFM or have an error in the waveform segment file path an error is generated If the first specified waveform file cannot be found an...

Page 2226: ...nel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Waveform Utilities Allows you access to the waveform utilities sub menus Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Multi Pack Licenses Allows you access to the Multi Pack License sub menus Pressing this key also changes the central view area to display the Multi Pack License Management view On modular instrument like E6630A or E6640A mu...

Page 2227: ...yle of Agilent signal sources You can use either one of them Since adding a waveform segment to a Multi Pack license causes the license slot to enter the trial period of only 48 hours pressing this key causes a confirmation dialog to be displayed to ensure you do want to add the waveform segment to the Multi Pack If you attempt to license a waveform that is already licensed using another slot an e...

Page 2228: ...ged after a waveform file has been loaded it needs to be loaded again Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB LOAD string Example SOUR RAD ARB LOAD D VARB testwaveform bin or SOUR RAD ARB LOAD NVWFM testwaveform bin Notes Because loading the file involves a delay of unpredictable length this command should be followed by the query ...

Page 2229: ...L D varb Notes string specifies the directory on the HDD to load the files into ARB memory from When in Sequence Analyzer mode and Include Source is Yes an attempt to load all files from a directory to ARB memory is rejected with an error When Include Source is No and there is insufficient free ARB memory to load all the waveforms when the ARB memory is full the copy ceases and an error is generat...

Page 2230: ...gments on Hard Disk on page 2828 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Add Waveform Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Load Segment To ARB Memory This key functions the same as Load Segment To ARB Memory on page 2828 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Add Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A...

Page 2231: ...ack License Waveform Add view Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Replace Waveform Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform REPLace int string or SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform REPLace int string Example SYST LKEY WAV REPL 1 myotherwaveform wfm or SYST LIC WAV REPL 1 myotherwaveform wfm Notes The second SCPI SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform REPLace is provided to be ...

Page 2232: ...ad All To ARB Memory on page 2829 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Replace Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Change Directory This key functions the same as Change Directory on page 2830 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Replace Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision...

Page 2233: ... A 05 00 Lock Waveform in Slot If the selected slot is in the trial state or the lock required state the waveform that occupies the slot is locked and permanently licensed Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform LOCK int or SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform LOCK int Example SYST LKEY WAV LOCK 1 or SYST LIC WAV LOCK 1 Notes The sec...

Page 2234: ...g If input slot number exceeds total available slot number Nonexistent is returned Range Locked Available Trail LockRequired Nonexistent Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Slots Free Query Remote Command Only Returns the number of license slots free Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform FREE or SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform FREE Example SYST LKEY WAV FREE or SYST LIC WAV FREE Notes The second SCPI SYSTem ...

Page 2235: ...t number less than or equals 0 an error is generated Result type is string If input slot number exceeds total available slot number Nonexistent is returned If no waveform stored in the specified slot then empty string is returned Initial S W Revision A 12 00 Slot Waveform Unique ID Query Remote Command Only Returns the waveform unique ID of the specified slot Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform UI...

Page 2236: ...s Each Signal Studio waveform has a unique id recorded in header So if the unique ids are same that means they are same one waveform So besides SCPI to query locked waveform name list also provide a SCPI to query locked waveform unique id list Initial S W Revision A 11 00 Marker Utilities Allows access to the marker utilities sub menus Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Initial S W Revision A 05...

Page 2237: ...on Setup ARB Marker Utilities Marker Polarity Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB MPOLarity MARKer2 POSitive NEGative SOURce RADio ARB MPOLarity MARKer2 Example SOUR RAD ARB MPOL MARK2 NEG Dependencies When a new waveform is selected for playback the settings contained within the associated waveform header file are applied to the ARB The marker polarity is one of the values stored within the header fi...

Page 2238: ...alues stored within the header file If the newly selected waveform file has an associated header file the marker polarity is updated with the value from the header file The marker polarity will remain unchanged if the newly selected waveform does not have an associated header file Preset Pos Range Neg Pos Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Marker Routing Allows access to the marker routing sub menus whi...

Page 2239: ... the pulse RF blanking setting is updated with the value from the header file The pulse RF blanking setting will remain unchanged if the newly selected waveform does not have an associated header file Range None M1 M2 M3 M4 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 None Sets no marker to be used for the pulse RF blanking function essentially turning the RF blanking function off Key Path Source Modulation Setup...

Page 2240: ... a negative polarity this is when there are no maker points Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Marker Utilities Marker Routing Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB MDEStination ALCHold NONE M1 M2 M3 M4 SOURce RADio ARB MDEStination ALCHold Example SOUR RAD ARB MDES ALCH NONE Dependencies When a new waveform is selected for playback the settings contained within the associated waveform header file are...

Page 2241: ...etup ARB Marker Utilities Marker Routing ALC Hold Example SOUR RAD ARB MDES PULS M3 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Marker 4 Sets marker 4 to be used for the ALC hold function Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Marker Utilities Marker Routing ALC Hold Example SOUR RAD ARB MDES PULS M4 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Header Utilities Allows access to the header utilities sub menu Pressing this key also...

Page 2242: ...y Each Signal Studio waveform contains a unique waveform ID which recorded in the header This command allows you to query the unique waveform ID from the header This is a SCPI only command User can also checkError Reference source not found for waveform unique ID display Remote Command MMEMory HEADer ID file name Example MMEM HEAD ID test wfm query the waveform already loaded into the ARB memory M...

Page 2243: ...ables the amplitude modulation Turning AM on when another modulation format is already on results in the previous modulation format being turned off and the generation of an error Key Path Source Modulation Setup AM Remote Command SOURce AM STATe SOURce AM STATe Example SOUR AM STAT OFF Preset Off Range On Off Initial S W Revision A 05 00 AM Depth Allows you to set the amplitude modulation depth i...

Page 2244: ...cy modulation Key Path Source Modulation Setup Initial S W Revision A 05 00 FM Enables or disables the frequency modulation Turning FM on when another modulation format is already on results in the previous modulation format being turned off and the generation of an error Key Path Source Modulation Setup FM Remote Command SOURce FM STATe SOURce FM STATe Example SOUR FM STAT OFF Preset Off Range On...

Page 2245: ...y Example SOUR FM INT FREQ 40 0 Hz Preset 400 0 Hz Min 10 Hz Max 40 kHz Initial S W Revision A 05 00 PM Allows access to the menu for configuring the phase modulation Key Path Source Modulation Setup Initial S W Revision A 05 00 PM Enables or disables the phase modulation Turning PM on when another modulation format is already on results in the previous modulation format being turned off and the g...

Page 2246: ...0 0 Hz Min 10 Hz Max 40 kHz Initial S W Revision A 05 00 List Sequencer Allows you access to the sub menus for configuring the list sequencer List sequences allows you to enter frequencies and amplitudes at unequal intervals in nonlinear ascending descending or random order Each step within the list can also include its own waveform file for playback step duration trigger event and trigger output ...

Page 2247: ...ontrols the output of the source Couplings When in Sequence Analyzer mode and the list sequencer state is Off Include Source is forced to No and the Include Source key is grayed out When in Sequence Analyzer mode and the list sequencer state is On Include Source is available to set And an ARB memory related operation like load or delete will be rejected Preset Off Range On Off Initial S W Revision...

Page 2248: ...h Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST NUMBer STEPs integer SOURce LIST NUMBer STEPs Example SOUR LIST NUMB STEP 1 Notes Increasing the number of steps creates additional steps at the end of the list with all the settings within the steps set to their default values Decreasing the number of steps removes steps from the end of the list The settings within the remove...

Page 2249: ... S W Revision A 05 00 Delete Step Allows you to delete the current step Deleting a step will automatically decrease the Step Count parameter by 1 If sequence only has one step left delete step will be rejected and popup error 221 Setting conflict Cannot delete current step minimum number of steps reached Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Notes No remote command Front Panel key on...

Page 2250: ...l S W Revision A 05 00 Internal Sets the trigger input for the current step to Internal Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Step Trigger Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET INP TRIG INT Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Manual Trigger Key Sets the trigger input for the current step to Manual Trigger Key Any step in the sequence set to Manual will cause the ...

Page 2251: ...after A 09 40 Notes Note When on E6640A trigger 2 is a bi directional trigger port So when trigger 2 has been configured as OUTPUT type choosing External 2 as the input trigger for the current step will generate error Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Transition Time Allows you to specify the transition time for the current step The transition time is the amount of time allowed for the source to settle...

Page 2252: ...ial S W Revision A 05 00 Radio Setup Allows you access to the sub menus for setting up the radio standard band and radio band link direction for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Notes No remote command front panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Radio Standard Allows access to the sub menus for selecting the radio standard and the associated radio band for use...

Page 2253: ... S W Revision A 05 00 GSM EDGE Pressing this key once selects GSM EDGE as the radio standard and the current GSM EDGE band as the active channel band Pressing this key again allows access to the sub menus for selecting a different GSM EDGE band Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 05 00 P GSM Selects P GSM as the band for the current...

Page 2254: ...e List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM 450 Selects GSM 450 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM 480 Selects GSM 480 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Ra...

Page 2255: ...again allows access to the sub menus for selecting a different WCDMA band Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band I Selects Band I as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band II Selects Band II as the band for the curre...

Page 2256: ... List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band VII Selects Band VII as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band VIII Selects Band VIII as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Rad...

Page 2257: ... List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIII Selects Band XIII as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIV Selects Band XIV as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Rad...

Page 2258: ...o Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 US PCS Selects US PCS as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Japan Cell Selects Japan Cell as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000...

Page 2259: ...Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Secondary 800 Selects Secondary 800 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 400 Euro PAMR Selects 400 Euro PAMR as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W ...

Page 2260: ...dio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 US 2 5GHz Selects US 2 5 GHz as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 700 Public Safety Selects 700 Public Safety as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standar...

Page 2261: ...ision A 09 50 BAND 2 Selects BAND 2 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 3 Selects BAND 3 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 4 Selects BAND 4 as the band for the current st...

Page 2262: ...urce List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 9 Selects BAND 9 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 10 Selects BAND 10 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Stand...

Page 2263: ...Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 17 Selects BAND 17 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 18 Selects BAND 18 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio S...

Page 2264: ...Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 25 Selects BAND 25 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 26 Selects BAND 26 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio S...

Page 2265: ... standard for use and accesses the LTE TDD specific channel band sub menus Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 33 Selects BAND 33 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND33 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 34 Selects BAND 34 as the band for the current step Key ...

Page 2266: ...urrent step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND37 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 38 Selects BAND 38 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND38 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 39 Selects BAND 39 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequenc...

Page 2267: ...Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND42 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 43 Selects BAND 43 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND43 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 44 Selects BAND 44 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer...

Page 2268: ...Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDB Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND C Selects BAND C as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDC Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND D Selects BAND D as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ C...

Page 2269: ...ource will calculate the downlink frequency according to a downlink formula together with selected channel band and channel number Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup RADio BAND LINK DOWN UP SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup RADio BAND LINK Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET RAD BAND LINK UP SOUR LIST STEP2 SET RAD BAND LINK Not...

Page 2270: ...step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup CNFRequency double SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup CNFRequency Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET CNFR 1GHz SOUR LIST STEP2 SET CNFR Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 This SCPI is used to setup channel number or frequency setting according to current Radio Band setting If Radio Band is NONE the...

Page 2271: ...here exists power setting lower than 130dBm on MPA GPS ports then popup warning message These are only warning messages and check is performed when RF is ON Notes The Min and Max value here defined UI settable amplitude range This range is larger than actual amplitude range with level accuracy defined in spec Dependencies The RF power is dependent on the RF output port and frequency such that the ...

Page 2272: ...eform name Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 If the selected waveform contains header which contains ARB play parameters source list sequence will automatically apply header settings of the selected waveform in that step Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Continue Previous Sets the current step to continue with playback of the waveform from the previous step When continuing the previous waveform the...

Page 2273: ...sing either NVWFM MSUS or specifying a full path For more information see Memory Subsystem Remote Command Only If a file of the same name already exists within ARB memory it is overwritten If you wish to load two segments of the same name you must rename one of the segments before loading it into ARB memory To rename a segment you can either use Windows File Explorer or the MMEMory COPY command NO...

Page 2274: ...a file of the same name already exists within ARB memory it is overwritten If you wish to load two segments of the same name you must rename one of the segments before loading it into ARB memory To rename a segment you can either use Windows File Explorer or the MEMory COPY command NOTE When a waveform file is loaded to ARB memory burst timing adjustments are made automatically based on whether or...

Page 2275: ...as a search location for selecting waveforms using SCPI Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB DEFault DIRectory string SOURce RADio ARB DEFault DIRectory Example SOUR RAD ARB DEF DIR D ArbFiles SOUR RAD ARB DEF DIR State Saved Persistent survives a power cycle and a preset but not saved in the instrument state Initial S W Revisio...

Page 2276: ...ory Allows you to remove all segments from ARB playback memory Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments in ARB Memory Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB DELete ALL Example SOUR RAD ARB DELete ALL Notes When in Sequence Analyzer mode and Include Source is Yes an attempt to delete all files from ARB memory is rejected with an error When Include Source is No and you attempt to delet...

Page 2277: ...st Sequencer Setup Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Default Directory This key functions the same as Default Directory on page 2830 Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Segments in ARB Memory This key functions the same as Segments in ARB Memory on page 2830 Key Path Source List ...

Page 2278: ...IST STEP2 SET DUR TYPE TIME SOUR LIST STEP2 SET DUR TYPE Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 Notes If Step Duration is set to Time or Play Count for the last step the last step of ARB keeps playing as if set to Continuous until the set Time has expired or until the Play Count setting is reached However you can query Error Reference source not found Source Sweeping Condition Message to find out i...

Page 2279: ...ion Time and Continuous Abort according to current Duration Type setting is Play Count or Duraton Time or Continuous Abort If current Duration Type is Continuous then popup error 221 Settings conflict Cannot accept time or count input when step duration type is Continuous on step Notes If Duration Time is set for the last step the last step of ARB keeps playing as if set to Continuous after set ti...

Page 2280: ...event will occur on both Internal and External2 paths Select Off will turn off trigger output Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup OUTPut TRIGger ON OFF 1 0 SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup OUTPut TRIGger Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET OUTP TRIG ON SOUR LIST STEP2 SET OUTP TRIG Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 Preset Off Range On O...

Page 2281: ... on page 2824 5 Frequency Channel Number freq chan num specifies the frequency in Hz or the channel number for the step The channel number and frequency are combined as one parameter that represents the frequency or channel number depending on the radio band setting If the radio band is set to NONE this value is interpreted as a frequency value in Hz If the radio band is set to a valid band this v...

Page 2282: ...nd SOURce LIST SETup INPut TRIGger enum enum enum SOURce LIST SETup INPut TRIGger Example SOUR LIST SET INP TRIG IMM INT EXT2 SOUR LIST SET INP TRIG Notes The command is to setup below parameter array of whole list sequence Step Trigger enum specifies the input trigger for the step For details of the valid types of step trigger see Step Trigger on page 2804 If input parameter number exceeds the st...

Page 2283: ...page 2803 Number of Steps As a step is setup the value entered run through several levels of validation R e m o t e C o m m a n d SOURce LIST SETup RADio BAND enum enum enum SOURce LIST SETup RADio BAND E x a m p l e SOUR LIST SET RAD BAND PGSM EGSM RGSM SOUR LIST SET RAD BAND N o t e s The command is to setup below parameter array of whole list sequence Radio Band enum specifies the radio band fo...

Page 2284: ...5 BAND36 BAND37 BAND38 BAND39 BAND40 BAN D41 BAND42 BAND43 BANDA BANDB BANDC BANDD BANDE BANDF D e p e n d e n c i e s The range is 1 to 1000 which is determined by the number of steps you have configured For details see Number of Steps on page 2803 I n i t i a l S W R e v i s i o n A 09 40 2284 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2285: ...Frequency or Channel Number parameter array of the whole List Sequencer at one time The number of array is same as step number defined in Number of Steps on page 2803 Number of Steps As a step is setup the value entered run through several levels of validation Remote Command SOURce LIST SETup CNFRequency double double double SOURce LIST SETup CNFRequency Example SOUR LIST SET CNFR 1GHz 100MHz 100M...

Page 2286: ...tep number will be updated Dependencies The range is 1 to 1000 which is determined by the number of steps you have configured For details see Number of Steps on page 2803 Initial S W Revision A 09 40 Step Configuration of Waveform parameter list Remote Command Only This SCPI command is to configure Waveform parameter array of the whole List Sequencer at one time The number of array is same as step...

Page 2287: ...nce Step Duration enum specifies the duration of the step The duration can be specified to be either time or play count of the ARB file associated with the step or continuous If Waveform is set to CW this value cannot be set to Play Count and an error will be generated If continuous is selected the following Time or Count value is ignored For further details of this setting see Step Duration on pa...

Page 2288: ...ger parameter list Remote Command Only This SCPI command is to configure Output Trigger parameter array of the whole List Sequencer at one time The number of array is same as step number defined in Number of Steps on page 2803 Number of Steps As a step is setup the value entered run through several levels of validation Remote Command SOURce LIST SETup OUTPut TRIGger bool bool bool SOURce LIST SETu...

Page 2289: ...nningofstep DATamarker Initial S W Revision A 14 00 BeginningOfStep Sets the output trigger type as BeginningOfStep for the whole source sequence Key Path Source List Sequencer Trigger Type Example SOUR LIST TRIG TYP BEG Notes SCPI is supported after A 14 00 Initial S W Revision A 14 00 DataMarker Sets the output trigger type as DataMarker for the whole source sequence When DataMarker is selected ...

Page 2290: ...taMarker Example SOUR LIST TRIG TYPE MARK M3 Notes SCPI is supported after A 14 00 Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Marker 4 Sets the output trigger maker routing to Marker 4 for DataMarker in the whole source sequence Key Path Source List Sequencer Trigger Type DataMarker Example SOUR LIST TRIG TYPE MARK M4 Notes SCPI is supported after A 14 00 Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Manual Trigger Now Pressing...

Page 2291: ... Notes Query only SCPI Returning 1 if list sequence has been initiated successfully returning 0 if not Once get 0 you can use SYST ERR to query what error happened Just like OPC this command can be blocked until event status IsSourceSweeping happens and then returns Doing so can help user s script query armed status only once during the time interval of the initiation As an ancillary SCPI of exist...

Page 2292: ...s use a Scale Div value determined by the analyzer based on the measurement result Details of the Ref Value functionality depend on the selected view and window as described in the following sections Ref Value I Q Error View EVM Window on page 2292 Ref Value I Q Error View Mag Error Window on page 2293 Ref Value I Q Error View Phase Error Window on page 2293 Key Path SPAN X Scale Initial S W Revis...

Page 2293: ...termined by the measurement result When you set this value manually Auto Scaling is automatically set to Off Preset 0 0 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0 0 Max 5000000 0 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Ref Value I Q Error View Phase Error Window Sets the chip reference value on the horizontal axis in the phase error window Key Path SPAN X Scale Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay RHO...

Page 2294: ... I Q Error View Phase Error Window on page 2295 Key Path SPAN X Scale Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Scale Div I Q Error View EVM Window Sets the horizontal scale by changing a chip value per division in the EVM window Key Path SPAN X Scale Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay RHO VIEW2 WINDow 1 TRACe X SCALe PDIVision real DISPlay RHO VIEW2 WINDow 1 TRACe X SCALe PDIVision Example DISP RHO VI...

Page 2295: ...set 3840 0 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 64 Max 38400 0 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Scale Div I Q Error View Phase Error Window Sets the horizontal scale by changing a chip value per division in the phase error window Key Path SPAN X Scale Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay RHO VIEW2 WINDow3 TRACe X SCALe PDIVision real DISPlay RHO VIEW2 WINDow3 TRACe X SCALe PDIVision Example...

Page 2296: ...Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay RHO VIEW2 WINDow 1 TRACe X SCALe RPOSition LEFT CENTer RIGHt DISPlay RHO VIEW2 WINDow 1 TRACe X SCALe RPOSition Example DISP RHO VIEW2 WIND TRAC X RPOS LEFT DISP RHO VIEW2 WIND TRAC X RPOS Notes Any value smaller than 0 is clipped to 0 Any value larger than 10 is clipped to 10 Preset LEFT State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Left Ctr Right Initial S W Revis...

Page 2297: ... Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Auto Scaling Toggles the Auto Scaling function between On and Off When Auto Scaling is On and the Restart front panel key is pressed this function automatically determines the scale per division and reference values based on the measurement results When you set the value of either Scale Div or Ref Value manually Auto Scaling automatically changes to Off Detai...

Page 2298: ...reset ON State Saved Saved in instrument state Range On Off Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Auto Scaling I Q Error View Mag Error Window When Auto Scaling is On and the Restart front panel key is pressed automatically displays the scale per division and reference value results in the magnitude error window Key Path SPAN X Scale Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay RHO VIEW2 WINDow2 TRACe X SCAL...

Page 2299: ...ement results When you set a value to either Scale Div or Ref Value manually Auto Scaling is automatically set to Off Preset ON State Saved Saved in instrument state Range On Off Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Start Code Number Sets the start value of the code range for the code domain power graph CDP Key Path SPAN X Scale Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay RHO CDOMain SPAN STARt integer DIS...

Page 2300: ...ng conditions A Stop Code Number Start Code Number and B Stop Code Number Start Code Number 63 If the Changing Start Code Number does not satisfy conditions A and B the Stop Code Number is changed to satisfy conditions A and C below C Stop Code Number Start Code Number 63 Preset 511 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 63 Max 511 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Expand Toggles the expand...

Page 2301: ...te EVM Measurement SPAN X Scale Notes Valid only for the Power Bar Graph Window Preset Off State Saved Saved in instrument state Range On Off Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2301 ...

Page 2302: ...Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Pause Resume Pauses a measurement after the current data acquisition is complete When Paused the label on the key changes to Resume Pressing Resume un pauses the measurement Key Path Sweep Control Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 2302 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2303: ...13 Modulation Accuracy Composite EVM Measurement System System See System on page 264 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2303 ...

Page 2304: ...e Detector There is no Trace Detector functionality supported in the Modulation Accuracy measurement The front panel key displays a blank menu when pressed Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 2304 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2305: ...1575 Trig Delay See Trig Delay on page 336 External 1 See External 1 on page 1588 Trigger Level See Trigger Level on page 1589 Trig Slope See Trig Slope on page 1589 Trig Delay See Trig Delay on page 339 Zero Span Delay Comp See Zero Span Delay Comp On Off on page 1577 External 2 See External 2 on page 1590 Trigger Level See Trigger Level on page 1590 Trig Slope See Trig Slope on page 1591 W CDMA ...

Page 2306: ...gger Level on page 1582 Trig Slope See Trigger Slope on page 1593 Trig Delay See Trig Delay on page 346 Periodic Timer See Periodic Timer Frame Trigger on page 1583 Period See Period on page 1585 Offset See Offset on page 1585 Offset Adjust Remote Command Only See Offset Adjust Remote Command Only on page 1586 Reset Offset Display See Reset Offset Display on page 1587 Sync Source See Sync Source o...

Page 2307: ... Trigger Level on page 1590 Trig Slope See Trig Slope on page 1591 RF Burst See RF Burst on page 1591 Absolute Trigger See Absolute Trigger Level on page 1592 Trig Slope See Trigger Slope on page 1593 Trig Delay See Trig Delay on page 357 Baseband I Q See ___ on page X I Q Mag See ___ on page X Trigger Level See ___ on page X Trig Slope See ___ on page X Trig Delay See ___ on page X W CDMA HSPA Me...

Page 2308: ...ee ___ on page X Q Demodulated See ___ on page X Trigger Level See ___ on page X Trig Slope See ___ on page X Trig Delay See ___ on page X Input I See ___ on page X Trigger Level See ___ on page X Trig Slope See ___ on page X Trig Delay See ___ on page X Input Q See ___ on page X Trigger Level See ___ on page X 2308 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2309: ... Level See ___ on page X Trig Slope See ___ on page X Trig Delay See ___ on page X Trigger Center Frequency See ___ on page X Trigger Bandwidth See ___ on page X Auto Holdoff See Auto Holdoff on page 1594 Auto Trig See Auto Trig on page 1594 Trig Holdoff See Trig Holdoff on page 1595 Holdoff Type See ___ on page X W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2309 ...

Page 2310: ...mode switch as it can in legacy analyzers If you want to recall all modes to their user preset file state you will need to do a User Preset after mode switching into each mode User Preset recalls mode state which can now include data like traces whereas on ESA and PSA User Preset did not affect data Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 User Preset User Preset sets the state of the currently activ...

Page 2311: ...s Recalls all of the User Preset files for each mode switches to the power on mode and activates the saved measurement from the power on mode User Preset file When the instrument is secured all of the user preset files are converted back to their default user preset files The User Preset function does the following Aborts the currently running measurement Switches the Mode to the power on mode Res...

Page 2312: ...ly active mode and its State You can recall this User Preset file by pressing the User Preset menu key or sending the SYST PRES USER remote command This same state is also saved by the Save State function Key Path User Preset Remote Command SYSTem PRESet USER SAVE Example SYST PRES USER SAVE Notes SYST PRES SAVE creates the same file as if the user requested a SAV or a MMEM STOR STAT except User P...

Page 2313: ...only on page 2314 The Numeric ID is used with the SCPI Command DISP RHO VIEW NSEL View Selection by Number Remote Command only on page 2314 Enumerated ID Numeric ID View Name Details POLar 1 I Q Measured Polar Graph Provides a combination view of an I Q measured polar vector graph and the summary data ERRor 2 I Q Error Tri View Provides a combination view of the EVM magnitude error and phase error...

Page 2314: ... SELect Example DISP RHO VIEW SEL CDE DISP RHO VIEW SEL Preset POLar State Saved Saved in instrument state Range I Q Measured Polar Graph I Q Error Code Domain Power Peak Avg Metrics Capture Time Summary Slot CDE EVM Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 View Selection by Number Remote Command only Allows you to specify the view via its numeric ID value Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay RHO VIEW N...

Page 2315: ... the Active Function Turning off the Meas Bar turns off the settings panel and the Active Function When the Meas Bar is off the graticule area expands to fill the area formerly occupied by the Meas Bar 2 Screen Annotation this is the annotation and annunciation around the graticule including any annotation on lines such as the display line the threshold line etc This does NOT include the marker nu...

Page 2316: ... the Measurement Bar Key Path View Display Display Annotation Remote Command DISPlay ANNotation MBAR STATe OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay ANNotation MBAR STATe Example DISP ANN MBAR OFF Dependencies Grayed out and forced to OFF when System Display Settings Annotation is set to Off Preset On This should remain Off through a Preset when System DisplaySettings Annotation is set to Off State Saved Saved in instru...

Page 2317: ...d DISPlay ANNotation SCReen STATe OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay ANNotation SCReen STATe Example DISP ANN SCR OFF Dependencies Grayed out and forced to OFF when System Display Settings Annotation is set to Off Preset On This should remain Off through a Preset when System DisplaySettings Annotation is set to Off State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Active Function Values ...

Page 2318: ...et to Off Preset On This should remain Off through a Preset when System DisplaySettings Annotation is set to Off State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Title Displays menu keys that enable you to change or clear a title on your display Key Path View Display Display Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Change Title Writes a title into the measurement name field...

Page 2319: ... ANN TITL DATA This Is My Title This example is for Measurements other than Swept SA Both set the title to This Is My Title Notes Pressing this key cancels any active function When a title is edited the previous title remains intact it is not cleared and the cursor goes at the end so that characters can be added or BKSP can be used to go back over previous characters Preset No title measurement na...

Page 2320: ... override of the meas local annotation settings When it is All Off it forces ScreenAnnotation Meas Bar Trace and Active Function Values settings to be OFF for all measurements in all modes This provides the security based annotation off function of previous analyzers hence it uses the legacy SCPI command When it is All Off the Screen Meas Bar Trace and Active Function Values keys under the Display...

Page 2321: ...ompatibility Notes In ESA and PSA we offer the choice of Reverse Bitmap or Reverse Metafile when saving screen images This is much like the Flat Color theme available in X Series Also if you selected Reverse Bitmap AND a black white screen image that would be much like Flat Monochrome In other words each of the X Series themes has a similar screen image type in ESA PSA But they are not identical I...

Page 2322: ...lay right The traces and results of this view are only for the slot specified by the measurement offset The traces are not averaged even if the average is on The parameters displayed in these windows differ depending on the setting of Radio Device in the Mode Setup menu see Radio on page 251 For details of each view see I Q Measured Polar Graph View BTS on page 2322 I Q Measured Polar Graph View M...

Page 2323: ...r Operation None Corresponding Trace Corrected measured trace n 5 Active Channels n 1 10th a Number of Active Channels Slot Number NA Metrics window These traces and scalar results are for the slot specified by Meas Offset Name Corresponding Results Display Format Rho n 1 7th rho 9 99999 EVM rms n 1 1st EVM over the entire measurement area 99 99 rms W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2...

Page 2324: ...or n 1 3rd Average magnitude error over the entire measurement area 99 99 rms Phase Error n 1 4th Average phase error over the entire measurement area 99 99 rms Freq Error n 1 6th Frequency error in the measured signal 99 99 Hz I Q Origin Offset n 1 5th I and Q error magnitude squared offset from the origin 99 99 dB Time Offset N 1 11th Pilot phase timing from the acquisition trigger point 9999 99...

Page 2325: ...ing Trace Corrected measured trace n 5 Active Channels n 1 10th a Number of Active Channels Slot Number NA Metrics window These traces and scalar results are for the slot specified by Meas Offset Name Corresponding Results Display Format Rho n 1 7th rho 9 99999 EVM rms n 1 1st EVM over the entire measurement area 99 99 rms EVM pk n 1 2nd 99 99 pk W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2325...

Page 2326: ...rror n 1 3rd Average magnitude error over the entire measurement area 99 99 rms Phase Error n 1 4th Average phase error over the entire measurement area 99 99 rms Freq Error n 1 6th Frequency error in the measured signal 99 99 Hz I Q Origin Offset n 1 5th I and Q error magnitude squared offset from the origin 99 99 dB Time Offset N 1 11th Pilot phase timing from the acquisition trigger point 9999 ...

Page 2327: ...ey Path View Display I Q Measured Polar Graph Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay RHO VIEW 1 WINDow2 TRACe COFFset integer DISPlay RHO VIEW 1 WINDow2 TRACe COFFset Example DISP RHO VIEW WIND2 TRAC COFF 100 DISP RHO VIEW WIND2 TRAC COFF Preset 0 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0 Max 2560 I Q chips Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 I Q Chips Specifies the number of I Q chips displayed fo...

Page 2328: ...ate Saved Saved in instrument state Range On Off Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Full Vector Toggles the full vector display function between On and Off When set to On the full vector traces in gray are displayed in the background of the polar vector solid traces in yellow Key Path View Display I Q Measured Polar Graph Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay RHO VIEW 1 WINDow2 TRACe FVECtor STATe ...

Page 2329: ...r to A 02 00 I Q Error This view has three windows 1 Magnitude Error window upper 2 Phase Error window middle 3 EVM window lower The traces of this view are not averaged even if the average function is on The parameters displayed in these windows differ depending on the setting of Radio Device in the Mode Setup menu see Radio on page 251 For details of each view see I Q Error View BTS on page 2329...

Page 2330: ... window on page 2330 EVM window Marker Operation Yes Corresponding Trace EVM trace n 2 Magnitude Error window Marker Operation Yes Corresponding Trace Magnitude error trace n 3 Phase Error window Marker Operation Yes Corresponding Trace Phase error trace n 4 2330 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2331: ...r View MS The figure below shows an example of this view when the Radio Device is set to MS For details of each window see EVM window on page 2331 Magnitude Error window on page 2332 Phase Error window on page 2332 EVM window Marker Operation Yes Corresponding Trace EVM trace n 2 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2331 ...

Page 2332: ...averaged even if the average function is on The parameters displayed in these windows differ depending on the setting of Radio Device in the Mode Setup menu see Radio on page 251 For details of each view see Code Domain Power View BTS on page 2332 Code Domain Power View MS on page 2334 For details of remote commands for view selection see View Selection Remote Commands on page 2313 Key Path View D...

Page 2333: ...u that provides the following controls for the active channel list Prev Page Returns one page back to the previous page of measurement results Next Page Moves one page forward to the next page of measurement results Scroll Up Moves one line upward from the current page of measurement results each time the key is pressed Scroll Down Moves one line downward from the current page of measurement resul...

Page 2334: ...Code n 7 N 1 5 2 number OVSF Code number for N th Active Channel CX Y X OVSF level 2 9 2 960 ksps 9 7 5 ksps Y OVSF code number 0 2 x 1 Power dB n 7 N 1 5 4 number Power Level in dB for N th Active Channel 99 99 CDE dB n 7 N 5 number Code Domain Error for N th Active Channel 99 99 RCDE dB Note 1 n 16 N 1 5 4 number Power Level in dB for N th Active Channel 99 99 Key Path View Display Initial S W R...

Page 2335: ...that provides the following controls for the active channel list Prev Page Returns one page back to the previous page of measurement results Next Page Moves one page forward to the next page of measurement results Scroll Up Moves one line upward from the current page of measurement results each time the key is pressed Scroll Down Moves one line downward from the current page of measurement results...

Page 2336: ...main Error for N th Active Channel 99 99 RCDE dB Note 1 n 16 N 1 5 4 number Power Level in dB for N th Active Channel 99 99 Key Path View Display Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Peak Avg Metrics This view has one window the Peak Average Metrics window which displays two sets of data as follows Average The value averaged in average cycle Peak Hold The value detected and held as the Peak Maxim...

Page 2337: ...313 Key Path View Display Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 13 00 Peak Avg Metrics View BTS The figure below shows an example of this view when the Radio Device is set to BTS For details see Peak Average Metrics window on page 2337 Peak Average Metrics window Name Corresponding Results Display Format Rho N 1 7th Average n 1 21st Peak Hold rho 9 99999 W CDMA HSPA Meas...

Page 2338: ...Active CDE Ch No None CX Y X OVSF level 2 9 2 960ksps 9 7 5ksps Y OVSF code number 0 2 x 1 Magnitude Error N 1 3rd Average n 1 17th Peak Hold Magnitude error over the entire measurement area 99 99 rms Phase Error n 1 4th Average n 1 18th Peak Hold Average phase error over the entire measurement area 99 99 rms Freq Error n 1 6th Average n 1 20th Peak Hold Frequency error in the measured signal 99 9...

Page 2339: ...9 dB Total Power n 1 13th Average n 1 27th Peak Hold Total power over a slot 99 99 dBm 64QAM RCDE Note 1 n 17 1st Average n 18 1st Peak Hold Average 64QAM RCDE in a slot 99 99 dB Pk RCDE dB Not valid for BTS as invalid value Pk RCDE Ch NO Not valid for BTS as invalid value Key Path View Display Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Peak Avg Metrics View MS The figure below shows an example of this...

Page 2340: ... measurement area 99 99 rms EVM pk N 1 2nd Average n 1 16th Peak Hold Peak EVM in the measurement area 99 99 pk Pk CDE dB N 1 8th Average n 1 22nd Peak Hold Peak Code Domain Error relative to the mean power 99 99 dB Pk CDE Ch No N 1 9th Average n 1 23rd Peak Hold The channel number in which the peak code domain error is detected at the max spreading CX Y X 2 for uplink Y OVSF code number 0 3 2340 ...

Page 2341: ...n 1 19th Peak Hold I and Q error magnitude squared offset from the origin 99 99 dB I Q Gain Imbalance n 19 2nd Average n 19 3rd Peak Hold I Q Gain Imbalance 99 99 dB IQ Comp IQ Comp is shown when I Q Imbalance Compensation is ON I Q Quad Error n 19 4th Average n 19 5th Peak Hold I Q Quadrature Error 99 99 IQ Comp IQ Comp is shown when I Q Imbalance Compensation is ON Time Offset n 1 11th Average n...

Page 2342: ... at the bottom of the table The results in this view are not averaged when restarted even if the average is on The parameters displayed in this window differ depending on the setting of Radio Device in the Mode Setup menu see Radio on page 251 For details of each view see Capture Time Summary View BTS on page 2342 Capture Time Summary View MS on page 2344 For details of remote commands for view se...

Page 2343: ...tive to the mean power Note 1 99 99 dB Slot PkCDE Channel Index n 10 3 N 2 th Channel index in which the peak code domain error is detected at the max spreading factor Note 1 CX Y x 8 for downlink Y OVSF code number 0 255 Slot Freq Error n 11 Frequency error in slot 99 99 Hz Slot Code Domain Power of P CPICH n 12 Slot code domain power of P CPICH 99 99 dB Slot Total Power n 13 Slot averaged total ...

Page 2344: ...e in dB Slot PkCDE Channel Index Peak Worst is not highlighted Slot Freq Error Maximum absolute value in Hz Slot Code Domain Power of P CPICH Maximum value in dB Slot Average Total Power Maximum value in dBm Note 3 When a result value fails the limit test an F is shown on the right side of the result value Key Path View Display Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Capture Time Summary View MS The...

Page 2345: ...Code Domain Error relative to the mean power 99 99 dB Slot PkCDE Channel Index n 10 3 N 2 th Channel index in which the peak code domain error is detected at the max spreading factor CX Y X 2 for uplink Y OVSF code number 0 3 Slot Freq Error n 11 Frequency error in slot 99 99 Hz Slot Average Total Power n 13 Slot averaged total power dBm Note 1 N Sequence number through the Capture Interval Unit s...

Page 2346: ... to A 02 00 Slot CDE EVM This view has three windows 1 Frequency Error window upper 2 Peak CDE window middle 3 EVM window lower The trace of this view is not averaged when restarted even if the average function is on The parameters displayed in the windows differ depending on the setting of Radio Device in the Mode Setup menu see Radio on page 251 For details of each view see Slot CDE EVM View BTS...

Page 2347: ... page 2348 In the figure below Yellow lines are the slot by slot results Blue Cyan lines are the test limits EVM window Marker Operation Yes Corresponding Trace Slot RMS EVM trace n 9 Pk CDE window Marker Operation Yes Corresponding Trace Slot Peak CDE trace n 10 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2347 ...

Page 2348: ...l S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Slot CDE EVM View MS The figure below shows an example of this view when the Radio Device is set to MS For details see EVM window on page 2349 Pk CDE window on page 2349 Frequency Error window on page 2349 In the figure below Yellow lines are the slot by slot results Blue Cyan lines are the test limits 2348 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2349: ...ce Slot RMS EVM trace n 9 Pk CDE window Marker Operation Yes Corresponding Trace Slot Peak CDE trace n 10 Frequency Error window Marker Operation Yes Corresponding Trace Slot Frequency error trace n 11 Key Path View Display Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2349 ...

Page 2350: ...13 Modulation Accuracy Composite EVM Measurement View Display 2350 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2351: ...e of the ideal constellation These phase and frequency errors are measures of modulation quality for the W CDMA 3GPP system and can be quantified through QPSK EVM measurements For measurement results and views see View Display on page 2603 This topic contains the following sections Measurement Commands for QPSK EVM on page 2352 Remote Command Results for QPSK EVM Measurement on page 2353 Undefined...

Page 2352: ... of this section See the SENSe EVMQpsk commands for more measurement related commands CONFigure EVMQpsk CONFigure EVMQpsk NDEFault FETCh EVMQpsk n READ EVMQpsk n MEASure EVMQpsk n For more measurement related commands see the SENSe subsystem and the section Remote Measurement Functions on page 2642 2352 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2353: ...each sample in the EVM trace The first number is the symbol 0 decision point There are X points per symbol X points chip Therefore the decision points are at 0 1 X 2 X and so on 3 Magnitude error trace returns a series of floating point numbers in percent that represent each sample in the magnitude error trace The first number is the symbol 0 decision point There are X points per symbol X points c...

Page 2354: ...14 QPSK EVM Measurement 2354 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2355: ...lts RMS Volts Peak Volts Peak Peak dBm 50Ω Break Point 0 dB 0 7071 1 0 2 0 10 n a 6 dB 0 3536 0 5 1 0 4 0 502 V Peak 12 dB 0 1768 0 25 0 5 2 0 252 V Peak 18 dB 0 0884 0 125 0 25 8 0 127 V Peak Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Notes Visible only when the selected input is I Q State Saved No Readback Text When Range is Auto Auto When Range is Man and I Q are the same range value When Range is Man and I Q are ...

Page 2356: ...rt this functionality Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Attenuation Remote Command SENSe POWer RF RANGe OPTimize IMMediate Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 03 00 Pre Adjust for Min Clip If this function is on it does the adjustment described under Adjust Range For Min Clip each time a measurement restarts Therefore in Continuous measurement mode it only executes before the fir...

Page 2357: ...Example POW RANG PAR 12 dB Notes In some Applications Modes this parameter will be read only meaning the value will appear on the softkey and query via SCPI but not changeable In such applications the softkey will be grayed out Attempting to change the value via SCPI will be ignored and no error message will be generated Preset 10 dB State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0 dB Max 20 dB Initial...

Page 2358: ...ange Man Preset 1 V Peak State Saved Saved in instrument state Range 1 V Peak 0 5 V Peak 0 25 V Peak 0 125 V Peak Min 0 125 V Max 1 V Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe POWer IQ I RANGe UPPer ampl SENSe POWer IQ I RANGe UPPer Example Set the I Range to 0 5 V Peak when Reference Z is 50Ω and to 1 0 V Peak when Reference Z is 75Ω POW IQ RANG 4 dBm Notes The POWer form of the ...

Page 2359: ... S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 0 25 V Peak Set the channel gain state to 0 25 Volt Peak Key Path AMPTD Y Scale I Range Q Range Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 0 125 V Peak Set the channel gain state to 0 125 Volt Peak Key Path AMPTD Y Scale I Range Q Range Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Q Range Value This is the internal gain range for the Q channel See I Q Gain Ranges The Q Range onl...

Page 2360: ...ak 0 25 V Peak 0 125 V Peak Min 0 125 V Max 1 V Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe POWer IQ Q RANGe UPPer ampl SENSe POWer IQ Q RANGe UPPer Example Will set the Q Range to 0 5 V Peak when Reference Z is 50Ω and to 1 0 V Peak when Reference Z is 75Ω POW IQ Q RANG 4 dBm Notes The POWer form of the command is provided for convenience It maps to the same underlying gain range p...

Page 2361: ...d Example Turn off the mirroring of I Range to Q Range VOLT IQ MIRR OFF POW IQ MIRR OFF Couplings When On the I Range value is mirrored copied to the Q Range Preset On State Saved Saved in instrument state Range On Off Readback Text Q Same as I when On otherwise none Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 1 V Peak Set the channel gain state to 1 Volt Peak Key Path AMPTD Y Scale I Range Q Range Init...

Page 2362: ...Center 3017 for more information This is only available when the selected input is RF Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Presel Adjust Allows you to manually adjust the preselector filter frequency to optimize its response to the signal of interest This function is only available when Presel Center is available See AMPTD Y Scale Preselector Adjust 3020 for more informatio...

Page 2363: ... Auto Man parameters in manual mode It decouples all the coupled instrument parameters and is not recommended for making measurements Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 More Information There are two types of functions that have Auto Manual modes Auto Man Active Function keys An Auto Man toggle key controls the binary state associated with an instrument parameter by toggling between Auto where ...

Page 2364: ...14 QPSK EVM Measurement Auto Couple 2364 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2365: ...le EVMQ BAND 1 kHz EVMQ BAND Notes The values shown in this table reflect the conditions after a Mode Preset Preset WCDMA 6 MHz CDMA1xEVDO C2K 1 5MHz State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 1kHz Max Hardware Dependent RF Input No Option 10 MHz WB 25 MHz or wider Hardware Option Limit I Q Input for I jQ No Option 20 MHz OptionB25 50 MHz Backwards Compatibility SCPI SENSe EVMQpsk BWIDth RESolution...

Page 2366: ...K 1xEVDO Remote Command SENSe EVMQpsk BANDwidth SHAPe GAUSsian FLATtop SENSe EVMQpsk BANDwidth SHAPe Example EVMQ BAND SHAP GAUS EVMQ BAND SHAP Preset FLATtop State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Gaussian FlatTop Backwards Compatibility SCPI SENSe EVMQpsk BWIDth SHAPe Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 2366 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2367: ... etc when in Continuous mode When the average count reaches the Average Hold Number the count stops incrementing but the analyzer keeps sweeping See the Trace Detector section for the averaging formula used both before and after the Average Hold Number is reached The trigger condition must be met prior to each sweep The type of trace processing for multiple sweeps is set under the Trace Detector k...

Page 2368: ...e INIT CONT 0 command will place the analyzer in Single Sweep but will have no effect on the current sequence until k N at which point the current sequence will stop and the instrument will go to the idle state 2368 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2369: ...14 QPSK EVM Measurement File File See File on page 258 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2369 ...

Page 2370: ... The center frequency setting is the same for all measurements within a mode that is it is Meas Global Some modes are also able to share a Mode Global center frequency value If this is the case the Mode will have a Global Settings key in its Mode Setup menu The Center Freq function sets and queries the Center Frequency for the currently selected input If your analyzer has multiple inputs and you s...

Page 2371: ...PI command The other parameter is forced to a different value if needed to keep the Start and the Stop Frequencies within the analyzer s frequency range Preset Depends on instrument maximum frequency mode measurement and selected input See Center Frequency Presets on page 2371 and RF Center Freq on page 2373 and Ext Mix Center Freq and I Q Center Freq on page 2375 State Saved Saved in instrument s...

Page 2372: ... 5 GHz 26 55 GHz 526 N9038A 1 805 GHz 3 6 GHz 27 0 GHz 532 16 005 GHz 32 0 GHz 32 5 GHz 543 21 505 GHz 43 0 GHz TBD 544 22 005 GHz 44 0 GHz 44 5 GHz 550 25 005 GHz 50 0 GHz 51 GHz Input 2 Model CF after Mode Preset Stop Freq after Mode Preset Max Freq can t tune above N9000A opt C75 0 7505GHz 1 5 GHz 1 58 GHz N9038A 505 MHz 1 GHz 1 000025 GHz Tracking Generator Frequency Limits N9000A only Trackin...

Page 2373: ... selected input Scope Meas Global Remote Command SENSe FREQuency RF CENTer freq SENSe FREQuency RF CENTer Example FREQ RF CENT 30 MHz Notes This command is the same in all modes but the parameter is Measurement Global So the value is independent in each mode and common across all the measurements in the mode Dependencies If the electronic soft attenuator is enabled any attempt to set Center Freque...

Page 2374: ...mmand is the same in all modes but the parameter is Measurement Global So the value is independent in each mode and common across all the measurements in the mode Couplings When returning to External Mixing after having been switched to one of the other inputs e g RF you will come back into the settings that you had when you left External Mixing So you will come back to the band you were in with t...

Page 2375: ...e input which is selected at the time the command is sent Note that the Center Freq function in the Frequency menu on the front panel always applies to the currently selected input Scope Meas Global Remote Command SENSe FREQuency IQ CENTer freq SENSe FREQuency IQ CENTer Example FREQ IQ CENT 30 MHz Notes This command is the same in all modes but the parameter is Measurement Global So the value is i...

Page 2376: ...esults in an advisory message If the equivalent SCPI command is sent this same message is generated as part of a 221 Settings conflict warning Couplings When auto coupled in a non zero span the center frequency step size is set to 10 of the span When auto coupled in zero span the center frequency step size is set to the equivalent 3 dB RBW value Preset Auto ADEMOD 1 MHz ON State Saved Saved in ins...

Page 2377: ...14 QPSK EVM Measurement Input Output Input Output See Input Output on page 190 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2377 ...

Page 2378: ...l mode is Off there is no active function and the active function is turned off Key Path Marker Mode WCDMA C2K 1xEVDO Remote Command CALCulate EVMQpsk MARKer 1 2 12 MODE POSition DELTa OFF CALCulate EVMQpsk MARKer 1 2 12 MODE Example CALC EVMQ MARK MODE POS CALC EVMQ MARK MODE Notes If the selected marker is Off pressing Marker sets it to Normal and places it at the center of the screen on the tra...

Page 2379: ...ker will be relative to its reference marker Key Path Marker Properties Mode WCDMA C2K 1xEVDO Remote Command CALCulate EVMQpsk MARKer 1 2 12 REFerence integer CALCulate EVMQpsk MARKer 1 2 12 REFerence Example CALC EVMQ MARK REF 4 CALC EVMQ MARK REF Notes A marker cannot be relative to itself so that choice is grayed out and if sent from SCPI generates error 221 Settings conflict marker cannot be r...

Page 2380: ...value of the marker located to the polar trace which is not Off including Fixed markers Equal X Axis movement refers to the difference between each marker s X Axis value in the fundamental x axis units of the trace that marker is on and the X Axis value of the marker being moved in the same fundamental x axis units This may result in markers going off screen See Couple Marker in the Marker section...

Page 2381: ...urrent marker X Axis Scale If a suffix is sent that does not match the current marker X Axis Scale unit an error Invalid suffix is generated If the specified marker is Fixed and a Marker Function is on error 221 Settings conflict cannot adjust Fixed marker while Marker Function is on is generated The query returns the marker s absolute X Axis value if the control mode is Normal or the offset from ...

Page 2382: ...or the current marker X Axis scale Hz for Frequency and Inverse Time seconds for Period and Time If the marker is Off the response is Not A Number This parameter is only available in the case where the marker trace is set to I Q Polar Preset 0 State Saved No Min 9 9E 37 Max 9 9E 37 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Marker X Axis Position Remote Command only Sets the marker X position in trace ...

Page 2383: ...et all Markers are turned OFF so Marker X Axis Value query returns a Not A Number NAN State Saved No Min 9 9E 37 Max 9 9E 37 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Marker Y Axis Value Query Only Returns the Marker Y Axis value in the current marker Y Axis unit Mode WCDMA C2K 1xEVDO Remote Command CALCulate EVMQpsk MARKer 1 2 12 Y Example CALC EVMQ MARK11 Y Notes The query returns the marker Y axis ...

Page 2384: ...er Function There is no Marker Function functionality supported in QPSK EVM This front panel key displays a blank menu when pressed Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 2384 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2385: ...arker To There is no Marker To functionality supported in QPSK EVM This front panel key displays a blank menu when pressed Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2385 ...

Page 2386: ...ter Help press the Help key and press that key Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Remote Measurement Functions This section contains the following topics Measurement Group of Commands on page 2643 Current Measurement Query Remote Command Only on page 2645 Limit Test Current Results Remote Command Only on page 2645 Data Query Remote Command Only on page 2645 Calculate Co...

Page 2387: ...is the default format for the data output Older versions of Spectrum Analysis and Phase Noise mode measurements only use ASCII The binary data formats should be used for handling large blocks of data since they are smaller and faster than the ASCII format Refer to the FORMat DATA command for more information If you need to change some of the measurement parameters from the factory default settings...

Page 2388: ...r is set to 1 If the n value is set to a value other than 1 the selected trace data results will be returned See each command for details of what types of scalar results or trace data results are available The binary data formats should be used for handling large blocks of data since they are smaller and transfer faster than the ASCII format FORMat DATA FETCh may be used to return results other th...

Page 2389: ...ey are smaller and faster than the ASCII format FORMat DATA Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Current Measurement Query Remote Command Only This command returns the name of the measurement that is currently running Remote Command CONFigure Example CONF Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Limit Test Current Results Remote Command Only Queries the status of the current measurement limit testin...

Page 2390: ...DATA n COMPress BLOCk CFIT MAXimum MINimum MEAN DMEan RMS RMSCubed SAMPle SDEViation PPHase soffset length roffset rlimit Example To query the mean power of a set of GSM bursts Supply a signal that is a set of GSM bursts Select the IQ Waveform measurement in IQ Analyzer Mode Set the sweep time to acquire at least one burst Set the triggers such that acquisition happens at a known position relative...

Page 2391: ...hat is the arithmetic mean of the data point values in dB dBm for the specified region s of trace data For I Q trace data the mean of the magnitudes of the I Q pairs is returned See the following equations If the original trace data is in dB this function returns the arithmetic mean of those log values not log of the mean power which is a more useful value The mean of the log is the better measure...

Page 2392: ...or Specified Region s where Xi is the complex value representation of an I Q pair Xi its conjugate complex number and n is the number of I Q pairs in the specified region s Once you have the rms value for a region of trace data linear or I Q you may want to calculate the mean power You must convert this rms value peak volts to power in dBm SAMPle returns the first data value x y pair for the speci...

Page 2393: ...ed by data point in PPHase The rms power of the specified region may be expressed as Power 10 x log 10 x RMS I Q value 10 The RMS I Q value peak volts is where Xi is the complex value representation of an I Q pair Xi its conjugate complex number and n is the number of I Q pairs in the specified region The arithmetic mean phase of the specified region may be expressed as where Yi is the unwrapped p...

Page 2394: ... compressed into one value This parameter has a default value equal to the current trace length roffset repeat offset is an optional real number It is in seconds for time domain traces and is a dimensionless index 0 to Npoints 1 for frequency domain traces It defines the beginning of the next field of trace elements to be compressed This is relative to the beginning of the previous field This para...

Page 2395: ... TIME Example Example for Swept SA measurement in Spectrum Analyzer Mode CALC DATA4 PEAK 40 10 FREQ GTDL This will identify the peaks of trace 4 that are above 40 dBm with excursions of at least 10 dB The peaks are returned in order of increasing frequency starting with the lowest frequency Only the peaks that are above the display line are returned Query Results 1 With FORMat DATA REAL 32 selecte...

Page 2396: ...rming real time overlapped FFTs at the hardware layer using software for basic post processing before returning the result to the user The upshot of this approach is improved throughput for user applications that require many sequential power measurements The analysis bandwidth of FP2 is limited by the licenses in the instrument but its maximum overall analysis bandwidth per acquisition is 40 MHz ...

Page 2397: ...he configuration string Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Acquisition Time Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF AcquisitionTime 0 002 Notes The acquisition time parameter sets the time in which the entire spectrum is measured An increase in the acquisition time yields an improvement in measurement repeatability Preset 0 001 s Range 0 s to 1 s Default Unit Time s Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Center Frequency Exam...

Page 2398: ...subtracted from all measurements This effectively lowers the noise floor of the analyzer When noise correction is enabled the first measurement for a given set of input parameters will take extra time This is because the analyzer takes an extra acquisition with the RF input disconnected from the analyzer s front end to measure the noise of just the analyzer The measured noise floor is stored in a ...

Page 2399: ...se two acquisitions rather than a single acquisition are made when spur suppression is enabled the measurement time will always be slower when spur suppression is enabled Preset False Range True enable spur suppression or False disable spur suppression Default Unit Boolean Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Electronic Attenuator Bypass Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF ElecAttBypass False Notes The electronic ...

Page 2400: ...aths For example if the signal is less than 25 MHz wide then the user can select the B25M path to take advantage of additional filtering on this analog IF path Preset B40M Range B10M B25M B40M Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Include Power Spectrum Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF IncludePowerSpectrum True Notes The power spectrum parameter allows the user to read data on the entire spectrum for diagnostic ...

Page 2401: ...f Low Full Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Resolution Bandwidth Mode Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF PreAmpMode Low Notes The resolution bandwidth mode parameter allows the user to choose whether the RBW filter is automatically or manually set The BestSpeed value minimizes measurement time while the Narrowest value minimizes RBW size minimum of two FFT bins per RBW To manually specify an RBW set this para...

Page 2402: ...ision A 14 00 Trigger Level Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF TriggerLevel 2 Notes The trigger level parameter sets the voltage value at which an external trigger is detected Preset 1 2 V Range 5 to 5 V Default Unit Volts Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Trigger Slope Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF TriggerSlope Negative Notes The trigger slope parameter indicates the direction of the edge trigger voltage for det...

Page 2403: ...ult Unit Seconds Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Signal Input Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF SignalInput Fp50MHzCW Notes The signal input parameter allows the user to select between using the main RF input or the internal analyzer reference CW signal of 50 MHz Preset FpMainRf Range FpMainRf Fp50MHzCW Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Use Preselector Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF UsePreSelector True Notes The pre...

Page 2404: ...ter weighs all frequencies within the bandwidth equally The root raised cosine filter has an associated shape parameter defined by the FilterAlpha parameter All array parameters should have the same number of elements Alternatively if all the elements are the same value a single value with no square brackets can be used to define the parameter Preset IBW Range IBW RRC Initial S W Revision A 14 00 ...

Page 2405: ... should have the same number of elements Alternatively if all the elements are the same value a single value with no square brackets can be used to define the parameter Preset BandPower Range BandPower BandDensity PeakPower PeakFrequency XdBBandwidth OccupiedBandwidth Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Channel Offset Frequency Array Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF OffsetFrequency 5e6 0 5e6 Notes The offset f...

Page 2406: ...er relative to the peak channel power over which the bandwidth is calculated The parameter value must be a negative number Preset 3 01 Range 200 to 0 dB Default Unit dB Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Define Fast Power Measurement Query Remote Command Only The DEFine command is used to retrieve a list of all defined parameters in an ASCII string format M o d e All R e m o t e C o m m a n d CALCulate ...

Page 2407: ...tFrequency 0 Function BandPower FilterType IBW FilterAlpha 0 22 OccupiedBandwidthPercent 0 99 XdBBandwidth 3 01 DoNoiseCorrection False DoSpurSuppression False MeasurementMethod HardwareFFT IncludePowerSpectrum Fals e TriggerDelay 0 TriggerLevel 1 2 TriggerSlope Positive TriggerSource Free TriggerTimeout 1 I n i t i a l S W R e v i s i o n A 14 00 Configure Fast Power Measurement Remote Command On...

Page 2408: ...parated ASCII values where m corresponds to the number of bandwidths defined 1 Declared function return in the 1st specified channel 2 Declared function return in the 2nd specified channel m Declared function return in the last specified channel The INIT and FETC command sequence performs the same functionality of a single CALC FPOW POW n query Units of the returned values are dependent on the Fun...

Page 2409: ...s and to visibly inspect the spectrum Mode All Remote Command CALCulate FPOWer POWer 1 2 999 READ2 Example CALC FPOW POW1 READ2 Notes Option FP2 is required Note Spectrum data is only returned if the IncludePowerSpectrum parameter is set to True If IncludePowerSpectrum is False the number of spectrum points will be zero 0 Units of the returned values are dependent on the Function parameter per cha...

Page 2410: ... is output in the current Y Axis unit When the data format is INTeger data is output in units of m dBm 001 dBm The INT 32 format returns binary 32 bit integer values in internal units m dBm in a definite length block Dependencies Sending a data format spec with an invalid number for example INT 48 generates no error The analyzer simply uses the default 8 for ASCii 32 for INTeger 32 for REAL Sendin...

Page 2411: ... data transfer and other queries It controls whether binary data is transferred in normal or swapped mode This command affects only the byte order for setting and querying trace data for the TRACe DATA TRACe DATA CALCulate DATA n and FETCh SANalyzer n commands and queries By definition any command that says it uses FORMat DATA uses any format supported by FORMat DATA The NORMal order is a byte seq...

Page 2412: ...VMQpsk AVERage STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe EVMQpsk AVERage STATe Example EVMQ AVER COUN 1001 EVMQ AVER COUN EVMQ AVER OFF EVMQ AVER Preset 10 ON State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 1 Max 10000 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Avg Mode Toggles the averaging mode between Exp exponential and Repeat This selection only affects the averaging result after the number of N averages is reached The N ...

Page 2413: ...ge count the averaging is reset and a new average is started Preset REPeat State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Exp Repeat Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Meas Interval Sets the length of the measurement interval number of data points that are used Key Path Meas Setup Mode WCDMA C2K Remote Command SENSe EVMQpsk SWEep POINts integer SENSe EVMQpsk SWEep POINts Example EVMQ SWE POIN 1001...

Page 2414: ... SELect to set the mode Preset WCDMA 17 5 C2K 100 0 1xEVDO 100 0 Min 0 0 Max 100 0 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Freq Error Sets the limit in Hz for the frequency error measurement This value is used to judge whether the measurement passes or fails the Frequency Error limit Key Path Meas Setup Limits Mode WCDMA C2K 1xEVDO Remote Command CALCulate EVMQpsk LIMit FERRor freq CALCulate EVMQpsk...

Page 2415: ...le EVMQ SPEC NORM EVMQ SPEC Preset NORMal State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Normal Invert Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Meas Preset Restores all the measurement parameters to their default values Key Path Meas Setup Mode WCDMA C2K 1xEVDO Remote Command CONFigure EVMQpsk Example CONF EVMQ Notes Restore all defaults of parameters Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Advanced Acces...

Page 2416: ...OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate EVMQpsk IQOFfset INCLude Example CALC EVMQ IQOF INCL OFF CALC EVMQ IQOF INCL Preset ON State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Std Exclude Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 RRC Filter Control Allows you to change the status ON OFF of the Root Raised Cosine RRC filter This ON OFF state change involve measurement restart Key Path Meas Setup Advanced Mode WCDMA Remote Com...

Page 2417: ... key is invisible Preset 0 22 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0 01 Max 0 5 Backwards Compatibility SCPI SENSe EVMQpsk ALPHa Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Chip Rate Changes the chip rate for the measurement Key Path Meas Setup Advanced Mode WCDMA C2K 1xEVDO Remote Command SENSe EVMQpsk CRATe freq SENSe EVMQpsk CRATe Example EVMQ CRAT 2 5 MHz EVMQ CRAT Notes Enter a frequency value...

Page 2418: ...14 QPSK EVM Measurement Mode Mode See Mode on page 232 2418 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2419: ...nt and gets the mode to a consistent state with all of the default couplings set Backwards Compatibility Notes In the X Series the legacy Factory Preset has been replaced with Mode Preset which only presets the currently active mode not the entire instrument In the X Series the way to preset the entire instrument is by using System Restore System Defaults All which behaves essentially the same way...

Page 2420: ...s except the persistent ones Restore Mode Defaults resets ALL the Mode variables and all the Meas global and Meas local variables including the persistent ones Type Of Preset SCPI Command Front Panel Access Auto Couple COUPle ALL Auto Couple front panel key Meas Preset CONFigure Measurement Meas Setup Menu Mode Preset SYSTem PRESet Mode Preset green key Restore Mode Defaults INSTrument DEFault Mod...

Page 2421: ... Mode Preset Power On Mode Preset SYSTem PON TYPE MODE System Menu Power On User Preset SYSTem PON TYPE USER System Menu Power On Last State SYSTem PON TYPE LAST System Menu W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2421 ...

Page 2422: ...14 QPSK EVM Measurement Mode Setup Mode Setup See Mode Setup on page 251 2422 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2423: ...t value Key Path Peak Search Mode WCDMA C2K 1xEVDO Remote Command CALCulate EVMQpsk MARKer 1 2 12 MAXimum NEXT Example CALC EVMQ MARK2 MAX NEXT Notes This command does not work when the selected marker is located on the polar trace In this case the command is ignored Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Next Pk Right Moves the selected marker to the nearest peak to the right of the current marker...

Page 2424: ...to allow you the convenience to simultaneously perform a peak search and change the marker control mode to Delta without having to access two separate menus Key Path Peak Search Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Pk Pk Search Finds and displays the amplitude and frequency or time if in zero span differences between the highest and lowest value on the y axis Key Path Peak Search Mode WCDMA C2K 1...

Page 2425: ...Command CALCulate EVMQpsk MARKer 1 2 12 MINimum Example CALC EVMQ MARK MIN Notes This command does not work when the selected marker is located on the polar trace In this case the command is ignored Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2425 ...

Page 2426: ...14 QPSK EVM Measurement Print Print See Print on page 263 2426 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2427: ...ace State State_ Save Recall Screen Screen_ Save Recall Amplitude Corrections Ampcor_ Import Export Traces Trace_ Import Export Limit Lines LLine_ Import Export Measurement Result MeasR_ Import Export Capture Buffer CapBuf_ Import Export A four digit number is appended to the prefix to create a unique file name The numbering sequence starts at 0000 within each Mode for each file type and updates i...

Page 2428: ...red_0000 csv Although 0000 is used in the example above the number that is used is actually the current number in the Meas Results sequence that is the number that would have been used if you had not entered your own file name If the filename you entered ends with _dddd where d any number making it look just like an auto file name then the next auto file name picks up where you left off with the s...

Page 2429: ...e sense that you can recall a state file from any X Series model number and any version of X Series software This is only possible if part of the recalling process goes through a limiting step after recalling the mode settings at least for settings that may vary with version number model number option and license differences If you try to recall a state file onto an instrument with less capability...

Page 2430: ...A for the Spectrum Analyzer See More Information on page 2431 Key Path Recall Mode All Remote Command MMEMory LOAD STATe filename Example MMEM LOAD STAT myState state This recalls the file myState state on the default path Example MMEM LOAD STAT MyStateFile state This loads the state file data on the default file directory path into the instrument state Notes When you pick a file to recall the ana...

Page 2431: ...n you use State to save and recall traces any trace whose data must be preserved should be placed in View or Blank mode before saving The following table describes the Trace Save and Recall possibilities You want to recall state and one trace s data leaving other traces unaffected Save Trace State from 1 trace Make sure that no other traces are updating they should all be in View or Blank mode whe...

Page 2432: ...ch as Look In Look In The Look In field shows the path from which the file will be recalled and allows you to change the path using the up and down arrow keys to navigate to other paths the Enter key to open a directory and the Backspace key to go back one directory The Look In field first uses the last path from the Save As dialog Save In path for that same file type There is no softkey for direc...

Page 2433: ...s the current Open request to be cancelled The ESC key does the same thing Key Path Recall State Notes Brings up the Open dialog for recalling a State Save Type Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Edit Register Names You may enter a custom name on any of the Register keys to help you remember what you are using that state to save To do this press the Edit Register Names key choose the register w...

Page 2434: ...ath Recall State Example RCL 1 Range 1 16 from front panel 1 128 from SCPI Readback Date and time with seconds resolution are displayed on the key OR A custom name of up to 30 characters entered using the Save State Edit Register Names key OR empty if no prior save operation has been performed to this register Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision Prior to A 11 00 Register...

Page 2435: ...ister Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision Prior to A 11 00 Sequences These keys allow you to import a Tab separated or txt file that will automatically setup all the parameters required for building a Sequence The parameters will automatically be loaded into the Stated Sequencer Once selected in order to import the selected Sequence Type you must select the Open key in t...

Page 2436: ...cation for manipulating csv files and then import it Importing Data loads measurement data from the specified file into the specified or default destination depending on the data type selected Selecting an Import Data menu key will not actually cause the importing to occur since the analyzer still needs to know from where to get the data Pressing the Open key in this menu brings up the Open dialog...

Page 2437: ...ther measurements this key is grayed out Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Open When you press Open the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu entitled File Open This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse The Tab and Arrow keys can also be used for dialog navigation See From File on page 2687in Recall State for a full ...

Page 2438: ...e SWEEPING bit is set The MEASURING bit is set Backwards Compatibility Notes For Spectrum Analysis mode in ESA and PSA the Restart hardkey and the INITiate RESTart command restart trace averages displayed average count reset to 1 for a trace in Clear Write but did not restart Max Hold and Min Hold In the X Series the Restart hardkey and the INITiate RESTart command restart not only Trace Average b...

Page 2439: ...ition is met and the analyzer stops sweeping once that sweep has completed However with Average Hold Number 1 and at least one trace set to Trace Average Max Hold or Min Hold SA Measurement or Averaging on most other measurements multiple sweeps data acquisitions are taken for a single measurement The trigger condition must be met prior to each sweep The sweep is stopped when the average count k e...

Page 2440: ...gs that are affected by Mode Preset as well as the additional settings affected by Restore Mode Defaults all of the Mode s settings In addition all of the settings of the Input Output system are included even though they are outside of the Mode s state because they are needed to restore the complete setup Persistent System settings for example Verbose SCPI are not affected by either Mode Preset or...

Page 2441: ...ignored The command is sequential Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 To File When you press To File the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu entitled Save As This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse The Tab and Arrow keys can also be used for dialog navigation The Listed below are the functions of the various fields...

Page 2442: ...using the File Name key See the Quick Save on page 2683 documentation for more on the automatic file naming algorithm When you press the File Name key the analyzer displays the Alpha Editor Use the knob to choose the letter to add and the front panel Enter key to add the letter to the file name The BK character moves you back and the FW character moves you forward in the filename The Select key on...

Page 2443: ... register number an error message is generated 222 Data out of range Invalid register label number label is a string from 0 to 30 characters in length If a label exceeds 30 characters an error message is generated 150 String data error Label clipped to 30 characters label of length 0 erases the custom label and restores the default time and date label E g MMEM REG STAT LAB 1 Dependencies N9060A 7F...

Page 2444: ...nce Although these 16 registers are the only registers available from the front panel there are 128 state registers available in the instrument Registers 17 128 are only available from the SCPI interface using the SAV command There is one set of 128 state registers in the instrument not one set for each Mode When a state is saved the Mode it was saved from is saved with it then when it is recalled...

Page 2445: ...custom name of up to 30 characters entered using the Edit Register Names key OR empty if no prior save operation has been performed to this register Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 11 00 Mass Storage Catalog Remote Command Only Key path SCPI Only Remote Command MMEMory CATalog directory_name Notes The string must be a valid logical path Queries disk usage informati...

Page 2446: ...cond parameter specifies the destination The second form has four parameters In this form the first and third parameters specify the source The second and fourth parameters specify the directories The first pair of parameters specifies the source The second pair specifies the destination An error is generated if the source doesn t exist or the destination file already exists This command will gene...

Page 2447: ...e data It loads data into the file file_ name data is in 488 2 block format file_name is string data The query form is MMEMory DATA file_name with the response being the associated data in block format Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Mass Storage Make Directory Remote Command Only Key path SCPI Only Remote Command MMEMory MDIRectory directory_name Notes The string must be a valid logical pat...

Page 2448: ...nly Remote Command MMEMory RDIRectory directory_name Notes The string must be a valid logical path Removes a directory The directory_name parameter specifies the directory name to be removed All files and directories under the specified directory shall also be removed This command will generate an access denied error if the folder is a restricted folder e g C Windows or is in a restricted folder a...

Page 2449: ...lgorithm The default path for all Sequence Files is My Documents Sequences Key Path Save Sequences Mode All Notes Brings up Save As dialog for saving a Sequence Save Type Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Data Export Exporting a data file stores data from the current measurement to mass storage files The Export Menu only contains data types that are supported by the current measurement Since the common...

Page 2450: ...ename Example MMEM STOR RES MTAB myResults csv Saves the results from the current marker table to the file myResults csv in the current path MMEM STOR RES PTAB myResults csv Saves the results from the current peak table to the file myResults csv in the current path MMEM STOR RES SPEC myResults csv Saves the results from the current Spectrogram display to the file myResults csv in the current path ...

Page 2451: ... Results file format Imagine that at the point where a Marker Table Meas Result is requested the following screen is showing Then the Meas Results file when opened would show the following data MeasurementR esult Swept SA A 01 40_R0017 N9020A 526 B25 PFR P26 EA3 1 Result Type Marker Table Ref Level 0 Number of Points 1001 Sweep Time 0 0662666 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2451 ...

Page 2452: ...ger Level 1 2 Trigger Slope Positive Trigger Delay 1 00E 06 Phase Noise Optimization Fast Swept If Gain Low FFT If Gain Autorange RF Coupling AC FFT Width 411900 Ext Ref 10000000 Input RF RF Calibrator Off Attenuation 10 Ref Level Offset 0 External Gain 0 X Axis Units Hz Y Axis Units dBm DATA MKR MODE TR C SCL X Y FUNCTI ON FUNCTIO N WIDTH FUNCTI ON VALUE FUNCTI ON UNIT 1 Normal 1 Freque ncy 2 235...

Page 2453: ... 0 None 10 Normal 3 Freque ncy 1 1454E 10 75 1 61 Band Density 1 3250E 06 138 97 3 dBm Hz 11 Off 1 Freque ncy 0 0000E 00 0 Off 0 0000E 00 0 None 12 Off 1 Freque ncy 0 0000E 00 0 Off 0 0000E 00 0 None The numbers appear in the file exactly as they appear onscreen If it says 11 454 GHz onscreen then in the file it is 11 454E 09 The metadata header is very similar to the metadata used in the trace da...

Page 2454: ...eak Threshold State On Off Peak Excursion Peak Excursion State On Off Display Line Peak Readout All AboveDL BelowDL Peak Sort Freq Amptd These fields are then followed by the data for the Peak Table itself Note that the label for the Frequency column changes to Time in 0 span Here is what the table for the above display looks like MeasurementResult Swept SA A 01 40_R0017 N9020A 526 B25 PFR P26 EA3...

Page 2455: ... Scale Lin PreAmp State Off PreAmp Band Low Trigger Source Free Trigger Level 1 2 Trigger Slope Positive Trigger Delay 1 00E 06 Phase Noise Optimization Fast Swept If Gain Low FFT If Gain Autorange RF Coupling AC FFT Width 411900 Ext Ref 10000000 Input RF RF Calibrator Off Attenuation 10 Ref Level Offset 0 External Gain 0 X Axis Units Hz Y Axis Units dBm Peak Threshold 85 Peak Threshold State On P...

Page 2456: ... 60 89 16 9 5920E 05 60 90 17 18 19 20 Spectrogram This section discusses the Spectrogram Results file format The Spectrogram choice only appears if option EDP is licensed The Spectrogram results are the same as a Trace data export except that instead of having just one trace s data all 300 traces appear one after the other Each trace has its own data mark the data for Spectrogram Trace 0 follows ...

Page 2457: ...ple if the absolute start time is 13 23 45 678 on January 30 2012 this row would look like Start Time 20120130132345678 NOTE The resolution of the absolute time stored is 1 ms which matches up with the fact that the fastest sweep time is also 1 ms However there is no specification for the absolute accuracy of the clock in the analyzer nor is there any facility provided to allow the user to set thi...

Page 2458: ... file for the above display Note the start time of 20120425142808700 showing in the last row before the first DATA row and the relative time of 5 299231048 showing in the first DATA row Result Type Spectrogram MeasResult Swept SA A 11 00 01 N9020A 503 508 513 526 ALL ALV B1C B1X B25 B2X B40 BAB BBA CR3 CRP DP2 DRD EA3 EDP EMC EP1 ERC ESC ESP EXM FSA HBA K03 LFE MPB P03 P08 P13 P26 PFR RTL RTS S40 ...

Page 2459: ...ath Oper1 Trace5 Trace Math Oper2 Trace6 Trace Math Offset 0 Trace Name Trace1 X Axis Units Hz Y Axis Units dBm Start Time 20120425142808700 DATA 5 299231048 5999984415 76 34749519 5999984440 77 28097006 5999984465 75 32317869 5999984490 73 64417681 5999984515 72 67154604 o o o 6000009315 77 94423277 6000009340 79 51829697 6000009365 78 46108961 6000009390 78 46108957 6000009415 76 59570596 DATA2 ...

Page 2460: ...5999984440 75 76485645 5999984465 76 67718717 5999984490 78 79238489 5999984515 83 72680212 o o o 6000009315 71 3942461 6000009340 72 28308332 6000009365 73 92684489 6000009390 75 45548832 6000009415 75 17904815 Capture Buffer Allows you to store captured data for reuse in demod measurements using Save Recall functionality for Capture Buffer Capture Buffer is saved and loaded as IQ Data with prope...

Page 2461: ... dialog navigation See To File on page 2697 in Save State for a full description of this dialog and menu The default path for saving files is For all of the Trace Data Files My Documents mode name data traces For all of the Limit Data Files My Documents mode name data limits For all of the Measurement Results Data Files My Documents mode name data measurement name results For all of the Capture Bu...

Page 2462: ...aved showing the menus that were on the screen before going into the Save menus The save is performed immediately and does not wait until the measurement is complete After you have completed the save the Quick Save front panel key lets you quickly repeat the last save performed using an auto named file with the current screen data For versions previous to A 01 55 if you initiate a screen image sav...

Page 2463: ...es In ESA and PSA we offer the choice of Reverse Bitmap or Reverse Metafile when saving screen images This is much like the Flat Color theme available in X Series Also if you selected Reverse Bitmap AND a black white screen image that would be much like Flat Monochrome In other words each of the X Series themes has a similar screen image type in ESA PSA But they are not identical Initial S W Revis...

Page 2464: ...ave As the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu entitled Save As This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse The Tab and Arrow keys can also be used for dialog navigation See To File on page 2697 in Save State for a full description of this dialog and menu The default path for Screen Images is My Documents mode name scree...

Page 2465: ...n the idle state INIT IMM in ESA PSA Spectrum Analysis Mode does an implied ABORt In some other PSA Modes INIT IMM is ignored if not in the idle state The X Series follows the ESA PSA SA Mode model which may cause some Modes to have compatibility problems Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 More Information See Restart on page 2694 for details on the INIT IMMediate Restart function If you are al...

Page 2466: ... front panel to indicate out of scope Non forceful means user still can change this setting by SCPI but cannot change on front panel When set to OFF will make source leave list sequencer and this setting will be black out and take effect immediately When the RF Output is ON an RF annunciator is displayed in the system settings panel When the RF Output is turned Off the RF annunciator is cleared If...

Page 2467: ...nd waveform etc When the source list sequence playing is complete the last step keeps playing and user can use this command to change the list sequence last step s output power The multiport adapter RFIO TX ports and GPS ports cannot ensure power accuracy when power setting is lower than 130dBm this power setting value is defined by the sum of RF Power setting and related amplitude correction valu...

Page 2468: ...ered power Where reference power equals the original RF Power entered under Source Amplitude RF Power and set as the reference power entered power equals a new value entered under Source Amplitude Amptd Offset In addition the displayed power value is the same as a new value entered under Source Amplitude RF Power If Power Ref is set to ON with a reference value set entering a value under Source Am...

Page 2469: ...urrent output power Preset 0 00 dBm OFF Min 125 00 dBm Max 10 00 dBm Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Amptd Offset Allows you to specify the RF output power offset value When the amplitude offset is set to zero 0 and you set a new offset value positive or negative the displayed amplitude value will change as follows and the RF output power will not change Displayed value output power offset value Wher...

Page 2470: ...age 2802 is set to ON the list sequencer controls the source output and this key will be grayed out And this setting will be none forceful grey out on front panel to indicate out of scope Non forceful means user still can change this setting by SCPI but cannot change manually on front panel When setto Off will make source leave list sequencer and this setting will be black out and take effect imme...

Page 2471: ...requency Couplings The frequency value is coupled to the current channel band and number such that updates to the band and number will update the frequency value to the corresponding absolute frequency Preset 1 00 GHz If license F1A or 5WC is present the default Center Frequency should be 2 412GHz Min 10 00 MHz Max Hardware Dependant Option 503 3 6 GHz Option 504 3 8 GHz Option 506 6 00 GHz For E6...

Page 2472: ... than sign to indicate the frequency is above or below the channel number Preset 1 Min Please refer to the tables below for the valid ranges Max Please refer to the tables below for the valid ranges Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM EDGE Channel Number Ranges Band Link Device Range Frequency MHz P GSM Uplink MS 1 n 124 890 0 0 2 n Downlink BS 1 n 124 935 0 0 2 n E GSM Uplink MS 0 n 124 975 n 1023 8...

Page 2473: ...and II Downlink 412 n 687 9662 n 9938 n 5 1850 1 n 5 Uplink 12 n 287 350 n 425 n 5 1850 1 n 5 Band III Downlink 1162 n 1513 n 5 1575 Uplink 937 n 1288 n 5 1525 Band IV Downlink 537 n 1738 1887 n 2087 n 5 1805 n 5 1735 1 Uplink 1312 n 1513 1662 n 1862 n 5 1450 n 5 1380 1 Band V Downlink 1007 n 1087 4357 n 4458 n 5 670 1 n 5 Uplink 782 n 862 4132 n 4233 n 5 670 1 n 5 Band VI Downlink 1037 n 1062 438...

Page 2474: ... n 5 21 n 5 39 9 Band XIV Downlink 4117 n 4143 4167 n 4192 n 5 63 n 5 72 9 Uplink 3892 n 3918 3942 n 3967 n 5 12 n 5 2 1 Band XIX Downlink 712 n 763 787 n 837 n 5 735 n 5 720 1 Uplink 312 n 363 387 n 437 n 5 770 n 5 755 1 CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Channel Number Ranges Band Link Device Range Frequency MHz US Cellular Uplink MS reverse link 1 N 799 991 N 1023 1024 N 1323 0 030 N 825 000 0 030 N 1023 825 000...

Page 2475: ...1536 479 000 0 020 N 1792 479 000 Downlink BS forward link 1 N 400 472 N 871 1039 N 1473 1536 N 1715 1792 N 2016 0 025 N 1 460 000 0 025 N 472 420 000 0 020 N 1024 461 010 0 025 N 1536 489 000 0 020 N 1792 489 000 IMT 2000 Band Uplink MS reverse link 0 N 1199 1920 000 0 050 N Downlink BS forward link 0 N 1199 2100 000 0 050 N Upper 700 MHz Band Uplink MS reverse link 0 N 240 776 000 0 050 N Downli...

Page 2476: ...MS reverse link 1 N 400 472 N 871 1536 N 1715 0 025 N 1 450 000 0 025 N 472 410 000 0 025 N 1536 479 000 Downlink BS forward link Downlink BS forward link Downlink BS forward link 1 N 400 472 N 871 1536 N 1715 0 025 N 1 460 000 0 025 N 472 420 000 0 025 N 1536 489 000 800 PAMR Uplink MS reverse link 0 N 239 870 0125 0 025 N Downlink BS forward link 0 N 239 915 0125 0 025 N LTE FDD Channel Number R...

Page 2477: ... 1427 9 22750 22750 22949 12 729 5010 5010 5179 699 23010 23010 23179 13 746 5180 5180 5279 777 23180 23180 23279 14 758 5280 5280 5379 788 23280 23280 23379 17 734 5730 5730 5849 704 23730 23730 23849 18 860 5850 5850 5999 815 23850 23850 23999 19 875 6000 6000 6149 830 24000 24000 24149 20 791 6150 6150 6449 832 24150 24150 24449 21 1495 9 6450 6450 6599 1447 9 24450 24450 24599 24 1525 7700 770...

Page 2478: ...50 38650 39649 41 2496 39650 39650 41589 2496 39650 39650 41589 42 3400 41590 41590 43589 3400 41590 41590 43589 43 3600 43590 43590 45589 3600 43590 43590 45589 Note The channel numbers that designate carrier frequencies so close to the operating band edges that the carrier extends beyond the operating band edge shall not be used This implies that the first 7 15 25 50 75 and 100 channel numbers a...

Page 2479: ...e 5 2 b 1850 1910 MHz 1930 1990 MHz 9254 to 9546 9654 to 9946 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 c 1910 1930 MHz 9554 to 9646 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 d 2570 2620 MHz 12854 to 13096 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 e 2300 2400 MHz 11504 to 11996 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 f 1880 ...

Page 2480: ...D24 BAND25 BAND26 BAND27 BAND28 BAND31 BAND33 BAND34 BAND35 BAND36 BAND37 BAND38 BAND39 BAND40 BAND41 BAND42 BAND43 BAND44 BANDA BANDB BANDC BANDD BANDE BANDF SOURce FREQuency CHANnels BAND Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PGSM Notes Set this setting to NONE will grey out Channel on page 2727 Channel Initial S W Revision A 05 00 None Selects no radio standard for use When you have selected the radio st...

Page 2481: ...0 Selects DCS 1800 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND DCS1800 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 PCS 1900 Selects PCS 1900 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PCS1900 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM 450 Selects GSM 450 as the active channel b...

Page 2482: ...e active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND GSM700 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 T GSM 810 Selects T GSM 810 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND T GSM810 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 WCDMA Sets WCDMA as the radio standard for use and accesses the W CDM...

Page 2483: ...band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDIII Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band IV Selects Band IV as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDIV Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band V Selects Band V as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Stan...

Page 2484: ...el band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDVIII Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band IX Selects Band IX as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDIX Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band X Selects Band X as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio ...

Page 2485: ...adio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDXIII Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIV Selects Band XIV as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDXIV Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIX Selects Band XIX as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BA...

Page 2486: ...O Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PCS Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Japan Cell Selects Japan Cell as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND JAPAN Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Korean PCS Selects Korean PCS as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CH...

Page 2487: ...REQ CHAN BAND UPPER Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Secondary 800 Selects Secondary 800 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND SECOND Initial S W Revision A 05 00 400 Euro PAMR Selects 400 Euro PAMR as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHA...

Page 2488: ...DO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PCS1DOT9G Initial S W Revision A 05 00 AWS Selects AWS as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND AWS Initial S W Revision A 05 00 US 2 5GHz Selects US 2 5 GHz as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND US...

Page 2489: ... Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 1 Selects BAND 1 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND1 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 2 Selects BAND 2 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND2 Initial S W Revision A 09 50...

Page 2490: ...50 BAND 6 Selects BAND 6 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND6 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 7 Selects BAND 7 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND7 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 8 Selects BAND 8 as the band for the curre...

Page 2491: ...BAND 11 Selects BAND 11 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND11 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 12 Selects BAND 12 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND12 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 13 Selects BAND 13 as the band for the ...

Page 2492: ...0 BAND 18 Selects BAND 18 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND18 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 19 Selects BAND 19 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND19 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 20 Selects BAND 20 as the band for th...

Page 2493: ...0 BAND 25 Selects BAND 25 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND25 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 26 Selects BAND 26 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND26 Initial S W Revision A 12 53 BAND 27 Selects BAND 27 as the band for th...

Page 2494: ...ndard for use and accesses the LTE TDD specific channel band sub menus Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 33 Selects BAND 33 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND33 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 34 Selects BAND 34 as the band for the current step Key Path...

Page 2495: ...Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND37 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 38 Selects BAND 38 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND38 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 39 Selects BAND 39 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setu...

Page 2496: ...Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND42 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 43 Selects BAND 43 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND43 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 44 Selects BAND 44 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD E...

Page 2497: ...rd TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDB Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND C Selects BAND C as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDC Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND D Selects BAND D as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAN...

Page 2498: ...io Setup Remote Command SOURce RADio BAND LINK DOWN UP SOURce RADio BAND LINK Example SOUR RAD BAND LINK UP Preset DOWN Range DOWN UP Backwards Compatibility SCPI SOURce RADio DEVice BTS MS SOURce RADio DEVice Backwards Compatibility Notes BTS maps to the Downlink frequency MS maps to the Uplink frequency Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Set Reference Frequency This key allows you to set the frequency...

Page 2499: ...s grayed out when the List Sequencer is turned ON Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Freq Reference This key allows you to toggle the state of the frequency reference When the frequency reference state is ON an annunciator is displayed on the main source view to indicate this state to the user When you use a frequency reference the signal generator outputs a frequency that is set relative to the referen...

Page 2500: ...hange as follows and the RF output frequency will not change Displayed value output frequency offset value Where output frequency equals the original frequency entered under Source Frequency Frequency offset value equals the value entered under Source Frequency Freq Offset When the frequency offset is set to a value other than zero 0 and you enter a new frequency value under Source Frequency Frequ...

Page 2501: ...ings panel When the ARB is turned Off the MOD annunciator is cleared Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB STATe ON OFF 1 0 SOURce RADio ARB STATe Example SOUR RAD ARB OFF SOUR RAD ARB Notes If the ARB is ON a user then loads or deletes another file to ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The waveform w...

Page 2502: ... information about this adjustment Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB WAVeform string SOURce RADio ARB WAVeform Example SOUR RAD ARB WAV test_waveform bin Notes If intended waveform is not in the memory yet then issuing this command by SCPI will invoke ARB loading operation first which involves a delay of unpredictable length So this command should...

Page 2503: ...RB Select Waveform Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Load Segment To ARB Memory Allows you to load the selected file into ARB memory On the front panel you select the file for loading to the ARB memory by highlighting the desired file in the list Using the SCPI command you specify the file name on the HDD NVWFM none volatile storage MSUS Mass Storage Unit Specifier is supported in the memory subsystem ...

Page 2504: ...do not present on the instrument In this case a GUI only warning message 800 Operation complete Loaded filename successfully but no license required licenses installed User can install required licenses according to required licenses string to license it or multi pack license it Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Load All To ARB Memory Allows you to load all the segment files within the currently select...

Page 2505: ...or playback of a waveform sequence or a list sequence Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Notes No remote command SCPIfront panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Default Directory Allows you to change the default directory It is used as a search location for waveform segments that are required to be loaded into ARB memory for playback of a waveform sequence...

Page 2506: ... the ARB is ON and you load a file to ARB memory or delete a file from ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The waveform will be replayed after the ARB operation is finished Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Delete All From ARB Memory Allows you to remove all segments from ARB playback memory Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Wa...

Page 2507: ...B Memory Full File List Remote Command Only Queries the test set for the string list of waveform segments in the ARB memory It returns a string list for waveform segment names in the ARB memory Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB FCATalog Example SOUR RAD ARB FCATalog Notes The return data is in the following format integer memory used integer memory free integer file count in ARB memory string string...

Page 2508: ... Run Time Scaling Allows you to adjust the run time scaling value The run time scaling value is applied in real time while the waveform is playing Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB ARB Setup Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB RSCaling real SOURce RADio ARB RSCaling Example SOUR RAD ARB RSC 100 00 Notes This setting cannot be set in E6640A Grey out on menu and the value is fixed at 70 00 Dependenci...

Page 2509: ...llows access to the trigger type sub menus The setting for trigger type determines the behavior of the waveform when it plays Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE CONTinuous SINGle SADVance GATE SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE CONT SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE Notes Gated trigger type will be implemented at a later release Preset ...

Page 2510: ...y Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Trigger Type Continuous Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE CONT TRIG Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Reset Run Sets Reset and Run as the trigger response for the continuous trigger type Reset and Run sets the waveform generator to play a waveform sequence or segment continuously when the first trigger is received Subsequent triggers reset the waveform sequence or segmen...

Page 2511: ... Revision A 05 00 Buffered Trigger Selects Buffered Trigger as the trigger response for single trigger type Buffered Trigger sets the waveform generator to play a waveform sequence or segment once when a trigger is received If a trigger is received during playback the waveform generator plays the sequence or segment to the end then plays the sequence or segment once more Key Path Source Modulation...

Page 2512: ... Command SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE SADVance TYPE SINGle CONTinuous SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE SADVance TYPE Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE SADV SING Preset CONTinuous Range Single Continuous Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Single Selects Single as the trigger response for Segment Advance trigger type With single selected once a trigger is received a segment is played once If a trigger is recei...

Page 2513: ...the waveform is triggered when you press the front panel Trigger key Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Trigger Source Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIGger KEY Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Bus Sets the current trigger source to Bus Selecting Bus trigger source enables triggering over GPIB LAN or USB using the SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger INITiate command Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Trigger Source E...

Page 2514: ...Pressing this key changes the central view area to display the Waveform Sequence Creation and Editing view Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Notes No remote command SCPIfront panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Current Segment Specifies the selected sequence segment that will be affected by the menu functions Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build N...

Page 2515: ... Pressing this key changes the current view to the Waveform Management View Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Load Segment To ARB Memory Allows you to load the selected file into ARB memory On the front panel you select the file for loading to the ARB memory by highlighting the desired file in the list Using the SCPI command you specify the file name...

Page 2516: ...tudio waveform wfm which contains invalid waveform header an error is generated If the ARB is ON when you load afile to ARB memory or delete a file from ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The waveform will be replayed after the ARB operation is finished ARB can be loaded into ARB memory even required licenses do not present on the ...

Page 2517: ...e new directory of interest The current directory is used for manually loading waveform segments into ARB memory for playback and as a search location for waveform segments that are required to be loaded into ARB memory for playback of a waveform sequence or a list sequence Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Notes No remote command SCPIfront panel only Initi...

Page 2518: ...ARB state is On the selected waveform will not be played In this case if the selected waveform is not used in List Sequence it can be deleted and the ARB state is turned Off If the ARB is ON and you load a file to ARB memory or delete a file from ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The waveform will be replayed after the ARB operati...

Page 2519: ...uences Build New Sequence Insert New Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Load All To ARB Memory This key functions the same as Load All To ARB Memory on page 2829 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Insert New Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Change Directory This key functions the same as C...

Page 2520: ...B Memory on page 2831 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Insert New Waveform Segment in ARB Memory Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Query ARB Memory File List Remote Command Only This command functions the same as Query ARB Memory File List Remote Command Only on page 2763 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Edit Selected Waveform Allows access to the...

Page 2521: ...ion A 05 00 Marker 2 Allows you to enable or disable marker 2 for the currently selected waveform For a waveform sequence you can enable and disable markers on a per segment basis allowing you to output markers from some waveform segments within the sequence but not for others Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Edit Selected Waveform Notes No remote command ...

Page 2522: ... S W Revision A 05 00 Delete Segment Allows you to delete the selected segment from the waveform sequence Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Notes No remote command front panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Save Sequence Pressing this key displays the Save As dialog The sequence name is passed to the save as dialog to use as the filename for saving and t...

Page 2523: ...M4 M1M2 M1M3 M1M4 M2M3 M2M4 M3M4 M1M2M3 M1M2M4 M1M3M4 M2M3M4 M1M2M3M4 ALL For additional description of each item see Notes below For Setup SCPI on page 2523 For Setup SCPI SOURce RADio ARB SEQuence MWAVeform filename For additional description of each item see Notes For Query SCPI on page 2524 below Example For setup SOUR RAD ARB SEQ NVWFM testSeq1 seq NVWFM wfmSegment1 wfm 10 M2M3M4 NVWFM wfmSeg...

Page 2524: ...FM or have an error in the waveform sequence file path an error is generated Notes Error Checks for Query SCPI command Continued If the specified waveform sequence file name suffix is not seq error is generated If you use an unsupported MSUS that is not NVWFM or have an error in the waveform segment file path an error is generated If the first specified waveform file cannot be found an error is ge...

Page 2525: ...tial S W Revision A 05 00 Waveform Utilities Allows you access to the waveform utilities sub menus Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Multi Pack Licenses Allows you access to the Multi Pack License sub menus Pressing this key also changes the central view area to display the Multi Pack License Management view On modular instrument like E6630A or E6640A multi pack lic...

Page 2526: ...t signal sources You can use either one of them Since adding a waveform segment to a Multi Pack license causes the license slot to enter the trial period of only 48 hours pressing this key causes a confirmation dialog to be displayed to ensure you do want to add the waveform segment to the Multi Pack If you attempt to license a waveform that is already licensed using another slot an error is gener...

Page 2527: ...aveform file has been loaded it needs to be loaded again Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB LOAD string Example SOUR RAD ARB LOAD D VARB testwaveform bin or SOUR RAD ARB LOAD NVWFM testwaveform bin Notes Because loading the file involves a delay of unpredictable length this command should be followed by the query OPC which hol...

Page 2528: ...es string specifies the directory on the HDD to load the files into ARB memory from When in Sequence Analyzer mode and Include Source is Yes an attempt to load all files from a directory to ARB memory is rejected with an error When Include Source is No and there is insufficient free ARB memory to load all the waveforms when the ARB memory is full the copy ceases and an error is generated If you sp...

Page 2529: ...rd Disk on page 2828 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Add Waveform Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Load Segment To ARB Memory This key functions the same as Load Segment To ARB Memory on page 2828 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Add Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Load ...

Page 2530: ...Waveform Add view Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Replace Waveform Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform REPLace int string or SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform REPLace int string Example SYST LKEY WAV REPL 1 myotherwaveform wfm or SYST LIC WAV REPL 1 myotherwaveform wfm Notes The second SCPI SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform REPLace is provided to be consistent w...

Page 2531: ...B Memory on page 2829 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Replace Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Change Directory This key functions the same as Change Directory on page 2830 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Replace Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A ...

Page 2532: ... Waveform in Slot If the selected slot is in the trial state or the lock required state the waveform that occupies the slot is locked and permanently licensed Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform LOCK int or SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform LOCK int Example SYST LKEY WAV LOCK 1 or SYST LIC WAV LOCK 1 Notes The second SCPI SYST...

Page 2533: ...ot number exceeds total available slot number Nonexistent is returned Range Locked Available Trail LockRequired Nonexistent Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Slots Free Query Remote Command Only Returns the number of license slots free Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform FREE or SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform FREE Example SYST LKEY WAV FREE or SYST LIC WAV FREE Notes The second SCPI SYSTem LICense FPACk...

Page 2534: ... than or equals 0 an error is generated Result type is string If input slot number exceeds total available slot number Nonexistent is returned If no waveform stored in the specified slot then empty string is returned Initial S W Revision A 12 00 Slot Waveform Unique ID Query Remote Command Only Returns the waveform unique ID of the specified slot Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform UID int or SYST...

Page 2535: ... Studio waveform has a unique id recorded in header So if the unique ids are same that means they are same one waveform So besides SCPI to query locked waveform name list also provide a SCPI to query locked waveform unique id list Initial S W Revision A 11 00 Marker Utilities Allows access to the marker utilities sub menus Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Marker Po...

Page 2536: ... Marker Utilities Marker Polarity Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB MPOLarity MARKer2 POSitive NEGative SOURce RADio ARB MPOLarity MARKer2 Example SOUR RAD ARB MPOL MARK2 NEG Dependencies When a new waveform is selected for playback the settings contained within the associated waveform header file are applied to the ARB The marker polarity is one of the values stored within the header file If the ne...

Page 2537: ... within the header file If the newly selected waveform file has an associated header file the marker polarity is updated with the value from the header file The marker polarity will remain unchanged if the newly selected waveform does not have an associated header file Preset Pos Range Neg Pos Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Marker Routing Allows access to the marker routing sub menus which allow you...

Page 2538: ...F blanking setting is updated with the value from the header file The pulse RF blanking setting will remain unchanged if the newly selected waveform does not have an associated header file Range None M1 M2 M3 M4 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 None Sets no marker to be used for the pulse RF blanking function essentially turning the RF blanking function off Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Marker ...

Page 2539: ...olarity this is when there are no maker points Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Marker Utilities Marker Routing Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB MDEStination ALCHold NONE M1 M2 M3 M4 SOURce RADio ARB MDEStination ALCHold Example SOUR RAD ARB MDES ALCH NONE Dependencies When a new waveform is selected for playback the settings contained within the associated waveform header file are applied to t...

Page 2540: ...er Utilities Marker Routing ALC Hold Example SOUR RAD ARB MDES PULS M3 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Marker 4 Sets marker 4 to be used for the ALC hold function Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Marker Utilities Marker Routing ALC Hold Example SOUR RAD ARB MDES PULS M4 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Header Utilities Allows access to the header utilities sub menu Pressing this key also causes the c...

Page 2541: ...l Studio waveform contains a unique waveform ID which recorded in the header This command allows you to query the unique waveform ID from the header This is a SCPI only command User can also checkError Reference source not found for waveform unique ID display Remote Command MMEMory HEADer ID file name Example MMEM HEAD ID test wfm query the waveform already loaded into the ARB memory MMEM HEAD ID ...

Page 2542: ...plitude modulation Turning AM on when another modulation format is already on results in the previous modulation format being turned off and the generation of an error Key Path Source Modulation Setup AM Remote Command SOURce AM STATe SOURce AM STATe Example SOUR AM STAT OFF Preset Off Range On Off Initial S W Revision A 05 00 AM Depth Allows you to set the amplitude modulation depth in percent Ke...

Page 2543: ... Key Path Source Modulation Setup Initial S W Revision A 05 00 FM Enables or disables the frequency modulation Turning FM on when another modulation format is already on results in the previous modulation format being turned off and the generation of an error Key Path Source Modulation Setup FM Remote Command SOURce FM STATe SOURce FM STATe Example SOUR FM STAT OFF Preset Off Range On Off Initial ...

Page 2544: ...R FM INT FREQ 40 0 Hz Preset 400 0 Hz Min 10 Hz Max 40 kHz Initial S W Revision A 05 00 PM Allows access to the menu for configuring the phase modulation Key Path Source Modulation Setup Initial S W Revision A 05 00 PM Enables or disables the phase modulation Turning PM on when another modulation format is already on results in the previous modulation format being turned off and the generation of ...

Page 2545: ...0 Hz Max 40 kHz Initial S W Revision A 05 00 List Sequencer Allows you access to the sub menus for configuring the list sequencer List sequences allows you to enter frequencies and amplitudes at unequal intervals in nonlinear ascending descending or random order Each step within the list can also include its own waveform file for playback step duration trigger event and trigger output The complexi...

Page 2546: ...output of the source Couplings When in Sequence Analyzer mode and the list sequencer state is Off Include Source is forced to No and the Include Source key is grayed out When in Sequence Analyzer mode and the list sequencer state is On Include Source is available to set And an ARB memory related operation like load or delete will be rejected Preset Off Range On Off Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Ini...

Page 2547: ...t Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST NUMBer STEPs integer SOURce LIST NUMBer STEPs Example SOUR LIST NUMB STEP 1 Notes Increasing the number of steps creates additional steps at the end of the list with all the settings within the steps set to their default values Decreasing the number of steps removes steps from the end of the list The settings within the removed steps are ...

Page 2548: ...n A 05 00 Delete Step Allows you to delete the current step Deleting a step will automatically decrease the Step Count parameter by 1 If sequence only has one step left delete step will be rejected and popup error 221 Setting conflict Cannot delete current step minimum number of steps reached Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Notes No remote command Front Panel key only If the li...

Page 2549: ...on A 05 00 Internal Sets the trigger input for the current step to Internal Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Step Trigger Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET INP TRIG INT Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Manual Trigger Key Sets the trigger input for the current step to Manual Trigger Key Any step in the sequence set to Manual will cause the sequence exe...

Page 2550: ... Notes Note When on E6640A trigger 2 is a bi directional trigger port So when trigger 2 has been configured as OUTPUT type choosing External 2 as the input trigger for the current step will generate error Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Transition Time Allows you to specify the transition time for the current step The transition time is the amount of time allowed for the source to settle at the curre...

Page 2551: ...ion A 05 00 Radio Setup Allows you access to the sub menus for setting up the radio standard band and radio band link direction for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Notes No remote command front panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Radio Standard Allows access to the sub menus for selecting the radio standard and the associated radio band for use in the curre...

Page 2552: ... A 05 00 GSM EDGE Pressing this key once selects GSM EDGE as the radio standard and the current GSM EDGE band as the active channel band Pressing this key again allows access to the sub menus for selecting a different GSM EDGE band Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 05 00 P GSM Selects P GSM as the band for the current step Key Pat...

Page 2553: ...ncer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM 450 Selects GSM 450 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM 480 Selects GSM 480 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard...

Page 2554: ... access to the sub menus for selecting a different WCDMA band Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band I Selects Band I as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band II Selects Band II as the band for the current step Key ...

Page 2555: ...cer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band VII Selects Band VII as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band VIII Selects Band VIII as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard ...

Page 2556: ...cer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIII Selects Band XIII as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIV Selects Band XIV as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard ...

Page 2557: ...o Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 US PCS Selects US PCS as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Japan Cell Selects Japan Cell as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Init...

Page 2558: ...evision A 05 00 Secondary 800 Selects Secondary 800 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 400 Euro PAMR Selects 400 Euro PAMR as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05...

Page 2559: ...CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 US 2 5GHz Selects US 2 5 GHz as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 700 Public Safety Selects 700 Public Safety as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1...

Page 2560: ...0 BAND 2 Selects BAND 2 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 3 Selects BAND 3 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 4 Selects BAND 4 as the band for the current step Key Path ...

Page 2561: ...quencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 9 Selects BAND 9 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 10 Selects BAND 10 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Init...

Page 2562: ...Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 17 Selects BAND 17 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 18 Selects BAND 18 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE ...

Page 2563: ...Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 25 Selects BAND 25 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 26 Selects BAND 26 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE ...

Page 2564: ... use and accesses the LTE TDD specific channel band sub menus Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 33 Selects BAND 33 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND33 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 34 Selects BAND 34 as the band for the current step Key Path Source F...

Page 2565: ...Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND37 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 38 Selects BAND 38 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND38 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 39 Selects BAND 39 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setu...

Page 2566: ...ency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND42 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 43 Selects BAND 43 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND43 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 44 Selects BAND 44 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio...

Page 2567: ...rd TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDB Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND C Selects BAND C as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDC Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND D Selects BAND D as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAN...

Page 2568: ...lculate the downlink frequency according to a downlink formula together with selected channel band and channel number Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup RADio BAND LINK DOWN UP SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup RADio BAND LINK Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET RAD BAND LINK UP SOUR LIST STEP2 SET RAD BAND LINK Notes SCPI is su...

Page 2569: ... Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup CNFRequency double SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup CNFRequency Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET CNFR 1GHz SOUR LIST STEP2 SET CNFR Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 This SCPI is used to setup channel number or frequency setting according to current Radio Band setting If Radio Band is NONE then it s freque...

Page 2570: ...power setting lower than 130dBm on MPA GPS ports then popup warning message These are only warning messages and check is performed when RF is ON Notes The Min and Max value here defined UI settable amplitude range This range is larger than actual amplitude range with level accuracy defined in spec Dependencies The RF power is dependent on the RF output port and frequency such that the current freq...

Page 2571: ...otes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 If the selected waveform contains header which contains ARB play parameters source list sequence will automatically apply header settings of the selected waveform in that step Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Continue Previous Sets the current step to continue with playback of the waveform from the previous step When continuing the previous waveform the ARB playbac...

Page 2572: ...VWFM MSUS or specifying a full path For more information see Memory Subsystem Remote Command Only If a file of the same name already exists within ARB memory it is overwritten If you wish to load two segments of the same name you must rename one of the segments before loading it into ARB memory To rename a segment you can either use Windows File Explorer or the MMEMory COPY command NOTE When a wav...

Page 2573: ... same name already exists within ARB memory it is overwritten If you wish to load two segments of the same name you must rename one of the segments before loading it into ARB memory To rename a segment you can either use Windows File Explorer or the MEMory COPY command NOTE When a waveform file is loaded to ARB memory burst timing adjustments are made automatically based on whether or not a Multip...

Page 2574: ...location for selecting waveforms using SCPI Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB DEFault DIRectory string SOURce RADio ARB DEFault DIRectory Example SOUR RAD ARB DEF DIR D ArbFiles SOUR RAD ARB DEF DIR State Saved Persistent survives a power cycle and a preset but not saved in the instrument state Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Se...

Page 2575: ...u to remove all segments from ARB playback memory Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments in ARB Memory Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB DELete ALL Example SOUR RAD ARB DELete ALL Notes When in Sequence Analyzer mode and Include Source is Yes an attempt to delete all files from ARB memory is rejected with an error When Include Source is No and you attempt to delete all files f...

Page 2576: ...Setup Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Default Directory This key functions the same as Default Directory on page 2830 Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Segments in ARB Memory This key functions the same as Segments in ARB Memory on page 2830 Key Path Source List Sequencer Lis...

Page 2577: ...T DUR TYPE TIME SOUR LIST STEP2 SET DUR TYPE Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 Notes If Step Duration is set to Time or Play Count for the last step the last step of ARB keeps playing as if set to Continuous until the set Time has expired or until the Play Count setting is reached However you can query Error Reference source not found Source Sweeping Condition Message to find out if the curren...

Page 2578: ... Continuous Abort according to current Duration Type setting is Play Count or Duraton Time or Continuous Abort If current Duration Type is Continuous then popup error 221 Settings conflict Cannot accept time or count input when step duration type is Continuous on step Notes If Duration Time is set for the last step the last step of ARB keeps playing as if set to Continuous after set time expires H...

Page 2579: ...cur on both Internal and External2 paths Select Off will turn off trigger output Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup OUTPut TRIGger ON OFF 1 0 SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup OUTPut TRIGger Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET OUTP TRIG ON SOUR LIST STEP2 SET OUTP TRIG Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 Preset Off Range On Off Initial S ...

Page 2580: ...4 5 Frequency Channel Number freq chan num specifies the frequency in Hz or the channel number for the step The channel number and frequency are combined as one parameter that represents the frequency or channel number depending on the radio band setting If the radio band is set to NONE this value is interpreted as a frequency value in Hz If the radio band is set to a valid band this value is inte...

Page 2581: ...T SETup INPut TRIGger enum enum enum SOURce LIST SETup INPut TRIGger Example SOUR LIST SET INP TRIG IMM INT EXT2 SOUR LIST SET INP TRIG Notes The command is to setup below parameter array of whole list sequence Step Trigger enum specifies the input trigger for the step For details of the valid types of step trigger see Step Trigger on page 2804 If input parameter number exceeds the step number def...

Page 2582: ...ber of Steps As a step is setup the value entered run through several levels of validation R e m o t e C o m m a n d SOURce LIST SETup RADio BAND enum enum enum SOURce LIST SETup RADio BAND E x a m p l e SOUR LIST SET RAD BAND PGSM EGSM RGSM SOUR LIST SET RAD BAND N o t e s The command is to setup below parameter array of whole list sequence Radio Band enum specifies the radio band for the step Fo...

Page 2583: ...D37 BAND38 BAND39 BAND40 BAN D41 BAND42 BAND43 BANDA BANDB BANDC BANDD BANDE BANDF D e p e n d e n c i e s The range is 1 to 1000 which is determined by the number of steps you have configured For details see Number of Steps on page 2803 I n i t i a l S W R e v i s i o n A 09 40 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2583 ...

Page 2584: ...Channel Number parameter array of the whole List Sequencer at one time The number of array is same as step number defined in Number of Steps on page 2803 Number of Steps As a step is setup the value entered run through several levels of validation Remote Command SOURce LIST SETup CNFRequency double double double SOURce LIST SETup CNFRequency Example SOUR LIST SET CNFR 1GHz 100MHz 100MHz SOUR LIST ...

Page 2585: ...ill be updated Dependencies The range is 1 to 1000 which is determined by the number of steps you have configured For details see Number of Steps on page 2803 Initial S W Revision A 09 40 Step Configuration of Waveform parameter list Remote Command Only This SCPI command is to configure Waveform parameter array of the whole List Sequencer at one time The number of array is same as step number defi...

Page 2586: ...ation enum specifies the duration of the step The duration can be specified to be either time or play count of the ARB file associated with the step or continuous If Waveform is set to CW this value cannot be set to Play Count and an error will be generated If continuous is selected the following Time or Count value is ignored For further details of this setting see Step Duration on page 2833 If i...

Page 2587: ...r list Remote Command Only This SCPI command is to configure Output Trigger parameter array of the whole List Sequencer at one time The number of array is same as step number defined in Number of Steps on page 2803 Number of Steps As a step is setup the value entered run through several levels of validation Remote Command SOURce LIST SETup OUTPut TRIGger bool bool bool SOURce LIST SETup OUTPut TRI...

Page 2588: ...ATamarker Initial S W Revision A 14 00 BeginningOfStep Sets the output trigger type as BeginningOfStep for the whole source sequence Key Path Source List Sequencer Trigger Type Example SOUR LIST TRIG TYP BEG Notes SCPI is supported after A 14 00 Initial S W Revision A 14 00 DataMarker Sets the output trigger type as DataMarker for the whole source sequence When DataMarker is selected which marker ...

Page 2589: ...mple SOUR LIST TRIG TYPE MARK M3 Notes SCPI is supported after A 14 00 Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Marker 4 Sets the output trigger maker routing to Marker 4 for DataMarker in the whole source sequence Key Path Source List Sequencer Trigger Type DataMarker Example SOUR LIST TRIG TYPE MARK M4 Notes SCPI is supported after A 14 00 Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Manual Trigger Now Pressing this key pr...

Page 2590: ... only SCPI Returning 1 if list sequence has been initiated successfully returning 0 if not Once get 0 you can use SYST ERR to query what error happened Just like OPC this command can be blocked until event status IsSourceSweeping happens and then returns Doing so can help user s script query armed status only once during the time interval of the initiation As an ancillary SCPI of existing SCPI SOU...

Page 2591: ...f the selected window is I Q Measured Polar Graph or RMS EVM Numeric Results For details of available views in this measurement see View Display on page 2603 Within a view you can change the selected window by pressing the Next Window key Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2591 ...

Page 2592: ...ior to A 02 00 Pause Pauses a measurement after the current data acquisition is complete When Paused the label on the key changes to Resume Pressing the Resume key resumes the measurement from the point it was at when paused See Pause Resume for more details Key Path Sweep Control Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 2592 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2593: ...14 QPSK EVM Measurement System System See System on page 264 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2593 ...

Page 2594: ...e Detector There is no Trace Detector functionality supported in QPSK EVM This front panel key displays a blank menu when pressed Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 2594 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2595: ...lay See Trig Delay on page 336 External 1 See External 1 on page 1588 Trigger Level See Trigger Level on page 1589 Trig Slope See Trig Slope on page 1589 Trig Delay See Trig Delay on page 339 Zero Span Delay Comp See Zero Span Delay Comp On Off on page 1577 External 2 See External 2 on page 1590 Trigger Level See Trigger Level on page 1590 Trig Slope See Trig Slope on page 1591 W CDMA HSPA Measure...

Page 2596: ... page 1582 Trig Slope See Trigger Slope on page 1593 Trig Delay See Trig Delay on page 346 Periodic Timer See Periodic Timer Frame Trigger on page 1583 Period See Period on page 1585 Offset See Offset on page 1585 Offset Adjust Remote Command Only See Offset Adjust Remote Command Only on page 1586 Reset Offset Display See Reset Offset Display on page 1587 Sync Source See Sync Source on page 1587 O...

Page 2597: ...el on page 1590 Trig Slope See Trig Slope on page 1591 RF Burst See RF Burst on page 1591 Absolute Trigger See Absolute Trigger Level on page 1592 Trig Slope See Trigger Slope on page 1593 Trig Delay See Trig Delay on page 357 Baseband I Q See ___ on page X I Q Mag See ___ on page X Trigger Level See ___ on page X Trig Slope See ___ on page X Trig Delay See ___ on page X W CDMA HSPA Measurement Ap...

Page 2598: ...e X Q Demodulated See ___ on page X Trigger Level See ___ on page X Trig Slope See ___ on page X Trig Delay See ___ on page X Input I See ___ on page X Trigger Level See ___ on page X Trig Slope See ___ on page X Trig Delay See ___ on page X Input Q See ___ on page X Trigger Level See ___ on page X 2598 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2599: ...__ on page X Trig Slope See ___ on page X Trig Delay See ___ on page X Trigger Center Frequency See ___ on page X Trigger Bandwidth See ___ on page X Auto Holdoff See Auto Holdoff on page 1594 Auto Trig See Auto Trig on page 1594 Trig Holdoff See Trig Holdoff on page 1595 Holdoff Type See ___ on page X W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2599 ...

Page 2600: ...as it can in legacy analyzers If you want to recall all modes to their user preset file state you will need to do a User Preset after mode switching into each mode User Preset recalls mode state which can now include data like traces whereas on ESA and PSA User Preset did not affect data Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 User Preset User Preset sets the state of the currently active mode back ...

Page 2601: ...l of the User Preset files for each mode switches to the power on mode and activates the saved measurement from the power on mode User Preset file When the instrument is secured all of the user preset files are converted back to their default user preset files The User Preset function does the following Aborts the currently running measurement Switches the Mode to the power on mode Restores the Us...

Page 2602: ...e and its State You can recall this User Preset file by pressing the User Preset menu key or sending the SYST PRES USER remote command This same state is also saved by the Save State function Key Path User Preset Remote Command SYSTem PRESet USER SAVE Example SYST PRES USER SAVE Notes SYST PRES SAVE creates the same file as if the user requested a SAV or a MMEM STOR STAT except User Preset Save do...

Page 2603: ...SPlay EVMQpsk VIEW SELect POLar ERRor DISPlay EVMQpsk VIEW SELect Example DISP EVMQ VIEW ERR DISP EVMQ VIEW Couplings Changing parameter of ViewNum DISPlay EVMQpsk VIEW NSELect also changes this parameter Preset POLar State Saved Saved in instrument state Range I Q Measured Polar Vector I Q Error Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 View Selection by number Remote Command only Displays the numeri...

Page 2604: ...It does not include the settings panel or the Active Function Turning off the Meas Bar turns off the settings panel and the Active Function When the Meas Bar is off the graticule area expands to fill the area formerly occupied by the Meas Bar 2 Screen Annotation this is the annotation and annunciation around the graticule including any annotation on lines such as the display line the threshold lin...

Page 2605: ...ment Bar Key Path View Display Display Annotation Remote Command DISPlay ANNotation MBAR STATe OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay ANNotation MBAR STATe Example DISP ANN MBAR OFF Dependencies Grayed out and forced to OFF when System Display Settings Annotation is set to Off Preset On This should remain Off through a Preset when System DisplaySettings Annotation is set to Off State Saved Saved in instrument state I...

Page 2606: ...Notation SCReen STATe OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay ANNotation SCReen STATe Example DISP ANN SCR OFF Dependencies Grayed out and forced to OFF when System Display Settings Annotation is set to Off Preset On This should remain Off through a Preset when System DisplaySettings Annotation is set to Off State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Active Function Values On Off Turns...

Page 2607: ...eset On This should remain Off through a Preset when System DisplaySettings Annotation is set to Off State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Title Displays menu keys that enable you to change or clear a title on your display Key Path View Display Display Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Change Title Writes a title into the measurement name field in the bann...

Page 2608: ...TA This Is My Title This example is for Measurements other than Swept SA Both set the title to This Is My Title Notes Pressing this key cancels any active function When a title is edited the previous title remains intact it is not cleared and the cursor goes at the end so that characters can be added or BKSP can be used to go back over previous characters Preset No title measurement name instead S...

Page 2609: ... the meas local annotation settings When it is All Off it forces ScreenAnnotation Meas Bar Trace and Active Function Values settings to be OFF for all measurements in all modes This provides the security based annotation off function of previous analyzers hence it uses the legacy SCPI command When it is All Off the Screen Meas Bar Trace and Active Function Values keys under the Display Annotation ...

Page 2610: ... Notes In ESA and PSA we offer the choice of Reverse Bitmap or Reverse Metafile when saving screen images This is much like the Flat Color theme available in X Series Also if you selected Reverse Bitmap AND a black white screen image that would be much like Flat Monochrome In other words each of the X Series themes has a similar screen image type in ESA PSA But they are not identical Initial S W R...

Page 2611: ...the format of the polar vector graph display The following display options are available Vector and Constellation Vector Only Constellation Only Key Path View Display Mode WCDMA C2K 1xEVDO Remote Command DISPlay EVMQpsk VIEW 1 WINDow2 TRACe POLar VC VECTor CONStln DISPlay EVMQpsk VIEW 1 WINDow2 TRACe POLar Example DISP EVMQ VIEW WIND2 TRAC POL VECT DISP EVMQ VIEW WIND2 TRAC POL Notes Allows to spe...

Page 2612: ...x Meas Interval I Q Chips Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 I Q Chips Specifies the number of I Q chips used to display the I Q waveforms Key Path View Display Display Mode WCDMA C2K 1xEVDO Remote Command DISPlay EVMQpsk VIEW 1 WINDow2 TRACe IQCHips integer DISPlay EVMQpsk VIEW 1 WINDow2 TRACe IQCHips Example DISP EVMQ VIEW WIND2 TRAC IQCH 1001 DISP EVMQ VIEW WIND2 TRAC IQCH Couplings This par...

Page 2613: ... function Preset OFF State Saved Saved in instrument state Range On Off Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 45 Rotation Toggles the state of the rotation of the I Q polar trace If set to On the I Q polar trace is rotated by 45 degrees to provide a rectangular display Key Path View Display Display Mode WCDMA C2K 1xEVDO Remote Command DISPlay EVMQpsk VIEW 1 WINDow2 TRACe ROTQpi STATe OFF ON 0 1 DI...

Page 2614: ...VIEW WIND2 TRAC FVEC ON DISP EVMQ VIEW WIND2 TRAC FVEC Notes This is useful when you want to observe the full vector and the selected vector set by I Q Chips and Chip Offset simultaneously Preset OFF State Saved Saved in instrument state Range On Off Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 I Q Error View Provides a combination view This view consists of four windows Mag Error vs Symbol Window on pag...

Page 2615: ...or vs Symbol results Marker Trace Yes Corresponding Trace Magnitude Error trace n 3 Phase Error vs Symbol Window Provides Magnitude Error vs Symbol results Marker Trace Yes Corresponding Trace Phase Error trace n 4 EVM vs Symbol Window Provides EVM vs Symbol results W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2615 ...

Page 2616: ...Yes Corresponding Trace EVM trace n 2 Numeric Results Window Shows numeric results as the same as the numeric results of the I Q polar graph Key Path View Display Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 2616 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2617: ... power control function so code domain power analysis or power versus time measurement techniques do not provide relevant information This Power Control measurement provides a solution for 3GPP uplink conformance tests and can be used to accurately design characterize evaluate and verify 3GPP transmitters components and devices for mobile stations For more details see Power Control Measurement Des...

Page 2618: ...e used to retrieve the measurement results CONFigure PCONtrol CONFigure PCONtrol NDEFault INITiate PCONtrol FETCh PCONtrol n READ PCONtrol n MEASure PCONtrol n For more measurement related commands see the section Remote Measurement Functions on page 2642 2618 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2619: ...ACH Message burst 4 First Slot Number is an integer number presenting the first slot number in the captured data The returned value is valid in the following cases In other cases the returned value is 0 Meas Type is Slot Power and Meas Method is Chip Power Meas Type is Slot Phase DPCCH Slot Format floating If Sync Type is DPCCH the DPCCH slot format value used for synchronization is returned 0 0 S...

Page 2620: ...rst On Pwr relative to the previous data float in dB of Npreambleth PRACH preamble Npreamble 1 5 4 Post Burst Off Pwr float in dBm of Npreambleth PRACH preamble Npreamble 5 Time Offset float in chip of Npreambleth PRACH preamble Npreamble 5 1 Pre Burst Off Pwr float in dBm of PRACH Message if available Npreamble 5 2 Burst On Pwr float in dBm of PRACH Message if available Npreamble 5 3 Burst On Pwr...

Page 2621: ...degrees that represents RMS EVM of each slot excluding 25us at the beginning and tail of the slot The number of values returned is equal to the number of slots in the capture interval 12 RMS Magnitude error of slots Returns a series of floating point numbers in degrees that represents RMS Magnitude error of each slot excluding 25us at the beginning and end of the slot The number of values returned...

Page 2622: ... of the radio system The Slot Phase Measurement is always made based on synchronized chip timing The current Power Control Measurement can only measure uplink signals Therefore the Pwr Control key is active only when the Radio Device selection is MS The menu key is grayed out when BTS is chosen Key Path Meas Mode WCDMA Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Range Represents the amplitude of the lar...

Page 2623: ...appear on the softkey and query via SCPI but not changeable In such applications the softkey will be grayed out Attempting to change the value via SCPI will be ignored and no error message will be generated Preset 10 dB State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0 dB Max 20 dB Initial S W Revision A 13 00 Mixer Level Offset Mixer level offset is an advanced setting to adjust target Range at the inp...

Page 2624: ...uto Scaling Toggles the Auto Scaling function between On and Off Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay PCONtrol VIEW 1 2 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe COUPle 0 1 OFF ON DISPlay PCONtrol VIEW 1 2 WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe COUPle Example DISP PCON VIEW WIND TRAC Y SCAL COUP ON DISP PCON VIEW WIND TRAC Y SCAL COUP Notes You must be in the W CDMA mode to use this command Use INSTrument SELect...

Page 2625: ...ll Auto Man parameters in manual mode It decouples all the coupled instrument parameters and is not recommended for making measurements Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 More Information There are two types of functions that have Auto Manual modes Auto Man Active Function keys An Auto Man toggle key controls the binary state associated with an instrument parameter by toggling between Auto wher...

Page 2626: ...s You must be in the W CDMA mode to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Preset 6 MHz State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 100000 Max 8 MHz Backwards Compatibility SCPI SENSe PCONtrol BWIDth RESolution Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Filter Type Toggles the filter shapes between Gaussian and Flat flattop Key Path BW InfoBW Control Mode WCDMA Remote Command SENSe PCONtr...

Page 2627: ...the W CDMA mode to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Preset FLATtop State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Gaussian Flattop Backwards Compatibility SCPI SENSe PCONtrol BWIDth RESolution TYPE Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2627 ...

Page 2628: ...ts etc when in Continuous mode When the average count reaches the Average Hold Number the count stops incrementing but the analyzer keeps sweeping See the Trace Detector section for the averaging formula used both before and after the Average Hold Number is reached The trigger condition must be met prior to each sweep The type of trace processing for multiple sweeps is set under the Trace Detector...

Page 2629: ...the INIT CONT 0 command will place the analyzer in Single Sweep but will have no effect on the current sequence until k N at which point the current sequence will stop and the instrument will go to the idle state W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2629 ...

Page 2630: ...15 Power Control Measurement File File See File on page 258 2630 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2631: ...req The center frequency setting is the same for all measurements within a mode that is it is Meas Global Some modes are also able to share a Mode Global center frequency value If this is the case the Mode will have a Global Settings key in its Mode Setup menu The Center Freq function sets and queries the Center Frequency for the currently selected input If your analyzer has multiple inputs and yo...

Page 2632: ... SCPI command The other parameter is forced to a different value if needed to keep the Start and the Stop Frequencies within the analyzer s frequency range Preset Depends on instrument maximum frequency mode measurement and selected input See Center Frequency Presets on page 2632 and RF Center Freq on page 2634 and Ext Mix Center Freq and I Q Center Freq on page 2636 State Saved Saved in instrumen...

Page 2633: ...26 5 GHz 26 55 GHz 526 N9038A 1 805 GHz 3 6 GHz 27 0 GHz 532 16 005 GHz 32 0 GHz 32 5 GHz 543 21 505 GHz 43 0 GHz TBD 544 22 005 GHz 44 0 GHz 44 5 GHz 550 25 005 GHz 50 0 GHz 51 GHz Input 2 Model CF after Mode Preset Stop Freq after Mode Preset Max Freq can t tune above N9000A opt C75 0 7505GHz 1 5 GHz 1 58 GHz N9038A 505 MHz 1 GHz 1 000025 GHz Tracking Generator Frequency Limits N9000A only Track...

Page 2634: ...tly selected input Scope Meas Global Remote Command SENSe FREQuency RF CENTer freq SENSe FREQuency RF CENTer Example FREQ RF CENT 30 MHz Notes This command is the same in all modes but the parameter is Measurement Global So the value is independent in each mode and common across all the measurements in the mode Dependencies If the electronic soft attenuator is enabled any attempt to set Center Fre...

Page 2635: ... command is the same in all modes but the parameter is Measurement Global So the value is independent in each mode and common across all the measurements in the mode Couplings When returning to External Mixing after having been switched to one of the other inputs e g RF you will come back into the settings that you had when you left External Mixing So you will come back to the band you were in wit...

Page 2636: ...the input which is selected at the time the command is sent Note that the Center Freq function in the Frequency menu on the front panel always applies to the currently selected input Scope Meas Global Remote Command SENSe FREQuency IQ CENTer freq SENSe FREQuency IQ CENTer Example FREQ IQ CENT 30 MHz Notes This command is the same in all modes but the parameter is Measurement Global So the value is...

Page 2637: ... results in an advisory message If the equivalent SCPI command is sent this same message is generated as part of a 221 Settings conflict warning Couplings When auto coupled in a non zero span the center frequency step size is set to 10 of the span When auto coupled in zero span the center frequency step size is set to the equivalent 3 dB RBW value Preset Auto ADEMOD 1 MHz ON State Saved Saved in i...

Page 2638: ...rol mode If the current control mode is Off there is no active function and the active function is turned off Active Function Display the marker X axis value entered in the active function area displays the marker value to its full entered precision Preset OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Normal Delta Off Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02...

Page 2639: ...e Average Chip Phase Phase Discontinuity Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Couple Markers Toggles the state of the markers to be coupled On or Off When this function is true On moving any marker causes an equal X axis movement of every other marker except those located to the polar trace and Chip value of the marker located to the polar trace which is not Off including Fixed markers Equal X Ax...

Page 2640: ...MARKer 1 2 12 X real CALCulate PCONtrol MARKer 1 2 12 X Example CALC PCON MARK12 X 1000000000 CALC PCON MARK3 X Notes If no suffix is sent it uses the fundamental units for the current marker X Axis Scale If a suffix is sent that does not match the current marker X Axis Scale unit an error Invalid suffix is generated The query returns the marker s absolute X Axis value when the control mode is Nor...

Page 2641: ...the offset from the marker s reference marker in trace points when the control mode is Delta The value is returned as a real number not an integer corresponding to the translation from X Axis Scale units to trace points see Fractional Trace Points above When the marker is Off the response is Not A Number Preset After a preset all Markers are turned OFF so Marker X Axis Value query returns a Not A ...

Page 2642: ...enter Help press the Help key and press that key Key Path Front panel key Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Remote Measurement Functions This section contains the following topics Measurement Group of Commands on page 2643 Current Measurement Query Remote Command Only on page 2645 Limit Test Current Results Remote Command Only on page 2645 Data Query Remote Command Only on page 2645 Calculate ...

Page 2643: ...II is the default format for the data output Older versions of Spectrum Analysis and Phase Noise mode measurements only use ASCII The binary data formats should be used for handling large blocks of data since they are smaller and faster than the ASCII format Refer to the FORMat DATA command for more information If you need to change some of the measurement parameters from the factory default setti...

Page 2644: ... or is set to 1 If the n value is set to a value other than 1 the selected trace data results will be returned See each command for details of what types of scalar results or trace data results are available The binary data formats should be used for handling large blocks of data since they are smaller and transfer faster than the ASCII format FORMat DATA FETCh may be used to return results other ...

Page 2645: ...they are smaller and faster than the ASCII format FORMat DATA Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Current Measurement Query Remote Command Only This command returns the name of the measurement that is currently running Remote Command CONFigure Example CONF Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Limit Test Current Results Remote Command Only Queries the status of the current measurement limit test...

Page 2646: ...e DATA n COMPress BLOCk CFIT MAXimum MINimum MEAN DMEan RMS RMSCubed SAMPle SDEViation PPHase soffset length roffset rlimit Example To query the mean power of a set of GSM bursts Supply a signal that is a set of GSM bursts Select the IQ Waveform measurement in IQ Analyzer Mode Set the sweep time to acquire at least one burst Set the triggers such that acquisition happens at a known position relati...

Page 2647: ...e that is the arithmetic mean of the data point values in dB dBm for the specified region s of trace data For I Q trace data the mean of the magnitudes of the I Q pairs is returned See the following equations If the original trace data is in dB this function returns the arithmetic mean of those log values not log of the mean power which is a more useful value The mean of the log is the better meas...

Page 2648: ... for Specified Region s where Xi is the complex value representation of an I Q pair Xi its conjugate complex number and n is the number of I Q pairs in the specified region s Once you have the rms value for a region of trace data linear or I Q you may want to calculate the mean power You must convert this rms value peak volts to power in dBm SAMPle returns the first data value x y pair for the spe...

Page 2649: ...fied by data point in PPHase The rms power of the specified region may be expressed as Power 10 x log 10 x RMS I Q value 10 The RMS I Q value peak volts is where Xi is the complex value representation of an I Q pair Xi its conjugate complex number and n is the number of I Q pairs in the specified region The arithmetic mean phase of the specified region may be expressed as where Yi is the unwrapped...

Page 2650: ...be compressed into one value This parameter has a default value equal to the current trace length roffset repeat offset is an optional real number It is in seconds for time domain traces and is a dimensionless index 0 to Npoints 1 for frequency domain traces It defines the beginning of the next field of trace elements to be compressed This is relative to the beginning of the previous field This pa...

Page 2651: ...ncy TIME Example Example for Swept SA measurement in Spectrum Analyzer Mode CALC DATA4 PEAK 40 10 FREQ GTDL This will identify the peaks of trace 4 that are above 40 dBm with excursions of at least 10 dB The peaks are returned in order of increasing frequency starting with the lowest frequency Only the peaks that are above the display line are returned Query Results 1 With FORMat DATA REAL 32 sele...

Page 2652: ...forming real time overlapped FFTs at the hardware layer using software for basic post processing before returning the result to the user The upshot of this approach is improved throughput for user applications that require many sequential power measurements The analysis bandwidth of FP2 is limited by the licenses in the instrument but its maximum overall analysis bandwidth per acquisition is 40 MH...

Page 2653: ... the configuration string Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Acquisition Time Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF AcquisitionTime 0 002 Notes The acquisition time parameter sets the time in which the entire spectrum is measured An increase in the acquisition time yields an improvement in measurement repeatability Preset 0 001 s Range 0 s to 1 s Default Unit Time s Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Center Frequency Ex...

Page 2654: ...is subtracted from all measurements This effectively lowers the noise floor of the analyzer When noise correction is enabled the first measurement for a given set of input parameters will take extra time This is because the analyzer takes an extra acquisition with the RF input disconnected from the analyzer s front end to measure the noise of just the analyzer The measured noise floor is stored in...

Page 2655: ...cause two acquisitions rather than a single acquisition are made when spur suppression is enabled the measurement time will always be slower when spur suppression is enabled Preset False Range True enable spur suppression or False disable spur suppression Default Unit Boolean Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Electronic Attenuator Bypass Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF ElecAttBypass False Notes The electron...

Page 2656: ...F paths For example if the signal is less than 25 MHz wide then the user can select the B25M path to take advantage of additional filtering on this analog IF path Preset B40M Range B10M B25M B40M Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Include Power Spectrum Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF IncludePowerSpectrum True Notes The power spectrum parameter allows the user to read data on the entire spectrum for diagnost...

Page 2657: ...Off Low Full Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Resolution Bandwidth Mode Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF PreAmpMode Low Notes The resolution bandwidth mode parameter allows the user to choose whether the RBW filter is automatically or manually set The BestSpeed value minimizes measurement time while the Narrowest value minimizes RBW size minimum of two FFT bins per RBW To manually specify an RBW set this pa...

Page 2658: ...Revision A 14 00 Trigger Level Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF TriggerLevel 2 Notes The trigger level parameter sets the voltage value at which an external trigger is detected Preset 1 2 V Range 5 to 5 V Default Unit Volts Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Trigger Slope Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF TriggerSlope Negative Notes The trigger slope parameter indicates the direction of the edge trigger voltage for ...

Page 2659: ...efault Unit Seconds Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Signal Input Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF SignalInput Fp50MHzCW Notes The signal input parameter allows the user to select between using the main RF input or the internal analyzer reference CW signal of 50 MHz Preset FpMainRf Range FpMainRf Fp50MHzCW Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Use Preselector Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF UsePreSelector True Notes The ...

Page 2660: ...filter weighs all frequencies within the bandwidth equally The root raised cosine filter has an associated shape parameter defined by the FilterAlpha parameter All array parameters should have the same number of elements Alternatively if all the elements are the same value a single value with no square brackets can be used to define the parameter Preset IBW Range IBW RRC Initial S W Revision A 14 ...

Page 2661: ...ers should have the same number of elements Alternatively if all the elements are the same value a single value with no square brackets can be used to define the parameter Preset BandPower Range BandPower BandDensity PeakPower PeakFrequency XdBBandwidth OccupiedBandwidth Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Channel Offset Frequency Array Example CALC FPOW POW1 DEF OffsetFrequency 5e6 0 5e6 Notes The offse...

Page 2662: ...power relative to the peak channel power over which the bandwidth is calculated The parameter value must be a negative number Preset 3 01 Range 200 to 0 dB Default Unit dB Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Define Fast Power Measurement Query Remote Command Only The DEFine command is used to retrieve a list of all defined parameters in an ASCII string format M o d e All R e m o t e C o m m a n d CALCula...

Page 2663: ...setFrequency 0 Function BandPower FilterType IBW FilterAlpha 0 22 OccupiedBandwidthPercent 0 99 XdBBandwidth 3 01 DoNoiseCorrection False DoSpurSuppression False MeasurementMethod HardwareFFT IncludePowerSpectrum Fals e TriggerDelay 0 TriggerLevel 1 2 TriggerSlope Positive TriggerSource Free TriggerTimeout 1 I n i t i a l S W R e v i s i o n A 14 00 Configure Fast Power Measurement Remote Command ...

Page 2664: ... separated ASCII values where m corresponds to the number of bandwidths defined 1 Declared function return in the 1st specified channel 2 Declared function return in the 2nd specified channel m Declared function return in the last specified channel The INIT and FETC command sequence performs the same functionality of a single CALC FPOW POW n query Units of the returned values are dependent on the ...

Page 2665: ...oads and to visibly inspect the spectrum Mode All Remote Command CALCulate FPOWer POWer 1 2 999 READ2 Example CALC FPOW POW1 READ2 Notes Option FP2 is required Note Spectrum data is only returned if the IncludePowerSpectrum parameter is set to True If IncludePowerSpectrum is False the number of spectrum points will be zero 0 Units of the returned values are dependent on the Function parameter per ...

Page 2666: ...ata is output in the current Y Axis unit When the data format is INTeger data is output in units of m dBm 001 dBm The INT 32 format returns binary 32 bit integer values in internal units m dBm in a definite length block Dependencies Sending a data format spec with an invalid number for example INT 48 generates no error The analyzer simply uses the default 8 for ASCii 32 for INTeger 32 for REAL Sen...

Page 2667: ...e DATA CALCulate DATA n and FETCh SANalyzer n commands and queries By definition any command that says it uses FORMat DATA uses any format supported by FORMat DATA The NORMal order is a byte sequence that begins with the most significant byte MSB first and ends with the least significant byte LSB last in the sequence 1 2 3 4 SWAPped order is when the byte sequence begins with the LSB first and end...

Page 2668: ...hannel This format is used in the following two cases 1 Meas Type is Slot Power AND Meas Method is Chip Power 2 Meas Type is Slot Phase Key Path Meas Setup Slot Power Meas Mode WCDMA Remote Command SENSe PCONtrol SLOT FORMat AUTO SF0 SF1 SF2 SF3 SF4 SF5 SENSe PCONtrol SLOT FORMat Example PCON SLOT FORM SF0 PCON SLOT FORM Notes You must be in the W CDMA mode to use this command Use INSTrument SELec...

Page 2669: ...ATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe PCONtrol SSLot STATe Example PCON SSL NUMB 5 PCON SSL NUMB PCON SSL ON PCON SSL Notes Turn first slot number detection mode on or off Dependencies The menu key is grayed out when device is MS and Sync Type is PRACH Message Preset 0 OFF State Saved Saved in instrument state Range 0 to 14 Min 0 Max 14 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Slot Offset Specifies the number of chip...

Page 2670: ... CALCulate PCONtrol SLOT DELay Example CALC PCON SLOT DEL 96 0 CALC PCON SLOT DEL Notes You must be in the W CDMA mode to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Preset 96 0 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0 0 Max CALCulate PCONtrol SLOT LENGth CALCulate PCONtrol SLOT INTerval Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Meas Intvl Specifies the number of chips to be used as the ...

Page 2671: ...trol SLOT INTerval or 768 0 larger one Max 25600 0 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Meas Method Enables you to access the Meas Method Menu to select the data acquisition method Waveform or Chip Power WAVeform Measures and performs a power calculation based on the waveform raw data of A D This means a raw measurement under the specific BW filter type and Capture Interval CPOWer Measures and pe...

Page 2672: ...o RRC Filter State changes depending on the Meas Method When Meas Method is changed to Chip Power RRC Filter State is set to ON and when Meas Method is changed to Waveform it is set to OFF State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Auto On Off Readback Text On Off Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 RRC Filter Auto Toggles the root raised cosine RRC Filter Auto mode On and Off Mode WCDMA Remote...

Page 2673: ...hip Power RRC Filter State is set to ON and when Meas Method is changed to Waveform it is set to OFF Preset 0 State Saved Saved in instrument state Range On Off Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Capture Interval Accesses a menu that enables you to select the number of frames for data acquisition Key Path Meas Setup Mode WCDMA Notes For consistency this parameter must be controlled with a float...

Page 2674: ...e 8 Frames cannot be set menu key is grayed out when MeasType is SlotPhase Couplings See Dependencies Preset 4 0 State Saved Saved in instrument state Range 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Scramble Code Sets the mobile station MS scramble code for synchronization When this key is selected a Hexadecimal Input menu appears Key Path Meas Setup Mode WCDMA Remote Command SENSe PCO...

Page 2675: ...LTer RRC ALPHa real SENSe PCONtrol FILTer RRC ALPHa Example PCON FILT ALPH 0 22 PCON FILT ALPH Notes You must be in the W CDMA mode to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Preset 0 220 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0 01 Max 0 50 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Chip Rate Changes the chip rate for the measurement Key Path Meas Setup Advanced Mode WCDMA Remote Comm...

Page 2676: ...15 Power Control Measurement Meas Min 3 456 MHz Max 4 224 MHz Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 2676 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2677: ...15 Power Control Measurement Mode Mode See Mode on page 232 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2677 ...

Page 2678: ...ement and gets the mode to a consistent state with all of the default couplings set Backwards Compatibility Notes In the X Series the legacy Factory Preset has been replaced with Mode Preset which only presets the currently active mode not the entire instrument In the X Series the way to preset the entire instrument is by using System Restore System Defaults All which behaves essentially the same ...

Page 2679: ...les except the persistent ones Restore Mode Defaults resets ALL the Mode variables and all the Meas global and Meas local variables including the persistent ones Type Of Preset SCPI Command Front Panel Access Auto Couple COUPle ALL Auto Couple front panel key Meas Preset CONFigure Measurement Meas Setup Menu Mode Preset SYSTem PRESet Mode Preset green key Restore Mode Defaults INSTrument DEFault M...

Page 2680: ...nt Mode Preset Power On Mode Preset SYSTem PON TYPE MODE System Menu Power On User Preset SYSTem PON TYPE USER System Menu Power On Last State SYSTem PON TYPE LAST System Menu 2680 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2681: ...15 Power Control Measurement Mode Setup Mode Setup See Mode Setup on page 251 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2681 ...

Page 2682: ...15 Power Control Measurement Print Print See Print on page 263 2682 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Page 2683: ... Trace State State_ Save Recall Screen Screen_ Save Recall Amplitude Corrections Ampcor_ Import Export Traces Trace_ Import Export Limit Lines LLine_ Import Export Measurement Result MeasR_ Import Export Capture Buffer CapBuf_ Import Export A four digit number is appended to the prefix to create a unique file name The numbering sequence starts at 0000 within each Mode for each file type and update...

Page 2684: ...e fred_0000 csv Although 0000 is used in the example above the number that is used is actually the current number in the Meas Results sequence that is the number that would have been used if you had not entered your own file name If the filename you entered ends with _dddd where d any number making it look just like an auto file name then the next auto file name picks up where you left off with th...

Page 2685: ...the sense that you can recall a state file from any X Series model number and any version of X Series software This is only possible if part of the recalling process goes through a limiting step after recalling the mode settings at least for settings that may vary with version number model number option and license differences If you try to recall a state file onto an instrument with less capabili...

Page 2686: ...e SA for the Spectrum Analyzer See More Information on page 2687 Key Path Recall Mode All Remote Command MMEMory LOAD STATe filename Example MMEM LOAD STAT myState state This recalls the file myState state on the default path Example MMEM LOAD STAT MyStateFile state This loads the state file data on the default file directory path into the instrument state Notes When you pick a file to recall the ...

Page 2687: ...hen you use State to save and recall traces any trace whose data must be preserved should be placed in View or Blank mode before saving The following table describes the Trace Save and Recall possibilities You want to recall state and one trace s data leaving other traces unaffected Save Trace State from 1 trace Make sure that no other traces are updating they should all be in View or Blank mode w...

Page 2688: ...such as Look In Look In The Look In field shows the path from which the file will be recalled and allows you to change the path using the up and down arrow keys to navigate to other paths the Enter key to open a directory and the Backspace key to go back one directory The Look In field first uses the last path from the Save As dialog Save In path for that same file type There is no softkey for dir...

Page 2689: ...uses the current Open request to be cancelled The ESC key does the same thing Key Path Recall State Notes Brings up the Open dialog for recalling a State Save Type Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Edit Register Names You may enter a custom name on any of the Register keys to help you remember what you are using that state to save To do this press the Edit Register Names key choose the registe...

Page 2690: ... Path Recall State Example RCL 1 Range 1 16 from front panel 1 128 from SCPI Readback Date and time with seconds resolution are displayed on the key OR A custom name of up to 30 characters entered using the Save State Edit Register Names key OR empty if no prior save operation has been performed to this register Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision Prior to A 11 00 Regist...

Page 2691: ...egister Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision Prior to A 11 00 Sequences These keys allow you to import a Tab separated or txt file that will automatically setup all the parameters required for building a Sequence The parameters will automatically be loaded into the Stated Sequencer Once selected in order to import the selected Sequence Type you must select the Open key in...

Page 2692: ...lication for manipulating csv files and then import it Importing Data loads measurement data from the specified file into the specified or default destination depending on the data type selected Selecting an Import Data menu key will not actually cause the importing to occur since the analyzer still needs to know from where to get the data Pressing the Open key in this menu brings up the Open dial...

Page 2693: ...n other measurements this key is grayed out Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Open When you press Open the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu entitled File Open This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse The Tab and Arrow keys can also be used for dialog navigation See From File on page 2687in Recall State for a fu...

Page 2694: ...The SWEEPING bit is set The MEASURING bit is set Backwards Compatibility Notes For Spectrum Analysis mode in ESA and PSA the Restart hardkey and the INITiate RESTart command restart trace averages displayed average count reset to 1 for a trace in Clear Write but did not restart Max Hold and Min Hold In the X Series the Restart hardkey and the INITiate RESTart command restart not only Trace Average...

Page 2695: ...ndition is met and the analyzer stops sweeping once that sweep has completed However with Average Hold Number 1 and at least one trace set to Trace Average Max Hold or Min Hold SA Measurement or Averaging on most other measurements multiple sweeps data acquisitions are taken for a single measurement The trigger condition must be met prior to each sweep The sweep is stopped when the average count k...

Page 2696: ...ings that are affected by Mode Preset as well as the additional settings affected by Restore Mode Defaults all of the Mode s settings In addition all of the settings of the Input Output system are included even though they are outside of the Mode s state because they are needed to restore the complete setup Persistent System settings for example Verbose SCPI are not affected by either Mode Preset ...

Page 2697: ...ly ignored The command is sequential Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 To File When you press To File the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu entitled Save As This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse The Tab and Arrow keys can also be used for dialog navigation The Listed below are the functions of the various fie...

Page 2698: ...e using the File Name key See the Quick Save on page 2683 documentation for more on the automatic file naming algorithm When you press the File Name key the analyzer displays the Alpha Editor Use the knob to choose the letter to add and the front panel Enter key to add the letter to the file name The BK character moves you back and the FW character moves you forward in the filename The Select key ...

Page 2699: ...lid register number an error message is generated 222 Data out of range Invalid register label number label is a string from 0 to 30 characters in length If a label exceeds 30 characters an error message is generated 150 String data error Label clipped to 30 characters label of length 0 erases the custom label and restores the default time and date label E g MMEM REG STAT LAB 1 Dependencies N9060A...

Page 2700: ...tance Although these 16 registers are the only registers available from the front panel there are 128 state registers available in the instrument Registers 17 128 are only available from the SCPI interface using the SAV command There is one set of 128 state registers in the instrument not one set for each Mode When a state is saved the Mode it was saved from is saved with it then when it is recall...

Page 2701: ...A custom name of up to 30 characters entered using the Edit Register Names key OR empty if no prior save operation has been performed to this register Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Modified at S W Revision A 11 00 Mass Storage Catalog Remote Command Only Key path SCPI Only Remote Command MMEMory CATalog directory_name Notes The string must be a valid logical path Queries disk usage informa...

Page 2702: ...second parameter specifies the destination The second form has four parameters In this form the first and third parameters specify the source The second and fourth parameters specify the directories The first pair of parameters specifies the source The second pair specifies the destination An error is generated if the source doesn t exist or the destination file already exists This command will ge...

Page 2703: ...ame data It loads data into the file file_ name data is in 488 2 block format file_name is string data The query form is MMEMory DATA file_name with the response being the associated data in block format Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Mass Storage Make Directory Remote Command Only Key path SCPI Only Remote Command MMEMory MDIRectory directory_name Notes The string must be a valid logical p...

Page 2704: ...I Only Remote Command MMEMory RDIRectory directory_name Notes The string must be a valid logical path Removes a directory The directory_name parameter specifies the directory name to be removed All files and directories under the specified directory shall also be removed This command will generate an access denied error if the folder is a restricted folder e g C Windows or is in a restricted folde...

Page 2705: ...g algorithm The default path for all Sequence Files is My Documents Sequences Key Path Save Sequences Mode All Notes Brings up Save As dialog for saving a Sequence Save Type Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Data Export Exporting a data file stores data from the current measurement to mass storage files The Export Menu only contains data types that are supported by the current measurement Since the com...

Page 2706: ...ilename Example MMEM STOR RES MTAB myResults csv Saves the results from the current marker table to the file myResults csv in the current path MMEM STOR RES PTAB myResults csv Saves the results from the current peak table to the file myResults csv in the current path MMEM STOR RES SPEC myResults csv Saves the results from the current Spectrogram display to the file myResults csv in the current pat...

Page 2707: ...as Results file format Imagine that at the point where a Marker Table Meas Result is requested the following screen is showing Then the Meas Results file when opened would show the following data MeasurementR esult Swept SA A 01 40_R0017 N9020A 526 B25 PFR P26 EA3 1 Result Type Marker Table Ref Level 0 Number of Points 1001 Sweep Time 0 0662666 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2707 ...

Page 2708: ...igger Level 1 2 Trigger Slope Positive Trigger Delay 1 00E 06 Phase Noise Optimization Fast Swept If Gain Low FFT If Gain Autorange RF Coupling AC FFT Width 411900 Ext Ref 10000000 Input RF RF Calibrator Off Attenuation 10 Ref Level Offset 0 External Gain 0 X Axis Units Hz Y Axis Units dBm DATA MKR MODE TR C SCL X Y FUNCTI ON FUNCTIO N WIDTH FUNCTI ON VALUE FUNCTI ON UNIT 1 Normal 1 Freque ncy 2 2...

Page 2709: ... 00 0 None 10 Normal 3 Freque ncy 1 1454E 10 75 1 61 Band Density 1 3250E 06 138 97 3 dBm Hz 11 Off 1 Freque ncy 0 0000E 00 0 Off 0 0000E 00 0 None 12 Off 1 Freque ncy 0 0000E 00 0 Off 0 0000E 00 0 None The numbers appear in the file exactly as they appear onscreen If it says 11 454 GHz onscreen then in the file it is 11 454E 09 The metadata header is very similar to the metadata used in the trace...

Page 2710: ... Peak Threshold State On Off Peak Excursion Peak Excursion State On Off Display Line Peak Readout All AboveDL BelowDL Peak Sort Freq Amptd These fields are then followed by the data for the Peak Table itself Note that the label for the Frequency column changes to Time in 0 span Here is what the table for the above display looks like MeasurementResult Swept SA A 01 40_R0017 N9020A 526 B25 PFR P26 E...

Page 2711: ...xis Scale Lin PreAmp State Off PreAmp Band Low Trigger Source Free Trigger Level 1 2 Trigger Slope Positive Trigger Delay 1 00E 06 Phase Noise Optimization Fast Swept If Gain Low FFT If Gain Autorange RF Coupling AC FFT Width 411900 Ext Ref 10000000 Input RF RF Calibrator Off Attenuation 10 Ref Level Offset 0 External Gain 0 X Axis Units Hz Y Axis Units dBm Peak Threshold 85 Peak Threshold State O...

Page 2712: ... 05 60 89 16 9 5920E 05 60 90 17 18 19 20 Spectrogram This section discusses the Spectrogram Results file format The Spectrogram choice only appears if option EDP is licensed The Spectrogram results are the same as a Trace data export except that instead of having just one trace s data all 300 traces appear one after the other Each trace has its own data mark the data for Spectrogram Trace 0 follo...

Page 2713: ...xample if the absolute start time is 13 23 45 678 on January 30 2012 this row would look like Start Time 20120130132345678 NOTE The resolution of the absolute time stored is 1 ms which matches up with the fact that the fastest sweep time is also 1 ms However there is no specification for the absolute accuracy of the clock in the analyzer nor is there any facility provided to allow the user to set ...

Page 2714: ...ult file for the above display Note the start time of 20120425142808700 showing in the last row before the first DATA row and the relative time of 5 299231048 showing in the first DATA row Result Type Spectrogram MeasResult Swept SA A 11 00 01 N9020A 503 508 513 526 ALL ALV B1C B1X B25 B2X B40 BAB BBA CR3 CRP DP2 DRD EA3 EDP EMC EP1 ERC ESC ESP EXM FSA HBA K03 LFE MPB P03 P08 P13 P26 PFR RTL RTS S...

Page 2715: ... Math Oper1 Trace5 Trace Math Oper2 Trace6 Trace Math Offset 0 Trace Name Trace1 X Axis Units Hz Y Axis Units dBm Start Time 20120425142808700 DATA 5 299231048 5999984415 76 34749519 5999984440 77 28097006 5999984465 75 32317869 5999984490 73 64417681 5999984515 72 67154604 o o o 6000009315 77 94423277 6000009340 79 51829697 6000009365 78 46108961 6000009390 78 46108957 6000009415 76 59570596 DATA...

Page 2716: ...12 5999984440 75 76485645 5999984465 76 67718717 5999984490 78 79238489 5999984515 83 72680212 o o o 6000009315 71 3942461 6000009340 72 28308332 6000009365 73 92684489 6000009390 75 45548832 6000009415 75 17904815 Capture Buffer Allows you to store captured data for reuse in demod measurements using Save Recall functionality for Capture Buffer Capture Buffer is saved and loaded as IQ Data with pr...

Page 2717: ...or dialog navigation See To File on page 2697 in Save State for a full description of this dialog and menu The default path for saving files is For all of the Trace Data Files My Documents mode name data traces For all of the Limit Data Files My Documents mode name data limits For all of the Measurement Results Data Files My Documents mode name data measurement name results For all of the Capture ...

Page 2718: ...s saved showing the menus that were on the screen before going into the Save menus The save is performed immediately and does not wait until the measurement is complete After you have completed the save the Quick Save front panel key lets you quickly repeat the last save performed using an auto named file with the current screen data For versions previous to A 01 55 if you initiate a screen image ...

Page 2719: ...otes In ESA and PSA we offer the choice of Reverse Bitmap or Reverse Metafile when saving screen images This is much like the Flat Color theme available in X Series Also if you selected Reverse Bitmap AND a black white screen image that would be much like Flat Monochrome In other words each of the X Series themes has a similar screen image type in ESA PSA But they are not identical Initial S W Rev...

Page 2720: ...s Save As the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu entitled Save As This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse The Tab and Arrow keys can also be used for dialog navigation See To File on page 2697 in Save State for a full description of this dialog and menu The default path for Screen Images is My Documents mode name sc...

Page 2721: ... in the idle state INIT IMM in ESA PSA Spectrum Analysis Mode does an implied ABORt In some other PSA Modes INIT IMM is ignored if not in the idle state The X Series follows the ESA PSA SA Mode model which may cause some Modes to have compatibility problems Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 More Information See Restart on page 2694 for details on the INIT IMMediate Restart function If you are ...

Page 2722: ...on front panel to indicate out of scope Non forceful means user still can change this setting by SCPI but cannot change on front panel When set to OFF will make source leave list sequencer and this setting will be black out and take effect immediately When the RF Output is ON an RF annunciator is displayed in the system settings panel When the RF Output is turned Off the RF annunciator is cleared ...

Page 2723: ...y and waveform etc When the source list sequence playing is complete the last step keeps playing and user can use this command to change the list sequence last step s output power The multiport adapter RFIO TX ports and GPS ports cannot ensure power accuracy when power setting is lower than 130dBm this power setting value is defined by the sum of RF Power setting and related amplitude correction v...

Page 2724: ...entered power Where reference power equals the original RF Power entered under Source Amplitude RF Power and set as the reference power entered power equals a new value entered under Source Amplitude Amptd Offset In addition the displayed power value is the same as a new value entered under Source Amplitude RF Power If Power Ref is set to ON with a reference value set entering a value under Source...

Page 2725: ... current output power Preset 0 00 dBm OFF Min 125 00 dBm Max 10 00 dBm Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Amptd Offset Allows you to specify the RF output power offset value When the amplitude offset is set to zero 0 and you set a new offset value positive or negative the displayed amplitude value will change as follows and the RF output power will not change Displayed value output power offset value Wh...

Page 2726: ...n page 2802 is set to ON the list sequencer controls the source output and this key will be grayed out And this setting will be none forceful grey out on front panel to indicate out of scope Non forceful means user still can change this setting by SCPI but cannot change manually on front panel When setto Off will make source leave list sequencer and this setting will be black out and take effect i...

Page 2727: ...t frequency Couplings The frequency value is coupled to the current channel band and number such that updates to the band and number will update the frequency value to the corresponding absolute frequency Preset 1 00 GHz If license F1A or 5WC is present the default Center Frequency should be 2 412GHz Min 10 00 MHz Max Hardware Dependant Option 503 3 6 GHz Option 504 3 8 GHz Option 506 6 00 GHz For...

Page 2728: ...ss than sign to indicate the frequency is above or below the channel number Preset 1 Min Please refer to the tables below for the valid ranges Max Please refer to the tables below for the valid ranges Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM EDGE Channel Number Ranges Band Link Device Range Frequency MHz P GSM Uplink MS 1 n 124 890 0 0 2 n Downlink BS 1 n 124 935 0 0 2 n E GSM Uplink MS 0 n 124 975 n 1023...

Page 2729: ... Band II Downlink 412 n 687 9662 n 9938 n 5 1850 1 n 5 Uplink 12 n 287 350 n 425 n 5 1850 1 n 5 Band III Downlink 1162 n 1513 n 5 1575 Uplink 937 n 1288 n 5 1525 Band IV Downlink 537 n 1738 1887 n 2087 n 5 1805 n 5 1735 1 Uplink 1312 n 1513 1662 n 1862 n 5 1450 n 5 1380 1 Band V Downlink 1007 n 1087 4357 n 4458 n 5 670 1 n 5 Uplink 782 n 862 4132 n 4233 n 5 670 1 n 5 Band VI Downlink 1037 n 1062 4...

Page 2730: ...767 n 5 21 n 5 39 9 Band XIV Downlink 4117 n 4143 4167 n 4192 n 5 63 n 5 72 9 Uplink 3892 n 3918 3942 n 3967 n 5 12 n 5 2 1 Band XIX Downlink 712 n 763 787 n 837 n 5 735 n 5 720 1 Uplink 312 n 363 387 n 437 n 5 770 n 5 755 1 CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Channel Number Ranges Band Link Device Range Frequency MHz US Cellular Uplink MS reverse link 1 N 799 991 N 1023 1024 N 1323 0 030 N 825 000 0 030 N 1023 825 ...

Page 2731: ...N 1536 479 000 0 020 N 1792 479 000 Downlink BS forward link 1 N 400 472 N 871 1039 N 1473 1536 N 1715 1792 N 2016 0 025 N 1 460 000 0 025 N 472 420 000 0 020 N 1024 461 010 0 025 N 1536 489 000 0 020 N 1792 489 000 IMT 2000 Band Uplink MS reverse link 0 N 1199 1920 000 0 050 N Downlink BS forward link 0 N 1199 2100 000 0 050 N Upper 700 MHz Band Uplink MS reverse link 0 N 240 776 000 0 050 N Down...

Page 2732: ...k MS reverse link 1 N 400 472 N 871 1536 N 1715 0 025 N 1 450 000 0 025 N 472 410 000 0 025 N 1536 479 000 Downlink BS forward link Downlink BS forward link Downlink BS forward link 1 N 400 472 N 871 1536 N 1715 0 025 N 1 460 000 0 025 N 472 420 000 0 025 N 1536 489 000 800 PAMR Uplink MS reverse link 0 N 239 870 0125 0 025 N Downlink BS forward link 0 N 239 915 0125 0 025 N LTE FDD Channel Number...

Page 2733: ...949 1427 9 22750 22750 22949 12 729 5010 5010 5179 699 23010 23010 23179 13 746 5180 5180 5279 777 23180 23180 23279 14 758 5280 5280 5379 788 23280 23280 23379 17 734 5730 5730 5849 704 23730 23730 23849 18 860 5850 5850 5999 815 23850 23850 23999 19 875 6000 6000 6149 830 24000 24000 24149 20 791 6150 6150 6449 832 24150 24150 24449 21 1495 9 6450 6450 6599 1447 9 24450 24450 24599 24 1525 7700 ...

Page 2734: ...38650 38650 39649 41 2496 39650 39650 41589 2496 39650 39650 41589 42 3400 41590 41590 43589 3400 41590 41590 43589 43 3600 43590 43590 45589 3600 43590 43590 45589 Note The channel numbers that designate carrier frequencies so close to the operating band edges that the carrier extends beyond the operating band edge shall not be used This implies that the first 7 15 25 50 75 and 100 channel number...

Page 2735: ...use 5 2 b 1850 1910 MHz 1930 1990 MHz 9254 to 9546 9654 to 9946 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 c 1910 1930 MHz 9554 to 9646 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 d 2570 2620 MHz 12854 to 13096 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 e 2300 2400 MHz 11504 to 11996 For operation in frequency band as defined in subclause 5 2 f 188...

Page 2736: ...AND24 BAND25 BAND26 BAND27 BAND28 BAND31 BAND33 BAND34 BAND35 BAND36 BAND37 BAND38 BAND39 BAND40 BAND41 BAND42 BAND43 BAND44 BANDA BANDB BANDC BANDD BANDE BANDF SOURce FREQuency CHANnels BAND Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PGSM Notes Set this setting to NONE will grey out Channel on page 2727 Channel Initial S W Revision A 05 00 None Selects no radio standard for use When you have selected the radio ...

Page 2737: ...1800 Selects DCS 1800 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND DCS1800 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 PCS 1900 Selects PCS 1900 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PCS1900 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM 450 Selects GSM 450 as the active channe...

Page 2738: ...the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND GSM700 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 T GSM 810 Selects T GSM 810 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND T GSM810 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 WCDMA Sets WCDMA as the radio standard for use and accesses the W C...

Page 2739: ...el band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDIII Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band IV Selects Band IV as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDIV Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band V Selects Band V as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio S...

Page 2740: ...nnel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDVIII Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band IX Selects Band IX as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDIX Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band X Selects Band X as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radi...

Page 2741: ...p Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDXIII Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIV Selects Band XIV as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDXIV Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIX Selects Band XIX as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN...

Page 2742: ...EVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PCS Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Japan Cell Selects Japan Cell as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND JAPAN Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Korean PCS Selects Korean PCS as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ...

Page 2743: ...R FREQ CHAN BAND UPPER Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Secondary 800 Selects Secondary 800 as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND SECOND Initial S W Revision A 05 00 400 Euro PAMR Selects 400 Euro PAMR as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ ...

Page 2744: ...xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND PCS1DOT9G Initial S W Revision A 05 00 AWS Selects AWS as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND AWS Initial S W Revision A 05 00 US 2 5GHz Selects US 2 5 GHz as the active channel band Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND...

Page 2745: ...dio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 1 Selects BAND 1 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND1 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 2 Selects BAND 2 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND2 Initial S W Revision A 09...

Page 2746: ...09 50 BAND 6 Selects BAND 6 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND6 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 7 Selects BAND 7 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND7 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 8 Selects BAND 8 as the band for the cu...

Page 2747: ...50 BAND 11 Selects BAND 11 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND11 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 12 Selects BAND 12 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND12 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 13 Selects BAND 13 as the band for t...

Page 2748: ... 50 BAND 18 Selects BAND 18 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND18 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 19 Selects BAND 19 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND19 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 20 Selects BAND 20 as the band for ...

Page 2749: ... 50 BAND 25 Selects BAND 25 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND25 Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 26 Selects BAND 26 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND26 Initial S W Revision A 12 53 BAND 27 Selects BAND 27 as the band for ...

Page 2750: ...standard for use and accesses the LTE TDD specific channel band sub menus Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 33 Selects BAND 33 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND33 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 34 Selects BAND 34 as the band for the current step Key P...

Page 2751: ...p Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND37 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 38 Selects BAND 38 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND38 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 39 Selects BAND 39 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Se...

Page 2752: ...cy Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND42 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 43 Selects BAND 43 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND43 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 44 Selects BAND 44 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TD...

Page 2753: ...dard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDB Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND C Selects BAND C as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDC Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND D Selects BAND D as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND B...

Page 2754: ...Radio Setup Remote Command SOURce RADio BAND LINK DOWN UP SOURce RADio BAND LINK Example SOUR RAD BAND LINK UP Preset DOWN Range DOWN UP Backwards Compatibility SCPI SOURce RADio DEVice BTS MS SOURce RADio DEVice Backwards Compatibility Notes BTS maps to the Downlink frequency MS maps to the Uplink frequency Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Set Reference Frequency This key allows you to set the freque...

Page 2755: ...d is grayed out when the List Sequencer is turned ON Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Freq Reference This key allows you to toggle the state of the frequency reference When the frequency reference state is ON an annunciator is displayed on the main source view to indicate this state to the user When you use a frequency reference the signal generator outputs a frequency that is set relative to the refe...

Page 2756: ...l change as follows and the RF output frequency will not change Displayed value output frequency offset value Where output frequency equals the original frequency entered under Source Frequency Frequency offset value equals the value entered under Source Frequency Freq Offset When the frequency offset is set to a value other than zero 0 and you enter a new frequency value under Source Frequency Fr...

Page 2757: ...ttings panel When the ARB is turned Off the MOD annunciator is cleared Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB STATe ON OFF 1 0 SOURce RADio ARB STATe Example SOUR RAD ARB OFF SOUR RAD ARB Notes If the ARB is ON a user then loads or deletes another file to ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The waveform...

Page 2758: ...re information about this adjustment Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB WAVeform string SOURce RADio ARB WAVeform Example SOUR RAD ARB WAV test_waveform bin Notes If intended waveform is not in the memory yet then issuing this command by SCPI will invoke ARB loading operation first which involves a delay of unpredictable length So this command shou...

Page 2759: ... ARB Select Waveform Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Load Segment To ARB Memory Allows you to load the selected file into ARB memory On the front panel you select the file for loading to the ARB memory by highlighting the desired file in the list Using the SCPI command you specify the file name on the HDD NVWFM none volatile storage MSUS Mass Storage Unit Specifier is supported in the memory subsyste...

Page 2760: ...es do not present on the instrument In this case a GUI only warning message 800 Operation complete Loaded filename successfully but no license required licenses installed User can install required licenses according to required licenses string to license it or multi pack license it Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Load All To ARB Memory Allows you to load all the segment files within the currently sel...

Page 2761: ... for playback of a waveform sequence or a list sequence Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Notes No remote command SCPIfront panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Default Directory Allows you to change the default directory It is used as a search location for waveform segments that are required to be loaded into ARB memory for playback of a waveform sequen...

Page 2762: ... If the ARB is ON and you load a file to ARB memory or delete a file from ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The waveform will be replayed after the ARB operation is finished Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Delete All From ARB Memory Allows you to remove all segments from ARB playback memory Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select...

Page 2763: ...ARB Memory Full File List Remote Command Only Queries the test set for the string list of waveform segments in the ARB memory It returns a string list for waveform segment names in the ARB memory Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB FCATalog Example SOUR RAD ARB FCATalog Notes The return data is in the following format integer memory used integer memory free integer file count in ARB memory string stri...

Page 2764: ... 00 Run Time Scaling Allows you to adjust the run time scaling value The run time scaling value is applied in real time while the waveform is playing Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB ARB Setup Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB RSCaling real SOURce RADio ARB RSCaling Example SOUR RAD ARB RSC 100 00 Notes This setting cannot be set in E6640A Grey out on menu and the value is fixed at 70 00 Depende...

Page 2765: ...e Allows access to the trigger type sub menus The setting for trigger type determines the behavior of the waveform when it plays Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE CONTinuous SINGle SADVance GATE SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE CONT SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE Notes Gated trigger type will be implemented at a later release Pres...

Page 2766: ... Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Trigger Type Continuous Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE CONT TRIG Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Reset Run Sets Reset and Run as the trigger response for the continuous trigger type Reset and Run sets the waveform generator to play a waveform sequence or segment continuously when the first trigger is received Subsequent triggers reset the waveform sequence or seg...

Page 2767: ... W Revision A 05 00 Buffered Trigger Selects Buffered Trigger as the trigger response for single trigger type Buffered Trigger sets the waveform generator to play a waveform sequence or segment once when a trigger is received If a trigger is received during playback the waveform generator plays the sequence or segment to the end then plays the sequence or segment once more Key Path Source Modulati...

Page 2768: ...te Command SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE SADVance TYPE SINGle CONTinuous SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger TYPE SADVance TYPE Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIG TYPE SADV SING Preset CONTinuous Range Single Continuous Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Single Selects Single as the trigger response for Segment Advance trigger type With single selected once a trigger is received a segment is played once If a trigger is rec...

Page 2769: ...d the waveform is triggered when you press the front panel Trigger key Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Trigger Source Example SOUR RAD ARB TRIGger KEY Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Bus Sets the current trigger source to Bus Selecting Bus trigger source enables triggering over GPIB LAN or USB using the SOURce RADio ARB TRIGger INITiate command Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Trigger Source...

Page 2770: ...e Pressing this key changes the central view area to display the Waveform Sequence Creation and Editing view Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Notes No remote command SCPIfront panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Current Segment Specifies the selected sequence segment that will be affected by the menu functions Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build...

Page 2771: ...arb Pressing this key changes the current view to the Waveform Management View Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Load Segment To ARB Memory Allows you to load the selected file into ARB memory On the front panel you select the file for loading to the ARB memory by highlighting the desired file in the list Using the SCPI command you specify the file n...

Page 2772: ... Studio waveform wfm which contains invalid waveform header an error is generated If the ARB is ON when you load afile to ARB memory or delete a file from ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The waveform will be replayed after the ARB operation is finished ARB can be loaded into ARB memory even required licenses do not present on th...

Page 2773: ... the new directory of interest The current directory is used for manually loading waveform segments into ARB memory for playback and as a search location for waveform segments that are required to be loaded into ARB memory for playback of a waveform sequence or a list sequence Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Notes No remote command SCPIfront panel only In...

Page 2774: ...if ARB state is On the selected waveform will not be played In this case if the selected waveform is not used in List Sequence it can be deleted and the ARB state is turned Off If the ARB is ON and you load a file to ARB memory or delete a file from ARB memory the playing waveform segment may not keep phase continuity during the ARB memory operation The waveform will be replayed after the ARB oper...

Page 2775: ...Sequences Build New Sequence Insert New Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Load All To ARB Memory This key functions the same as Load All To ARB Memory on page 2829 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Insert New Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Change Directory This key functions the same a...

Page 2776: ...ARB Memory on page 2831 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Insert New Waveform Segment in ARB Memory Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Query ARB Memory File List Remote Command Only This command functions the same as Query ARB Memory File List Remote Command Only on page 2763 Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Edit Selected Waveform Allows access to t...

Page 2777: ...ision A 05 00 Marker 2 Allows you to enable or disable marker 2 for the currently selected waveform For a waveform sequence you can enable and disable markers on a per segment basis allowing you to output markers from some waveform segments within the sequence but not for others Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Edit Selected Waveform Notes No remote comman...

Page 2778: ...ial S W Revision A 05 00 Delete Segment Allows you to delete the selected segment from the waveform sequence Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Sequences Build New Sequence Notes No remote command front panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Save Sequence Pressing this key displays the Save As dialog The sequence name is passed to the save as dialog to use as the filename for saving an...

Page 2779: ...3 M4 M1M2 M1M3 M1M4 M2M3 M2M4 M3M4 M1M2M3 M1M2M4 M1M3M4 M2M3M4 M1M2M3M4 ALL For additional description of each item see Notes below For Setup SCPI on page 2779 For Setup SCPI SOURce RADio ARB SEQuence MWAVeform filename For additional description of each item see Notes For Query SCPI on page 2780 below Example For setup SOUR RAD ARB SEQ NVWFM testSeq1 seq NVWFM wfmSegment1 wfm 10 M2M3M4 NVWFM wfmS...

Page 2780: ...VWFM or have an error in the waveform sequence file path an error is generated Notes Error Checks for Query SCPI command Continued If the specified waveform sequence file name suffix is not seq error is generated If you use an unsupported MSUS that is not NVWFM or have an error in the waveform segment file path an error is generated If the first specified waveform file cannot be found an error is ...

Page 2781: ...nitial S W Revision A 05 00 Waveform Utilities Allows you access to the waveform utilities sub menus Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Multi Pack Licenses Allows you access to the Multi Pack License sub menus Pressing this key also changes the central view area to display the Multi Pack License Management view On modular instrument like E6630A or E6640A multi pack l...

Page 2782: ...lent signal sources You can use either one of them Since adding a waveform segment to a Multi Pack license causes the license slot to enter the trial period of only 48 hours pressing this key causes a confirmation dialog to be displayed to ensure you do want to add the waveform segment to the Multi Pack If you attempt to license a waveform that is already licensed using another slot an error is ge...

Page 2783: ...a waveform file has been loaded it needs to be loaded again Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB LOAD string Example SOUR RAD ARB LOAD D VARB testwaveform bin or SOUR RAD ARB LOAD NVWFM testwaveform bin Notes Because loading the file involves a delay of unpredictable length this command should be followed by the query OPC which ...

Page 2784: ...otes string specifies the directory on the HDD to load the files into ARB memory from When in Sequence Analyzer mode and Include Source is Yes an attempt to load all files from a directory to ARB memory is rejected with an error When Include Source is No and there is insufficient free ARB memory to load all the waveforms when the ARB memory is full the copy ceases and an error is generated If you ...

Page 2785: ...Hard Disk on page 2828 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Add Waveform Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Load Segment To ARB Memory This key functions the same as Load Segment To ARB Memory on page 2828 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Add Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Loa...

Page 2786: ...e Waveform Add view Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Replace Waveform Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform REPLace int string or SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform REPLace int string Example SYST LKEY WAV REPL 1 myotherwaveform wfm or SYST LIC WAV REPL 1 myotherwaveform wfm Notes The second SCPI SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform REPLace is provided to be consistent...

Page 2787: ...ARB Memory on page 2829 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Replace Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Change Directory This key functions the same as Change Directory on page 2830 Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Replace Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to ...

Page 2788: ...ock Waveform in Slot If the selected slot is in the trial state or the lock required state the waveform that occupies the slot is locked and permanently licensed Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Waveform Utilities Multi Pack Licenses Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform LOCK int or SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform LOCK int Example SYST LKEY WAV LOCK 1 or SYST LIC WAV LOCK 1 Notes The second SCPI S...

Page 2789: ... slot number exceeds total available slot number Nonexistent is returned Range Locked Available Trail LockRequired Nonexistent Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Slots Free Query Remote Command Only Returns the number of license slots free Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform FREE or SYSTem LICense FPACk WAVeform FREE Example SYST LKEY WAV FREE or SYST LIC WAV FREE Notes The second SCPI SYSTem LICense FP...

Page 2790: ...ess than or equals 0 an error is generated Result type is string If input slot number exceeds total available slot number Nonexistent is returned If no waveform stored in the specified slot then empty string is returned Initial S W Revision A 12 00 Slot Waveform Unique ID Query Remote Command Only Returns the waveform unique ID of the specified slot Remote Command SYSTem LKEY WAVeform UID int or S...

Page 2791: ...nal Studio waveform has a unique id recorded in header So if the unique ids are same that means they are same one waveform So besides SCPI to query locked waveform name list also provide a SCPI to query locked waveform unique id list Initial S W Revision A 11 00 Marker Utilities Allows access to the marker utilities sub menus Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Marker...

Page 2792: ...RB Marker Utilities Marker Polarity Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB MPOLarity MARKer2 POSitive NEGative SOURce RADio ARB MPOLarity MARKer2 Example SOUR RAD ARB MPOL MARK2 NEG Dependencies When a new waveform is selected for playback the settings contained within the associated waveform header file are applied to the ARB The marker polarity is one of the values stored within the header file If the ...

Page 2793: ...ed within the header file If the newly selected waveform file has an associated header file the marker polarity is updated with the value from the header file The marker polarity will remain unchanged if the newly selected waveform does not have an associated header file Preset Pos Range Neg Pos Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Marker Routing Allows access to the marker routing sub menus which allow y...

Page 2794: ... RF blanking setting is updated with the value from the header file The pulse RF blanking setting will remain unchanged if the newly selected waveform does not have an associated header file Range None M1 M2 M3 M4 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 None Sets no marker to be used for the pulse RF blanking function essentially turning the RF blanking function off Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Marke...

Page 2795: ...e polarity this is when there are no maker points Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Marker Utilities Marker Routing Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB MDEStination ALCHold NONE M1 M2 M3 M4 SOURce RADio ARB MDEStination ALCHold Example SOUR RAD ARB MDES ALCH NONE Dependencies When a new waveform is selected for playback the settings contained within the associated waveform header file are applied t...

Page 2796: ...arker Utilities Marker Routing ALC Hold Example SOUR RAD ARB MDES PULS M3 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Marker 4 Sets marker 4 to be used for the ALC hold function Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Marker Utilities Marker Routing ALC Hold Example SOUR RAD ARB MDES PULS M4 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Header Utilities Allows access to the header utilities sub menu Pressing this key also causes th...

Page 2797: ...nal Studio waveform contains a unique waveform ID which recorded in the header This command allows you to query the unique waveform ID from the header This is a SCPI only command User can also checkError Reference source not found for waveform unique ID display Remote Command MMEMory HEADer ID file name Example MMEM HEAD ID test wfm query the waveform already loaded into the ARB memory MMEM HEAD I...

Page 2798: ...amplitude modulation Turning AM on when another modulation format is already on results in the previous modulation format being turned off and the generation of an error Key Path Source Modulation Setup AM Remote Command SOURce AM STATe SOURce AM STATe Example SOUR AM STAT OFF Preset Off Range On Off Initial S W Revision A 05 00 AM Depth Allows you to set the amplitude modulation depth in percent ...

Page 2799: ...ion Key Path Source Modulation Setup Initial S W Revision A 05 00 FM Enables or disables the frequency modulation Turning FM on when another modulation format is already on results in the previous modulation format being turned off and the generation of an error Key Path Source Modulation Setup FM Remote Command SOURce FM STATe SOURce FM STATe Example SOUR FM STAT OFF Preset Off Range On Off Initi...

Page 2800: ...SOUR FM INT FREQ 40 0 Hz Preset 400 0 Hz Min 10 Hz Max 40 kHz Initial S W Revision A 05 00 PM Allows access to the menu for configuring the phase modulation Key Path Source Modulation Setup Initial S W Revision A 05 00 PM Enables or disables the phase modulation Turning PM on when another modulation format is already on results in the previous modulation format being turned off and the generation ...

Page 2801: ... 10 Hz Max 40 kHz Initial S W Revision A 05 00 List Sequencer Allows you access to the sub menus for configuring the list sequencer List sequences allows you to enter frequencies and amplitudes at unequal intervals in nonlinear ascending descending or random order Each step within the list can also include its own waveform file for playback step duration trigger event and trigger output The comple...

Page 2802: ...e output of the source Couplings When in Sequence Analyzer mode and the list sequencer state is Off Include Source is forced to No and the Include Source key is grayed out When in Sequence Analyzer mode and the list sequencer state is On Include Source is available to set And an ARB memory related operation like load or delete will be rejected Preset Off Range On Off Initial S W Revision A 05 00 I...

Page 2803: ...ist Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST NUMBer STEPs integer SOURce LIST NUMBer STEPs Example SOUR LIST NUMB STEP 1 Notes Increasing the number of steps creates additional steps at the end of the list with all the settings within the steps set to their default values Decreasing the number of steps removes steps from the end of the list The settings within the removed steps ar...

Page 2804: ...ion A 05 00 Delete Step Allows you to delete the current step Deleting a step will automatically decrease the Step Count parameter by 1 If sequence only has one step left delete step will be rejected and popup error 221 Setting conflict Cannot delete current step minimum number of steps reached Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Notes No remote command Front Panel key only If the ...

Page 2805: ...sion A 05 00 Internal Sets the trigger input for the current step to Internal Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Step Trigger Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET INP TRIG INT Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Manual Trigger Key Sets the trigger input for the current step to Manual Trigger Key Any step in the sequence set to Manual will cause the sequence e...

Page 2806: ... 40 Notes Note When on E6640A trigger 2 is a bi directional trigger port So when trigger 2 has been configured as OUTPUT type choosing External 2 as the input trigger for the current step will generate error Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Transition Time Allows you to specify the transition time for the current step The transition time is the amount of time allowed for the source to settle at the cu...

Page 2807: ...vision A 05 00 Radio Setup Allows you access to the sub menus for setting up the radio standard band and radio band link direction for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Notes No remote command front panel only Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Radio Standard Allows access to the sub menus for selecting the radio standard and the associated radio band for use in the cu...

Page 2808: ...ion A 05 00 GSM EDGE Pressing this key once selects GSM EDGE as the radio standard and the current GSM EDGE band as the active channel band Pressing this key again allows access to the sub menus for selecting a different GSM EDGE band Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 05 00 P GSM Selects P GSM as the band for the current step Key ...

Page 2809: ...uencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM 450 Selects GSM 450 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard GSM EDGE Initial S W Revision A 05 00 GSM 480 Selects GSM 480 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standa...

Page 2810: ...ws access to the sub menus for selecting a different WCDMA band Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band I Selects Band I as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band II Selects Band II as the band for the current step Ke...

Page 2811: ...encer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band VII Selects Band VII as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band VIII Selects Band VIII as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standar...

Page 2812: ...encer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIII Selects Band XIII as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard WCDMA Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Band XIV Selects Band XIV as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standar...

Page 2813: ...dio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 US PCS Selects US PCS as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Japan Cell Selects Japan Cell as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO In...

Page 2814: ...W Revision A 05 00 Secondary 800 Selects Secondary 800 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 400 Euro PAMR Selects 400 Euro PAMR as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A...

Page 2815: ...rd CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 US 2 5GHz Selects US 2 5 GHz as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 2000 1xEVDO Initial S W Revision A 05 00 700 Public Safety Selects 700 Public Safety as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard CDMA 200...

Page 2816: ... 50 BAND 2 Selects BAND 2 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 3 Selects BAND 3 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 4 Selects BAND 4 as the band for the current step Key Pat...

Page 2817: ...Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 9 Selects BAND 9 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 10 Selects BAND 10 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE In...

Page 2818: ...t Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 17 Selects BAND 17 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 18 Selects BAND 18 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LT...

Page 2819: ...t Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 25 Selects BAND 25 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE Initial S W Revision A 09 50 BAND 26 Selects BAND 26 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Radio Standard LT...

Page 2820: ...for use and accesses the LTE TDD specific channel band sub menus Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 33 Selects BAND 33 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND33 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 34 Selects BAND 34 as the band for the current step Key Path Sourc...

Page 2821: ...p Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND37 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 38 Selects BAND 38 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND38 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 39 Selects BAND 39 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Se...

Page 2822: ...quency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND42 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 43 Selects BAND 43 as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard LTE TDD Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BAND43 Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND 44 Selects BAND 44 as the band for the current step Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Rad...

Page 2823: ...dard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDB Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND C Selects BAND C as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND BANDC Initial S W Revision A 11 50 BAND D Selects BAND D as the band for the current step Key Path Source Frequency Radio Setup Radio Standard TDSCDMA Example SOUR FREQ CHAN BAND B...

Page 2824: ... calculate the downlink frequency according to a downlink formula together with selected channel band and channel number Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Radio Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup RADio BAND LINK DOWN UP SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup RADio BAND LINK Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET RAD BAND LINK UP SOUR LIST STEP2 SET RAD BAND LINK Notes SCPI is...

Page 2825: ...ath Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup CNFRequency double SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup CNFRequency Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET CNFR 1GHz SOUR LIST STEP2 SET CNFR Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 This SCPI is used to setup channel number or frequency setting according to current Radio Band setting If Radio Band is NONE then it s fre...

Page 2826: ...s power setting lower than 130dBm on MPA GPS ports then popup warning message These are only warning messages and check is performed when RF is ON Notes The Min and Max value here defined UI settable amplitude range This range is larger than actual amplitude range with level accuracy defined in spec Dependencies The RF power is dependent on the RF output port and frequency such that the current fr...

Page 2827: ... Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 If the selected waveform contains header which contains ARB play parameters source list sequence will automatically apply header settings of the selected waveform in that step Initial S W Revision A 05 00 Continue Previous Sets the current step to continue with playback of the waveform from the previous step When continuing the previous waveform the ARB playb...

Page 2828: ...r NVWFM MSUS or specifying a full path For more information see Memory Subsystem Remote Command Only If a file of the same name already exists within ARB memory it is overwritten If you wish to load two segments of the same name you must rename one of the segments before loading it into ARB memory To rename a segment you can either use Windows File Explorer or the MMEMory COPY command NOTE When a ...

Page 2829: ...the same name already exists within ARB memory it is overwritten If you wish to load two segments of the same name you must rename one of the segments before loading it into ARB memory To rename a segment you can either use Windows File Explorer or the MEMory COPY command NOTE When a waveform file is loaded to ARB memory burst timing adjustments are made automatically based on whether or not a Mul...

Page 2830: ...h location for selecting waveforms using SCPI Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments on Hard Disk Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB DEFault DIRectory string SOURce RADio ARB DEFault DIRectory Example SOUR RAD ARB DEF DIR D ArbFiles SOUR RAD ARB DEF DIR State Saved Persistent survives a power cycle and a preset but not saved in the instrument state Initial S W Revision A 05 00 ...

Page 2831: ... you to remove all segments from ARB playback memory Key Path Source Modulation Setup ARB Select Waveform Segments in ARB Memory Remote Command SOURce RADio ARB DELete ALL Example SOUR RAD ARB DELete ALL Notes When in Sequence Analyzer mode and Include Source is Yes an attempt to delete all files from ARB memory is rejected with an error When Include Source is No and you attempt to delete all file...

Page 2832: ...er Setup Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Default Directory This key functions the same as Default Directory on page 2830 Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Waveform Segment on Hard Drive Initial S W Revision Prior to A 09 00 Segments in ARB Memory This key functions the same as Segments in ARB Memory on page 2830 Key Path Source List Sequencer ...

Page 2833: ...SET DUR TYPE TIME SOUR LIST STEP2 SET DUR TYPE Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 Notes If Step Duration is set to Time or Play Count for the last step the last step of ARB keeps playing as if set to Continuous until the set Time has expired or until the Play Count setting is reached However you can query Error Reference source not found Source Sweeping Condition Message to find out if the curr...

Page 2834: ...nd Continuous Abort according to current Duration Type setting is Play Count or Duraton Time or Continuous Abort If current Duration Type is Continuous then popup error 221 Settings conflict Cannot accept time or count input when step duration type is Continuous on step Notes If Duration Time is set for the last step the last step of ARB keeps playing as if set to Continuous after set time expires...

Page 2835: ... occur on both Internal and External2 paths Select Off will turn off trigger output Key Path Source List Sequencer List Sequencer Setup Remote Command SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup OUTPut TRIGger ON OFF 1 0 SOURce LIST STEP 1 2 3 1000 SETup OUTPut TRIGger Example SOUR LIST STEP2 SET OUTP TRIG ON SOUR LIST STEP2 SET OUTP TRIG Notes SCPI is supported after A 09 40 Preset Off Range On Off Initial...

Page 2836: ...824 5 Frequency Channel Number freq chan num specifies the frequency in Hz or the channel number for the step The channel number and frequency are combined as one parameter that represents the frequency or channel number depending on the radio band setting If the radio band is set to NONE this value is interpreted as a frequency value in Hz If the radio band is set to a valid band this value is in...

Page 2837: ...LIST SETup INPut TRIGger enum enum enum SOURce LIST SETup INPut TRIGger Example SOUR LIST SET INP TRIG IMM INT EXT2 SOUR LIST SET INP TRIG Notes The command is to setup below parameter array of whole list sequence Step Trigger enum specifies the input trigger for the step For details of the valid types of step trigger see Step Trigger on page 2804 If input parameter number exceeds the step number ...

Page 2838: ...Number of Steps As a step is setup the value entered run through several levels of validation R e m o t e C o m m a n d SOURce LIST SETup RADio BAND enum enum enum SOURce LIST SETup RADio BAND E x a m p l e SOUR LIST SET RAD BAND PGSM EGSM RGSM SOUR LIST SET RAD BAND N o t e s The command is to setup below parameter array of whole list sequence Radio Band enum specifies the radio band for the step...

Page 2839: ...AND37 BAND38 BAND39 BAND40 BAN D41 BAND42 BAND43 BANDA BANDB BANDC BANDD BANDE BANDF D e p e n d e n c i e s The range is 1 to 1000 which is determined by the number of steps you have configured For details see Number of Steps on page 2803 I n i t i a l S W R e v i s i o n A 09 40 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2839 ...

Page 2840: ...or Channel Number parameter array of the whole List Sequencer at one time The number of array is same as step number defined in Number of Steps on page 2803 Number of Steps As a step is setup the value entered run through several levels of validation Remote Command SOURce LIST SETup CNFRequency double double double SOURce LIST SETup CNFRequency Example SOUR LIST SET CNFR 1GHz 100MHz 100MHz SOUR LI...

Page 2841: ... will be updated Dependencies The range is 1 to 1000 which is determined by the number of steps you have configured For details see Number of Steps on page 2803 Initial S W Revision A 09 40 Step Configuration of Waveform parameter list Remote Command Only This SCPI command is to configure Waveform parameter array of the whole List Sequencer at one time The number of array is same as step number de...

Page 2842: ...uration enum specifies the duration of the step The duration can be specified to be either time or play count of the ARB file associated with the step or continuous If Waveform is set to CW this value cannot be set to Play Count and an error will be generated If continuous is selected the following Time or Count value is ignored For further details of this setting see Step Duration on page 2833 If...

Page 2843: ...ter list Remote Command Only This SCPI command is to configure Output Trigger parameter array of the whole List Sequencer at one time The number of array is same as step number defined in Number of Steps on page 2803 Number of Steps As a step is setup the value entered run through several levels of validation Remote Command SOURce LIST SETup OUTPut TRIGger bool bool bool SOURce LIST SETup OUTPut T...

Page 2844: ...p DATamarker Initial S W Revision A 14 00 BeginningOfStep Sets the output trigger type as BeginningOfStep for the whole source sequence Key Path Source List Sequencer Trigger Type Example SOUR LIST TRIG TYP BEG Notes SCPI is supported after A 14 00 Initial S W Revision A 14 00 DataMarker Sets the output trigger type as DataMarker for the whole source sequence When DataMarker is selected which mark...

Page 2845: ...xample SOUR LIST TRIG TYPE MARK M3 Notes SCPI is supported after A 14 00 Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Marker 4 Sets the output trigger maker routing to Marker 4 for DataMarker in the whole source sequence Key Path Source List Sequencer Trigger Type DataMarker Example SOUR LIST TRIG TYPE MARK M4 Notes SCPI is supported after A 14 00 Initial S W Revision A 14 00 Manual Trigger Now Pressing this key ...

Page 2846: ...been initiated successfully returning 0 if not Once get 0 you can use SYST ERR to query what error happened Just like OPC this command can be blocked until event status IsSourceSweeping happens and then returns Doing so can help user s script query armed status only once during the time interval of the initiation As an ancillary SCPI of existing SCPI SOUR LIST TRIGger IMMediate see Initiate Sequen...

Page 2847: ...nables you to enter a time value to change the horizontal scale Key Path SPAN X Scale Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay PCONtrol VIEW 1 2 WINDow 1 TRACe X SCALe PDIVision time DISPlay PCONtrol VIEW 1 2 WINDow 1 TRACe X SCALe PDIVision Example DISP PCON VIEW WIND TRAC X PDIV 4 0e 3 DISP PCON VIEW WIND TRAC X PDIV Notes You must be in the W CDMA mode to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set ...

Page 2848: ... Remote Command DISPlay PCONtrol VIEW 1 2 WINDow 1 TRACe X SCALe COUPle 0 1 OFF ON DISPlay PCONtrol VIEW 1 2 WINDow 1 TRACe X SCALe COUPle Example DISP PCON VIEW WIND TRAC X COUP ON DISP PCON VIEW WIND TRAC X COUP Notes You must be in the W CDMA mode to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Couplings Upon pressing the Restart front panel key the scale coupling function automatical...

Page 2849: ...15 Power Control Measurement System System See System on page 264 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference 2849 ...

Page 2850: ...Delay See Trig Delay on page 336 External 1 See External 1 on page 1588 Trigger Level See Trigger Level on page 1589 Trig Slope See Trig Slope on page 1589 Trig Delay See Trig Delay on page 339 Zero Span Delay Comp See Zero Span Delay Comp On Off on page 1577 External 2 See External 2 on page 1590 Trigger Level See Trigger Level on page 1590 Trig Slope See Trig Slope on page 1591 2850 W CDMA HSPA ...

Page 2851: ... on page 1582 Trig Slope See Trigger Slope on page 1593 Trig Delay See Trig Delay on page 346 Periodic Timer See Periodic Timer Frame Trigger on page 1583 Period See Period on page 1585 Offset See Offset on page 1585 Offset Adjust Remote Command Only See Offset Adjust Remote Command Only on page 1586 Reset Offset Display See Reset Offset Display on page 1587 Sync Source See Sync Source on page 158...

Page 2852: ...l on page 1590 Trig Slope See Trig Slope on page 1591 RF Burst See RF Burst on page 1591 Absolute Trigger See Absolute Trigger Level on page 1592 Trig Slope See Trigger Slope on page 1593 Trig Delay See Trig Delay on page 357 Auto Holdoff See Auto Holdoff on page 1594 Auto Trig See Auto Trig on page 1594 Trig Holdoff See Trig Holdoff on page 1595 Holdoff Type See ___ on page X 2852 W CDMA HSPA Mea...

Page 2853: ...h as it can in legacy analyzers If you want to recall all modes to their user preset file state you will need to do a User Preset after mode switching into each mode User Preset recalls mode state which can now include data like traces whereas on ESA and PSA User Preset did not affect data Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 User Preset User Preset sets the state of the currently active mode bac...

Page 2854: ...all of the User Preset files for each mode switches to the power on mode and activates the saved measurement from the power on mode User Preset file When the instrument is secured all of the user preset files are converted back to their default user preset files The User Preset function does the following Aborts the currently running measurement Switches the Mode to the power on mode Restores the ...

Page 2855: ...mode and its State You can recall this User Preset file by pressing the User Preset menu key or sending the SYST PRES USER remote command This same state is also saved by the Save State function Key Path User Preset Remote Command SYSTem PRESet USER SAVE Example SYST PRES USER SAVE Notes SYST PRES SAVE creates the same file as if the user requested a SAV or a MMEM STOR STAT except User Preset Save...

Page 2856: ... by Name Selects either Power Graph Metrics or Phase Graph Metrics as the results view Key Path Front panel key Mode WCDMA Remote Command DISPlay PCONtrol VIEW SELect POWer PHASe DISPlay PCONtrol VIEW SELect Example DISP PCON VIEW POW DISP PCON VIEW Notes You must be in the W CDMA mode to use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Dependencies Phase Graph Metrics is grayed out when Mea...

Page 2857: ...ories 1 Meas Bar This is the measurement bar at the top of the screen It does not include the settings panel or the Active Function Turning off the Meas Bar turns off the settings panel and the Active Function When the Meas Bar is off the graticule area expands to fill the area formerly occupied by the Meas Bar 2 Screen Annotation this is the annotation and annunciation around the graticule includ...

Page 2858: ...rement Bar Key Path View Display Display Annotation Remote Command DISPlay ANNotation MBAR STATe OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay ANNotation MBAR STATe Example DISP ANN MBAR OFF Dependencies Grayed out and forced to OFF when System Display Settings Annotation is set to Off Preset On This should remain Off through a Preset when System DisplaySettings Annotation is set to Off State Saved Saved in instrument state...

Page 2859: ...ANNotation SCReen STATe OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay ANNotation SCReen STATe Example DISP ANN SCR OFF Dependencies Grayed out and forced to OFF when System Display Settings Annotation is set to Off Preset On This should remain Off through a Preset when System DisplaySettings Annotation is set to Off State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Active Function Values On Off Tur...

Page 2860: ...Preset On This should remain Off through a Preset when System DisplaySettings Annotation is set to Off State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Title Displays menu keys that enable you to change or clear a title on your display Key Path View Display Display Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Change Title Writes a title into the measurement name field in the ba...

Page 2861: ...DATA This Is My Title This example is for Measurements other than Swept SA Both set the title to This Is My Title Notes Pressing this key cancels any active function When a title is edited the previous title remains intact it is not cleared and the cursor goes at the end so that characters can be added or BKSP can be used to go back over previous characters Preset No title measurement name instead...

Page 2862: ...of the meas local annotation settings When it is All Off it forces ScreenAnnotation Meas Bar Trace and Active Function Values settings to be OFF for all measurements in all modes This provides the security based annotation off function of previous analyzers hence it uses the legacy SCPI command When it is All Off the Screen Meas Bar Trace and Active Function Values keys under the Display Annotatio...

Page 2863: ...ty Notes In ESA and PSA we offer the choice of Reverse Bitmap or Reverse Metafile when saving screen images This is much like the Flat Color theme available in X Series Also if you selected Reverse Bitmap AND a black white screen image that would be much like Flat Monochrome In other words each of the X Series themes has a similar screen image type in ESA PSA But they are not identical Initial S W...

Page 2864: ... on page 2856 The content of this view depends on the selected measurement type which can be set via Meas Type on page 2667 Slot Power Measurement on page 2864 PRACH Power Measurement on page 2865 Slot Phase Measurement on page 2866 Slot Power Measurement There are two windows RF Envelope window on page 2864 upper and Metrics window on page 2865 lower In the RF Envelope window the yellow trace sho...

Page 2865: ...sponding information is returned via SCPI In case 2 the first slot number is always returned via SCPI n 1 4th element nnn Result n 3 Averaged absolute power level of each slot which is also displayed as a light blue trace in RF Envelope window nn nn dBm Delta Adj Pwr n 5 Relative power level to the previous slot nn nn dB Rel Pwr n 6 Relative power level to the first slot nn nn dB PRACH Power Measu...

Page 2866: ...ndows the RF Envelope window upper and the Metrics window lower The windows content is the same as that returned by the Slot Power Measurement in the Chip Power Method Key Path View Display Mode WCDMA Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Phase Graph Metrics For the Remote Command see View Display on page 2856 This view is available only when the measurement type is set to Slot Phase SPHase See Me...

Page 2867: ...ine excluding 25us at the beginning and the end of the slot nn nn RMS Magnitude Error n 12 RMS magnitude Error of the slot It is an element of RMS EVM of the slot nnn nn degrees RMS Phase Error n 13 RMS Phase Error of the slot It is an element of RMS EVM of the slot nnn nn degrees IQ Origin Offset n 14 IQ Origin offset of the slot It is an element of RMS EVM of the slot nnn nn dB Frequency Error n...

Page 2868: ... use this command Use INSTrument SELect to set the mode Dependencies The Slot Number menu key is active when Meas Type is Slot Phase Otherwise the menu key is grayed out Preset REL State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Rel Abs Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Chip Phase Trace Toggles the chip by chip phase trace yellow trace On and Off Key Path View Display Display Mode WCDMA Remote Com...

Page 2869: ... line up from the current line of the measurement results each time the key is pressed Key Path View Display Display Scroll Mode WCDMA Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 Scroll Down Moves one line down from the current line of the measurement results each time the key is pressed Key Path View Display Display Scroll Mode WCDMA Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 First Page Moves from the curre...

Page 2870: ...iew Display Last Page Moves from the current page to the last page of the measurement results Key Path View Display Display Scroll Mode WCDMA Initial S W Revision Prior to A 02 00 2870 W CDMA HSPA Measurement Applications Reference ...

Reviews:

No comments

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands